Full text of "The Annals and magazine of natural history; zoology, botany, and geology"

See other formats

4am
RelaSthintt t- ia tinh hicte.
eo Mit A td

aloes

‘ Nag Bae we

«mate aa ach 5

PSA, city tn Piewinereaa et os Aether naib BGA
Pin da, Pace ne >
oe ee

or 3
eee ee
Tia A rte ‘

SSRN dog WAG

-LSNI_ NWINOSHLIWS saiuvugly LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN

NVINOS
ye

e
20ND
SMITHS‘

NVINOS|I
ase
WAS
SMITHS(
<NsUT
=
Ns WASP
NVINOS}

=> Ww == Ww ey

é : é "ty, 3

7 w eat w yi

d ON < = & Gf 2

BONEN a ee eo ae

2) SS as ro) = oO Noses

= =) =z | =
RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1yNY

iS Sf = x =

~ , Y = is (@) HS¥.

3 cd = o UNS > 4a >

ie aed 2) > 4 iw . =

ae: Pe) = 0 =

o a on = S

a 2 Z 4 Nz |
HISNI_NVINOSHLINS S3A1YVUIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT

z = aS \ Ss < &

z 4 Pim Ss =| +}
Uf 3 z GE Qe FZ EG
i =a One cE NN oO ce
y * 2 ES 2 : }

= > , = SON x Ss ‘

v) ma Ww 20 ee HO &
RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI Saluvue

w = ” =| ”

om ' aW ut ioe) eae

LvZ LY, = <x =i <

a Gy a om Si ee

* z 2 2 ss
ILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN

Se 5 i = Y a

ow \ = ow = w

> Ne 5 : : 2

5 ye CE = = ee

= QWwree a =e =

ae f a i
RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS, Sa1uVvYd

= a 4 = ee = yy

4 rs = Vly ene = = YE
N 3 : i OP 3 ww;
\ fe) Ee fe) Ef he as fe) I /
WE = aN IW ase ls 2
vs = = = >" |
; 2 a oe: 2 a 2 |
ILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTIC

Zz =f Zz ie Zz |

7) o w uJ =

7a s =: Pm Gy, 4

oz an - a = os Wy 4

Gc . sar

SN Se = EMA AAS

Oo ae sa eo) aa Oo

i on 2 = 2 |
RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS saiuvud

aa a z= te Pun Zz |
Nia o me") ERR) ° <a Sy w CK N ° ieee >
MA 5 of fy > (AMD = Game SS EF Kamp

%
”

NVINOSH
$O,
So NV
z
eS
tL
On DC
SMITHSO
ee
Mi Ki
ty
NVINOSH

SMITHSO

Kae

2 .

is wasn’

NVINOSH
*

“NVINOSHIINS S3IUVUGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INST
Vy.

Z : 4 = O°

=. WY. < si Dy he a]

(= SS ay . fod to foal GM; S

S RS \S oo a i ad ali a

= Ss = mM. _

o) BS = e) aes re)

= a) 2 = Pd
3RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31

= 7 Zz - x

° — iS) a Oo

5 a a 3) =

E 3 = z al -

ra e rt z i

> eagle zZ 4 po
ILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS (Sa 1yvug Houl BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INS

Re z
& es As = ae
: 3 ' & Ss = z S
y as , ” NS ‘. wo io N
i eye <= \ 1e) pa N

Vif < ei. ~ Z =

GG > = : > =

: ee Ww) m Zz u”)

BRARIES

SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS $31

NOILNLILSNI

LIBRARIES

ILNLILSNI

NVINOSHLINS S3SI1uYVudiIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INS

S3IYVUGIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI

S3JINVYUGIT- LIBRARIES

INSTITUTION
S3IYVUSIT

INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS Sal

z wn ”

= < = I 4 =

2 g 2 £% z
ch 3 & Yb By
= = SG fe aie

Y > = . =). >

* 2 ” + ee — z
ILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3!1YVYSIT LIBRARIES INS

SMITHSONIAN

Yagi LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN

2 e 2 z
n cs Yy,
= 4 Y jin, *
= % Vp =
a heck 4 Yj, Vie 4
S cx © his =
aa m =, , ru x
fe) ‘ ve fe) je)
2 ef 2 =
BRARIES SMITHSCNIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S24)
= i z ei es
ENON La 12) “Oo See Oo Coa) AS “ 2) ,
ie, ray Peale (“Ey — Kar, WS OE 4

ul i Mery sis : i / rai)

(2 i) Wikis CY | ABU here OP bog) Sree

bey | :

i. Ja

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

INCLUDING

ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY.

(BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ANNALS’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND
CHARLESWORTH’S ‘ MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.’ )

CONDUCTED BY

ALBERT C. L. G. GUNTHER, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.B.S.,
WILLIAM §S. DALLAS, F.LS.,
WILLIAM CARRUTHERS, F.R.S., P.L.S., F.G.S.,

AND

WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.L.S.

OO eee

VOL. L.—SIXTH SERIES.

Oooo

\sonian Inst; ~S

beg

> Om \\
( a4a\o5 —}}

Ay,
Nationa

LONDON:
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS.

SOLD BY LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO.; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO.;
KENT AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.: BAILLIERE, PARIS:
MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH :

HODGES, FOSTER, AND CO., DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN.

1888.

“Omnes res creatze sunt divine sapientiz et potenti testes, divitiz felicitatis
humane :—ex harum usu donitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapientia Domini;
ex cconomia in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis
elucet. Harum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper sstimata ;
a veré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper
inimica fuit.”—Linavs.

“Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour
voir qu’elle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rappor-
tent toutes ses opérations.”—Bruckner, Théorie du Systeme Animal, Leyden,
1767.

Seeks gilmore see arlhersyhvanupoywers
Obey our summons; from their deepest dells
The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild
And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs
That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme
And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed,
But scatter round ten thousand forms minute
Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock
Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too
Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face
They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush
That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles,
Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread,
The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne,
All, all to us unlock their secret stores
And pay their cheerful tribute.

J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818,

ALERE FLAMMAM.

CONTENTS OF VOL, I.

[SIXTH SERIES. ]

NUMBER I.

I. On the Structure and Affinities of the Genus Parkeria, Carp.
By H. Attryne Nicuorson, M.D., D.Sc., Regius Professor of
Natural History in the University of Aberdeen. (Plate III.) ;

II. Notes on some Australian Polyzoa. By T. WHITELEGGE

III. Description of two new Chameleons from Nossi Bé, Mada-
gascarg day G. A. bOULENGER. «(Plate dls) aui cts erate eee aus

IV, Ona rare American Newt, Molge meridionalis, Cope. By G.
Ji\o J EICUAETONS (C17), Rae etn, Se eneemtn he hepa een sat ey ner RE

V. On the Affinity of the North-American Lizard-Fauna. By
AES TES AGN TLE, EWES RUN wre 5 cp ePo eeu ayer afaes etait 8) Vasa aye eralelt OR Ia

VI. Contributions to the Knowledge of the Reproduction of Eu-
glypha alveolata, Duj. By Dr. F. BhocumMann (Plate IV.) ......

VII. Notes on the Determination of the Fossil Teeth of Mylio-
batis, with a Revision of the English Eocene Species. By A. Smita
WoopwarbD, F.G.S., F.Z.8., of the British Museum (Natural His-
CORY ae Ch MLS Tea thee, alates aieials weheieistae wisi esanel sl Hae Lao R tae

VIII. On three extremely interesting new Moths of the Family
Chaleoside from Kilima-njaro and Natal. By A. G. Bur.er,
PMNS Ee ino Wolo Mare nner Bae Caren k «ike ta se st ae ee te ens Bare

New Books :—Contributions a étude des Bopyriens. Par ALFRED
Giarp et JULES Bonnier.—F reshwater Sponges: a Monograph.
By Epwarp Ports. Including ‘ Diagnosis of the European
Spongillide. By Prof. Franz Vespovsky (Prague). — A
Manual of Zoology for the Use of Students, with a General Intro-
duction on the Principles of Zoology. By Henry ALLEYNE
Nicnoison, M.D. &c.—Living Lights: a Popular Account of

Page

wb.

Phosphorescent Animals and Vegetables. By C. F. Horper 51—57

Proceedine's of the Geological Society 2.2.20. .5.600ee vec e eee

lv CONTENTS.

Note on the Genus Lophopus, by T. Whitelegge ; On the Existence
of a Fish belonging to the Genus Nevpercis in the Atlantic,
by M. Léon Vaillant; On the Pelagic Fauna of some Lakes in
Auvergne, by M. J. Richard; The Fauna of the Podophthal-
mous Crustacea of the Bay of Marseilles, by M. Paul Gourret ;
On the supposed Peripheral Processes of the Clone, by M. E.
Topsent; On the Formation of Vegetable Mould by the Action

Page

obcertain Animals, by Dr. Cy Weller oa)... tee ee 62—68

NUMBER II.

IX. On some new Species of the Genus Spongodes, Less., from the
Philippine Islands and the Japanese Seas. By Dr. Tu. SrupER,
ORO oer: ave hieiotea staan Se evan See Ste ee oe ES in om eyy ante

X. Polyzoa of Mauritius. By R. Kirxparrick, Assistant in the
British Museum (Nattiral History). (Plates VIL-X.)............

XI. Note on the Extinct Reptilian Genera Megalania, Owen, and
Meiolania, Owen. By A. SmirH Woopwarp, F.G.S., F.Z.S., of
the British Museum) (Nattiral History), ::3 .4.-5s<asecau seca ed

XII. New Species of Butterflies collected by Mr. C. M. Woodford
in the Solomon Islands. By F. D. Gopman and O. Satvin, FF.RS.

Xo Descriptions of new Reptiles and Batrachians from Mada-
gascar, By G. A; Boutmencer, (Plates Vi&iVie)inins a oe

XIV. On the Affinity of the North-American Lizard-Fauna. By
GPAs OULENGIE or. steale (ateeese v- py ars ators «ale oe eee hoe wR eT

XV. On some Points in the Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. By
Prof. P. Martin Duncan, M.B. (Lond.), F.R.S., &c. (Plate XI.)

XVI. An Account of three Series of Lepidoptera collected in
North-west India by Major Yerbury. By Artutr G. Burier,
URS BP OSA yd (Ag RS RPE er ea eee ert ae

XVII. On the Bib (Gadus luscus) and Poor-Cod (G. minutus).
By DRANCISIDAY, WC UsBi, IH, S muerk: oon ae, prtia cect ee a nee

XVIII. Diagnoses of six new Mammals from the Solomon Islands.
iB OUD RIED CHOMAS Os, ch ie, pained een ve on eee an a ee

XIX. Diagnoses of four new Species of Didelphys. By OLDFrmELD
THOMAS ...... ste Aersrsaliars esaataye ate te oe Munisis vay oe oh eyehe te exes ehe acral SACote

Note on Lophopus Lendenfeldi, by Stuart O. Ridley; On Glyphas-
trea sexradiata, Lonsdale, sp., by P. Martin Duncan, M.B.
(Lond.), F.R.S., &c.; On the first Changes in the Fecundated
Ovum of Lepas, by Prof. M. Nussbaum; On the Infection of a
Frog-tadpole by Saprolegnia ferax, by Prof. J. B. Schnetzler ;
On the Significance of Sexual Reproduction, by Dr. B. Hat-
schek; Notice of two new Branchiopod Crustacea from the

101

107

109

132

15]

Trans-Caspian Region, by Dr, Alfred Walter .......... 159—164

CONTENTS. Vv

NUMBER III.

XX. On a Collection of Reptiles from China. By Dr. A. Gin-
Fi FAG NGM ee (Chelate ENN.) Seren ayaye e's oie a cvameapetarieids «sl aele die vmen LOD

XXI. On two new Genera allied to Loftusia, from the Karakoram
Pass and the Cambridge Greensand respectively. By H. J. Carrer,
Be eee OU Cre a Cs ADE EAGLE Veg etessrsty cl anny s aensxomishaneh onc isisisirehn sce eais i 2

XXII. Description of a new Earth-Snake of the Genus Svdybura
from the Bombay Presidency, with Remarks on other little-known

Croppindias “By GEORGE Ee MASON. 3. i. os te velkds cans ans 184
XXII. Descriptions of new Brazilian Batrachians. By G. A.
IES QRUNARENGG USER Ramee cE OW Oy Phe chit ROA ac Ua ayo eb casa eeetite teas ts Place 187

XXIV, Descriptions of a new Genus and of some new Species of
Longicorn Coleoptera of the Family Lamitde obtained by Mr. C. M.
Woodford in the Solomon Islands. By Cuarurs J. Ganan, M.A,
Assistant in the Zoological Department of the British Museum .... 199

XXV. On some Species of Cetoniide from the Loo Choo Islands.
By OL IMME SANSOM, CHAS. arsyaret cron gy.) eho) Sinioxe lone «6 pie oy 5 ex hs 0's 194

XXVI. An Account of three Series of Lepidoptera collected in
North-west India by Major Yerbury. By Arruur G. Burier,
Paes me Las POCO ch He ye aCe wh usin earereces cceee tHA or Rc Dt mA Dre oi 196

XXV i: ee Species of Butterflies collected by My. C. M. Wood-

ford in the Solomon Islands. By F. D. Gopman and O. Savin,
BEBE ies vapir’s A onteta ale. vial Rie sc ame hee is Mere NORE end wae 209

XXVIII. The Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence: a Study of Arctic
Forms. By the Rev. THomas Hincks, B.A., F.R.S. (Plates XIV.
cg NON ig) ete rereae Pn ersr ater ect Me nye ere suc some OIeY ialincy cleie ciiage Sek mts are 214

New Books :—South- eon Butterflies : a Monograph of the Iextra-
tropical Species. By Rotanp TRIMEN, F.R.S., F.LS., F.Z.S.,

F.1.S., &c. = Barmera Museum Moncbarcesing forsleSbu 2 228
Proceedings of the Geoloprcal Society: 0% c.6 voc ee ews ce ess ob ss ats 230

Bot-larve in the Terrapin, by Prof. Leidy; A new Member of the
Deep-water Fauna of the Freshwater Basins, by Dr. O. E. Im-
hof; On Psorospermium Heckel, by Dr. Otto Zacharias ; Two
new Genera of Epicarides (Prebopyrus and Palegyge), by MM.
AriGrardsands Ji bOnmien. Wings. vir uliis oes ao oe 231—254

NUMBER IV.

XXIX. On the Structure of Fistulipor a wmerustans, Phill. (F.
mniore NCO OY). ay. JOHN: YOUNG, EGS, avccees cs crn. oie reeos DU

XXX. Are there Deep-sea Medusee? By J. WaLTER Fewkes.. 247

XXXI. New Species of Lucanide, Cetoniide, and Buprestide in
the British Museum. By CHarirs O. WATERHOUSE............ 260

vi CONTENTS.

Page
XXXII. On the Nature of the Opaque Scarlet Spherules found in
the Chambers ard Canals of many Fossilized Foraminifera. By H. _
De CATER EELS ss OCGS, , +, G-ctatoemenrcneee eect ate etsic nPamene jeg calle saa OTC 264

XXXIIT. On Longicorn Coleoptera of the Family Lamide. By
Cuartes J. Gann, M.A., Assistant in the Zoological Department

of the British Museum. (Plate XVI. figs. 1-5.) ............0005 270
XXXIV. Note on an Abnormal Specimen of the Dentition of
Rhinoptera. By A. Smita Woopwarb, F.GS., F.Z.8........... 281
XXXV. On the Genus Theatops. By BR. I. Pocock, Assistant,
Natural-History Museum. (Plate XVI. figs. 6-10.)....... we oeee 283
XXXVI. Descriptions of new Species of Oriental Homoptera
belonging to the Family Cicadide. By W. L. DisTant.......... 291

XXXVII. Shell-growth in Cephalopoda (Siphonopoda). By F.
A, Baruer, B.A., F.G.S., of the British Museum (Natural History) 298

New Books :—A Catalogue of the Moths of India. Compiled by E.
C. Corrs and Colonel C. Swrysor. Part I. Sphinges; Part
II. Bombyces.—Catalogue des Crustacés Malacostracés recueillis
dans la Baie de Concarneau. Par JULES BonniER ...... 310, 311

A new Foraminifer, by M. J. Kunstler; A new Freshwater Sponge,
by Henry Mills; On Parasitic Castration in the Eucyphotes of
the Genera Palemon and Hippolyte, by M. A. Giard .. 3811—d14

NUMBER V.

XXXVIITI. Ona new Physophore, Pleophysa, and its Relationships
to other Siphonophores. By J. WALTER Fewkes. (Plate XVII.) 317

XXXIX. Contribution to the Knowledge of Snakes of Tropical
Africa. By Dr. A. Ginruer, F.R.S., Keeper of the Zoological
Department, British Museum. (Plates XVIII. & XIX.).......... 322

XL. Description of Scolopendra valida, Lucas, with Notes on allied
Species. By R. I. Pocock, Assistant, Natural-History Museum .. 835

XLI. On the Survival of Spongille after the Development of

Swarmelanvee.. By Ni (WanntNiR:. seb i. Avera ccomneresieie etiam « 240
XLII. Descriptions of new Reptiles and Batrachians obtained by

Mr. H. O. Forbes in New Guinea. By G. A. BouLENGER........ 345
XLII. On the Characters of the Chelonian Families Pelomedu-

side and ‘Chelydide.’ ByiGaA. BouLENGER.. =45.2 4.0.0 58.00nee 346
XLIV. Some Observations on the Coleopterous Family Bostri-

chide, By Cuaries'O. WATERHOUSE. .- J. s2.-ceeeeeenen 348
XLV. On Trachinus draco and T. vipera. By Francis Day,

(ORIG) 055) 031 ORS RN: 1 seen PIPE em TORE ae ne das aiys hive voids & 301

XLVI. Note on the Early Mesozoic Ganoid, Belonorhynchus, and
on the supposed Liassic Genus Amb/yurus. By A. SmirH Woop-
warp, F.G.S.,1.Z.8., of the British Museum (Natural History), .. 354

CONTENTS. Vil

Page
XLVII, Short Life-histories of nine Australian Lepidoptera. By
A. Stipnry Ourirr, Assistant Zoologist, Australian Museum, Sydney.

(CUPL RSV GN) ping ie rca r= are ea eae ee ean 357
XLVIII. Ona new Mode of Life among Meduse. By J. WALTER

PEE ARO See DIOP IS I BA i sion 0 ug err eee ha ase Pact onal ¢ 562
XLIX. Notice of a remarkable Ophiurid from Brazil. By F.

BI Sere is Legg FSW Tze E Nota Ga De) 20s, 2 coe alesiagen nip peeieeha my oparauegn © olees~ sceye a 368
L. Descriptions of new Species of Oriental Cicadide. By W.L.

HID TISIDAUN TED aes cert hee eh eas gs i kA erty Pa li ea 370
LI. Remarks on Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. By Prof. J. F.

PAH Ag AS aah Ae Cer tte ona Sw noe Goal 0 ets wayside Ge 576

New Book :—Tyvan<actions of the Cumberland and Westmorland
Association for the Advancement of Literature and Science.
INGO Spxai Meee SS G=S (pemetrexed aewerel toe oe as) cxcsca hn chat 380

Proceedings of the Geological Society ............0.eee ees 381

Note on the Nomenclature of three Genera of Fossil Mammalia, by
R. Lydekker, B.A., F.G.S., &e.; On the Collection of Starfishes
formed by the Cape-Horn Scientific Commission, by M. E.
Perrier ; On Nephromyces, anew Genus of Fungi parasitic in
the Kidney of the Molgulide, by M. A. Giard ........ 5384—386

NUMBER VI.

LIT. On the Reproductive Organs of Phreoryctes. By Frank
E. Brepparp, M.A., Prosector to the Zoological Society of London.
GEST rem MONG LIOE dees corres oie Sa aese trae clea ckerartmce she sh 216% evan oun, SPoderaNa chs 389

LIII. Notes on the Paleeozoic Bivalved Entomostraca.—No. XXV.
On some Silurian Ostracoda from Gothland. By Prof. T. Rupert
JONES iM olvaSel WGs.. (P lates KOM Ge KOM oan «sos wens 5 a eteysreps 395

LIV. On the Fructification and Affinities of Archeopteris hiber-
nica, Forbes, sp. By Roprerr Krpsron, F.R.S.E., F.G.S. ........ 412

LY. A List of Batrachians from the Province Santa Catharina,
Brazil, p eslay, Gin Ae) SOUL NG ERG gree ciotsvss oii), oie lctee.si seis) » soya e oreys . 415

LVI. On Butterflies of the Genus Teracolus obtained by Mr. H.
G. Palliser at Khandesh in the Winter of 1886-7. By Artuur G.

APS UUEG RENT Ne Se heer UGS, «oS apounywacvensics aoe, Leper. axansper chs aie. ah si #6 417
LVII. Notice of an Abnormal Growth in a Species of Haltotes.

EARN) CePeR Nem MELEE etait iat are caole oie ee cele ihaite) tr e'e ve eke sue «eres 0s 9) 419
LVIIL. Professor Blake and Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. By

10s Alex Gu con 0b. Waa an ae enone Eh omen ert one oto one 421
LIX. Descriptions of two new Species of Indian Soriede. By G.

Ba OEsON ee Mcn HigtyaSs si creo: snes eeupraclsasacetere s «eld ey es 427

LX. Contribution to our Knowledge of the Fishes of the Yangtsze-
Kiang. By Dr. A. Ginruer, Keeper of the Zoological Department,
EVER e MMCCUIEEE RE cyasto tee wai. shots daemon tas. hae sets ait a clerate ¢ 429

Vill CONTENTS.

Tage
LXI. On the so-called Eyes of Tridacna and the Occurrence of
Pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles in the Vascular System of the Lamel-
[nprAre Libs. WES ya ERRORS «hile wis eres telay sis pre cclae nice eg cea eeee eee 435

LXII. On the Presence of Ossa transversa ina Chelonian. By
GPA: SE OUNEN GOI... 5. ss. 5 nse Menenilols lee Geeta epee oto rec iene 452

New Books :—A Textbook of Biology. By J. R. AinswortH Davis.
—Proceedings of the Bristol Naturalists’ Society, n. s. vol. v.
(1886-7), pt. ii. pp. 95-206: Engineering Section, pp. 1-94. . 458, 454

On the “ Nursing ”-habits of Dendrobates, as observed by A. Kappler,
by G. A. Boulenger; On the Formation of the Antherozoids of
the Hepatice, by M. Leclere du Sablon; On the Gemmules of
some Marine Siliceous Sponges, by M. E. Topsent ...... 454—458

lindexsmy.a ea ae EN GaCSA AEE SER EPI ERS Ci CSET TNE ORR RO ee ots 459

PLATES IN VOL. I.

Pirate I. Dentition of Eocene Species of Myliobatis.
II. New Species of Chameleon.
III. Structure of Parkeria.
IV. Reproduction of Euglypha alveolata.

V.
Wil New Reptiles and Batrachians,

Vit.
NIE ye
IX. Polyzoa of Mauritius.
X.
XI. Anatomy of the Temnopleuride.
XII. Halys acutus.
XU. Stoliczkiella Theobaldi—Millarella cantabriziensis.
ae Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence.
XVI. New Longicorn Coleoptera.—Structure of Theatops postica.
XVII. Pleeophysa A gassizii.
OVATE. |
XIX. }
XX. Life-histories of some Australian Lepidoptera.
208 | Scandinavian Ostracoda.
XXII. }
XXIII. Reproductive Organs of Phreoryctes.

Snakes of Tropical Africa.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SIXTH SERIES.]

Seledianievacanieiee nas per litora spargite museum,
Naiades, et circum vitreos considite fontes:
Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores:
Floribus et pictum, dive, replete canistrum.
At vos, o Nymphe Craterides, ite sub undas ;
Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco
Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas
Ferte, Dew pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.”

N. Parthenti Giannettasti Kel. 1,

No. 1. JANUARY 1888.

I.—On the Structure and Affinities of the Genus Parkeria,
Carp. By H. ALLEYNE Nicuo.son, M.D., D.Sc., Regius
Professor of Natural History in the University of Aber-
deen.

[Plate III.}

THE genus Parkeria was originally described by Dr. W. B.
Carpenter (Phil. Trans. vol. clix. p. 721, 1870), and was
regarded by this eminent authority as belonging to the arena-
ceous Foraminifera. At a later date the structure of the
genus was investigated by Mr. Carter (Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist, ser. 4, vol. xvii. p. 208, 1876, and vol. xix. p.55, 1877),
who came to the conclusion that the skeleton was not arena-
ceous in its composition, and that the genus was properly
referable to the Hydractiniide. Mr. Carter’s views have, in
the main, been accepted by subsequent writers, such as
Steinmann (‘ Paleontographica,’ 1878, p. 118) and Zittel
(‘ Handbuch der Palexontologie,’ Bd. i. p. 283, 1879).

The purpose of the present communication is not so much
that of entering into a critical examination of the views of
previous observers as of recording the results of an entirely
independent investigation into the structure of Parkeria.
The observations and conclusions of both Dr. Carpenter and

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 1

2 Prof. H. A. Nicholson on the Structure and

Mr. Carter were based essentially upon specimens of Parkerta
in one state of preservation, viz. specimens in which the
chambers are non-infiltrated and the skeleton largely com-
posed of phosphate of lime. The beautiful illustrations which
accompany Dr. Carpenter’s memoir were similarly derived
mainly from specimens in the above condition of minerali-
zation. ‘This condition was regarded by Dr. Carpenter as
being the one most nearly representing the original constitu-
tion of the fossil, whereas Mr. Carter recognized that it was
secondary and the result of changes produced during the
process of fossilization or at some subsequent period. The
correctness of Mr. Carter’s conclusion on this point does not,
in my opinion, admit of reasonable doubt; and I propose in
what follows to briefly describe the structure of Parkeria as
exhibited by what I regard as normal examples of the genus,
viz. examples in which the skeleton is composed of non-
crystalline carbonate of lime and the chambers are infiltrated
with calcite. Specimens in this condition of preservation are
by no means uncommon; the phenomena which they present
differ in no respect from those shown by similarly preserved
examples of other calcareous fossils, such as corals, Polyzoa,
Stromatoporoids, &c.; and their internal structure is so admi-
rably preserved that they can be readily studied by means of
thin sections. For much of the material with which I have
worked I am indebted to the generosity of my friend Prof.
T. M‘Kenny Hughes, who was good enough to present to
me a large series of specimens in all states of preservation.
I have also to express my gratitude to Dr. P. Herbert Car-
penter, who furnished me with the opportunity of examining
the beautiful and instructive series of preparations of Parkerta
upon which Dr, W. B. Carpenter had based his original
memoir. Lastly, I have to thank Dr. John Millar for the
free use of a large and interesting series of thin sections of
Parkeria. My observations, however, are in the main founded

upon an extensive series of slides which I have prepared
myself.

1. General Form and Mode of Growth.

The ordinary form of Parkeria (P. spherica) presents itself,
as is well known, in the shape of spherical bodies, which
vary in diameter from less than half an inch to about two
inches. ‘The surface in unworn specimens exhibits rounded
or elongated elevations, separated by intervening depressions,
or, in other instances, may present an alveolar or honey-
combed aspect. Rough fractures show that the skeleton is
composed of numerous cylindrical columns (“ radial pillars ’’),

Affinities of the Genus Parkeria, Carp. 3

which pass in a radiating manner from the centre to the
circumference of the fossil, and are united at more or less
regular intervals by imperfect concentric layers, which are
separated from one another by concentrically disposed inter-
spaces (‘¢ chamberlets”’).

As regards the mode of growth, most specimens must have
been entirely free in the adult condition, since the entire
surface is covered equally with the ends of the radial columns.
Some examples, however, are pierced by a central cylindrical
canal, as if they had grown upon some such body as the stalk
of a Crinoid, which had been subsequently dissolved out. In
other cases there is a similar central canal, but this does not
extend more than halfway through the fossil. A similar
complete or incomplete central perforation is common in the
genus Porosphera, Steinm., though my examination of this
latter genus would lead me to conclude that it is in no way
related to Parkeria. In most of the examples of Parkeria
which I have examined, I have been unable to detect in the
centre of the fossil any foreign body round which the organism
may have grown. In this respect most examples resemble
the singular fossil which I have recently described as Mitchel-
deania gregaria. In some cases, however, the innermost
or primordial layer of Parkerta has unquestionably been
attached to the exterior of a foreign body, which appears
generally to have been the shell of asmall Nautilus or Ammo-
nite. I have figured (PI. III. fig. 6) a vertical section across
the centre of such a specimen, showing the chambered Cepha-
lopod round which the Parkeria has grown in successive
concentric layers. It does not appear to me to admit of doubt
that the chambered “ nucleus” ascribed to Parkeria by
Dr. W. B, Carpenter is really a foreign body of the above

nature.

2. The Chemical Constitution of the Skeleton.

If any large series of specimens of Parkeria be examined,
it will be found that different examples present great differ-
ences as regards the mineral nature and composition of the
skeleton. ‘The following are the principal variations which
may be recognized in this respect :—

(a) In a certain proportion of specimens the skeleton is
composed of carbonate of lime and the chambers of the fossil
are occupied by calcite or by an infilling of the matrix in
which the fossil was originally imbedded. The skeleton-
fibre in these specimens is not in the condition of ordinary
calcite, but is composed of subcrystalline granules of carbonate

of lime.
1*

4 Prof. H. A. Nicholson on the Structure and

(2) In a second group of specimens the skeleton is more or
less extensively composed of phosphate of lime, and the
chambers of the fossil may be occupied, throughout or in part,
by phosphatic infilling. The greater proportion of the speci-
mens which I have examined are in this condition; but the
extent to which the skeleton is phosphatic varies greatly. In
some examples the chambers of the fossil are filled throughout
with phosphatic material, and the whole skeleton seems to be
more or less largely made up of phosphate of hme. Even in
such specimens, however, a certain amount of carbonate of
lime is present in the skeleton, since the application of a
drop of acid to a thin section of an apparently altogether
phosphatic specimen is followed by an evolution of carbon
dioxide. In most of the specimens belonging to this group,
however, it is only part of the skeleton which is in the con-
dition of phosphate of lime, and the remainder is in the con-
dition of carbonate of lime. In such specimens it is invariably
the outer portion of the specimen, for a zone of greater or less
depth, which is phosphatic and has its chambers filled with
phosphatic material, while the znner or central part of the
specimen is composed of carbonate of lime and has its cham-
bers filled with calcite.

(c) In a third group of specimens the skeleton is more or
less largely composed of phosphate of lime and the central
portion of the fossil, or the whole of it, has its chambers empty
and non-infiltrated.

(zd) In-a fourth group of specimens the chambers of the
fossil are infiltrated with silica. I have never seen an
example in this condition of preservation ; but such a speci-
men is stated by Dr. W. B. Carpenter to exist in the Museum
of Practical Geology in Jermyn Street. The condition must,
however, be one of great rarity.

The question now arises, What was the original composi-
tion of the skeleton of Parkeria? Dr. W. B. Carpenter
regarded the specimens of the third of the above-mentioned
groups as those least altered from their original constitution.
He therefore considered that the skeleton was composed of
a small proportion of sand-grains cemented together by a
mixture of phosphate and carbonate of lime. Mr. Carter, on
the other hand, regarded the phosphatic condition of the
skeleton as of secondary origin and as being due to minerali-
zation subsequent to fossilization. He appears to think that
the skeleton may have been originally chitinous in nature,
and that the chitine may have been replaced during fossiliza-
tion by calespar, which in turn might be more or less largely
replaced at a later stage by phosphate of lime. My own view

Affinities of the Genus Parkeria, Carp. 5

is that the skeleton of Parkeria was composed originally of
carbonate of lime, and that phosphatization, when it has
occurred at all, has been the result of secondary processes
which have operated subsequently to fossilization. ‘The
arguments for regarding the phosphatic condition of the
skeleton as superinduced and not original may be briefly
summed up as follows :—

1. The phosphatization of calcareous organisms is a well-
known and readily intelligible phenomenon. ‘Thus all kinds
of calcareous fossils in phosphatic deposits (as in the Green-
sand near Cambridge) are liable to have their carbonate of
lime more or less extensively replaced by phosphate of lime.

2. On the other hand, if we suppose an originally phos-
phatic organism to have its phosphate of lime replaced by
carbonate of lime, then the latter mineral would certainly
appear in the form of crystalline calcite. ‘This is not the
case, however, with the purely calcareous examples of
Parkeria, the skeleton-fibre of which is composed of granules
of carbonate of lime and not of definite crystals. Mr. Carter
has described a specimen in which the skeleton-fibre is com-
posed of calespar; but I have never personally met with a
similar example, and such a condition must be regarded as
the result of some secondary change.

3. In all those specimens of Parkerta which are partly
phosphatic while parts are in the condition of carbonate of
lime, it is invariably the evtertor parts—which, necessarily,
are those most exposed to chemical actions originating ab
extra—which are phosphatic, while the internal and central
portions are those which are calcareous. Moreover, even in
the most highly phosphatic portions of such specimens, effer-
vescence is produced by weak acids, showing that the original
carbonate ot lime has not been wholly removed or replaced.

4, ‘Thin sections of phosphatized specimens, or of the phos-
phatized parts of a specimen, show a more or less impertect
preservation of the minute structure of the skeleton. On the
other hand, in specimens in which the skeleton is composed
wholly of carbonate of lime the minute structure is exqui-
sitely preserved.

Upon the whole, then, I cannot doubt that the skeleton of
Parkeria, like that of the Stromatoporoids, was originally
composed of carbonate of lime. The granules which compose
the skeleton-fibre are not, however, infinitesimally minute,
but are, on the contrary, of considerable size and of a sub-
crystalline character. A closely similar composition of the
skeleton out of large suberystalline granules is seen in Hydrac-
tenia circumvestiens, S. V. Wood, and, very conspicuously,

6 Prof. H. A. Nicholson on the Structure and

in certain recent species of Allopora. In the phosphatized
specimens of Parkeria the original granules of carbonate of
lime have been replaced by granules of phosphate of lime ;
and if the specimen is non-infiltrated, ¢. e. has its chambers
empty, the skeleton-fibre then assumes a peculiar “ sandy ”
aspect. 1 have, however, failed to find in decalcified sections
ot any of the specimens which I have examined any sand-
grains properly so-called ; and I am therefore led to conclude
that they did not exist, since it cannot be supposed that
grains of quartz should have been replaced during fossilization
by grains of phosphate or carbonate of lime.

3. Minute Structure of the Skeleton.

The skeleton of Parkeria consists of radiating columns
(“radial pillars ’’), united by concentrically disposed lamelle,

SUH VU

Vertical section across the centre of a specimen of Parkerva, enlarged
twice. p, one of the radial pillars; c, one of the chamberlets.

Affinities of the Genus Parkeria, Carp. 7

which are separated by interspaces broken up into irregular
*“ chamberlets ” (see woodcut). One of the most remarkable
points about Parkera is the structure of the tissue which com-
poses the radial pillars and concentric lamella. The nature of
this tissue can be admirably studied in thin sections of calca-
reous examples of Parkeria (Pl. III. figs. 1-4), which show
that it is composed of innumerable, minute, cylindrical or
polygonal tubuli, which have a radial disposition and are
united to one another by their walls. The walls of the tubuli
are porous, thus allowing of a free communication between
the cavities of adjacent tubuli. Vertical sections (Pl. III.
figs. 2 and 4) show that the tubuli are vertical to the surface
in the axes of the radial pillars, but that they become oblique
to the surface as they proceed upwards. Hence each indi-
vidual tubule has a proportionately short vertical course,
beginning in the axis of the pillar and then gradually bending
outwards so as to open obliquely on the circumference of the
pillar. Incross sections of the pillars (Pl. III. figs. 1 and 3)
the tubuli in the centre of the pillars are cut at right angles
to their course and therefore present themselves as a poly-
gonal network, like that of a Monticuliporoid. On the other
hand, the tubuli in the peripheral portions of a cross section
through a pillar are necessarily cut more or less obliquely,
and their mouths are shown at the actual circumference of
such a section. In the concentric lamellae which connect
contiguous pillars the tubuli are necessarily short; they
originate from the calcareous membrane which forms the
inferior surface of the lamella, and they open by minute
apertures superiorly either into the cavities of the ‘‘ chamber-
lets’ or, in the case of the last-formed lamella, upon the
outer surface of the coenosteum.

The diameter of the tubuli composing the general cancel-
lated tissue of Parkerta is about 3 millim. The tubuli
exhibit nothing of the nature of radiating septa, nor do they
possess any ‘‘tabule”’ or transverse internal partitions.
Owing to the fact that the tubuli are slightly fexuous, and
owing also to their very minute size, longitudinal sections
rarely divide a tubule in a single plane, but pass from side to
side of its middle line, allowing the porous wall of the tubule
to be seen at intervals, or here and there actually cutting the
wall. Hence in longitudinal sections (Pl. III. figs. 2 and 4)
there is often an appearance of tabule ; but this appearance
is due to the cause just mentioned. In the same Way, sections
which cut the tubules obliquely give the appearance not of
proper tubes, but of rows of elongated polygonal cells. ‘The
general cancellated tissue of Parkerta may be regarded as

8 Prof. H. A. Nicholson on the Structure and

ccenosarcal in its origin, and it may be compared with the
canaliculated ccenosarcal tissue of Distichopora, Allopora,
Pliobothrus, &c., or with the clathrate ccenosarcal tissue of
the Hydractinide.
While the main mass of the skeleton of Parkerta is com-
osed of the finely tubulated tissue above described, a coarser
acd of cancellated tissue is commonly developed at particular
points in the skeleton. The tissue in question (Pl. IIT. fig. 5)
consists of wide, irregular, intereommunicating tubuli or
elongated cells, united by a coarse reticulated tissue ; and it is
usually developed periodically in thin concentric layers, which
separate thick strata of the ordinary skeletal tissue (see woodcut,
p-6). In small specimens it may not be developed at all, or there
may be only a single external layer of it; but in large speci-
mens there may be two or three successive layers in a section
passing from the centre to the circumference. Sometimes
also a similar tissue may occupy parts of the centre of a
radial pillar. Iam disposed to connect the periodic produc-
tion of this coarse trabecular tissue, with its large vesicles,
with the periodic development of reproductive zodids, and
to compare it with the periodic production of “ampulla” in
the Stylasterids.

4, The Zovidal Tubes.

Traversing the general tubulated tissue of the radial pillars
in Parkerta we find a larger or smaller number of compara-
tively wide circular or oval tubes, which have an average
diameter of about 35 of a millimetre. Owing to their being
slightly oblique instead of accurately vertical to the surface,
and owing also to the shortness of each individual tube, these
structures are often badly exhibited in longitudinal sections
of Parkerta. On the other hand, they are regularly and
easily recognizable in tangential sections of the coenosteum
(Pl. III. figs. 1 and 3, ¢). These wide tubes vary in number
in different specimens, but they are invariably present. They
have no radiating septa, nor, so far as I have seen, transverse
tabule. They open by rounded apertures upon the surface
of the fossil or into the chamberlets—each successive con-
centric row of chamberlets having at one time formed the
surface of the ccenosteum. I regard these large tubes as
having contained zodids, and as corresponding therefore to
the gastropores and dactylopores of the Hydrocorallines.

5. The Chamberlets and Concentric Lamelle.
The first-formed layer of Parkerta has the form of a thin

Affinities of the Genus Parkeria, Carp. 9

calcareous membrane, which was probably always at first
attached by its lower surface to some foreign body, such as a
fragment of shell, though this latter seems to have been com-
monly absorbed in process of growth. The upper or free
surface of the primordial lamina supports a layer of the cha-
racteristic tubulated tissue of Parkeria, which is prolonged
upwards at small intervals into long pointed spines. This
condition can be studied in vertical sections traversing the
centre of the skeleton, and at this stage of its existence the
organism must have presented a close resemblance to the
erust of Hydractinia echinata, allowing for the fact that the
ccenosteum is calcareous and not horny. In the further pro-
gress of growth the spines or primordial radial pillars throw
out from their summits lateral outgrowths, which coalesce
with one another more or less completely, and thus give rise
to a second lamina, separated from the original one by an
intervening space. ‘This second lamina agrees with the first
in having a calcareous membrane below and in being com-
posed of tubulated tissue prolonged upwards into spines, which
are mostly radial continuations of the primitive spines. The
interspace between the first and second lamina is necessarily
crossed by the primitive radial pillars, and hence appears in
section as if broken up into separate “ chamberlets”’ (Pl. ILI.
fig. 6). As development proceeds the spines of the second
series produce again a third lamella, thus giving rise to a
second series of chamberlets ; and so the process goes on till the
organism has attained its full growth. ‘The later lamell are
generally thicker than the earlier ones and the rows of cham-
berlets proportionately more contracted (woodcut, p. 6) ; but
there is no reason to think that the former are produced in any
way differently from the earlier ones. After a certain number
of lamella, with their corresponding rows of chamberlets, have
been formed, it is common to find that a thin concentric layer
of coarse cancellated tissue is produced, this possibly repre-
senting, as before suggested, a stage in the life of the organism
in which reproductive zodids were developed. Then the ordi-
nary lamelle and spines are again formed, and we have anew
series of concentric lamelle and chamberlets. It is also
not uncommon to find that growth is at first unilateral, the
first two or three lamelle being on one side only of the pri-
mordial crust, while the later lamellee form complete concentric
envelopes round the first-formed portion of the organism.
It follows from the above account of the mode of develop-
ment of the skeleton in Parkerta that each successive tier of
chamberlets necessarily represents what was at one time the
surface of the organism.

10 Prof. H. A. Nicholson on the Structure and

Bearing the above in mind, it is easy to understand the
phenomena presented by sections of Parkerta vertical to the
surface (woodcut, p. 6, and Pl. III. figs. 2 and 4). All such
sections exhibit the radial pillars, the concentric lamelle, and
the concentric rows of chamberlets ; and there is no difficulty
in the recognition of the nature and mode of origin of these
structures, if the plane of the sections corresponds accurately
with the direction of the radial pillars. Sections tangential
to the surface are not quite so easy of interpretation, though
they present no special difficulties. Such sections differ
according as the plane of the section corresponds with that
of one of the concentric lamelle or with a row of chamberlets.
As the lamellae are curved, an ordinary tangential section
(Pl. III. figs. 1 and 3) passes partly through one of the
concentric lamelle and partly through a tier of chamberlets.
Hence such a section usually shows more or less clearly the
cut ends of the radial pillars () connected by a reticulated
tissue representing the transversely divided tubuli of the con-
centric lamella. Here and there we also see irregular spaces
(c), which represent the chamberlets opened from above. In
places where the section corresponds with a row of chamber-
lets, we see simply the cut ends of the radial pillars. In either
case, tangential sections clearly exhibit the transversely-
divided zodidal tubes (t).

6. Lelation to Recent Organisms.

With regard to the systematic position of Parkeria, there
can be little hesitation, in the light of our present knowledge,
in accepting Mr. Carter’s reference of the genus to the
Hydrozoa. All the known facts as to the chemical constitu-
tion, mode of growth, and general structure of the coenosteum,
no less than the minute structure of the skeleton-fibre, point
unequivocally in this direction. With regard to the precise
place which Parkerta should occupy in the series of the
Hydrozoa, it may be regarded as intermediate between the
Hydrocorallines and the Hydractiniide, but with nearer
relationships to the latter than to the former. In the minute
structure of the skeletal tissue Parkerva most closely resembles
the Hydrocorallines ; but in the general arrangement of its
parts, and more particularly in its mode of growth by the
production of successive concentric lamella separated by rows
of chamberlets, it approaches most nearly to the Hydrac-
tiniides, with which group the genus may in the meanwhile

be ranked.

Affinities of the Genus Parkeria, Carp. BE

7. Relations to Kxtinct Organisms.

There are various extinct organisms which have, or have
been supposed to have, relationships with Parkeria which
may be briefly glanced at here. Foremost amongst these
may be placed the singular spheroidal fossils from the Trias-
sic rocks of Kashmir, which Prof. P. Martin Duncan described
under the family name of the Syringospheride (‘ Scientific
Results of the Second Yarkand Mission,’ 1879). By the
great kindness of Mr. Medlicott, the Director of the Geolo-
gical Survey of India, and of Dr. Henry Woodward, I have
been supplied with specimens of Syringosphera, of which |
have made a careful examination by means of thin sections.
In their general aspect the fossils of the genus Syringosphera
present an exceedingly close resemblance to Parkeria, with
which they also agree in the possession of a tubulated coeno-
steal tissue. On the other hand, the coenosteum in Syringo-
sphera does not increase by the formation of successive con-
centric lamelle with intervening rows of chamberlets, and |
have been able to demonstrate the presence of well-marked
zovidal tubes (“ gastropores”’) occupied by reticulate styles
or columelle. I shall be able, in fact, to show that the genus
Syringosphera, Duncan, is referable to the Hydrocorallines
and is nearly related to the recent genera Allopora and Spo-
radopora; but I need not enter further into this point on the
present occasion, as I purpose treating of the genus more
fully in a separate memoir.

The genus Porosphera, Steinmann, was referred by its
author (‘ Paleontographica,’ N. F. Bd. iii.) to the Hydrozoa,
and was looked upon as related to Parkeria, a view which
had previously been put forward by Mr. Carter (Ann. & Mag.
Nat. Hist. 1877). I have prepared and examined a number
of thin sections of Porosphera globularis, Phill. sp., from the
White Chalk of Britain, and do not feel able to coincide in
the above view. Without expressing any dogmatic opinion
on the subject, I am disposed to think that Porosphera will be
found to be truly referable to the group of the Lithistid
sponges, and to be related to the genus Hindia, Dunc. It is,
at any rate, certain that the genus has no special relationship
with Parkerta, and the minute structure of its skeleton does
not resemble that of any Hydrozoén with which I am ac-
quainted. Bradya tergestina of Stache is unknown to me,
and I am unable to express any opinion as to its affinities.

The genus Loftusta, H. B. Brady (Phil. Trans. 1869), has
been regarded by Steinmann, Carter, and others as likewise
referable to the Hydrozoa, and as more or less nearly related

12 On the Genus Parkeria, Carp.

to Parkeria. I have only had the opportunity ot studying
Loftusia through the medium of thin sections; but I am
quite satisfied that its resemblances to Parkeria are super-
ficial, and are not indicative of any real affinity. I do not
recognize in the structure of Loftusia any thing distinctively
Hydrozoal, whilst it possesses structural features, apart from
its spiral mode of growth, that are strongly Foraminiferal.
Upon the whole, therefore, the present evidence seems to me
to fully warrant Mr, Brady’s reference of the genus Loftusia
to the arenaceous Foraminifera.

The curious spheroidal fossils which constitute the genus
Mitcheldeania, Wethered, present some striking resemblances
to Parkeria. The minute structure of the skeleton of the
former is, however, in essential respects different from that of
the latter, while the chamberlets which are so characteristic
of Parkeria ave wanting in Mitcheldeania. As I have, how-
ever, treated fully of the structure of the genus Mvtcheldeania
in another communication (Geol. Mag., Jan. 1888), I need
not enter here into a further consideration of its characters
and relationships.

Lastly, there are unquestionable points of resemblance, as
well as marked points of difference, between Parkeria and
the great Hydrozoal group of the Stromatoporoids. No
Stromatoporoid, however, possesses the peculiar tubulated
coenosteal tissue of Parkeria. ‘The nearest approach to this
is seen in the genera Stromatopora, Goldt., Stromatoporella,
Nich., and Parallelopora, Barg.; but the skeleton-fibre in
these genera is vesicular rather than tubulated, and the
general structure of the skeleton is fundamentally different
from that of Parkeria. 'The genus Labechia, Kh. & H., which
might in some points be compared with VLarkeria, is even
more widely removed from it than are the above genera as
regards the internal structure of the skeleton.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE III.

Fig. 1. Tangential section of Parkerta spherica, enlarged about ten times.
p, one of the radial pillars transversely divided; ¢, one of the
zooidal tubes ; c, one of the chamberlets,

Fig. 2. Vertical section of the same, similarly enlarged. yp, one of the
radial pillars; ¢, one of the chamberlets; /, calcareous lamina
supporting one of the concentric lamelle.

Fig. 8. Tangential section of Parkeria, enlarged about twenty times; the
letters as before.

Fig. 4. Vertical section of the same, similarly enlarged ; letters as before.

Fy. 5. Tangential section through one of the periodically-formed layers
of coarse cancellated tissue, enlarged about twenty times,

Fig. 6. Central portion of a vertical median section of a specimen of
Parkerva growing upon a chambered Cephalopod, enlarged
about ten times.

Mr. T. Whitelegge on Australian Polyzoa. 13

Il.—Notes on some Australian Polyzoa.
By 'T. WHITELEGGE *.

In the British Museum Catalogue of Marine Polyzoa, part 1i.
(1854), the late Mr. Busk, F'.R.S., described two species of
Polyzoa from the Philippine Islands, which he referred to the
genus Lunulites, at the same time remarking that they were
“curious forms and would appear to constitute a peculiar
group.” In the years 1879, 1880, and 1881 the Rev. J. E.
Tenison-Woods, Mr. W. A. Haswell, and the Rev. -T.
Hincks published papers describing several species which
are closely allied to those described by Mr. Busk. The
various species have been assigned to four or five genera. [
intend in this paper to show that the undermentioned species
form avery distinct group, having little in common with
those with which they have usually been associated except
habit or form :—

Lunulites philippinensis, Busk.
cancellata, Busk.

Cupularia crassa, Tenison-W oods.
Conescharellina depressa, Haswell.
Lunulites angulopora, Tenison- Woods.
Conescharellina conica, Haswell.
Lunulites incisa, Hincks.

Eschara umbonata, Haswell.

Flabellopora elegans ?, V’Orb.

Mr. A. W. Waters, in a paper “ On some Fossil Polyzoa
from New Zealand” (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. Feb. 1887,
p- 71), states that he had received from New South Wales
recent specimens of the last-named species, ‘‘ which is either
Lunulites cancellata, Busk, or very closely allied to it.”

The published descriptions and figures show that the species
in the above list have not as yet been fairly understood, nor
has the operculum-bearing aperture or the very exceptional
method of growth been fully described. Nearly all the
figures representing zocecial characters are the wrong side up,
whilst the peristomial orifice has been described as the true
oral aperture, and a special pore situated above the mouth
has been mistaken for the sinus in the lower lip.

Mr. Woods figures the oral aperture in Cupularia crassa,

* From vol. ii. (2nd series) of the ‘Proceedings of the Linnean

Society of New South Wales’ (June 29th, 1887). Communicated by the
Author,

14 Mr. T. Whitelegge on Australian Polyzoa.

but he omits to mention details in his description. Mr.
Waters (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1882) gives figures of
Lunulites cancellata in which the oral aperture is shown, but
these are also the wrong side up, and in his description he
simply refers to it as a secondary orifice with a proximal
sinus. It is in my opinion clear that he did not at the time
recognize the true significance of this ‘‘ secondary orifice.”
Another prominent feature which is figured by Mr. Woods
and well described by Mr. Haswell as “a narrow semilunar
slit with the concavity directed outwards’ has in most cases
been overlooked and its true import hitherto unnoticed.

The facts as to the actual structure of the species already
mentioned have been derived from an attentive study of
specimens in the collection of the Australian Museum, Mr.
Woods’s types in the Macleay Museum, and some lent to me
by Mr. J. Brazier.

The structural features presented by the various species of
this group are of such an exceptional character that it will be
necessary to remove them altogether from the family Selena-
riade, in which most of the species have been placed. In
fact they appear to possess characters which are either
unknown or rarely found in other species of Polyzoa; and
possibly when they have been fully investigated they may
form the nucleus of a new family.

The method of growth (not habit or form) or increase in
size of the zoarium by the addition of new zocecia is interca-
lary, taking place on the surface between cells already formed,
and not at the outer margin, asin most other known Polyzoa,
The only instances of intercalary growth, so far as I have
been able to ascertain, are recorded by Mr. Hincks; but in
these cases it is confined to the ovicelligerous cells of Schizo-
porella hyalina and 8. linearis.

The formation of new zocecia does not appear to be con-
fined to any particular part, but may take place at any point
between the centre and the margin; when near the latter the
zocecium is formed in the space intervening between two, and
when nearest to the former in the intervening space bounded
by four zocecia. The direction of the zocecia is also appa-
rently reversed, from the fact that the free distal edge of the
operculum is nearest to and directed towards the apex in
those of a conical form, and to the apparent base in those
which are flattened, while the hinged or proximal end is
nearest to the outer margin of the zoarium.

The manner in which the peristomial orifice is formed
appears to be just the opposite to what obtains in other peri-
stomiate Polyzoa, and there is a special feature of an important

Mr. T. Whitelegge on Australian Polyzoa. 15

character which, if not new to the class, is exceedingly rare,
and so far I have searched in vain for the record of a similar
structural element.

The first indication of the formation of a new zocecium
appears on the upper surface of the zoarium as an elevated or
depressed round spot bordered on one side by a thin layer of
epitheca. At this point the “semilunar slit with the con-
cavity directed outwards” is formed, and by the gradual
extension of this slit to a circular form a piece of the calca-
reous lamina is cut out, the resulting opening being that of
the peristome, and at a short distance below the true oral
aperture is seen to be also in a fully formed condition. It is
the rule to speak of the operculum-bearing aperture as the
primary and of the peristomial as the secondary orifice ; but
in this case it appears doubtful which ought to rank as primary
or secondary.

In a median line above the mouth, close to or upon the
margin of the peristome, there isa circular or subcircular pore
usually covered by a membrane. It is this pore, when in an
imperfect or broken state, that has been mistaken for the
proximal sinus in the lower lip of the oral aperture ; but the
true oral sinus is much wider and at the opposite end of the
mouth to that of the pore.

The shape of the oral aperture generally approaches that of
Cellepora eatonensis as figured by Busk in the ‘ Challenger’
Polyzoa, pl. xxix. fig. 56; but the sinus varies in width so
much that in some cases the aperture might be described as
oval, with two lateral denticles at the base.

It is evident that the seven species already enumerated are
closely allied to each other and can no longer remain in the
various genera to which they have been referred. They do
not belong either to the genus Zunulites or to Cupularia,
and the genus Conescharellina, as at present defined, would
not admit them ; the same may also be said of Mlabellopora.
Mr. A. W. Waters, in referring to Lunulites incisa, H., says
it “is a species of the Schizoporellide.’’ Nevertheless, to
whatever family they may ultimately prove to be related, at
present I venture to make a new genus for their reception.

BIPoRA, n. g.

Zoarium uni- or bilaminate, conical, or forming lobate or
flabellate expansions ; growth intercalary ; zocecia immersed,
erect, side by side, with their bases resting on a cancellated
lamina, forming alternating rows directed to the primary part
of the zoarium ; oral aperture with a well-marked sinus in

16 Mr. T. Whitelegge on Australian Polyzoa.

the lower lip. A special pore above the mouth ; peristomial
orifice formed by the gradual extension of a narrow slit and
the removal of a portion of the calcareous lamina. Odcecia
external, globose.

1. Bipora cancellata (Busk).

Lunulites cancellata, Busk, Brit. Mus, Cat. Polyz, 1854, part ii. p. 101,
pl. cxiil. figs. 4-7.

Zoarium conical, plane or slightly convex beneath ; zocecial
apertures rounded above, with a distinct sinus below ; peri-
stome elevated above, depressed below, with a circular pore
on its upper border ; an avicularium on each side of the mouth,
with a subcircular mandibular space.

I have examined several fossil examples of this species
which appear to agree with Busk’s description and figures,
and which may be identical with the form figured as L. can-
cellata, Busk, by Mr. Waters in his paper on fossil Bryozoa
from Bairnsdale; but both in this species and in the next the
identity can only be definitely settled by comparison with
the types.

Loc. Living: Philippine Islands; fossil: Muddy Creek,

Victoria.

2. Bipora philippinensis (Busk).
Lunulites philippinensis, Busk, op. ett. part ii. p. 101, pl. exiii. figs. 1-3.

Zoarium depressed, conical, plane or concave beneath,
usually about § of an inch in diameter; zocecial orifice elon-
gate, rounded above, and with a wide rounded sinus below;
operculum oval; peristomial orifice ovate, the margin pro-
duced above at the sides, then suddenly depressed below,
with a subcircular pore on the upper border; an avicularium
with a subcircular mandible on each side, and sometimes one
in front below the mouth, a number of similar avicularia on
the under surface of the zoarium, some on rounded elevations,
and others in circular depressions. Ocecia external, globose,
smooth, with a faint fimbriated stigma in front.

Loc. Port Jackson.

This species is frequently to be met with in some parts of
Port Jackson, and I have examined a fair number of speci-
mens. ‘The surface of the zoarium is covered with a thin
yellowish epitheca; and the semilunar slits which indicate
the growth of new zocecia are to be seen in all stages of
development, especially in the young. It is by a careful

Mr. T. Whitelegge on Australian Polyzoa. 17

examination of this species that I have been enabled to work
out the structure of the others. The zoarium, when seen in
longitudinal section, shows the concave side as having a can-
cellated layer of varying thickness, from which the zocecia
take their origin ; each zocecium is narrowed at the base and
very slightly bent inwards; its direction from this point is
outwards, with a gentle curve upwards at nearly right angles
to the cancellate layer.

When the zocecia are seen in transverse section the outline
of each zocecium is irregularly pentagonal.

The anterior pore, when seen from within, appears as a
flask-shaped projection on the cell-wall, and is about as long
as the shorter diameter of the mouth; in some there appears
to be an opening, and in others the base is well rounded, with-
out any opening; it may possibly be the retreat of a protru-
sible sensitive organ, but in no case have I seen anything at
the upper extremity which would indicate the presence of an
external vibracular organ. ‘The cancellate structure, which
exists more or less in all the species, may originate by the
lower portion of the zocecia being continually partitioned off
as the zoarium increases in size.

In some of the specimens lent by Mr. Brazier the ocezia are
fairly abundant; but, except when the zoarium is broken into
two halves or set on its edge, the orifice cannot be seen.
From this fact it will be evident that they are in the usual
position above the mouth and nearest to the primary part of
the zoarium.

3. Bipora depressa (Haswell).

Conescharellina depressa, Hasw. Proc. Linn. Soc, N. S. W. 1880,
part i. vol. v. p. 41, pl. ili. fig. 4.

Zoarium biconvex, slightly flattened beneath ; oral aperture
elongate, rounded above, with a sinus below, about half the
diameter of the mouth; or ovate, with a subtriangular den-
ticle on each side near the base. Operculum ovate, with a
very slightly thickened border and two circular spots on the
upper half; peristome much elevated above and on each side
to below the mouth, then suddenly depressed; an avicularium
with an elongate triangular mandible situated on a low eleva-
tion on one side of the mouth.

“ Under surface of zoarium perforated by close-set circular
pores, each occupied, either at the surface or at a varying
depth, by a thin translucent covering perforated by several
minute porules, usually with a rather larger one in the
centre.”

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. Z

18 Mr. T. Whitelegge on Australian Polyzoa.

Loc. Port Denison.

I have only seen some five or six specimens of this species,
all of which are immature, and probably when obtained in
the adult state the zoarium will be found to be concave
beneath. I have seen one specimen in which the base is
concave; but it is too imperfect to be certain as to its identity.
The figure given by Mr. Haswell is upside down, but the
outlines of the peristomial orifices are correct. The outer row
of zocecia are very prominent and without avicularia.

4, Bipora crassa (Tenison- Woods).

Lunulites (Cupularia) crassa, Ten.-Woods, Trans. Phil. Soc. Adelaide,
1879-80, p. 5, pl. i. figs. la, 16, Le.

T have examined the type specimens in the Macleay Mu-
seum, which resemble the last species in the peristomial
characters, the margin being produced and very much thick-
ened at the sides, hiding to a great extent the oral aperture,
which lies in a depression below.

The avicularia, however, have a subcircular mandible, and
the pore over the mouth is large. I have no doubt of its
being a good species. Mr. Waters, when speaking of the
plates which accompany Mr. Woods’s paper, mentions the
fact that the whole of the species figured are the wrong side
up, which is certainly true of all the species except two ; but
even these were intended to represent the same aspect as the
others. The figure of B. crassa is, after all, the right side
up, and gives an accurate view of the oral aperture with the
special pore above. It is also probably the first published
figure which exhibits the form of the true operculum-bearing
aperture.

I have no doubt Mr. Woods saw the important structural
difference between this species and those belonging to the
Selenariade.

Loc. Off Cape Three Points and Port Stephens (70 to 80
fathoms).

5. Bipora angulopora (‘Tenison- Woods).

Lunulites angulopora, Ten.-W oods, op. cit. p. 7, pl. i. figs. 3 a-3 e.

Conescharellina conica, Hasw. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. W. 1880, vol. v.
part i. p. 42, pl. ili. figs. 7, 8.

Lunulites incisa, Hincks, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, 1881, vol. viii.
p- 127, pl. iv. figs. 1-3.

_ Zoarium conical, plane or slightly concave beneath ; zocecia
in alternating rows, sometimes with an incomplete row of

Mr. T. Whitelegge on Australian Polyzoa. 19

four or five cells near the base; oral aperture immersed,
rounded above, and a sinus below which is about 4 the diam-
eter of the mouth; operculum ovate, constricted (?) near the
base, with two circular spots on the upper half; peristome
elevated on each side, depressed below the mouth; orifice
ovate, with a pore on the upper margin; avicularia forming
elevated rows between the zocecial orifices ; mandibles trian-
gular, with an acute point; under surface of zoarium when
perfect covered with a calcareous lamina, with a number of
avicularia, some on elevations and others in circular depres-
sions; on the summit of the zoarium there is usually a
cluster of irregular avicularia bearing cells with long acute
mandibles.

Loc. Holborn Island, Port Stephens, and Bass’s Straits.

The question of priority in this species is, I think, in Mr.
Woods’s favour. His paper was read in September 1879, and
would probably be published early in 1880. Mr. Haswell’s
was read in January 1880, and would probably be issued in
April or March, while that of Mr. Hincks did not appear
until August 1881.

The figures of the zocecia given by Mr. Haswell and those
also of Mr. Hincks are, I think, upside down, judging from
the shading and the very‘narrow sinus shown, but which is
really more like the pore above the mouth than the true oral
sinus ; the latter is in perfect specimens about 4 the diameter
of the mouth. ‘The zocecial apertures in Mr. Woods’s figure
are badly drawn; still it is the right side up, and shows a
correct view of a “ semilunar slit with the concavity directed
outwards” and an avicularium below pointing downwards.
It will be also interesting to note that it is on the elevated
ridge which carries the avicularia; and, further, it shows the
intercalary method of growth as well as the formation of an
incomplete row of zocecia. Altogether this figure gives the
general features of what really takes place in the species.

The slit which indicates the formation of a new cell in-
variably has an avicularium below, with the mandible
pointing downward at first; but as growth goes on this is
usually forced to one side of the mouth, though occasionally
it remains in front,

6. Bipora umbonata (Haswell).
Eschara umbonata, Haswell, op. cit. p. 41, pl. ii. figs. 5, 6.

Zoarium free, bilaminate, flat, simple or forming trilobate
expansions; ‘‘surface ornamented with numerous rounded
yi

20 Mr. T. Whitelegge on Australian Polyzoa.

knobs of various sizes ;’’ zooecia immersed, directed towards
(what appears to be the base) the primary part of the zoarium.
Oral aperture rounded above, with a wide sinus below; peri-
stomial orifice nearly round, margin slightly elevated, with a
subcircular pore on the upper border; an avicularium on each
side of the mouth, frequently a third one in front; mandible
triangular, generally pointing upwards.

Loc. Holborn Island (20 fathoms).

There are three specimens in the collection of the Austra-
lian Museum, one a flat piece 4 of an inch by } of an inch,
the other two have each three lobes; the central one in the
larger specimen is 7s from base to summit, and the lateral
lobes 4 of an inch in length, and nearly as wide; all the
lobes taper a little outwards, The “ semilunar slit” is not
seen in any of the specimens, but the peristomial opening 1s,
I believe, formed in the same manner as in the others ;
several of the zocecial openings are closed by a calcareous
plate, and have the appearance of young zocecia; the plate is
seen to be thinner at the margin; probably the slit-like
opening is not formed.

Mr. Haswell’s description of the mouth of this species
clearly shows that it was the anterior pore which he men-
tions as the sinus in the lower lip. He says ‘‘mouth varying
in form, the lower lip sometimes straight, sometimes with a
small sinus, sometimes with a rounded central lobe.” This
exactly describes the appearance of the anterior oral pore in
various stages of perfection. ‘The peristomial orifice with the
pore broken down closely resembles the figure given on
pl. xlv. fig. 8, in Hincks’s ‘ British Marine Polyzoa,’ of
Schizoporella hyalina ; and it was only after repeated exami-
nation that I saw the true oral aperture, owing to a belief
that the pore and the opening represented it. Although the
true aperture is not deeply immersed, it is difficult to see at
first on account of the peristome obstructing the view; but
when once seen it presents a well-formed sinus in the lower
lip at the opposite end of the mouth to that of the pore. It is
from the apparent double character of the mouth that the
name Bipora is given to the genus.

7. Bipora (?) elegans.
Fiabellopora elegans, V’Orb., Waters, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. Feb. 1887,
p- 71.
Zoarium free, bilaminate, flabelliform in large examples
ee, ee eg upset
4 an inch wide by % of an inch deep, with a projecting
nodule in the centre on the concave side; zocecia wholly

Mr. T. Whitelegge on Australian Polyzoa. 21

immersed, erect, side by side, their bases separated by a thin
ceancellated layer, forming alternate rows, and directed towards
the projecting nodule; oral aperture rounded above, with a
rather wide sinus below; peristome slightly higher above the
mouth than below; orifice nearly round, with a median pore
above, a depressed avicularium on each side, usually below
the mouth, occasionally another in front; mandibles subcir-
cular, pointing upwards and outwards, a number of irregular
avicularian cells on the nodular projection similar to those on
B, angulopora.

Loc. Port Jackson.

If this species should prove to be different (as I think it
will) from the fossil form described by d’Orbigny as Flabello-
pora elegans, it can remain as B. elegans, Waters. D’Or-
bigny’s figure (Paléont. Frane. Bryoz. tom. v. pl. 661) cer-
tainly resembles the recent form. The same may be said of
B. umbonata, which comes nearest to d’Orbigny’s species ; if
it were not for the elevated nodules, the last-named might
pass for the fossil species. I have examined about nine
specimens in all, two of them being less than 4 of an inch in
their greatest diameter, which, when placed on their convex
edges and viewed from above, greatly resemble B. angulo-
pora, and if a little less compressed might be mistaken for that
species at first sight. The avicularian cells are present in
both specimens on the nodular projection and the semilunar
slits on various parts of the zoarium. ‘The slits can be seen
ever in very old specimens scattered about on the surface.
It is not difficult to trace the stages by which the conical
form might be changed into the flabellate, and afterwards
into the lobate form, which has probably taken place. If
we imagine the internal cancellated layer to become less
developed, accompanied by a gradual compression and the
addition of a few more rows of zocecia towards the outer mar-
gin, we can easily see that we should have a form like B.
elegans, which is in reality only a flattened cone with the
base widely extended, and in B. umbonata the flabellate form
is changed into a lobate one by the non-development of a
portion of the colony. So that the broad non-divided end of
the last-named species and the nodular portion of the former
correspond with the apex of the cone.

PostscripT.— Since the foregoing was written I have been
fortunate in obtaining some living examples of Bipora philip-
pineasis (Busk), which I have had under observation for three

22 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on two new Chameleons

days. Nearly every specimen possesses a pair of tubular
filaments inserted on each side of the zoarium, about midway
between the margin and the summit on the upper surface ;
each tube is about 3 an inch long, and in some cases attached
to the tubes of an annelid, and in others to fragments of
shell. Some of the specimens have begun to form new
attachment-tubes, which are about three times the height of
the ocecia. Each tube is seen to be lined with a layer of sar-
code similar to that seen in the growing offshoots in Victorella
pavida, S. Kent, consisting of granular and fusiform bodies
which form a kind of network. ‘The tube appears to grow
out of an avicularium either at the side or in front of the
zocecial orifice. After repeatedly counting the number of
tentacles I find that they vary from thirteen to fifteen. The
pore above the mouth is covered by a membrane, and the
marginal row of zoccia have the peristome produced below
into an acute, triangular, hyaline point.

I1].—Description of two new Chameleons from Nossi Bé,
* Madagascar. By G. A. BOULENGER.

[Plate II.]

Chameleon Guenthert. (Pl. II. fig. 1, ¢; fig. 2, .)

Casque elevated posteriorly, with strong, curved parietal
crest ; the distance between the commissure of the mouth and
the extremity of the casque equals the distance between the
end of the snout and the posterior border of the orbit ; lateral
crest strong and distinct all round the head, strongest and
tubercular on the canthi rostrales; upper head-scales very
unequal in size; the snout terminating in the male in a
short, horizontal, bony process, broader than long, half as long
as the diameter of the eye, concave above (like the frontal
region, of which it is the continuation), and notched mesially ;
a mere indication of this rostral process in the female ; casque
angular posteriorly; no trace of occipital lobes. Body
covered with moderate-sized granules intermixed with nume-
rous slightly enlarged ones. A dorsal crest of large conical
tubercles, stronger in the male than in the female; a strong
ventral crest, interrupted from or subcontinuous with a less
developed gular crest. No tarsal process. Tail longer than
head and body. Uniform black.

Jrom Nosst Bé, Madagascar 23

Shc :
millim, millim.
PRQUAIION tH g Pete eet nds. wore 260 237
From end of snout to extremity of man-

CHEST Ba heater Sle 0 2 30 27
From end of snout to extremity of casque 41 33
Greatest width between lateral cranial

CRESLISSS Gina 10 COIR eR IAS oes 16 13-
Depth of skull (mandible included) .... 27 21
Mitr CINRCa Sears fee ek cove caer 19 16
Brand ea Sire Meets. a Set £0 0 Se 95 80
bays seis Go G8 Ac saat tae eae 21 17
TAI asset spore, aid o/s MM ow aes leie url Mio Secure 135 120

Several specimens, male, female, half-grown, and young.

Chameleon Betigert. (Pl. II. fig. 3.)

Casque scarcely elevated posteriorly ; no well-marked
crests ; occiput convex, forehead concave ; upper head-scales
very unequal in size; a compressed, rounded, scaly dermal
lobe on the end of the snout in both sexes, as in C. nasutus ;
the length of this appendage a little less than the diameter of
the eye ; a rather large occipital dermal lobe, not notched
mesially. Back and sides with unequal-sized, small, flat
granules; ventral granules equal; limbs with scattered,
distinctiy enlarged, round, flat tubercles; male with a dorsal
crest of widely separated, isolated, soft spines ; no gular nor
ventral crest. No tarsal process. Tail a little longer than
head and body. A blackish streak on each side of the head,
passing through the eye; male with a light lateral band.

millim, millim.

pi atalwlemers hig. pvlorekstse ey neice att etallcnc 110 o4
Marre U reg Ole ROU es see tpctevers wore: teaches asic 18 15
Rostral’ appendares:). 2)... 2.6 we. ee 4 3
WVitclEhy Of MEAG TIO S522 Se. Pao o Me 8 7
TEC: acters eo Sree a ge ae eA Ta 37 35
DU Ne oa coe Oo 6 oe Steck ae ean ce oe 8 7
Ania Peas seas hase deren nid oo ola io ORS Pee vfs 5D 47

Three specimens, two males and one female.

Na)

4 Prof. A. Heilprin on the

1V.—On a rare American Newt, Molge meridionalis, Cope.

By G. A. BOULENGER.

Tue Natural-History Museum has obtained from Mr. W.
Taylor, of San Diego, Texas, three specimens of a newt
noticed by Cope in 1880 (Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. no. 17,
p. 80) under the name of Diéemyctylus miniatus, Raf., subsp.
meridionalis, from south-western Texas and Matamoras,
Mexico. A comparison with the numerous specimens of Molge
vtridescens (=D. miniatus) in the Museum convinces me
that the southern form deserves to rank as a distinct species,
to be called Molge meridionalis. One structural difference
noticed by Cope is that the outer finger is more than half as
long as the penultimate, while in JL virddescens it is less
than half as long. To this character I have to add that the
head is more depressed, broader, with the lores less vertical,
in fact very similar to that of /. alpestris. The gular fold is
strongly marked (absent or scarcely distinct in J. viridescens).
The colour, in spirit, is olive above, with lighter marblings
and small black spots; yellow inferiorly with round black
spots, which are larger than in J/. virddescens. ‘The largest
specimen, a female, measures 55 millim. from snout to cloaca.

Prof. Cope notices “that the presence of the temporal
pits cannot be used as a definition of the genus Diemyctylus,
since they are as often wanting as present.” I find that
these three large pits are present in all male and absent or
very small in all female specimens I have examined. They
are the openings to so many small pouches directed back-
wards, the coating of which is strongly glandular. What the
object of these secretory organs is, 1s unknown, and may per-
haps long remain so, judging by the analogous case of the
femoral pores of lizards, the use of which is still unexplained.
Considering that JZ. viridescens is as common in the Eastern
and Central States as M/. vulgaris in Northern and Central
Europe, it is to be hoped that American zoologists will soon
pay attention to this point.

V.—On the Affinity of the North-American Lizard-
Fauna. By Prot. ANcrLo HErmprin.

Tue November number of the ‘Annals and Magazine of
Natural History ’ contains an article under the above heading
im which Mr. Boulenger seeks to invalidate my conclusions

Affinity of the North-American Lizard- Fauna. 25

as to the non-neotropical character of the North-American
Lacertilian fauna, as set forth in my ‘ Geographical and Geo-
logical Distribution of Animals’ and elsewhere. Mr. Bou-
lenger quotes the following paragraph from the work above
mentioned :— M. Boulenger has recently attempted to show
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. August 1885) that the North- and
South-American Lacertilian faunas are, strictly speaking,
one, the Neogean, a conclusion which is not borne out by the
facts of distribution. The misconception arises from the
incorporation of the tract lying south of the line indicated
above [a line drawn from San Francisco to Galveston, in
Texas] with the North-American faunal region proper, while
in reality it is a transition-tract more nearly Neotropical in
character than Nearctic.”

“What the facts are,” Mr. Boulenger then continues to
say, “that do not bear out my conclusion the author omits to
state, unless they be the presence of the ‘Old-World genus of
skinks, Humeces,’ and of the glass snake (Ophisaurus).”

The facts relating to the question in point are fully set
forth in my paper on “ The Value of the ‘ Nearctic’ as one
of the Primary Zoological Regions,” published in the ‘ Pro-
ceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia’
for 1882 (pp. 331, 832), to which reference is made in the
preface of my work on distribution. An analysis of the
families and species of the North-American Lacertilian fauna
there given shows two facts very distinctly, which I have
stated as follows:—1. The South-American (Neotropical)
forms of Lacertilians—Teide, Iguanidee, Anolidee—stop almost
emmediately on the borders of the Nearctic region, sending
but an extremely limited number of representatives beyond
the Sonoran subregion [the transition-tract|; and 2. The
very great paucity of Lacertilian forms in general throughout
the great mass of the North-American continent. Excluding
the Sonoran and Calitornian provinces, and the immediate
border-line of the region, there would appear to be in all but
about twenty species of Nearctic Saurians, thirteen of which
belong to the Uld-World genus Eumeces! ‘The most widely
diffused form of North-American Humeces, moreover, is a
Palearctic species *! A further relationship with the Palee-
arctic fauna is maintained by Ophisaurus, the only New-
World representative of the glass snakes.

The range of a few species has been extended since the
above analysis was formulated ; but the facts stand substan-
tially as stated, and fully bear out the general conclusions of

* More recently separated as a distinct species by Boulenger.

26 On the Affinity of the North-American Lizard-Fauna.

the paper—that the North-American Lacertilian fauna proper
is quite distinct from the South-American, and that a tran-
sition-fauna, leaning towards the Neotropical, exists on the
border-land of the two realms. ‘This transition-fauna is
characterized by the large development of the Neotropical
family Iguanide, whose representatives, however, belong not
to South-American genera, but to genera (Phrynosoma, Scelo-
porus) whose species are almost exclusively restricted to the
transition-tract in question and to a comparatively insignifi-
cant region lying immediately north and south of it. The
number of species that transgress these boundaries is limited,
although a very few go considerably beyond them. None of
the species of Sceloporus, which, according to Boulenger’s
catalogue, numbers some twenty-five species, has a range
extending south beyond Costa Rica, and of but few does the
range extend beyond Mexico and Guatemala. Similarly,
none of the species of Phrynosoma, of which there are enume-
rated some twelve species, penetrate beyond Mexico. Neither
of these two genera, therefore, can be said to be Neotropical,
nor can they any more be considered to be Nearctic (Hol-
arctic), since the number of forms penetrating much beyond
the transition-tract above referred to—transitional in other
respects beyond what is indicated by the Lacertilian fauna
alone—is extremely limited. The peculiar Iguanoid forms,
then, are largely distinctive of the transition-tract, whose
fauna they serve to. characterize.

Removing this element trom the North-American Lacer-
tilian fauna, we have remaining only some twenty species, of
which, as I have shown, thirteen belong to the genus Humeces.
Mr. Boulenger objects to Humeces being considered an Old-
World genus ; but surely it is a genus largely developed in
the Old World, and one that is practically excluded from the
Neotropical fauna. In his most recent catalogue Boulenger
recognizes some thirty-one species, of which thirteen belong
to the United States, eight are Mexican, eight Eur-Asiatic,
one African, and one insular (Bermudas), ‘The range of no
western species extends further south than Campeche. These
being the facts, does not the genus Humeces in the North-
American fauna indicate a distinct relationship with the fauna
of the Old World (Kur-Asiatic)? Surely it indicates no
affinity with the South-American (Neotropical) fauna. Fur-
thermore, the most broadly distributed North-American
Eumeces (L. fasciatus) is a torm most nearly related to an
Asiatic species (4. marginatus, Japan), with which, indeed,
it has generally been united. What, then, are the features
which unite the North-American fauna with the South-

On the Reproduction of Kuglypha alveolata, Duj. = 27

American? So far as I am aware these still remain to be
discovered.

When, however, Mr. Boulenger asserts (J. c. p. 346) that
“A list of the lizards of any northern district of the United
States would equally well support my [Boulenger’s] view,”
I can but say that this statement so far traverses beyond the
facts that it can only be met with a most emphatic denial. In
the whole of the United States east of a north and south line
connecting the mouth of the Rio Grande with Canada, or
over an area of approximately 1,500,000 square miles, there is
scarcely a single lizard which has any Neotropical affinities
whatever, and still less so in any northern section of this area.

In the fact that some four or five species of lizards, of a some-
what southern type (Sceloporus, Phrynosoma), range as far
north as British Columbia there is about as much reason for
uniting the North- and South-American Lacertilian faunas as
there is for uniting the equivalent bird-faunas because along
the same limited tract several species of humming-birds range
deep into Canada (and Alaska!), or because a parrot and the
scarlet tanager (&c.) are found in the eastern and southern
United States. Similarly we might unite the northern and
southern mammalian faunas on the equally obvious ground
that the couguar, skunk, and bear range deep into South
America, and, conversely, the peccary, opossum, &c. far into
North America.

VI.— Contributions to the Knowledge of the Reproduction of
Euglypha alveolata, Dw. By Dr. F. BLOCHMANN *.

[Plate IV.]

In the glasses with mud from the two basins in the garden
of the Schwetzinger Schloss, in which I formerly detected
Heematococcus Biitschlii, the Huglyphe, which were at first
not very numerous, increased considerably. This induced
me to seek for divisional stages, which also occurred in abun-
dance. Mr. Schewiakoff undertook to submit the more deli-
cate processes in the division, especially that of the nucleus,
to a thorough investigation, and his memoir upon this subject
will appear shortly. For my own part I made an observa-

* Translated by W. S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘ Morphologisches
Jahrbuch,’ Band xiii, pp. 1738-188 (1887).

28 Dr. F. Blochmann on the

tion upon this occasion which, when followed out, led to
results which were of some interest, and these I describe in the
following pages. ‘They may in some respects serve as a sup-
plement to Gruber’s beautiful investigations *, by which the
process of division in the shell-bearing freshwater Rhizopods
was first thoroughly elucidated.

As is well known, the process of division runs as follows :—
In an animal which has already formed the necessary shell-
lamelle in its interior the protoplasm is protruded from the
orifice in the form of a small bud covered with shell-lamellee.
This flowing forth of the plasma continues until the mass
outside the original shell, now covered with the new shell-
lamella, has attained the same volume and the same shape as
the original animal. During this process the nucleus also
divides and one half of it passes into the newly produced
individual, so that in this way two perfectly similar animals
are produced, and these soon separate from each other to live
as individual animals.

However, the separation of the animals thus produced does
not always occur; but by no means unfrequently we may
observe a very remarkable process, by which, while it is true
that two shells and two nuclei are produced, only a single
animal proceeds from such a division.

Thus after the division has taken place quite normally and
the nucleus of the newly formed individual has occupied its
ordmary position at the bottom of the new shell, the proto-
plasm is retracted out of the newly formed shell (Pl. IV.
fig. 1), still, however, remaining attached to the bottom of the
shell, so that from this point a comparatively thin cord stretches
towards the aperture along the axis of the shell, passing
about in the middle of the shell into a larger mass of plasma.
‘The greater part of this cord appears quite hyaline, containing
only extremely fine granules; this is caused by the position
here of the nucleus (”*), which has now become nearly cylin-
drical.

In the principal mass of the plasma, especially between the
two orifices now pressed close together, active flow-pheno-
mena are observable, just such as were also observed by
Gruber during division. Upon continuing the observation it
is seen that the cord in the new shell is drawn out into a thin
thread, while the nucleus again acquires its regularly spherical
form (fig. 2).

This thread is now seen to become alternately thicker and

* “Der Theilungsvorgang bei Euglypha alveolata,” in Zeitschy. fiir
wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxy. pp. 451-439 (1881). See ‘ Annals,’ ser. 5, vol. ix.

p. 155,

Reproduction of Kuglypha-alveolata, Duy. 29

thinner, by the flux and reflux of plasma from the large
plasma-mass. All at once, however, the thread becomes
thinner and thinner, until it is suddenly ruptured. At the
same moment a distinct reticulated structure (fig. 3) makes
its appearance suddenly and sharply in the nucleus (n”), which
was previously perfectly limpid, like the nuclei of Euglypha
in general, a structure such as we can call forth in the normal
nucleus by the addition of acetic acid or any other reagent
causing coagulation. From this, as also from the further
behaviour of this nucleus, which will be immediatelv described,
it follows with great certainty that at the moment when the
plasma-thread is ruptured it also dies. This fact is of parti-
cular interest on account of the close relation of the nucleus to
the plasma which is proved by it. The nucleus therefore is
not capable of retaining its normal vital condition even for a
moment when isolated from the plasma.

The nucleus thus thrown off remains enclosed in a thin
layer of plasma, as shown in the figures ; this appears to be
only the peculiar plasma-zone which may be detected even
in normal individuals in the neighbourhood of the nucleus,
and which also behaves towards colouring-matters differently
from the rest of the plasma.

After the cell-nucleus of the newly formed individual has
been thrown off in this way two cases may occur. In the
first case the plasma withdraws itself completely from shell
II., and the normal animal separates from it. In water which
contains numerous * Huglyphe in process of division there are
therefore always empty shells which show at the bottom the
expelled cell-nucleus as a yellowish strongly refractive cor-
puscle.

The second case, which probably occurs just as frequently,
is represented in figs. 5-9. In this, after the plasma has
been retracted almost entirely into the old shell, it suddenly
begins again to flow over towards II., during which process
one (fig. 5) or more thickish or very fine pseudopodia are
formed, which move about, as if groping, through the cavity
of shell II. As soon as they meet with the expelled cell-
nucleus they flow round it, just like any foreign body serving
for food. It becomes detached from the bottom of the shell
where it was seated, and is carried away with the plasma,
now again flowing back towards I. (figs. 6-8). We see that
it is finally drawn into shell I. Here it may now remain

* Tn our waters the animals were so numerous that every drop taken
from the bottom of the vessel and put upon a slide showed twenty or
thirty specimens,

30 Dr. F. Blochmann on the

until the shells have separated, and then be again finally
expelled, or this expulsion may take place before the separa-
tion of the shells (fig. 9). During its sojourn in the plasma
of the intact animal the nucleus n® changes its constitution.
At first it still distinctly shows the reticulated structure which
appeared in it at the time of the rupture of the plasma-thread
uniting it with the body of the animal. Gradually this struc-
ture disappears, and the nucleus acquires a more homogeneous
strongly shining appearance, while its outlines become irre-
gular (figs. 8 and 9). It therefore has exactly the aspect
which is presented by other nuclei which have perished.
Therefore it is like the nuclei undergoing degeneration during
the conjugation of Infusoria, or like the nuclei of Protozoa
which have been devoured by other Protozoa and partially
digested. As already stated, the nucleus is finally again
expelled. Then, however, the plasmatic envelope which it
originally possessed seems to be lost. It has therefore no
doubt been digested, while the nuclear substance itself appears
not to be assimilable.

In this process therefore there results from a division which,
so far as one can judge, was normally commenced and carried
on, only a single individual, the plasma becoming retracted
again from the new-formed shell into the old one, while one
of the nuclei is thrown off.

If we meet with a pair of animals, such as is represented in
fig. 1, and observe in it the processes described, of course it
seems a very probable notion that the two animals have
united by copulation. Now actual copulation and conjuga-
tion * do really occur, as I shall show further on. It is,
however, easy to distinguish a conjugation-pair from one pro-
duced by division. In the animals united by conjugation
there is very generally a mass of shell-lamell in the plasma,
while this is not the case in the products of division, as it is
exactly the superfluous shell-plates of the parent animal that
are employed in the formation of the new shell. Further, in
stained preparations the young shell (IJ. in the figures) is
usually recognized with facility, because the individual plates
have separated from each other at different places. In conju-
gated animals I have always found, placed before the nucleus,

* Ag will be shown hereafter, both copulation (in which the plasma-
bodies of two animals become completely fused together to form a new
individual) and conjugation (in which the animals, after long-continued
union, separate again from each other, and in which hitherto no demon-
strable changes have been observed) do occur. For the sake of sim-
plicity I speak here always of conjugation-pairs, as they certainly con-
stitute the great majority of the united states which come under obser-
vation.

Reproduction of Euglypha alveolata, Duj. 31

the dark zone formed by aggregation of granules, which is
wanting in freshly divided animals. In the latter the granules
are uniformly distributed throughout the plasma, and for this
reason and on account of the inception of water requisite
during division, the plasma of divided individuals appears
much lighter, so that with a little practice one may distin-
guish a divisional pair from a conjugation-pair even with the
lens.

The consideration of all these differences would not, how-
ever, completely exclude mistakes. To attain this object I
isolated animals in which the plasma was just beginning to
protrude from the aperture as small buds covered with shell-
plates, and which therefore were certainly at the beginning of
division. As the division advanced, the division of the
nucleus might also-be observed with facility in living animals.
By this mode of investigation all mistakes are excluded. In
this way I isolated and observed a great number of Huglyphe,
and it appeared that after the conclusion of the division either
the two individuals separated and continued to live indepen-
dently, as was already observed by Gruber (/oc. czt.), or that
the process above described took place, so that only one indi-
vidual resulted, which, indeed, contained nearly the whole of
the plasma of the parent animal, but only half its nuclear
substance.

I have investigated the most different stages of both pro-
cesses of division and of nucleus-expulsion in preparations
killed with chrom-osmium-acetic acid and stained in different
ways, without, however, observing in them anything essen-
tial more than in fresh objects or objects treated with 1 per
cent. acetic acid.

If we ask ourselves what significance this remarkable pro-
cess has for the animal, it is at present very difficult to find
any answer that may be satisfactory even to a limited extent.
In the individuals thus produced I have observed nothing
remarkable ; they lived for a time in the preparations like
others, then perished or became encysted.

At the first glance one might imagine a comparison of this
process of nucleus-expulsion with the removal of the products
of division of the nucleoles in the conjugation of the Infusoria.
In connexion with this Prof. Biitschli has suggested that
possibly such animals as had lost in this way the half of their
original nuclear substance afterwards proceeded to copulation.
Hitherto, however, we have no positive observations in favour
of this view. But in the most recent observations of Maupas*
upon the conjugation of the Infusoria we may find some sup-

* ‘Comptes Rendus,’ June 28 and September 6, 1886,

32 Dr. F. Blochmann on the

port for such a supposition. According to them a nunber of
the divisional products of each nucleolus would perish, as
indeed was previously known, whilst of the two nucleolar
derivatives remaining in each of the conjugated animals one
would pass over into the other animal and become amalga-
mated with that remaining in it. By this, as Maupas points
out, the conjugation of the Infusoria is brought into closer
relation to the process of fecundation in the Metazoa than was
previously possible.

According to this line of thought we might find a certain
relation between the process described in Huglypha and the
formation of the direction-corpuscles in the ova of the Meta-
zoa. In both cases the final result is the removal of a part
of the nuclear substance. In both cases this is effected by
an indirect division of the nucleus connected with a cell-
division. But whether these suppositions have any real
foundation must be left to further extended investigations to
show.

Similar processes to those here described in the case of
Euglypha have not hitherto, so far as I know, been noticed in
any other Rhizopod. I think, however, that careful investi-
gation will show a wider diffusion of these processes. Thus
I feel certain that the supposed copulation-stage of Diflugia
globulosa, Duj., described by Jickeli *, was a similar case of
retrogressive division with expulsion of the nucleus. He
states expressly that one of the two shells (7. e. the newly
produced one) was clearer, and that in forty-eight hours the
whole of the plasma, originally filling both shells, had passed
over into the darker (¢. e. the original) one, in which careful
examination showed two normal nuclei and one in course of
disintegration.

All this agrees with the processes observed by me in
Euglypha. We should therefore have to understand that
Jickeli discovered a completely finished division of the Diflu-
gia, that this then retrograded, the plasma withdrawing itself
from the newly formed shell, leaving behind it the nucleus,
and that it then subsequently again took up the dead nucleus.
After this had taken place the animal was killed; but the
decaying nucleus would certainly afterwards have been again
expelled.

In another case, in the formation of the resting-cysts of
Actinospherium kichhornii, Khrb.t, it has been directly

* “Ueber die Copulation von Diffugia globulosa, Duj.,” in Zool. Anz.
Jahrg. vii. pp. 449-451 (1884). Translated in ‘Annals,’ ser. 5, vol. xiy.
p- 297.

+ On the literature see Biitschli, ‘ Protozoa.’

Reproduction of Euglypha alveolata, Duy. 33

observed that two individuals just produced by division be-
come again complétely fused together. Nothing indeed is
said of an expulsion of the nucleus; but to establish the
matter with certainty an investigation specially directed to
that end would be necessary. In general, however, this
process has a very great resemblance to what occurs in
Euglypha.

I have also observed true copulation in Huglypha, but
unfortunately only in one instance, and not so thoroughly as
I could have wished.

When many Huglyphe are living together one often meets
with several animals which have placed themselves with their
shell-apertures together, and of which the plasma has become
amalgamated. As has already been stated, such conjugation-
pairs may be distinguished with certainty from the pairs pro-
duced by division. But in order to be absolutely certain in
these investigations I always got a small number (six to ten
individual animals) into the suspended drop, and observed
them here. Any conjugation-pairs that might be present
were taken out and isolated in another drop for further obser-
vation. In this way it appeared that in most cases the con-
jugation is again dissolved, without any noticeable change
having taken place in the animals. ‘To see whether any
changes were perceptible in the nucleus | examined many
stained preparations of animals united in pairs or several
together, but always without result.

The separated animals also behaved differently ; some of
them divided normally, while others became encysted like
ordinary individuals.

Once, however, I observed the following :—In a prepara-
tion with a number of individual animals there were two united
pairs at a quarter to six in the evening of the 26th May of
last year (1886). Both pairs were isolated in suspended
drops. On May 27 no alteration was observed; so also at
seven in the morning of May 28. But about seven in the
evening I found the condition shown in the accompanying
woodcut. While one pair was still unaltered, the plasma of
the two other individuals (I. and II.) had united, and had
formed from the shell-lamellze previously in the interior of the
two animals a new large shell (III.) of somewhat irregular
shape, at the aperture of which the two original shells, com-
pletely empty, were attached. The length of this newly
formed shell was 100 w and its greatest breadth 67 uw, while
the average of twenty shells taken at random from different
culture-vessels amounted to 82 w for the length and 47 w for
the greatest breadth. From this it appears that the newly

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol.i. 3

34 Dr. F. Blochmann on the

formed shell of the individual produced by copulation ex-
ceeded the normal measurement by about 20 mw in each
dimension.

x 300.

In the large animal IIT. a nucleus was visible in the usual

ates As to the behaviour of the two nuclei of the copu-
ating animals I. and IJ., I could make no observations owing

to the nature of the case. The most natural supposition seems
tome to be that the two nuclei were fused together. The
large individual crept about briskly in the drop for several
days and was finally encysted on June 2. The two other
conjugated animals in the same preparation separated again
from each other, and one of them divided in the normal
manner,

In this instance, therefore, there can be no doubt that actual
copulation occurs in Huglypha, only it seems to be compara-
tively rare; and hence its exact observation must depend
upon favourable circumstances, which, considering the import-
ance of the matter, is much to be regretted.

When through recent investigations, and especially by
Gruber’s memoirs, the process of division in the freshwater
Monothalamia was elucidated in all essential particulars, it
appeared only tdo natural that there should be a great ten-
dency to assume, as indeed had even previously been done by
Hertwig and Lesser *, that all statements as to the copulation
and conjugation of the shelled freshwater Rhizopods were
founded upon such divisional stages misunderstood. In many
cases this might probably apply, in some perhaps not. Of
course from the figures and descriptions it will be difficult or
even impossible in special cases to decide in favour of one or

* “Ueber Rhizopoden und denselben nahestehenden Organismen,” in
Arch. fiir mikr. Anat. Bd. x. Suppl. pp. 35-248 (1879).

Reproduction of Kuglypha alveolata, Duy. 3)

the other view. In fact there is not much use in testing the
extant instances for this purpose, as usually some special
mode of increase connected with the conjugation was observed,
although not with certainty. In one instance, however, such
a special kind of multiplication after an undoubted conjugation
seemed to be very probable, namely in Arcella vulgaris,
Ehrbg., according to Biitschli’s observations *. In this it
was observed that in two out of three conjugated Arcella
amoeboid offshoots were produced in great numbers after the
dissolution of the conjugation J.

In my subject I have hitherto observed nothing of the kind,
although I examined numerous animals united in pairs and
several together, both living and in stained preparations.

The proof here adduced of true copulation in Buglypha, in
which from two normal individuals a single animal agreeing
with them in structure but exceeding them in size is produced,
is, however, of importance. I rejoice that in this way I have
made the first step towards the confirmation of the supposition
expressed by Biitschli in his work on the Protozoa, that, as
in the other Protozoa, so also in the Rhizopoda, the processes
of copulation and conjugation might have assigned to them
an important part in reproduction.

In the case of shelled Rhizopods, so far as I know, an
actual copulation has never previously been demonstrated,
although it is sufficiently well known in the nearly allied
Heliozoa.

Finally, it may further be indicated that in the process of
copulation in Luglypha alveolata we cannot overlook a certain
resemblance to the formation of axospores in the Diatomacez.

Although, as is to be expected, future investigations will
demonstrate the wider diffusion of conjugation and copulation
in the Rhizopoda, we may nevertheless already say with con-
siderable certainty that they will never occur with the same
regularity as in many Flagellata and Infusoria, but that they
will always be rather occasional phenomena, the importance
of which, however, must not on that accgunt be underesti-
mated, as in any case they certainly are the first commence-
ment of processes to which, in the life of animals in general,
an extraordinarily great, although still by no means clear,
significance belongs.

* Arch, fiir mikr. Anat. Bd. x1. pp. 459-467 (1874).

+ I have convinced myself of the occurrence of conjugation in Arcella.
In a vessel which contained enormous quantities of Arcelle I found by
no means unfrequently two animals with perfectly similar deep brown

shells united, while the pairs produced by division, which were present
in abundance, were readily recognized by the nearly colourless shell of

one offshoot.
3%

36 Mr. A. 8S. Woodward on the

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV.

All the figures, with the exception of fig. 4, are from the living subject.
Fig. 4 is froma preparation treated with | per-cent. aceticacid. KEnlarge-
ment 400 diameters.

I. First individual (parent animal).

H. Second individual, produced by division from I.
n', nucleus of the first animal.

nm, nucleus of the second animal.

CY, contractile vacuole.

Fig. 1. The plasma begins to withdraw itself from the animal II., pro-
duced by division from I. At the bottom of the shell it is still
firmly attached and encloses the nucleus x?, which is somewhat
elongated.

Fig. 2. The process is further advanced, and the plasma is drawn out into
a thin thread. The nucleus 2 has again assumed its normal
form.

Fig. 3. The thread is ruptured and the nucleus n? shows distinet reticular
structure; it is dead.

Fig. 4. The expelled nucleus n* of another animal, after treatment with
acetic acid of 1 per cent.

Fig. 5, The plasma is flowing again into shell IT., and emits a pseudo-
podium towards the nucleus 7.

Fig. 6. The pseudopodium has flowed round the nucleus n*, and is
drawing it back towards shell I.

Fig. 7. This process has further advanced.

Fg. 8. The nucleus x? has lost its structure, and appears as a strongly
refractive irregular mass,

Fig. 9. The nucleus n? is again expelled.

VIT.—WNotes on the Determination of the Fossil Teeth of Mylio-
batis, wth a Revision of the English Kocene Species. By
A. SmirH Woopwarp, F.G.8., F.Z.8., of the British
Museum (Natural History).

[ Plate I.]

OF all the numerous teeth of Selachian fishes met with in a
fossil state none seem to have been studied with less satis-
factory results than those of the well-known genus Myliobatis,
Abundantly represented in nearly all the marine Tertiary
formations, detached fragments of its dentition have been
described under almost endless specific names from various
parts of the world; and the most precise measurements have
often been given, without the slightest reference to differences
of age or even to variations in the individual jaw. Occasion-

Fosstl Teeth of Myliobatis. 37

ally, moreover, the most distinguished naturalists have been
led by imperfect specimens to enumerate as specific characters
features that are wholly due to the effects of post-mortem
abrasion ; and other equally unreliable points have likewise
been emphasized, owing to misapprehensions as to their
significance and constancy.

Such mistakes are quite inevitable whenever materials are
scarce and fragmentary, and especially when the observer has
had but few recent specimens for comparative study. When,
however, it is possible to examine and compare a large series
of fossils from the same formation and locality, data are pro-
vided for much more certain and philosophical conclusions.
And as the National Collection now comprises a very large
number of the dental plates of Myliobatis from the London
Clay of Sheppey and the Middle and Upper EHocenes of
Bracklesham and Barton, the present seems a favourable
opportunity for attempting some slight revision of the group.
Here are preserved the type specimens of nearly all the species
hitherto described from these formations, besides many other
beautiful fossils from the cabinets of Mr. Frederic Dixon, Dr,
Bowerbank, Sir Philip Egerton, and the late Karl of Ennis-
killen ; and the whole are suggestive of some interesting con-~
siderations, which do not appear as yet to have been sufficiently
recognized, at least by those who have examined the genus
from a paleontological point of view. I therefore propose, in
the present communication, to offer a few remarks upon the
subject, based upon a careful study of the fossils [ have
recently been able to make; and the conclusions will lead
to some slight reduction in the number of specific types
supposed by previous authors to be represented.

Specific Characters afforded by Dentition.

Referring in the first place to the more general questions,
it will be convenient to commence with a notice of the decep-
tive appearances due to post-mortem abrasion. ‘To this may
be added some remarks upon individual variations and differ-
ences in the teeth corresponding to differences of age. And
the discussion will appear to result in determining at least
three points of certain taxonomic value.

One of the most conspicuous of the accidental characters
is the granular or punctate ornamentation produced by the
removal of the superficial gano-dentine and the exposure of
the vertical medullary tubes. There are several specimens in
the British Museum demonstrating the process of wear and
showing portions both of the original surface and that resulting

38 Mr. A. S. Woodward on the

from its removal (e. g. no. 25658) ; and the circumstance has
already been briefly noted by Le Hon*. Agassiz fT, how-
ever, founded the species I. punctatus upon such an abraded
fragment probably referable to the upper jaw of JZ. striatus,
and Delfortrie{ and Issel § have more recently described
fossils that appear to be similarly imperfect under the names
of M. microrhizus and M. granulosus.

A less amount of abrasion of the grinding-surface often
imparts to it a remarkable smoothness, which has also been
occasionally relied upon as a specific character in determining
dental plates. All the types of JZ. Diwoni, for example, are
remarkably smooth; and though this feature was not espe-
cially alluded to in the original diagnoses of Agassiz and
Dixon, the circumstance seems to have been sometimes
regarded as an essential peculiarity of the species ; fossils
truly belonging to this form, but having the grinding-surface
preserved, and thus showing striations, have been wrongly
referred to JZ. striatus, as is proved by specimens in the
National Collection. The specific name of striatus in fact
might have been as appropriately applied to M. Dixoni and
others as to the form that now bears it, if only unworn speci-
mens had originally been available; though it so happens
that other peculiarities in the species thus named render it
nevertheless valid.

A further efiect of post-mortem wear, or even perhaps of
masticatory trituration, has led to the founding of still another
species by Agassiz—the so-called M. suturalis||. This is
described as possessing teeth in all respects similar to those of
M. toliapicus, but united by jagged sutures rather than
straight edges. Such a peculiarity is to be observed more or
less in all the specific types when the dentition is deeply
worn, as already hinted by Issel and Le Hon, and the frag-
ment just referred to may undoubtedly be placed in the well-
known species from Sheppey. Leidy’s JZ. serratus {] may
also be mentioned in this connexion, the chief character in
the diagnosis being similarly misleading.

Among individual variations liable to be quoted as of

* H. le Hon, ‘ Préliminaires d’un Mémoire sur les Poissons Tertiaires
de Belgique,’ 1871, p. 18.

+ L. Agassiz, Rech. Poiss. Foss. vol. iii. p. 822, pl. xlvii. figs. 11, 12.

} KE. Delfortrie, “Les Broyeurs du Tertiaire Aquitanien,” Actes Soc.
Linn. Bordeaux, vol. xxviii. (1871), p. 225, pl. x. fig. 37.

§ A. Issel, “Cenni sui Mylobates fossili dei terreni terziarii Italiani,”

Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, vol. x. (1877), p. 335.
|| L. Agassiz, tom. cit. p. 322, pl. xlvi. figs. 12-16. °

q J. Leidy, Journ. Acad. Nat, Sci. Philad. vol. viii, (1877), p. 289,
pl. xxxil. fig. 5,

Fossil Teeth of Myliobatis. 39

specific value the most striking perhaps is the variability
sometimes so conspicuous in the antero-posterior measurements
of the series of median teeth. This is a feature occasion-
ally exhibited in every form, and there are good illustrations
among the national fossils in dental plates of WM. Dixond and
M. toliapicus, besides another specimen originally figured by
Dixon under the name of M/. Edwardsii. In the imperfect
diagnosis of the latter species, however, the peculiarity is
mentioned as one of the leading distinctive points *.

Equally inconstant are the small differences in the antero-
posterior curvature of the median teeth, which are sometimes
referred to with undue emphasis. In some species it is true
there is a greater tendency towards the curvature of the plates
than in others, and the present materials are insufficient to
decide whether or not the sharp flexure of the extremities of
the median teeth in certain forms is likewise a more or less
fixed character; but it appears to be unsafe to rely upon the
point when the specimens for study are few and fragmentary.

A prominent feature that seems to be entirely due to the
effects of “overgrowth” has also been cited as the main
characteristic of one other fossil form—the I. irregularis of
Dixon ft. In this species the median plates are slightly more
than nine times as broad as long and very irregular both in
their borders and surface-contour. But, as will be shown in
the sequel, almost every gradation can be found between the
type specimen, which forms an extreme, and the more normal
teeth known as I. striatus; and there can thus be little
hesitation in regarding this unique form as a very large
variety of the latter—perbaps an unusually aged individual.
The same irregularity, indeed, appears to exist in the teeth of
overgrown examples of other species, e. g. MW. toliapicus ; for
a single specimen probably referable to the last-named form,
in which the ordinary adult ratio of length to breadth in the
median series is about 1: 6, exhibits a corresponding ratio of
1:7°5, and has all the inequalities of surface-contour pre-
sented by Dixon’s fine fossil.

But the most fundamental consideration of all to be taken
into account when determining the fossil dental plates of
Myliobatis relates to their mode of growth; and this I have
not found mentioned in any contribution to the paleontology
of the genus, except that of Issel quoted abovef. As

* F. Dixon, Foss. Suss. p. 199.
+ F. Dixon, op. cit. p. 199, pl. xi. fig, 15.
- t A. Issel, Ann. Mus. Genova, vol. x. (1877), p. 316.

40 Mr. A. S. Woodward on the

already pointed out by Dr. Giinther* there is no median
series of larger teeth in very young individuals, all the plates
being originally of nearly equal size and more or less regu-
larly hexangular. But as growth proceeds the middle row
begins to exhibit the familiar lateral elongation ; and with the
progressive increase in the size of the animal this peculiar
character becomes more and more marked, until in the largest
individuals—generally the most aged—there is the maximum
ratio between length and breadth. In any one species,
therefore, the median teeth have different relative dimensions
at different ages, and in dealing with the fossils it is obviously
necessary to take note of absolute size when stating these
relative measurements for diagnostic purposes.

Another peculiarity which appears to be of equal import-
ance to the Jast and can be employed with less restrictions is
the form of the small dental plates arranged in the lateral
rows. Species with broad lateral teeth seem to retain them
correspondingly broad throughout life, and those in which
they are narrow or small have them narrow and small at all
ages ; and when there is any prominent obliquity or irregu-
larity this likewise exhibits but the slightest change as the
successive plates follow one another during growth.

Lastly, the coronal surface-contour of the lower teeth may
often be relied upon to a certain extent as a diagnostic
character when the specimen is unabraded. ‘The flatness or
transversely arched form of the crown and its relative thick-
ness are features of some specific value, though even in this
respect I have found considerable variations in the young
stages of one of the English species (JZ. striatus) described
below,

Revision of English Eocene Spectese

Applying the foregoing results to the revision of the English
Kocene fossils it appears that as yet only four distinct species
can be recognized with certainty, while three others remain
incompletely defined and cannot at present be accepted. The
well-marked types are WM. Dixoni, M. striatus, M. toliapicus,
and a hitherto undiscovered form which I propose to name
M. latidens ; and it will be convenient to treat of them in the
order mentioned.

* A. Gunther ‘Catalogue of Fishes in the British Museum,’ vol. viii.
(1870), p, 489.

Fossil Teeth of Myliobatis. Al

Myliobatis Dixont, Agassiz. (PI. I. tigs. 1-4.)
1833-43. Myliobatis Dixont, Agassiz, Poiss. Foss. vol. iii. p. 319.
1833-43, Myliobatis heteropleurus, Agassiz, tom. cit. p. 323, pl. xlvii.
figs. 6-8.

1850. Myliobatis Dixvont, Dixon, Foss. Suss. p, 198, pl. x. figs. 1, 2,
pl. xi. fig. 14, pl. xii. fig. 3.

1850. Myliobatis contractus, Dixon, op. cit. p. 200, pl. xi. fig. 17.

1850, Mylhobatis striatus, Dixon (non Agass.), op. ct. pl. xii. fig. 2.

This species was named by Agassiz on inspecting the
drawings of Mr. Dixon’s fossils prepared for the well-known
‘Geology and Fossils of Sussex,’ all of which represented
the upper jaw. Its main peculiarities were rightly noted as
(i.) the strongly arched [upper] coronal surface, and (ii.) the
great length of the median teeth compared with their breadth
—the ratio rarely or never being more than 1:5. There are
three rows of lateral dental plates on each side, which are all
much elongated in shape.

The national specimens now render it possible to advance
a step further, by indicating the changes in the relative
dimensions of the median teeth resulting from differences of
age (or absolute size), and the following series of measure-
ments will show eight successive stages. In this table, as in
each of the others, the numbers are expressed as decimal
fractions of the metre, and the length in every case is approxi-
mately the average of three or more plates.

Upper Dentition of Myliobatis Dixoni.

No. of Specimen, Breadth of Length of

Brit. Mus. Median Plate. Median Plate.
I. P. 1498 4 0-026 0-007
I. P. 30444 0-035 0-010
III. 25625 0:059 0:010
IV. P. 30446 0-044 0-011
V. 25621 0-047 0-012
VI. 25614 0:058 0-013
VII. 38839 0-066 0-014
VIL. P. 454 0-094 0-020

The lower dentition has not hitherto been recognized as
such, although two or three examples have been figured under
other specific names. There can be little doubt, however,
that the following series of specimens is rightly so deter-
mined, and the measurements, it will be noticed, correspond
very closely with those of the upper dental plates. Four of
these specimens (nos. I., V., VIL, and VIII.) are shown of
the natural size in Pl. I. figs. 1-4, and a transverse section of

42 Mr. A. 8S. Woodward on the

the largest is given in the accompanying woodcut, fig. 1.

Fig. 1.

The crown is deep and the grinding-surface has a slightly
arched contour, flattened in the middle.

Lower Dentition of Myliobatis Dixoni.

No. of Specimen, Breadth of Length of
Brit. Mus. Median Plate. Median Plate.
I, P. 4457 ¢ 0:023 0:0065
II. 25660 0:027 0:008
IIL. 25620 0:030 0-008
IV. 87758 0035 0:010
V. P. 488 0:038 0°0105
VI. 25821 0:045 00105
VIL. P. 1508 a 0-047 0-010
VIII. 25641 0-061 0012 ,
IX. P, 4458 0-078 0:012

Of these fossils the third was figured by Dixon as the type
of a new species, MM. contractus, while in the sixth the original
surface is preserved—a fact which led the same author to
refer it to M. striatus. The so-called MW. heteropleurus may
‘also be placed here with considerable certainty, the median
teeth of the type specimen measuring 0°022 by 0°0065, and
the lateral teeth, so far as preserved, likewise exhibiting the
characters of those of M. Dixont. I have seen no other
fossils like this from Sheppey, and, as already stated by
Agassiz, his determination of its being derived from the
London Clay is hypothetical.

Range. Barton and Bracklesham Beds.

Myliobatis striatus, Agassiz. (PI. I. figs. 5-9.)

1833-43. Myliobatis striatus, Agassiz, Poiss. Foss. vol. iii. p. 320.
retire eas punctatus, Agassiz, tom. cit, p. 322, pl. xlvii.
figs. 11, 12.
1837. Mylhobatis striatus, Buckland, Geol. and Min. 2nd edit. vol. ii.
1, xxvii. d, fig. 14.
1850. Myliobatis trregularis, Dixon, Foss. Suss. p. 199, pl. xi. fig. 15.
1850. Myhobatis Edwardsii, Dixon, op. cit. p. 199, pl. xi. fig. 16.

A specimen of the lower dentition from the Barton Clay,

Fossil Teeth of Myliobatis. 43

figured by Buckland in his ‘ Bridgewater Treatise,’ was
selected by Agassiz as the type of this species, and described
as noteworthy for its superticial striation and the relatively
considerable breadth of the median plates. The latter are
shown to be six times as broad as long, and almost invariably
exhibit a greater or less amount of antero-posterior curvature.
The teeth of the first lateral series are somewhat longer than
broad, though both these and those of the second series are
not so elongate as in MZ. Dixont. The coronal contour is flat
in the adult, as shown in the accompanying woodcut (fig. 2),
and almost so in the young.

C—O Lee

Fig.2.

The following specimens of lower teeth seem to represent
successive stages in the dentition of this specific type, and
five (nos. I., 1I., 1V., VI., LX.) are shown in Pl. I. figs. 5-
9. Nos. 1X. to XI. are unusually large, and may be cer-
tainly regarded as pertaining to overgrown individuals,
although the last was described by Dixon as the type of a
new species, J/. irregularis.

Lower Dentition of Myliobatis striatus.

Breadth of Length of
Median Plate. Median Plate.

No. of Specimen,
Brit. Mus.

I. P. 1507 a4 0-015 0-003
If, PB. 1507 6 0:023 0:0045
Ill. P. 15054 0:031 0:006
IV. P. 50494 0:038 0:007
V. P. 3043 0:042 0:0075
VI. 38838 0:054 0-009
VII. P. 3040 0:059 0:0085
VIII. 25666 0:065 0-009
IX. 40252 0-074 0:009
X. 25667 0-080 0.009
XI. P. 423 0100 0-011

In the same series also we may evidently place the speci-
men figured by Dixon as M. Edwardsii (B. M. no. 25615),
which is intermediate in size between nos. III. and IV., and
has similar relative proportions. ‘This fossil is very much
abraded, and thus not so satisfactory as could be wished ;
but, like several others, it appears only to differ from the

44 Mr. A. 8S. Woodward on the

most typical examples of the lower dentition of M. striatus in
the straightness of the median plates—a character scarcely
sufficient to justify specific separation. It is quite possible, of
course, that it represents a form in which the successive stages
of the dentition “run parallel,” so to speak, with the earlier
stages of M. striatus, and yet indicate an animal of much
smaller dimensions when adult. But if so, it requires more
than the present paleontological evidence to establish the
fact, and M. Edwardsii must therefore be provisionally
regarded as a synonym of the species under consideration.

More uncertain are the relationships of the fossil described
by Agassiz as the type of MZ. gondopleurus*. This, there
can be no doubt, is a fragment of a lower jaw. Itisa much-
rolled specimen from the London Clay of Sheppey, having
approximately the dimensions of no. VII. of the foregoing
list, but differing in the more raised contour of the crown ;
and it 1s noteworthy that the British Museum collection com-
prises no other corresponding fragment from the same forma-
tion and locality.

Of the upper dentition of M. striatus no particulars have
hitherto been published, and, compared with the lower jaw,
it appears to be represented by but few specimens in the
National Collection. It is, however, impossible at present to
distinguish with certainty the earlier stages of these teeth
from the upper dentition of M. toliapicus, and we cannot
venture to publish measurements of more than the following
five specimens. It is not improbable also that the small fossil
shown in Pl. I. fig. 10 may be placed in the same series ;
and, if this determination be correct, it is interesting as
revealing the characters of all the three rows of lateral teeth.

Upper Dentition of Myliobatis striatus.

No. of Specimen, Breadth of Length of
Brit. Mus. Median Plate. Median Plate.
I. 25659 0:033 0:0075
IL. 40313 0-041 0-008
III. P. 1502 0-042 0:008
IV. 40312 0-065 0-010
V. P. 3047 0-068 0-009

Range. Barton and Bracklesham Beds; ? London Clay.

Myliobatis toliapicus, Agassiz.

1883-43. Myliobatis toliapicus, Agassiz, Poiss. Foss. vol. iii. p. 321,
pl. xlvii. figs. 15-20.

* L. Agassiz, tom. cit. p, 319, pl. xlvii. figs. 9, 10.

Fossil Teeth of Myliobatis. 45

1833-43. Myliobatis suturalis, Agassiz, tom. cit. p. 322, pl. xlvi. figs. 12=
16.

1833-43. Mylobatis nitidus, Agassiz, tom. cit. p. 325.

1847. Myliobatis striatus, Owen, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist, [1] vol. xix.
pp. 25-27, woodcut.

The well-known species of Sheppey is readily recognized
by the flat, comparatively thin crown of the lower dentition
and the broad, diamond-shaped lateral teeth ; but there is
little to add to the original descriptions of Agassiz, who made
known both the upper and lower jaws. The following table,
however, may be interesting, as illustrating some of the
changes in the relative dimensions of the median teeth corre-
sponding to an increase in absolute size. Specimen no. VII.,
as already mentioned (p. 39), exhibits irregularity of growth,
and probably belongs to an unusually large individual.

Lower Dentition of Myliobatis toliapicus.

No. of Specimen, Breadth of Length of
Brit. Mus. Median Plate. Median Plate.

I. P. 1507 ¢ 0-016 0:0035
II. P. 1505 0-023 0:004
III. 38854 0:027 0:005
IV. P. 1505 ¢ 0-029 0:005
V. 25669 0:032 0-005
VI. P. 8038 (type) 0-036 0:0055
VII. P. 3042 0:052 0-007

It may also be added that, so far as the type specimen of
Agassiz, M. nitidus, will allow of determination, this fossil
is referable to the upper jaw of the present species. The
name, however, was published without definition, and so has
not been employed in the nomenclature of other fossils. The
specimen consists of a connected series of six upper median
teeth, from the London Clay of Sheppey, and is now preserved
inthe British Museum in the Egerton Collection (no. P. 528).
Each dental plate has a breadth of 0°024 and measures 0°0045
in length, and all the lateral teeth are destroyed.

Range. Barton and Bracklesham Beds ; London Clay.

Myliobatis latidens, sp. noy. (PI. I. figs. 11, 12.)

A hitherto unrecognized species appears to be indicated by
some small examples of the lower dentition from Bracklesham,
and with these may also be associated one or two series of
upper median teeth from the same locality. The originals of
figs. 11 and 12 may be regarded as typical, and they are

46 On the Fossil Teeth of Myliobatis.

remarkable for the great relative breadth of their median
teeth, as shown both by the figures and the following
measurements :—

Breadth. Leneth.
I. P. 1507 g 0-020 0-002
Il, 25630 a 0:020 0:0025-0:0038

The lateral teeth are likewise comparatively broad and
irregularly hexangular, and the coronal contour is flat.

A connected series of median teeth (no. P. 1506 a), of
which each measures 0-040 by 0:0045, is also probably refer-
able to this species, and testifies to the dimensions to which
it sometimes attained; and the specimen shown in fig. 18,
though somewhat fragmentary and belonging to the opposing
dentition, may possibly be similarly determined.

The specific name of /atédens suggests itself as appropriate
for the form thus imperfectly recognizable ; and, so far as can
be judged from teeth alone, it may be regarded as allied both
to M. toliapicus and to the small fossil with narrower lateral
teeth from the Upper Miocene of Aquitaine described by
Delfortrie as MZ. dimorphus *.

Range. Bracklesham Beds.

With regard to the two species, M. gyratus and M. jugalis,
ascribed by Agassiz T to the London Clay of Sheppey, I am
unable to make any definite statement, not having examined
the types. It appears, however, almost certain that the
specimens are abraded fragments of the early dentition of one
or other of the species defined above.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.

Fig. 1. Lower dentition of Myliobatis Dixont. (No. P. 4457 c.)
Fig. 2. Ditto. (No. P. 438.)
Fig. 3. Ditto. (No. P. 1508 a.)
Fig. 4. Ditto. (No. 25641.)
Fig. 5. Lower dentition of Myliobatis striatus, (No. P. 1507 a.)
Fig. 6. Ditto. (No. P. 1507 6.)

Fig. 7. Ditto, (No. P. 5049 a.)

* E. Delfortrie, Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux, vol. xxviii. (1871), p. 227,
pl. xi. fig. 39.

t L. Agassiz, op. eit. vol. iii. pp. 828, 324, pl. xlvi. figs, 1-8, pl. xlvii.
figs. 13, 14.

On three new Moths from Kilima-njaro and Natal, 47

Fg. 8. Ditto. (No. 88888.)

Fig. 9. Ditto. (No. 40252.)

Fig. 10, Fragment probably of upper dentition of Myliobatis striatus,
showing three series of lateral teeth. (No. 25671.)

Fig. 11, Lower dentition of Mylobatis latidens. (No. P. 1507 g.)

Fig. 12. Ditto. (No. 25630 a.)

Fig. 13. Fragment of upper dentition, probably of Myliobatis latidens.
(No. 25656.)

All the figures are of the natural size. The original specimens are pre-
served in the British Museum, and the numbers refer to the
Register of the Geological Department; all are from the
Middle Eocene of Bracklesham Bay, Sussex.

VILI.—On three extremely interesting new Moths of the Family
Chalcosiide from Kilima-njaro and Natal. By ARTHUR
G. Borcer, f.L.S8., E_Z:S., &e.

Two of the following species were collected by Mr. F. J.
Jackson near Kilima-njaro and were presented by him to the
Museum.

It will be remembered that in the ‘ Annals’ for 1884 I
described a remarkable genus of moths under the name of
Pedoptila ; that in 1885 I referred to the allied genus Dora-
topteryx of Rogenhofer, and pointed out how it differed from
Pedoptila; and, lastly, in 1887 I described a third genus
of the same group under the name of Semzopétila, all three
genera being African.

Mr. Jackson has now brought to light a second species of
Doratopteryx ; and although every specimen has unfortu-
nately arrived in a more or less broken condition, I am now
in a position to point out certain inaccuracies which occur in
Herr Rogenhofer’s description of the genus.

The species figured and described by Herr Rogenhofer
proves to be a female, not a male as he supposed; the males
have distinctly pectinated antennee.

The secondaries certainly have two veins as stated, but
they have more than that; the subcostal vein passes down
the tail ; at the third fourth of its length the tail expands, and
here the subcostal vein throws off a branch which terminates
near the end of the expanded portion, whilst the main vein
continues on to the point of the tail; the median vein, which
is double, emits a short branch just before the tail, and ter-

48 Mr. A. G. Butler on three new Moths

minates just beyond the expansion, a little beyond the sub-
costal branch.

The tail very easily becomes twisted or folded, rendering
it almost impossible to see the smaller branches, and there-
fore it is only by the examination of several examples that
one is enabled to describe it correctly ; no blame therefore is
due to Herr Rogenhofer for his failure to observe them in the
single specimen before him,

Doratopteryx plumigera, sp. n. (Fig. 1.)

Primaries semitransparent fuliginous grey; the discoidal
cell and interno-basal half golden fulvous; veins black:
secondaries golden fulvous to the commencement of the tail,
the latter blackish, crossed by a belt of ochreous at the
commencement of its expansion, which is beyond the middle :
head and thorax shining pitch-brown ; collar and two spots
on the prothorax orange; abdomen dull orange, legs brown.
Expanse of wings 13-20 millim.

Mouth of the River Ozy, in dense brush; on a large bush
of jessamine, on a fearfully hot day, about 11 A.M.

From Kilima-njaro and Natal. 49

DIANEURA, gen. nov.

Wings hyaline; all angles obtuse: primaries with slightly
sinuous costal margin, oblique and slightly convex outer
margin, and slightly concave inner margin; costal vein
slender, extending to about second third of costal margin,
united to the margin by four or five slightly oblique trans-
verse veinlets, reminding one of the Sialide among the Neu-
roptera, or the Orthoptera generally ; subcostal vein strongly
developed, five-branched, the first three branches emitted at
regular intervals before the end of the cell, which is pro-
longed to the fourth fifth of the wing; the fourth and fifth
branches forking from a short footstalk; upper discocellular
veinlet long, oblique, with a short angle from which the
upper radial is emitted; lower radial scarcely separated from
a recurrent vein which divides the outer two fifths of the cell,
and appearing to form a fourth median branch ; median vein
thick, slightly bent upwards in front in continuation of the
lower discocellular veinlet; the first and second branches
wider apart than the second and third; a slender interno-
median vein running from the outer margin almost to the base ;
submedian vein slightly sinuous: secondaries subpyr iform,
the costal and outer margins sinuous, the immer margin con-
cave; costal and subcostal veins anastomosed near the base and
only separating in the form of a subcostal branch at the apical
third; subcostal vein emitting its two ordinary branches near
together from the anterior extremity of the cell, which is pro-
longed as in the primaries; the remaining veins correspond
exactly in character with those of the primaries: body rather
slender, sparsely clothed, excepting on the collar and patagia,
which are woolly, with coarse scales ; antenne widely pecti-
nated ; mouth-parts aborted ; legs short, thick, with the spines
aborted, only showing as minute processes on the middle
tibie.

Dianeura Goochit, sp.n. (Fig. 4.)

General form of Agalope, but coloured more like Ano-
motes: wings hyaline, the bases and inner borders suffused
with pale tawny, the apices and outer margins grey; veins
blackish: body reddish brown, antenne black; legs buff.
Expanse of wings 32 millim.

Natal (Gooch).

This very remarkable moth is the one referred to in my paper
on Doratopteryx (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvi.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 4

50 On three new Moths from Kilima-njaro and Natal.

p. 52) as intermediate between Pedoptila and Agalope; the
transverse veining of the costal border of primaries, never-
theless, is wanting in both these genera; but I find it ex-
tremely highly developed in the Chaleosiid genus Callamesia
(fig. 6), even extending to the second subcostal branch, and it
is not at all unlikely that other genera of the same family
may prove to have traces of the same unusual structural
peculiarities.

It will be remembered that when I described a fossil
butterfly (Geol. Mag. 1873, vol. x.) Mr. Scudder objected to
its being regarded as a lepidopterous insect on the ground
that he had discovered what he believed to be traces of trans-
verse veins upon the wings, a feature which he characterized
(see Geol. Mag., Oct. 1874) as ‘decidedly anti-lepidopterous.”
To this opinion he still adheres, although I have shown that
cross veins of the nature of those which he believed to exist
in Palwontina are by no means unusual in some families, such
as, for instance, the Cosside, Hepialide, or Psychidee: had I
described a fossil specimen of Cal/amesia as a moth there is
every probability that Mr. Scudder would, and with greater
excuse, have referred it to the Sialide; whilst the genus
Scopelodes, fig. 5 (Limacodide), which has imperfect transverse
veins across the costal borders of both primaries and secon-
daries and a series of divergent transverse veins across the
inner border of the primaries, would, I think, be a poser, in
spite of its possession of these Orthopterous characters.

Dianeura Jacksoni, sp.n. (Figs. 2, 3.)

6 ¢. Hyaline white, the base of primaries and basal half
of secondaries suffused with pale yellow; the veins and an-
tenne blackish: body above pale brown, below brownish
testaceous, the legs almost bare. Hxpanse of wings, f 22
millim., 2 31 millim.

Manda Island, June 1886 (7. J. Jackson).

The discoidal cell of secondaries in this species is much
less prolonged in front than in D. G'oochit. I have figured a
curious abnormality in the neuration of the female at fig. 3.

Bibliographical Notices. 51

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

Contributions a Vétude des Bopyriens. Par Atrrep Grarp et
JuLEs Bonnrer. 4to. Lille, L. Danel, 1887.

Our knowledge of the parasitic forms of Crustacea has increased
remarkably of late years, and with each advance that has been
made the interest attaching to them has widened. In 1840, when
Milne-Edwards published the third volume of his classical ‘* Histoire
naturelle des Crustacés,” the parasitic forms noticed by him, besides
the well-known Entomostracan fish-parasites, were limited to the
Cyami and three species of Bopyridie, namely an Jone and two
Bopyri. In the same year, however, Divernoy described a species
of Bopyrian from the Mauritius as the type of a new genus to which
he gave the name of Kepon, and from that time the number of
known forms of Bopyrian and Cirripedian parasites has gone on
steadily, and indeed rapidly, increasing. In both groups the
animals infested have been for the most part Crustaceans of the
Decapod group, and it may be remarked that the study of the life-
history of the parasites has revealed some most curious circum-
stances in connexion with the phenomena of double parasitism
presented in some cases, the influence of the parasites upon the
external characters of the animals infested by them, and the singu-
lar taxonomic parallelism which appears in many instances to exist
between the parasites and their hosts.

The keynote of these curious investigations was no doubt struck
by Dr. Fritz Miller, the distinguished naturalist of Desterro, in his
contributions to the ‘ Archiv fir Naturgeschichte’ and the < Je-
naische Zeitschrift,’ and in his remarkable work “ Fiir Darwin ;’
but many interesting points had already been indicated by Steen-
strup and Lilljeborg, and by Darwin himself, before the influence
of his ideas set Fritz Miller to work upon the materials with which
the Brazilian coast furnished him for such researches. Since the
appearance of these memoirs, in 1862 and 1864, and especially
within the last ten years, many European zoologists have worked
vigorously and successfully upon the investigation of these parasites,
particularly the Bopyride forms, with the result of adding greatly
to our knowledge of the European types and their life-history.

A place in the front rank of these investigators must certainly be
assigned to Prof. Giard, one of the authors of the work of which the
title stands at the head of this notice; with the aid of the resources
of the zoological laboratory at Wimereux, and by his own personal
researches on other parts of the French coast, he has accumulated
a great number of interesting details upon the Bopyride parasites,
which he has from time to time communicated in papers read before
the Academy of Sciences and elsewhere, translations of some of
which have appeared from time to time in our pages,

Some two years ago, as we are told in the preface to the present
work, Prof. Giard and M. Jules Bonnier (Demonstrator at the labo-

52 Bibliographical Notices.

ratory of Wimereux) resolved to combine their efforts in order to
prepare a monograph of the Bopyride Crustacea or Epicarides ; but
the difficulties inherent in the work proved to be greater than they
expected, and they have thought it best to publish as much as they
could at once work up, without waiting to finish what would require
years of labour for its completion. Here, therefore, we have the
history of only two of the groups into which the Epicarides are
divided, the subfamily Ioninz and the Entoniscide.

The treatment of the subject which the authors have adopted is as
follows :--Selecting as the type of the group to be discussed some
species which they have had the opportunity of examining
thoroughly, they describe in detail its external and internal struc-
ture, notice its mode of occurrence, its development and mode of
life, and finally its relationships, the last-named subject leading to
a submonographic revision of the genera and species referred to the
group of which it is taken as the representative. Thus in the first
section of their memoir, which is devoted to the Ionine, they take
as the type a species described under the name of Cepon elegans,
parasitic upon Pilumnus hirtellus at Wimereux, and following the
mode of treatment above indicated, furnish full particulars of the
structure and natural history of the creature, with occasional refer-
ences to the writings of other authors who have noticed members of
the same group. This special description is followed by a syste-
matic summary, giving a list, with synonyms, of all the genera and
species of the subfamily Ionin, with characters of the genera and
frequently of the species, and notes on the habits and mode of oceur-
rence of the latter. For the Entoniscide the type selected is the
parasite of the common Shore-Crab, described by Giard under the
name of Hntoniscus menadis, but now placed by the authors in a
new genus, Portunion. In their treatment of this group the authors,
while specially describing the form selected as illustrating it, refer
more to characters and peculiarities presented by other forms, and,
especially in the section on the ethology of the parasite, they go into
various most interesting questions connected with the history of
these crustacean parasites, and with the phenomena of parasitism in
general.

We are quite conscious that in what has been said above we have
given a very imperfect account of a most excellent and exceedingly
important work, but to do more would have carried us to a much
greater length, and we can only hope that the few lines which we
have been able to devote to it will suffice to indicate to those inter-
ested in the subject the rich store of material which is here opened
up to them. So far as one can judge without special study of the
objects, the authors’ work has been most admirably done; in fact,
in some respects, in its thoroughness and evident truthfulness espe-
cially, it reminds one not a little of the work of the great English
naturalist whose loss we all still regret so heartily. It is, in fact, a
book that Charles Darwin would have welcomed with open arms.

Forming the fifth volume of the “ Travaux de l'Institut zoologique
de Lille et du Laboratoire de Zoologie maritime de Wimereux,” its

Bibliographical Notices. 53

titlepage bears, not inappropriately, a woodcut of the little “ chalet”
at Wimereux where so much of the work recorded in its pages has
been carried on. Throughout the work a number of woodcuts are
intercalated in the text, whilst the general illustration of the book
is provided for by the beautifully executed plates, in which many of
the figures are coloured. We can only hope that MM. Giard and
Bonnier may some day be able to complete their proposed monogra-
phic work, and to furnish us with an equally good account of the
remaining groups of the Epicarides.

Freshwater Sponges: a Monograph. By Evwarp Ports. Including
‘Diagnosis of the European Spongillide.’ By Prof. Franz Vus-
povsky (Prague). Pp. 279, with 12 plates. (Proceedings of the
Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, 1887, p. 157 et seq.)

Our acquaintance with the Sponges has of late years become so
extended that they can no longer be regarded by the naturalist with
that indifference which characterized their study when this branch
of living beings was only considered for its commercial value.
The part which the Spongida have taken, and are still taking, in
transforming the invisible into the visible objects of the world has
latterly been so realized that to ignore it any longer in failing to
direct attention to it seriously would be to disregard the existence
of a vast number of living forms which we could or did not care to
understand.

Thus the sponges generally have now become objects of much
interest, for they are not only to be foundin great abundance hving
in their natural habitats all over the world, but also, to an almost
equal extent, in a fossilized condition; while lately Dr. G. J.
Hinde, F.G.8., has shown that their presence has considerably
changed even the composition of whole geological strata by the
diffusion of silica which has become liberated from the disintegration
of their spicules (Geol. Mag., Oct. 1887, p. 435 &c.).

Thus the study of the Spongida not only becomes an essential part
of biology, but also one of palzeontology and geology. Of course the
former led to the latter, as it is mainly by the study of what is
taking place at the surface of the earth at the present time that we
are enabled to interpret the past.

As the products of the earth were at first sought after for their
direct utility to man, so the species which served that purpose were
the first to attract attention ; hence the sponges of commerce have
been known from great antiquity, and the most useful ones being
marine, those of the sea were the first to be noticed; but when man
began to find that all objects were of interest, if not of indirect
utility, similar ones in freshwater accumulations claimed his notice,
and thus from their intimate resemblance he learnt that sponges
were to be found in fresh as well as in salt water.

Latterly many valuable contributions have been made to our
knowledge of the Marine Sponges, both living and fessil; and now

54 Bibliographical Notices.

we have to chronicle one of not less consequence on the Freshwater
Sponges, viz. that the title of which heads this article.

Of this contribution we must observe in imine that having been
published in the pages of a scientific journal shows that it is not
to be regarded as written for pecuniary emolument, but rather as a
‘labour of love,” which, when backed by the enthusiasm of a bond
fide naturalist (that is, an ardent desire to pursue truth and nothing
but the truth), guarantees a result that in this respect is seldom
equalled by one undertaken for mere pecuniary remuneration.

The ‘ Monograph’ embraces all of any consequence that has been
published up to the present day, and much more that has not been
published at all, which has been obtained by Mr. Potts from
the abundance of species and varieties of Freshwater Sponges
existing in the neighbourhood of Philadelphia, where he would
appear not to have “left a stone unturned ;” while in all other
instances he has possessed himself of actual specimens of the species
or varieties described before putting pen to paper; so that with this
determination to state nothing but what has been confirmed by his
own ocular demonstration, he has produced a work that must be one
of reference for a long time to come.

In quotations, where possible, Mr. Potts prefers the exact words
of the author, and only where absolutely necessary substitutes con-
densation ; while references to titles, dates, &c. accompany every-
thing that he has stated; so that in this matter Mr. Potts has been
as scrupulously careful as in his identification of the species deseribed
by means of actual specimens.

The plan of the ‘ Monograph,’ after a list of “ Contents”? and a
“ Preface,” is to begin with a few words of elementary information,
“to aid those who for the first time undertake the study of Sponges,”
in which many useful hints will be found that were suggested to the
author during his numerous excursions in search of Spongide. ;

Then comes the translation into English of a valuable paper
(originally written in German) by Prof. F. Vejdovsky, of the Uni-
versity of Prague, entitled “‘ Diagnosis of the European Spongillidee,”
which was drawn up at the request of Mr. Potts, as his own per-
sonal experience had been chiefly confined to North America; but
although this adds greatly to the value of the work, the author tells
us that he has found it most convenient to follow in his descriptions
the more general classification proposed by Mr. Carter, introducing
his own new genera, species, and varieties in their appropriate places
as he proceeds.

And in this part (which forms the bulk of the ‘ Monograph’) it
is that we see what an immensity of time and labour the author
must have bestowed on his subject both in compilation and actual
research. Here the result of that indomitahle perseverance appears
which could only arise from an enthusiastic love for the work and a
conscientious determination not to put forth anything but that which
would be a safe guide to the young and inexperienced student.
While in his concluding remarks he observes that in closing his
* Monograph ’ ‘it 1s with the consciousness that the work of classi-

Bibliographical Notices. 55

fication occupies a very humble place among biological efforts and
that all systems must of necessity be tentative and temporary, soon
to be superseded by others, the results of a larger knowledge gained
by the contemplation of a wider horizon.” Thus the reader must
not expect to find any more in this respect than exists in the table
of “ Contents” at the commencement of the ‘ Monograph.’

Still, after some suggestions towards the attainment of this object,
the author states that “there is no more hopeful field of labour for
a young naturalist seeking for ‘new worlds to conquer’ than that
provided by the Freshwater Sponges.”

Truly there is much yet to be done in spongology generally, both
specifically and physiologically, towards classification before it can
be put on a par with botany in these respects ; but who can expect
this to be otherwise with a science that is hardly a century old?

The text is accompanied by twelve plates, the numerous repre-
sentations in which, with copious explanations, are, in point of
exactness, in keeping with all that has preceded. They are not on
the scale which commands attention from its great size (that is, like
the figures over a carayan at a country fair), but, on the contrary, so
small and unpretending as almost to require a lens for the examina-
tion of their detail, whose minuteness and truthfulness to nature
will then be found to present objects of much admiration.

We congratulate Mr. Potts on having produced a ‘ Monograph’
which is characterized throughout by modesty, ability, and, pre-
eminently, practical utility.

A Manual of Zoology for the Use of Students, with a General Intro-
duction on the Principles of Zoology. By Henry ALLEYNE
Nicwotson, M.D. &c. Seventh Edition, rewritten and enlarged.
8vo. Blackwood: Edinburgh and London, 1887.

We have had occasion so frequently to call attention to the publi-
cation of successive editions of this ‘ Manual,’ that it would be
hardly necessary to do more than to notice its reappearance, were
it not that the author has made so many additions and alterations
in the present edition as to place the book upon a new footing. It
is, as announced on its titlepage, to a great extent rewritten, and is
very considerably enlarged ; and an examination of the contents will
show that the author’s labours have not been thrown away, as the
book is a very great improvement upon its predecessors.

Of course the general treatment of the subject is the same as
before, and the work is cast in the same shape; but throughout we
find evidence of the influence of the most recent additions to the
literature of scientific zoology. ‘This is marked not only in the
systematic portion of the book, but also in the general introduction,
in which the author has touched, briefly indeed, upon all the more
important points which have come to the front of late years, espe-

56 Bibliographical Notices.

cially those raised by the promulgation of the Darwinistic theory of
evolution.

In connexion with the system of classification adopted we may
remark that Dr. Nicholson has separated the Sponges from the Pro-
tozoa, but without uniting them with any recognized group of the
Metazoa—he treats them ‘as a separate subkingdom under the
name of Porifera.” In this course, considering the difficulties sur-
rounding all attempts to deal with the Sponges, we think he is in
the right, judging from our present lights, and he carefully indicates
some of the difficulties in question arising from the peculiarities of
certain constituent elements of the sponge-body.

The Coelenterata are treated in considerable detail and evidently
with reference to recent investigations, especially those of Prof.
Moseley on the Hydrocoralline. Jt may be noted in passing that
Dr. Nicholson cannot be charged with taking part in that ‘* conspi-
racy of silence” upon which the Duke of Argyll descanted so elo-
quently in a recent number of ‘ Nature.’ He even says that the
recent researches of ‘Semper, Murray, Guppy, &c. have shown that
Darwin’s theory cannot be accepted as a universal explanation of
the mode of origin of atolls and barrier-reefs, even if it be partially
true.

Prof. Huxley’s subkingdom Annuloida is given up by Prof.
Nicholson, who, however, retains the class Scolecida, as including
the whole of the Entozoa, the Turbellaria, the free Nematoid worms,
and the Rotifera—a somewhat incongruous assemblage, the principal
distinctive characters of which are the presence of a water-vascular
system and the absence of a ventral chain of ganglia. The remainder
of the Annulosa are divided into Anarthropoda and Arthropoda, and
the classification adopted is that generally employed by systematic
zoologists. The weakest portion of this section, and, indeed, of the
whole book, seems to us to be that treating of the Insecta; but this
is a reproach which may be made to most text-books of zoology.
The division Molluscoidea is still retained for the Brachiopoda and
Polyzoa, the Tunicata being inserted between the Mollusca and
Vertebrata. The latter are treated at very considerable length,
occupying three eighths of the systematic portion of the book; but
the space bestowed upon them is certainly well employed, and this
section furnishes one of the best guides to the structure and classi-
fication of vertebrate animals with which we are acquainted. In
saying this we have no intention of making a comparison of the
vertebrate and invertebrate sections to the disadvantage of the
latter—the greater complexity of the machinery of life in the Ver-
tebrata necessitates their being treated at greater length than
their invertebrate fellows, and this is especially the case when the
book to be written is intended especially for the use of students.

This Manual is in fact, to a great extent, a treatise on the mor-
phology of animals. References to habits and mode of life are of
necessity cut down to the smallest possible dimensions; but the
author carefully indicates the general distribution of the represen-
tatives of the various groups in time and space, and of course some

Bibliographical Notices. 57

notice of the living relations of the animals to each other and the
outer world is indispensable in many cases. The book is an admir-
able guide for the zoological student, and its value is greatly
increased by the copious lists of authorities given at the end of each
chapter and by the copious glossary with which it terminates.

We have yet to say a few words upon the illustrations of the
work. These, as in former editions, are all woodcuts; but their
number has been greatly increased in the present issue, the new
figures being for the most part derived from the most important of
the many valuable memoirs which have appeared during the last
few years. The execution of these new figures is admirable, and as
they have been most judiciously selected they add greatly to the
value of the book.

Living Lights ; a Popular Account of Phosphorescent Animals and
Vegetables. By C. F. Horper. London, 1887.

We must own to being a little disappointed with Mr. Holder’s last
book, for it bears obvious marks of haste in the structure of many
of the sentences and the form in which scientific terms have been
allowed to pass the ‘‘ reader’s” eye. However, we do not suppose
that these failings will strike the kind of reader whom we imagine
Mr. Holder wishes to attract. The book is strictly a popular one,
the ‘“ systematic portions necessary to the student,” which have
been “ placed in an appendix,” being very unequal: to whom, pray,
is the information addressed that Ophiura is so called “ on account
of the resemblance to snakes in its arms”? ‘The scientific man
does not want it, and if the schoolboy does he will wonder whether
the author means really that Virgularia is derived from vira, a rod ;
for the schoolboy (happy youth!) knows not of misprints. The
“‘ Neiridee and Eunicedee ” are not ‘“ genera of the group Annelida.”
The Bibliography is simply shocking—e. g. “Ehrenberg. Das
Leuchten des Meeres. Abhandlung,” or ‘‘ Leydig, Professor. Bonn,
Germany. Phosphorescence of Fishes. 10 plates ;” but this, per-
haps, is the gem for an English book, “1875. Darwin. Voyage
d’un Naturaliste autour du Monde. Paris.”

The illustrations are fairly good, and we hope Mr. Holder or his
publishers have made some pecuniary recompense to those who first
produced them, for no acknowledgment of assistance is made in the
book itself.

The book is hardly one for the ordinary readers of the ‘ Annals ; ’
but those who are blessed with children will probably find that they
think the writer in their father’s journal a great deal too severe.

58 Geological Society.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

November 23, 1887.—Prof. J. W. Judd, F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “ Note on a New Wealden I[guanodont, and other Dinosaurs.”
By R. Lydekker, Esq., B.A., F.G.S.

The new species of Jgwanodon was founded upon a left ilium and
ischium, parts of the pubis and tibia, two metatarsals, several dorsal,
lumbar, and caudal vertebre and other bones, obtained by Mr. C.
Dawson, F.G.S., from the Wadhurst clay of the Hastings Sand.
The species now described, which was named after the discoverer,
and Iguanodon Prestwichi, were shown to form a peculiar and
aberrant group of the genus Jyuwanodon. A maxilla from the
Wealden of the Isle of Wight was also described and referred to
Ornithopsis.

The recent examination by the author of the remains of Dino-
sauria in the British Museum for the purpose of preparing a
Catalogue, had enabled him to make several notes on the various
forms represented in the collection, and these notes were embodied
in the present paper. The principal subjects mentioned were the
following :—The identification of Jquanodon Seeleyi with I. bernis-
sartensis; the genera Sphenospondylus and Cumnoria of Prof.
Seeley ; a British species of T'rachodon from the Cambridge Green-
sand; an ilium, provisionally referred to Hylwosaurus, from Cuck-
field; the genera Vectisaurus and Reynosaurus ; the relations of the
Sauropoda and Theropoda; the type specimen of Ornithopsis
Hlulkei; the similarity of the humerus in Pelorosawrus and Bronto-
saurus ; the vertebrae and other remains of Cetiosaurus brevis; the
humerus of C. humerocristatus and its relations to Ischyrosaurus,
Hulke, Gigantosaurus, Seeley, and Ornithopsis Leedsii, Hulke; the
affinities between Cetiosaurus oxwoniensis and Morosaurus ; the
occurrence of Zitanosaurus in the Wealden of England and the
possible identification of that genus with Dinosaurus of Owen;
the vertebrae described by Owen as Bothriospondylus magnus; the
types of the genera Thecospondylus and Bothriospondylus; and
some Megalosaurian teeth.

2. * On the Cae-Gwyn Cave.” By T. M’Kenny Hughes, M.A.,
F.G.S8., Woodwardian Professor of Geology, Cambridge.

The subject fell into two divisions: the Age of the Drift out-
side the Cave, and the relation of the deposits in the cave to that
Drift. The Author contended that the drift outside the cave was a

Geological Society. 59

marine deposit remanié from older beds of glacial age, but was
itself postglacial and of approximately the same date as the St.-
Asaph drift; in confirmation of which he gave the following list of
shells from that drift outside the cave :—Ostrea edulis, Pecten
varius, Mytilus edulis, Cardium echinatum, C. edule, Cyprina
islandica, Astarte borealis, A. sulcata, A. var., Venus gallina,
Tellina balthica, Psammobia ferroensis, Mya truncata, Fissurella
greca, Littorina littorea, Turritella terebra, and Buccinum undatum ;
pointing out that there was only the one species of Astarte among
them which was not common on the adjoining coast, just as there
were in the older postglacial river-gravels of the S.E. of England
two locally extinct forms, the Corbicula fluminalis and the Unio
littoralis, and discussing various difficulties, stratigraphical and
paleontological, in the way of accepting the view that the cave-
deposits were glacial, interglacial, or preglacial. For instance, he
remarked that there were no marks of glaciation on the face of the rock
in which the cave occurred; that the cave-deposits were like drift
because derived from it, but that no continuity existed between the
drift and the cave-deposits ; that there was a much greater thickness
of rain-wash and resorted marine-drift looped down over the upper
opening into the cave than over the adjoining surface. The upper
part of this resorted drift is exactly similar to the material which
had accumulated against the old fence, the very existence of which
had been denied. The swallow-hole action to which he referred
the phenomena was proved by the opened fissures and vertical
cylindrical holes in the limestone and by the occurrence of a land-
shell (Zonites cellarius). He held that there had been a break-
down of the roof and wall of the cave under the drift, and that
angular masses of limestone, due to this cause, were found all along
in front of the upper opening to the cave. No bones were found
outside that barrier, there being no bones in the shell-bed and
no shells in the bone-bed except the land-shell washed down through
a fissure.

Instead, therefore, of the difficult task of proving that there were
in the district many well-known processes connected with subter-
ranean denudations, which might explain the superposition of the
marine drift upon the bone-earth, each of which had played a part
in producing the results observed, he maintained that we had now
the clearest evidence as to the exact manner in which it was all
brought about, namely, that the marine drift was deposited before
the occupation of the cave by the animals whose remains have been
found in it; that at the time of the occupation of the cave the
upper opening now seen did not exist, but the animals got in by
the other entrance; that against the wall of the caye where it
approached most nearly to the face of the cliff the drift lay thick
as we now see it; that by swallow-hole action the cave was first
partially filled, and then the thinnest portion of its wall gave way
gradually, burying the bone-earth below it, and letting down
some of the drift above it, so thatsome of it now looks as if it might
have been laid down by the sea upon preexisting cave-deposits.

60 Geological Society.

December 7, 1887.—Prof. J. W. Judd, F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “On the Discovery of Trilobites in the Upper Green (Cam-
brian) Slates of the Penrhyn Quarry, Bethesda, near Bangor, North
Wales.” By Dr. Henry Woodward, F.R.S., V.P.G.S.

The absence in Wales of organisms in the Longmynd and Harlech
group renders any discovery of fossils in beds of this early horizon
of the utmost importance.

A portion of a Trilobite (Paleopyge Ramsayz) and Annelide bur-
rows had already been found; but Dr. Hicks, at St. Davids, has added
a sponge, 2 Ostracods, 6 Trilobites, 2 Lingulelle, and 2 Thece
(Agnostus, Plutonia, Paradowides, Conocoryphe Lyelli, C. bufo, and
Microdiscus sculptus).

Dr. Hicks has pointed out the singular absence of organic remains
in the Longmynds in Shropshire, N. Wales, and Ireland, and
has urged the need of further explorations. As if in answer to this,
the Author has received from Prof. Dobbie an impression and counter-
part of a Trilobite from Bethesda, near Bangor, about 53 in. long and
1? in. broad, also the head of a second specimen of the same species.
These specimens were obtained from the Upper Green bed of the
quarry, which immediately underlies the grits forming the brow of
Bronllwyd and above the Purple Slates. The glabella is marked by
three oblique furrows on each side, the cheek-sutures are very
obscure, and the eyes, which are minute (probably rudimentary),
occupy the centre of the free cheek, the suture obliquely dividing the
free cheek from the fixed. The outline of the head is rounded.
There are fourteen free thoracic segments. The pygidium consists
of about three coalesced somites.

Comparing the Bangor fossil with Paradowides, we find that
Paradowxides has about twenty free segments.

Asaphus, Ogygia, and Niobe have only eight thoracic rings, and
the caudal shield is very large.

Angelina agrees with the Bethesda specimen in the number of
its free segments; but the glabella is smooth, the pleure are broader,
and the cheek-spines very long.

Olenus has fourteen rings ; the glabella is furrowed, but the head-
shield is shorter and broader, and the ends of the pleure and margin
of the caudal shield are usually produced into spines. Olenus is also
smaller.

Conocoryphe has fourteen free segments; the axis is parallel-
sided, and does not diminish backwards from the head to the
pygidium ; each ring of the axis is notched on its posterior border,
and the ends of the pleurz are rounded; the glabella is furrowed
obliquely ; the eyes are often wanting or are minute.

From these considerations the Author considered the Bangor fossil
to be referable to Conocoryphe, and to a new species, C. viola.

Geological Society. 61

The Trilobite was found by Robert E. Jones and Robert Lloyd,
two quarrymen, at Bethesda. Afterwards Prof. Dobbie found a
detached head of the same species near the spot where the original
was obtained. The Author desired to return thanks to Prof. J.
Dobbie, of the University College of North Wales, Bangor, for the
opportunity of describing these specimens.

2. “ On Thecospondylus Daviesi, Seeley, with some Remarks on
the Classification of the Dinosauria.” By Prof. H. G. Seeley,
ELR.S., E.G.S.

The Author described the anterior third of a vertebra from the
Wealden, which was recognized by Mr. Davies as the cervical
vertebra of an animal allied to the genus Calurus, Marsh. The
only European genus hitherto described in which the vertebre are
similarly elongated, compressed, and enveloped in a dense external
film of bone is that indicated by the sacrum, named Thecospondylus
Hornert, whose vertebree are about 11 centimetres long, whilst the
cervical vertebree now under discussion were 9 centimetres long
when complete. The specimen has lost the prezygapophyses and
cervical ribs. If these were restored they would probably approxi-
mate in shape to those of Celurus fragilis.

The Author gave an outline-restoration. The points of resemblance
were chiefly the elongated form, lateral compression of centrum and
neural arch, inclined articular face of centrum, mode of attachment
of the ribs, the convex external surface of the neural arch, almost
total suppression of the neural spine, and the thin texture of the bone.
But this affinity does not amount to generic identity, and he indi-
cates the points of difference. In estimating the resemblance to
Thecospondylus he regards the thinness of the investing layer of
bone, the smoothness of its internal surface, the elongation and
lateral compression of the vertebra, and a certain general approxi-
mation in form; the most remarkable difference is the absence from
the cast of Thecospondylus Horneri of indications of films of bone, or
evidence of internal plates, such as are seen in the present specimen.
The Author observed that Prof. Marsh regards Celurus fragilis as a
generalized Sauropsid, with more resemblance to Dinosaurs than to
Pterodactyles.

Professor Marsh has formed an Order, Sauropoda, which includes
Cetiosaurus and Ornithopsis. The Author remarked that he had
already suggested Cetiosauria as separable from the rest of the
Dinosaurs. When an additional Order is instituted for animals with
cavernous or pneumatic vertebrae, the Theropoda of Marsh, under
which Celurus is grouped, it becomes necessary, in order to deter-
mine the systematic position of Z’hecospondylus, to review its rela-
tions. The Author would unite Sauropoda with Theropoda into one
Order, the Saurischia, whose pneumatic skeleton is an approximation
towards Ornithosaurs and Birds.

62 Miscellaneous.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Note on the Genus Lophopus.

To the Elitors of the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History.’

GrentiemEn,—My attention has been directed toa paperin the ‘Journal
of the Linnean Society of London,’ Zoology, no. 117, vol. xx. June
1887, by Stuart O. Ridley, M.A., “ On the Characters of the Genus
Lophopus, with a Description of a new Species from Australia.” In
the paper Dr. R. von Lendenfeld is credited with the discovery and
preservation of the species described. If there is any credit due it
is to me, from the fact that I collected, preserved, and exhibited
the specimens from which the species has been described ; and the
first time Dr. Lendenfeld saw them was in the rooms of the Linn.
Soc. of New South Wales (see ‘ Proceedings,’ vol. x. p. 760, 1885)
after they had been in spirit for some time. In a letter of mine
which appeared in the ‘ Ashton Reporter,’ Saturday, March 20, 1886,
published at Ashton-under-Lyne, Lancashire, England, an account
of the same specimens is given; and in the ‘Transactions of the
Manchester Microscopical Society’ for 1886 will be found an
account of “ A Method of Killing Polyzoa” by myself, which is that
employed in the preservation of the species in question. A few
days before Dr. Lendenfeld left Sydney I gave him a bottle con-
taining portions of my first gathering which were without stato-
blasts; but in order to render the species complete for description
T made a special journey to Parramatta, in my own time and at my
own expense, to obtain specimens which possessed them. I found
them in plenty, but only in those in a dying or dead condition ;
and I added a small twig which was covered with the remains of
the animals and full of statoblasts. I may also say that the bottle
together with the specimens was given to Dr. Lendenfeld by me for
him to give them to Prof. Allman, F.R.S., for description. From
the above facts your readers will be able to Judge who is deserving
of credit in this matter.
I am, yours faithfully,
Australian Museum, Tuomas WHITELEGGE.
Sydney, New South Wales,
October 31, 1887.

On the Existence of a Fish belonging to the Genus Neopercis in the
Atlantic. By M. Lfton Varxuant.

In dredging no. evil. of the ‘Talisman’ (1883), at a depth of
75-90 metres, between St. Vincent and St. Antoine, in the Cape-
Verd Islands, a fish was obtained of some interest as a matter of
geographical distribution. It belongs to the family Trachinidz and
to the genus Percis, or to that division of the genus named Neopercis
by Steindachner.

Miscellaneous. 63

Neopercis includes four known species, all shore-fishes—one from
the Bay of St. Vincent (Australia), V. Ramsay, Steind., the three
others from Japan, V. seawfasciata, Schl., aurantiaca, Déd., and
multifasciata, Dod.

The Cape-Verd species seems to approach the last-named most
closely ; in fact it has to be carefully examined to find distinctive
characters. The general coloration agrees; but in the Cape-Verd
species the bands of the body occupy the whole depth instead of
ceasing at the lateral line, the nuchal spot is produced on each side
upon the opercular plates, and a band bordered with black descends
obliquely upon the cheek behind the lower margin of the orbit.
The pectoral fins do not notably pass the origin of the anal, the
interorbital space is scarcely one third of the diameter of the eye,
and the maxillary stops at the anterior margin of the orbit.

The species is named Neopercis atlantica, and its presence among
the African islands is the more singular because not only all the
other species of Neopercis, but the more numerous representatives of
the genus Perecis, are known only from the warm or temperate parts
of the great Pacific Ocean or the Indian seas.—Comptes Rendus,
November 21, 1887, p. 1032.

On the Pelagic Fauna of some Lakes in Auvergne.
By M. J. Ricnarp,

Last summer the author investigated the pelagic fauna of the fol-
lowing five lakes in the region of Mont Dore :—Pavin, Chambon,
Guéry, Montcineyre, and Bourdouze. He generally worked at depths
between 2 and 3 metres, but sometimes lower, down to 11 metres.
He obtained twenty species belonging to the groups of Cladocera,
Copepoda, Rotatoria, and Cilioflagellata.

The distribution of the species in these five neighbouring lakes is
irregular, which may be explained by the difficulties in the way of
the dispersion of pelagic animals. Thus Hyalodaphnia cucullata,
Sars, var. apicata, Kurz, occurred only in Lake Chambon, and Poly-
phemus pediculus, De Geer, was met with only in Lake Pavin.

A remarkable species, regarded as characteristic of mountain-lakes,
Holopedium gibberum, Zaddach, occurred in immense numbers in
the lake of Guéry at a height of 1240 metres. It was also found,
but less abundantly, in Lake Montcineyre, the most southern point
reached by this species *.

In the neighbouring lakes Montcineyre and Bourdouze several
species common to both occurred only in small numbers, being
stray littoral species, namely :—Srda crystallina, O. F. Mull., Alona
affinis, Leyd., Acroperus leucocephalus, Koch, and Chydorus sphe-
ricus, Jurine.

Besides these few examples of very restricted dispersion, there are
many cases of wide distribution: thus, Daphnia longispina, Leyd., is

* It was found recently, and for the first time in France, by MM. Doll-
fus and Moniez in the lake of Gerardiner.

64 Miscellaneous.

wanting only in Lake Chambon; Diaptomus castor, Jurine, is want-
ing in lakes Chambon and Guéry; and both species abound in the
other lakes. In Lake Pavin, to 7 or 8 metres from the shore,
D. castor was of a bright vermilion-red; in the middle, to a depth
of 11 metres, it was colourless.

Cyclops strenuus, Fischer, which is very abundant in small pieces
of water, occurred in innumerable troops in all the lakes except
Montcineyre. In the lakes it is colourless, while in small sheets of
water it is generally red. The pelagic variety in the lakes is more
slender, and in some respects approaches C. lucidulus, Koch. Bos-
mina longirostris, O. F. Miill., is wanting only in Lake Pavin; it
abounds in lake Guéry, in company with /7olopedium gibberum,
These last four species are very common and abundant, and thus
have the better chance of dispersion.

Ceriodaphnia pulchella, Sars, found abundantly in the lakes of
Bourdouze and Montcineyre, is here clearly pelagic, as in the lakes
of North Germany and in Gerardiner. Lastly, Daphnella Brandtiana,
Fisch., occurred in immense numbers in lakes Chambon and Bour-
douze.

With regard to the Rotatoria and Cilioflagellata the same remarks
as to regularity of dispersion will apply. Anurea longispina, Kelli-
cott, was abundant in Lake Pavin, rare in Lake Chambon; A. coch-
learis, Gosse, free, but very rare in Lake Montcineyre, and in the
stomach of Asplanchna helvetica, Imhof, in Lake Bourdouze. As-
planchna helvetica was also met with in Lake Guéry. In Lake Cham-
bon examples of Anurea curvicornis, Khr., were found in the stomachs
of many specimens of Asplanchna Girodi, De Guerne. Colonies of
Conochilus volvow were found abundantly in Lakes Payin and Mont-
cineyre.

Among the Cilioflagellata the author mentions only Ceratium lon-
gicorne, Perty, as being rare in Lakes Montcineyre and Bourdouze.
He also refers to the Hydrachnids, Ataw crassipes, O. F. Mull,
Axona versicolor, O. F. Mill., Meswa rotunda, Kram., and J. reti-
culata, as occurring in the lakes,

Among the Cladocera, Hyalodaphia cucullata, Sars, var. apicata,
Kurz, of which the latter author makes a distinct species, is new to
the French fauna. This variety had hitherto been found only in
Bohemia. A new Rotifer, Asplanchna Girodi, has been studied by
M. J. de Guerne*,

Comparing the pelagic fauna of the lakes of the Auvergne with
those of various European countries, we find that it has some points
in common with all and that it differs from all in other points.
Thus the following species are common to the lakes of the Mont

* «Excursions zoologiques dans les iles de Fayal et de San Miguel
(Acores),’ Paris, 1887. In a monographic note on the genus Asplanchna
M. J. de Guerne describes and figures A. Girodi.

Miscellaneous. 65

Dore and those of North Germany :—Ceriodaphnia putchella, Sars ;
Hyalodaphnia apicata, Kurz; Bosmina longirostris, O. F. Miill. ;
Conochilus volvox, Ehrbg.; Anuwrea cochlearis, Gosse; A. longi-
spina, Kellicott; Asplanchna helvetica, Imhof. But many other
species do not occur in the Auvergne, while, on the other hand,
Holopedium gibberum, Zaddach, has not been found in the lakes of
North Germany. A comparison with the various European faunas
gives similar results,

Comparisons thus made are not of great importance, especially for
the establishment of regions with distinct pelagic faunas. In the
first place it is necessary to make continuous and methodical inves-
tigations at different periods of the year. The European lakes will
then, for the most part, present a multitude of common species,
transported from the north of Europe, their centre of dispersion,
from lake to lake, in the state of winter-eggs, by birds or by the
winds. It is only by passive migrations that we can explain the
existence of the pelagic fauna in the artificial lakes of Bohemia, for
example, and particularly in the lakes of the Auvergne, as is shown
by their geological situation. It is only in this way that we can
understand how M. J. de Guerne * could have found in the Azores a
perfectly European pelagic fauna in a crater-lake which dates from
the fifteenth century.

Forel and Pavesi have established two groups which they regard
as very distinct in the population of the middle of the lakes—that
of the eupelagic species, which live only in the middle, and that of
the tychopelagic species, which are littoral forms adapted to a life
in the open water. According to this division there are in the
lakes of Mont Dore only two eupelagic Cladocera, namely Holopedium
gibberum and Hyalodaphnia apicata. This second species, however,
is very numerous in the littoral zone. This is the cise also with
all the Rotatoria enumerated, several of which are regarded as
eupelagic by Pavesi. These species, which, according to the defi-
nition given, ought only to occur in the middle of the lakes, seem,
considering their number, to have adapted themselves to the life of
the littoral animals. Ought we to invent for them an analogous
term in opposition to the term tychopelagic? Probably no one will
regard this as necessary.

What is certain is that a great number of species can live equally
well in the pelagic region and in the littoral region. In the former
case the animals become hyaline, more slender, and better swimmers.

Diaptomus castor is a striking example of the well-known fact
just referred to. This animal is very abundant on the Mont Dore,
and has all the characters of the eupelagic species. It does not
occur, according to Zacharias, in the middle of the lakes of North
Germany. Sars says that it seems to constitute an exception from
the other Calanide by occurring only in small pools. Lake Payin,
which is 800 metres in diameter, with a depth of 95 metres, should
hardly be ranged under this category. It is but small indeed

* Loe. ctt.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 5

66 Miscellaneous.

when compared with the Norwegian lakes. But then Holopedium
gibberum of Lake Guéry lives in a shallow pool of water! This
lake is, in fact, of less extent than Lake Pavin and hardly 8 metres
in depth.

With creatures of the size here in question the mass of water in
Lake Pavin and much more considerable masses will hardly prove to
be very different in their action.

Two principal conclusions may be drawn from the facts hitherto
ascertained :—

1. The peopling of the lakes of the region of the Mont Dore
appears to have been effected by passive migrations.

2. The pelagic fauna of these lakes is constituted in a general
way like those of the rest of Europe, and presents common points
and points of divergence when compared with these different faunas.
—Comptes Rendus, Noy. 14, 1887, p. 951; Dec. 12, 1887, p. 1186.

The Fauna of the Podophthalmous Crustacea of the Bay of Marseilles.
By M. Pav Gourret.

The author states that the number of Podophthalmous Crustacea
observed by him, of which he proposes to publish a revision, amounts
to 124 species or varieties, 11 of which are new. These are :—

Pinnotheres Marioni, Galathea Parroceli*, Crangon Lacazei*,
Gnathophyllum elegans, var. brevirostris *, Alpheus Gabrieli *, Hippo-
lyte Marioni*, Pontonia vagans, Callianassa subterranea, var.
minor *, Siriella intermedia, Leptomysis Marioni, and Nebalia bipes,
var. elongata.

The fauna greatly resembles that of the Adriatic—90 species are
common to both. There is almost as close a similarity to the faunas
of Naples, Nice, and Algeria, the number of common species oscil-
lating between 82 and 66. The difference is much greater from
the Spanish carcinological fauna (Balearic Islands and Madeira),
which seems to include only 34 of the species obtained at Mar-
seilles. This difference may be due to our imperfect knowledge of
the Spanish fauna.

The following species obtained at Marseilles do not occur in any
of the principal Mediterranean stations :—

Plagusia chabrus, Pachygrapsus transversus, Ebalia nux, Eupa-
gurus Bernhardus and levis, Axius stirhynchus, Gebia deltura,
Munida tenuimana, Galathodes Marionis, and Crangon trispinosus.

Of these species, however, the first two are imported into Mar-
seilles by ships from the Pacific, whilst Hbalia nuw, Eupagurus
levis, Munida tenuimana, and Galathodes Marionis are species
dredged from great depths. The four remaining species present a
curious distributional fact, although G'ebia deltura has been taken

* These forms were briefly described in a paper communicated by the
author to the Academy on November 21, 1887.

Miscellaneous. 67

y Costa in the Bay of Tarentum and Hupagurus Bernhardus at
spezia by Neumann.

Eleven Marseillese species occur in a single other locality in the
Mediterranean or at a few points distant from Marseilles and from
each other, namely :—

Gebia deltura, Aaius stirhynchus, Eupagurus Bernhardus and
timidus, Crangon trispinosus and spinosus, Atelecyclus heterodon,
Macropsis Slabbert, Siriella Clausii, armata, and crassipes.

On the other hand, some species are found in all the localities, at
Nice and Naples, in the Adriatic and in Algeria, or on the western
coast of Spain, such as :—

Heterograpsus Lucasii, Pachygrapsus marmoratus, Carcinus
meenas, Pisa tetraodon and Gibbsi, Stenorhynchus phalangium and
longirostris, Ilia nucleus, Dromia vulgaris, Clibanarius misanthropus,
Pagurus striatus, Hupagurus anachoretus and Prideauati, Scyllarus
ursus, Nika edulis, and Crangon cataphractus.

These are species peculiar to temperate seas with the exception
of the Clibanarius, which has been noted in boreal regions. Some
others occur only along the western shores of France without
passing north of the Channel; such are Pachygrapsus marmoratus
and Carcinus menas{?|. Others ascend higher and abound in Eng-
land, namely Pisa Gibbsii, the two Stenorhynchi, Dromia vulgaris,
Eupagurus Prideauan, Scyllarus ursus, and Nika edulis, A single
species, Pisa tetraodon, exists in England, but seems to be absent in
Gascony.

Of the 124 Marseillese species there are 45 common to Gascony
and 55 belonging to the English fauna. On passing further to the
north the relationship becomes more distant—the boreal provinces
have scarcely 33 species which also occur at Marseilles. There is
scarcely any relationship to the arctic seas—only three species are
common, namely Geryon longipes, Hupagurus Bernhardus, and
Nebalia bipes, and the first and third of these are abyssal.

The northern shores of Algeria have 71 species in common with
Marseilles. The Canarian fauna contains scarcely 25 Marseillese
species, a number which rises to 32 by the addition of some species
from Senegambia and the Cape Verd. These are :—

alagusia squamosa, Nautilograpsus minutus, Pachygrapsus mar-
moratus, Gonoplax rhomboides, Carcinus menas, Bathynectes longipes,
Liocarcinus holsatus, Portunus corrugatus and pusillus, Eriphia spini-
frons, Xantho rivulosa, Lambrus massena, Pisa armata and tetraodon,
Maia squinado, Machus dorhynchus, Calappa granulata, Dorippe
lunata, Dromia vulgaris, Porcellana platycheles and longicornis,
Diogenes varians, Galathea strigosa and squamifera, Virbius viridis,
Eupagurus excavatus and Prideauari, Scyllarus ursus, Gnathophyllum
elegans, Palemon treillianus, and Squilla mantis.

Thus the Podophthalmous fauna of Marseilles includes 33 species
which ascend into the boreal provinces and 33 in common with the
Canaries, Cape Verd, and Senegambia. Of the latter 10 do not go
further north than Marseilles or Portugal, namely :—

68 Miscellaneous.

Plagusia squamosa, Nautilograpsus minutus, Lambrus massena,
Pisa armata, Ethusa mascarone, Dorippe lunata, Pagurus striatus,
Diogenes varians, Gnathophyllum elegans, and Palemon treillianus.

The author considers that the Bay of Marseilles forms a very
important geographical centre. The invertebrate faunas which it
possesses present a mixed character, containing boreal and tropical
species. This proves the existence of wide open communications
during the Tertiary epoch, on the one hand with the boreal pro-
vinces through the Bay of Biscay and the south of Spain, on the
other with the equatorial Atlantic.—Comptes Rendus, December 5,
1887, p. 1132.

On the supposed Peripheral Processes of the Clione.
By M. E. Torsenr.

In the calcareous walls of the galleries of the Clione numerous
greenish-yellow or green filaments are found ramifying in the
thickness of the perforated stones and shells, becoming slightly dilated
here and there, and anastomosing or intercrossing in all directions.
These have been described by M. N. Nassouow * as processes of the
mesoderm of Cliona stationis, Nass., and he supposes them to indi-
cate the points of activity of the perforating sponge. The author
remarks that @ priori this function seems very improbable, and on
investigation he found that the filaments may be entirely wanting
in shells attacked by Cliona, while they abound in old imperforate
shells. He identifies the filaments with those of the vegetable para-
sites which have been long well known as perforating the calca-
reous parts of aquatic organisms, and suggests that when associated
with Cliona the plants in question have simply availed themselves
of the passages formed by the sponge to penetrate readily into the
interior of the shells——Comptes Rendus, December 12, 1887,
jg dalister

On the Formation of Vegetable Mould by the Action of certain
Animals. By Dr. C. Kextzr.

The author’s investigations, made under the tropics, and espe-
cially in the island of Madagascar, strikingly corroborate the disco-
veries of Darwin in this domain lying on the confines of biology and
geology. Earthworms in point of fact have a most important
action in the preparation of humus, and in Madagascar the prin-
cipal part is performed by a colossal worm a metre in length,
Geophagus Darwintt. In the coast region, as also in the mangrove-
forests, the part of the earthworms in this work is fulfilled by
Crustaceans, especially crabs.—NSession de la Soc. Helvétique des Sci.
Nat., Aott 1887; Bibl. Univ., Nov. 15, 1887, p. 429.

* “Zur Biologie und Anatomie der Clione,” in Zeitschr. fiir wiss. Zool.
Bd. xxxix. (1883).

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SIXTH SERIES. }

No. 2. FEBRUARY 1888,

1X.—On some new Species of the Genus Spongodes, Less.,
from the Philippine Islands and the Japanese Seas. By
Dr. Tu. StupeEr, Berne.

TuE following new species form part of a collection of Alcyo-
naria collected by Dr. Doederlein in the Japanese seas, also a
specimen from the Philippine Islands kindly communicated
to me by Professor Semper, of Wiirzburg.

I am greatly indebted to these gentlemen for having com-
municated their materials to me for description.

Spongodes Semper, n. sp.

A thick, cylindrical, barren trunk, the base of which is fixed
in the sand by means of stolons; from its upper end, which is
bounded by a circular fold covered on the margin with polyps,
it gives off a number of conical branches. These together
form a rounded head, the middle branches being higher than
the lower ones. Each branch is covered with relatively large
polyp-heads, each of which is surmounted by a bundle of
spicules. ‘lhese heads are arranged on the branches in close
spirals, the branches thus acquiring the form of spikes. The
colony is rigid; the wall of the trunk is incrusted with large
spindle-shaped spicules.

Colour in spirit greyish white.

Locality. Philippine Islands. Collected by Prof. Semper.
Ann. & Mag. N. Mist. Ser. 6, Vol. i. 6

70 Dr. Th. Studer on new Species of

Spongodes glomerata, n. sp.

The colony forms a low bush, which appears to be divided
into several spherical lobes. It is of a whitish colour, with
reddish polyp-heads. Height 12 millim., breadth 45 millim.
The short stem divides shortly above the base into diverging
branches, which are covered from the commencement with
polyp-bearing lobules; these arise from a very rapid rami-
fication of the twigs, which bear bundles of polyps at the ends.
The lobules are spherical, from 6 to 9 millim in diameter,
and contain up to twenty polyp-heads, each surmounted by a
stout spicule 2 millim. long. The folded tentacles, armed
with small spicules arranged en chevron, form an eight-lobed
operculum. The consistence of the whole is soft and yielding.

The species is most nearly related to S. Savignii (Khrbg.),
which also it most resembles in external habit.

Locality. Japan. Collected by Dr. Doederlein.

Spongodes punicea, n. sp-

An upright branched colony, 50 millim. high and 40 mil-
lim. in diameter, with a short stem and a lobose head, crowded
with polyps. Colour purplish red, with yellowish-white polyp-
heads. ‘The stem rises from an incrusting base; it has a thick-
ness of 10 millim. anda height of 10 millim., and then divides
into thick branches, which, after a short course, terminate in
somewhat flattened twigs. Previous to the final ramification
they give off alsoseveral small branchlets, which come off at right
angles. ‘The ramification of the terminal twigs, which latter
are about 2 millim. thick, takes place in a corymbose manner,
in which the three to six terminal twigs bear the polyp-heads
laterally, the polyp-heads being surmounted by bundles of
spicules. ‘The terminal twigs diverging from separate lobes of
5 to 10 millim. in diameter, which bear from ten to twenty
calices. ‘Lhe two large spicules at the base of the tentacles
converge A -like and torm an operculum.

Locality. Japan. Collected by Dr. Doederlein.

: 7
Spongodes pumilio, n. sp.

The colony forms a low lobose mass, 25 millim. high and
85 millim. broad ; of a whitish colour, with red polyp-heads,
surmounted by silvery white bundles of spicules. A short
trunk divides near its base into several thick branches, which
are horizontally expanded. Hach of these branches divides
at the end into several divergent twigs, first, however, giving

the Genus Spongodes, Less. V1

off lateral twigs on two sides. ‘The terminal twigs speedily
divide into little twigs, which are arranged in a corymbose
manner and bear bundles of polyps in which each calyx is
surmounted by a spicule of from 2 to 2°5 millim. in length.
The heads are red, the lateral bundles of spicules white. In
each bundle of polyps one polyp appears to be more strongly
developed than the others and projects above them.

Locality. Enoshima, Japan. Collected by Dr. Doederlein.

Spongodes rigida, n. sp.

The colony is a loosely ramified, shortly pedunculate, head-
like mass of rigid consistence. The colour of the mass is dark
purple, of the polyp-heads yellow. Height of the colony 33
millim., diameter 35 millim. The short cylindrical stalk
divides at a height of 12 millim. into a number of branches
coming off on all sides. The branches are directed in part
horizontally outwards, in part obliquely upwards, and bear at
the end divergent twigs, which divide in a corymbose manner
into the polyp-bearing terminal twigs. Hach of the latter
bears a bundle of from three to five polyps, whose heads are
supported by a spicule from 2 to 3 millim. in length. Hach
head possesses an eight-rayed operculum, composed of yellow
spindles 0°25 millim. in length. Numerous spindles occur
imbedded throughout the entire mesoderm, which thereby
acquires a firm rigid condition.

Locality. Japan. Collected by Dr. Doederlein.

Spongodes coccinea, n. sp.

The colony forms an irregular lobose mass, placed on the
end of a short barren stalk, which has a leathery consistence.
The head is thickly covered with polyps and is of a dark
earmine-red colour. Height of the colony 45 millim., dia-
meter 45 millim., length of the stalk 17 millim.

The ramification takes place in such a fashion that the main
stem divides into a few (four) large flat branches, speedily
giving off along their course and from their ends smaller
secondary branches, which divide into smaller secondary and
terminal twigs. ‘These bear bundles of from four to six polyp-
heads. ‘These terminal lobules are united with the others
into larger groups, and these again into four lobes which
correspond to the four main branches. The polyp-heads are
small. The dorsal bundle of spicules is only feebly deve-
loped and projects only slightly above the head. Hight
groups of spicules form an opercular cover.

Locality. Enoshima, Japan. Collected by Dr. Doederlein.

72 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on the

Spongodes flabellifera, n. sp.

The colony forms an upright stem, 73 millim. high, from
which, at a height of 830 millim. and upwards, branches come off
on all sides. These speedily ramifying form at the end small
umbels, in which each terminal twig bears a bundle of from
three to eight polyps; but here and there also single polyps
occur. The lowermost branches are flat and their twigs are
fused together; they thus form fan-shaped serrated folia, the
margins of which are beset with rows of polyps. The ramifi-
cation is loose, so that it can easily be made out everywhere.
The polyp-heads are pedunculate, free from one another for
a short space, and slightly surmounted by bundles of spicules.
The heads are surrounded by eight groups of spicules arranged
en chevron, which project like teeth above the margin.

millim.
Height of the sterile stent... 0.055 -tesees wes 30
AAMC HET. 23s an bhaiage Pre ttlote s fen State eigen iatinte eenennn 16
Height of the polyp-bearing portion,........... 43
PDIGIIGLED”. S Te atel kote siecle one Cteni ogeed tess Goes wake ate 35

The colour of the polyp-umbels is dark fleshy red, the stem
and branches are white.

Locality. Enoshima, Japan. Collected by Dr. Doederlein.
Spongodes Klunzingert, n. sp.

Spongodes ramulosa, WKlunzinger, Korallthiere des rothen Meeres,
p. 37, pl. iii. fig. 2.

Non Spoygodes ramulosa, Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1862, pp, 28 and 29,
fies. 5 and 6,

After a comparison of the typical specimen of Spongodes
ramulosa, Klunzinger, which Professor von Martens most
kindly lent me from the Berlin Museum, with specimens
of Gray’s species, it became evident that the two are speci-
fically distinct. Hence the name S. Klunzingert might be
adopted for the species from the Red Sea described by

Klunzinger.

X.— Polyzoa of Mauritius. By R. Kirkpatrick,
Assistant in the British Museum (Natural History).

[Plates VII.—-X. ]
I HAVE great pleasure m taking this opportunity of thanking

the Rev. Thomas Hincks, F.R.S., for his kindness in reading
my manuscript and offering many valuable suggestions.

Polyzoa of Mauritius. 73

Most of the forms described below were fragments incrust-
ing the stem of a large Gorgonta; several specimens in-
crusted pieces of rock.

‘This small collection is remarkable for the large proportion
of what seem to be new forms. Out of 386 species 23
appear to be new.

Family Bicellariide.

DIPL@CIUM, nov. gen.

Zoarium dichotomous. Zocecia in pairs back to back, each
pair at right angles to those above and below; the pairs
separated by short cylindrical corneous internodes ; orifice of
cell with notch in lower border,

Diplecium simplex, n. sp. (Pl. VIL. fig. 1.)

Zocecia semitransparent, marked with a mosaic pattern ;
each pair, viewed laterally, forming a triangle (with the
angles truncate) ; orifice suborbicular, with a rounded notch
below ; peristome not raised ; no avicularia. Ovecia depressed,
flattened.

In some parts of the branches the internodes are suppressed ;
but the general arrangement of the zocecia is as described
above.

It is doubtful in what family Diplectum simplex should be
placed. 1 have placed it in the Bicellariude merely pro-
visionally.

Family Cellulariide.
Genus SCRUPOCELLARIA.

Scrupocellaria minuta, n. sp. (Pl. IX. fig. 3.)

Zoarium very slender, branched dichotomously. Zocecia
small, oblong; area occupying 4 of cell; spines 4 on outer
side, 2 on inner, operculum tan-shaped, entire ; lateral avi-
cularia large in comparison with cell, curved at apex; no
anterior avicularia ; vibracular cells vertical, with short vibra-
cula ; radical fibres simple (not hooked). Odcecia ?

Genus NELLIA.
Nellia simplex, Busk. (PI. IX. tig. 4.)
Nellia simplex, Busk, B. M. C. p. 19, pl. lxv.; ‘Chall.’ Rep. p. 27,
pl. v. fig. 6.
The Mauritius specimen is in some parts crowded with
ooecia, which I have not seen figured or described. The

74 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on the

ocecia are half immersed in the superjacent zocecium, cucul-
late, rather flattened from before backwards ; marked with a
short vertical ridge bifureating above, and by a horizontal
ridge formed by the lower border of the zocectum above.

Family Membraniporide.
Genus MEMBRANIPORA.

Membranipora defensa, n. sp. (PI. VIII. fig. 8.)

Zocecia corneous, large, ovate, slightly produced below ;
aperture oval, with raised, slightly crenulated margin ; one
short, thick, upright, bifurcate, oral spine at each upper
angle, and 6-8 flattened spines on each side, bending over
the aperture, interdigitating. No avicularia. Ocecia ?

In some instances the spines have fused, thus forming
solid bars above the aperture, and foreshadowing what takes
place more completely in Membraniporella.

Membranipora marginalis, n. sp. (Pl. VIL. fig. 2.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia large, oval, slightly produced
below the area, the produced portion being thick, hyaline,
marked with concentric curved lines; area oval, wider below
than above; margin thick, sloping inwards to aperture,
slightly crenate; no internal calcareous lamina; no avicu-
laria. Ovcecia cucullate, smooth.

Membranipora mauritiana, n. sp. (Pl. VII. fig. 3.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia varying in shape, generally
oval; separated from each other by short tubes ; very slightly
produced below the area; walls of zocecia hyaline in younger,
opaque in older cells, granulose ; area surrounded by a high
crenulated border, oval, wider below than above; lamina
hyaline, granulose ; aperture (portion uncovered by encroach-
ment of lamina) shaped like a wide figure of eight; orifice of
zoceclum at top of cell semicircular, not truly articulated.
Ocecium cucullate, smooth, opaque, not punctured.

‘The inter-zccecial tubes are hardly discernible in the older
parts of the colony ; also the portions of the zocecia produced
below the area are obliterated.

Whether those forms of the Membraniporide with a cal-
careous lamina partially covering the ‘ area” should be
included under a distinct genus (viz. Amphiblestrum) or not
is a vexed question.

The forms with the lamina seem to be intermediate between
Membranipora proper and Aicropora, the latter genus being

Polyzoa of Mauritius. 75

apparently derived from Membranipora by the growth of the
lamina over the whole area (excepting, of course, the oper-
culum), and by the suppression of the infra-areal portion of
the zocecium ; the circum-areal ridge of Membranipora would
be represented by the raised line round the cell in Wicropora.

In Amphiblesirum the operculum is still attached to the
chitinous covering of the area to however great an extent the
lamina may be developed.

In the opinion of many, to make a separate genus of those
forms with the lamina is to make an artificial group.

Family Microporida.
Micropora corvacea, Hsper.

Family Steganoporellide.
Steganoporella Roziert, Audouin.

The Mauritius specimen belongs to the ‘ normal form,”
: I é Sige z : ae
with marginal tubercles, bilobate ocecitum, without avicularia.

Family Cribrilinida.
Genus CRIBRILINA.
Oribrilina radiata.
Innominate form without avicularia.

Cribrilina radiata, var. flabellifera, nov. var. (Pl. X. fig. 4.)

The zocecia in almost every respect resemble those of the
“innominata ” form of Cribrilina radiata, but a considerable
modification has taken place in the avicularium. As in the
Madeiran variety described by Mr. Hincks, the avicularium
is developed as a distinct cell; but the mandible has a re-
markable shape, being broad at the base, then tapering and
branching out into two rib-like processes, and from the con-
joined bases of the latter a thin triangular chitinous expansion
arises.

Family Microporellide.

STEPHANOPORA, nov. gen.

Zocecia with semicular orifice, lower margin straight, not
dentate, without sinus; peristome raised posteriorly ; from
anterior margins of wall thus formed a process is given off
on each side uniting in front to form with posterior wall a
tubular peristome incomplete below. From lower margin of
peristome a broad branched process is given off uniting with
processes from other zocecia to form a secondary cribriform
roof. Special pore wanting.

76 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on the

Stephanopora cribrispinata, n. sp. (Pl. X. fig. 5.)

Zoarium incrusting, loosely attached. Zocecia broad, ven-
tricose, smooth, hyaline, perforated by large, well-defined
pores; margin of secondary orifice crowned by short spines.
Avicularia none. Ocecia ?

The specimen is placed in the family Microporellide, from
its possessing a mouth of the shape characteristic of the Mi-
croporellide, and from the absence of features indicating an
affinity with other groups.

The genus is based on the following characters :—Secon-
dary cribriform roof, Microporellidan mouth, and absence of
special pore.

Genus MIcROPORELLA.
Microporella ciliata, Pallas.

Family Porinide.
Genus ANARTHROPORA.
Anarthropora horrida,n. sp. (Pl. VIII. fig. 2.)

Zocecia broadly expanded and rounded below, tapering
upwards towards a tubular peristome; surface verruco-
spinose (wart-like processes with short spines on the summit),
punctured ; primary orifice semicircular, with concave lower
border ; secondary orifice varying from oval to circular; on
the front surface of the zccecia (and occasionally apparently
between the cells) short tubular avicularia, lengthening out
above in the form of grooved spout-like processes. Ocecia ?

Family Myriozoide.
Genus SCHIZOPORELLA.
Schizoporella venusta, Norman.
Lepraia venusta, Norman, Ann. N. H., Jan. 1864, p. 84, pl. x. figs. 2, 3.
Gemellipora glabra, forma striatula, Smitt, Flor. Bry. pt. ii. p. 37, pl. xi
fig. 207.

Schizoporella venusta, Hincks, Brit. Mar. Pol. p. 276, pl. xxx. figs. 6, 7.

The Mauritius form possesses most of the characteristics of
the British one, but there is no umbo on the former.

On the other hand the two forms resemble one another in
the shape of the orifice, the presence of modified and aborted

cells, &c.
Schizoporella ampla, n. sp. (Pl. VII. fig. 4.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zooecia ventriccse, somewhat irre-

Polyzoa of Mauritius. 77

egularly heaped ; walls smooth, white, thick ; orifice orbicular
with articular notch; on one or both sides on a level with
the articular notch, a small subcylindrical avicularian cell
with small subtriangular mandible ; scattered over the zoarium
large avicularian cells with long pear-shaped mandibles.
Ocecia prominent, globose, vitreous, punctate, fertile cells
generally with two avicularian cells.

The form of the orifice in Schizoporella ampla was made
the sole characteristic of a genus (Gemellipora) by Prof.
Smitt (Flor. Bry. pt. i. p. 37). Mr. Busk retains this
genus in his ‘Challenger’ Report, but mentions as an addi-
tional character the presence of a median avicularium.
Schizoporella ampla possesses the orifice characteristic of
Gemellipora, but has, in place of a median avicularium, a
similar organ on one or both sides of the mouth.

Genus MASTIGOPHORA.

Mastigophora Dutertret, Aud., var. pesanseris.
Hippothoa pesanseris, Smitt, Flor. Bry. pt. ii. p. 48, pl. vii. figs. 159,
160.
The small avicularia (or vibracula) on each side of the
mouth possess the peculiar ‘‘ web-foot ’’ mandibles.
In the British form these appendages are slender sete.
The difference of form in these appendages is merely varietal.

Genus GIGANTOPORA.

Gigantopora lyncoides, Ridley. (Pl. VII. fig. 5.)

G. lyncoides was described by Mr. Ridley in his Report on
the ‘ Alert’ Polyzoa (Proc. Zool. Soc., Jan. 1881).

The type specimen in the British Museum consists of only
a few fully developed cells.

In that specimen there is but little indication of the manner
in which the tubular peristome and large pore are developed ;
but in the Mauritius specimens the manner of development of
these secondary structures is evident.

The vibraculoid avicularia on each side of the orifice are
elevated above the surface of the zocecium, and arch over the
orifice, forming a bridge over the latter. By the growth in
breadth of the interavicularian portion of the bridge the
tubular peristome and “ pore” are formed. A calcareous
rim grows up round the pore, thus rendering obscure the
mode of formation of the latter.

The primary orifice of the zocecium is subquadrate, the

lower border sinuated.

78 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on the

From the mode of development of the tubular peristome
and pore it is clear that G. lyncoides has no affinities with
the Microporellide or Porinide, but belongs to the Myrio-
zoide or Schizostomatous group of Escharide.

A supraoral bridge is formed in G'ephyrophora in the same
manner as in Gigantopora.

The presence of this bridge, formed in the manner indi-
cated, may scarcely seem a character of sufficient importance
on which to found a genus.

Genus RHYNCHOPORA.
Rhynchopora bispinosa, Johnst.

In the Mauritius form the oral avicularium is only present
on a few cells.

The ocecium is marked in front by a less thickly calcified
area semicircular in shape.

Until I saw the oral avicularia the specimen seemed to me
to be a new species of Schizoporella.

Family Escharide.
Genus LEPRALIA.
Lepralia gigas, Hincks.
Lepratia gigas, Hincks, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. March 1885, pl. ix.
tig. 8.

The Mauritius form is only loosely incrusting. The dorsal
surface shows the zocecia separated by broad bands; the
square areas marked out are pitted by numerous large punc-

tures.
Loc. Trincomalee, Mauritius.

Lepralia judex,n. sp. (Pl. VIII. fig. 4.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia radiating from a centre,
rhomboidal, narrowed inferiorly, surface flattened; walls
opaque, rough, granulose ; orifice oblong, broader below than
above ; round the orifice, laterally and behind, a thick semi-
circular wall, extending on each side as far as the lower border
of the mouth; on the upper border of the wall from fifteen
to twenty marks, indicating the presence of as many stout
spines in the perfect state. Avicularia none. Ocecia ?

Lepralia Poissonti, Audouin. (Pl. VIII. fig. 1.)
? Escharella setigera, Smitt, Flor. Bry. pt. ii. pl. x. fig. 206.
This species is figured in Savigny’s ‘ Description de

Polyzoa of Mauritius. 79

PEgypte.’ The vibracula are represented as two apparently
solid knob-like processes, and there are no sete.

The Mauritius specimen is remarkable for the length of
the sete, which are in several instances more than twice the
length of the cell. Perhaps it would be more correct to speak
of the sete as vibraculoid mandibles.

Lepralia mosaica, n. sp. (Pl. VILL. fig. 6.)

Zocecia in linear series, by the branching of which and
junction of adjacent cells an irregularly-shaped zoarium is
produced. Zocecia large, ventricose, surface shining, marked
with a mosaic pattern, punctured ; along the mid-line of the
cell a longitudinal beaded line; orifice quadrangular, con-
stricted above lower margin of the orifice by a projection on
each side. Avicularia none. Ovcecia?

The zocecia are attached to the surface on which they grow
and to each other, when contiguous, by a fringe of membra-
nous processes, with a perforation at the base communicating
with the body of the cell.

In one cell which had the misfortune to bridge over a
chasm the basal fringe of processes is strongly developed in
the endeavour of the zocecium to attach itself securely.

Genus PHYLACTELLA.
Phylactella columnaris, n. sp. (Pl. VIII. fig. 3.)

Zoarium inecrusting. Zocecia large, ventricose, walls thick,
white, punctured ; orifice quadrangular, constricted on each
side about the middle; lower border slightly concave; round
the front and sides of the orifice a high peristome ; rising from
the body of the zocecium a tubular avicularium, with small
triangular mandible. Ocecia globose, punctured, below the
level of and embraced by lateral walls of peristome.

The tubular avicularia in two instances rise from the front
of the peristome. On one cell two columnar avicularia rise
from the same base and diverge at an acute angle.

Genus SMITTIA.
Smittia tubula,n. sp. (PI. X. fig. 6.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia hyaline, ventricose, slightly
verrucose, separated by raised lines ; primary orifice orbi-
cular, with one broad denticle ; peristome tall, tubular, with
six tall spines; secondary orifice horizontal, notched ; a small
avicularium, with small rounded mandible on one side of
orifice. Ocecium globose, punctured.

80 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on the

The raised lines are in one part of the specimen developed
to such an extent that the zocecia appear to grow out of a
common crust.

Smittia rostrijormis,n. sp. (Pl. VILL. fig. 7.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia rhomboidal, hyaline, glisten-
ing, granulose ; primary orifice suborbicular, with three den-
ticles; peristome vertical, with three tall spines ; one long
avicularium on each side, with long, slender, pointed mandible
neatly the length of the cell, margins of avicularian cell
serrate; on centre of anterior surface a small avicularium,
with triangular mandible pointing downwards; replacing one
of the lateral avicularia on some cells, a large avicularium
with thickly serrate margin and long hastate mandible.
Ocecia small, punctured ; on the front and upper part a curved
beak-like avicularium projecting vertically upwards ; orifice
of oceclum opening within peristome.

Smittia latiavicularia, n. sp. (Pl. X. fig. 3.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia depressed, subimmersed,
white, granulose, not punctured, margins faintly areolated,
separated by raised lines; primary orifice oblong ; one median
denticle (traces of rudimentary lateral denticles in a few cells) ;
peristome deficient posteriorly, rising on each side into a tri-
angular eminence, bearing on its outer side an avicularium
with acute mandible pointing forwards; over front of zocecia
one or more shallow avicularia with spatulate mandibles.
Ocecium globose, punctured; orifice surrounded by a rim
terminating above in a triangular area, supporting an avicu-
larium with pointed mandible.

Smittia murarmata,n. sp. (Pl. VIIL fig. 5.)

Zoarium incrusting, covered by a thin, orange-tinted,
iridescent membrane. Zocecia oblong; surface glistening,
granulose, eee round the margins; primary orifice
horseshoe-shaped, lower margin straight, with one very promi-
nent hammer-shaped denticle ; peristome raised, with wide
sinus in front, one lateral wall higher and longer than the
other; along ‘the higher side of peristome an avicularian cell

with triangular mandible pointing upwards and forwards.
Ocecia ?

Smitita marmorea, Hincks.

Smittia marmorea, Hincks, Brit. Mar. Pol. p. 350, pl. xxxvi. figs. 3-5.

Polyzoa of Mauritius. 81

Smittia reticulata, J. MacG.

The zocecia of the Mauritius specimen are smaller than those
of the British form; the lateral denticles are rudimentary and
have disappeared in some cells. The avicularium points
obliquely instead of vertically downwards, as in the British
form.

Genus PORELLA.

Porella nitidissima, Hincks.
Porella nitidissima, Hincks, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., July 1880.
The only specimen hitherto found comes from Madeira.

Genus MUCRONELLA

Mucronella porelliformis, n. sp. (Pl. IX. fig. 1.)

Zoarium incrusting. Zocecia small, rhomboidal, surface
glistening, verrucose ; orifice suborbicular, lower margin not
dentate; peristome raised in front into a broad, convex,
hammer- -shaped process, finely crenate at the top ; ‘in young
cells a small process rising from the peristome on each side of
the orifice and bending inwards ; six oral spines; on each

side of the orifice a slender avicularium, with acute triangular
mandible pointing upwards and outwards. Ovcecia small,
recumbent, vitreous, not punctured.

The species is called “ porelliformis” from the appearance
presented by the orifice. The large pouch- -like muero arches
over the orifice in such a way as fo give the cell the appear-
ance of possessing a secondary orifice resembling that of
Porella, This is especially the case when one or both of the
lateral processes blend with the median. ‘There is no avicu-

larium on the inner side of the pouch thus formed.

Mucronella cothurnica, n. sp. (Pl. IX. fig. 5.)

Zoarium incrusting, zocecia forming linear series; walls

thick, coarsely punctate. Zocecia large, oval below, rising to
a tall peristome surmounted by about twenty stout jointed

spines nearly encircling the orifice, except a small space in

front; orifice subquadrangular ; anteriorly a grooved, trian-

cular, horizontal mucro. Avicularia none. Ocecia’ small,

globular, punctured.

82 Mr. R. Kirkpatrick on the

Genus EScHAROIDES.
Escharoides discus, n. sp. (Pl. TX. fig. 6.)

Zoarium discoid, spreading by a thin calcareous lamina;
marginal zocecia decumbent, central erect, heaped up; sur-
face of zocecia hyaline, verrucose; primary orifice semicir-
cular, entire, not toothed; peristome at first shallow and
notched, with an avicularium with pointed mandible on inner
side of one of the processes forming the notch ; avicularium
forming a prominent triangular projection ; peristome in older
zocecia high, tubular, crowned by blunt processes ; an avicu-
larium on the front of the cell with triangular mandible pro-
jecting forwards and upwards. Ovcecia small, globular, punc-
tured,

In one of the specimens one disk is superimposed on an
older colony. In old cells with a tall peristome the internally
projecting avicularium appears like the denticle present in
Smittia &e.

Family Reteporide.

Genus RETEPORA.
Retepora tenuis, n. sp. (Pl. VII. fig. 6.)

Zoarium with large oval fenestre, much wider than the
slender trabecule. Surface of zocecia verrucose, semihyaline ;
primary orifice semicircular, secondary orifice orbicular ;
peristome with fissure and przoral pore (often obliterated) ;
very small spatulate avicularia scattered over the zoarium.
Dorsal surface glistening, granulose, divided into irregularl
shaped areas. Ovcecia lofty, prominent, with trifoliate stigma
consisting of a long, broad, vertical arm terminating at the
summit of the ocecium in an umbo, the other two arms short;
just above the orifice.

The specific characters consist in the large fenestre, slender
trabecule, absence of specially situated avicularia, or of avicu-
laria with pointed mandibles, the shape and markings of the
ocecium. In one or two ocecia lateral pressure has caused the
horizontal arms to curve inwards, so as to meet and form a
small complete circle.

Chitinous appendages consist of the small semicircular
mandibles, of the circular avicularia, and of the operculum,
which is semicircular, with straight lower border (see Pl. VII.

fig. 6c).
Retepora Hincksti, n. sp. (Pl. VII. fig. 7.)

Zoarium erect, branching in one plane; branches free, sub-

Polyzoa of Maurittus. 83

dichotomous. Zocecia_rhomboidal, opalescent, glistening,
granulose, not punctured ; older zocecia immersed, the orifices
of the separate cells alone being visible; primary orifice oval
(long diameter transverse) ; peristome with a slit-like fissure
terminating ina round pore; on one side of peristome a small
avicularium with small hemispherical mandible. Dorsal sur-
face glistening, granulose, divided into irregular areas by
raised lines. Ocecia long, oval, depressed, marked with a
broad, median, beaded band, narrowing superiorly to a slight
ridge. Chitinous appendages.

Family Tubuliporide.

Genus IDMONEA.
Idmonea radicata, n. sp. (Pl. IX. fig. 2.)

Zoarium about 4 an inch high, ramose, branches flattened,
subdichotomous, anastomosing, giving off cylindrical calea-
reous processes, fixing it to the base from which it grows;
anterior surface hyaline, finely punctured. Zocecia in pairs in

ounger, and threes in older parts of branches, forming sub-
parallel alternating rows; zocecia closely connate for about
half their length, then diverging, curved so as to be concave
downwards, increasing in height from within outwards ;
dorsal surface flat, faintly marked with transverse concentric
rings of growth, finely punctured and marked with fine paral-
lel longitudinal striz. Ocecia anterior, formed by an infla-
tion of the branch; surface punctured ; four or five zocecia
subimmersed.

Idmonea tortuosa, n. sp. (PL. X. fig. 2.)

Zoarium erect, flattened, branching dichotomously, branches
subtriangular. "Zocecia in two or three series, Increasing from
within outwards, large, free only fora quarter ‘of their length ;
punctured both in the adnate and free portions. Dorsal sur-
face covered by thick, punctured, tortuous, intertwining tubes.
Ocecia ?

In this form aborted zocecia instead of forming radical
tubes, as in some species, are closely adpressed to the dorsal

surface of the zoarium.
Genus HoRNERA.

Hornera spinigera,n. sp. (Pl. X. fig. 1.)
Zoarium flabellate, irregularly pinnate; branches cylin-

84 On the Polyzoa of Mauritius.

drical, surface marked by ridges and punctures, both on the
front and dorsally. Zocecia in series one to three on alternate
sides of front of branches, in subparallel oblique series;
zocecia increasing in height from within outwards, innermost
almost level with surface, outermost long, slender, exserted,
and projecting out on a plane with the general surface of the
zoarium ; outer zocecia with long vertical spines, inner with
short spines, bent in at right angles to orifice ; intermediate
zocecia with vertical and horizontal spines. Ovecia ?

It was at first a matter of doubt whether H. spinigera was
not a form of H. pectinata, Busk; but an examination of the
type specimen of the latter showed several important differ-
ences. ‘The zocecia of H. pectinata are larger and of stouter
build and are not so regularly arranged as in LH. spinigera.
The zocecia in H. spinigera are arranged almost as regularly
as those in the genus Jdmonea; but the presence of the inter-
zocecial strize and punctures indicates that the specimen
belongs to the former rather than to the latter genus.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PuaTe VII.

Fig. 1. Diplecium simplex, nov. gen. et sp. la. Magnified. 16. Show-
ing suppression of internode and ocecium.

Fig. 2. Membranipora marginalis, n. sp.

Fig. 3. Membranipora mauritiana, n. sp. Cells from edge of colony, well
separated.

4. Schizoporella ampla, n. sp. 4a. Magnified cell, showing two
avicularia. 46. Pyriform mandible of large avicularian cell
(see fig. 4).

Fug. 5. Gigantopora lyncoides, Ridley. 5a. Cell in which the avicularia
have not joined to form the bridge and pore. 56. Primary orifice.

Fig. 6. Retepora tenuis, nu. sp. Ga. Trabecula, magnified. 66. Fertile
zocecium, enlarged. 6c. Operculum. 6d. Spatulate mandible.

Ig. 7. Retepora Hincksit, n. sp. 7 a, 6. Magnified trabecula and cell.
7 c,d. Operculum and mandible.

Fg.

Puate VIL.

Fig. 1. Lepralia Povssonii, Audouin.

Fig. 2. Anarthropora horrida, un. sp.

Fig. 3. Phylactella columnaris, n. sp.

Fig. 4, Lepralia judex, n. sp.

Figs. 5, 5 a. Smittia murarmata, n. sp.

Fig. 6. Lepralia mosaica, n. sp.

Figs. 7,7 a. Smittia rostriformis, n, sp. 76. Lateral view, showing
avicularium on ocecium.

Fig. 8. Membranipora defensa, n. sp. 8a. Cell, showing junction of
spines.

Note on Megalania, Owen, and Meiolania, Owen. 85

PLATE LX.

Figs. 1, 1a. Mucronella porelliformis, n. sp.

Fig. 2. Idmonea radicata, n. sp. 2a. Enlarged, showing two ocecia.

Fig. 3. Serupocellaria minuta, n. sp. 3a, Dorsal view.

Fig. 4, Nellia simplex, Busk, showing ocecia.

Fig. 5. Mucronella (? Lepralia) cothurnica, n. sp. 6a, Three cells, show-

: ing arrangement of zoarium.

Fig. 6. Escharoides discus, n.sp. 6a. Marginal cell, showing avicularium

on one side ef notch. 66, Central cell, with peristome deve-

loped.
PuaTe X.
Fig. 1. Hornera spinigera, n. sp. 1a. Anterior surface. 1, Posterior
surface.

Fg. 2. Idmonea tortuosa, nu. sp. 2a. Anterior surface. 26. Posterior
surface, showing tortuous tubes.

Fig. 3. Smittia latiavicularia, n. sp. 3a. Lateral view, to show avicu-
larium on ocecium.

Fig. 4. Cribrilina radiata, var. flubellifera, nov. var.

Fug. 5. Stephanopora cribrispinata, nov. gen. et sp. 5a. Cell, showing
shape of orifice.

Figs. 6, 6a. Smittia tubula, n. sp. 6b. Primary orifice, with denticle.

XI.—Note on the Hxtinct Reptilian Genera Megalania,
Owen, and Meiolania, Owen. By A. SmiraH Woopwarp,
F.G.8., F.Z.S8., of the British Museum (Natural History).

THE relabelling of the Australian fossils in the British Mu-
seum, at various times described and figured by Sir Richard
Owen under the names of Megalania and Meiolania, has
lately necessitated a careful examination of the literature of
the subject and comparison of specimens. Recent discoveries
are generally admitted to have proved that several of the
original determinations, founded upon imperfect materials,
were erroneous; some of the fossils are truly Lacertilian,
others are known with equal certainty to be Chelonian, and I]
am able to add on the present occasion that the remainder are
Mammalian. ‘The nomenclature of the genera is also some-
what confusing, and it may therefore be of interest briefly to
summarize the present aspect of the questions involved.

The “ Gigantic Land-Lizard ” (Megalania prisca) of Aus-
tralia was first made known in 18538 by Sir Richard Owen *,

* R. Owen, “ Deseription of some Remains of a Gigantie Land-Lizard
(Megulania prisca, Owen) from Australia,” Phil. Trans. 1859, pp. 43-48,
_ pis. vil., vill.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 7

86 Mr. A. 8. Woodward on

who described three undoubtedly Lacertilian vertebrae from
the alluvial deposits of the Condamine River, west of More-
ton Bay, Queensland, discovered by Dr. George Bennett and
presented by him to the British Museum. They were shown
to be very similar, except in size, to the vertebree of the
existing Australian Monitors; and it still remains doubtful
whether the differences they present are really of generic
value. The vertebre ‘rival in bulk those of the largest
living crocodiles.” More than twenty years after this dis-
covery Sir Richard Owen added a description of a complete
dorsal vertebra from the same district of Queensland, and of
a sacral vertebra from the neighbourhood of Melbourne,
Victoria, as also of an occipital skull-fragment and associated
caudal vertebra from Gowrie, Darling Downs *. Interesting
portions of a large cranium were also described, which had
been found by Mr. G. F. Bennett in King’s Creek, associated
with bones of Diprotodon, though not with vertebra of the
Megalania type. The latter fragments were hypothetically
assigned to the same genus and species as the original fossils
discovered in 1858, and the presence of bony horn-cores upon
the skull led to a comparison with the small Australian
Moloch horridus, which is also provided with dermal horns,
though never of an osseous character. A restoration of Mega-
lania was given, upon the assumption that the extinct and
surviving types were closely allied. In 1881 a tail, com-
pletely ensheathed in bony armour like that of Glyptodon, was
found at the same spot in King’s Creek, whence had been
obtained the fine portion of skull described in the previous
year, and this, too, was determined + as belonging to what
had now become known as the ‘‘ Great Horned Lizard.”
Uromastix princeps, from Zanzibar, was next compared with
the fossil, and Sir Richard Owen pointed out that the caudal
armour of this lizard only differed from that of Megalania in
the same manner as the horns of Moloch were distinguished
from those upon the Queensland skull, namely, in the absence
of bony tissue in their structure. The tail of Moloch horridus
was also shown to be encased in horny scutes similarly dis-
posed, these even “ more closely repeating the number and
arrangement of Megalania”’ than the scutes of Uromastiz.
Still another contribution to the subject was made in 1886 f,
when a sacral vertebra from Gowrie, Darling Downs, was
described, and also a number of foot-bones, supposed to show

* Ibid. part ii., Phil. Trans, 1880, pp. 1037-1050, pls. xxxiv.—xxxviii.
+ Jhid. part iii., Phil. Trans, 1881, pp. 547-556, pls. lxiv.-Ixvi.
} Itad. part iv., Phil. Trans. 1886, pp. 327-330, pls. xiii —xv.

Megalania, Owen, and Meiolania, Owen. 87

that Megalania prisca was truly terrestrial, with well-deve-
loped claws.

Discoveries in a small island 200 miles from the Australian
coast next commanded attention. A number of fossil remains
from a superficial coral-sand formation in Lord Howe’s Island,
transmitted to the British Museum by Robert D. Fitzgerald,
Esq., Surveyor-General, Sydney, New South Wales, were
soon found to comprise parts of an animal very similar to the
possessor of the horned head and armoured tail already known
from a locality 400 miles distant in Queensland. Of these
specimens Sir Richard Owen* described and figured portions
of the skull and mandible, tail, and the (partly restored)
pelvis, besides briefly noticing an anterior vertebra, a portion
of the scapula, and a fragment of humerus. He concluded
that they belonged to a new subgenus—perhaps a new genus
—to be named Me?olania, comprising apparently two species,
M. platyceps and M. minor. Associated with the described
fossils, however, were numerous other fragments, which Mr.
William Davies had placed among the Chelonia; and the
whole were subsequently reexamined by Professor Huxley,
who arrived at the conclusion that they were ald Chelonianf.
The animal was now considered to be most nearly allied to
Chelydra and Gypochelys (Macroclemmys) and other Crypto-
diran genera of that type; and Mr. G. I’. Bennett’s Queens-
land skull and tail were unhesitatingly removed from their
association with the Megalanian vertebre { and referred to
this new genus, for which Professor Huxley thought the
name of Ceratochelys would be more appropriate than that of
Meiolania. Ue also renamed Metolania platyceps, Cerato-
chelys sthenurus. A new element was thus added to the
Reptilian fauna of Pleistocene Australia, the Cryptodiran
Chelonia being totally unrepresented there both at the present
day and among known fossils from the superficial deposits.
Still more satisfactory specimens of Medolania platyceps after-
wards reached Sir Richard Owen, who again presented
descriptions to the Royal Society §, and concluded that the

* R. Owen, “ Description of Fossil Remains of two Species of a Mega~
lanian Genus (Metolana) from Lord Howe’s Island,” Phil. Trans, 1886,
pp. 471480, pls. xxix., xxx.

+ T. H. Huxley, “ Preliminary Note on the Fossil Remains of a Che-
lonian Reptile, Ceratochelys sthenurus, from Lord Howe’s Island, Austra-
lia,” Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xlii. (1887), pp. 232-288.

t All the vertebree found with Mecolania in Lord Howe’s Island are
truly Chelonian and none like those named Megalania prisca have been
met with in this locality.

§ R. Owen, “ On Parts of the Skeleton of Metolania platyceps, Owen,”
Abstract in Proc. Roy. Soc; vol. xlii. (1887), p. 297. The complete

memoir has not yet appeared.

88 Mr. A. S. Woodward on

animal displayed affinities both with the “ orders Chelonia
and Sauria,” but was more nearly allied to the latter, of which
he proposed to form the new suborder Ceratosauria. These,
with all other known specimens, were lastly submitted to a
most careful examination by Mr. G. A. Boulenger*, who
regarded Professor Huxley’s general conclusions as unques-
tionable, but offered cogent reasons for placing the genus, not
with the Cryptodiran Chelonians, but with the Pleurodira,
which are at the present day so characteristic of the Australian
region. Mr. Boulenger regards Metolania as herbivorous
and more terrestrial in habit than all known existing Pleuro-
dires.

Another contribution to the correct interpretation of the
“‘ Megalanian ” fossils is unwittingly made by Mr. Lydekker
in the last volume of his Fossil Mammalian Catalogue just
issued. Among the foot-bones assigned to uncertain members
of the marsupial families of Nototheriide and Phascolomyide TF
are included specimens precisely similar to those described by
Sir Richard Owen in part iv. of his memoir on “‘Megalania”
as affording information in regard to the characters of the feet
of this reptile. These specimens were not improbably all
obtained at the same time and place, and there can be no
doubt of the correctness of Mr. Lydekker’s interpretation ;
some of them indeed bear Sir Richard Owen’s MS. label
“* Phascolonus?”’ ‘They were all registered by Mr. William
Davies as pertaining to marsupials (nos. M. 8659, 60).

It thus appears that under ‘‘Megalania prisca”’ have been
included (i.) lacertilian vertebrae and an occipital fragment,
(ii.) a chelonian skull and tail-sheath, and (iii.) marsupial
foot-bones. ‘The first necessarily form the type specimens
of the genus and species, and the last are obviously at once
excluded from consideration. ‘The second series of fossils,
however, require a name.

Professor Huxley, as already remarked, unhesitatingly
places Mr. Bennett’s Queensland skull and tail in the same
genus as the Lord-Howe’s Island fossils, and the reference
appears fully justified by the specimens at present known.
But, as Mr. Boulenger observes, the rules of nomenclature do
not permit of the adoption of a new name, Ceratochelys,
however appropriate it may be, and the genus must hence-
forth be termed Mezolania.

With regard to species, the figures and descriptions of the

* G. A. Boulenger, ‘On the Systematic Position of the Genus Mevo-
lania, Owen (Ceratochelys, Huxley), Proc. Zool. Soc. 1887, pp. 554, 555.

+ R. Lydekker, ‘Catalogue of the Fossil Mammalia in the British
Museum,’ part vy. 1887, p. 169.

Megalania, Owen, and Meiolania, Owen. 89

Queensland specimens are at once conclusive of their dis-
tinctness from any form yet determined from the distant
Lord Howe’s Island, though they were not specifically dis-
tinguished or named by Professor Huxley. They are thus at
present nameless; and I would venture to suggest that they
may be most appropriately known as Mezolania Owen, in
honour of the distinguished comparative anatomist who has
contributed more than any other to our knowledge of the
Pleistocene Vertebrata of the far-off antipodes. Sir Richard
Owen has often undertaken the interpretation of fragments
which many would have looked upon as quite undeterminable ;
and by this bestowal of labour upon most unpromising mate-
rials he has aroused the enthusiasm of his colonial correspon-
dents, which has resulted in the enormous mass of information
now available concerning these ancient faunas, and has
secured for the British Museum of Natural History that
unrivalled series of Australasian remains which is one of its
most distinctive features.

In conclusion it will be convenient for reference to tabulate
the foregoing results as follows :—

Megalania (?Varanus) prisca, Owen.

Megalania prisca, Owen, Phil. Trans. 1859, pp. 43-48, pls. vii., viii.
(Vertebree.)

Megalania prisca, Owen, 2bid. 1880, pp. 1037-1040, pls. xxxiv.—xxxvi.
(Vertebree and occipital fragment.)

Megalania prisca, Owen, ibid. 1886, pp. 827, 528, pl. xiii. (Vertebree.)

Meiolania Owent, A. S. Woodw.

Megalania prisca, Owen (errore), bid. 1880, pp. 1041-1048, pls. xxxvii.,
XXxviii. (Cranium.)

Megalania prisca, Owen (errore), ibid. 1881, pp. 547-556, pls. Lxiv.-
Ixvi. (Tail-sheath.)

Ceratochelys sthenurus, Huxley (in part), Proe. Roy. Soe. vol. xlii.
(1887), p. 237. (Queensland cranium and tail-sheath.)

Mevolania platyceps, Owen (? also ML. minor, Owen).

Meiolania platyceps, Owen, and M. minor, Owen, Phil. Trans. 1886,
pp. 471-480, pls. xxix., xxx. (Portions of skull and tail-sheath, &c.)

Ceratochelys sthenurus, Huxley (in part), Proc. Roy. Soc, vol. xlii,
(1887), pp. 232-283. (Various parts of skeleton.)

Marsupial Foot-bones.

Meyalania prisca (errore), Owen, Phil. Trans, 1836, pp. 328-330,
pls. xiv., xv. (Foot-bones. )

90 Messrs. F. D. Godman and O. Salvin on new

XIT.—New Species of Butterflies collected by Mr. C. M.
Woodford in the Solomon Islands. By F. D. Gopman
and QO. SALVIN.

Danats cometho, sp. n.

Alis fuscis, maculis parvis, submarginalibus, in seriebus duabus posi-
tis albis; anticis fascia maculosa transversa ultra cellulam macu-
larum septem composita, fascia altera interiore juxta eam, maculis
duabus elongatis juxta ramum medianum primum; posticis
macula magna trans cellulam venis septem-partita alba, ultra eam
ad marginem externum maculis indistinctis ferrugineis inter
yenas notatis: subtus ut supra, maculis omnibus multo magis
distinctis ; posticis maculis albis ad costam lineisque ad marginem
internum a basi radiantibus. Exp. 3:2 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, North-west Bay, Saa and Tyoh
in Maleita Island (C. MZ. Woodford).

This Danais takes the place in Maleita Island of D. decipiens,
the common species in the greater part of the Solomon group
with the exception of Ugi Island and San Cristobal Island,
where D. insolata occurs.

D. cometho ditters from D. decipiens in having more clearly
defined submarginal white spots, a large discal. spot cut by
the nervures on the secondaries, and an elongated white spot
on either side of the first branch of the median nervure of the
primaries.

Euplea Woodfordi, sp. n.

Alis fuliginoso-brunneis ad margines externos vix pallidioribus ;
posticis maculis septem submarginalibus ab angulo anali usque ad
venam medianam aliisque quatuor minutis ad angulum apicalem
margini propioribus: subtus pallidioribus, alis ambabus maculis
quinque parvis ultra cellulas et una intra eas lilacino-albis ; posticis
fascia lata submarginali venis divisa, ad angulum apicalem atten-
uata sordide alba; anticis linea squamosa infra ramum medianum
primum grisea. Exp. 3°7 in.

@ alis fuliginosis; anticis plaga arcuata ad angulum apicalem venis
divisa, sordide alba; posticis fascia lata submarginali ejusdem
coloris, maculis quibusdam parvis albidis ad angulum apicalem :
subtus mari similis, sed maculis omnibus discalibus multo majori-
bus aliter fasciis ut in pagina superiore sed latioribus ; anticis
margine interno late albido. Exp. 3°95 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, North-west Bay in Maleita Island
(C. M. Woodford).

Butterflies from the Solomon Islands. 91

Obs. E. Batest ex Nov. Guinea forsan affinis, sed in ¢
maculis posticarum submarginalibus, in @ plaga anticarum
subapicali et fascia posticarum submarginali albidis primo
visu distinguenda.

This species has no brand on the primaries and the inner
margin is nearly straight; these characters are shared by
. Batest. E. resarta belongs to the same group, but has
submarginal spots on the primaries, an obvious difference.

Huplea pyrgion, sp. 0.

F. fraudulente similis, sed posticis ad angulum analem lactescenti-
albis: subtus stigmate anticarum infra ramum medianum primum
grisescentiore; posticis lactescenti-albo marginatis. Exp. 3°8
in.

@ anticis macula magna apicali altera ad angulum analem lactes-
centi-albis et posticis margine externo late ejusdem coloris.
Exp. 3:95 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Cape Astrolabe and North-west
Bay in Maleita Island (C. M. Woodford).

This species bears to L. fraudulenta, so far as regards its
coloration, the same relationship that H. pronax does to E.
honesta.

Euplea pronax, sp. n.

#. honeste affinis, sed posticis ad marginem internum dilutioribus,
maculis tribus lactescenti-albis fere confiuentibus, submarginalibus
ab angulo anali ad medium marginis externi extendentibus: sub-
tus stigmate anticarum nigricantiore et posticis area submarginali
ab angulo anali ad venam medianam extendente alba distinguenda.
Exp. 3°9 in.

Jum analem et margine posticarum externo late lactescenti-albis.

Exp. 4:0 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Cape Astrolabe, North-west Bay,
and Saa in Maleita Island (C. MW. Woodford).

This is evidently the form of #. honesta inhabiting Maleita
Island and has a large dark brand beneath the first median
branch of the primaries, as in that species. ‘The female
differs more than the male from that sex of H. honesta, and
has no spots on the inner area of the primaries above; more-
over, the whitish spots on the apex and anal angle of those
wings and on the outer margin of the secondaries are con-
spicuous differences.

92 Messrs. F. D. Godman end O. Salvin on new

Euplea prusias, sp. n.

E. honest quoque similis, sed anticis ad apieem plaga magna albida
notata ; posticis quoque externe albido late marginatis, ab EZ. pro-
nact plaga apicali anticarum facile distinguenda. Exp. 3°65 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Ulaua Island, St. Anna Fsland (C.
M. Woodford).

The male of this species resembles the female of #. pronax
so far as regards the colourof the primaries, but differs ob-
viously from the male of that species.

Euplea polymela, sp. n.

Alis brunneis ad margines externos paullo dilutioribus; anticis
macula ovali infra ramum medianum primum lilacina ; posticis
stigmate permagno dimidium cellule costalem occupante cervino,
area sericea circumcincta: subtus brunneis wnicoloribus; anticis
macula magna inter ramos medianos, altera minore ad costze
medium aliisque quinque minutis ad apicem lilacino-albis, plaga
magna cervina infra venam medianam et ramum suum primum
stigmatem parvum ovalem includente; posticis maculis quinque
parvis ad angulum apicalem. Exp. 3°85 in.

© mari similis, anticis immaculatis ; posticis maculis duabus albidis
ad angulum apicalem: subtus quoque mari similis, maculis sub-
marginalibus septem albidis notatis. Exp. 4:1 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Alu Island, Fauro Island, Aola in
Guadaleanar Island, Ulaua Island, North-west Bay, Uru Bay,
and Saa in Maleita Island (C. If. Woodford).

This species is allied to E. pastthea, Feld., from Amboina,
and has the inner margin of the primary wings arched in a
similar way ; &. perdita, Butler, from New Britain is another
very closely allied form. From both these insects Z. poly-
mela differs in the total absence of a submarginal row of spots
on the upperside of the primaries. The examples from
Maleita Island have the spots near the margin on the under-
side rather larger and more numerous, but they do not differ
essentially.

Kuplea asyllus, sp. n.

Alis saturate brunneis, anticis ad marginem internum et posticis ad
angulum analem dilutioribus; anticis maculis tribus ultra cellu-
Jam (una subcostali), wna infra ramum medianum primum, aliis-
que quinque parvis submarginalibus ad angulum apicalem lila-
cino-albis ; posticis plaga magna sericea cellulam fere totam
includente: subtus brunneis, maculis submarginalibus in seriebus

Butterflies from the Solomon Isiands. 93

duabus positis serieque altera cellularum fines approximata albis
lilacino limbatis. Exp. 3:5 in.

Q marisimilis, sed alis pallidioribus et marginibus externis pallidis,
maculis submarginalibus obsoletis aliisque ultra cellulam albidis.
Exp. 3°9 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Alu Island, Guadalcanar Island

(C. M. Woodford).
Var. ?

© anticis fere immaculatis, macula costali unica parva notatis ;
posticis macula unica distincta prope angulum apicalem, ceteris
obsoletis: an species altera ?

Hab. Maravo Island (C. M. Woodford).

In the curvature of the inner margin of the primaries and
the position of the silky patch on the secondaries this species
resembles H. pasithea, but the latter is not fawn-colour as
in L. pasithea ; moreover, the underside of both wings has
three concentric bands of spots.

We have a single female specimen from Maravo Island
which differs as stated above from examples of the same sex
from Alu Island. In the absence of the male we do not think
it prudent to give it a name, though we believe it will, on the
receipt of more examples, prove distinct.

Luplea gerion, sp. n.

2 E. asyllo certe affinis ; anticis maculis discalibus nullis, punctis
duobus ad costam, plaga acuata venis divisa ad angulum apicalem
albida; posticis margine interno et margine externo late albis,
illo vix lilacino induto: subtus maculis submarginalibus in fasciam
latam albam fere absorptis. Exp. 3-9 in,

36 adhuc ignotus.

Hab. Solomon Islands, North-west Bay in Maleita Island
(C. M. Woodford).

Though we have only a single female specimen of this
‘species, its distinctness is so obvious that we feel we may
safely give itaname. From the position of the ultra-cellular
spots on both wings its relationship to HH. asyllus is shown.
£. gerion is doubtless the Maleita Island form of that species.

Euplea heurippa, sp. n.

Alis saturate brunneis ; posticis ad marginem externum saturatiori-
bus et purpureo-tinctis; anticis macula elongata ultra coste
medium et maculis sex parvis submarginalibus obscure lilacinis ;

94 Messrs. F. D. Godman and O. Salvin on new

posticis area costali late albida, cellula fere tota cervino-brunnea,
maculis quibusdam obsoletis ultra cellulam: subtus saturate
brunneis ; anticis vix dilutioribus, maculis octo submarginalibus
albidis aliisque minutis ad medium marginis externi; maculis
quoque ultra cellulam septem (eis inter ramos medianos maximis)
albis, macula altera ad cellule finem introrsum furcata, margine
interno late albido; posticis maculis submarginalibus aliisque
ultra cellulam et una minuta ad finem ejus lilacino-albis. Exp.
5°3 In.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Alu Island, Fauro Island, Aola in
Guadalcanar Island, North-west Bay in Maleita Island (C.
M. Woodford).

E. unibrunnea of New Ireland seems to be the most nearly
allied species to L. heurippa, but the latter is darker on both
surfaces of the wings, the cell of the primaries not so clear a
fawn-colour.

There is some variation in this species in the different
islands of the Solomon group. The examples from Alu Island
are the darkest and have the submarginal spots on the pri-
maries more distinct than in the Fauro-Island and Guadal-
canar-Island individuals ; but the differences are very slight.

Euplea pyres, sp. n.

Alis nigricanti-fuscis intense purpureo suffusis, maculis marginibus
externis parallelis albis lilacino limbatis, ea ad angulum anti-
carum analem introrsum furcata, maculis quoque duabus post
medium anticarum coste ejusdem coloris; posticis a cellule
medio ad costam fusco-cervinis: subtus fuliginosis, maculis in
seriebus duabus positis marginibus externis parallelis serieque
interiore cellulam propiore maculague ad cellularum fines aliisque
ad basin quoque albis; anticis plaga magna infra venam medi-
anam et ramum suum primum griseo-albida. Exp, 3-0 in.

@ mari similis quoad maculas alarum submarginales, sed colore
alarum purpureo nullo et maculis aliis juxta cellulas notatis..
Exp. 3:0 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Savo Island, Aola in Guadalcanar
Island (C. M. Woodford).

The collection contains three specimens of this pretty species,
two males and a female, the former from Guadalcanar Island,
the latter from Savo Island. ‘The species most nearly allied
to it seem to be “. darchia of Australia and L. priapus,
Butl., and like them it belongs to Mr. Butler’s genus Calli-
plea.

Butterflies from the Solomon Islands. 95

Hamadryas evages, sp. n.

H. zoilo affinis et anticis eodem modo maculatis; posticis plaga
centrali alba parva et lineis transversis nigris fere integris tripar-
tita, margine externo lato. Exp. 2°1 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Aola in Guadaleanar Island (0. M.
Woodford).

We are unable to find any specimens of 7. zotlus and its
immediate allies agreeing with these examples from Guadal-
canar Island. ‘The central spot on the secondaries is crossed
by two dark bands, one almost entire through the end of the
cell, the other along the line of the submedian nervure. The
male appears to have no costal spot on the secondaries, but
this spot is present in the females. We have three examples
of a Hamadryas from Mysori Island, on the north-west coast
of New Guinea, sent us by Dr. A. B. Meyer, which hardly
differ from H. evages now described. The white patch of the
secondaries, however, is rather more elongated, and thus
approaches that of @. zoilus.

Hamadryas hiero, sp. 1.

H. assarico proxima, posticis plaga alba centrali magis rotundata
lineis duabus transversis nigris fere integris tripartita, margine
externo nigro latiore. Exp. 2-1 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Fauro Island (C. M. Woodford).

The collection contains a pair of this species, which is allied
to H. assaricus of Ceram and Amboina, but differs in the
points indicated above.

Cynthia sapor, sp. n.

C. arsinoe affinis, sed posticis supra et subtus plaga magna discali
- alba notata facile distinguenda. Exp., ¢ 4°4, 2 5:5 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Alu Island, Fauro Island, Aola in
Guadalcanar Island (C. M. Woodford).

This Cynthia belongs to the same group as C. arsinoé, to
which in colour and the general distribution of its markings
it bears a strong resemblance; but besides having the two
ocelli on the secondaries further from the outer margin, C.
sapor has a large white patch extending beyond the cell
nearly to the outer margin and from the anal angle to the
subcostal branch. ‘The posterior ocellus is included in this
white patch, and it is cut by the rufous nervures and contains

96 Messrs. F. D. Godman and O. Salvin on new

a submarginal undulating black line. Beneath the two insects
are much alike, but the inner submarginal line is much
more strongly shown in C. sapor, and the transverse line
through the end of the cell is bordered outwardly by a whitish
edge.

The females of the two insects are much alike, but that of
CO. sapor has the outer half of the secondaries more freely
sprinkled with dusky scales, the ocelli are further from the
margin, and there are other minor characters.

Mr. Mathew’s collection contains a female Cynthia from
Ugi Island, but without a male for comparison it is not
possible to say to which species it belongs.

Cynthia catenes, sp. D.

C. arsinoe quoque similis et alis ejusdem coloris, sed minor: subtus
linea submarginali interiore multo magis distincta, posticis linea
transyersa per cellulam extrorsum pallide fulvo limbata, alis totis
lilacino suffusis, distinguenda. Exp. 3-2 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, St. Anna island (C. 24. Wood-
jord).

The range of this Cynthia is separated from that of C.
arsinoé by C. sapor, which occupies several intermediate
islands, and by C. clodia, of the island of Ulaua. C. sapor
is by far the most distinct of them all from C. arsinoé, and it
is a curious fact that it occupies islands intermediate between
New Guinea and the extreme islands of the Solomon group,
the two forms of Cynthia from the latter being very similar
to the true C. arsinoé.

Cynthia clodia, sp. n.

C. arsinoe quoque affinis, posticis fascia submarginali interiore multo
latiore, area inter ocellos fusco nebulosa; subtus fascia submar-
ginali interiore magis distincta. Exp., g 3°7, 2 4:5 in.

flab. Solomon Islands, Ulaua Island (C. M. Woodford).

There is a pair of this form in the collection, the male
showing sufficient marks of distinction to admit of its sepa-
ration. It is next to C’ catenes, but is larger and has the
under surface of the wings almost devoid of the lilac tint
which Suffuses those of the allied form. ‘The inner of the
two submarginal lines is broader and more distinct both above
and below.

Butterflies from the Solomon Islands. 97

Messaras Woodfordt, sp. n.

Alis murino-brunneis; anticis triente apicali nigricante, fascia
transversa ultra cellulam costam haud attingente ad angulum
analem attenuata alba; posticis maculis septem nigris ferrugineo
circumcinctis in serie fere recta positis a costa angulum apicalem
juxta ad angulum analem, fascia lunulata interiore nigra extror-
sum lilacino limbata, altera exteriore albida extrorsum fusco
marginata lineolaque indistincta fusca submarginali; subtus
gilvis anticis fascia alba sicut in pagina superiore, macula nigri-
cante ad marginem internum, ultra eam saturate ferrugineis linea
lunulata submarginali albida; posticis maculis sicut in pagina
superiore utrinque lineis albidis lunulatis limbatis, linea altera
submarginali quoque albida, margine ipso pallide cinnamomeo,
Exp. 3°15 in.

mari similis, sed paullo major alis pallidioribus magis distincte
notatis. Exp. 3-2 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Fauro Island (C. 12. Woodford).

A beautiful and distinct species, of which Mr. Woodford
captured a good series of specimens, all on Fauro Island.
Though evidently a member of this genus, the coloration of
the wings renders it at once easy of recognition.

Messaras pallescens, sp. n.

M. melichryso similis, sed alis omnino pallidioribus posticis ocellis
submarginalibus et lineis juxta eos multo magis distinctis ut
videtur distinguenda. Exp. 2°6 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Tyoh in Maleita Island (C. d/.
Woodford).

Specimens of both sexes of this form are in Mr. Wood-
ford’s collection. ‘They conform to the general tendency of
many of the Rhopalocera of Maleita Island to be paler than
their representatives elsewhere. ‘he difference from J/. meli-
chrysus is slight, but enough to require recognition.

Atella ephyra, sp. n.

A, alcippe similis, sed anticis magis acutis, lineis omnibus submar-
ginalibus nigris latioribus maculis quoque discalibus magis dis-
tinctis, subtus maculis anticarum discalibus multo magis obyiis.
Exp. 2:0 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, North-west Bay and Cape Astro-
labe in Maleita Island (C. M. Woodford).

We have compared this with Ceram specimens of A.

98 Messrs. F. D. Godman and O. Salvin on new

alcippe. The differences it is true are not great, but seem
sufficiently constant, add to which the difference in distance
between their respective localities is so great that we feel
justified in separating them.

Doleschallia sciron, sp. n.

Alis rufo-brunneis; anticis plaga mediana fulva ultra eam usque ad
apicem nigricantibus, maculis tribus ultra cellulam fulvis aliisque
quatuor subapicalibus albis; posticis ad marginem externum
fuscescentibus, linea submarginali saturate fulva, maculis duabus
discalibus nigris una intra ramos medianos altera infra ramum
subcostalem: subtus fuscescenti-rufis rufo marmoratis, anticis
dimidio costali et posticis ad basin maculis magnis albis nigro
cinctis notatis, linea communi discali nigra utrinque albido lim-
bata, in anticis sinuata in posticis fere recta, anticis maculis
septem submarginalibus fuscis albo pupillatis, posticis ocellis duo-
bus ad marginem externum. Exp. 3:3 in.

mari similis, sed alis magis rufescentibus, anticis ad apicem et
marginem externum angustiore nigricantibus plaga nigra insulata
ad cellule finem. Exp. 3°55 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Alu Island, Fauro Island, Guad-
aleanar Island (C. I. Woodford) ; Treasury Island (G. £.
Mathew).

This species is closely allied to D. Browni of New Ireland,
of which we have the type specimen (a female) before us.
The wings are rather darker, and the tawny patch in the
primaries more conspicuous than in that species. We have
no male specimen that we can with certainty call D. Brownz,
at least none from New Ireland, so that we cannot compare
the male.

Diadema scopas, sp. Nn.

3. D. unicolori similis, sed posticis litura submarginali alba venis
divisa notatis. Exp. 3-9 in.

Q. Eodem modo differt litura alba multo latiore et in anticis exten-
dente. Exp. 4:0 in.

Hab, Solomon Islands, North-west Bay in Maleita Island
(C. M. Woodford).

This species in this island takes the pattern of Huplea
gerton.

Neptis pistas, sp. n.

N. fissizonate similis, sed fascia alarum submarginali alba in anticis
ad angulum analem obsoleta in posticis omnino absente. Exp.
2°75 in.

Butterflies from the Solomon Islands, 99

Hab. Solomon Islands, Alu Island, Fanro Island (C. M.
Woodford).

This species is very closely allied to N. jisstzonata; the
differences are pointed out above. We have several speci-
mens of both sexes.

Mynes Woodford?, sp. n.

3. M. Geoffroyi similis, sed anticis plaga lactescenti-alba multo
minore, ad basin et marginem internum versus nigro atomata;
posticis costa anguste, et margine externo late, nigris: subtus
anticis costa, apice et margine externo late nigris, linea lata sub-
marginali, macula triplici interiore, altera duplici costali albis,
plaga coccinea submarginali inter venam medianam et ramum
suum secundum ; posticis plaga ovali undique nigro circumcincta ;
aliter MW. Geoffroy? persimilis. Exp. 2°55 in,

@ adhuc ignota.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Alu Island (C. M. Woodford).

Mr. Woodford’s collection contains a single male example
of this species which seems sufliciently distinct from the very
variable I. Geoffroyt. It also differs more widely from the
species we described from New Ireland as MZ. eucosmetos, in
which the whole of the central portion of the secondaries is
intensely yellow and the spots of the apex of the primaries
are blended into one continuous patch divided only by the
black nervules.

Papilio ptolychus, sp. n.

¢. Alisnigris, macula quadripartita ultra cellulam aliisque quatuor
submarginalibus lunulatis, maxima ad angulum analem, minima
supra yenam medianam, maculis sex in margine ipso lactescenti-
albis ; posticis fascia continua a costa fere ad marginem internum
lactescenti-alba introrsum fere recta, extrorsum a vena mediana
ad costam profunde serrata, lobulo anali macula fulva ornato,
margine externo inter yenas lactescenti-albo: subtus purpureo-
nigris ; anticis plaga ultra cellulam et maculis marginalibus sicut
in pagina superiore, sed lunulis submarginalibus nullis;_posticis
maculis sex submarginalibus fulvis et fascia obsoleta discali
squamis sparsis cruleo-albis composita notata, margine externo
inter venas albido. Exp, 5°5 in.

@ adhuc ignota.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Aola in Guadalecanar Island (C. A.
Woodford).

Mr. Woodford’s collection contains four male specimens of
this species, all from Guadaleanar. Itis allied to P. Erskine,
recently described by Mr. Mathew from a specimen captured

100 On new Butterflies from the Solomon Islands.

by himself on the island of Ugi. It differs from this speci-
men in having the discal band of the primaries completely
severed, the costal portion being concentrated in a patch
beyond the cell; the rest of this band consists of four spots
placed close to the outer margin instead of at some distance
trom it. In other respects the two species are very much
alike.

Papilio Woodfordi, sp. n.

Alis nigricantibus, fascia discali ultra cellulam ad marginem
internum extensa venis nigris partita lactescenti-alba, margine
externo punctis ejusdem coloris inter venas notato; posticis fascia
transversa a costa per cellule finem ad marginem internum
ducta, margine suo interno fere recto, externo dimidio costali pro-
funde serrato lactescenti-alba, macula parva coloris ejusdem ad
lobulum analem, margine externo unduloso, ad finem venz
median sensim producto, inter venas omnes albido notato:
subtus purpureo-nigris; anticis maculis quatuor ultra cellulam
atomisque paucis submarginalibus ad angulum analem sordide albis ;
posticis fascia transversa discali maculosa sordide alba maculisque
atomosis extra eam ceeruleo-albis, iis inter ramos medianos maxi-
mis, maculis submarginalibus indistinctis sordide albis, ea ad
lobulum analem maxima et introrsum fulvo lavata. Exp. 5:8 in.

Hab, Solomon Islands, Alu Island, Fauro Island (C.
Woodford).

As the discal band of the secondaries does not follow the
costal margin, this species resembles P. A’rskinet and P. ptoly-
chus; but the position of this band and the absence of a red
spot on the anal lobe at once show its complete distinctness.
Mr. Woodford’s collection contains several examples from

both of the above-named islands.

aera Be oa alt
Papilio pisidice, sp. n.
P. codro et P. papuensi similis, sed fascia maculosa anticarum supra

et subtus lete aurea nec viridi distinguendus. P. segonact quoque
similis, sed fascia integra haud interrupta diversa. Exp. 5°35 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, North-west Bay in Maleita Island —
(C. M. Woodford).

A single damaged specimen from this locality evidently
belongs to a species distinct both from P. codrus and its near
ally P. papuensis, and also from the New-Ireland P. segonaa.
The secondaries are a good deal broken, so that we cannot
trace their form. There is a second specimen from Alu

On new Reptiles and Batrachians from Madagascar. 101

Island (a female) which may possibly belong to another
species, since the band of spots on the primaries are much
smaller and their colour less brilliant. Additional specimens
can alone settle whether there is a second species in these
islands.

Papilio orsippus, sp. n.
P. joese similis, sed colore ceruleo saturatiore et minus extensa,
margine nigro latiore, macula nigra ad cellule anticarum finem
haud insulata: subtus multo magis nigricantibus, anticis parte

apicali vix pallidiore squamis albidis sparsim notatis, posticis
margine externo pallido nullo, Exp. 5-2 in.

Hab. Solomon Islands, Aola in Guadalcanar Island (C. 1.
Woodford).

A single male specimen in beautiful fresh condition is in
Mr. Woodford’s collection. The species is closely allied to
P. joesa of N. Australia and also to the insect from New
Ireland which we attribute to P. Montrouztert from Woodlark
Island. From both of these it differs in having the under sur-
face of the wings nearly uniform ; the apical portion of the pri-
maries, too, is very slightly paler than the rest of the wings.

XIII.—Descriptions of new Reptiles and Batrachians from
Madagascar. By G,. A. BOULENGER.

[Plates V. & VI.]

Uroplates phantasticus. (PI. V. fig. 1.)

Head large, oviform in outline, deepest at the ocular region ;
interorbital space concave ; snout once and three fourths the
diameter of the eye; the distance between the eye and the ear
equals that between the eye and the nostril; ear-opening
minute, not larger than the nostril; supraciliary edge pro-
duced posteriorly in a long, triangular, horn-like lobe, the
length of which equals half the diameter of the eye. Limbs
slender; the adpressed hind limb reaches the shoulder.
Digits one-third webbed. Body compressed, back tectiform ;
a slight, non-denticulated fold from axilla to groin. Scales
finely granular, larger on the middle of the belly; a straight
transverse ridge from the supraciliary horn to the interorbital
region ; three slight chevron-shaped ridges on the anterior

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol.i. 8

102 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on new

part of the back ; a small spine-like tubercle above the ear,
another at the elbow, and two or three on each side of the
body ; a larger conical tubercle at the knee. Seventeen
upper and eighteen lower labials. Tail (apparently intact)
not half so long as the head, compressed, ending in a tubercle.
Reddish, with scattered black dots.

millim
Motalleng this: cr aaeieice eae 65
1 ste Mae pr ao See ee ae ot aiic 17
Wadthtofihead® . seamtia cere tic ceieme tor 1;
130/04 fC MO epaOinig OE nOG I Daca cdots: * 41
Hore-lim bilan... ve voes iocis te aiokee eee 24
Eiindlimib Sey, eae cmac eee 32
sf Dill Liane 1 eh ie a iets ee ey Shines, ilo ROL ONONE i

A single specimen, a gravid female. Collected by the Rev.
R. Baron.

Scelotes macrolepis.

Snout very short, obtuse, not projecting; eye moderate ;
lower eyelid scaly ; ear-opening minute, like the nostril ;
supranasals forming a median suture; a postnasal between
the supranasal and the first labial; frontal more than twice
as long as the frontonasal, much narrowed anteriorly and
emarginate on each side by the first supraocular; no pra-
frontals ; four supraoculars ; no frontoparietals; interparietal
longer than broad, about half as long as the frontal, its convex
anterior border fitting into an emargination of the frontal ;
third upper labial below the centre of the eye and entering
the orbit. Eighteen scales round the middle of the body, the
two median dorsal series broader than the others. Limbs
pentadactyle, very short; the fore limb, stretched forwards,
does not reach the ear; the length of the hind limb is one
third of the distance between axilla and grom. ‘Tail thick,
a little longer than head and body. Rufous above, with
longitudinal series of blackish spots; a pale dorso-lateral
streak; lower parts whitish, with longitudinal series of dark

brown dots, interrupted on the throat and middle of the belly,
larger under the tail.

millim
Rotallénghyesie ss: tech. hist aha ak i
IBICHYGN Uh ios eave core eae eRe an el er 6
Wadthpof head) acco aiteccatas emesis 35
Body ..¢5,f ene wrts eats Geeeasacincn one eee 28
Fore limi” (22%. titer aust abu one 4
Hind ‘limb, SS .Bteasee cee ones 6
"Pail... -n. S2% as Ge tee ie ete ere 40

A single specimen (£. Baron).

Reptiles and Batrachians from Madagascar. 103

Chameleon gastrotenia. (Pl. V. fig. 2.)

Casque feebly raised and rounded posteriorly, swollen,
without crests; the distance between the commissure of the
mouth and the extremity of the casque equals the distance
between the former point and the nostril; snout pointed,
without rostral appendage ; canthus rostralis obtuse ; no occi-
pital lobes. Body coarsely granular ; a dorsal crest of conical
tubercles; no gular or ventral crest. No tarsal process.
Tail a little longer than head and body. Upper half of body
slaty grey, lower dark purple, the two colours separated by an
ill-detined lighter band, along which are three small, round,
whitish spots; inner surface of limbs pure white; a very
broad white band, divided into two by a median grey band,
extends from the chin to near the end of the tail.

millim

Eoiniienchinnse cs coe we cosa ea a 118
From end of snout to extremity of

PANU UOC I ate sacar 16

From end of snout to extremity of casque 20
Winlthiomhenn 5 30 e os. ages sc ste cies

| 30. nar aia Die a atta tone art a ee 40
iN, Sie eR Ra Aa re Mica AC LP AL A boo 9
CE oe ce eee OTE Le eee Sea ters 62

Two specimens, male and halfgrown (2. Baron).

The same collection contained several specimens of Cha-
meleon Campani, Grand., which enable me to supplement
Beettger’s excellent description with the statement that the
male develops no secondary sexual characters.

Coronella torquata. (PI. V. fig. 3.)

Snout short, obtuse; eye small. Frontal once and two
thirds as long as broad, considerably longer than its distance
from the end of the snout; preefrontals longer than the inter-
nasals ; rostral moderate, scarcely visible from above; loreal
as deep as long; one pre- and two postoculars; a single
anterior temporal; eight upper labials, fourth and fifth enter-
ing the orbit ; five lower labials on each side in contact with
the chin-shields, of which the posterior pair is larger than the
anterior. Scales in 17 longitudinal series, without apical
pores. Ventrals 186; subcaudals 67. Pale brown, vertebral
zone (seven scales wide) darker; a series of small black spots
forms a vertebral line, and another runs on each side along
the third series of scales (counting from the ventrals) ; upper
surface of head mottled with blackish ; a white streak along

104 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on new

the upper half of the labials, from below the nostril to the
commissure of the mouth, edged above with black ; a blackish
cross band, three scales wide, behind the head ; belly white,
with minute, irregularly scattered, black dots, disappearimg
towards the tail, larger and more numerous towards the throat,
which is brownish, with white, black-edged markings.

Total Jength 41 centim., in which the tail enters for 9.

A single specimen (Rf. Baron).

Coronella microps. (PI. V. fig. 4.)

Snout short, obtuse ; eye small. Frontal once and a half
as long as broad, considerably longer than its distance from
the end of the snout; prefrontals longer than the internasals ;
rostral moderate, posterior angle visible from above ; loreal
as deep as long; one pre- and two postoculars; a single
anterior temporal; eight upper labials, fourth and fifth
entering the orbit; five lower labials on each side in contact
with the chin-shields, which are subequal in length. Scales
in 19 longitudinal series, without apical pores. Ventrals 1387—
143; subcaudals 40-47. Pale brown, with six or eight dark
brown longitudinal lines, the median pair bordering a band
of darker brown than the ground-colour; upper surface of
head with dark brown variegations; a dark brown streak on
each side of the head, passing through the eye, bordered
below by a white streak; upper lip dark brown; throat
brown, with white markings; belly pale brown, each shield
with a darker anterior margin.

Total length 140 millim., in which the tail enters for 28.

Two young specimens (2. Baron).

Dromicus Baront. (PL V. fig. 5.)

Frontal once and a half as long as broad, as long as its
distance from the end of the snout; internasals and prefron-
tals subequal in length; loreal a little deeper than long; two
pre- and two postoculars; three temporals in contact with
the parietal, the two anterior resting on a larger temporal ;
eight upper labials, fourth and fifth entering the orbit; six
lower labials on each side in contact with the chin-shields, of
which the posterior pair is larger than the anterior. Scales
in 19 longitudinal series, without apical pores. Ventrals 162 ;
subeaudals 72. Blackish brown above, powdered with
yellowish ; ventrals, median third yellowish, with a series of
large; more or less confluent, black spots ; rest blackish, with
yee posterior edge; subcaudals tessellated black and
yellow.

Reptiles and Batrachians from Madagascar. 105

Total length 73 centim., in which the tail enters for 17.
A single specimen (2. Baron).

Langaha intermedia. (Pl. V. fig. 6.)

Intermediate between Z. nasuta and L. crista-galli. Ros-
tral appendage half as long as the head, tapering to a sharp
point and serrated above at the end, of equal depth throughout
the basal half; the length of the appendage thrice and one
third its depth. In other respects like its allies. Scales 19;
ventrals 142 ; subcaudals 125. Coloration as in ZL. crista-
galli.

A single specimen, measuring 85 centim.

Nossi Bé.

Rhacophorus opisthodon.

- Vomerine teeth in two strong oblique series behind the level
of the choane, which are large. Head large, much depressed ;
snout rather long, truncate; canthus rostralis distinct, straight ;
loreal region concave; nostril much nearer the end of the
snout than the eye ; interorbital space broader than the upper
eyelid; tympanum large, three fourths the diameter of the
eye. lingers with a very indistinct rudiment of web; toes
nearly entirely webbed; disks rather large, measuring about
three fifths the diameter of the tympanum; a small inner
metatarsal tubercle. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches
between the eye and the nostril. Skin smooth, belly and
lower surface of thighs granular; a strong fold from the eye
to the shoulder. Brown above, with blackish marblings ;
loreal and temporal regions blackish ; a whitish streak on the
upper lip, from below the eye to below the tympanum.

From snout to vent 87 millim.
A single female specimen.

Rhacophorus albilabris. (Pl. VI. fig. 1.)

Vomerine teeth in two very small widely separated transverse
groups behind the level of the choane. Head large; snout
rounded; canthus rostralis angular; loreal region concave; nos-
tril equally distant from the eye and the end of the snout; eye
large ; interorbital space broader than the upper eyelid ; tym-
panum half the diameter of the eye. Fingers much depressed,
extensively webbed; the web between the two outer fingers
extends to the disks, that between the second and third from
the middle of the latter to the disk of the former; toes

106 On new Reptiles and Batrachians from Madagascar.

webbed to the disks ; disks as large as the tympanum ; sub-
articular tubercles moderate; a small inner metatarsal
tubercle. ‘The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the tip of the
snout. Skin smooth above, granular on the throat and belly ;
the gular granules very unequal in size; a strong fold from
the eye to the shoulder ; a slight dermal ridge along the outer
side of forearm and tarsus. Bluish above (green in life),
limbs with rather indistinct narrow darker cross bands ;
a white streak round the upper lip and along the outer side
of forearm and tarsus; lower parts pale brownish. Male
with an external vocal sac on each side behind the angle of
the mouth.

From snout to vent 75 millim.

A single male specimen. astern Imerina (£2. Baron).

Mantella Baroni. (Pl. VI. fig. 2.)

Differs from MM. betstleo in having the skin of the back
smooth, not granular, and in coloration. Head, body, fore
limbs, and femora black ; tibiae, tarsi, and feet reddish (ver-
milion during life?) ; a greenish streak along the supraciliary
edge and the canthus rostralis, continuous with its fellow on
the other side; a very large, circular, greenish spot at the
shoulder, continued as a band along the upper surface of the
fore limb to the wrist; another similar large spot at the
groin, continued on the femur; three roundish greenish spots
on the chin, a pair on the belly, one under the elbow, and one
under each thigh; upper surface of tibia and tarsus with
irregular, large, black spots or cross bars. Male with an
internal subgular vocal sac.

From snout to vent 27 millim.

A single male specimen (f. Baron).

Platypelis pollicaris. (Pl. VI. figs. 8, 3a.)

Head as long as broad; snout rounded, as long as the
diameter of the eye ; canthus rostralis scarcely distinct ; inter-
orbital space a little broader than the upper eyelid; tym-
panum two fifths the diameter of the eye. Fingers with a
rudiment of web, first shorter than second, third much longer
than the others, the tips dilated in rather large round disks ;
a large, oval, compressed tubercle or rudimentary inner
finger ; toes short, one-third webbed ; inner metatarsal tubercle
narrow, very feebly prominent. The tarso-metatarsal articu-
lation reaches beyond the end of the snout. Skin smooth.
Brownish above, with small darker and lighter marblings ;

On the Affinity of the North-American Lizard-Fauna. 107

thighs and lower surfaces uniform pale brownish. Male with
internal vocal sacs.

From snout to vent 26 millim.

A single male specimen (2. Baron).

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE V.

Fig. 1. Uroplates phantasticus.

Fig. 1a, Uroplates phantasticus. Side view of head, x 2.

Fig. 2. Chameleon gastrotena.

Fig. 3. Coronella torquata. Upper and side view of head and anterior
part of body.

4, Coronella microps. Upper and side view of head and anterior
part of body,

Fig. 5. Dromicus Baroni, Side view of head and lower view of segment
of body.

6. Langaha intermedia. Side view of head and lower view of ros-

tral appendage.

PLATE VI.

ty. 1. Rhacophorus albilabris.

fig. 1a. Rhacophorus albilabris. Open mouth.
Fig. 2. Mantella Baroni.

fig. 38. Platypelis pollicaris.

Fig. 3a. Platypelis pollicaris. Open mouth, x 2.

X1V.— On the Affinity of the North-American Lizard-Fauna.
' By G. A. BouLENGER.

In my paper “On the Geographical Distribution of the
Lacertilia,” published in the ‘ Annals’ for August 1885, I
made the following remarks :—‘‘ The Neogean Realm may,
in this summary review, be described in few words. Its
fauna is very uniform as regards groups of higher rank, and
the changes from the centre towards the North and South are
very gradual. And it is noteworthy that the Central-American
fauna (of which the North-American is but an_ offshoot)
presents a greater variety of types than South America ;
thus it possesses representatives of every one of the eleven
families which occur in the realm, viz. Geckonide, Kublepha-
ride, Iguanide, Xenosauridx, Anguide, Aniellide, Heloder-
matide, Xantusiide, Teiide, Amphisbenide, and Scincide;
whereas South America lacks the small groups Kublepharide,
Xenosauride, Aniellide, Helodermatide, and Xantusiide.

108 On the Affinity of the North-American Lizard-Fauna.

As the greater abundance and variety of forms of the Anguidz
occur in the northern half and the West Indies, and the reverse
is the case as regards the Teiide (especially with reference to
variety of genera) and the Amphisbenide, we may safely
draw the boundary-line between two regions or subregions, as
it may be thought fit to term them, at the Isthmus of
Panama.”

I have quoted this passage in full because Prof. Heilprin,
in his note in the last number of the ‘Annals,’ appears to
have lost sight of the origin of our controversy.

In his work on the distribution of animals his reproach
was that “The [my] misconception arises from the incor-
poration of the tract lying south of the line indicated above
[a line drawn from San Francisco to Galveston, in Texas]
with the North-American faunal region proper, while in
reality it is a transition-tract more nearly Neotropical in
character than Nearctic.”’

To this misstatement I replied by placing before him the
list of the lizards of the northernmost province in America
from which this type of Reptile has been recorded—British
Columbia. Instead of admitting his error Prof. Heilprin now
attempts to shift the question by misrepresenting my state-
ment; for he now puts it as if it was by not including the
Mexican district that I have formed what he considers a mis-
conception of the affinity of the North-American Lizard-
fauna. And his remark “‘ What, then, are the features which
unite the North-American fauna with the South-American ?”
is uncalled for, as I have clearly stated that the North-
American fauna is but an offshoot of the Central-American ;
and I have not said that as regards minor groups (genera) it
does not differ from that of South America*. ‘This of course
is a totally different charge, in fact the very opposite of that
which he first preferred, and to which I have replied.

My statement that ‘“ A list of the lizards of any northern
district of the United States would equally well support my
view ”’ is met by Prof. Heilprin ‘‘ with a most emphatic denial.
In the whole of the United States east of a north and south line
connecting the mouth of the Rio Grande with Canada, or
over an area of approximately 1,500,000 square miles, there is
[he says] scarcely a single hzard which has any Neotropical
affinities whatever, and still less so in any northern section
of this area.”

* As regards higher groups it is scarcely necessary to repeat that the
families Iguanidee and Teiide are essentially American and character-
istic of both northern and southern continents.

On the Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 109

To such a statement I can only reply by placing before the
reader the full list of the lizards occurring in the district now
indicated by Prof. Heilprin as affording support to his views.

Lacertilia of the United States east of the Mississippi.

[The species with an asterisk prefixed are the only ones which reach

40° N. lat. ]
GECKONIDE ...... 1. Spherodactylus notatus.
*2. Sceloporus undulatus.
IGUANIDE ........ 2 EE CLIC D
4, Anolis carolinensis.
5. Cooper.
ANNE TADDY-DN Gee Ba ene 6. Ophisaurus ventralis.

TEIID 25

. Cnemidophorus sexlineatus.

AMPHISBZNID® ,.,.. 8. Rhineura floridana.
9. Lygosoma laterale.
Sachin ee “10. Eumeces quinguelineatus.
1 anthracinus.
12 onocreps.

XV.—On some Points in the Anatomy of the Temno-
pleuride. By Prof. P. Martin Duncan, M.B. (Lond.),
BS) Gee.

[Plate XI.]

THERE is a great group of Echinoidean genera which is well
characterized by a raised costulate or reticulate ornamentation
of the plates, more or less grooved, furrowed and_ pitted
sutures, small peristome, feeble branchial grooves, and small
external branchie. 'The ambulacral plates are compound,
the pairs in series of three, the tentacles homiopodous, the
foramen of the pyramids closed above, and the teeth keeled.
This group falls readily under that subfamily of the family
Glyphostomata which my colleague Mr. Perey Sladen and
myself called the T'emnopleuride in our description of the
Tertiary fossil Echinoidea of Kachh and Kattywar (Pal. Ind.
ser. xiv. 1883, p. 54). But it is now necessary to advance
the subfamily to the dignity of a family, for the group is
large, requires subdivision into subfamilies, and is well sepa-
rable from the other divisions of the Glyphostomata, such as

110 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the

the Triplechinide, A. Agass. It is the presence of a consider-
able number of fossil genera and a recent one, characterized
by a large apical system with some of the radial plates enter-
ing the ring, a raised costulate ornamentation, without furrows
and pits in relation to the sutures, having Glyphocyphus,
Haime, as the type, that necessitates the subdivision. This
group may become the Glyphocyphine, and the remainder of
the genera, characterized by depressions, furrows, and pits
of the sutures, dowelling between the coronal plates and
a compact apical system, may enter the subfamily T’emno-
pleurine. It is advisable to raise the position of the Glypho-
stomata into a suborder of Regulares.

According to Forbes’s definition of Temnechinus and the
result of the examination of the fossil forms from Sind, by
my colleague and myself, there can be no valid reason for
separating the genus from the Temnopleurine, and it might
be urged that the genus has not more than a subgeneric value
in relation to Temnopleurus. But when the admirable de-
scription of the recent Temnechinus maculatus, A. Agass.
(‘ Revision of the Echini,’ p. 286, pl. viil.), is studied, it is
impossible not to agree with the author, and although there
are some anomalies present the form must, from our present
knowledge, enter Zemnechinus. ‘This being the case, it will
be found that there are some decided distinctions between
the species and any one of Jemnopleurus, such as the large
anal plate, the grooving around the tubercles, and the absence
of true pits and deep grooves at the angles of the sutures, the
grooving of the transverse sutures being slight. There is,
however, a very great difficulty to be overcome before
Temnechinus can come within the Temnopleurine, and it is
the result of A. Agassiz’s examination of the sides of the
coronal plates. In the ‘ Report on the ‘Blake’ Hchini,”
Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, Memoirs, vol. x. no. 1, xxiv.
pt. 1, 1883, p. 37. A. Agassiz wrote, “ ‘I'he specimens of diffe-
rent sizes which I have examined show no trace of pits nor
of this system of dowelling at the junction of plates.” The
importance of this deficiency is great, and yet the peristome,
the spines, and some of the pedicellariz are the same as those
of Zemnopleurus. It appears then that the modern Temne-
chinus must be decidedly separated from Zemnopleurus; but
should the knob-and-socket arrangement of the union of the
plates be discovered, ZYemnechinus will enter the Temno-
pleurine. It appears correct to associate the modern T7’rigono-
cidaris, A. Agass., with the Glyphocyphine.

The following observations upon some important structures
of species of Zemnopleurus, Salmacis, Microcyphus, &c. were

Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 111

made with a view of comparing the similar structures of Tem-
nechinus and Trigonoctdaris when an opportunity presented
itself. It was also thought to be advisable to investigate the
real value in a classificatory sense of the crenulation of
primary tubercles and the presence or absence of grooves
between the pores of a pair—two matters which have been
made a great deal too much of in the classification of the
fossil forms of Echinoidea.

The Sutures of the Plates.

‘he method of the union of the coronal plates of the T’emno-
pleurinze was discovered six years since, and the remarkable
dowelling of the opposed edges of plates was described in
species of Zemnopleurus, Salmacis, and Amblypneustes, and
subsequently in Pleurechinus, together with the nature of the
sutural groovings and pits (Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool. vol. xvi.
pp. 343 and 447).

I have now had the opportunity of examining better speci-
mens of Amblypneustes ovum; and there is no doubt that the
knob-and-socket structure upon the sides of plates is very
well developed. The former specimens noticed were not in
good condition as regards preservation, and it is a fact that if
the fracture of any Temnopleurid is crumbling and very
white in tint, changes have gone on which tend to destroy
the appearance of dowelling, which, moreover, is not very
visible in wet specimens.

Mespilia has the same junction-structure, and I find that
Holopneustes purpurescens, Liitk., has knobs and sockets upon
the opposed surfaces of the plates, with the exception of the
component plates of the geometrical plates of the ambulacra.
I do not find dowelling upon these plates in any genus,
although it is recognized between the compound plates.

It would be expected that the thick tests of such a species
as Microcyphus zigzag, Agass., would present some anomalous
arrangement of plate-junction; but the knobs and sockets
are in considerable numbers near the outer parts of the edges
of the plates. On the plates on either side of the median
ambulacral suture (Pl. XI. fig. 1) there are also some more
or less straight rows of knobs or sockets, passing from within
towards the outer part of the edge. This Microcyphus has a
remarkable amount of union of the plates free from dowelling,
and it appears that the ambulacro-interradial vertical sutures
are inseparably united. In all other genera the test frac-
tures very readily along this line, but in Microcyphus zigzag
the test will break in the poriferous zone rather than separate
at the suture.

i ebey Prof. P. M. Duncan on the

There appears to be an amount of superficial growth of test
which overrides the plates here and there in the ambulacra of
Microcyphus, and this has to do with the abolition of the
suture, as well as a remarkable blotting-out of plates, which
will be mentioned further on.

The Sutures as seen in Decalctfied Specimens of
Temnopleurus toreumaticus.

After decalcifying in dilute hydrochloric acid in spirits of
wine, washing, staining with hematoxylon, placing in
absolute alcohol, clearing and mounting, the sutures between
the interradial plates become beautifully distinct, on account
of the presence of a lamina or ribbon-shaped process of
reticular connective tissue, which dips down between the
contiguous edges of the plates. It appears to be that part
of the connective tissue of a plate or plates in which the
knobs and sockets, made up of very reticular spicules of car-
bonate of lime, are deposited as the test grows. In some
parts, especially in the apical region, the suture between two
plates is recognized by a cross-layering close to the divisional
line.

The Structure of the Ambulacral Plates.

The ambulacral plates of all the Temnopleurine are com-
pound, and the pairs of pores are in triplets, which vary in
their obliquity, vertical closeness, and horizontal distance.
The least complication is seen in the genera Temnopleurus
and Salmacis, and the greatest is observed in Microcyphus
and Holopneustes. It is evident that two factors produce
complexity, and they are diminution of the vertical dimen-
sions of the compound plates and thickening of the test during
growth.

Simple as the ambulacral plates of Temnopleurus and Sal-
macis are, they afford a good introduction to the study of the
more complicated forms.

Temnopleurus and Salmacis. (Pl. XI. figs. 2, 3, 4.)

In all the species of these genera the ambulacral plates are
in compound geometrical forms, which are low and broad in
Salmacis and taller and narrower in Temnopleurus. In all
species the compound plates are made up of three components ;
the upper or aboral component (c) is a long low primary, and
the middle one (0) is a low short demi-plate with a very curved _

Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 113

inner or adoral suture which reaches the adoral suture of the
primary just noticed, as it passes upwards. The lower or
adoral component plate (a) is a large primary, and it occupies
most of the compound plate. ‘This is a very usual arrange-
ment, and is similar to that of Hchinus and its allies; but
the inner suture of the demi-plate differs in the nature of its
curve, and it is not simply oblique, as in Hchinus proper.

The triple pairs of pores are more in ares in Salmacis (fig. 4)
than in Temnopleurus (figs. 2,3), and in both genera the
pores of pairs are much wider apart on the inside of the test
than they are in the peripodia (compare figs. 2 and 3).

Mespilia. (Pl. XI. fig. 5.)

The same arrangement of plates and pairs of pores as is
seen in Temnopleurus and Salmacis occurs, slightly modified,
in Mespilia globulus. ‘The compound plates of this species
are decidedly low and broad, and more so than in the genera
just alluded to. ‘The pairs of pores are in triplets, the pairs
being close vertically. The middle pair of pores of the triplet
(>) is close to the ambulacro-interradial suture in a rather
broad, low, demi-plate, whilst the aboral pair (c) is nearly
vertical to the adoral pair (a). Both of these pairs are in
primary plates, the adoral being in the largest. As in the
other genera the pores of a peripodium are much closer than
their continuations within the test.

Microcyphus. (Pl. XI. figs. 1, 6-12.)

There are some very remarkable and, in my experience,
unique structural characters about the ambulacra of Micro-
cyphus zigzag, Agass., which appear to be due to the growth
in thickness, externally and internally, of the plates and to
the very oblique paths of the canals of the pores. Blocking
out of the ends of component plates occurs, and some plates
which are perfectly visible on the inside of the test are not
seen on the outside, and they have been hidden by the con-
tinuous superficial deposit of test material. Moreover, parts
of the component plates of compound ones are sometimes sepa-
rated from their sutures in a very unusual manner (fig. 1).

On looking at the ambitus of a specimen (fig. 6) the low
broad ambulacral plates, which are broader superficially than
within, are noticed to have an adoral pair of pores (a) nearer
the median line of the ambulacrum than the other pairs,
which are oblique and close to the ambulacro-interradial
suture ; a number of plain tubercles and miliaries are upon

114 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the

the plate, some small ones being amongst the pairs of pores,
which are large and in peripodia and separated by a narrow
process. On looking at the inside of the corresponding part
of the test (fig. 7) it is impossible to recognize the ex-
ternal arrangement. ‘The pairs of pores are in a very slightly
curved vertical series, and the adoral pair of perforations (a)
is not much or at all out of the direction of the other two
pairs. But the obliquity of the canals of the adoral pair is
great (fig. 8), and in all cases there is more plate-structure
between the pairs of pores and the ambulacro-interradial
suture than is visible on the outside. ‘The pores are quite
1 millim. to 1°5 millim. apart, on the inside of the test.

The test is very thick, and the ambulacro-interradial sutures
are quite obliterated, and fracture will most certainly not occur
along that line. The sutures between the compound plates
are slightly depressed or broadly grooved on the free outer
surface of the test, and the pits are exceedingly shallow.

Taking a plate at the ambitus which is normal, and they
are rare, and applying benzule, a line of suture is seen to
pass below the upper peripodium of the triplet with a down-
ward curve across the plate, to reach the median sutural edge
close to the aboral median angle. ‘This suture marks the
adoral boundary of the upper component of the plate, and
it is a primary (fig. 6, ¢).

A line passes adorally to the middle peripodium (4) of the
three, and curves with a slant upwards and joins the other
suture at no great distance towards the median line. This
line is the adoral suture of the median plate of the compound,
and it is a small demi-plate (fig. 6, 0).

The line just mentioned nearly touches the aboral edge of
the lowest or adoral peripodium (a) of the innermost pair of
pores, and they are placed in a primary plate, which carries
the ornamentation of the greater part of the combination
(fig. 6, a).

An inner view of this plate (fig. 7) shows a simple curved
series of pores, the width apart of the pores of a pair being
much greater than in a peripodium. ‘The path of the sutures
is very distinct and is very like that of Salmacis. The ob-
liquity of one of the canals of the adoral pair is shown in
fig. 8.

Near the apical system the compound ambulacral plates are
narrower than at the ambitus, but are made much upon the
same plan; but a little lower down very remarkable differ-
ences are seen on the inside of the test.

A compound plate will be seen not far from the apex,
within, and its component plates are all primaries (fig. 9, @),

Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 115

and if their middle sutures were more curved, the arrange-
ment would be Diadematoid; but the adoral suture of the
upper and the aboral suture of the lower primary are nearly
transverse. Nearer the ambitus are some arrangements of
plates unlike any hitherto noticed. There is an upper
compound ambulacral plate (fig. 10) and the aboral com-
ponent is a long low primary (c) with its adoral suture dipping
towards the next plate in adoral succession. This plate (0)
is a small triangular one, and its adoral suture does not
reach the adoral pore of the pair belonging normally to the
plate. Under the use of evaporating benzule I cannot
detect any suture coming from the adoral pore. Conse-
quently the adoral component (a) of the plate under considera-
tion is a large primary, and includes the adoral pore of the
pair properly belonging to the demi-plate above. In the
compound plate next below, the upper component plate (c) is
the usual primary, and the next (4) is a demi-plate with its
suture passing from the adoral pore of its pair vertically to the
corresponding or adoral pore of the pair of the primary above.
The dotted line is in the path of a thickening which recalls
the position of the suture in fig. 9.

In the next plate (fig. 11) the suture of the adoral pore of
the middle plate (b) is plainly turned obliquely upwards
and outwards to reach the small demi-plate, and the first stage
of the exclusion of a pore from its plate is exemplified.
Fig. 11 is of two compound triple plates, and in the upper
one the aboral member is a low primary (c) ; the next plate
(6), which should have been a perfect demi-plate, is one
which only contains the aboral pore of its pair, and is excluded
from the ambulacro-interradial suture. The adoral pore of
the pair (6) has its suture just touching the union of the
adoral suture of the single pore-bearing plate with the adoral
suture of the upper primary (c).

The lowest plate (a) is a large irregular primary. The
same condition of things is seen in the next or actinal com-
pound plate (the lowest of fig. 11), but the aborted plate (0),
with only one pore, is not excluded from the ambulacro-inter-
radial suture. Below the ambitus of the test the variety in the
distribution of the sutures, as seen from within under benzule,
is as extraordinary as abactinally, for (fig. 12) in a well-marked
example the upper (¢) component is a low primary with a dip
down of its adoral suture towards the space between the pores
of the middle (6) component plate, and the adoral pore has got
above and out of the touch of the adoral suture. ‘The middle
pair of pores (>) has its aboral pore in a demi-plate; but
the adoral pore ts on the line of the adoral suture of the upper

116 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the

primary plate (c). The lower component isa normal primary

Q).
If the ambulacral plates are separated along the ambulacral
median suture the usual knobs and sockets are seen upon the
opposite edges of the plates, and amongst them dark lines are
seen under benzule (fig. 1). The knobs and sockets in the
figure are in lines and groups, and most are near the outer
part of the test ; the lines are almost straight and some reach
from one surface to the other, and all are the joined sutures of
primary components of compound plates.

Some lines, however, have a slant, and whilst most are simple,
others have acurved offshoot which starts below the outer surface
and, after curving, becomes straight. As the space included be-
tween two lines of sutures is a plate or part of one, so the surface
between the bend and the straight suture is a part of a plate.
That this is the case is easily noticed in such plates as fig. 9*
(a), for the line of the adoral suture of the upper primary (c)
can be traced to the median edge of the plate and partly
upwards, but not to the surface of the test; it is represented
in fig. 9 at x. In every instance of this bending of a sutural
line as it passes from within outwards in the test there are
proots of the outward addition of material having buried the
suture and its plate, so that the outer markings of such a
plate would not tally with the inner, and these last are relics
of the early state of growth of the test.

Amblypneustes.

The ambulacral plates of Amblypneustes (fig. 13) are low,
broad, and thin, and the pairs of pores are in large peripodia ;
the adoral pair of a triplet is not placed relatively so far
inwards as in Microcyphus ; but the appearance on the inside
of the test is very different. In Amblypneustes the middle
pair of a triplet is nearest the ambulacro-interradial suture,
and the aboral pair is placed obliquely above and inwards to
the middle pair; and this obliquity is continued to the adoral
pair of pores of the plate next in vertical succession. Hence
there is the common appearance presented of sets of oblique
pairs in threes, and this is shown to perfection inside the test,
and the appearance is intensified by the obliquity of succeeding
sets of three having their inner pores along the same oblique
line as the outer pores of triple pairs placed above and below.

A primary plate, which is the aboral constituent of Micro-
cyphus (c, fig. 6), does not exist, however, in Amblypneustes,
for the aboral component (fig. 13, c) is a low broad demi-

Anatomy of the 'Temnopleuride, LIZ

plate ; the middle plate (4) is a low narrow demi-plate, and
the adoral pair of pores is in a large primary plate (a).

Holopneustes.

The nature of the ambulacral plates of Holopneustes purpu-
rescens, Liitk. sp., is much easier to comprehend than that of
the other and broad poriferous zoned species, HZ. porosissimus,
Agass. But the same method of examination must be em-
ployed as in other polypores, and when it has been mastered
in the first-named species the difficulty vanishes with regard
to the apparent confusion of the plates in the other form.
The rule must be followed which enables the adoral pair of
pores or their peripodium to be distinguished; and it must be
remembered that in the great majority of instances the pair is
nearer the ambulacral median line than the other pairs of a
compound plate.

In Holopneustes purpurescens (figs. 14, 15, 16) the ambu-
lacral plates are low and broad, and usually there are double
plates near the ambitus (fig. 14) consisting of two vertical
sets of triplets combined in a geometrical plate; elsewhere
the plates are single, or there may be an alternation of single
and double plates. The test is rather thin and the poriferous
zone is rather broad, the peripodia being triserial in arrange-
ment. ‘The pairs are close vertically and rather distant hori-
zontally. One vertical row of pairs is very regular and is
internal, that is nearest the interporiferous area, and each
pair is in the adoral plate (a) of acompound plate. This adoral
plate is a primary, and forms most of the interporiferous part
of the geometrical plate ; it extends to the median suture; but
it may be excluded from that part of the poriferous zone
which is close to the ambulacro-interradial suture (figs. 14-
16), or, as is the case near the apical system, it forms all the
adoral part of the compound plate and reaches the ambulacro-
interradial suture (fig. 15, a).

The outer vertical series of pairs of pores is also a very
regular one and consists entirely of those belonging to the
middle components (9, figs. 14 and 16) of compound plates, the
component plate being a narrow demi-plate. Near the apical
system the little demi-plate (, fig. 15) is separated from the
adoral suture of its geometrical compound by a low part of
the primary just noticed; but usually there is no such inter-
val, and the expansion of the demi-plate has caused the
exclusion of the portion of the primary immediately adoral to
a (figs. 14-16). It is this blotting-out of part of a plate

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 9

118 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the

which causes the outer and inner pairs of pores of a triplet to
be so nearly on the same horizontal line.

The middle series of pairs (c) confused or not in vertical
succession relates invariably to the upper or aboral plate of a
compound geometrical plate; and this should not be forgotten
in investigating the distribution of plates in the very compli-
cated poriferous zones of the other species of the genus.
Each pair of the middle series is in a low but broad demi-
plate, and is placed remotely from the ambulacro-interradial
suture (fig. 14, c).

Every compound plate consists therefore of a low triple set
of pairs. It should be noticed that the pores are very oblique
in a peripodium.

On examining the test from within, a different arrangement
of the pores is observed, but the great dissimilarity noticed in
Microcyphus does not occur. Nevertheless the pores of a pair
are much further apart than on the free surface, and the great
horizontal distance of the pairs is not recognized.

Seen on the inside of the test (figs. 15, 16) the pairs of
pores are in zigzag, but the adoral pair can be recognized by
a certain vertical arrangement and by the inner or adoral pore
of the pair being large and at the end of a short groove; the
other or aboral pore is small, circular, and is placed obliquely
upwards and outwards. Fig. 15 is a view, slightly diagram-
matic, of two compound plates near the apex, seen on the inside
of the test during the action of benzule. he adoral pairs of
pores are readily distinguished, because the adoral] pore is upon
the lower horizontal suture of the compound plate. ‘The contact
of the adoral primary plate is seen with the ambulacro-
interradial suture. In fig. 16 the exclusion of the corre-
sponding plate a is seen, and in all plates a singular curva-
ture of the lower horizontal suture occurs, and it is curved up
towards the upper pore of the pair before passing outwards to
the ambulacro-interradial suture. ‘This curving is very
anomalous, and is especially distinct when the primary is
excluded.

The outer and more or less vertical row of pairsof pores, with
one of the pores close to the ambulacro-interradial suture, is the
middle pair of the compound, and is in a small demi-plate ;
its pores are much more horizontal when seen from within
than in the peripodium (figs. 15, 16, 6). The highest pair
of pores of a plate is further from the ambulacro-inter-
radial suture than the pair just described, and its pores are
variably placed as regards verticality, and they often overlap
the outer pore of the adoral pair and the inner pore of the

Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. ite

pair in the demi-plate; the inner pore of this aboral pair is
usually nearly vertical to the outer pore of the adoral pair.

The pair corresponds to one of the middle vertical series (ce)

seen on the outside of the test, and is in a low broad demi-
plate.
It is not difficult to make out the sutures of the compound
plates with benzule near to the apical system ; but the crowd-
ing of the plates lower down and the absorption of a part of
the adoral primary, together with the horizontal curvatures of
some of the sutures, place considerable difficulties in the way.

The adoral suture of a compound plate (fig. 15, @) is hori-
zontal near the apical system, and usually but not invariably
so when the primary is not partly excluded (fig. 1). The
adoral or large pore of the primary plate, a, is of course tra=
versed by the more or less horizontal adoral suture of the
geometrical plate; but the small circular aboral pore of the
pair is not remote from the suture, as is usually the case in
Echinoidea, for the suture bends up to it more or less. ‘The
direction of the suture from the aboral pore outwards is either
straight or in a slight curved convexity directed upwards.
In this last instance the suture is in contact with the adoral
pore of the narrow demi-plate 6, fig. 16. It is anomalous for
one line of suture to cross the adoral canals of a lower and
upper plate; but it is well exemplified in the case of this
Hlolopneustes.

When the primary is not excluded (fig. 15, a) the middle
demi-plate of the compound has an adoral suture of its own,
and at or close to the adoral pore of the pair it turns upwards
with a curved concavity towards the ambulacral median line,
to reach the adoral suture of the aboral or upper component of
the compound plate. The aboral or outer pore of the pair is
not remote from the horizontal suture (fig. 15, 6), and is often
upon it.

The aboral plate of the compound seen from within (figs. 15,
16, c) is a low demi-plate which is longer than the middle
demi-plate, and when the primary (@) is not excluded its
adoral suture is horizontal and turns up with a curve to reach
the upper edge of the compound plate just between the pores
of the adoral pair of the next geometrical plate in vertical
succession. But when the primary is excluded the adoral
suture of this upper component is curved convexly downwards,
and it has its curvature continued so as to join the horizontal
suture between the compound plate and its fellow above, a
little external to the adoral pore of the pair belonging to the
adoral primary component of the plate above. ‘Lhe appear-

120 Prof. P. M. Dunean on the

ance given under benzule is of a number of low ellipses placed
vertically, and they are formed by the adoral sutures of the
upper plates and the aboral sutures of the lower plates in
succession (fig. 16).

The Pits.

The pits at the sutural angles and elsewhere are described
in the communication already alluded to (Journ. Linn. Soc.,
Zool. vol. xvi.).

The distinctness of the pits in Amb/ypneustes and their
slight depth in Mespilia, Microcyphus, and Holopneustes is
evident, and A. Agassiz has pointed them out along the
lines of sutures as well as at the angles in Pleurechinus and in a
species of Amblypneustes. But the pitting is in excess in
Temnopleurus and Salmacis, and is less in the genera just
mentioned. The pits near the peristome in Temnopleurus
toreumaticus have a large and rather depressed spheroidal
spheridium at their entrance *, and many others have a pedi-
cellaria close by. It does not appear that there are any
special functions relating to the pits, and the same thing may
be said in respect of the deepening, grooving, widening, and
depressing of the outer surfaces of the plates close to the
sutural lines; but it is clear that these modifications of the
test enable a larger amount of outer test surface to come in
contact with water.

The Articulation and Muscles of the primary Spines.

The spines are for the most part slightly compressed, and
some are very much so; they have a well-developed milled
ring, which is broader than the rest, and which has its milling
continuous with the longitudinal fluting of the spine. The
spine diminishes in breadth below the milled ring very
rapidly, and the hollow cotyloid cavity has a blunt free edge
more or less notched.

The spines are cellular within, with a double series of radi-
ating processes and a very narrow circular central space
(fig. 28).

The primary tubercles have a well-formed scrobicule, which
slants down from the boss and is often slightly raised exter-
nally, so as to present a prominent circular border ; it is plain
and smooth, except close to the boss, which has a decided
crenulation upon it close to the neck of the imperforate and
projecting globose mamelon. The cotyloid cavity of the
spine fits upon the mamelon, and the notched free edge comes

* Lovén, Etudes, pl. x. fig. 38.

“

Anatomy of the 'Temnopleuride. 121

in contact with the crenulation of the boss, so that the
mamelon is well hidden. As Valentin described in 1841, the
joint of the spine and tubercle has three layers—the outer an
epithelial, pigmented and ciliated, thin layer, a middle thin
and more or less fasciculate layer of muscular fibres, and an
inner articular capsule.

Valentin’s researches were made upon species of Hchinus
with smooth bosses, and as those of Temnopleurus are crenu-
late their examination is not devoid of interest, especially as
the question of the classificatory value of crenulation is con-
stantly arising.

In Yemnopleurus the inner structure surrounding the joint
is the articular capsule, which is a white, soft, mass of im-
perfectly differentiated matter, with granules, connective
tissue, and extremely indistinct fibres. ‘The microscopic ap-
pearances are very negative. The white matter adheres to
the lower part of the spine, below the milled ring, and to the
edge of the cotyloid cavity ; it is firmly adherent to the crenu-
lation on the top of the boss of the tubercle. A quantity of
the white enclosing substance is spread over the surface of
the boss and scrobicule like a flap, but there is some definite
connexion between the hard and soft parts. ‘This soft cap-
sular structure is very weak, however, and if the outer
muscular layer is ruptured, soon gives way to a slight pull or
to unusual depression of the top of the spine. ‘The fracture
occurs at the point where the free edge of the lower end of
the cotyloid cavity is movable upon the crenulation of the
boss. Dislocation of the spine then occurs.

The muscular layer is considerable in height, although very
thin, and it reaches from its origin around the edge of the
scrobicule of a tubercle, upwards to the inferior edge of the
milled ring of the spine; it covers the articular capsule and
neither receives fibres from the boss nor from its crenulation.
The muscular fibres arise from the connective tissue of the
outer edge of the scrobicule, and they are very delicate,
separate under the microscope, and exceedingly simple.
There are no differentiated structures in them, and the dis-
tribution in bundles is not striking, and indeed it does not
usually exist. ‘Ihe nervous supply is considerable, beneath
the muscular fibres, and the very minute nervous fibres have
ganglion-shaped parts upon them*, ‘The delicate layer of

* The minute anatomy of most of the parts of some species of Hchi-
nometradz and Echini has been of late worked out with great success,
and published by Otto Hamann (“ Beitrige zur Histologie der Echino-
dermen,” Jenaische Zeitschrift, Bd. xxi. Neue Folge, Bd. xi. p. 87,
1887).

122 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the

cells which is situated upon the muscular layer may deceive
a young microscopist into crediting that there are cross light
and dark marks in the muscular fibres; but careful illumina-
tion and the use of a lens capable of good definition expose
the error.

Diadema setosum has the primary tubercles with crenulated
bosses and perforated mamelons, and the part of the spine
between the lower end or edge of the cotyloid cavity and the
milled ring is very long. I find that the muscular investment of
the joint greatly resembles that of Temnopleurus, that it arises
from the outer edge of the scrobicule of the primary tubercle,
and is inserted at the lower edge of the milled ring, and
possibly here and there upon the outside of the spine below
the milled ring and the capsule of the joint. This capsule
covers the ends of thespine and the top of the boss and covers
the crenulation and extends as a flat layer beyond it.

No muscular fibres penetrate this capsule, and none arise
from the crenulation. It is interesting to note that in the
same specimen of Diadema some of the bosses are perfectly
crenulated, others are half crenulated, and not a few may be
destitute of the structure. This is not uncommon in other
forms.

It would therefore appear that crenulation and perforation
of the tubercles is not of sufficient physiological importance to
distinguish genera, although it may be useful in grouping
species.

The Branchie. (Pl. XI. figs. 17-21.)

The branchiee of Temnopleurus and Salmacis are small and
narrow, although moderately long. They are situated upon
the peristomial membrane, close to the small so-called “ in-
cisions” or rather grooves, one of which is placed close to
each ambulacro-interradial suture at the peristomial margin.
The branchie protrude and reach up over the edge of the
grooves and may be 2 millim. in vertical measurement. In
Temnopleurus (tig. 17) the narrow branchiew are in finger-
shaped processes, from six to twelve or more in number ;
they arise from a hollow stem and rarely biturcate, but some
are in tufts which come from the same source. All are tumid,
rounded at the free end, and hollow. Decalcified specimens
show that there is an outer thick layer of columnar epithe-
lium (fig. 18), the cells containing granules which are most
numerous at their bases (fig. 19) ; but it appears that there
may be groups of cells so crowded with pigment corpuscules
that a definite pattern is presented on the outside of the
finger-shaped body, consisting of longitudinal, irregular,

Anatomy of the Temnopleurida. 123

narrow, wavy lines. This ornamentation is also seen upon
the main stem or water-tube.

The hollow of a process is lined with a smaller and less
columnar endothelium, with granules, and it appears to linea
somewhat irregular basement membrane (fg. 18). Between
the outer and inner series of cells is a somewhat wide space
readily transmitting light, and having no definite structures
in it, and in specimens which have not been decalcified cal-
careous spicules are found there in some abundance.

In Salmacis (fig. 20) the branchiz are larger and stouter
than in Zemnopleurus; they are, however, narrow and spring
from a larger and higher stem, The processes are more in
tufts, and are shorter and more numerous than in Temno-
pleurus. These branchiz pass up over the margin of the
peristome at the branchial grooves and reach along the flanks
of the ambulacra for a line or two. The principal structure
to be noticed is that which is visible before applying acids.
The calcareous spicula are separate, moderately numerous,
and variable in size and shape. ‘‘C”-shaped spicula are
seen, but are not common, and the others are bifurcate or
pinnate ; and on the water-tube there are numerous fenestrated

elliptical or irregularly shaped plates.

The Ampulle. (Pl. XI. figs. 21, 22.)

Decalcified portions of the ambulacra of Temnopleurus
toreumaticus stained with hematoxylon were used. ‘The
ampulle are small and bolster-shaped near the apical disk
and become gradually larger and closer in vertical succession
towards the ambitus, where they are large, long, from side to
side, and tallest near the median ambulacral water-tube (fig.
21). Their actinal edge is tuinid and more or less gibbous,
a swelling being noticed close to the water-tube and a con-
traction midway between the two ends, and there is more or
less of a narrowing quite at the part which corresponds to the
poriferous zone. “The abactinal edge is less irregular and
runs up to a blunt point at the poriferous zone end. They
are broader than high and tumid. ‘The opening into the
water tube is seen by transmitted light very plainly, but the
holes for the tentacular canals are indistinct. ‘l'hey are placed
in the interradial side half of the ampulle and are recognized
as a dull elliptical space, which appears to be more or less
occupied by fibres of the inner part of the base of a tentacle
which have become compressed over the openings of the
pores externally.

The structure of the walls of the ampulle is very interest-

124 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the

ing, and they are not simple bags with a contractile coat.
The bag is composed of very delicate, close, exceedingly
narrow circular fibres, which in the main are vertical, although
they depart from that direction in the gibbous parts. The
accessory structures are irregular transverse rows of small
elongate pigmented spots, which, in sections or oblique views
of the ampulle, are seen to be the outer terminations of fibres
resembling the usual unstriped fibres of small spines, which
pass inwards to varying depths in the hollow of the ampulle,
and are attached to reticulations of connective tissue (fig. 22).
These fibres exist in Psammechinus and are very suggestive
of less definite structures, which may be noticed in the abac-
tinal branchial tentacles of Calopleurus. 'These spots give
a very marked aspect to the outside of the ampullee, and their
inner prolongations probably prevent too sudden expansion
of the calibre of the ampulla, and may also assist in the con-
traction required for the infilling of the tentacle. A very
delicate epithelium and endothelium * occur.

It is interesting to notice the great size of the ampulle in
relation to the dimensions of the bases of their tentacles at a
slight distance from the apical system, and to observe that
the bags reach quite across the whole breadth of the ambu-
lacral plates.

It appears from the examination of the bases of the tentacles,
that the so-called geminous or reverse condition of the pores of
the pairs ts not of the least physiological importance, and
whether there is a groove externally on the test between the
pores or whether there ts a granule or nodule between them is
of no significance in a natural system of classification.

In the specimens which gave the above results the ampulle
were tense and tumid, but in some others, in which they were
seen to be empty and flaccid, there was some departure from
the exact shape, and moreover the internal fibrous arrange-
ment was not visible. This was doubtless due to the con-
siderable time during which the test had been in impure
alcohol. The two openings for the tentacular canals were,
however, very visible, and there was no vestige of any val-
vular structure. But a fortunate section of the tentacle of
one of the ampulle showed that the inner membrane is con-
tinuous through the pores with that of the ampulla.

The Tentacles. (Pl. X1. figs. 26, 27.) ,

These well-developed structures of Temnopleurus are similar
throughout the ambulacra, and the genus is therefore homceo-

* See also Hamann, op, cit. pl. xiv. fig. 3.

Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 125

podous. The tentacles are moderately long and_ stout in
alcoholic specimens, and their bases are broad and encircle
the not very strongly marked peripodia; the stem soon
becomes cylindrical and very slightly tapering, and it di-
minishes somewhat suddenly in diameter close to the large
suctorial or cup end. ‘The hollow of the tentacle is well seen,
and it is the outcome of the junction of two short canals
which come through the two pores of each pair. The sepa-
ration between these canals is very slight in the base of the
tentacle.

The plan adopted was to decalcify some specimens and to
colour and mount in balsam, and to mount others without
decaleifying them.

In the decalcified specimens the tumid edges of the sucker
end are more or less faintly lobed, and there is evidently
some circular arrangement of fibres there. This would tighten
the grasp of the cup-shaped end, and would act upon the
quadripartite calcareous cirelets which will be mentioned
further on. A thick epithelium and much connective tissue
below it form the bulk of the cup, and are continuous with
the similar structures of the outside of the body of the ten-
tacle. On the body this structure is very delicate, and the
epithelium is rather more columnar than flat, it contains
granules and has cilia. In some tentacles there is much
thickening of the epithelial part near the neck of the cup, and
much transverse folding of it and the subjacent structures,
but elsewhere the cells may be excessively thin and trans-
parent.

Four sets of muscular fibres are visible in a tentacle:
first, the circular fibres of the cup; secondly, the concentric
and radiating fibres of the top of the tentacular cavity and
base of the cup (see Lovén, ‘ Pourtalesia,’ p. 49, pl. x1.
figs. 112-115) ; thirdly, the outer layers of circular fibres ; and
fourthly, the innermost muscular layer composed of longi-
tudinal fibres. The circular fibres are most developed near
the cup and in what may be called the neck of the tentacle ;
but elsewhere their presence varies most remarkably. In
some tentacles a delicate close layer can be distinguished
composed of exceedingly narrow, close, circular fibrils of
great slenderness ; they appear to be nucleated here and there
and separate; striation does not occur. In other examples
the circular fibres are very scarce and wide apart; in some
they do not exist.

The longitudinal fibres reach from the base at the peripo-
dium, where they are stout and very visible, up the shaft,
where they become excessively attenuate and slightly dis-

126 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the

tant, to the base of the cup below the calcareous structure.
They are often slightly wavy, nucleated, and unstriated (see
also Hamann, op. cit. pl. xiv. fig. 7).

The circular fibres are placed over a delicate mem-
branous tissue which may sometimes be seen projecting
beyond the cut end of a tentacle, and this is clearly epithe-
liate and very minutely granular. Probably it is ciliated,
but no trace of cilia came under observation. The longi-
tudinal fibres are usually somewhat coloured naturally at the
peripodia, and arise by broadish bases, and soon attenuate ;
they are apparently separate and not in fascicles. As is the
case around the origin of the muscles of the spines, there is a
very fine lax entanglement of threads much less in diameter
than the thinnest muscular fibre around the peripodium, and
it is apparently nervous in character. ‘The nerves have
small simple ganglionic swellings, and conform to Lovén’s
well-known description, except that I have not seen multi-
polar cells uniting.

The tentacles which are between the ambitus and apical
system are larger than those situated actinaliy, and their
calibre and middle space are greater, the muscular walls are
more attenuate, and the cup end is more tumid and smaller.
These tentacles have a more baggy appearance than the others,
and when decalcified the muscular layers are very distinct,
especially the transverse or circular series, which is so feebly
developed in the actinal set. In fact these tentacles resemble
in a minor degree the similarly placed structures of
Salmacis.

The muscular fibres which close in the free end of the
tentacle pass inwards from the stout continuous calcareous
spicules which form the foundation of the circlet of calcareous
reticulation of the cup; this more or less quadrangular con-
tinuous structure Lovén has called the foot-ring or “ psellion”
(Lovén, op. cét. pp. 49, 50). The muscular fibres unite at
the centre of the neck of the tentacle and form the floor of
the sucker or adhering apparatus.

The psellion is so arranged that the spoke-like spicules of
the four parts of the calcareous circlet spring generally from
the middle of one of the four main spicules of it, and the
junction of one main spicule with another marks the line of
separation of the parts of the circlet (figs. 26, 27). Imme-
diately below the psellion are two very slender spicules of the
same length, and they are connected by vertical and distant
short spicules. Sometimes a ragged areolar lamina extends
slightly over the edge of the muscular circle.

The calcareous circlet of the cup, springing as it were from

Anatomy of the ‘Temnopleuride. 127

the psellion, and nearly reaching the cireumference of the
free end of the cup, is very decidedly divided into four parts,
and each part is composed of a reticulation which has five or
six spoke-like processes which traverse the lamina of the
circlet and are free at its circumference, some ends being
simple points, others double or cellular. Between the spokes
are cross pieces, and hence the reticulate and fenestrated
appearance. At the sides of each lamina, that is at the
four divisions of the circlet, the radiating spicular elements
are stouter and not on the same plane; the consequence
is that the space between the contiguous side spicules
is not very distinct and sometimes it is clearly vacant, or
there may be a slight reticulation in parts. Lovén con-
sidered that probably there are muscular fibres between the
side spicules of the four parts of the circlet in Towopneustes,
and although they are not visible in the specimens before me,
the possibility of their existence in fresh specimens is very
considerable ; certainly these separate parts of the circlet
would be approximated by the contraction of the circular
fibres of the soft parts of the cup.

Very few ‘C-shaped spicules are present in the tentacles
of Temnopleurus, and I have only seen one instance of an
acerate spicule.

The circlet of the cup of the larger and wider abactinal
tentacles is smaller than that of the actinal and is less
elaborately ornamented.

Salmacis differs decidedly in the construction of its ten-
tacles from Temnopleurus. ‘he abactinal tentacles are large,
long, baggy, and have small terminal cups; the actinal have
stout walls, are shorter, thicker, have a narrow calibre, and
the cup is large, fleshy, and the circlets are well developed
and very large.

A circlet of an actinal tentacle has six or even seven divi-
sions, and each is as distinct as it is in Zemnopleurus ; the
spoke-like processes are much more numerous and pointed,
and on the same circularline. ‘The psellion is well developed,
and its accessory processes also. ‘The central muscular struc-
ture is larger than in Temnopleurus, and there are many “C”-
shaped spicules all about the cup and the upper part of the
tentacle. The muscular structures are as in Temnopleurus.
Now the cup of the abactinal tentacles supports a very small
circlet, and its divisions are fewer in number than they are in
the actinal tentacles, but the “C”-shaped spicules are in
greater profusion, and the muscular layers are composed of
better developed circular fibres and very distinct longitudinal
ones.

128 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the

The Pedicelluria. (Pl. XI. figs. 23, 24, 25.)

These beautiful organs occur in vast numbers in Temno-
pleurus toreumaticus, but it must be understood that dry tests
do not furnish a moderate proportion of those which may
be seen in specimens preserved in alcohol immediately after
capture. The reason is that most of all kinds of the pedi-
cellarie have soft and long or short flexible limp necks,
others are placed upon solid stalks. The majority of the soft-
necked pedicellariz fall off in drying and are lost. This
can be easily proved by examining dry specimens and col-
lecting their pedicellariz, and then comparing the results
with the appearances presented by decalcified and coloured
parts of the test preserved in balsam. very pedicellaria of
an ambulacrum and of a radial plate can then be preserved,
and it is remarkable how they crowd some spots and how
long the necks are in relation to tentacles. The very fleshy
look of the heads of pedicellariz is striking, and so are
the muscular developments of many.

The removal of some of the larger spines is necessary
before parts of the test are decalcified, but care must be taken
to notice the numerous pedicellarie which are around the
scrobicular circles. Some of the pedicellariz are very large,
and on the other hand the majority are exceedingly small.
Sladen’s gland within the body is visible and moderately
developed in one group; but the glandular structure common
on the stems of the pedicellariz of some other generaare absent.

There is no difficulty in distinguishing four kinds of pedi-
cellarize in Temnopleurus.

1. Large tridactyle forms with a broad base to the body
and very long prongs which are moderately broad, arched,
becoming slightly narrower and not very sharp-pointed at the
free end, being well fenestrated, and having a wide space
between the lower parts of the prongs of contiguous valves.
The sides of the prongs are slightly dentate, but there are no
terminal teeth.

These largest forms are rare and are seen near the basal
plates upon the interradia, and here and there close to an
ambulacrum. One or two are upon short stalks, others are
upon long and slender ones placed upon small secondary
tubercles or upon miliaries, and having muscles at the joint.
The most interesting series has a long, soft, transparent neck
placed upon a stalk and consisting of a glairy-looking struc-
ture, in which a few longitudinally placed muscular fibres,
some indefinite granular tissue, and pigment-spots occur.
These necks are long or short and limp, and they are found

Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 129

curled around neighbouring structures after death ; they are
continuous with the outer tissue of the stalk, and are exces-
sively fragile.

2. Common tridactyle pedicellariz with smaller valves
than the above, the base wide and suddenly diminishing, the
prongs narrow, slender, very wide apart, long, and ended by
a sharp curved point, below which are two others, one on
each side (fig. 23). ‘The whole is fenestrated. The largest
of these forms are seen actinally, as well as close to the apical
system, and around the bases of the large spines. The
ambulacro-interradial sutural region is a common spot.

Smaller tridactyles with slightly stouter prongs are very
common, and are found very generally distributed.

Both of these forms of tridactyles often have long, soft
necks and are placed upon long or short spinules ; some are
without necks, and are either sessile or with stalks.

3. The globifera (fig. 24)* are very common, and there
are a few very large ones near the apical system and a host
of smaller forms very generally placed, and notably along
the ambulacra and the median area of the interradia. The
large and small have the same structure. The base is broad
and tumid, gracefully merging into the broad, moderately
long, broad, boldly curved, slightly angularly-ending prongs.
The sides of the valves are distantly serrate, and a stout cal-
careous ridge runs along the median line, and has lateral off-
shoots, and in the hollows between are minute openings.
This is a very marked character. These pedicellariz are, as
the others, either placed upon soft necks or upon stalks of
varying length, some 1 millim.

4, The triphylta or ophiocephalous pedicellariz (fig. 25) are
in vast numbers, and are at once recognized by their very small
size, their blunt free ends, tumid subcylindrical shape slightly
longer than broad, and their very minute perforations. The
have very blunt terminations to their valves, no teeth, and
when looked at from above a trefoil appearance is seen. ‘They
occur in vast numbers in the actinal region of the ambulacra
and around all primary and secondary spines, around many
tentacles, and upon the radial plates. ‘There are none upon
the peristomial membrane or upon buccal plates. Most are

* The globifera of authors, not especially of Otto Hamann, who would
term them vemmiformes, The globifera of that excellent microscopist
are large tumid tripartite globose-looking pedicellarize without calcareous
heads, and with a very strong muscular layer. They secrete, and are,
according to Hamann, very generally found on certain species of Hchi-
noidea. I have evidence of their occurrence in Temnopleurus, near the

apical disk, although I was not fortunate enough to discover them in
Spherechinus.

130 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the

placed upon soft necks, and these are of different lengths, and
so are the stems on which the necks are situated.

In Sa/macis the distribution of pedicellariz is not the same
as in Temnopleurus.

The peristomial membrane of Salmacis bicolor has ten
buccal plates, which not only carry tentacles but a crowd of
rather long-stemmed ophiocephalous pedicellariz or tryphylta
occurs, and with them are sometimes found small globifera
with unusually long valves; these may be on stalks or they
may have soft long necks besides stalks, and they are smaller
and not so tumid as the globifera of the test itself.

Upon the test there are many pedicellarie, and the globi-
fera are usually tumid at the base, but with a duck-mandible
shaped valvular end; they are very regularly fenestrate, but
the median thickening and ridge observed in Zemnopleurus
are wanting. In both genera there are usually pedicellarie
close to the pits of the sutures.

The pedicellariz with long and short soft necks are common
and are of all kinds.

The Madveporite.

The madreporite of the Temnopleurine is not like that of
Echinus and Cidaris, for instead of the upper surface being
spongy-looking and with very irregular openings, it is well
defined in Temnopleurus, Salmacis, Amblypneustes, &c., and
the water-openings are separate and large, and when decalcified
they are tubular, andresemble distant cylindrical straight pipes;
they have thick edges or sides lined with epithelium. ‘The
height of these cylindrical pipes is not great. The madre-
porite is well separated from the structure of the basal plate in
which it is placed.

Valentin described and drew some fusiform, band-like
muscular slips which arise at the inner edge of the peri-
procteal ring and pass inwards to the edge of the anus. He
called them “ motores ani.” They are well seen in Tem-
nopleurus, and staining with carmine shows very thin fibrillar
muscular slips, with a considerable quantity of nerve filaments.
The slips are distinct and separated.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI.

Fig. 1. Microcyphus zxgzag, Agass, Side view of the plates on one side
of the median ambulacral suture; knobs and sockets; dark
lines indicating the sutures of the component plates of the
geometrical ambulacral plates. ~X refers to fig. 9. Mag. Pp.
Ad mia, 116.

Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 131

. Temnopleurus toreumaticus, Agass. A compound ambulacral

plate. a, adoral primary; 6, middle demi-plate ; ¢, aboral pri-
mary component plate. Mag. P. 112.

. A plate seen from within, during the drying of benzule, showing

the great separation of the pores of the pairs. Mag. P. 113.

. Salmacis bicolor, Agass. Inner view of ambulacral plates. Same

references as in fig. 3. Mag. P. 113.

. Mespilia globulus, Agass. An ambulacral plate seen from within

the test under benzule. Mag. P. 113.

. Microcyphus zigzag, Agass. An ambulacral plate, sutures seen

under benzule. Mag. Pp. 113, 114.

. Same plate from within. Mag. P. 114.
. Diagram of an adoral canal of a pair, oblique and reaching the

peripodium. Mag. P. 114.

. Ambulacral plates near the apex, seen from within, under benzule.

Mag. P. 114.

. Plates nearer the ambitus, abnormal distribution of sutures.

Mag, P. 115.

. Plates still nearer the ambitus, abnormal, under benzule. Mag.

PL 115,
. Plate below the ambitus, abnormal. Mag. P. 115.

. Amblypneustes ovum, Lamk., sp. Ambulacral plates with

sutures under benzule: ¢ is a low, broad demi-plate. P. 116.

. Holopneustes purpurescens, A. Ag. A single and double com-

pound ambulacral plate under benzule : a, the adoral component
plate, is a primary which is excluded at the ambulacro-inter-
radial suture. P. 117.

. Inside view of plates nearer the apex. Mag. Pp. 118, 119.
. View corresponding to fig. 14, from within. Mag. Pp. 118, 119.
. Temnopleurus toreumaticus. A branchia decalcified and mag.

30. P. 122.

. Part of a finger-shaped process highly magnified. Mag. 60.

P. 122,

. Epithelium. Mag. 120. P. 122.
. A small tuft of the branchia of Salmacis not decalcified. Mag.

POs. :

. Ampulle of Temnopleurus, decalcified: a, water-canal. Mag.

Pais:

. Spots upon the ampulle, with muscle-fibres leading inwards

into the ampulla. Mag. 80. P. 124.

3. End of a prong of a tridactyle pedicellaria of Temnopleurus.

Mag. P. 129.

24. Head of a large globifera. Mag. P. 129.
. A triphyltous pedicellaria, with a soft stalk placed upon a

spinule. Mag. P. 129.

. Part of the calcareous circlet of a tentacle of Temmnopleurus,

Mag. P. 126.

7. The psellion. Mag. P. 126.
. Section of a spine of Temnopleurus. Mag. P. 120.

The amplification in most of these drawings is small.

132 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

XVI.—An Account of three Series of Lepidoptera collected in
North-west India by Major Yerbury. By Artuur G.
Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

Since the publication of my paper on Lepidoptera from
Campbellpore and Murree (Proce. Zool. Soe. 1886, pp. 355-
395) Major Yerbury has forwarded to me from time to time
no less than three collections, containing eight hundred speci-
mens, accompanied by many additional notes of interest ; the
series thus brought together enables one to form a very good
idea of the fauna of Campbellpore and the neighbourhood,
and also of the constancy or variability of the species; some
of those which were represented in his first collection by single
specimens are now represented by perhaps a dozen or more,
whilst numerous species are added *, of which one is new to
science.
The following is a list of the species.

RHOPALOCERA.
Nymphalide.
Danan.

1. Tirumala limniace.
Papilio imniace, Cramer, Pap. Exot. i. pl. lix. D, E (1779).
3 2. Khairabad, 25th July, 1886.

Var. a. Danais leopardus.
Danais leopardus, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1866, p, 62. n. 36.

g. Campbellpore, 30th March, 1886; Futch Khan’s
bungalow, 23rd April.

Var. Ob.

Like 7. leopardus this has the patch on the interno-median
interspace of primaries divided, but the upper half is united
by a pedicle to the inner spot of the discal series.

* Since this paper was commenced Major Yerbury has come to England
and has brought his private collection and numerous other specimens with
him, enabling me to introduce many additional species into this account
of his captures. All that were required for perfecting the Museum series
were most generously presented to the Trustees by Major Yerbury.

Srom North-west India. 133
3 ¢. Campbellpore, 8th and 16th May, 1886.

L. leopardus and var. b would appear to be the early forms
of 7. limniace.

“Common round Campbellpore in May and June; a few
at Murree ; not seen on Thundiani.”—J, W. Yerbury,

2, Limnas chrysippus.
Papilio chrysippus, Linneus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 263 (1764).
Var. g. Campbellpore, 13th July, 1886.

‘‘Common everywhere except Thundiani; not seen on the

hill, but was common about Abbottabad.”—J. W. Y.

Var. Limnas alcippoides.
Limnas alcippoides, Movre, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1883, p. 238, pl. xxxi. fig. 1.
S$, 16th June, 2, 15th July, 1885; g, 30th May and
12th July, 1886.
“Ten or twelve specimens taken in May and June, 1885;
only two specimens seen in 1886. Varies greatly in amount

of white.’—./. W. Y,

3. Salatura genutia.

Papilio genutia, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. cevi. C, D (1782).

9, Campbellpore, 25th; ¢@, Hassan Abdal, 27th June;
Hurripur, 14th October, 1886,

“ A few at Campbellpore, June and July 1886; common
at Hassan Abdal in June; seen about Abbottabad, August
1886 ; uncommon at Murree, August and September 1885; a
single specimen seen on Thundiani, 12th September, 1886—
the only Danats seen on the hill.’"—J. W, Y.

SATYRINa”.
A. Aulocera saraswati.

Satyrus saraswatt, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iy. 2, p. 445, pl. xiv,
figs. 3, 4 (1848).

6. Thundiani, 19th August, 1886.
Common at Cotton’s Folly, below Murree; rare on
Thundiani.”—J. W. Y.

5. Aulocera swaha,
Satyrus swaha, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p, 444, pl. xiv.
fies. 1, 2 (1848).
g. Thundiani, 10th August; Nandar, 25th Sevtember,
1886.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 10

134 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

“Common at Murree and Thundiani in August 1885 and
1886.7—7. W: Y.

6. Mipparchia parisatis.
Satyrus parisatis, Kollar, Denkschr, Akad. Wien, Math.-nat. Cl. i.
p. 52. n. 7 (1850).

$. Khairabad, 2nd May, ¢ ?. 6th June; ¢. Kala Pani,
1st September, 1886.

“Common on the hills round Abbottabad in August.
Common at Khairabad in May and June. Seen at Attock
and Tret.”—J. W. Y.

7. Callerebia nirmala.
Erebia nirmala, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 501. n. 91.
Between Kala Pani and Thundiani, 10th August, 1886.

Major Yerbury mentions a second species, C. annada,
Moore (C. hybrida, De Nicéville, nec Butler), as_ being
“common on the lower slopes of the hill below Kala Pani—
a few taken above Tret, 8th October, 1885,” and he thinks
“it is possible that the Thundiani specimens are the former
and the Tret specimens the latter species.”

No specimens having been forwarded in the three series
before me, I cannot speak positively ; but the species sent
in the last collection, identified as C. hybrida by Mr. De
Nicéville, was simply typical C. annada, and therefore I think
it highly improbable that the hybrid form between C. annada
and C. scanda occurs in the neighbourhood ; if it does, C.
scanda must be there also, yet nothing like it has yet been
sent home by Major Yerbury.

Of another species not yet sent to us and the identification
of which I consider extremely doubtful *, viz. Callerebia
daksha, Major Yerbury writes :—‘* Not uncommon at Murree
in company with 583 (OC. nirmala), a few at Thundiani,
August and September 1886.”

The male of C. daksha differs from that sex of C. nirmala
in its distinctly longer wings, the ocellus of primaries more
transverse and oval, with equal pupils and very indistinct
iris ; on the upper surface of the secondaries are three ocelloid
white spots in addition to the ocellus, which is large and has
a conspicuous white pupil, as in the female of C. nirmala;
the under surface of the wings is quite plain, not mottled with
paler scales as in C. nirmala (when seen through a lens), and

* Specimens of C. irmala were identified as C. daksha in the former
collection, and I have no doubt that such is the case in the present
instance,

Jrom North-west India. 135

therefore is of a richer brown colour; the secondaries also
are distinctly marked with tive snow-white spots, followed by
two ocelli, the first twice the size of the second. I have
taken this comparative description from a Cashmere example
of C. daksha labelled and presented to us by Mr. F. Moore,
and doubtless a co-type; although in some respects it
approaches the female of C. nivmala, the uniform rich brown
colouring below and the sharply defined pure white spots on
the wings give it a very different aspect *. The supposed
specimens of CO. daksha sent in the former collection were
typical females of C. nirmala, C. duksha is not in Major
Yerbury’s boxes or cabinet.

8. Lethe verma.
Satyrus verma, Kollar, in Higel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 447, pl. xvi.
fies. 1, 2 (1848).
Thundiani, 24th September, 1885.

9. Lethe dyrta.

Debis dyrta, Felder, Reise der Noy., Lep. p. 497. n. 860 (1867).

3. Futch Khan’s bungalow near Kooteer, Chittah Pahar,
? 2000 feet; 9. 14th October, 1886.

“Very common below Bugnoter (Murree and Abbottabad
Road), also near Kala Pani in September 1885. A single
specimen taken in the Chittar Pahar, 23rd April, 1886; also
taken at Dewal, Murree, and the Kashmir Road.” —J. W. Y.

10. Amecera schakra.
Satyrus schakra, Kollar, in Higel’s Kaschmir, iy. 2, p. 446, pl. xv.
figs. 3, 4 (1848).

3S. Thundiani, 10th, 15th, and 25th August; 9. Near
Abbottabad, 30th September, 1886.

“ Common all along the hills from Murree to Thundiani;
descends the hills below Kala Pani and Bugnoter, but was
not seen in the immediate neighbourhood of Abbottabad.”’—

dW. Y.

11. Ypthima avanta.
Yphthima (sic) avanta, Moore, Proc. Zool, Soc. 1874, p. 567.
Kala Pani, lst September; Bugnoter, 29th; Dhum tower,
near Abbottabad, 30th September, 1886.

Evidently occurs in company with Y. ordinata, which, in

* After writing the above I looked up Mr. Moore’s figure, which is by
no means good, since the white spots on the upper surface of the secon-
daries mentioned in the description are obliterated by the colourer.

LO*

136 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

the former collection, was forwarded under the same name.
Major Yerbury says of it:—Ypthima avanta, De N., ordt-
nata, B. Fairly common between Kala Pani and Abbottabad
and between Bugnoter and Abbottabad in September.”

Although the types of these two Ypthimas differ just as De
Nicéville’s dry- and wet-season forms are supposed to do,
they occur together in the same months, and therefore cannot
be associated as one species on that supposition ; whether
they are varieties or good species can only be decided by
careful breeding from eggs which have been deposited. They
differ as follows :—

Y. ordinata. Y. avanta.

Ocellus of primaries above Jarge Ocellus small and indistinct or
and distinct; below larger than absent.
in Y. avanta.

Secondaries below without any With two more or less distinct
distinct bands. bands.

Any one seeing only the types of Y. ordinata and Y. avanta
would believe them to be good distinct species ; but with the
series which we now possess before me, I confess to having
serious doubts of their distinctness ; at the same time there is
not sufficient evidence to allow of their being associated under
one name at present.

12. Ypthima bolanica.
Ypthima bolanica, Marshall, Butt. Ind. i. p. 231. n. 224 (1883),

Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 4th April; Attock, 10th
April; Khairabad, 11th April; Campbellpore, 13th April,
1886.

The ocelli on the under surface vary as much as in some
of the supposed dry- and wet-season forms of other species.

“Common on the hills round Campbellpore, Attock, and
Khairabad in March and April.”—J. W. Y.

13. Ypthima sakra.
Ypthima sakra, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 286. n. 508 (1857).

& 2 (in coiti). Thundiani, 27th August; ¢ var. 14th
September, 1886.

The male taken in September has a different formula to the
ocelli on the under surface of the secondaries, 1 x 3 instead of
2x3; the upper ocellus, however, has a projection behind on
the right-hand wing and in front on the left-hand wing; the
ocellus of primaries also differs from the normal type in being

smaller and less distinct above; all the other characters are

from North-west India. 137

identical, so that there is no doubt that we have to do here
with nothing more than individual variation.

““Common.on the lower slopes of Thundiani above Kala
Pani; a few at Murree and Dewal, Aug. and Sept.”—dJ.
W. Y.

14. Ypthima alemola,
Ypthima alemola, Swinhoe, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1885, p. 127.

Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 28th March; Attock, 10th
April; Campbellpore, 13th and 17th April; Khairabad, 11th
and 18th; Akhor, 22nd; Hassan Abdal, 9th May, 1886.

This and the following are sent under one number and are
identified by De Nicéville as Y. asterope. We possess thirteen
examples of the latter from Aden and Somali, and there is no
difficuity in separating the Y. alemola type from it, as the
latter has very minute oval ocelli on the under surface of the
secondaries ; both forms are rather browner above, with more
ochreous irides to the ocelli; but on the under surface there
is really very little to separate Y. mahratta from Y. asterope.

1a Ypthima mahratta.

Ypthima mahratta, Moore, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. lili. pt. ii. 1,
p. 16 (1884).

3S %. Khairabad, 11th and 18th April; Campbellpore,
13th April, 2nd June, 11th and 23rd July; Hassan Abdal,
27th June, 18th July ; road between Abbottabad and Kala
Pani, 9th August; Kala Pani, lst September, 1886.

It will be seen that most of the specimens ot this form with
the round ocelli were taken later in the year than Y. alemola ;
but, as four of them were obtained in April, Y. mahratta
cannot be regarded as a seasonal form of Y. alemola.

Major Yerbury says of these two torms :—‘‘ Common on
the hills round Campbellpore ; also on the lower slopes of the
hills near Abbottabad.”

16. Ypthima nareda.
Satyrus nareda, Kollar, in Miigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 451 (1848).
One example, road between Abbottabad and Kala Pani,
9th August, 1886.
“ airly common between Abbottabad and Kala Pani;
common at Murree in August 1885.”

138 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

NYMPHALINA.

17. Melitea persea.

Melitea persea, Kollar, Denkschr. Akad. Wien, Math.-nat. Cl. i. p. 52.
n. 6 (1850).

Campbellpore, 23rd and 25th March, 1st April, and 16th
May, 1886.

The whole of the specimens are typical J. persea, and
therefore perfectly distinct from the Afghan M. LRobertsii,
with which Mr. De Nicéville continues to confound it. Major
Yerbury says that it was ‘‘ not uncommon round Campbell-
pore in June 1885 and again in March 1886; the spring
brood seemed to be larger, darker-coloured, and with the base
of the wings invaded with dusky : common also at Attock
and Khairabad.’’ In the specimens now forwarded I note
that those taken in March are darker but scarcely larger than
those obtained in May, but the one specimen taken in April
is unusually large, though not darker; it is a female. Of
the two specimens taken near Attock Bridge in November
and recorded in my former paper, one is much larger and
slightly darker than the other, so that the specimens sent us
by Major Yerbury up to the present time hardly bear out his
views ; at the same time he is in a far better position to form
an opinion upon the matter than I am, and therefore I do not
call in question the general accuracy of his distinctions,
whilst pointing out that they are by no means constant.

18. Argynnis tssea.
Argynnis issea, Moore, Cat. Lep. EK. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 156. n. 828 (1857).
6 ¢ (in coité). Thundiani, 11th August; ¢. 15th
August, 1886.
“ Common on Murree and Thundiani; some of the speci-
mens taken in the latter place have the black markings both

on the fore and hind wings confluent, forming Blane mela-
noid varieties.” —J. W. Y.

19. Argynnis kamala.

Argynnis kamala, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 156. n. 824
(1857).
Two females. Thundiani, 13th, 18th, and 20th August,
and 9th October, 1886.
So far Major Yerbury has only sent us females of this
species, and, from a note which he appends to the number in
his M§., it would seem that the male is unknown to him;

valle

Jrom North-west India. 139

yet he says that the species was “common at Thundiani in
August and September 1886; a few seen at Murree, Sep-
tember 1885.”
20. Atella phalanta.
Papilio phalanta, Drury, Il. Ex. Ent. i. pl. xxi. figs. 1, 2 (1778).
Campbellpore, 13th July ; Abbottabad, 1st October.
“ Fairly common about Campbellpore and at Hassan Abdal

in October.”—/J. W. Y.

21. Pyrameis cardut.
Papilie cardui, Linnzeus, Fauna Suecica, p. 276. n. 1054 (1761).

3 ¢. Thundiani, 14th and 15th August, 1886.
““ Common everywhere.” —J. W. Y.

22. Pyrameis indica.
Papilio atalanta indica, Herbst, Natur. Schmett. vii. pl. clxxx. figs. 1, 2
(1794).
Thundiani, 13th August, 3rd, 9th, and 16th September,
1886.
‘*Common at Thundiani, August and September 1886; a
single specimen seen in a mustard-field near Laurencepore,

wth February, 1886.”—J. W. Y.

23. Vanessa kaschmirensis.

Vanessa kaschmirensis, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 442,
pl. xi. figs. 3, 4 (1848).

Thundiani, 11th, 12th, and 17th August, 1886.
“Probably the commonest butterfly on Thundiani; only
two or three specimens taken at Murree.”—J. W. Y.

24. Vanessa charonia.
Papilio charonia, Drury, Ill, Ex, Ent. i. pl. xv. figs. 1, 2 (1778).
g. Thundiani, 9th and 21st September, 1886.

‘“Common round Murree; fairly common at Thundiani
and Dewal in August and September.”—J. W. Y.

25. Vanessa agnicula.
Grapta agnicula, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 559.
g@. Thundiani, 17th August; 9. 12th September, 1886.
Incorrectly identified as V. c-album, from which (apart

trom other differences) it may easily be distinguished by its
superior size and much blacker markings above. I have

140 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

fourteen examples of V. c-album from Zeller’s collection
before me, and although they exhibit all the usual varieties of
that species, not one of them at all nearly approaches V. agn7-
cula; the Indian insect indeed far more nearly resembles
V. hamigera of Japan, but has a broader external border on
the upper surface of primaries, smaller submarginal spots on
the secondaries, greyer and darker under surface, and a num-
ber of little differences (quite constant) in the details of
pattern on the same surface. Dr. Staudinger and others
would doubtless regard both the Indian and Japanese forms
as varieties of V. c-album (this they do in the case of the
North-American forms, although the larva have been carefully
figured in all stages and shown to be wholly unlike that of
the European species)! but to attempt to follow them would
involve sinking not only the whole of the species of the
imaginary genus Grapta, but nearly the whole of the more
typical Vanesse, since every form from V. ¢duterrogationis to
V. xanthomelas (if not to V. ichnusa) has about equal specific
value. Our species are arranged as follows, and form a pretty
complete gradation from one type to the other :—

1. Vanessa interrogationis, Fab. (10 examples). N.
America.
Var. Labricit, Edw. (9 examples). N. America.
V. comma, Harr. (9 examples). N. America.
V. gracilis, Gr. & Rob. (2 examples). N. America.
V. faunus, Edw. (9 examples). N. America.
. stlenus, Edw. (1 example). N. America.
V. zephyrus, Kdw. (2 examples). N. America.
V. satyrus, Edw. (12 examples). N. America.
V. progne, Cram. (10 examples). N. America.
V. c-album, Linn. (14 examples). Europe.
10. V. hamigera, Butl. (5 examples). Japan.
11. V. agnicula, Moore (3 examples now). N.W. India.
12. V. Hentont, Butl. (1 example). Japan.
13. V. egea, Cram. (13 examples). Europe.
14. V. Pryert, Janson (6 examples). Japan.
15. V. c-aureum, Linn. (11 examples). Japan, China,
&e.
16. V. t-album, Boisd. (5 examples). N. America,
17. V. v-album, Schiff. (10 examples). Europe.
18. V. californica, Boisd. (8 examples). California.
19. V. polychloros, Linn. (10 examples). Europe.
20. V. wanthomelas, Schiff. (11 examples). Europe and
Japan.
21. V., var. ? (3 examples). India and Japan.

CO OF 51 D> Dry go ww
=

from North-west India. 141

If any of the Asiatic or North-American forms above
recorded are to be considered conspecific with V.c-album there
is no reason why the whole 164 examples enumerated here
should not be equally regarded as varieties of one species.
My view of a true variety is that it isa sport, either individual
or often recurring, but never necessarily reproducing itself in
the next generation; thus the white females of Colcas or the
dark females of Argynnis are true varieties ; but to speak of
a fixed local form as a variety appears to me to be wholly
incorrect ; indeed, my expressed opinion that local forms are
the highest type of existing species in the Lepidoptera, can
never be disproved until the whole world has been collected
over, whilst every collection which arrives goes to strengthen it.

Major Yerbury says that he met with a few specimens of
V. agnicula on Thundiani in August and September 1886,
and that it “ affects yarrow and ragwort (?).”

26. Junonia asterie.
Papilio asterte, Linneeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 769. n. 133 (1767).

6. Khairabad, 18th April; ¢ 9. 23rd May, 25th July ;
3d. Campbellpore, 8th May; ?. Hassan Abdal, 9th May,
1886.

Major Yerbury thinks with Mr. De Nicéville that J. almana
is the cold-weather form of this species ; but from what I can
learn the idea of its being a form at all of J. asterve (an idea
which I never for a moment entertained) is likely to be deti-
uitely disproved ; even in the collection now betore me [| see
that one of the two specimens of J. a/mana was taken in May ;
indeed, I do not remember to have received a collection from
any part of India in which both species occurred, but they
were taken at the same time, often on the same day: as to
their being varieties, the totally different form of the wings
renders this highly improbable. We have an enormous series
ot both species, but nothing intermediate between them.

Major Yerbury says that he obtained a few specimens of
J. asterte at Campbellpore in July, but that it was very
common at Khairabad and Hassan Abdal in June and July.
Among the specimens brought ome in papers is one taken at
Kala Panion the 30th August,

27. Junonia almana.
Fapilio almana, Linnzeus, Mus. Lud. Uly. p. 272 (1764).
Attock, 2nd May; Hurripur, 14th October, 1886.

“Common round Campbellpore in the cold weather ; also

142 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

at Hassan Abdal. ‘This seems to be the cold-weather form.”
—J.W. Y.

The idea of this species being a seasonal form of J. asterte
originated, Iam told, with a Mr, Doherty (now collecting in
Timor, and likely to proceed to New Guinea) ; but he tells
me, in a letter recently received, that he has since seen reason
to doubt the correctness of this notion. Mr. De Nicéville has,
however, taken up the cause of seasonal dimorphism, and
played considerable havoc with the synonymy of the Lepi-
doptera: some of his suggestions may turn out to be correct ;
but such as prove to be unfortunate guesses will only have
uselessly hindered the advance of knowledge.

28. Junonia Swinhoet.
Junonia Swinhoet, Butler, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. Oct. 1885, p. 308.

& ¢. Campbellpore, 3rd April; ¢. Attock, 10th April;
3. Bugnoter, 29th September, 1886.

Major Yerbury says that this is probably the commonest
butterfly all the year round both at Campbellpore and Murree,
but that on Thundiani it is uncommon.

J. orithyta, with which the Indian species has been con-
founded, is a much larger Chinese form, having the under
surface suffused throughout with rufous-brown, most strongly
in the female; the species is found in North-eastern, but not
(so far as I know) in North-western India. Of C. Swinhoedt
we now possess a series of twenty-four good specimens.

29. Junonia enone.

Papilio enone, Linnzeus, Mus. Lud. Ul. pp. 274, 275 (1764).

One bad male, Kala Pani, 1st September, 1886.

‘¢ Khairabad (single specimen), 8th November, 1885; a
few between Kala Pani and Abbottabad and between Bug-
noter and Abbottabad in September 1885 and 1886.”—
ele Wald

30. Hypolimnas bolina.

Papilio bolina, Linnzeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 295 (1764).

Campbellpore, 2, 21st, ¢, 27th July, 1886.

‘Uncommon, none taken in 1885; two females and one
male to date, 1886.”—J. W. Y.

31. Athyma opalina.
Limenitis opalina, Wollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 427 (1848).
3d. Thundiani, 10th and 19th August; 2. 10th Septem-
ber, 1886.

=<"

Strom North-west India. 143

“Common at Murree and Thundiani in August 1885 and
1886. — J) W. ¥-

32. Neptis astola.
Neptis astola, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 560.

Chittar, between Tret and Barracoo, 9th October, 1885 ;
Thundiani, 20th September ; Hurripur, 14th October, 1886.

Three examples, all more or less worn, mixed up with a
series of N. mahendra.

33. Neptis Yerburit.
3. Neptis Yerburii, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 360. n. 17.
?. Dhum tower, near Abbottabad, 12th October, 1886.

The female is larger than the male and on the primaries the
spots of the oblique series from inner margin are slightly
smaller (in which respects it is rather more like N. nandina
than the male) ; in the pale lines between the bands, the white
markings, and other respects it resembles it. Major Yerbury
correctly names this insect, but says ‘‘I am unable to recog-
nize this form,” from which I conjecture that he is not sure
how it can be at once distinguished from N. mahendra. The
latter is a short-winged species of the N. columella group, the
males having the white spots on the disk of primaries sepa-
rated into three distinct patches ; in the females, however, the
two lower patches are sometimes only divided by the first median
branch (blackened) ; nevertheless the inner edge of the short
white band thus formed is invariably angulated internally and
deeply excised externally at this pomt. In N. Yerburti, on
the other hand, there is an oblique series of white spots as in
N. nandina, with a straight inner edge; in N. mahendra
again there is a wide break in the middle of the submarginal
series of white spots on the primaries, the triangular spot
beyond the cell is short and obtuse, and the pale submarginal
stripe on the secondaries is wanting; on the under surface
the ground-colour is of a much more uniform coffee-red
colour, and the female has no whitish border to the secon-
daries ; there is therefore no difficulty in separating the two
species, indeed there are many other species of Neptis much
less readily distinguishable.

34. Neptis mahendra.
Neptis mahendra, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 560, pl. xxxii. fig. 3.

Thundiani, 15th, 19th, 21st, and 29th August, 15th Sep-
tember, 1886.

144 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

“Common at Murree and Thundiani, August and Septem-

ber 1886.”—2J. W. Y.

Erycinide.
DLipyrHeEin 2.

35. Libythea lepita.
Libythea lepita, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 240, n. 519 (1857).

Thundiani, 13th and 26th August, 2nd September, 1886.

“A few taken round Campbellpore in November and
April; very common at Murree and Thundiani.”—/J. W. Y.

Among the specimens in papers recently brought home
there is a female of the northern representative of L. myrrha
from Mir Jani, above Kalabagh, about 9000 feet, taken the
16th September.

NEMEOBIINA.

36. Taxila durga.
Melitea durga, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 441, pl. xiii.
figs. 8, 4 (1848).
— @. Dhum tower, near Abbottabad, 29th September; ¢.
Kala Pani, 2nd October, 1886.
“Common at Murree and between Kala Paniand Abbottabad,
August and September 1886.”—J. W. Y.

Lycenide.

37. Panchala dodonea.
Amblypodia dodonea, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 43. n. 65,
pl. i. a, fig. 8 (1857).

2. Thundiani, 10th October, 1886.

“Common at Dewal, 26th August, 1885; frequents //ex
trees. I am not quite sure of the distinction between this
species and P. rama.”—J. W. Y.

The distinction between P. dodonwa and P. rama has never
hitherto (to my knowledge) been called in question ; the two
species are easily separable. Both sexes of P. dodonwa* have
the pattern of the female P. rama, but are above of a shining
lilac-blue colour, whereas both sexes of P. rama are of a deep
purplish ultramarine colour ; on the under surface, moreover,
P. dodonea is of a pale brown or whitish stone-colour, with

* Major Yerbury sent the male in the last collection, the female in this
one,

from North-west India. 145

well-defined dusky markings on the primaries, whereas P. rama
is of a rosy lilac colour, indistinctly banded with bronze-
brown.

38. Panchala rama.
Thecla rama, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 412, pl. iv. figs. 1, 2
(1848).

3d. Thundiani, 12th September, 10th October; Bava
Gulley, 29th September, 1886.

The males are larger fhan the females and have a narrower
black border to the “primaries. This and the preceding are
both common species.

39. Polyommatus beticus.
Papilio beticus, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 789. n. 226 (1767).
3 (dwarfed, with broad border to primaries above). Camp-

bellpore, 2nd June; ¢. 19th July; g@. Thundiani, 13th
August, 1886.

40. Catochrysops cnejus.
Hesperia cnejus, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 430 (1798).

3d @. Campbellpore, 2nd June; Hassan Abdal, 18th
July; ?. Thundiani, 3rd September; ¢ 9. Nandar, 25th
September; ¢. Hurripur, 13th October, 1886.

‘Common round Campbellpore.’”—/. W. Y.

41. Catochrysops hapalina.

Catochrysops hapalina, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1883, p. 148, pl. xxiv.

figs. 2, 3,

g. Khairabad, 11th April; 9. Campbellpore, L1th Sep-
tember; ¢ 9. Hurripur, 14th October ; ; o. Campbellpore,
21st October, 1886.

“Catochry ysops strabo, De N. Common on babul-bushes
aoe arabica) near Campbellpore in October 1885.”—

J. W. Y.

C. strabo of Fabricius is one of the commonest Indian
Lycene and closely resembles C. lithargyria of Moore,
excepting in its lilac instead of silvery blue upper surface. It
varies considerably in size, but many of the specimens are
almost twice as large as C. hapalina, and all of them are
totally unlike it in the pattern of the under surface.

One of the males (11th April) and one of the females (14th
October) were labelled as C. ella, but erroneously ; the latter
is a brilliantly blue species, with a broad black border to the
primaries in the male; it can readily be recognized from its

146 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

vague resemblance to some of the species of Jamides (J. plato,
for instance) ; it is not quite so brilliantly coloured, though
brighter than any other Catochrysops.

42. Everes dipora.

Lycena dipora, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 506. n. 108, pl. xxxi.
fig. 8.

§. Campbellpore, 1st June; (dwarfed), Kala Pani, 2nd
October, 1886.

A rare species in collections; yet Major Yerbury says that
it is “not uncommon at Campbellpore from July; common
at Thundiani, August and September ; a pair only taken at
Murree in August 1885.” The two males now sent are both
imperfect, and we only have three others in the Museum
series.

43. Azanus zena.

Lycena zena, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 505. n. 107, pl. xxxi.
fig. 9.
3g. Hassan Abdal, 13th November; ¢ 2. Campbellpore,
17th and 21st November, 1886.
“ Common on babul-bushes at Campbellpore and Hassan

Abdal in the cold weather.”—J. W. Y.

44. Azanus uranus.

es uranus, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 866. n. 40, pl. xxxv.
gl.

9. Campbellpore, 29th October and 21st November, 1885 ;
g. 8th June, 1886; Chitta Pahar, Lumbahdoon, 2000 feet,
28th November, 1885.

“Common on babul-bushes near Campbellpore in No-
vember 1885.” —J. W. Y.

It appears from Major Yerbury’s notes that this is the A.
ubaldus of De Nicéville; it is, however, perfectly distinct
from the true A. ubaldus. It is true that both A. wranus and
A. ubaldus agree in the uniform lilac colouring of the upper
surface in the males; but the pattern of the under surface
and the colouring of the female on both surfaces in A. whaldus
much more nearly agree with A. zena; indeed, though the
males of A. zena and A. ubaldus are as unlike and as easy to
separate as any two species of Lycaena, the females may
readily be confounded. The female of A. wranus is either pale
copper-brown suffused with lilac, or lilac bordered with copper-
brown, on the upper surface; on the under surface it only
differs from the male in having the black spots of the secon-

from North-west India. 147

daries rather better defined; the bands on the under surface
are (as in the male) grey, whereas in A. zena and A. ubaldus
they are copper-brown; the pattern of the bands differs
chiefly in their more macular character.

45. Tarucus extricatus.

Tarucus extricatus, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 366. n. 45, pl. xxxv.
fig. 2.
g. Campbellpore, 3rd April, 1886.
This specimen is of about twice the size of my type, or
about as large as the smaller examples of 7. nara. Of this
form we now possess six specimens,

46. Tarucus callinara.

Tarucus callinara, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xviii.
p. 185. n. 24 (1886).

@. Hurripur, 13th October, 1886.

We have nineteen examples of this butterfly, in both sexes.

AT. Tarucus nara.
Lycena nara, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 421 (1848).

g . Campbellpore, 3rd April, 1886.

Seven examples of typical 7’. nara are in our collection.

48. Tarucus venosus.

Tarucus venosus, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1882, p. 245, pl. xii. figs. 6,

6a.

3S. Kala Pani, 30th August, 1886.

A very distinct species, readily recognizable by the broad
blackish border to the wings. ‘The four preceding forms are
all associated by Major Yerbury as the Terucus theophrastus
of De Nicéville; if 7. extricatus and callinara should prove
to be forms of 7’. nara, that species must be very variable.
T. venosus is distinct beyond all question, and none of them
is the Z. theophrastus of Fabricius. Major Yerbury says
they are ‘‘ common at Campbellpore almost all the year round.

Common on the lower slopes at Murree and Thundiani in
August and September.”

49, Cyaniris vardhana.

Polyommatus vardhana, Moore, Proce. Zool. Soe. 1874, p. 572, pl. Ixvi.
fig. 5.

6. Thundiani, 6th September; Kala Pani, 11th October,
1886.

148 Mr. A. G, Butler on Lepidoptera

50. Cyaniris kasmira.
~ Polyommatus kasmira, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 503, pl. xxxi.

fie. 1

$. Thundiani, 20th August, 1886.

In 1882 Mr. Moore regards this as a synonym ot C, Kollari;
itis, however, decidedly larger than that species (= C.calestina
of De Nicéville, vide Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 867), whilst its
female resembles that sex of C, Hiigelit, excepting that the
outer border of the primaries is narrower ; in size this form is
intermediate between C. Hiigelit and C. Kollart.

51. Cyaniris Kollari.
Tycena Kollari, Westwood, Gen. Diurn. Lep. p. 491. n. 69 (1852).

9. Thundiani, 17th August; ¢ 2. 19th August, 1886.

The three preceding forms were associated under one
number; but although it is possible that C. kasmira and C.
Kollari may be races, or even alternating generations of one
species, it is quite certain that C. vardhana is totally distinct.

52. Zizera maha.

Lycena maha, Kollar, in Wiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 422 (1848).

Lycena chandala, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 504, pl, xxxi. fig. 5.

@. Campbellpore, 17th April; ¢. Hassan Abdal, 9th
May, 1886.

These are the only two specimens of typical Z. maha that
Major Yerbury has sent us hitherto. The species is easy to
recognize, the male above being of a pale silvery lilac or azure
tint, changing in certain positions to grey and silvery white ;
the extreme outer margin black, the primaries with a dusky
submarginal stripe; the female is steel-blue above, with the
costal borders and the outer border of primaries broadly black ;
the secondaries usually with a broad whitish outer border, on
which are some black marginal spots; the pattern below corre-
sponds nearly with that of Z. diluta, excepting that the
secondaries are browner and the markings on these wings are
smaller and less distinct. We have two dozen specimens in
our collection, varying only in the tint of the upper surface in
the males, which in some examples is silvery blue, in others
silvery lilac,

53. Zizera squalida.
2. Lycena squalida, Butler, Trans. Ent. Soc, 1879, p. 4.

3. Campbellpore, 2lst June; Hassan Abdal, 18th July,
1886.

from North-west India. 149

The male varies in colour from silver-grey with a lilac
gloss to smoky grey with a faint bluish gloss ; the primaries
have a blackish external border, considerably narrower than
in Z. diluta and more sharply defined internally ; the secon-
daries have the costal half brownish ; a marginal series of
blackish spots ; the under surface scarcely differs from that of
Z, maha, excepting that the discal series of black spots on the
primaries forms a more or less pronounced angle below the
second median branch.

This form is intermediate in character between Z maha and
Z. diluta excepting in the angulation of the discal series of
spots on the under surface; it may possibly bea hybrid. We
possess six examples.

54. Zizera diluta.
Lycena diluta, Felder, Reise der Nov., Lep. ii. p. 280. n. 353, pl. xxxv.
figs. 12,13.

3. Akhor, 22nd April; 2. Campbellpore, 4th, 5th, and
9th May; g. Hassan Abdal, 27th June, 18th July ; Thun-
diani, 21st August; ¢ ?. 29th August; 9°. Nandar, 25th
September, 1886.

Var. Wings below greyer; black spots with narrower
white margins.

3 ¢. Hassan Abdal, 9th May; g. Thundiani, 29th
August, 1886.

55. Cupido ariana,
Polyommatus ariana, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 504. n. 103,
pl. xxxi. fig. 2.

3. Thundiani, 19th August; ¢ 2 (incoitdi), 29th August,
10th September; 2. 15th and 24th September, 1886.

All the specimens with the exception of one taken on the
19th August are rather small for the species; the femalé
appears to vary almost as much as in C. icarus of Kurope.

Major Yerbury says that tiis species is “common at
Murree in August and September, and fairly common at
Thundiani in the same months.”

Major Yerbury brought home with him specimens of
Cupido nazira taken at Thundiani on the 29th August, the
4th and 11th September, 1886.

56. Chrysophanus timeus.
Papilio timeus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. clxxxvi. E, F (1779).
9. Thundiani, 20th August; @. 24th August and 20th
September, 1886.
Ann & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol.i. 11

150 On Lepidoptera from North-west India.

“Common at Murree and Thundiani in August and Sep-
tember; two specimens taken at Hassan Abdal on the 9th

May, 1886.”—J. W. Y.
57. LIlerda tamu.

Polyommatus tamu, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 417, pl. v.
figs. 7, 8 (1848).
&. Thundiani, 24th August, 1886.

“Common at Murree in August; two specimens taken at
Thundiani.”— J. W. Y.

58. Ilerda sena.

Polyommatus sena, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 415, pl. v.
figs. 3, 4 (1848).

g. Kala Pani, 30th August, 1886.

“A single specimen taken at Khairabad on the Ist
November, 1885 ; uncommon at Murree ; very common below
Kala Pani and along the hills towards Abbottabad.”—
JW ca,

59. Thecla syla.
Thecla syla, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 414, pl. iv. figs. 7, 8
(1848).

é. Thundiani, 21st August, 1886.

“A single specimen taken at Murree, 26th August, 1885 ;
a few on Thundiani during August and September, 1886.” —
Ae Ge

60. Thecla odata.
Dipsas odata, Hewitson, Ill. Diurn. Lep. p. 66. n. 6, pl. xxx. figs, 13,
14 (1865).

Thundiani, 10th, 11th, and 18th August, 1886.

“A number of worn specimens taken round Thundiani
early in August 1886.”

61. Rapala nissa.

Thecla nissa, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iy. 2, p. 412, pl. iv. figs. 3, 4
(1848).

?. Thundiani, 4th September, 1886.

“Common at Murree in August and September 1885; a
few only on Thundiani at the end of August and September
1886."—J. W. Y.

62. Deudoryx epijarbas.
Diwpsas epijarbas, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. i. p..82. n. 80 (1857).

3 ?. Thundiani, 21st August; Hurripur, 14th October,
1886.

Mr. F. Day on the Bib and Poor- Cod. 151

“Common on Murree; fairly common on Thundiani.”—

Pal Ae.

63. Spindasis hypargyros.
Spindasis hypargyros, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 369. n. 55,

pl. xxxv. fig. 3

Khairabad, 18th April; Futch Khan’s bungalow, Kooteer,
Chittar Pahar, 2000-3000 feet, 23rd April; Campbellpore,
2nd and 31st May, 2nd June, and 23rd July, 1886.

“Common generally in the neighbourhood of Campbell-
pore in July 1885 and April 1886; the specimens taken
April 1886 were, as a rule, smaller than those of July 1885.”
—J, W. Y.

The largest specimen sent to us by Major Yerbury in 1886
and taken that year measures 39 millim. in expanse, the
smallest (a very dark little female) only 25 millim.; those
taken and forwarded in 1885 measured from 35-38 millim. :
the really gigantic example sent in 1886 was taken in May,
and there was exactly one month between its capture and that
of the smallest one ; therefore no supposition as to the large
and small specimens being dry- or wet-season forms or
seasonal forms of any kind need be suggested.

[To be continued. |

XVII. —On the Bib (Gadus luseus) and Poor- Cod
(G. minutus). By Francis Day, C.LE., F.L.S., &e.

In June 1886 Professor M‘Intosh, in the Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist., subscribed to the view that the poor- or power-cod
was the young state of the bib. As I have now fresh mate-
rial to investigate, and as it does not confirm this view, I
must ask for a small space in order to review what have
been the published opinions of British ichthyologists on this
point for the last two centuries, as well as to briefly describe
some fresh specimens which I cannot help thinking are opposed
to this novel classification.

Willughby, in his ‘ Historia Piscium,’ 1686, p. 169, ad-
verted to the bib, or blinds of Cornwall, Asedlus luscus. He
likewise, at p. 171, enumerated as another species ‘“Asellus
mollis minor seu asellus omnium minimus,’ and which latter
he referred to “Anthi secunda species, Rondel. Gesn. 64.
An Merlangus Belloni?” But there is no occasion to allude
to all the ancient authors who have similarly held that the
bib and poor-cod are distinct species, as the various references

are given in Gmelin’s edition of Linneus, where the former
EL*

152 Mr. F. Day on the Bib and Poor- Cod.

fish was classed as Gadus luseus, p. 1163, and the latter as
G. minutus, p. 1164. The Rev. Mr. Jago, of Cornwall, ob-
served, in his ‘Catalogus quorundam piscium rariorum’ of
Cornwall, that he had discovered a new form of British
Gadoid in the poor-cod ; and in this appendix, published in
Ray’s ‘Synopsis Piscium,’ 1713, p. 163, we find “ Asellus
mollis minimus, Cornub. Poor vel Power dictus, fig. 6,”
and Ray remarked on its being already described in Wil-
lughby. If Jago’s figure is referred to, it will be seen that
he correctly placed the vent in a perpendicular line beneath
the last ray of the first dorsal fin, which, as I shall presently
show, is a proof that he certainly diagnosed the species.

Pennant, in his ‘ British Zoology,’ vol. ii. 1776,
pp. 183 and 184, also separated the two, and figured them as
distinct on plate xxx. He referred the bib to Asel/us luscus,
Raii, ‘ Synop. Piscium,’ p. 54, or Gadus luscus, Linn. Syst.
Nat. p. 437, and the poor-cod to Jago’s figure in Ray, or
G. minutus, Linn. Syst. Nat. p. 438. Shaw likewise con-
sidered the two forms distinct species; as did also Turton,
‘British Fauna,’ 1807, p. 90; Fleming, ‘ British Animals,’
1828, p. 191; and Jenyns in his‘ British Vertebrate Animals,’
1835, pp. 442,444. The last of the foregoing authors re-
marked: “ first noticed as a British species by Jago, who
obtained it on the Cornish coast, where it has since been ob-
served by Mr. Couch.” He then continued that he (Mr.
Jenyns) had described his fish from a Weymouth example of
the unusual length of 8 inches. In the bib he found the
“vent directly beneath the commencement of the first dorsal,”
whereas in the poor-cod it was ‘in a line with the tenth ray
of the first dorsal fin.”

Yarrell (‘ British Fishes,’ ed. 1836) gave these two forms
as two species (vol, ii. pp. 157, 161), and correctly showed
the position of the vent. Hedid not appear to have any
doubt as to their distinctness, and no alteration was made in
the subsequent editions of his work, which point out that by
the situation of the vent and fins the two species may be
readily diagnosed. Thompson, in 1837, observed, at a meeting
of the Zoological Society, that among the new species of fishes
he had obtained in Ireland was Gadus minutus, Linn., the
poor-cod, and that from three localities in Down and Antrim ;
also that two specimens from the coast of Cork were in the
collection of Mr. Ball (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1837, p. 57); and
in Thompson’s ‘ Natural History of Ireland,’ iv. p. 181, the
foregoing opinion was retained, and further details of the
various specimens added. In White’s ‘ Catalogue of British
Fish,’ 1851, pp. 88 and 89, they were kept distinct, and also
in Ginther’s ‘ Catalogue of the Fishes in the British Museum,’

Mr. F. Day on the Bib and Poor- Cod. 153

vol. iv. 1862, p. 835; while in this latter work it was re-
marked that “the ribs of this species [the bib] are propor-
tionally longer and stronger than in the preceding [the poor-
or power-cod].” Couch (‘Fishes of the British Islands,’
il. 1877, pp. 70 and 72, and on plates 138 and 139) did not
place these fish under one head, but observed of the poor-cod :
“‘ vent nearer the tail [than in the bib], opposite the termi-
nation of the first dorsal. The first dorsal also begins further
distant from the head ; the pectorals are shorter ;_ ventrals also
shorter, not reaching halfway to the vent; tail slightly in-
curved” (p. 73). Dr. M‘Intosh, when enumerating the
‘ Fishes of St. Andrews,’ 1875, p. 178, remarked: “ Gadus
minutus, Linn., common; G. duscus, Linn., not uncommon.”
I omit reference to the statements in my ‘ British and Irish
Fishes,’ 1882, pp. 286, 288, plates 80 and 81, for obvious
reasons, simply observing that the views I then held I see no
cause to alter.

The first author of any note in ichthyology who during
the last two centuries has separated these forms was, I believe,
Winther, in his ‘Marine Ichthyology of Denmark,’ 1879,
p. 29, where he placed, under Gadus minutus, two subspecies
or varieties: (a) minutus, (b) duscus. But in the Ann, &
Mag. Nat. Hist. 1886, xvii. pp. 442, 443, Professor M‘Intosh
remarked of the poor-cod, that my ‘elaborate descriptions
in regard to eyes, teeth, fins, scales, lateral line, and colours
are not always satisfactory, since they fail to show the re-
lationship existing between the adult and young stages appa-
rently of the same species.” Having quoted my observations
on Winther’s opinion, he concluded that as I stated that I
had “ not had an opportunity of investigating both sexes in
these two species of fish,” that such “‘ indicates some un-
certainty on the subject.” He continued thus :—“ my own
experience of the species has now led me to conclude that
what has been described as the poor- or power-cod (Gadus
minutus) by several authors is only the young of the bib,”
concluding that ‘the confusion in regard to this species
has partly arisen from an examination of preserved spe-
cimens.”

Although my opinion had been here called in question, in
my reply (i. c. p. 527) I could merely suggest that an
account of the intermediate links between these two forms
(which up to Winther’s time had invariably been held to be
distinct species) should be given by Dr. M‘Intosh. _ Personally
I possessed no new materials to work upon, and deemed it
preferable to wait until such time as I had, for assertions are
not proof. I took steps, however, to secure some fresh spect-
mens, and applied to my old friend Mr. Dunn, of Mevagissey,

154 Mr. F. Day on the Bib and Poor-Cod.

asking him to obtain for me some power-cod and bib of the same
size, so as to enable me to compare one with the other. Cir-
cumstances, however, have been unfavourable, and it was not
until January 5th that I received from Cornwall three speci-
mens, no. 1 being a bib, Gadus luscus, 7 inches long, and
nos. 2 and 3 being power- or poor-cods, each 8 inches in length,
the one being a male, the other a female, while in both the
generative organs were very fully developed. his last fact
was interesting as demonstrating that poor-cod may be of
either sex, while the size of the two forms likewise proved
that one 7 inches long may be a bib and others 8 inches long
may be poor-cod, rendering it somewhat problematical that the
larger form could be the young or immature form of the smaller
specimen. This last, I may likewise add, was, except in size,
a distinet counterpart in colour and proportion of large
examples of the bib in my collection.

As regards the formula of the fin-rays existing in these
three fishes, it must not be overlooked that in the Anacanthini
or spineless forms these are subject to considerable modifica-
tion; but taking the numbers for what they are worth they
are as follows :—

1. Bib, Gadus tao .... | D. 127) 20 | F9. A. 31 | 18
2&8. Poor-cod, G.minutus D. 12-14 | 28-25. A, 24-26 | 21-23

Eyes.—In the bib the eye was one third the length of the
head, one diameter from the end of the snout ; while in the
poor-cod the eye was two thirds the length of the head
and two thirds of a diameter from the end of the snout, or
larger than in the bib.

Vent.—In the bib this was beneath the anterior end of the
first dorsal fin, or a quarter of the entire length of the fish
from the front end of the lower jaw, whereas it was beneath
the hind end of the same fin in the poor-cod and one third of
the same distance as it was one fourth in the bib.

Fins.—In the bib the first anal commenced just behind the
vent and more forward than in the poor-cod, while the two anal
fins were connected together by a membrane in the bib, as if
the whole had belonged to one consecutive fin; but in the
poor-cod they were two distinct fins with a short interspace be-
tween. The ventral fin was one fourth longer in the bib than in
the poor-cod, while their colours widely differed. Respecting
the number of the gill-rakers, on which some authors have
laid considerable stress in the classification of species, I found
in the outer branchial arch of these two forms as follows :—
Fourteen in the middle or ceratobranchial bone of the bib, and
eighteen in the same place in the poor-cod.

On new Mcmmals from the Solomon Islands. 155

XVIII.—Diagnoses of six new Mammals from the Solomon
Islands. By OLDFIELD THOMAS.

THE following new Mammals were obtained by Mr. C. M.
Woodford at Aola, Guadalcanar, during his second visit to
the Solomon Islands in the course of the past year.

PTERALOPEX, g. n.

Allied to Pteropus, but remarkable for the extraordinary
cuspidate characters of its teeth, and especially of the upper
canines, whose main cusp is bifid and whose postero-internal
basal ledge supports two more sharp conical cusps, the whole
tooth being therefore quadricuspid. Lower incisors very dis-
proportionate in size. Premolars and molars cuspidate, not
longitudinally grooved. Orbits complete behind, their plane
directed more upwards than in Pteropus. Wings arising
from the centre of the back, and attached to between the
bases of the first and second toes.

Pteralopex atrata, sp. n.

Size large, about equal to that of Pt. Keraudrenit.

Fur thick and woolly. ars short, rounded, scarcely pro-
jecting beyond the fur, thinly covered with hair. Interfemoral
membrane narrow in the centre, more or less concealed by the
fur. Colour wholly deep black everywhere, except that the
wing-membranes are irregularly mottled with white on their
under surface.

Upper incisors very large, each with a prominent posterior
ledge, and the outer ones with a secondary cusp behind.
Upper canines very thick, multicuspid as above described,
the posterior external cusp about two thirds the height of the
anterior. First premolar minute, persistent ; other premolars
and molars each with a prominent cingulum and two pointed
central cusps.

Lower inner incisors minute, outer ones disproportionally
large, not less than about twenty times the bulk of the inner,
and separated from one another by a distance barely one third
of their transverse or one fourth of their longitudinal dia-
meters. Canines small and low, scarcely as high as the second
premolar. First premolar large, quite fillmg up the space
between the canine and second premolar. ‘Third premolar and
first molar each with four cusps, two high antero-external, one
antero-internal, and one low postero-external. Posterior
molars both above and below, first lower premolars, and both

156 Mr. O. Thomas on

upper and lower outer incisors all very much of the same
size In cross section.
Dimensions of the type * (an adult male in spirit) :—
Head and body 240 millim.; head 78; ear (above head)
15; tip of nostril to eye 26; forearm 143 (=5°6 in.); skull,
basal length 63, greatest breadth 39; supraorbital foramen to
tip of nasals 26°5. ;
Two specimens obtained.

Pteropus Woodfordi, sp. n.

Closely allied to Pt. molossinus, 'Temm., but readily dis-
tinguishable by its pale grey head, dull rufous nape, pale
yellow collar, and generally greyish colour as compared to the
wholly uniform dark reddish-brown colour of that species.
Ears also less sharply pointed and hairier.

Canines both above and below markedly slenderer than
in Pt. molossinus, and anterior premolars smaller and placed
further from the second premolars. Molars also narrower and
lighter.

Dimensions of the type (male) :—

Head and body c. 150 millim.; ear 11:5; forearm 99
(=3°'9 in.) ; skull, basal length 36°8.

Seven specimens obtained.

ANTHOPS, g. 0.

Allied to Hipposideros tT, especially to the Asellia group ot
that genus, but distinguished from it by its rudimentary tail,
which precisely resembles that of Ca/ops, consisting ot only
some three or four slender transparent vertebre hidden in the
base of the interfemoral membrane and not reaching one half
the distance towards the back of the membrane. Nose-leaf
very complicated, its upright portion emarginate above, the
projections not pointed as in Asedlia, but rounded and hollow
behind.

Skull and teeth as in Hipposideros.

Anthops ornatus, Sp. N.

Posterior nose-leaf tridentate, the projections each fo:ming
a little spherical cup, opening backwards ; front surface of the
leaf divided into tour compartments by three very distinct

* A single specimen in each case is selected from the series as the |
“type,” in order to avoid any possibility of future confusion.

Tt As the genus commonly known as “Phyllorhkina’’ should be called
(see Blanford, P. Z. 8. 1887).

~ new Mammals from the Solomon Islands. 17

vertical ridges, each running up to the lower side of one ot
the cups above. Two secondary leaflets outside the horse-
shoe, the upper one unusually short and little extended, the
lower one running back to join the base of the posterior erect
leaf. Sella with a blunt projecting central point. Kars when
laid forward reaching just to the end of the muzzle, their tips
sharply pointed, with a marked concavity in the upper fourth
of their outer margin. A small frontal gland, opening trans-
veisely, present in the male. Wings from the ankles.

Fur very long, soft, and silky. Colour a finely grizzled
greyish buff, the bases of the hairs slaty grey, their terminal
halves buff, their extreme tips brown.

Dimensions of the type (female) :—

Head and body 51 millim.; head 21; ear (above crown)
17; forearm 51; index-finger 40; metacarpus of third finger
37; tibia 22; interfemoral membrane, depth in centre 20.

SLX specimens.

Mus imperator, sp. n.

Size very large. Fur rather woolly in texture, uniformly
dark grizzled ashy grey above, whitish below. ars short and
rounded ; laid forward they do not nearly reach to the eye.
Mamme four, consisting of two inguinal pairs only. Soles
of feet broad and naked, the pads large, smooth, and but little
prominent. ‘Tail rather short in proportion to the size of the
animal, naked, scaly, not markedly roughened.

Dimensions (in spirit) :—

Head and body. Tail. Hind foot. Ear.

millim. millim. millim. willim.
Mail Guan hotter der so tes 350 258 66 19
Female (type) .... 340 250 64 20

Skull (¢@): basal length 60 millim., greatest breadth 35 ;
length of molar series 12°0; palatal foramen, length 7-0.
‘lwo specimens.

Mus rex, sp. n.

Closely allied to Mus ¢mperator, but distinguished by its
much smaller (although still very considerable) size, and by
its much longer and extraordinarily roughened rasp-like tail.

Dimensions (in spirit) :—

Head and body. ‘Tail. Hind foot. Ear.

millim. millim. millim. millim.
Male (type).......-. 290 296 5D 18
Hemp ales 671. 6 acres, oi 27 285 54 16

Skull (¢): basal length 54 millim., greatest breadth 33 ;
length ot molar series 11:1 ; length of palatal foramen 6°8.

158 Mr. O. Thomas on new Species of Didelphys.

Seven specimens.
Mus salamonis, Rams., from Florida Island, is again a much
smaller species, with a hind foot only 44 millim. in length.

Mus pretor, sp. n.

General characters, size, colour, spininess of fur, size of ears,
&e., as in M. terre-regine, Alst., but distinguished by its
proportionally shorter hind feet, shorter tail, and by having
two pairs of pectoral mamme, its mammary formula being
therefore 2—2=8 instead of 1—2=6.

Dimensions (in spirit) :—

Head and body, Tail. Hind foot. — Far.

millim. millim. millim. millim.
IMiaiL Oa i Bence caus stele t 188 134 35°5 15:5
Female (type) .... 168 118 33'5 15

Skull (2): basal length 37°5 millim., greatest breadth 22 ;
length of upper molar series 6°6; palatal foramen, length 7°4.
‘Two specimens.

XIX.—Diéagnoses of four new Species of Didelphys.
By OLDFIELD THOMAS.

Didelphys (Micoureus) lepida, sp. n

Closely allied to D. murina, L., but distinguished by its
much smaller size, and by the shortness of its ears, which,
when laid forward, barely reach to the centre of its eye.

Dimensions of the type (an adult female, skin) :—

Head and body 105 millim.; tail (imperfect, more than)
105; ear, above head, 9:0; first three molars, combined
lengths 4°7.

Hab. Peruvian Amazons (Z. Bartlett).

Didelphys (Peramys) scalops, sp. n.

Size of D. brevicaudata, Erxl. Head, rump, and tail bright
rufous; fore back, shoulders, and belly grizzled olive-grey.
Skull long and narrow; teeth very small.

Dimensions (male, skin) :—

Head and body 183 millim. ; tail 71; ear 8-0; skull, length
33; combined lengths of first three upper molars 4°9.

Hab. Brazil.

Miscellaneous. 159

Didelphys (Peramys) Ihering?t, sp. n.

Colours and proportions exactly as in D. americana, Mill.
(=D. tristriata, auct.), but only about half the size of that
species.

Dimensions of a male in spirit :—

Head and body 77 millim. ; tail 43; hind foot 14; ear 6°3 ;
skull, basal length 22°5 ; first three molars, length 4°2.

Hab. Rio Grande do Sul (Dr. H. von Ihering).

Didelphys (Peramys) Henseli, sp. n.

Size intermediate between that of the D. brevicaudata and
the D. sorex and Ihering groups. Colour dark grizzled grey
along the whole upper surface, deep rufous on the sides and
belly. Ears small, reaching when laid forward only halfway
towards the eye. Mamme about twenty-five in number, five
central, and about ten pairs of lateral ones.

Dimensions of the type (an adult female, in spirit) :—

Head and body 106 millim. ; tail 62 (extreme tip imperfect) ;
hind foot 15°5; skull, length 27; three anterior upper molars
4-4,

Hab. Rio Grande do Sul (Dr. H. von Ihering).

This is no doubt the intermediate species described but not
named by Hensel *, and I have therefore, at the suggestion of
Dr. von [hering, named it after that eminent mammalogist.

MISCELLANEOUS.
Note on Lophopus Lendenfeldi.
To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GrytLEMEN,—The facts narrated in the letter of Mr, Whitelegge at
p. 62 of the January Number of your Journal have been also brought
to my notice in detail in a letter from himself, and more generally
in one signed by two gentlemen, Messrs. J. Douglas Ogilby and
John Brazier, F.L.S., whom I understand to be members of the staff of
the Australian Museum, Sydney; and I have before me a printed
extract from the ‘ Ashton Reporter’ of March 20th, 1886, de-
scribing in general terms a fine Polyzoan and a method of preserving
it in such a way as to show the parts much as those of the specimen
described by me as Lophopus Lendenfeldi in the ‘Journal of the
Linnean Society’ (Zoology), xx. p. 62, pl. ii. It may be almost
unnecessary for me to say that I was in total ignorance of these
facts when I wrote my paper, but such is the case; and I regret
very greatly the injustice which I have thus unconsciously done to
Mr. Whitelegge, who has fully vindicated his title to the honours of

* Abh. Ak. Berl. 1872, p, 123.

160 Miscellaneous.

discovering and preserving the specimens on which the description
of the species was based. ‘The details as to discovery and preserva-
tion, as given in my paper, require modification in this sense; and I
hope that future students will give Mr. Whitelegge the great credit
due to him, not only for bringing this very fine species to the know-
ledge of the scientific world, but for the great skill shown in the
preparation of the specimens which came under my notice.
I am, Gentlemen,
Maryport, Cumberland, Yours faithfully,
January 16th, 1888. Stuart O, Riptey.

On Glyphastreea sexradiata, Lonsdale, sp. By P. Marrin
Duncan, M.B. (Lond.), F.R.S., &e.

In a communication to the Geological Society (Quart. Journ. Geol.
Soc. vol. xliii. Feb. 1887, p. 24) I described Glyphastrwa Forbesi,
Ed. & Haime, sp., and stated that its alliance with Columnaria
sewradiata, Lonsd. (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. i. 1845, p. 497),
was very close, and I gave the form the name Gilyphastrea sewra-
diata, Lonsd., sp. At the time a very careful search was made for
the specimen described and figured by Lonsdale, but it could not be
found, although all the other types of Lonsdale’s N.-American ter-
tiary species which were given to me by Sir C. Lyell were still in
my possession. After the publication of the paper a coral was
found by the Curator of King’s College Museum ; it was one of a
number of fossils given by me to the College about twelve years since.
This coral had upon it in Lonsdale’s handwriting, with which I am
very familiar, ‘ Columnastrea sewradiata.” On examining this coral,
which is in the museum of the College in which I am Professor of
Geology, I find that the distinctions between it and a specimen of
Glyphastrwa Forbesi, Kd, & H., sp., are not specific, but are due to
growth. This last-named species was later in time of description
than Lonsdale’s, and therefore Glyphastrea sevradiata, Lonsdale, sp.,
is the correct name for Columnaria sevradiata, Lonsd., and G‘lyphas-
trea Forbesi, Ed. & Haime, sp. I am glad to be able to do this
justice to the late Mr. Lonsdale. Since I examined the coral, last
March, it has been cut without my knowledge or sanction.

King’s College, Jan. 16, 1888.

On the first Changes in the Fecundated Ovum of Lepas.
By Prof. M. Nusspaum.

During the author’s residence on the coast of California he was
able to obtain an abundance of material. All the ova in the same
animal are at the same stage of development, but the animals are
very abundant and the breeding-season lasts for several months, so
that by continued preparation the different stages may be obtained
in different animals.

The author’s description commences with the stage at which the
copulation of the male and female cells is effected, and the masses
of ova enclosed in a thin homogeneous sac protrude from the orifices
of the oviducts into the space within the shell on each side of the
head. The ova are small and numerous, ovate, with a blunt and

Miscelluncous. 161

an acute pole. The masses of ova are at first soft and compressible,
but the two sacs separate from the oviducts, fall into the cavity of
the shell, and gradually become converted into harder, flattened
masses. The greater firmness is to be ascribed to the increased
thickness of the vitelline envelopes of the individual ova, and to the
hardening of the material which binds them together. This cement
must become softened again when the embryos are ready to creep
out.

The fecundation of the ova takes place before the formation of
the egg-sac. Living spermatosomata are occasionally found in the
sac. Before the ova have reached the end of the oviducts which
lead from the peduncle of the parent to the two sides of the head,
the vitellus is of uniform structure and permeated throughout with
lecythin-globules. On the separation of the directive bodies,
which takes place after the penetration of the male element, the
contents of the ovum are arranged so that at its rounded pole there
is a dome of finely granulated vitellus, while towards the acute pole
the lecythin-granules are collected together imbedded in a coarsely
granular substratum. The separation of the directive bodies
occurs at the obtuse pole and is accompanied in the ovum of Lepas
by changes in the vitellus somewhat as described by the author in
the ovum of Ascaris megalocephala. The two pronuclei are also in
the neighbourhood of the obtuse pole, with their surfaces of contact
and fusion perpendicular to the long axis of the ovum.

The first division takes place, as in Ascaris nigrovenosa, perpen-
dicularly to the fusion-surfaces of the pronuclei, and therefore in the
long axis of the ovum. ‘The plane of division produces two unequal
globules of segmentation; the lecythin is contained only in the
larger one. Then occurs a turning of the segmentation-spheres and
a displacement of the contents of the nutritive cell, which culmi-
nates in bringing the surface of division into the equator of the
ovum, perpendicular to its first direction. It is well known that in
segmentation the superior animal-cell precedes the inferior vegeta-
tive one and grows around it. As to the formation of the germ-
layers the information is imperfect ; in fresh specimens an invagi-
nation-gastrula appeared to be formed. ‘The head of the larva is
always at the obtuse and the tail at the acute pole.

The results of the investigation are summarized as follows :—

The processes of maturation and fecundation of the ovum of Lepas
arranged the vital parts in such a way that with the separation of
the directive vesicles all the axes of the future embryo are already
defined. The separation of the directive corpuscles and the first
and second segmentations take place in the future long-axis of the
animal, and the position of the directive vesicles indicates the
future position of the cephalic portion of the embryo in course of
formation.

If the relative positions of the axes continued in the way first
occurring, it might be imagined that the contents of the ovum
exclusively possessed the whole power of orientation. But as the
first plane of division passes from a longitudinal to an equatorial
plane, the envelope and its form must also possess directive

162 Miscellaneous.

powers, which may be most judiciously referred to the principle of
least resistance, more especially as the smaller animal-cell which is
in advance in division is placed in the wide obtuse pole, and thus is
enabled to divide again in the long direction of the ovum.

The first division, taking place in the longitudinal direction, does
not, as further observations show, divide the ovum into the mate-
rials for the right and left halves of the body, although subsequently
the sagittal plane of the embryo again coincides with the long axis
of the ovum. This, however, may also be referred to the least
resistance asa guiding principle, seeing that both in the embryo
and the egg-capsule the longitudinal exceed the transverse axes in
extent.

The agreement in the position of the directive vesicles, the first
divisional plane of the segmenting ovum, and the future long axis
of the embryo would consequently have to be referred to a common
cause, which interposed as such in each case, but without the first
orientation in space being conditional for any of the following ones.

If it be considered further that the egg-capsule is furnished by
the ovum itself, so as the laws laid down by men become a measure
and rule of conduct for men, the egg-capsule, although itself without
any formative power, becomes in its rigid form the essential regu-
lator of the position of the developing embryo of Lepas in the egg.
—Sitzungsberichte der kin. preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu
Beriin, December 8, 1887, pp. 1052-1055.

On the Infection of a Frog-tadpole by Saprolegnia ferax.
By Prof. J. B. Scunerzier.

Tn a glass vessel containing 2 litres of water, in which the oxygen
was continually renewed by aquatic plants, the author had two
frog-tadpoles which had not undergone their transformation since
last year (1886). However, the branchiz had disappeared, and the
tadpoles came to the surface of the water to respire air. These
larvee were nevertheless very lively, and their dejections proved that
nutrition was effected in anormal fashion. As the volume of water
and the quantity of food have a marked influence on the develop-
ment of the larve of frogs, the author removed one of these tadpoles
and placed it in a second vessel with aquatic plants. Both vessels
were of ordinary white glass.

The two larve remained very lively without undergoing any
metamorphosis, until, towards the end of last June, a fly (Sarcophaga
carnaria) was placed in the first vessel. After death its body became
covered with white filaments of Saprolegnia ferax. The tadpole,
which had continued very lively up to this time, now soon became
more sluggish in its movements; its body became quickly covered
with filaments of Saprolegnia, and within two days after this infec-
tion it was dead.

Microscopic examination of the Saprolegnia ferax, which covered
the body of the fly, showed that the protoplasm of its filaments was
transformed into thousands of zoospores, which, by means of their
two vibratile cilia, rapidly diffused themselves through the water.
As these zoospores swim about and thus spread themselves through

Miscellaneous. 163

the water, a single dead fly may become a focus of infection for a
great number of aquatic animals (fishes, newts, &c.). The whole
surface of the tadpole above mentioned was covered with Sapro-
legnia, so that death must have been produced by the suppression of
the action of the skin. The second larva, placed in a separate vessel
before the introduction of the fly, remained quite intact.—Séance de
la Soc. Vaudoise des Sct. Nat. July 6,1887; Bibl. Univ. November
15, 1887, p. 492.

On the Significance of Sexual Reproduction.
By Dr. B. Harscuex.

Dr. Hatschek recently lectured upon this subject before the
meeting of German surgeons in Prague.

In the first place he indicated that the most important and pro-
bably original of vital phenomena was assimilation. By the process
of assimilation new living particles (that is to say particles which
in their turn possess the faculty of assimilation) are produced.
Assimilation is, as Hatschek affirms, the sole known mode of produc-
tion of fresh living substance. We see in the Amoebe and other
unicellular organisms that the parent-creature divides into two
daughter-organisms. In the more complex multicellular organisms
reproductive bodies in the form of germs and buds are produced ;
these are developed, and grow into new individuals of the same
kind, In the latter instance, however, the formation of such germs
is reduced to a process of division of the same kind as occurs in the
unicellular organisms, only that in those cases where we have to do
with production of ova, spermatozoa, and buds the portions divided
off are very unequal in size. This difference, however, is due to no
principial distinction.

Besides division, however, the contrary phenomenon occurs in
unicellular organisms, namely the fusion of two originally separate
individuals into a single one. This is the so-called “ conjugation,’
which is very widely diffused among the Monoplastida. In the
multicellular organisms it is the portions characterized as reproduc-
tive bodies that become fused together, therefore the individualities
in their simplest state. The conjugation of the unicellular organisms
represents the process of fecundation, but not the copulation of the
multicellular forms.

The intermixture of the individualities is most generally diffused
throughout the organic world; and although among multicellular
animals we frequently meet with asexual modes of reproduction
(such as gemmation, division with regeneration, and parthenogene-
sis), we find this always only along with sexual reproduction, ¢. e.
alternating therewith.

When we find any process generally occurring in organisms the
question of its significance involuntarily forces itself upon us. We
ask directly, What does this arrangement do for the organism, what
purpose has it for it? After citing and criticizing the views of
Biitschli, Hensen, van Beneden, and Weismann, Hatschek expresses
his own theoretical opinion, namely that in sewual reproduction we
must recognize a remedy against the action of injurious variability.

164 Miscellaneous.

He supports this theory as follows:—In the first place he starts
from the truth, ascertained by the experience of breeders, that a
certain degree of difference between the parent individualities is
most favourable to the result of a crossing. Such differences which
are caused in the organism by the external conditions of life would
evidently be of no service in asexual reproduction. A disease which
made its appearance in an individual which propagated solely by
the method of gemmation would be inherited from generation to
generation and endanger the existence of the entire species. But
if a mingling of the diseased with perfectly healthy protoplasm
(such as must necessarily occur in sexual reproduction) be brought
about, we have not merely the possibility, but even the highest
probability, of a rectification such as can be obtained in no other
way. It is, in Hatschek’s opinion, in furnishing the opportunity
for such rectification that we must find the chief use of the existence
of sexually differentiated individuals among animals and plants.—
Prager mediz. Wochenschrift, No. 46, 1887; Biologisches Central-
blatt, No. 21, January 1, 1888, pp. 654-666.

Notice of two new Branchiopod Crustacea from the Trans-Caspian
Region. By Dr. Atrrep WALTER.

The species described are as follows :—

1. Apus Heeckelii, n. sp.

A, Jamina caudali coniformi, acuminata, incarinata neque spinulosa,
duplo Jongiore quam lata. Sinu postico scuti angulato armatoque
dentibus 30. Ramo longissimo primi pedis angulos scuti exce-
dente. Segmentis posterioribus 16-17 scuto non obtectis, post-
remis 6 apodibus. Colore scuti et corporis in vivo albido flaves-
cente, pedum rosaceo,

Hab. In a desert spring near Karadschabatyr, north of the Lower
Atrek, in the Russian Trans-Caspian.

A female was taken early in May, together with species of
Estheria, Branchipus, and some Cladocera and Ostracoda. The
species belongs to Grube’s second group of Apws, in which there is
a caudal lamina separating the long caudal appendages (with A. pro-
ductus, A. glacialis, &e.). It differs from all known allied species
in the unkeeled and spineless caudal lamina.

2. Artemia asiatica, n. sp.

A. processibus caudalibus digitiformibus, setas 8-10 gerentibus,
antennis primis gracilibus filiformibus, apice setis 3 armatis. An-
tennis secundis crassis, corniformibus, apice acuminatis, duobus
tuberibus non dense setosis ad radicem eminentibus.

Hab. In a salt-spring between Bend-i-nadyr and the well of
Agamet, in the mountain-desert east of Murgab, near the Afghan
boundary.

Female, taken in April 1887. Colour of the living animal tile-
red.—Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. de Moscou, nouv. sér., tome i. (1887),
pp. 924-927,

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

[SIXTH SERIES. }

No. 3. MARCH 1888,

XX.—On a Collection of Reptiles from China.
By Dr. A. Ginruer, F.R.S.

[Plate XII.]

Mr. A. E. Prarr, who is engaged in exploring for Mr. J. H.
Leech the entomological fauna of the interior of China, has
availed himself of the opportunity thus afforded him of col-
lecting the reptiles and fishes of the country near Kiu Kiang,
on the Yantsze river. The reptiles were collected in the
mountains north of Kiu Kiang. Like all Chinese collec-
tions formed at a distance from the coast-line, at some well
ascertained locality, the present is a valuable contribution to
our knowledge of this fanna. The general features of the
reptilian fauna of China are fairly well known; but compa-
ratively few reliable data have been collected which may serve
for a more detailed inquiry into the range of the species, and
lead to a complete knowledge of the manner in which the
tropical fauna gradually merges into that of temperate Asia.

Mr. Pratt, besides, was particularly fortunate in discovering
a most interesting new form of Crotaline snake and in redis-
covering the genus Phyllophis, of which one specimen only
was previously known.

1. Emys Reevest?, Gray.
The ornamental colours of the soft parts are distributed as
follows :—They consist of yellow bands and spots, edged with
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 12

166 Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China.

black; the most conspicuous is a band running from the
upper part of the eye along the upper margin of the neck ;
sometimes it is interrupted in some part of its course, and
generally a continuation of it is visible in front of the eye. A
short curved band between the eye and the tympanum, another
running from the lower part of the eye to below the tympa-
num; an oblong spot at the posterior angle of the mandible.
Tympanum and posttympanic region with curved streaks and
spots. Sides and lower part of the neck with parallel straight
bands, posteriorly broken up into series of spots. In very
young examples these ornamentations are less numerous.

2. Trionyx sinensis, Wiegm.

Three young specimens.

3. Tachydromus septentrionalis, Gthr.

Numerous.

4. Tachydromus Woltert, Fisch.

One specimen.

Notes on the Species of 'Tachydromus.

The lizards of this genus (with the exception of 7’. smarag-
dinus) resemble one another in general appearance so much
as to induce some herpetologists to consider certain characters
on which I had based the distinction of the species to be of
very doubtful specific value. I think the species ean be
readily and with certainty distinguished ; they are based on
characters which in my experience are subject to only excep-
tional variation, and which, slight as they are, must appear
significant enough when they are found to be constant in
specimens from the same locality and combined with one or
more similarly constant characters.

The late Dr. Stoliczka was the first to refuse specific value
to the number of mental scutes and inguinal pores. In his
notes on a Zachydromus from Sikkim (Journ. As. Soc. Beng.
xli. 1872, p. 87), which he identified with the archipelagic
T. sexlineatus and of which he had twenty-five specimens,
he says that he has found four specimens with four chin-
shields, the others having three, and one specimen with two
inguinal pores, the others having three, four, or five. Such
an amount of variation I have not found in any species,
although I examined equally large numbers of individuals of
several species; and in not a single species have I met

Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China. 167

with a variation of the number of the chin-shields *. In all
the numerous specimens of 7’. septentrionalis and T. smarag-
dinus the number of inguinal pores is invariable. More
especially with regard to the true 7’. sealineatus, of which I
have examined some forty examples t, the number of chin-
shields is invariably three and that of inguinal pores very
rarely exceeds two; in three specimens (two from Borneo)
I have observed one pore only.

What follows from these observations is :—

Ist. That the species examined by Stoliczka differs from
the other species of the genus in having a greater number of
inguinal pores and, therefore, in being liable to more frequent
variation in this respect.

2nd. That that species must be distinet from TZ. sealinea-
tus and had better be distinguished by another name—7Z’
stkkimensis.

Specimens of 7’, sealineatus from Khassya, in the British
Museum, have on the whole a somewhat shorter and less
tapering snout, also shorter toes than the typical form, and
approach in these respects 7’. mertdionalis.

This latter species has been placed by Mr. Boulenger
(‘ Lizards,’ i. p. 4) as a synonym of T. sealineatus, but
besides being a less slender species, the four specimens have
one inguinal pore only, like TZ. septentrionalis, in which the
constancy of this character is a remarkable and incontro-
vertible fact.

Of the five species united by Mr. Boulenger (J. c. p. 5)
under the name of 7’. tachydromovdes, T. septentrionalis is the
one the distinctness of which from the Japanese form or
forms can be least impugned. We have now no less than
twenty-seven specimens before us, a most instructive series as
to the value of the characters by which this species has been
defined. Only two of the specimens, from Shanghai, differ
from the others in having a series of small scales intercalated
between the outer pair of large scaled series. According to
Stoliczka’s estimate of the specific characters in Tachydromus
these two specimens should be relegated to a distinct species ;
and if this peculiarity should prove to be constant in the
form inhabiting that district, I myself should be inclined to
separate it from 7. septentrionalis.

Schlegel figures in the ‘Fauna Japonica’ his 7. tachydro-

* One individual of 7. Woltert has three on one and four on the other
side, which, of course, proves nothing, as in every lizard almost any two
contiguous head-shields may be found abnormally confluent.

+ Half of this number belong to the Museum of Genoa, haying been
kindly forwarded to me by the Marquis J. Doria.

12=

168 Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China.

motdes with three inguinal pores and strongly keeled ventral
scutes. I have seen only one specimen from Japan with three
pores, but six others possess only two, and their ventral scutes
are remarkably smooth, only those on the side of the abdo-
men being slightly keeled. Duméril and Bibron also do not
seem to have observed more than two pores in this or any
other species of the genus.

Whether or not 7. amurensis, Ptrs., is distinct from 7.
tachydromoides must be left uncertain until more materials
are collected. I have not seen this form. But I have much
less doubt as to the distinctness of T. Haughtonianus from T.
tachydromoides, on account of the considerable difference in
the number of transverse series of ventral scutes.

Finally, three specimens of 7. Woltert of Fischer show a
remarkable agreement in having a single inguinal pore com-
bined with eight dorsal series, which are composed of scales
of nearly equal size. One specimen is the type from the
Korea, a second forms part of the present collection from Kiu
Kiang, and the origin of the third is unknown. ‘The colora-
tion is also identical, the white lateral band being singularly
bright and well defined.

Thus I distinguish from the materials at present at my
disposal and from the descriptions of authors eight species,
which may be shortly characterized as follows :—

I. Three pairs of chin-shields.
A. Dorsal seales in four series.

1. Inguinal pores three to five; ventral scutes in twelve series. '
T. sikkimensis, sp. n. Sikkim.
2. Inguinal pores two (exceptionally one); ventral scutes in ten
series ............ I. sexlineatus, Daud. Borneo, Java,
Birma, Khassya.
8. Inguinal pore one; ventral scutes in twelve series.
T. meridionalis, Gthr. China.

B. Dorsal scales in eight or nine series, of which the three outer ones
on each side are the largest ; one inguinal pore.
T. smaragdinus, Blgy. Loochoo Is-
lands.

C. Dorsal scales in six series, of which the two middle ones contain
very small scales, and are represented sometimes by one series
only *; one inguinal pore. 7. septentrionalis,Gthr. Kiu Kiang,

Nankin, Ningpo.

* In two specimens from Shanghai a series of small scales is interca-
lated between the outer pair of large scales,

Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China. 169

If. Four pairs of chin-shields.
A. Two or three inguinal pores on each side.
1. Three inguinal pores; dorsal scales in eight series, of which

the two middle are smaller than the rest.
T. amurensis, Ptrs. Amoorland.

2. Two (three) inguinal pores; dorsal scales in six series, those
of the two middle ones smaller than the others; twenty-
two or twenty-three in a longitudinal series between the
BIRT Gaepe eas, cus te ey ok aie T. tachydromoides, Schleg., = T. ja-

ponicus, D. & B. Japan.

3. Two inguinal pores ; dorsal scales in six series; twenty-seven
in a longitudinal series between the axils,

TL. Haughtonianus, Jerd. Assam.

B. One inguinal pore.

Dorsal scales in eight series, subequal in size.
T. Woltert, Fisch. Corea, Kiu Kiang.

5. Lygosoma Reevestt, Gray.

A specimen in the collection has twenty-eight series of
scales round the body, and therefore comes nearest to the
seink which I have described as Humeces modestus. How-
ever, Mr. Boulenger has already stated that the number of
series of scales varies in these lizards from twenty-eight to
thirty-two *. Like My. Boulenger, I am unable to separate
these Chinese scinks from the North-American Z. laterale.

6. Lygosoma elegans, Blgr.

One specimen.

7. Gecko japonicus, D. & B.

Two specimens.

8. Calamaria quadrimaculata, D. & B.

Four adult specimens. Their abdomen is scarlet; all
possess a black, median, subcaudal band, which occupies
neatly the whole width of the posterior subcaudal scutes,
being much narrower anteriorly. ‘Tail very obtuse.

The British Museum possesses also a young specimen
from Hongkong.

9. Simotes chinensis, sp n.
Scales in seventeen rows. Hight upper labials, the fourth

* Thirty-four series of scales, as stated in the ‘Reptiles of British
India, p. 88, for the type of Z. Reevest?, is an error for thirty-two.

170 Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China.

and fifth entering the orbit ; loreal square; one pre- and two
postoculars; anterior chin-shields in contact with four lower
labials. Ventral shields 190, distinctly keeled on the sides ;
subcaudals 63, anal entire. The ground-colour is a light
brownish grey ; trunk crossed by thirteen, tail by four nar-
row, equidistant, black cross bars; these are somewhat
broader on the back than on the sides, and indistinctly edged
with white. A black band from eye to eye and continued
over the fifth and sixth labials. The black arrow-shaped
spot on the neck is well defined. Abdomen with numerous
square black spots, each occupying one half or the whole
of a ventral scute. Subcaudals uniform white.

One young specimen measures 84 inches, the tail being 2
inches long.

10. Coluber rufodorsatus, Cant.
Common.

11. Elaphis dione, Pall.

One specimen.

12. Elaphis sauromates, Pall.

Nine specimens.

13. Zaocys dhumnades, Cant.

Five specimens.

14. Ptyas korros, Reinw.
One specimen.

15. Phyllophis carinata.
Phyllophis carinata, Giinth. Rept. Brit. Ind. p. 295, pl. xxi. fig. B,

The discovery of a second specimen of this singular type
settles the question as to its habitat. Both specimens agree
in every respect; but in the new specimen a fine brown
line begins to be visible in the second half of the body be-
tween the third and fourth outer series of scales, disappearing
near the root of the tail. A pair of similar lines run along
the back of the tail. A series of black spots on each side of
the abdomen is formed by very small specks, one on each
side of each abdominal scute.

16. Cyclophis major, Gthr.
Seven specimens,

Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China, 171

17. Tropidonotus annularis, Hallow.
Common.
18. Tropidonotus tigrinus, Boie.
Very common. |
19. Ophites septentrionalis, Gthr.
One specimen.

20. Lycodon rufozonatus, Cant.
Common.

21. Bungarus semifasciatus, Kuhl.
One specimen.
22. Callophis annularis, Gthr.
One specimen.

23. Halys Blomhoffit, Boie.
Common.

24. Halys acutus, sp.n. (Pl. XII.)

‘This new species may be at once recognized by the upper
part of the extremity of the snout being produced into a short,
flexible, pointed lobe which projects from between the ante-
rior frontal and the rostral shield. The anterior frontals are
small, longer than broad; the posterior very large, inter-
mediate in size between the anterior frontals and the occipi-
tals. Eye surrounded by a ring of small orbitals, of which
those in front are rather elongate; that below the eye is like-
wise long and crescent-shaped, separated by a small postocular
from the superciliary shield. Seven upper labials, of which
the second forms the anterior wall of the antorbital pit, the
third and fourth being the largest. A series of three large
temporal shields occupies the lower part of the temple, the
space between this series and the occipital being covered by
ordinary scales.

Scales strongly keeled, the keels forming a high sharp
ridge on the posterior part of the body. ach scale bears,
besides the keel, on its extremity a pair of very small nodules ;
scales in twenty-one rows. Ventral shields 160; anal entire ;
subcaudals 60, of which the six or twenty anterior may be
single. Extremity of the tail compressed, covered with com-
paratively large vertical scutes, and terminating ina long and
compressed spine.

172 Mr. H. J. Carter on

The colour of the upper parts is brown, each side of the
body being ornamented with a series of large dark-coloured
triangles, the point of each triangle meeting that of the other
side in the median line of the back. Lower parts whitish,
with a series of large rounded black spots on each side and
smaller ones of irregular shape in the middle. The upper
part of the head is uniform black; a sharp line, which runs
from the eye along the middle of the temporal scutes to the
angle of the mouth, dividing the black coloration of the upper
parts from the white of the lower.

This species is very remarkable not only on account of the
rostral lobe, but also for the modification of the scutellation
of its compressed tail. Although this modification cannot in
any way be taken as an initial step in the development of the
rattle of Crotalus, the rattle being a modification of the last
dermal scute only into which the vertebral column is not
prolonged, yet the tail of this species may exercise in a much
smaller degree the same function as in the rattlesnake, and
may be an instrument by which vibrations and sound are
preduced. It is well known also that many innocuous snakes
are able to vibrate the extremity of their tail. To judge
from its size and from the development of its poisonous appa-
ratus this snake must be extremely dangerous.

Three specimens are in the collection, of which the largest
is 46 inches long, the tail measuring 6} inches.

XXI.—On two new Genera alited to Loftusia, from the Kara-
koram Fass and the Cambridge Greensand respectively.
sy H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e.

(Plate XIII]
In the month of December, 1887, Mr. W. Theobald, M.R.A.S.,

late Deputy Superintendent, Geological Survey of India,
submitted for my examination six of the fossils commonly
ealled ‘ Karakoram stones,” which were brought from the
“‘Karakoram Pass,” in the Karakoram range of mountains,
North-east Kashmir, where they were collected by the late
Dr. F. Stoliczka. Five of these are undoubtedly Parkerie ;
but the other, of which, unfortunately, there is only half, is
totally different, and so very like Loftusta in composition,
althongh not in form and structure, that (as will be seen here-
after) 1 have allied it to the latter and proposed for it the

two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 173

term “ Stoliezkiella Theobaldi,” thus coupling two names
well known in the Geological Survey of India.

To the five specimens of Parkeria I will more particularly
refer hereafter; meanwhile let us proceed to the description of

Stoliczkiella Theobaldi, gen. et sp.n. (Pl. XIII. figs. 1-4.)
(Half the specimen.)

General form when entire (according to Mr. Theobald, who
had it cut through the short axis into equal halves) a com-
pressed spheroid ; hence the outline of the half about to be
described represents a hyperbola 1:4 in. high, with a nearly
elliptical base, whose long axis is 23% in. and the short one
135; so that with these dimensions and Mr. Theobald’s state-
ment, viz. that the other half was the same in size, the
entire shape of the fossil may be easily assumed (Pl. XIII.
fig. 1).

Surface of this half remarkable for the presence ofa star-like
radiation in relief (fig. 1, a), of which the centre is on one side
of the summit of the hyperbola, and thus eccentric, so that
its axis would pass obliquely through the base; but whether
this “ eceentric”’ position is natural or caused by the situ-
ation of the sectional line or other circumstances, such as
rock-contortion &c., the half fossil does not enable me to
determine; again, the centre of the “star-like” radiation
is oval in its circumference, with the long axis directed
obliquely across the half fossil on one side of the summit,
and this is all that can now be stated of its position with
relation to the rest of the fossil when entire. This stelli-
form group consists of a great number of narrow lanceolate
segments, in relief, which, radiating from a central point,
vary in length and size under 7} in. long, while they
are shorter and more or less overlap each other about the
centre, as they le upon the convexity of the fossil, indica-
ting that they have been successively developed (figs. 1 and
3). Beyond the ends of the “segments” of this stelliform
portion come a great number of lozenge-shaped_ projections,
more or less in juxtaposition, which seem to represent the
external ends of internal ‘‘ segments,” and in their tessellated
arrangement, circumscribed by obliquely intercrossing linear
grooves, which separate them, simulate the surface of a fir-
cone (fig. 1, 0). ‘These projections are only partially scattered
over the surface, as they are interrupted by the presence of a
large quantity of foreign material (fig. 1, ¢¢), which in many
places occupies so much ot the fossil as to frequently insulate

174 Mr. H. J. Carter on

the lozenge-shaped projections and thus destroy their con-
tinuity (fig. 1, d). In composition the segments consist of
clouded, striated, granular calespar of a grey colour ; but there
is a small fragment of polygonal cell-tissue near the centre (of
which the divisions are 1-900th in. in diameter), which not
only leads to the inference that the granulated condition of the
calespar composing the segments generally might. have origin-
ated in this way, but points out that this can only be decided
by a specimen where the structure generally is better pre-
served than in the present instance. On the other hand, the
brown foreign material which intervenes between the projec-
tions and is composed of foraminiferal detritus also presents,
where weathered, a granular character on the surface. So
that, in fact, the form of the calcareous development may be
said to be struggling to make its appearance through the fora-
miniferal detritus.

Turning to the dase of the cone or half-specimen (fig. 2), we
find that it presents an indistinct radial structure of the “ seg-
ments,” the axisof which is alsoeccentric and rather towards one
end of the ellipse (fig. 2,a), on the surface of which the obliquely
cut ends of the segments in juxtaposition here and there, of a
lozenge-shape (fig. 2, 6), indicate that the general structure of
the fossil is foretold by that on the surface ; while the whole
is more or less cut up and thus obscured by the presence of
the foraminiferal detritus, which not only separates the seg-
ments longitudinally in the form of straggling, unequal,
thread-like accumulations, but traverses them in all direc-
tions in more or less delicate ones, swelling out here and there
into larger masses as on the surface (fig. 2, ccc).

Thanks to the fine polish which the lapidary has given
this basal plain, one can see by strong light, when well con-
densed and reflected, under microscopic power the minute ele-
ments of which it is composed, and these consist of the above-
mentioned clouded grey calespar and the brown foraminiferal
detritus ; the former pervaded by the faint remnants of what
appears to have been a reticulated membrano-tubular structure,
and the latter (as seen under the microscope) consisting of a
yellowish substance of a tangled thready nature, infinitely
divided dendritically and reticulatingly, like veined marble or
frothy, filiferous protoplasm (fig. 4), densely charged with
more or less broken-down tests of minute Foraminifera and a
great number of opaque scarlet spherules (fig. 4, 6), following
the grooves between the “segments” and those circum-
scribing the lozenge-shaped projections on the surface, con-
trasting strongly in colour with the whitish-grey clouded cale-
spar. ‘This appears to be identical with Brady’s ‘ accessory

two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 175

structures” in Loftusia persica, which he has aptly com-
pared to “a piece of fine sponge” (Phil. Trans. 1870, p. 745)
—the largest foraminiferal test seen being discoid and about
1-164th in. in diameter (fig. 2d) and the scarlet spherules
about 1-1500th, but very variable in this respect, from circum-
stances which will appear hereafter.

As might be expected, the foraminiferal detritus presents
a great number of minute and microscopic forms which appear
to be chiefly discoid, among which are some like Déscorbina
and Planorbulina, wherein the great thickness of the marginal
cord and ribs or intercameral septa is out of all proportion to
the size of the cavities of the test; but they are one and all
more or less broken down in a manner that evidences assimi-
lative digestion ; so that it becomes impossible for any one
but an expert to say what their original forms were, and thus
point out the families or genera to which they respectively
belong; while fragments of the marginal cord and inter-
cameral septa, often crossed by transverse strie like the
marginal cord and of tubular appearance, are plentifully scat-
tered through the whole substance, which fragments might be
mistaken for the remains of structure proper to the fossilized
animal, were they not occasionally connected (that is a portion
of the striated cord with a bit of the intercameral septum
attached to it), so as to reveal their true nature.

But these fragments and the number of foraminiferal tests
mixed up with the striated granules of calespar and the
tangled thread-like ‘‘ yellow substance ”’ produce a confusion
of material in which it becomes difficult to distinguish the
indistinctly marked “ fragments ”’ of the proper animal.

Still of all these parts the most interesting are the opaque
scarlet spherules (fig. 4,5), which are not only so numerously
scattered throughout the mass as in some places to give it a
reddish hue, but appear in many instances ¢v the chambers of
the foraminiferal tests themselves (fig. 5), thus evidencing
the source from which they were originally derived, as I
shall more satisfactorily show in the “ Observations”’ that
will be appended to this description; while in many places
they may be seen in linear or reticular arrangement indicative
of having been in a tubular structure or investment of the
yellow substance, although nothing but the faintest tinge of
this remains, so that it might have been no more than a simple
line of protoplasm (fig. 4, a).

Loc. Karakoram Pass, Karakoram range of mountains.
“The so-called ‘ Karakoram Stones,’ 2. e. corals, occur in
dark shales below the limestone, which are capped by a yel-
lowish limestone, well bedded, but of unascertained age :”

176 Mr. H. J. Carter on

such is the only remark that accompanied them, which is
extracted from the late Dr. F. Stoliczka’s diary, made on the
“17th jJune, 1874,” barely two days before his death, for
which he was then sickening (‘ Scientific Results of the
Second Yarkand Mission,’ published by order of the Govern-
ment of India, Calcutta, 1879). Would that he had lived
to have written more!

Obs. With only half the fossil it may at first appear pre-
sumptuous to endeavour to establish a new genus, but with
the above data it will appear to those who are acquainted
with the structure and composition of Loftusta persica to be
otherwise; at the same time, if this be objected to, then we
must regard the description as “ provisional,” for under no
other circumstances can the facts connected with this appa-
rently unique specimen be recorded.

It may be learnt from the above statements that the fossil
is composed to a great extent of foraminiferal detritus or sea-
bottom, and thus it may be assumed that the Foraminifera
were taken in by the animal for nutritive purposes; while the
whole is totally different both m general form and internal
structure from any species of Foraminifera that has been made
known.

Comparing its composition with that of Loftusta persica, it
will be found that the two are almost identical; thus, setting
aside the misleading resemblance to Alveolina &c. in outward
form and the ‘lamino-spiral” development in Loftusta
persica, we have absolutely nothing left to identify it with
Alveolina or any other evident form of Foraminifera; while
the difference in size of the largest recorded specimen, viz. 3
in. long by 14 in. broad, so far exceeds that of any known
specimen of the Foraminifera, that it alone is almost sufficient
to negative such a supposition. Hence there can be no
objection on this score to allying the Karakoram fossil to
that of Persia, viz. Loftusia persica, on which account it
becomes necessary to create a new family for Loftusia
persica and Stolrczkiella Theobaldi that may be termed
“* Loftusiidee.””

It is not my object here to go at length into the minute
structure of Loftusta persica, for that has been described and
illustrated by Mr. H. B. Brady, in the ‘ Philosophical Trans-
actions’ for 1869 (vol. clix. p. 739), in a way which does not
require repetition ; but there are one or two points in con-
nexion with S. Theobaldi which are of great interest as bearing
not only upon the identity of composition in Loftusia persica
and Stoliczkiella Theobaldi, but on the propagative elements
of the Foraminifera generally ; I allude more particularly to

two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 177

the presence of the “ opaque scarlet spherules,” which are as
abundant in ZL. persica as in S. Theobald, and to be seen in
both in the chambers of foraminiferal tests (from which they
all originally come) as well as dispersed through the substance
of the body generally (figs. 5, a, and 4, 6). I could not
specify the kind of test in which they appear in S. 77 heobaldi,
for the fragments are too much broken down for recognition ;
but in the microscopic slice of Loftusta persica, about 2 in.
long by 1 in. in diameter, which Mr. H. B. Brady, F.R.S.
&c., kindly gave me several years ago, the instances are both
clear and numerous, among which I have*marked one for
observation of a discoid form in which four or five of the
chambers respectively present an opaque scarlet spherule
(fig. 5), and another, a Zextularva, in which ten of the cham-
bers on one side and upwards of the same number on the
other each present an opaque scarlet spherule; so that there
can be no doubt whatever that in both S. Theobaldi and L.
persica the opaque scarlet spherules come from the chambers
of foraminiferal tests, as above stated, and thus are to be
regarded as foreign material in both respectively. And here
the difference in size of these scarlet spherules, to which I
have already alluded, may be explained, viz. by the spherule
when large often presenting the appearance of being com-
posed of a great number of much smaller ones of the same
kind in a spherical capsule; so that the scarlet mass, both in
the chambers and out of them, may not only when breaking
up present an irregular form, but the opaque scarlet body
may vary very much in diameter.

That these scarlet bodies are reproductive particles may be
learnt from what Max Schultze described and illustrated in
recent species in 1854 and 1857, all of which was summarized
and illustrated by Dr. Carpenter in 1862 (“ Introduction to
the Study of the Foraminifera,” Ray Soc. Publ. p. 37 &c. and
pl. xiv.), while all was confirmed by myself, not only in recent
but in fossil forms, in 1861 (‘ Annals,’ vol. viii. pp. 318, 325,
and 451, pl. xvu. figs. 12 and 13, 14 and 15, and 1, 0, respec-
tively).

The beautifully infiltrated specimens by which the latter
was confirmed I have still by me, for at the time they were
obtained, now thirty-six years ago, I ground down their
surfaces, covered them with balsam, and attached them
to glass slips, through which their minute structure, from
its brilliant colours and clear definition, can even now be
seen not only as well as ever, from its imperishable nature,
but more satisfactorily than in the recent specimen, the shell-
structure remaining pure opaque white, the tubular structure

178 Mr. H. J. Carter on

between the chambers being filled with bright ochraceous
yellow matter, and the opaque scarlet spherules in the cham-
bers of the central plane—especially brilliant in Orbztotdes
dispansa, but less so in Nummulites Ramondi, from not being
so highly coloured (that is, rather brownish), and being imbed-
ded in the clear calespar filling one of the central plane of
chambers, where they are also a little translucent and separated
—look like the “roe of a herring;” so that, but for these
specimens, I should never have realized the nature of these
bodies either in Stoliczhiella Theobaldi or Loftusia persica.
I have already alluded to the fragments of marginal cord and
intercameral septa scattered throughout the body-substance of
both these specimens, in which, from the absence of stria on
the calespar in the microscopic slice of Loftusta persica, they
are much more evident than in the Karakoram specimen,
where, on the other hand, all the grains of this mineral are
striated (that is, present the lines of cleavage), and thus by
intercrossing more or less obscure their outlines.

At this period I received from my kind friend Dr. J.
Millar, F.L.S. &e., several specimens of Parkeria that had
been obtained from the Cambridge Greensand, both massive
and in their microscopic sections, among which was one
(noticed by Dr. Millar as different from the rest) which proved
on examination to be a species of Loftusta, but so unlike
Loftusia persica and Stoliczkiella Theobaldi that it must form
the type of a third genus of the family Loftusiide, for which
I would propose the name of ‘Millarella,” and for the speci-
men that of Millarella cantabrigiensis, after the friend who
gave it to me and the locality from which it was obtained *.

Millarella cantabrigtensis, gen. etsp.n. (Pl. XIII. figs. 6-8.)

General form subspherical, with a small, irregular cup-like,
shallow excavation about 4-8ths of an inch in diameter at one
end (? accidental)+. Consistence hard and earth-like, not crys-
talline. Surface very rough and irregular, unevenly granu-
liferous throughout. Granulations of three sizes, viz. small,
minute, and microscopic, the former of a brown colour charged

* T was writing this paper, viz. about the 8th January, 1888, and on
the 19th, after eleven days’ illness of bronchitis, Dr. Millar died. Then
lost Natural History one of her ablest advocates and I one of my best
and dearest friends!

+ This now appears to have been the place where the organism was
originally attached to some submarine object (see concluding part of
footnote, p. 181).

two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 179

with foraminiferal detritus, the minute dark green particles
consisting of glauconite, and the microscopic ones of fine
white silico-calcareous sand, in which the others are imbedded.
From the margin of the cup-like excavation there is an
indistinct linear radiating arrangement of the larger granu-
lated projections, which extends for a short distance outwards,
where it becomes lost among the irregular granulations of the
surface, which is amorphous, that is, without any pattern.

Internally the composition is the same, only the detail ren-
dered more evident by the polished surfaces of the pieces and
the mounted microscopical section, where the ‘ brown-
coloured”’ material is seen to be literally crammed with fora-
miniferal detritus, consisting of minute foraminiferal tests of
various forms and sizes, chiefly Globigerina and Orbulina
(? Globigerina-ooze) more or less broken down (fig. 8), in some
of whose chambers may be seen glauconite (fig. 8, dd) and in
others the opaque scarlet spherules above mentioned (fig. 8),
the instances of the latter being so numerous and the dis-
persed spherules (fig. 8, g) so abundant in some places as to
impart a red tint to the surrounding material; also various
forms of sponge-spicules (fig. 8,c) and a large quantity of
(comparatively large) glauconite grains (fig. 8, e), which,
from what has been just stated, appear to originate in the
chambers of the foraminiferal tests, although from subsequent
segregation they often present no particular form. I also
notice in many places little masses of material like the frothy
yellow substance described in Stoliczkiella Theobaldi, only of
a white colour, looking like the broken-down remains of
germinal tests about to be assimilated or discharged.

As regards structure, all that can be learnt from the sec-
tions is that, on the surface of the transverse one close to
the ‘‘cup-like excavation,” the material is so condensed in
the centre as to occupy a circular space about 3-12ths in. in
diameter, which is continued upwards through the axis of the
fossil, extending outwards in a less condensed state, and then
followed by a great number of little pits or vacuities (interstices
of a reticulated structure, figs. 7band8 a), which, although very
irregular both in size and position, shadow forth a tendency
to circumscribe circular divisions of more condensed mate-
rial, each about 1-16th in. in diameter (the pits and the con-
densed material corresponding with the large granulated
projections on the surface of the fossil and their intervals).
A little higher up (that is, in the centre of the fossil) the
mounted microscopic section presents the same characters
without any appearance of ‘‘axial condensation;”’ that is, the
“¢ circular divisions’ are continued to the centre, about which

180 Mr. H. J. Carter on

they are much more defined and uniform (fig. 6, a), but lose
this again towards the circumference, where the linear dispo-
sition of the “ pits” (fig. 6, 6) tends to indicate that they are
transverse sections of a columnar structure which on all
sides bends outwards towards the circumference. ‘This radia-
tion is more particularly shown by the surface of the section
through the line of union between the seventh and eighth
parts of the fossil in this direction, of which the eighth part
or crown is unfortunately absent, while the other parts when
all put together give the “ subspherical”’ form mentioned.
When themounted microscopic slice from the middleis viewed
through a }-inch focus the circular spaces or divisions are seen
to be united by intercommunicating extensions (fig. 7, bb) of
the more condensed brown material, which, being without the
foraminiferal detritus, and thus better seen, becomes resolved,
under a power of five hundred diameters, into minute brown
granules. I should also have mentioned, however, that in the
midst of the foraminiferal detritus there are the remains of a
fungoid matted structure, only extremely fine and minute, com-
posed of white, opaque, apparently solid, branched, interunited
and tortuous filaments, about 1-3000th in. in diameter, which
thus also ought to have been inserted among the elements
represented in the illustration, fig. 8. Size of fossil, when all
the parts are put together, about 1} in. in diameter, and, as
before stated, subspherical in shape, or like that of a Parkeria®.

* T have also three other specimens from the Cambridge Greensand, of
the same nature as Millarella, in which this fungoid filamentous struc-
ture is more or less evident, viz.:—1l, about } in. in diameter, globular,
with uneven earthy surface, composed of white chalky substance charged
with the usual foraminiferous detritus and permeated by a meandering,
defined, tortuous structure of a yellowish tint, entirely made up of the
same kind of filament as that noticed in Millarella, forming altogether in
amount about half as much as the white chalky substance; 2, another
specimen about the same size and similarly composed, but in which the
meandering development is not evident and the filamentous structure not
so plain, while the surface is regularly tuberculated with a brown material,
which appears to be nothing more than a condensed or hardened state of
the foraminiferal detritus of the interior, so that difference in fossiliza-
tion may have to be taken into account in these instances; and 3, a
specimen which forms the nucleus or support upon which a Parkerian
structure has been built. This consists of a slightly fusiform, conical,
solid cylinder, in composition like the last specimen mentioned, about 14
in. long and 9-24ths in. in its greatest diameter, conical at one end and
obtuse at the other, which appears to have been broken off from an
original attachment. Be this as it may, however, this cylindrical form
has been overgrown by a Parkerian development on all parts except the
extremities, viz. the conical and the obtuse ends, to the extent of half an
inch, so that until the spheroidal mass thus produced was cut through
the whole looked like a globular Parkeria. Hence it is interesting to find

two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 181

Loc, Cambridge Greensand.

Obs. Although in general form this fossil might be easily
mistaken for a Parkeria, the total absence of all distinct tubu-
liferous structure both externally and internally, together with
the quantity of foraminiferal detritus in its composition, is
quite sufficient to point out the difference. I have alluded to
the presence of glauconite in the chambers of some of the
foraminiferal tests, and inferred that all the particles of this
mineral originated in this way, although, when increasing in
size, assuming forms which are totally unlike a foraminiferal
test ; but that they are so may be learnt from an examination
of the green particles generally of the ‘‘ Greensand,’’—to which
it is curious to add that this is going on at the present time in
the Globigeriniferous sand of the bed of the Atlantic (see
“‘ Deep-sea Sponges dredged on board H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine,’ ”
‘ Annals,’ 1876, vol. xviil. p. 474, under “ Black Grains ”’);
while it is also remarkable that glauconite is altogether absent
in my specimens of Loftusia persica and only seen in very
small quantity in Stoliczkiella Theobaldi.

What the nature of the animal of the Loftusiide may have
been it is difficult to conjecture further than that, in all three
genera, it must have had the power of enclosing foreign
material like the Amaba, and therefore its substance must
have been rhizopodous, hence the absence of all wadl/ indica-
ting tubulation. Again, the broken-down forms of the tests
mighthave been both for nutriment and skeletal purposes. ‘The
rhizopodous character of both Sponges and Foraminifera afford
examples of this, ex gr. my genus Holopsamma (‘ Annals,’
1885, vol. xv. p. 211) and the arenaceous foraminiferal tests,
in both of which the plasmic sarcode or protoplasm builds up
foreign material into the specific form which the apparently
identical simple substance is destined to produce. But here all
identification of the Loftusiide with the Sponges and typical
Foraminiiera seems to cease, although there is a great resem-
blance between Brady’s ‘ Syringammina fragillissima”’
(‘ Challenger’ Report on Foraminifera, vol. ix., text, p. 242)
and Millarella cantabrigiensis, especially in illustration “ a,”’
but not in the tubular structure ‘‘c”’ (woodcuts), so that we
must look still further for a nearer analogy.

Undoubtedly the same sarcodic structure in Loftusta per-
sica which took in foreign material presents in the fossil a

that the Parkeria not only grew upon the Millarella, but that the latter
presents signs in its obtuse end of having originally been attached to some
submarine object, which would seem to be not uncommon, for there are
three more instances of it in my cabinet.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol.i. 13

182 . Mr. H. J. Carter on

membrano-tubular-labyrinthic structure (see Brady’s illustra-
tion, 7. c. pl. Ixxix. figs. 1-3), remnants of which can, I think,
be faintly seen in the more Eonmeed substance of Siokezbdalla
Theobald’, but not in Miltarella cantubrigiensis, where the
brown substance alone represents the form without any wall.
But larger fragments of foraminiferous tests in the two former
and longer sponge-spicules than the diameter of the sarcodic
divisions in the latter exist as in sponge- -tissue after it has
become hardened; so that one might infer that when they
were taken in this tissue was in a plastic amoeboid state.
And therefore all that I can conjecture of the nature of the
animal substance of the Loftusiide is that it was a solid
plasma, like that of the &thalium, which, during its active
state, is capable of assuming every form, massive and reticulate,
that can be conceived, at the same time that it can and does
take in any particles of foreign material that suit its purpose ;
while, like the other Myxomycetes which present apparently
thie Game simple protoplasmic substance during their active
lite, each protoplasm is destined to end in the : specific form
which it was intended to develop.

PARKERIA, Carp., 1869.

With reference to Parkeria I would only add, after the
excellent paper written by Hips H. A. Nicholson on this
fossil (( Annals,’ Jan. 1888, p. 1 &c.), that as there appears
to be more than one British species and Prof. Martin Duncan
in his Memoir makes of those from the Karakoram Pass
which he examined several species and two genera (‘ Scien-
tific Results of the Second Yarkand Mision,’ Calcutta, 1879,

. 10), it seems to me, as with Loftusia persica of Brady,
1879, ‘desirable that it should have a family name, for which
I would propose a Parkeriidee,” which, being but a patronymic
of Carpenters “Parkeria,” established for that species and
genus in 1869, when he published his beautifully illustrated
description ot this fossil in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions’
(vol. clix. p. 721), should take precedence of Duncan’s
“ Syringospheeride ” of 1879 (that is ten years after), esta-
blished tor the * Karakoram Stones,” which we now know to
be Parkerie, not only from what Prof. Nicholson has stated
from ocular demonstration (‘ Annals,’ @.¢. p. 11), but from
what I have learned from an examination of the five speci-
mens of these ‘ Stones’ mentioned at the commencement of
this paper, some of which are identical with Prof. Duncan’s
representations,

I cannot agree with Prof. Nicholson in his statement that

two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 183

the “tubuli” do not present any “ transverse internal parti-
tions,’ as I have a polished section of Purkerta which Dr.
Millar gave me, on which, here and there, these appear to me
to be distinctly evident, and in a section through the centre
of one of the Parkerte from the Karakoram Pass I also dis-
tinctly saw one in a portion of the tubuliferous structure
which had been raised above the polished surface by etching
with dilute nitric acid, while at the same time I could see
nothing in this section particularly different from that of
Parkeria, Carp , except that the lapidification is much more
compact and crystalline and that there is an appearance of a
darker, tree-like portion branching from the centre to the cir-
cumference, which seems to arise from the presence of the
bundles of longer-tubed structure having been bent into this
form, also seen, but in a straighter one, in the same kind
of polished section of the Cambridge Parkeria.

It is also worth noticing that Loftusia and Parkeria are
found together both in the “ Greensand ”’ of Cambridge and
at the Karakoram Pass, in Asia.

Provisional Characters of the Families Parkeriidee
and Lofttusiidee.

Parkeriide.

Minute or basal structure consisting of tubuli intercom-
municating freely with each other in juxtaposition, pierced by
larger tubes (the zooidal tubes of Nicholson, /. ¢.), which
radiate from the centre to the circumiference. Specimens
generally nucleated by, or growing upon, a foreign body.

Loftusiide.

Minute or basal structure consisting of a guasi-membrano-
labyrinthic, hollow, reticulated fabric charged with foramini-
ieral detritus.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIII.

Fig.1. Stoliczkiella Theobaidi, nat. size. Half the specimen. Lateral
view, Showing :—a, stelliform group of segments on the surface ;
b, external ends of internal segimentation; ec, foraminiferal
detritus; d, insulated ends of internal segmentation; e, portion
of fossil broken out.

Fig. 2. The same. Base, nat. size. aa, lines of segmentation; 3,
lozenge-shaped ends of truncated segments; cec, foraminiferal
detritus represented by the dark shade ; d, discoid foraminiferal

test.
13*

184 Mr. G. E. Mason on a new Earth- Snake

Fig. 3. The same. Outline of the group of segments on the surface, nat.
size. Drawn to measurement as if flat.

Fig. 4. The same. Portion of the yellow froth-like substance, greatly
magnified. a, thread-like extension of the same branched and
more or less charged with the opaque scarlet spherules in line;
b, scarlet spherules dispersed. Diagrammatic.

Fig.5. Discoid foraminiferal test, much magnified, showing scarlet
spherules in the chambers. a, spherule. From a microscopic
mounted longitudinal section of Loftusia persica. Nat. size of
test 1-164th inch in diameter. Diagrammatic.

Fig. 6. Millarella cantabrigiensis. Microscopic slice from the centre of the
specimen, nat. size, indicating the transverse diameter of the
fossil. a, structure in the centre, composed of more or less
circular divisions interunited circumferentially by extensions of
the same material: 5, pits or vacuities indicating the intervals
between the “extensions” where the “circular divisions” are
not well-defined.

Fig. 7. The same. Portion of the centre, much magnified, to show the
mode of union of the circular divisions by the intervening “ ex-
tensions (reticulated structure).” a, circular division ; 6, inter-
vening extensions. Diagrammatic.

Fig. 8. The same. Circular division, still more magnified, to show the
character of the foraminiferal detritus with which it is charged.
a, “intervening extensions (reticulated structure) ;” 66, fora-
miniferal tests; c, sponge-spicules; d, discoid test, whose
chambers are filled with glauconite; e, amorphous portion of
glauconite ; f, test in whose chambers respectively there is a
scarlet spherule; g, dispersed spherules.

XXII.—Description of a new Earth-Snake of the Genus
Silybura from the Bombay Presidency, with Remarks on
other little-known Uropeltide. By Grorae E. Mason.

Stlybura Phipsonii, sp. n.

Head smaller than in S. nilgherriensis; snout rather
pointed, rostral shield nearly twice as long as the vertical and
one third the length of the head, convex above, produced
back but not separating the nasals; frontals somewhat
smaller than nasals, broad below, very narrow upwards
and only just meeting in front of the vertical; eye rather
large, lying in the front of the ocular shield and occu-
pying a third of its size; vertical diamond-shaped, longer
than broad ; caudal disk flat, not well defined, twice as long
as broad ; the terminal scute large, broad, and rough, mode-
rately bicuspid, the caudal scales prominently 2—4-keeled ; no
chin-shields between the first pair of lower labials and the
ventrals ; scales in 17 rows round the middle of the body and

trom the Bombay Presidency. 185

neck; ventrals twice as large as the scales of the adjoining
series, from 146 to 148; subcaudals 11 pairs. Length 9-11
inches, girth 14 inch. Black above, iridescent, with small,
irregular, much scattered, yellowish-white spots; upper and
lower labials yellow, a very narrow bright yellow line com-
mencing at the angle of the mouth and continued for 1} inch
along the tiunk, gradually diminishing to mere spots, which
mingle with those scattered over the body; sometimes the
presence of the line may be detected along the entire length
of the body by an occasional group of confluent spots ; belly
uniform black, or with a few indistinct yellowish-white spots,
a very perfect bright yellow band along each side of the tail
and crossing the vent.

Hab. Bombay ghats.

For the series of specimens upon which the above descrip-
tion is founded I am indebted to my friend Mr. H. M. Phip-
son, Honorary Secretary of the Bombay Natural History
Society. ‘There are in the British Museum two snakes with
155 ventrals collected by Dr. Leith in the Bombay Presi-
dency (the exact locality is not mentioned) which probably
belong to the above species, but unfortunately they are in
such indifferent condition that I cannot determine this point
with certainty. I was inclined to endorse the opinion ex-
pressed by Col. Beddome (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) xvii.
p- 17) that the Bombay form was identical with S. nilgherri-
ensis, though a very characteristic variety, but after much
consideration and the comparison of the specimens at my
disposal with an extensive series of that form and its varieties
I have come to the conclusion that, according to the received
notions of a species, this must be considered distinct and not
merely a variety. Independently of the much smaller head,
the rostral is convex above and pointed, and chin-shields are
wanting between the lower labials and the ventrals. The
caudal disk is also longer and proportionally narrower, while
the scales contain a greater number of keels.

Silybura nilgherriensis, var. picta.
Stlybura nilgherriensis, var. picta, Beddome, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
(5) xvii, p. 16.

This variety is founded on a single specimen collected at
Peermaad, North ‘Travancore, between 3000 and 4000 feet
elevation. In collections I have recently received from the
same locality this form is represented by numerous adult and
young examples which tend to show that the coloration is
very variable, many of the specimens differing greatly in this

186 Mr. G. E. Mason on a new Earth-Snake.

respect from the type. In one instance it is orange-yellow
above each scale, with a fine black margin; a few entirely
black scales are scattered over the anterior and posterior
portions of the trunk ; other specimens present markings such
as were described originally by Beddome, except that the
black scales are in series of from two to four and form irregular
spots distributed over the back ; and again in another example
the groups of spots flow into one another, thus showing a ten-
dency to form cross bars. The coloration of the young 1s
somewhat remarkable; a yellowish hue is predominant, the
scales having a very mane black margin, each one of the cen-
tral dorsal series black, forming a conspicuous line which
extends from the head to the caudal disk ; the line is occasion-
ally interrupted by a scale wanting the black mark ; an almost
undistinguishable dark central spot on the five rows of scales
on each side of the dorsal series. The colour of the belly
differs little from the type in all my specimens, aiternate jet-
black and irregular, broad, orange-coloured blotches or cross
bars always being more or less present. The ventrals vary
from 146 to 156.

Rhinophis sanguineus.

Rhinophis sanguineus, Beddome, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1868, p. 227,and Ann.
& Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) xvii. p. 8; Giinther, Rept. Brit. In lia, p. 186,

Rhinophis mucrolepis, Beddome, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1868, p. 227, eum
icon, (young ).

I have specimens in my collection from the Wullingy
forests near Palghat which do not coincide with the diagnosis
given by Beddome and Ginther ; the ventrals vary from 166
to 183 only and the caudal scales are somewhat prominently
keeled on the upper surface of the tail. It is a matter of
uncertainty whether they should be regarded as conspecific,
and I have refrained trom doing so until I can characterize

them more fully.

Melanophidium punctatum.

ee eam punctatum, Beddome, Madr. Journ. Med. Science, Dec.

In addition to the remarkable changes of the horny terminal
scute of the tail noticed by Beddome (/. ¢.) and by Ginther
in the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society,’ 1875, p. 230,
T have observed it furnished with three well-marked parallel
ridges above, each terminating in a spine, side by side, the
central one being of far greater length and the ridge more
acute. ‘The specimens, which were collected at Peermaad,
North Travancore, 4000 feet elevation, are of unusually large
size, adults being 234 inches long, w ith a girth of 24 inches,

Mr. G. A. Boulenger on new Brazilian Batrachians. 187

XXIII.—Deseriptions vu new Brazilian Batrachians.
By G. A. BoULENGER.

Leptodactylus prognathus.

Tongue oval, nicked behind. Vomerine teeth in straight
series behind the choanee. Snout depressed, acuminate, very
prominent, slightly longer than the diameter of the orbit ; no
canthus rostralis; nostril nearer the tip of the snout than the
eye; interorbital space a little narrower than the upper eye-
lid; tympanum two thirds the diameter of the eye. Fingers
moderate, first much longer than second ; toes moderate, not
fringed; subarticular tubercles well developed; two small
metatarsal tubercles, inner oval, outer smaller and round.
When the hind limb is stretched forwards along the body, the
tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the anterior border of the
orbit. Back with a few irregular, smooth, flat warts; a
dorso-lateral glandular fold; a ventral discoidal fold. Greyish
olive above, with blackish spots; a blackish cross band be-
tween the eyes; a blackish band from the end of the snout to
the eye; a whitish band, between the latter and the blackish
margin of the upper lip, extends from below the nostril to the
arm ; tympanum chestnut-brown, with a linear white border ;
glandular lateral fold whitish ; limbs with blackish cross
bands; lower surface white. Male with an external vocal
sac on each side of the throat. From snout to vent 33
millim.

Very closely allied to LZ. typhonius, Daud., which differs,
however, in the numerous longitudinal dorsal folds.

A single half-grown male specimen from Rio Grande do
Sul, through Dr. v. Ihering.

The species recently named LZ. glandulosus by Cope is
identical with that previously described by Beettger as L.
diptysx.

Eupemphix nana.

Snout very feebly prominent; interorbital space broader
than the upper eyelid; tympanum scarcely visible. Fingers
moderate, first not extending beyond second; toes moderate,
quite free, not fringed, tips obtuse; two very small, oval,
blunt metatarsal tubercles; no tarsal tubercle, no tarsal fold.
When the hind limb is stretched forwards along the body
the tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the tympanum or the
eye. Skin smooth; no parotoids ; a flat, oval, lumbar gland,
as in Paludicola Bibronit. Greyish above, with symmetrical

188 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on new Brazilian Batrachians.

dark markings, viz. a Y-shaped one between the eyes and a
&-shaped one on the back, and cross bands on the limbs; a

deep black pink-edged ocellus on the lumbar gland; a black
temporal band, and a series of black spots on the outer edge
of the limbs; lower parts dirty white, throat closely marbled
with brown; belly of female uniform, of male also marbled
like the throat. Male with an internal subgular vocal sac
and brown rugosities on the inner side of the inner finger.

From snout to vent 18 millim.

Two specimens (¢ ?) from Lages, Santa Catharina, col-
lected by Hr. Michaélis.

The genus Eupemphix, Stdr. (=Engystomops, Espada),
must, on account of the absence of teeth, be referred to the
family Bufonide, although it is in every other respect iden-
tical with Faludicola, to which it stands in the same relation
as Pseudophryne to Crinia; this shows that frog-families
founded upon the presence or absence of teeth are artificial
associations. I am acquainted with four species of Hupem-
phizx, which may be distinguished as follows :—

A. No tarsal tubercle ; a lumbar gland ; skin smooth.
a. Metatarsal tubercles large, compressed, sharp- =
edged: hic Meera a tao: seeing esate E. Nattereri, Stdr.
b. Metatarsal tubercles small, blunt .......... E. nana, Bley.
B, A conical tubercle on the middle of the inner
edge of the tarsus; no lumbar gland; upper
parts warty.
a. Tarso-metatarsal articulation not reaching
the end of the snout; tympanum hidden.. JL. pustulosa, Cope.
b, Tarso-metatarsal articulation reaching be-
yond the end of the snout ; tympanum more
MEMIOSO“CISTINCUS Oe ats aca: viensate sce ere te E. stentor, Wispada.

Hyla bivittata.

Tongue subcircular, notched and free behind. Vomerine
teeth in two slightly oblique transverse series between the
choane, which are of moderate size. Head moderate, as long
as broad ; snout rounded, as long as the diameter of the orbit ;
canthus rostralis obtuse, loreal region not very oblique ;
nostril nearer the end of the snout than the eye; interorbital
space broader than the upper eyelid; tympanum moderately
distinct, two fifths the diameter of the eye. Fingers webbed
at the base; no projecting rudiment of pollex; toes two-
thirds webbed ; disks a little smaller than the tympanum ;
no tarsal fold. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the ante-
rior border of the eye or the end of the snout. Skin smooth ;
belly and lower surface of thighs with large granules.

Mr. G. A. Boulenger on new Brazilian Batrachians. 189

Greyish above, with two parallel darker bands along the
back, more distinct in the young than in the adult, widening
anteriorly and sometimes uniting on the interorbital region ;
upper surfaces more or less abundantly dotted with black ;
a dark line on each side from the end of the snout to the
shoulder, passing through the nostril and the eye and above
the tympanum ; thighs and lower surfaces colourless. Male
with a large external gular vocal sac.
From snout to vent 23 millim.
Several specimens from Lages, Santa Catharina, collected

by Hr. Michaélis.

In the number of the ‘ American Naturalist’ for January
1888 (p. 80) the frog recently described by me as Hyla Copir
is identified with H. arenicolor, Cope. If this identification is
correct, [can only say that Jam not to blame. #. arenicolor,
Cope, is a mere name, proposed to replace that of affnis,
Baird, preoccupied ; on referring to the latter author’s descrip-
tion, I find his H. afinis ditters from my H. Copii in the
following important points :—

H. affinis —“ Tympanum two thirds the size of the eye.
Web of hand extending only to the third joint of the second
finger.” [The figure represents the fingers distinctly webbed
at the base.] ‘“‘ No vermiculation on anterior and posterior
faces of hind legs.” (Bazrd.)

H., Copii—Tympanum hardly one third the size of the
eye. Fingers without web. Hinder side of thighs mottled
or vermiculated with brown.

As the type specimen of /Z. affinis=arenicolor is preserved
in the United States National Museum, it is to be hoped that
further information may be forthcoming to settle the question.

Siphonops Hardyt.

Teeth small, subequal. Snout rounded, moderately promi-
nent, about as long as the distance between the eyes; latter
distinct, tentacle im front of and close to the eye, neither above
nor below. 104 circular folds, all complete. Uniform
blackish.

Total length 145 millim.; greatest diameter of body 4
millim.

Well distinguished from S. annulatus by the more slender
body, the position of the tentacle, and the uniform coloration,
the annuli not being lighter.

Porto Real, province of Rio Janeiro. A single specimen
was obtained by M. I. Hardy du Dréneuf.

190 Mr. C.J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera

XXIV.— Descriptions of anew Genus and of some new Species
of Longicorn Coleoptera of the Family Lamiide obtained
by Mr. C. M. Woodford in the Solomon Islands. By
Cuares J. GAHAN, M.A., Assistant in the Zoological
Department of the British Museum.

LEURONOTUS, n. g.

Head strongly concave between the antennal tubercles, the
latter prominent; front moderately narrow, equilateral. Eyes
large, lower lobes reaching almost to the base of the man-
dibles. Antenne about half as long again as the body ; scape
cylindric, and having at its apex a narrow cicatrice, which is
completely limited by a distinct carina; third joint much
longer than the scape, the fourth and following (the last
excepted) decreasing in length.

Prothorax with an anterior and posterior transverse groove ;
disk uneven, and each side armed with a sharp spine.

Elytra square at the shoulders, very much elongated, with
the sides parallel, flat on the disk, gradually sloping towards
the sides, and then becoming vertical at the margins ; sloping
also behind towards the apex, which is broadly truncate, with
the exterior angles slightly produced, the sutural angles
scarcely so.

Legs long and of equal length; femora sublinear.

Prosternum simple; mesosternum with a small conical
tubercle in front.

The completely margined cicatrice of the scape of its an-
tenne and its other characters show that this genus belongs
to the Monohammus-group. From the other genera of the
group it is readily distinguished by its elongated form and the
flattened appearance of its elytra above. Potemnemus and
Periaptodes, which have a greater affinity with the Jono-
kammus- than with the Batocera-group, in which Lacordaire
placed them, also have the elytra flattened ; but, with other
distinguishing characters, these genera are of broader form
and have their elytra pointed at the shoulders.

Leuronotus spatulatus, n. sp.

L. elongatus, parallelus, niger, dense pallide cinereo-pubescens ;
elytris maculis nonnullis calvis, nitidis, eeneo tinctis; antennis
fusco annulatis.

Long. 32-40 mm., lat. 10-12 mm.

Hab. Solomon Islands.

from the Solomon Islands. 191

Black, covered (except a longitudinal glabrous spot on the
middle of the prothorax and a few glabrous spots on each
elytron) with a pale ashy pubescence, which is of a darker
shade and glossy on the legs and underside of the body.
Epistoma and palpi piceous; labrum and mandibles black.
Face with a few minute scattered punctures and with a median
impressed line extending from the clypeus to the occiput.

Anterior margin of the pronotum somewhat angularly pro-
duced ; lateral tubercles of the thorax directed outwards and
upwards, the two dorsal tubercles obtuse and but little raised ;
between the latter is a median, glossy black, spatulate spot.
The punctures on the thorax are not uniformly distributed—
a few on the anterior border on each side of the middle line,
a few behind each of the dorsal tubercles, and a few on the
posterior part of each lateral tubercle.

Elytra minutely punctured, punctures scarcely visible
through the pubescence, except at the base and sides. With
two or three rows of widely separated asperate punctures on
each elytron ; two of these rows are along the faint ridges
which bound off the median sloping area from the flattened
area of the disk on the one side and from the vertical mar-
ginal area on the other. There are three or four irregular
glossy black spots on the disk of each, and a few small
glossy granules on each near the base.

Antenne with the apical third of the third joint and the
apical half of each succeeding joint of a dark brown colour ;
the first and second joints and the remaining parts of the ether
joints pale ashy.

Orsidis ampliatus, n. sp.

Niger, squamosa pubescentia tectus fusca et grisea; prothorace
supra fusco, dorso minute bituberculato ; scutello nigro, lateribus
albis ; elytris lateribus subparallelis, apicibus truncatis ; antennis
unicoloribus, scapo vix cicatricoso.

Long. 28 mm., lat. 10 mm.

Hab. Fauro Island, Solomon Islands.

Black, covered with a scaly pubescence, which is sandy
grey and fuscous on the head, thorax, and basal two thirds
of the elytra and sandy grey on the apical third. Head im-
punctate; eyes large, lower lobes reaching almost to the base
of the mandibles. Antenne fuscous grey, unicolorous, scape
smooth, cylindrical, and with only the faintest trace of a cica-
trice. Thorax fuscous brown above, with three small ochre-
ous spots, two of which are placed on the two small tubercles
of the disk, without punctures. a

192. Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera

Scutellum black in the middle, white at the sides. Elytra
minutely and thickly punctured, with the sides subparallel,
the basal two thirds with a mixed pubescence of brown and
sandy grey, the apical third sandy grey ; apices somewhat
obliquely truncate, with the outer angles slightly produced.

HETEROCLYTOMORPHA, Blanch. (nec Lacord.).

Heteroclytomorpha punctata, n. sp.

Picea, tenuiter pubescens, capite valde punctato; antennis concolor-
ibus; prothorace fortiter punctato, lateribus trituberculato ;
elytris crebre punctatis, maculis nonuullis pallide ochraceis, apici-
bus truncatis nec spinosis.

Long. 28 mm., lat. 9 mm.

Hab. Fauro Island, Solomon Islands.

Pitchy, with a faint tawny pubescence, which is denser on
the head and the sides of the thorax. Head strongly punc-
tured, scarcely concave between the antennal tubercles. An-
tenne nearly half as long again as the body. Prothorax
somewhat rugose at the sides and closely and very strongly
punctured, in the middle smooth and shining, transversely
folded beneath ; with three small tubercles on each side, one
median, one near the anterior angle, the third (smaller and
more dorsally placed) between these two. (In a second
specimen the anterior tubercles are less well developed.)

Scutellum transverse. Elytra thickly and very strongly
punctured ; with some small pale ochreous spots, of which
two, more regular than the rest, are placed obliquely on each
elytron a little in front of the middle, the others behind the
middle; apices truncate, with the outer angles very slightly
and obtusely produced. Anterior femora rugose in front and
armed each with a small tooth at about three fourths of its
length.

The two specimens which serve as types are evidently
males.

Note.—A second species from the Solomon Islands agrees
so well with Blanchard’s figure and description that I have
little hesitation in regarding it as the guadrinotata of that
author. In this species, as in the one just described, the
claws of the tarsi are decidedly divergent, in each the pro-
sternal process is almost contiguous with the mesosternum,
and the latter is in each hollowed out in front; the lower
margin of this hollow is in guadrinotata triangularly concave

from the Solomon Islands. 193

in front, in punctata square or almost convex in front. It
will appear from these remarks that Lacordaire’s description
of the genus (Gen. Col. ix. 2, p. 475), in which he mentions
“leurs crochets des tarses divariqués” and their “ saillie
mésosternale lamelliforme, recourbée en arriére, déclive et
obtusement tuberculeuse en avant, non contigué & la saillie
prosternale,”’ is quite inapplicable, and was probably taken
from his own species only. For this species (s¢mplea,
Lacord., op. cit.) I propose to substitute the generic name
Sormida, with characters as given by Lacordaire for the
genus Heteroclytomorpha.

Trigonoptera Woodfordi, n. sp.

Nigra, subnitida, maculis ovalibus vel oblongis pallide griseis ornata ;
prothorace lateribus vitta pallide grisea, disco quatuor maculis ;
elytris ad basin sat dense punctatis, maculis numerosis pallide
griseis, apicibus truncatis, angulo externo mucronato; antennis
nigris.

Long. 15 mm., lat. 6 mm.

Hab. Fauro Island, Solomon Islands.

Black, subnitid, with oval and linear spots of a pale grey
colour. Head with the carine of the vertex distinct enough,
and with a pale grey interrupted line in the channel between
them. Clypeus, labrum, base of mandibles, cheeks, and
round the eyes also pale grey. Prothorax punctured above,
with a pale grey vitta on each side and four spots of the same
colour on the disk; the two posterior spots are at the base,
are short, and lie close together. Scutellum nearly semicir-
cular, slightly grey behind. Elytra thickly enough punc-
tured on the basal half, and each with about twelve very
distinct pale grey spots, arranged as follows :—four at the
base somewhat indistinctly united to each other; two, of
which one appears nearly double, beneath the shoulder ; three
oval spots at the middle, and, with the corresponding three of
the other elytron, forming an irregular hexagon; then follow
an elongated spot, and, at the apex, two linear spots, one
near the suture and one near the margin, which unite poste-
riorly. The outer angles of the apices mucronate. The legs,
underside of the body, except in the middle, and basal joints
of the antenne covered with a slight greyish pile.

By the colour and disposition of its spots, and by the deep
blackness of the parts between, this species may be distin-
guished from the other species of the genus.

194 Mr. O. E. Janson on some Species of

XXV.—On some Species of Cetoniide from the Loo Choo
Islands. By Ouiver i. Janson, F.E.S.

In the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for March 1887 Mr. George
Lewis has given a revision and list of the Cetoniide of Japan ;
but at that time very little was known of the insects of the
Loo Choo Islands, and no species is recorded by Mr. Lewis
from this locality. Recently my friend Mr. H. Pryer visited
these islands and made a small collection, and judging by
the Coleoptera received from him it would appear that the
insect-fauna is very closely related to that of Japan. Three
species of Cetoniide have been sent to me by Mr. Pryer; of
these the two species of Cetonia are apparently undescribed,
they bear a marked resemblance one to the other in colour
and general aspect, but are not closely allied.

1. Glycyphana forticula, Jans.
Glycyphana forticula, Janson, Cist. Ent. ii. p. 608 (1881).

I described this species from a single specimen received
from Japan without indication of the precise locality ; but it
probably came from the island of Kiuskiu. Mr. Pryer has
sent a second specimen from the Loo Choo Islands which
differs from the type in its rather smaller size and in the
absence of the small white discal spots on the thorax and
elytra and the four spots on the pygidium.

2. Cetonia Lewist, n. sp.

Viridis, nitida, tibiis tarsisque eneis vel cupreis; elytris postice
sparsim albo-maculatis ; clypeo elongato, lateribus elevatis, apice
anguste reflexo, sinuato; thorace margine postico ante scutellum
fortiter emarginato; scutello lato, apice rotundato; processu
mesosterni producto valde dilatato.

Long. 26-30 mm.

Var. elytris immaculatis.

Shining green, slightly golden, tibia and tarsi brassy or
coppery, elytra im some specimens with sparse white spots
behind. Head rather coarsely punctured, slightly longitu-
dinally convex, the clypeus elevated at the sides, the apex
narrowly reflexed and slightly emarginate. ‘Thorax very
finely and sparsely punctured on the disk, the sides more
coarsely punctured, slightly impressed on each side behind,

Cetoniidx from the Loo Choo Islands. 195

the base produced and deeply emarginate before the scutellum,
the lateral angles rounded. Scuteilum finely punctured at
the base, broad and rounded at the apex. LHlytra very
sparsely punctured on the disk before the middle, behind the
middle and the sides with irregular rows of semicircular
punctures, which become closer and more confused towards
the apex. Pygidium coarsely and sparsely punctured, strongly
convex towards the apex, a small deep fovea near the lateral
angles. Beneath coarsely strigose at the sides, the abdomen
coarsely punctured at the sides and apex ; mesosternal process
large, strongly dilated, and rounded in front. Legs coarsely
punctured and strigose ; femora and tibiw fringed with pale
golden-brown hairs, outer apical spur of the posterior tibiz
distinctly bisinuate. ‘The temale is larger than the male,
more strongly punctured, with the pygidium less convex and
broadly impressed on each side; the legs are stouter and the
spurs of the posterior tibiz are broader and scarcely sinuate.

Loo Choo Islands (4. Pryer).

This fine species differs from C. Confuctusana, Thoms., in
having a more elongate clypeus, with the lateral margins
strongly elevated and the apex more narrowly reflexed, the
thorax more deeply emarginate at the base, the scutellum
broader at the apex, the pygidium with a fovea at the sides,
the punctuation of the upperside more sparse, the meso-
sternal process much more produced and dilated, and the
spurs of the posterior tibia: distinctly bisinuate,

3. Cetonia Pryert, nu. sp.

Viridi-enea, nitida, tibiis tarsisque eeneis vel cupreis ; clypeo lateri-
bus valde elevatis, apice reflexo, emurginato; thorace angusto,
margine postico ante scutellum leviter emarginato ; scutello apice
obtuso ; processu mesosterni dilatato, antice rotundato.

Long. 23-26 mm.

Shining brassy green, tibie and tarsi brassy or coppery ;
some specimens with minute white spots near the outer mar-
gin and suture of the elytra, on the pygidium, and at the
sides of the abdomen. Head coarsely punctured; clypeus
convex in the centre, the sides thickened and strongly raised,
the apex broadly reflexed and emarginate. Thorax much
narrower than the elytra at the base, a little produced behind,
and slightly emarginate before the scutellum, coarsely punc-
tured at the sides, more finely punctured on the disk, the
median line impunctate except at the apex, a slight impres-
sion oneach side at the base. Scutellum narrowed and obtuse
at the apex, a few punctures at the base. Llytra coarsely

196 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

punctured on the disk before the middle, behind the middle
and at the sides with irregular semicircular punctures, which
become confluent towards the apex; a rather strong, smooth,
discal costa from the middle to the apical callosity ; slightly
impressed at the apex of the scutellum and within the humeral
prominence. Pygidium short and broad, slightly convex,
with coarse confluent punctures and sparse pubescence; a
large fovea on each side near the apex. Beneath very
coarsely punctured at the sides; mesosternal process dilated
and rounded in front. Legs punctured and sparsely pubes-
cent.

Loo Choo Islands (4. Pryer).

Compared with C. Lewist this species has the thorax nar-
rower at the base and less deeply emarginate before the scu-
tellum, the scutellum much more narrowed at the apex, the
pygidium less convex, and the mesosternal process much
smaller; it appears to beallied to the Huropean C. angustata,
Germ. All the specimens taken by Mr. Pryer are males, and
there are also examples from the same locality in the collec-
tions of Mr. G. Lewis and the British Museum.

XXVI.—An Account of three Series of Lepidoptera collected
in North-west India by Major Yerbury. By ArtTHuR G.
Buren, }.L.8., 8-Z.5., &e-

{Continued from p. 151. ]

Papilionide.
PIERIN#.
64. Colias Fieldit.
Teas Ménétriés, Cat. Mus, Petrop. Lep. i. p. 79, pl. i. fig. 5

6. Thundiani, 15th August, 1886.

This is considerably larger and deeper-coloured than C.
edusina; the latter is, however, perhaps nothing more than
the prevalent western type of the same species.

65. Colias edusina.

Colias edusina, Felder, Wien. ent. Mon. iv. p. 100. n. 55 (1860).

3. Murree, 2nd August, 1885; ¢ ¢. Thundiani, 13th,
15th, 17th, and 25th August, 1886.

from North-west India. 197

“© Common at Campbellpore and Murree; very common on

Thundiani.”—2J. W. Y.

66. Colias sareptensis.

Colas hyale, var. sareptensis, Staudinger, Cat. Lep. eur. Faun. p. 6.
n, 48 (1871).

go. Campbellpore, 3rd and 20th April; ?. 2nd June;

Hassan Abdal, 9th May; ¢. Abbottabad, 1st October, 1886.

67. Colias erate.

Colias erate, var. 2, pallida, Staudinger, Cat. Lep. eur. Faun. p. 3.

n, 54 (1871).

S ?. Hassan Abdal, 9th April; ¢. Campbellpore, 20th
April; g¢ 2. Thundiani, 15th and 17th August; 9. Nandar,
25th September, 1886.

Typical C. erate was not sent with the present series, its
place being evidently almost entirely occupied by the hybrid
form C. pallida. Major Yerbury says :—‘ All these pale
forms of clouded yellows are common at Campbellpore, Hassan
Abdal, and Murree, but uncommon on Thundiani.”’

68. Terias fimbriata.

Terias fimbriata, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 323, n. 16
(1867).

6. Abbottabad,. 13th October, 1886.

69. Tervas irregularis.
Terias irregularis, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1882, p. 253.
d. Campbellpore, 24th October, 1886.

70. Terias anemone, var.
Terias anemone, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr, vi. p. 23. n. 7 (1862),

3 ?. Hassan Abdal, 9th May; 3g. Khairabad, 23rd May
and 6th June; Abbottabad, Ist October, 1886.
Slightly smaller than Japanese examples and usually rather
aler; but amongst specimens recently received from Major
Lebacs there is a male (taken at Khairabad on the 28th
October, 1886) which is quite as large as those from Japan ;
the early examples (¢. e, those taken in May and June) are all
more or less worn and faded, with the exception of a single
male from Major Yerbury’s private collection obtained at
Hassan Abdal on the 27th June.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 14

198 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

71. Tertias suava.
Terias suava, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 670. n. 28 (1836).

&. Campbellpore, 8th May; Abbottabad, 1st October, 1886.

Amongst specimens of Yerdas recently presented to the
Museum is a small male of T’. st/hetana, Wallace, taken by
Major Yerbury at Noor Poor Shahan, near Rawul Pindi, on
the 10th April, 1887.

72. Tertas purreea.
Terias purreea, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1882, p. 252.

g. Akhor, 22nd April; Hassan Abdal, 9th May; ¢ ?.
Khairabad, 23rd May; ¢@. 6th June; Campbellpore, 30th
May and 21st October; ¢?. Thundiani, 12th September ;
Hurripur, 14th October, 1886.

The female obtained at Campbellpore in October was taken
in coita with a typical male 1’. hecabe, another proof of the
readiness with which distinct species of the Colias group of
genera will pair together. Both sexes of 7. purreea can be
distinguished easily from the corresponding sexes of 7. hecabe,
and until some reliable lepidopterist can settle down to care-
fully rear each species of Terdas from eggs which he has
seen deposited upon plants strictly confined in such a way as
to prevent all intrusion of other species, I shall continue to
believe in the possible constancy of the various forms. As
regards Mr. Pryer’s experiments in Japan, he has himself
proved their untrustworthiness by recording his belief that he
has reared 7’. deta (an Indian species) from eggs laid by 7’.
betheseba, and, still further, that one of the pupe from the
same batch of eggs produced the almost generically distinct
T. hecabe, which individual of the batch he says he 1s ‘led to
believe is a hybrid.” What Mr. Pryer means by expressing
his faith in anything so utterly impossible I leave him to
explain ; meanwhile I candidly confess my inability to rely
upon his experiments.

73. Terias fraterna.
¢. Terias fraterna, Moore, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool. 1886, p. 46, pl. iv.
fig. 6.

@. Hassan Abdal, 14th October, 1885.

It seems probable that this insect, which is intermediate
between 7. purreea and 1’, hecabe, is a hybrid between the
two species.

74. Terias hecabe.
Papilio hecabe, Linnzeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 249 (1764).
3. Hassan Abdal, 22nd July; g 9. Thundiani, 12th and

Srom North-west India. 199

16th September; ¢. Nandar, 25th September ; Campbell-
pore, 21st October, 1886.

75. Terias hecabeotdes.
Tertas hecabeoides, Ménétriés, Cat. Mus. Petrop. Lep. i. p. 85, pl. ii.
fig. 2 (1855).
6. Nandar, 25th September, 1886.

76. Tertas leta.
Terias leta, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 674. n. 86 (1836).
9. Nandar, 25th September, 1886.

77. Gonepteryx rhamni.
Papilio rhamni, Linneus, Faun. Suec. p. 272. n. 1042 (1761).

9. Campbellpore, 20th March; g. Khairabad, 11th
April, 1886.

From specimens since received from Major Yerbury it is
evident that two males were obtained at Campbellpore on the
3rd March and three at Khairabad on the 11th April. It
may readily be distinguished from the more abundant Indian
form G. nipalensis by its much more uniform (yellower) colour
below ; in G. nepalensis the costal border and apex of pri-
maries and the whole of secondaries on the under surface are
considerably whiter than in G. rhamn7; the margin of the
wings is also more scalloped.

78. Gonepteryx nipalensis.

Gonepteryx nipalensis, Doubleday, Gen. Diurn. Lep. p. 71. n. 9 (1847),

3. Akhor, 22nd April; Futch Khan’s bungalow, Kooteer,
Chittar Pahar, 23rd April; Hassan Abdal, 9th May; 9@.
Thundiani, 11th August, 1886.

Of the two preceding species Major Yerbury says:—
“Common round Campbellpore in the spring; also in the
Chach plain on the banks of the Indus, at Murree, and
Thundiani.”

79. Gonepteryx zaneka.
Gonepteryx zaneka, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 493. n. 35, pl. xxxi.
fig. 18.

o 2. Thundiani, 13th August; g. 17th, 20th, and 21st
August, 1886.
“Common on Thundiani in August and September 1886.”
—J, W. Y.
14*

200 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

The female of this species seems to be comparatively rare ;
of a dozen examples recently brought home by Major Yer-
bury in papers the whole are males.

80. Teracolus protractus.
Teracolus protractus, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, p. 187. n. 37.

@. Campbellpore, 29th June; ¢ 2. 12th July, 1886.

Two males and one of the females have the third black
spot of primaries expanded so as to reach the inner margin ;
the under surface of the males is yellow, but that of the
females varies from clear yellow to pinkish yellow, approaching
flesh-pink.

“Common at Campbellpore, beginning of July 1886.”—
IW.

There can be little doubt but that the form of this species
occurring at Campbellpore will prove to be fairly constant in
the slight differential characters which distinguish it from the
type; it is, however, extremely doubtful whether it can be
separated, inasmuch as we have a female from Kutch with
the typical small black spots and deep flesh-pink secondaries
on the under surface, males from the same locality being
yellow below.

81. Teracolus puellaris.
Teracolus puellaris, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, p. 156, n. 33.

9. Chittar Pahar, Lumbahdun, November 1885; ¢ 9.
Campbellpore, 29th June, 17th July, 1886.

In Major Yerbury’s private collection I found one or two
females of Teracolus ochreipennis taken at Campbellpore on
the 29th June. Major Yerbury says it was fairly common
for two days, 29th and 30th, and then disappeared.

82. Teracolus purus.
Teracolus purus, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, p. 160. n. 113, pl. vii.
figs, 14, 15 (1876).

g. Campbellpore, 13th, 17th, and 25th July ; 9. Hassan
Abdal, 18th July, 1886.

It will be seen that this species was obtained at the same
time in 1886 as in 1885. Major Yerbury, in his notes,
expresses a belief that 7. bimbura, farrinus, purus, and a
fourth form unidentified by Mr. De Nicéville are all varieties
of T. etrida. He says :— All these forms of Teracolus are
common round Campbellpore. There are two broods, spring
and autumn. I obtained specimens also at Hassan Abdal,
Khairabad, and near Barracoo on the Murree and Pindee

from North-west India. 201

road.” The dates of capture seem to me to point to an oppo-
site conclusion, since 7. bimbura and T. farrinus, the two
forms least alike, were collected in October and November
only by Major Yerbury. I have already shown that 7. far-
rinus cannot, however, be the autumnal form of 7. purus, as
Col. Swinhoe obtained specimens at Kurrachee in July,
whereas he caught 7’. purus in May and June. On the other
hand, the range of 7. bimbura (which might otherwise be
supposed to be the late brood of 7. purus) appears not to be
the same as that of the latter species.

83. lxias pygmea.

Ivias pygmea, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1882, p. 254, pl. xii. fig. 1.

?. Campbellpore, 21st October, 1886.

“Fairly common round Campbellpore and Khairabad in
October and November; very common at Kala Dilli in the
Chittar Pahar in November.”—J/. W. Y.

I have examined twenty-two examples recently brought
home by Major Yerbury in addition to five previously re-
ceived; the males vary only in size, the females only in
occasionally having the oblique band on the apical area tinted
with orange; practically, therefore, the common Jaas of
Campbellpore and the neighbourhood, in spite of its near rela-
tionship to 7. mou/meinensis of Burmah and many other fixed
local types, perfectly holds its own as a constant form and
therefore a species. Once begin to associate these local types
and the whole genus runs together, as may be seen by
arranging them as follows :—1. J. Reinwardtii, of Lombock ;
2. J., sp. ?, of Bali; 3. L. venilia, of Java; 4. L. insignis, of
Formosa; 5. J. balice, of Java; 6. L. venatrix, of Moulmein ;
7. I. kausala, of Depalpur &c.; 8. L., sp.?, Himalayas ; 9.
I., sp. ?, Bhotan ; 10. L., sp. ?, Elephant Island, W. Bombay ;
11. L. moulmeinensis, of Burmah ; 12. I. pygmea, of Camp-
bellpore and Kangra Valley; 13. LZ. pyrene, of the N.K.
Himalayas to China; 14. J., sp. ?, of Darjiling ; 15. J. sesia,
of Mussowrah, Bengal; 16. /., sp.?, of Silhet to Bhotan ;
17. J., sp.?, of Darjiling to Bhotan; 18. ZL. dharmsale, of
Dharmsala; 19. ., sp. ?, of N.W. Provinces and “ Afghan-
istan ” (probably incorrect locality) ; 20. L. frequens, of Bar-
rackpore &c. 3 21. J. cingalensis, of Ceylon; 22. L. Wattit,
of Bengal; 23. LZ. undatus, of Borneo; 24. I. evippe, of
Eastern India, from Darjiling to China; 25. J. latifasciatus,
of Moulmein ; 26. J. anewibia, of China*; 27. 1., sp. ?, of

* This species is, however, unknown to me, and may be only one of the
three following, badly tigured by Cramer.

202 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

Salanga; 28. L. pallida, of Upper Tenasserim; 29. J. citrina,
of Upper Tenasserim ; 30. J. andamana, of the Andamans ;
31. J., sp.?, of the Thoungyeen Valley, Tenasserim; 32. J.
marianne, of the N.W. Himalayas, Bombay, Ceylon, &e. ;
33. I. meridionalis, of Poona and Bombay; 34. I. agniverna,
of Poona and Bombay ; 35. I. depalpura, of Depalpur, Kc.

Probably no collections but our own and Mr. Moore’s are
sufficiently rich in the various closely-allied types of Latas to
show the perfect gradation which exists in the above series,
and, consequently, to many lepidopterists the differences upon
which some of them are separated must appear to be trivial in
the extreme ; nevertheless, I am convinced, after examining
the numerous collections which have come to hand during the
last twenty-three years, that most of the above are strictly
constant to locality, and that only such species as have a wide
geographical range (as J. evdppe) show any tendency to vart-
ability (7. e. individual inconstancy), and even then that there
is never any difficulty in deciding to which Jadas the aberrant
specimen belongs.

Tn a case like the foregoing, and it is not a solitary one by
any means amongst the Lepidoptera, only two courses are
open to the systematist: hé must either say that the genus
consists of one species exhibiting local modifications, the
degrees of which are trivial, but the sum of which, comparing
the first and last, is prodigious, or he must separate all the
forms as species, no matter whether their modification has
been due to isolation on islands, by mountain ranges, by
rivers, or limitation of food-plant.

84. Catopsilia jugurthina.
Colias jugurthina, Godart, Ene. Méth. ix. p. 96. n. 21 (1819).

6. Hassan Abdal, 27th June ; Chuttar, between Tret and
Barracoo, Murree road, 9th October; 9. Hurripur, 14th
October, 1886.

This is one of the forms of the C. crocale group, of which
at present we know too little to be certain whether it is con-
stant or otherwise ; it is certainly the commonest of the Indian
forms, and its range is enormous, extending along the base of
the Himalayas and down the east of India to the Malayan
Islands, certainly as far as Waigiou, with scarcely any altera-
tion of pattern. The locality of C. crocale is said to be ‘‘ Kast
Indies ;” in the Museum collection we have it (I speak of
the typical form) from Ceylon and Malacca only. In my
opinion it is highly probable that the latter is an aberrant
development of the same species, tending to resemble the

from North-west India. 203

Celebesian C. flava; for both C. jugurthina and C. crocale,
together with a third yellower form, occur in Ceylon.

When I wrote my monograph of the genus there was no
difficulty ; all the forms of the C. crocale type were associated
as one variable species, and C. caédlla stood next as a well-
marked second species. Since then intermediate forms, appa-
rently constant, have turned up between C. crocale and C.
catilla, whilst collections have come to hand containing only
one or two of the supposed “ varieties ’’ in considerable num-
bers, showing that in certain localities these types are either
constant or prevalent; thus assurance has turned to uncer-
tainty, and it has become necessary to specify the form
received when giving an account of a collection—another evi-
dence of the truism “ the more we know the less we know.”

85. Catopsilia gnoma.
Papilio gnoma, Fabricius, Syst. Ent., App. p. 808 (1775).
?. Campbellpore, 1st August, 1886.
‘‘ A few at Campbellpore, 22nd and 24th July, 1886.”—
JW. Y.

86. Catopsilia minna.
Papilio minna, Herbst, Naturs. Schmett. v. pl. Ixxxix. figs, 1, 2 (1792),

3 ?. Campbellpore, 12th July; g. 14th and 16th July,
1886.

C. pyranthe, with which this was identified, was formerly
associated with it; that insect is, however, a narrower bor-
dered species, with slighter markings also on the female
primaries: both forms appear to be constant.

87. Belenots auriginea.
Belenois auriginea, Butler, Proe. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 374, n. 74.

?. Campbellpore, 16th May, 1886.

“Common round Campbellpore in the spring.”—J. W. Y.

According to De Nicéville this is the spring brood of B.
lordaca (identified by him as B. mesentina) ; that this is
incorrect is evident from the fact that Col. Swinhoe took the
supposed autumn brood at Quetta in March and May, and
that its African representative, which I regard as the same
species, was taken in Somali-land in January and at Haithal-
kim in April; we also have one male taken by Major Yerbury
at Campbellpore in June. It is an interesting fact that the
bulk of the supposed seasonal forms are incapable of being
tested by dates, that “dry- and wet-season forms”? so called
are always coming to hand with the same date ot capture on

204 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

their envelopes ; but what is most singular is that the publi-
cation of facts to this effect does not hinder the repetition of
these errors in the writings of those who first promulgated
them.

Turning to Major Yerbury’s private collection, the first
specimen I took up was a dark male (B. auriginea) which
should have been taken in the spring ; but on looking at the
label I found it marked “ Rawul Pindee, 21st November.” I
next turned up a pale female (B. lordaca), and found it
labelled “ Campbellpore, 21st May, 85.” This remarkable
evidence led me to examine seven other specimens recently
brought home by Major Yerbury, with the following result :—

Supposed Spring Brood. Supposed Autumn Brood.
do. Rawul Pindee, 25th November. . Thundiani, 5th May.
hs » Oth December. do. Campbellpore, 31st October.
¢o & Q. Rawul Pindee, 25th No-
vember.

88. Synchloe daplidice.
Papilio daplidice, Linneeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 760. n. 77 (1767).
?. Hassan Abdal, 9th May, 1886.
“Common in the neighbourhood of Campbellpore in May
and June, and at Hassan Abdal in May.”—J. W. Y.
Amongst the Lepidoptera brought home this year are ten
examples of Pontia soracta taken by Major Yerbury at Thun-

diani on the 3rd, 4th, and 5th of May and at Kala Pani on
the 6th.

89. Ganoris ajaca.
Pieris ajaca, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 490. n. 21, pl. xxxi. fig. 16.

$ ¢. Thundiani, 11th, 13th, and i4th August, 1886.
‘Common at Murree and Thundiani in August.”—dJ.

Wi We
90. Ganorts gliciria.
Papilio gliciria, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. clxxi. figs. E, F (1779).

¢. Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 4th April; 9 9.
Hassan Abdal, 9th May; 9. Thundiani, 14th August, 1886.

91. Ganoris nipalensis.

Pieris brassice, var, nipalensis, Gray, Lep. Ins. Nepal, pl. vi. figs. 1 and
3 (1846).

@. Thundiani, 20th September, 1886.

Jrom North-west India. 205

92. Huchloe lucilla.
eee lucilla, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 376. n. 80, pl. xxxv.
g. 4.

Campbellpore, 18th and 27th March, Ist, 7th, 13th, and
14th April; Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 4th April ;
Akhor, 22nd April, 1886.

Now that I have a long series of this species before me
(that is to say thirteen in the present consignment, fourteen
recently brought home, and nine in Major Yerbury’s private
collection), [am better able to point out the constant differ-
ences between it and the Algerian Z. charlonia. It is inva-
riably smaller, with comparatively shorter costal margin to
primaries ; the colour of the males is aslightly deeper yellow,
frequently gamboge-yellow—the females being pale brimstone,
only slightly yellower than some males of H. penta of Turkes-
tan; the black spot at the end of the cell is larger and never
replaced by a black lunule on the under surface; the outer
border of primaries is never triangular, as in £. charlonia, but
always forms a distinct angle internally on the lower radial
vein; on the under surface the white-spotted rose-coloured
margin to the primaries is far brighter and clearer, and the
apical area of primaries and whole surface of secondaries are
frequently, though not invariably in the female, paler and
less black-speckled, or even yellow, faintly speckled with olive.

Papririonine.

93. Papilio erithonius.
Papilio erithonius, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. eexxxii. figs. A, B (1872).
Campbellpore, 20th April, 1886.
“Common at Campbellpore in October and November,
1885.”—J. W. Y.
94. Papilio asiaticus.
Papilio machaon, vay. asiatica, Ménétriés, Cat. Mus. Petrop. Lep. i.
p.70 (1855),

Futch Khan’s bungalow, Kooteer, 26th April; Thundiani,
12th August, 1886.
95. Papilio arcturus.
Papilio arcturus, Westwood, Ann, Nat. Hist. ix. p. 37 (1842).

Thundiani, 17th August, 1886.
“ Common at Murree and Thundiani in August 1885 and

1886."—J. W. Y.

206 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

Nevertheless Major Yerbury has only brought home one
perfect and three or four mutilated examples ; probably he
was too generous to entomologists in India to leave many of
so attractive a butterfly to add to our series*. In England
P. arcturus is generally accounted rather a rare species.

96. Papilio polyctor.

Papilio polyctor, Boisduyal, Sp. Gén. Lép. 1. p. 205. n. 18 (1886).

Kala Pani, Ist September, 1886.

“ Taken at Murree and Thundiani. In my opinion P. are-
turus frequents the upper part of the hill, P. polyctor the lower
slopes; one of these species, probably the latter, very common
on the stream near the Dhobis ghat, Abbottabad.”—J. W. Y.

In Major Yerbury’s boxes I found one example of Papilio
cloanthus taken at Murree on the 30th August, 1885; P.
philoxenus, taken at Murree on the 5th August. Among the
unset things I found P. dissimilis, from Noor Poor Shahan,
Rawul Pindee, on the 10th April; P. govindra, taken on
Thundiani, 4th May; and P. pammon, at Hurripur, on the
14th October, 1886.

Hesperiidae.

97. Hesperia ladon.

Papilio ladon, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. celxxxiv. G (1782).

Thundiani, 23rd September, 1885.

Only one example was obtained; it was identified as
“ Badamia exclamationis,’ a nearly allied but apparently
distinct butterfly, which will probably be stated to be a
seasonal form of it.

98. Hesperia alexis.
Papilio alexis, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 588. n. 887 (1775).
3. Tret, 9th October, 1885.

99. Parnara mangala.
Hesperia mangala, Moore, Proce. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 792.

Murree, 10th September, 1885; Thundiani, 17th and 20th
August and 20th and 30th September, 1886.

This species has been identified for Major Yerbury as Par-
nara bada, from which it may easily be distinguished by its
superior size, darker coloration, larger hyaline spots, particu-

* See, however, the note to P. polyctor, which leaves it doubtful which
is the common species.

Jrom North-west India. 207

larly the lowest spot on the primaries, and the more regular
arrangement of the spots on the secondaries. I have already
pointed out most of these differences, but the name dada
seems to be still employed for P. mangala in India.

100. Chapra mathias.
Hesperia mathias, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 483 (1798).

2. Road between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 9th August ;
Kala Pani, 20th August; Dhum tower, near Abbottabad,
30th September; ¢. Hurripur, 14th October, 1886,

One of the females enumerated above was labelled as Par-
nara bada, the other two as “Parnara karsana;”’ the male
was also identified with the latter in spite of the very distinct
oblique brand on the primaries, the dark olive coloration, and
more numerous hyaline spots.

101. Gegenes nostrodamus.
Hesperia nostrodamus, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. ili. 1, p. 3828. n, 246 (1798).

¢- Kala Pani, 30th August; Hurripur, 14th October,
1886.

102. Gegenes karsana.
Hesperia karsana, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1874, p. 576, pl. Ixvii. fig. 6.

¢. Futch Khan’s bungalow, Kooteer, Chittar Pahar, about
2000 feet, 23rd April, 1886.

103. Pyrgus marrubii.
Hesperia malvarum, var. marrubti, Herrich-Schaffer, Schmett. Eur. i.
Hesp. figs. 14, 15 (1845).
Thundiani, 15th and 25th August, 1886.
Identified wrongly as P. dravira, and said by Major Yer-

bury to have been “ fairly common on Thundiani, beginning
of August 1886.”

104. Pyrgus zebra, sp. n.

Nearest to P. sataspes of South Africa; above black-brown ;
a spot in the cell, a smaller spot obliquely below it; a sub-
triangular spot across the end of the cell, two smaller spots
obliquely below it, and a dot outside, forming a triangle with
the discocellular and second spot; three small spots placed
transversely between the subcostal branches halfway between
the cell and apex ; acurved series of five or six crescentic dots
near to outer margin, a marginal series of dots at base of
fringe, and a series of larger spots on the fringe white : secon-

208 On Lepidoptera from North-west India.

daries with a subtrigonate spot at the end of the cell, a smaller
oblong spot between the latter and the abdominal margin on
the first median interspace, four or five dots near outer mar-
gin, a marginal series of spots, and the fringe white; palpi,
edges of collar, and tegule greyish. Costal border of pri-
maries below white; five black marginal dashes from the
middle, the Jast dash being short and apical ; a whitish patch
at base of cell, a second at about centre of interno-median
area, and a third at apex; the ordinary white spots larger
than above; the fringe whitish, barred with blackish : secon-
daries greyish brown; the base, an abbreviated, narrow,
slightly zigzag, subbasal band, a broad, nearly regular band
from costa to anal angle, and a narrow, slightly interrupted
stripe from apex to anal fourth of outer margin white; apical
three fourths of outer border grey ; abdominal border white ;
fringe dull white, traversed by a greyish stripe: palpi,
excepting the tips, basal half of antennz: below, pectus, and
legs white ; venter white, the sides blackish, with white edges
to the segments. Expanse of wings 26 millim.

@. Campbellpore, 13th April; ¢. Futch Khan’s bunga-
low, Kooteer, Chittar Pahar, 2000 to 8000 feet, 23rd April,
1886.

The under surface of this very distinct species is quite unlike
any other Indian Pyrgus, the secondaries being alternately
regularly banded with brown and white; several of the speci-
mens were labelled as “P. evanidus,” but they are utterly
distinct from that species, the hind wings of which on the
under surface are olive-greenish, spotted and blotched with
white. Four examples were sent to us in 1886, and in the
unset series brought home by MajorYerbury I found eight more
(all taken on the 23rd April). In the notes on the various
species I find P. zebra again recorded as “P. evanidus, com-
mon at Campbellpore, May and June; very common on the

Chittar Pahar, end of April, 1886.”

105. Taractrocera sagara.
Pamphila sagara, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 792.
Hassan Abdal, 22nd July, 1886.
‘Fairly common at Hassan Abdal, 18th July, 1886; a

single specimen taken below Kala Pam, en route to Abbotta-
bad, on the 80th August, 1886.”—J. W. Y.

106. Antigonus Taylort.

‘This name has been given by Mr. De Nicéville to a butter-
fly received by him from the Neilgherries ; it is allied to A.

On new Butterflies from the Solomon Islands. 209

vasava and A. potiphera, is of the size, shape, and has the
front-wing hyaline spots of the latter, but the secondaries are
without hyaline spots, and the ground-colour is of a pale
cupreous or sericeous clay-colour ; the spots of the primaries
are black-edged and partly connected by three or four dusky,
lunulated, macular stripes, which, however, are better defined
on the secondaries; the body is rather dusky in colouring ;
below the wings are paler, the basal area of primaries and
abdominal border of secondaries being whitish and the stripes
on the latter wings represented by well-defined blackish spots
or dashes. Expanse of wings 35 millim.

Futch Khan’s bungalow, Kooteer, Chittar Pahar, probably
3000 feet, 24th April, 1886.

Labelled “ Hesperta, sp., new.” As specimens from the
Neilgherries stand in Mr. Moore’s collection labelled ‘A.
Taylori, De N.,” I presume that the species has been
described ; but after looking through the ‘Zoological Records’
for the last five or six years and the ‘ Journal of the Asiatic
Society ’ for 1886 I have failed to find it ; perhaps it has been
referred to another genus, and therefore I have overlooked it,
or possibly it is a MS. name.

Three more or less worn examples were sent home by Major
Yerbury, and in the series brought home were two others
from the same locality and two taken at Noor Poor Shahan,
near Rawul Pindee, on the 10th April.

107. Plesioneura leucocera.
Hesperia leucocera, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 454, pl. xviii.
fies, 3, 4 (1848).

Kala Pani, 29th August, 1886.

An account of the moths of these collections will be given
in a subsequent paper.

XXVII.—New Species of Butterflies collected by Mr. C. M.
Woodford in the Solomon Islands. By F¥. D. GopMAN and
O. SALVIN.

Since the descriptions published in the last number of the
‘Annals’ (anted, pp. 90-101) were prepared Mr. Woodford
has returned to England, bringing with him another large
collection of butterflies chiefly collected on the island of

210 Messrs. F. D. Godman and O. Salvin on new

Guadalcanar. Many of those previously obtained are con-
tained in this collection; but we find the following species
require names.

Danais garamantis, sp. n.

¢. Alis anticis elongatis, margine externo leviter concavo, posti-
carum margine externo fere angulato, dimidio angulo anali
proximo fere recto. Alis fuliginoso-nigris; anticis plaga magna
discali venis quinque-partita (una parte in cellula inclusa), plaga
altera tripartita subapicali, maculis tribus costalibus et sex sub-
marginalibus semihyalinis; posticis plaga mediana venis bene
sexpartita et maculis quinque submarginalibus semihyalinis : sub-
tus fere ut supra, posticis macula basali, altera ad medium cost
et serie duplici submarginali albis. Exp. 3°5 poll. Angl.

@ mari similis, anticis magis abbreviatis et posticarum margine
externo magis rotundato vix angulato.

Hab. Aola, Guadalcanar Island (C. M. Woodford).

A distinct species apparently allied to D. Schenki, a com-
mon insect throughout the Solomon Islands. Like D. Schenki
the secondaries are without a sexual brand; but in D. gara-
mantis the hyaline spots are of less extent and have no yellow
tint whatever.

Mr. Woodford’s collection contains a few specimens of both
sexes, all taken on Guadalcanar,

Acrea pollonia, sp. n.

A. moluccane affinis, sed alis anticis fere unicoloribus medialiter haud
semihyalinis ; posticis plaga pallide sulphurea fascia fusca bipar-
tita, parte costali quoque venis quadripartita: subtus maculis
anticarum submarginalibus vix obyiis, margine externo posticarum
multo angustiore facile distinguenda. Exp, 3°75,

Hab. Aola, Guadalcanar Island (C. M. Woodford).
A modified but distinct form of A. moluccana of Ceram
and Amboina.

Charaxes epigenes, sp. n.

¢. Alis nigro-brunneis ; anticis maculis quinque parvis ultra cellu-
lam et septem submarginalibus flavidis notatis ; posticis unicolo-
ribus, lunulis septem submarginalibus ceruleis exceptis: subtus
alis rufo-brunneis, parte apicali et margine externo — pallidiore
fuscis, maculis paginee superioris albis et iis ultra cellulam intror-
sum nigro marginatis, linea nigra ad cellule finem lineolis duabus
trans cellulam albis exteriore extrorsum interiore introrsum nigro
marginatis ; posticis lineis duabus albis transvittatis, una per

Butterflies from the Solomon Islands. 211

cellulam nigro extrorsum limbata, altera ultra eam introrsum nigro
marginata, maculis sex saturate rufis discalibus introrsum lunulis
lilacinis cinctis et omnino nigro circumdatis, maculis submar-
ginalibus albido introrsum limbatis notatis, yena mediana et ramo
suo primo elongatis. Exp. 3°35.

mari similis quoad maculas alarum pagine superioris, sed fascia
communi lata a ramo mediano secundo anticarum usque ad mar-
ginem posticarum internum ducta lactescenti-alba, in his sordide
cyaneo vix tincta: subtus alis multo pallidioribus, maculis omni-
bus majoribus et magis distinctis.

Hab. Aola, Guadalcanar Island (C. Mf. Woodford).
Mr. Woodford’s collection contains a male and several

females of this distinct species, which has no near ally that
we know of.

Mynes hercyna, sp. n.

M. Woodfordi forsan proxima, sed anticis ad basin multo magis
nigricantibus differt, cellula, macula triangulari ultra eam et
tribus ovalibus inter ramos medianos tantum lactescenti-albis,
area infra cellulam usque ad marginem internum omnino nigri-
cante, maculis indistinctis subapicalibus ejusdem coloris.

alis omnino nigricantibus, maculis omnibus maris minoribus et
valde indistinctis.

Hab. Aola, Guadalcanar Island (C. M. Woodford).

Several specimens, all agreeing with one another and
differing in the points mentioned from M. Woodfordi of Alu
Island in Bougainville Straits.

Libythea orientalis, sp. n.

L. batchiane quoad formam alarum posticarum, angulo anali haud
producto; anticis fere unicoloribus lilacino-ceruleis, costa et mar-
gine externo anguste et venis angustissime fuscis distinguenda.

Hab. Aola, Guadaleanar Island (C. M. Woodford).

A species of the L. Geoffroyt section of the genus, and
doubtless closely allied to L. batchiana, L. antipoda, &c.
The rounded anal angle of the secondaries distinguishes it
from the latter insect.

Papilio isander, sp. n.

Alis nigris ; anticis fascia arcuata ab apice ad marginem internum
extensa cyanea, parte distali maculosa, parte proxima integra,
macula costali ad apicem ejusdem coloris aliisque lunulatis sub-
marginalibus ; posticis fascia anticarum producta fere ad mar-

212 Messrs. F. D. Godman and O. Salvin on new

ginem internum, parte costali albida, lunulis submarginalibus sex

cyaneis notatis: subtus fere ut supra, sed alis pallidioribus fasciis

et maculis glaucescentibus; posticis linea abbreviata ad basin
aliisque discalibus utrinque nigro late marginatis coccineis. Exp.
3°8.

Hab. Aola, Guadaleanar Island (C. Mf. Woodford).

An ally of P. sarpedon as to the colour of its wing-markings,
but instead of having a single blue band on the primaries
broken into spots in a regular curve towards the apex, the
spot below the subcostal nervure is slightly out of line, and
above it is another spot close to the costa; moreover there is
a series of lunate spots parallel to the outer margin, as in
P. eurypylus.

P. sarpedon, in various modified forms, occurs over a large
area, including India, Borneo &c., the Moluccas, and New
Guinea, and under the name of P. choredon occurs in Australia
and New Ireland. It is therefore of considerable interest to
find so distinct a form in the Solomon Islands.

Papilio Mendana, sp. n.

Alis anticis productis, fere falcatis, margine externo leviter concayo ;
posticis caudatis, vena mediana producta et lobum ferente: nigerri-
mis, fascia mediana longitudinali macularum decem composita
cyanea, ea marginem internum attingente maxima, macula
altera costali ad apicem aliisque sex submarginalibus ejusdem
coloris; posticis maculis tribus elongatis quoque cyaneis, una fere
totam cellulam occupante, maculis parvis tribus supra eam albi-
dis margine interno quoque albo: subtus brunneo-nigris ; anticis
maculis ut supra notatis, costa ad basin coccinea; posticis nigro
nebulosis, macula infra venam costalem, altera ad angulum analem
coccineis. Exp. 4:3.

mari similis, sed major et maculis ad posticarum basin omnino
albis distinguenda.

Hab. Aola, Guadalcanar Island (C. M. Woodford).

A very interesting species, of which Mr. Woodford only
secured a very few specimens. Its alliances are, so far as the
coloration of the wings is concerned, with P. sarpedon, but
in the shape of the secondaries it agrees better with P. codrus
andits allies. It forms in fact a connecting-link between these
two groups.

It seems right that’ so fine a species should bear the name
of Mendana, the discoverer of the Solomon Islands, the details
of whose adventurous journey have been recently published
by Mr. Guppy in his ‘ Solomon Islands and their Natives.’

Butterflies from the Solomon Islands. 213

Papilio solon, sp. n.

P. codro affinis, sed colore alarum paginse superioris Magis saturato
serieco-viridi, maculis anticarum Jete cyaneo-viridibus ; posticis
ad basin albidis, p yarte distali nigro-viridi latiore et margine suo
interiore magis dined: subtus multo obscurioribus, anticis
fasciis indistinctis transversis apud costam notatis, Exp. 6:0.

Hab. Aola, Guadaleanar Island (C. M. Woodford).

In the dark colouring of the underside this species resembles
P. pisidice from Maleita Island, recently described by us
(antec, p. 100) ; but the colouring of the band of spots on the
primaries 1s 80 different that we have no doubt as to its dis-
tinctness. Mr. Woodford’s collection contains a number of
specimens all agreeing with one another and differing from
the type of P. pisidice. In the latter these spots are golden
and not bluish green, as in P. solon.

We have little doubt that the specimen from Alu Island
referred to in our former description will have to be referred
to another species of this group, as it differs considerably
from both P. pisidice and P. solon; but with only a female
example before us we prefer to await the arrival of more
specimens before describing it.

Papilio hecateus, sp. n.

¢. Alis nigris; anticis fascia discali maculis octo composita a costa
margine externo subparallela ad angulum analem extensa lactes-
centi-alba, maculis duabus vena medianw utrinque _ positis
minimis et a margine magis distantibus; posticis parte costali
cum fascia discali conjuncta usque ad marginem internum extensa
lactescenti-alba, margine hujus fascize ex ter no aliquot profunde den-
tato, ciliis inter venas albis : subtus nigris ; anticis maculis quatuor
transversis ad apicem albidis ; posticis fascia indistincta discali
atomis cxruleis composita, maculis submarginalibus rotundis
rubro-aurantiis, ea ad angulum apicalem minima deinde ad angu-
lum analem increscentibus. Exp. 6:1.

9. Alis fusco-nigricantibus ; anticis plaga cellulari maculisque sep-
tem discalibus sordide flavidis, tribus intra ramos medianos maxi-
mis ea supra venam medianam minima; posticis plaga magna me-
diana albida venis septem-partita, parte maxima dimidium cellule
distalem occupante, maculis septem submarginalibus ochraceis,
ciliis inter venas quoque ochraceis: subtus ut supra, maculis om-
nibus majoribus, posticis atomis variis cxeruleis infra plagam medi-
anam. Exp. 6-1.

Hab. Aola, Guadaleanar Island (C. M@. Woodford).
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 15

214 Rev. T. Hincks on the

Many specimens. This species is evidently allied to P.
Bridgit, Math. (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 349, pl. xxxiv. fig. 2),
from Treasury Island and the islands of Bougainville Straits,
whence we have many specimens. The male differs in
having the band of submarginal spots on the primaries more
broken, and there are four subapical spots on the underside
hardly seen in the allied form. The female differs obviously
by having the discal series of spots much more irregular,
whereas in the female of P. Bridgii they are-regular inter-
venal streaks. On the secondaries the submarginal row of
spots are rounder, less lunate, and further from the margin.

We have a damaged female of this or an allied species
from Florida Island; but without male examples we hesitate
to decide as to its position.

Papilio laarch us, Sp. N. 5

@. Alis fuliginoso-nigris; anticis fascia obliqua ultra cellulam
flavida venis quadripartita; posticis fascia lata transversa cellule
finem transducta lactescenti-albida, margine suo interno fere recto
externo profunde serrato: subtus anticis ut supra ; posticis lunu-
lis rufo-aurantiis submarginalibus notatis, atomis paucis ceruleis
inter ramos medianos. Exp. 6:0.

do adhuc ignotus.

Hab. Rubiana Island (C. M. Woodford).

Though we have only a single damaged female specimen
before us we can recognize its distinctness from that sex of
P. Woodfordi of the islands of Bougainville Straits. The
marks on the primaries are restricted to an oblique short
band beyond the cell, and there are no submarginal spots
or any near the anal angle. The band across the secondaries
is much wider.

XXVIII.—The Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence: a Study of

Arctic Forms. - By the Rev. THomas Hincks, B.A.,
F.R.S.

[Plates XIV. & XV.]

THE material on which’ the present Report is founded has
been entrusted to me by Sir J. W. Dawson, F.R.S., of
McGill College, Montreal, Mr. J. F. Whiteaves, of the
Canadian Geological Survey, and the authorities of the Mon-

Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 215

treal Museum, who have placed in my hands for examination
their collection of the Hydroida and Polyzoa of the St. Law-
rence. Circumstances have hitherto prevented me from
making much progress with the work, and I have to apolo-
gize for a delay which I did not anticipate and much regret.
As it would only lead to further delay to defer publication
until the whole of the material has been examined, I propose
to commence at once with studies of new forms as they occur,
and such as from any cause seem to require further illus-
tration, reserving the complete systematic list of species and
general conclusions for the close of the Report.

Subclass CHEILOSTOMATA.
Family Bicellariide.

CORYNOPORELLA, n. gen.

Generic character. Stems slender, consisting of cells dis-
posed in single series and faving one way, dichotomously *°
branched ; zocecia more or less clavate, each cell originating
from the dorsal surface of the one beneath it, immediately
below the summit, elongate, the inferior portion (from a little
below the aperture) much attenuated, tubular; aperture at
the top of the cell, occupying a small proportion of its length.
Avicularia articulated, attached to the side of the aperture.

Corynoporella tenuis, n. sp. (Pl. XV. figs. 1.)

Zoarium minute, transparent ; stems slender, bifurcating at
intervals. Zoecia subclavate, much elongated, slightly ex-
panded towards the upper extremity which is rounded, the
inferior portion very slender; aperture extending down
rather less than a third of the length of the cell, occupying
its entire width above, and tapering off to a rounded point
below, margin thin and destitute of spines, upper wall
wholly membranous ; orifice arched above, straight below ; on
the margin at one side less than halfway down the cell a
rather large articulated avicularium, the dorsal surface sloping
abruptly upwards from the peduncle (which is short) and very
protuberant, the top flattish, terminating in a long beak-like
extremity, not abruptly bent; surface smooth, the whole
structure (viewed laterally) somewhat wedge-shaped. Fibrils
given off from the dorsal surface of the cell, a little below the
summit towards one side. Oacium (?).

Hab. Forming small tufts attached to other Polyzoa.

15*

216 Rev. T. Hincks on the

The cells of this species bear a strong general resemblance
to those of the genus Brettia, but the articulated avicularium
is a link connecting it with Bugula. Its place, I think, is
in the Bicellarian series. At the same time it possesses cha-
racters which probably entitle it to generic rank. ‘Too much
importance must not be attached to the uniserial habit; but
the small aperture, so unlike that of the true Bugule, and the
tubular prolongation of the cell below are structural features
of considerable moment. In the form and position of the
avicularia this species agrees with Bugula. The genus Bugu-
lella, instituted by Verrill for a species which he obtained on
the coast of North America, seems, so far as we can judge in
the absence of a figure and specimens, to be founded on a
different type.

Family Cellulariida.
CELLULARIA, Pallas.
Cellularia Peachit, Busk. (Pl. XV. fig. 6.)

I have figured this well-known species from a St.-Lawrence
specimen to show the cusp on the median cell at the bifurca-
tion of the branches, which it shares with the Australian C.
cuspidata of Busk. It is true that it is frequently absent (in
both species I believe), but there is no doubt that it occurs in
the North-European as well as the Australian species, and is
not hy any means a distinctive character *

Family Cribrilinide, Hincks.
MEMBRANIPORELLA, Smitt (part.).

Membraniporella crasstcosta, n. sp. (Pl. XIV. figs. 5.)

Zoecia ovate, disposed (rather irregularly) in lines ; front
wall composed of a few (about six or seven) broad, flat, and
rather massive ribs, usually more or less separated by con-
siderable interspaces ; no distinct sternum ; orifice (secondary)
suborbicular, enclosed by two stout rib-like processes which
unite in front; oral spines wanting. Avicularia none.
Occium (?).

Hab. Spreads in reddish-brown patches over various kinds
of Polyzoa (Escharoides Sarswt &e.).

The species to which the present form makes the nearest

® See Busk’s ‘Challenger’ Report, part 1, p. 17, Mr, Busk suggests
the propriety of recurring to his original name, Cellularia monotrypa, in
place of C. cusprdata, if the presence of the cuspidate point should prove
to be also a character of C. Peachi.

Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 217

approach is Flustra Aragot of Audouin; but apart from other
differences the latter is at once distinguishable by the peculiar
structure of the oral extremity of the cell and the remark-
able lobed appendage on each side of the orifice. It is
difficult to meet with a perfectly formed cell of M. crasstcosta.
Amongst the St.-Lawrence dredgings it is far from uncommon,
and I have had the opportunity of examining a good many
specimens; but scarcely a cell has occurred in which the full
complement of ribs was present. In a large proportion of
cases only the oral ring and the first pair of the rib-like pro-
cesses are developed, so that the colony presents a most un-
finished appearance. ‘The ribs are flat and massive and
expanded at the base; their points meet in the centre and
unite without much regularity, and there is consequently no
straight median line of junction, as in the British AZ. nitida.
In the early stages of development the cell is destitute of all
covering but the membranous front wall, and is furnished
with a plain thickened margin, on which no trace of the rib-
like spines is yet visible. ‘The first to appear are the two
oral appendages, which originate on each side just below the
top, and as they increase in length bend round towards the
front and meet in the centre, forming the oral margin, on
each side of which there commonly rises a mucronate projec-
tion. The first pair of ribs are developed immediately below
the margin, to which they are generally closely united
throughout a large portion of their length. A second pair
originate lower down on each side, and pass diagonally
towards the centre, where they unite with the others; and
usually one or two ribs more pass upward from the lower
margin towards the same point. This is the general plan,
but there are many irregularities, ‘The ribs are for the most
part separated by rather large lacunee, so that in this case the
protective covering is an open framework and not a solid wall.
The reddish-brown colour of the crust seems to be a constant
character in fresh specimens.

Other species of this genus are JZ. nitida and M. melolontha
(Brit.), M. distans (Austr.), WM. sceletos (Madeira), Mf. Agas-
sizvt (Florida), Mf. Aragot (? Medit. or Red Sea).

Family Membraniporide.

Memepranipora, De Blainville.
Membranipora cymbiformis, Hincks. (Pl. XV. figs. 4)

Membranipora spinifera, Smitt, Krit. Forteckn. ofver Skandin. Hafs-
Bryoz. pt. 3, pl. xx. fig. 32.
This form was first noticed by Smitt, but he referred it to

218 Rey. T. Hincks on the

M. spinifera, from which it differs in many important parti-
culars. Omitting the differences in the number and character
of the spines and the disposition of the zocecia (though these
are sufficiently distinctive) the structure of the cell itself is
quite dissimilar in the two forms. In the present species the
zocecium is short, massive, enclosed by comparatively high
walls, and furnished with a solid calcareous floor (Pl. XV.
fig. 4a). The lower portion of the aperture is covered in by
a calcareous lamina*. In these points it presents a contrast
to that of MZ. spinifera. Another striking feature of M. cym-
biformis is the tall pedicellate avicularium. ‘There are com-
monly two of these appendages on a cell placed one on each
side. At the top of the cell there are usually three tall
spines.

This form was described as long ago as 1877 7, but no
figure accompanied the description. It seemed desirable to
supply one, as Smitt’s figure, though strictly accurate as far
as it goes, is on too small a scale and does not show some of
the important characters.

M. cymbiformis seems to be abundant in the northern seas.
In the St. Lawrence it occurs in small patches incrusting
Hydroids and Polyzoa.

Range. Northern and Arctic seas (18-60 fath.). [Kara
Sea, on Sertularia and Algee (Levinsen); Jan Mayen, on
Alcyonidium and Pycnogonide (Lorenz).|

Family Escharide (part.), Smitt.
ESCHAROIDES, Smitt (= Hscharopsis, Verrill t).
Escharotdes § Sarsti, Smitt. (Pl. XIV. figs. 1.)

Cellepora cervicornis, var., Sars, Reise Lofoten og Finmark. p. 28 (sep.).
Eschara rosacea, Sars, Beskr. N. Polyzoa, 1862, p. 3 (sep.).

Eschara Sarsti, Busk, Linn. Soe. Journ., Zool. xv.

Escharopsis lobata (Lamx.), Verrill, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus.

This interesting form has been investigated by M. Sars

* This character was correctly given by Prof. Smitt, but escaped my
notice, and was not included in my description.

+ “‘Polyzoa from Greenland and Labrador,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
for January 1877. The species credited in this paper (through a mistake)
to Iceland were really obtained in Davis Straits.

t Bull. Nat. Mus. U.S. no. 15, p. 149 (1879). There seems to be
hardly sufficient reason for superseding the name adopted by Smitt for
this group from Milne-Edwards, anéwhich has found its way into general
use. It has been employed by Busk in his ‘ Challenger’ Report.

§ Smitt, in one of his later papers (“‘ Bryoz. of Novaja Semlja,” 1878),
has referred this species to his genus Dvscopora, a group which is com-

Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 219

and Smitt, and it might almost seem superfluous to discuss it
further. But Sars’s account is unaccompanied by figures,
and is so far unsatisfactory. Smitt has supplied this defi-
ciency, and would have left little to be desired if his figures
had been drawn on a larger scale. The difficulties of the
Swedish language may probably prove a more serious obstacle
to the student, and it may not therefore be useless to give a
brief account of the development of the zocecium.

It would be a waste of time to consider whether Lam-
ouroux’s Eschara lobata (‘ Exposition Méthodique’) was
founded on the present form. It may have been; but neither
his description nor his figure affords the means of settling
the question with certainty. It is only an adequate diagno-
sis or figure that gives to any name a claim to adoption, and
it must be accounted an injury to science to burden its records
with merely speculative identifications.

Prof. Verrill refers Lepralia producta of Packard to this
species; but unless he had the opportunity of examining an
authenticated specimen he would find it difticult, I think, to
prove his point. Packard’s description, even when supple-
mented by his figure, is quite inadequate.

The changes which the zocecium passes through in this
species are very striking, and show in a very forcible way
the necessity of a caretul study of the Polyzoan colony
through all the phases of its growth.

The young marginal cell presents a smooth or slightly
wrinkled surface, perforated round the edge.

The orifice is suborbicular, perfectly simple, and not ele-
vated above the cell-wall (Pl. XIV. fg. 1a). In this stage
the cells are convex and the sutures well defined.

The first change consists in a slight sinuation of the lower
margin of the orifice, which is accompanied by an elevation
of the peristome. In the second row (from the margin of the
colony) a rather deep and somewhat irregularly shaped sinus
has been developed, bounded by two denticular processes
(Pl. XIV. fig. 1 6), within which an avicularium has origin-
ated, the mandibular portion of which is placed obliquely
along one side of the sinus, whilst the avicularian chamber
(a pouch-like inflation of the surface) lies between it and the

posed, as it seems to me, of somewhat heterogeneous elements. Veriill
has dismembered it and retains the name Discopora for forms “ having
both median and lateral aviculareey with the former (or both) often raised
on a prominence in front of the zocecial aperture” (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus.).
These changes cannot be discussed here, but [ see no reason for merging
the genus Escharoides in any other group.

220 Rev. T. Hincks on the

boundary of the cell. The pointed mandible of the avicula-
rium is directed upwards. At the same time the elevation
of the peristome has been proceeding, and a secondary orifice
has been formed which differs widely from its predecessor.
The subsequent changes, which produce a marked effect on
the appearance of the species, are in great measure due to the
progress of calcification. The new features which have been
added are to a Jarge extent obliterated by the rapid accretion
of calcareous matter. The cells lose their convexity, the
sutures all but disappear, the punctures become indistinct,
the orifice on which the avicularium was developed is no
longer on the surface, but deeply sunk beneath it, and at last
the avicularium becomes undistinguishable. The adult orifice
is rounded above and produced in front into a rather long
pointed sinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 1). In the more advanced stages
of growth a dull, minutely granulose, flattish crust covers the
zocecia. ‘The structural elements to which most interest
attaches are probably the sinus on the secondary orifice and
the associated avicularium. Their development proceeds part
passu, and the shape of the sinus is more or less determined
by the avicularium.

In this case the sinus seems to be simply a provision for the
reception of the avicularium, and, indeed, it is probable that it
is in large measure due to the growth of the avicularium along
the edge of the secondary orifice. It has therefore a distine-
tive significance and is not comparable with the (apparently)
similar structure amongst the Myriozoide. ‘The development
of Escharoides rosacea, Busk, runs parallel to that of the
present species *, and its structural features are almost iden-
tical.

I think we may recognize in Escharotdes the characters of
a natural group.

. Sars appears to be abundant in the St. Lawrence and
generally in the northern and arctic seas. It forms large
coral-like growths composed of many massive branching seg-
ments springing from a common base, foliated, contorted,
expanding upwards, and terminating above in numerous
smaller segments.

Range. Antarctic seas (Sir J. Hooker); Tromsé, 20-60
fath. (Sars) ; Spitzbergen, Greenland, Nova Zembla (Smite) ;
Jan Mayen (Lorenz); Kara Sea, 49-65 fath. (Levinsen).

* ‘British Marine Polyzoa,’ i. pp. 387, 388,

Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 221

PoRELLA, Gray.

Porella Skenet, Ellis & Sol., form plana, n. var.
(Pl. XIV. figs. 6.)

Zoarium erect, bilaminate, compressed, forming broad
flattish expansions, slightly divided into segments at the top,
which lie very much in the same plane, edged by a smooth
border composed of aborted cells; surface smooth. Zowcia
large, arranged with much regularity in quincunx, elongate,
of about equal width throughout, subcylindrical, convex,
distinct, slightly tumid below the orifice (not suberect above),
surface shining, minutely granulated ; orifice (primary) semi-
circular ; adult orifice subquadrangular, peristome elevated,
so as to conceal the primary opening, destitute of spines,
lower margin slightly curved outwards, in the centre of it a
rounded aviculartum, facing inward and just visible above the
margin ; on each side a stout erect process, somewhat enlarged
above and rounded at the top, where it curves slightly mward,
bearing immediately below the top, looking into the opening
of the cell, a small rounded avicularium, Occtum ample,
rounded above, closely united to the neighbouring cells, often
subimmersed, surface granular, closed in front by a smooth
white porcellaneous plate, which stretches down into the cavity
of the cell. Circular avicularia often thickly scattered over
the zoarium.

It is with some hesitation that I refer this form to P.
Skenet. ‘There are many striking differences between the
two. In the first place there is a remarkable dissimilarity
in habit. In the present form the zoarium is much larger *
and more massive than in the normal P. Skene, the segments
are broader, much in the same plane, and much less nume-
rous than in the other, and not so regularly truncate at the
extremity. Specimens present a flattish, smooth, expanded
surface, glossy and of a whitish colour; they rise from a small
circular disk composed of aborted cells, narrow and stem-like
for a short distance above it and then widening out (Pl. XIV.
fig. 6c). PB. Skenet, so far as I have seen, originates in an
irregularly spreading crust, largely composed of normal cells,
and its surface bristles with tall mucronate processes. The
latter are totally wanting in the variety, and with them the
most characteristic feature of the normal form disappears.
The central avicularium is placed within the margin of the
peristome and is barely visible. In P. Skenez, n., the whole

* Every element of structure is on a larger scale in the present form
than in the normal P. Skenet.

222 Rey. T. Hincks on the

of the cell-wall immediately below the orifice is elevated,
and the central portion rises into the very prominent mucro ;
in the present form the front surface is almost uniform
throughout. The lateral aviculiferous processes, which form
so remarkable a feature of the variety, are placed one on each
side of the orifice at the very top of the cell. They curve
inward a little above, and the avicularium is situated just
below the top on the inner face. In the var. bicornis (Le-
pralia bicornis, Busk) there is a cylindrical process on each
side of the orifice, bearing an avicularium on the apex; but
this would hardly be a correct description of the analogous
processes on the present form. In the var. trzdens (Busk)
two processes are developed in a line with the central mucro ;
in both these cases, however, the general characters are those
of the normal P. Skenez.

On the whole, I think, this form must be regarded as a
very remarkable variety of that species. Amongst the par-
tially developed cells on the crustaceous base of the latter
the mucro is undeveloped, and occasionally a pair of lateral
processes may be met with which closely resemble those of
the form plana. ‘The owcium, which has some peculiarities,
seems to be alike in both. At the same time the amount of
divergence from the ordinary type of the species and the
change in external aspect which accompanies it are certainly
exceptional,

In my ‘ History of British Polyzoa’ P. Skenet is ranked in
the genus Palmicellaria, Alder; but I am now convinced
that its true affinity is with Porella,

Loc. Gulf of St. Lawrence, Trinity Bay, 96 fath.

Porella elegantula, D’Orbigny. (Pl. XV. figs. 5.)

Eschara elegantula, D’Orb. Pal. Frang. Terr. Crét. v. p. 102; Packard,
Southern Labrador Animals, Canad. Nat. & Geol. viii. (1863) ;
Smitt, Kritisk Forteckn., difvers. K. Vetensk.-Akad. Férhandl. 1867,
p. 24; Dawson, J. W. , Postpliocene Geol. Canada, 1872, Canad. Nat.
TiS. Vi : Busk, North Polar Polyzoa, Journ. Linn. Soc, xv. 1880;
id. Chall. Rep. pt. i. p. 141.

Eschara saccata, Busk, Pol. Norway and Finmark, Ann, & Mag. Nat.
Hist. ser. 2, xvii. p. 3; Sars, M., Norsk. Pol. 1863 ( (sep.).

Eschara glabr: a, Hincks, Pol. Barents Sea, Ann. & Maw Nat. Hist.
October 1880.

Porella elegantula, Levinsen, Bryoz. f. Kara-Havet. Dijmphna-Togtets
zool.-botan. Udbytte, 1886,

Lepratia elegantula, Lorenz, Pol. v. Jan Mayen, 1886.

I am inclined to agree with Levinsen in referring this
interesting species to the genus Porel/a. In essential struc-
ture it resembles the latter, but the resemblance is somewhat

Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 223

masked by the great extension of the avicularian chamber,
which ultimately covers a large proportion of the front of the
zocecium. Before its appearance the latter is very mode-
rately convex, the peristome not elevated, the surface smooth,
the orifice arched above and slightly curved below. In most of
the marginal cells the avicularium 1s already outlined. At the
top it is of equal width with the orifice; from this point it
tapers off for a short distance, and then continues subtubular
to the base (Pl. XV. fig. 5a). When it is fully developed
and enlarged by the progress of calcification the zocecium
appears cylindrical. In later stages, when there has been a
large accretion of calcareous matter, the divisions between the
cells become inconspicuous, the surface is nearly level and
uniformly granular, and the avicularium, so prominent at
first, is deeply sunk in the shaft-like cavity of the orifice. In
the lower portion of the zoarium and for a considerable dis-
tance above the base the cells are almost wholly obliterated,
and the surface is smooth and glossy.

Concurrently with the growth of the avicularium the peri-
stome rises and the secondary orifice is formed. If the
“ pouch-like”’ avicularium is not a generic distinction (and
the course of its development agrees very closely with that of
the corresponding structure in Porella) there is nothing to
separate this form from the last-named genus.

The variety (rostrata) in which the anterior portion of the
avicularium is free and rises into a prominent rostrum over-
hanging the orifice (Pl. XV. fig. 5) occurs in the St. Law-
rence. ‘The species seems to be common in this region, and,
so far as we know, is confined to, the northern and arctic
seas. It forms light and very elegant coral-like growths,
which originate in a small spreading base, on stones &e.,
much branched, the main branches somewhat antler-shaped,
springing from a little above the point of attachment, divided
and subdivided into numerous branchlets, which terminate
above in more or less expanded subtruncate segments.

Range. Newfoundland, Labrador, Finmark, Greenland,
Spitzbergen, Barents Sea, Kara Sea, off Hare Island, Baftin’s
Bay, Nova Zembla.

Canadian Postpliocene (Sir J. W. Dawson).

Porella proboscidea, n. sp. (Pl. XIV. figs. 4.)
P =Eschara verrucosa, Smitt, form 2, Kritisk Forteckn. 1868, p. 142,
pl. xxvi. fig. 135. :
Eschara cervicornis, forma verrucosa, Bryozoa from Nova Zembla,
(ifversigt af Kongl. Vetensk.-Ak. Forhandl. 1878, no. 83; Recensio

animal. Bryozoorum que ad peninsulam Kola inyenit F. Trybom,
ibid, 1878, no. 7.

224 Rev. T. Hincks on the

Zoecta ovate, quincuncial, decidedly convex, depressed
below, and rising rather abruptly towards the oral region ;
surface white and shining, smooth (in young cells) or slightly
roughened, in some states areolated, delicate coste passing
upward from the margin to the base of the avicularian umbo ;
primary orifice semicircular; immediately below it, placed
centrally, an erect process, expanded below, narrowing
slightly upward and bending in towards the orifice (which it
sometimes overhangs slightly), bearing on its summit a cir-
cular avicularium, immediately behind which rises a short
mucro; peristome in the adult cell elevated, especially in
front, embracing the avicularium. Owctwm prominent, rounded
above, broader than high, flattened in front, surface minutely
pitted over (in the young state smooth, glassy, emarginate),
commonly a small elongate fissure on the front.

Var. With a smaller avicularian process on each side of the
central one and close to it, or sometimes only on one side
(Pl. XIV. fig. 4).

Hab. On shells and Hydroida, in small patches.

The Eschara verrucosa of Smitt is certainly not identical
with the Lepralia verrucosa of Johnston, Busk, &c., to which
he at first referred it. The latter is a much larger species,
with an orifice of a totally different structure. He subse-
quently ranked it as a form of Hschara cervicornis (= Porella
compressa, Sowerby).

I am by no means sure that I am right in identifying it
with the present species. Prof. Smitt has given us a very
brief description of it, and unfortunately his figure is too
small to be of much service. At the same time I think it
more than probable that the two are identical. The present
form is clearly a Porel/a. It differs indeed from most of the
species of this genus in the costate condition of the front wall
of the zocecium (though we meet with it in P. struma, Nor-
man); but in all essential points its structure allies it to this
group. One of its most distinctive characters (as a species) is
the elevated avicularian rostrum, which may remind us of the
similar structure in Umbonula verrucosa. The delicate tex-
ture, the silvery whiteness, the elevated front wall with the
radiating ribs (not always present) are also characteristic
features.

Loc. St. Lawrence, Orphan Bank and off Cap Rozier,
38 fath. If I am right in identifymmg P. proboscidea with
Smitt’s species, it has also occurred in Spitzbergen, Nova
Zembla, and the Peninsula of Kola.

Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 225

MucroneE.A, Hincks.

Mucronella prelucida, Hincks. (Pl. XV. fig. 3.)

This species was described and figured in my “ Report on
the Polyzoa of the Queen Charlotte Islands” *. It is figured
again in the present paper because the St.-Lawrence speci-
men differs in some respects from the North Pacific, and
notably in the absence of the peculiar projections, placed one
on each side of the cell at the base of the raised peristome.
These have much the appearance of avicularia, but are not
really such. The diminutive zocecium in the present figure
is probably one of those which lie about the primary cell ;
but all the cells are smaller in the St.-Lawrence than in the
Pacific specimen. In the Queen-Charlotte Report I ventured
to conjecture that the new forms described in it would pro-
bably not be to any great extent arctic. There can be little
doubt, however, that Mucronella preelucida at least has followed
the usual course of migration from the extreme north along
both the Atlantic and Pacific coasts of America.

SMITTIA, Hincks.

Smittia Landsborovit, Johnston, form porifera, Smitt.

(PL. XIV. fig. 2.)

The only form referable to the above species which has
yet occurred to me amongst the St.-Lawrence dredgings
would rank under Smitt’s Escharella porifera. This must,
I think, be accounted a “form” of S. Landsborovit; the
differences between them are hardly of sufficient moment to
warrant their separation. ‘hey may be briefly summed up.
In S. porifera the zocecia are ovate or (frequently) rhombic,
very thickly punctured over the entire surface, and of a dull
white colour; the peristome is less elevated than in the nor-
mal S. Landsborovit, the avicularium is larger and rather
more elongate, and stands out very prominently below the
inferior margin, so as to have a rostriform appearance. ‘The
central denticle is sometimes wanting, and when present 1s
less conspicuous than in the ordinary form, owing to the larger
size and greater prominence of the avicularium; it is some-
times small and pointed. ‘The orifice is subcircular, whilst
in the latter it is more correctly described as “ rotundato-

* Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xiii. pl. iv. Reprinted for the
Geol. & Nat. Hist, Survey of Canada, 1884, p. 26 (sep.), pl. iv. fig. 1.

226 Rev. T. Hincks on the

quadrangularis.” In some forms of S. Landsborovii the peri-
stome is much more elevated in the ovicelligerous cells than
it is in the present, and forms a deep channelled sinus, at the
extremity of which the avicularium is placed. In this con-
dition the secondary orifice is subtriangular.
- There seems to be a large amount of variability in the
characters of the peristome as well as in the size and shape of
the zocecium itself *. The present form has the leading fea-
tures of the specific type, with a moderate amount of variation
in detail, and there hardly seems to be sufficient reason for
separating it from 8. Landsborovtt (Pl. XIV. fig. 3).

Range. Spitzbergen, Hammerfest, Jan Mayen, Peninsula
of Kola, Nova Zembla, South Devon f.

Subclass HOLOBRANCHIA, Lankester.
Family Pedicellinide, Hincks.
BarENtTsIA, Hincks.

Barentsia major t, n. sp. (PI. XY. figs. 2.)

Zoarium consisting of a rather stout, creeping, and branched
stolon, jointed at intervals, along which the pedicels sup-
porting the polypides are distributed ; pedicels of great length,
extremely slender below, expanding considerably towards the
summit, delicately ringed, of a very light horn-colour, rising
from a stout cylindrical base, conical above and of a whitish
colour, not annulated; polypides large, white, expanding
from the base upward, slightly gibbous on one side, tentacles
numerous, the fleshy peduncle or stalk connecting them with
the pedicel comparatively long, enlarged immediately below
the base of the polypide.

This species is allied to B. gracilis, Sars, but is of very
much larger size. The pedicels for a great proportion of their
length are very slender, tubular, rigid, but towards the upper
extremity they widen out considerably and appear to be com-

* See Hist. Brit. Mar. Pol. plate xlviii. figs. 6-9.

+ The South-Devon specimen agrees very closely with Smitt’s figures
of his Escharella porifera (op. cit. plate xxiv. figs. 30, 31).

{ Busk has substituted, in his ‘ Challenger’ Report (part 2, p. 40), the
MS. name Ascopodaria for Barentsia. As I am unable to recognize the
propriety or legality of this change, I haye retained the latter, which was
the first published designation of this remarkable pedicelline group. I
hope to find an opportunity of discussing the grounds of this change on
some future occasion. :

Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 227

posed of a membranaceous material. The muscular cylinder is
tall and stout, decidedly conical above, and of a whitish
colour. The length of the fleshy stalk immediately supporting
the polypide and by which it is attached to the pedicel is a
distinctive character. It is dilated below the body of the
polypide, which is large and pretty regular in shape. The
pedicels are developed in great numbers on the stolon ; at the
point where each originates opposite branches are given off.
Loc. St. Lawrence.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
PuaTe XIV.

Fig. 1, Escharoides Sarsit, Smitt. Adult zocecia from the older portion
of acolony. la. Zocecia in the earlier stages of development.
1b. Zocecia, showing the development of the oral avicularium.
1c. Early stages in the growth of the avicularium.

Fig. 2. Smittia Landsborovii, Johnston (sp.), form porifera, Smitt.

Fig. 3. Smittia Landsborovit, Johnston, normal.

Fig. 4. Porella proboscidea, nu. sp. {This figure and also 5 and 5a are
less highly magnified than the rest of the Plate.] 4a. A single
zocecium.,

Fig. 5. Membraniporella crassicosta, n. sp. 5a. Immature zocecia.

Fvg.6. Porella Skeneit, Ellis & Sol., form plana, n. var. 6a. Ocecium.
66. Marginal zocecium, showing the primary orifice and early
stage of the avicularian chamber. 6c, Zoarium, nat. size.

PLATE XV.

Fig. 1. Corynoporella tenuis, n. gen. and sp. A zocecium, drawn to the
usual scale. 1a. Portion of the zoarium, less highly, magnified,
showing the dorsal surface, the mode in which the cells are
connected, and the position of the fibrils.

Fig. 2. Barentsia major, nu. sp. A single pedicel and polypide. 2a.
Ditto, showing the mobility secured to the polypide by the
fleshy stalk by which it is attached to the pedicel. 26. A pedi-
cel on which a new polypide is in course of development.

Fig. 3. Mucronella prelucida, Hincks.

Fig. 4. Membranipora cymbiformis, Hincks. 4a, Marginal zocecium.

Fig. 5, Porella elegantula, D’Orbigny, var. rostrata. 5a, Young zocecium,
showing an early stage in the development of the avicularium.
5b. The avicularian mandible.

Fig. 6, Cellularia Peachii, Busk, showing the cusp on the median cell at
a bifurcation,

228 Bibliographical Notices.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

South-African Butterflies: a Monograph of the Extra-tropical
Species. By Rotanp Trruen, F.R.S., F.LS., F.Z.8., F.ES., &e.
Royal 8vo. ‘Triibner and Co.

It is with great pleasure that we welcome the appearance of the
first two volumes of this work, the need for which will be evident
from the fact that not only has the earlier work by the same author
(entitled ‘Rhopalocera Africze Australis’) been long out of print,
but our knowledge of African butterflies has been very greatly
increased during the twenty-one years which have elapsed sinco
the publication of that monograph. Mr. Trimen points out that
the total of known South-African forms is at the present time
about 380, whereas in 1866 (allowing for erroneous admissions to
the list) only 197 natives of South Africa were recorded.

The present werk commences with a most instructive Introduc-
tory Chapter, invaluable to students commencing the study of the
Rhopalocera; the whole of the families, genera, and species are also
described at considerable length and with the care and precision for
which Mr. Trimen is remarkable ; the notes which accompany the
descriptions are useful and of interest, whilst at the same time they
are free from all those sneering little cuts which too frequently
mar the writings of lepidopterists.

Volume I., containing the family Nympnarin4&, is illustrated by
six chromo-lithographic and one plain plate, the latter being devoted
to the structural features of butterflies and the others to figures of
the larve and perfect insects ; this volume is also accompanied by a
useful map of South Africa.

Vol. IL., containing the Erycrnipm and Lycxyip4, is illustrated
by three coloured plates; and although chromo-lithography is hardly
so well suited to the representation of the smaller species as hand-
colouring, the figures are on the whole decidedly good.

Vol. III. remains to be issued, and will contain the Paprrtronipz
and Hxesrerip#, which Mr. Trimen estimates at about 142 species.
It will probably be a bulky volume, and if, as may be anticipated,
it is as perfect as its predecessors, the work will be one of the most
complete monographs of butterflies hitherto offered to the public.

Bergens Museum Aarsbereining for 1886. 8vo. Bergen:
John Grieg, 1887.

Tur Annual Report of the progress of the Museum at Bergen for
1886, which made its appearance towards the close of last year,
forms a volume of considerably larger size than usual. It contains
in all 288 pages and 24 plates, twelve of the latter of quarto size.
Of course the ordinary reports upon the additions to the Museum
and its Library and the affairs of the establishment generally occupy
but a small portion of the space, most of which is devoted to the
publication of several memoirs of great value and interest.

Bibliographical Notices. 229

Foremost among these is an elaborate treatise by Mr. Fridtjof
Nansen, the Curator of the Museum, on “ The Structure and Com-
bination of the Histological Elements of the Nervous System,” a
memoir of over 180 pages, written entirely in English and illus-
trated with eleven quarto plates. About a year and a half ago we
published in the ‘ Annals’ (vol. xvill. p. 209) a translation of a
preliminary communication by the same author upon the histologi-
cal structure of the central nervous system in the Ascidia and in
Myxine glutinosa, His present memoir gives an account of his
investigations upon the histology of the nervous system, with some
remarkable generalizations and a valuable summary of the litera-
ture of the subject. It would lead us too far to attempt to give even
a sketch of the results arrived at, which, indeed, would not be very
intelligible without figures.

A second paper of importance to British zoologists is Mr. James
A. Grieg’s “‘ Contribution to the Knowledge of the Norwegian Alcyo-
naria,” containing descriptions of several new species of the group,
illustrated with nine octavo plates. In this paper, which is written
in Norwegian, with an English summary, the author describes
species of the known genera Sympodium, Stenogorgia, Paramuricea,
and Protoptilum, and proposes the establishment of two new genera,
namely Danielssenia (sp. D. irramosa), an unbranched form with a
horny axis, allied to Gorgonia, and Stichoptilum (sp. S. arcticum), a
Pennatulid of the family Protoptilide, in which there is a strongly
marked bilateral symmetry in the arrangement of the polypes. The
general characters and structure of the species are admirably illus-
trated in the plates, which furnish, among other things, a very com-
plete exposition of the characters of the calcareous spicules.

The other natural-history papers in the volume are in German
from the pen of Dr. J. Brunchorst, and relate to cases of vegetable
pathology. The first is on a very general disease of the potato,
produced by a parasitic fungus nearly allied to Plasmodiophora, for
which the author proposes the name of Spongospora solani. This
fungus is believed to be the cause of the diseases of the potato
known as “Schorf” in Germany and “scab” in England. Ina
second paper Dr. Brunchorst treats of the disease of cabbage-plants
produced by the attacks of Plasmodiophora brassicw, as a remedy or
preventive of which he recommends the use of sulphuret of carbon.
His third paper relates to the production of nodular swellings on
the roots of certain plants and trees by the action of some forms of
parasitic fungi, especially those of the genus Frankia.

The papers above cited are of so excellent a quality and of so
much importance that, although we could do little more than indi-
cate their existence, we have thought it desirable to call the atten-
tion of our readers to their existence, seeing that an ‘* Annual Re-
port” is not the place where such productions are generally looked
for; and we must congratulate the authorities of the Museum at
Bergen upon their having brought out such a valuable set of contri-
butions to the literature of Natural History.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 16

230 Geological Society.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

January 25, 1888.—Prof. J. W. Judd, F.RB.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “On Ailurus anglicus, a new Carnivore from the Red Crag.”
By Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S.

The specimen described is a small fragment of the right lower
jaw with the last true molar tooth in position, and belongs to the
Crag collection of the Yorkshire Philosophical Society. It differs in
a marked degree from all fossil European Carnivores, and presents
no important points of difference when compared with a series of
jaws of recent Atlurus. The Author gave a description of the fossil
and comparison of it with Ailurus fulgens, and also a table giving the
comparative measurements of the teeth and jaws of the fossil and of
recent Ailuri. The species from the Crag was a more powerful
animal than any recent Ailuri in the British Museum. The paper
concluded with a notice of the range of Ailurus in space and time.

2. «On two New Lepidotoid Ganoids from the early Mesozoic
Deposits of Orange Free State, South Africa.” By A. Smith Wood-
ward, Esq., F.G.S.

Of the two species of fishes described in the present paper, one
was founded on specimens of four individuals brought to England by
Dr. H. Exton in 1883, together with the types of Z'ritylodon and
Rhytidosteus, the other on two examples recently received from the
same source. Both were from the Stormberg Beds of the Upper
Karoo series.

After giving full details of the structure of both forms, and de-
scribing the head and opercular fold, appendicular skeleton and
scales in each, the Author showed that one species must be referred
to the genus Semionotus, and was most nearly allied tothe American
types referred by Sir P. Egerton to Ischypterus. For this species
the name of Semionotus capensis was proposed.

The other species agreed in its characters with the Dapediide,
and was especially allied to the genus Tetragonolepis ; but the nearest
ally of all was a fish from the Hawkesbury Beds of Australia, Clithro-
lepis granulatus. The name of Clithrolepis Extont was proposed for
the new South-African species.

Miscellaneous. 231

MISCELLANEOUS.
Bot-larve in the Terrapin.

Pror. Lerpy remarked that the habits of a naturalist often led him
to observe things in our daily life which usually escape the notice
of others. In our food he had frequent occasion to detect parasites
which he preferred to reject, but which are unconsciously swallowed
by others. While he liked a herring, he never ate one without first
removing the conspicuously coiled worms on the surface of the roes;
and he had repeatedly extracted from a piece of black bass or a
shad a thread-worm which others would not distinguish from a
vessel or anerve. While he did not object to the little parasitic
crab of the oyster, he made it a point to remove the equally frequent
leech from the clam. It was in a piece of ham he was eating that
he first noticed the trichina, which was no doubt one of the causes
that led Moses to declare the pig to be unclean ; and in the hundred
tape-worms he had examined from our fellow-citizens during the
past twenty-five years he had ascertained that they had all been
derived from rare beef. He continued, in a visit to Charleston,
S.C., before the late war, at an evening entertainment, among other
viands were nicely browned slices of the drum-fish, Pogonius chromis.
A friend informed him that some portions were more gelatinous and
delicate than others, and helped him to what was supposed to be
one of such. On cutting into it he had observed imbedded in the
flesh a soft mass which appeared of enigmatic character. The fol-
lowing day he procured from market a drum-fish, on the dissection
of which he found imbedded in the tail several egg-shaped masses,
about 3 inches long and less than an inch thick, which proved to be
a large coiled worm (Acanthorhynchus reptans) *. This it was that
gave delicacy to the dainty, and in this instance the parasite seems
to enhance the excellence of the food. At another evening enter-
tainment nearer home he partook of some stewed terrapins. Taking
into his mouth what appeared to be an egg, it produced such an
impression as led to its rejection. Seeming so peculiar he tied it in
the corner of his handkerchief for more convenient examination.
The specimen, now exhibited, was a membranous bag which contained
thirty yellowish-white maggots from 8 to 12 millim. long by 1° to 3
millim. broad. They are the larvze of a bot-fly, and resemble those of
the Gastrophilus of the horse. Their characters are as follows :—

Body of the larva fusiform, acute anteriorly, obtuse posteriorly,
consisting of twelve segments, including the head, which is armed
with a pair of strong, black, hooked maxille; terminal segment
with a pair of trilateral, oval, chitinous disks, each with three spi-
racles; intermediate segments with numerous minute recurved
hooklets, disposed in incompletely separated bands at the fore and

back part of the segments.

* Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 1858, p. 111.

232 Miscellaneous.

The sac containing the larve is about three fourths of an inch
long and half an inch broad, with a short tubular prolongation open
at the extremity. It was uncertain whether the sac formed part of
the intestine.

The dish of stewed terrapins was suspected to have been a mix-
ture of the diamond-back, Emys palustris, and the red-bellied ter-
rapin, Z. rugosa. This is not the only instance of the occurrence of
bots in turtles, as Prof. A. S. Packard notes the case of larve being
found in the skin of the neck of the box-turtle, Cistudo carolina *.
—Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. December 13, 1887, p. 393.

A new Member of the Deep-water Fauna of the Freshwater Basins.
By Dr. O. E. Imnor.

In my first deep-water investigations in the summer of 1883 and
during the continuation of these studies I regularly found in a
number of lakes (¢. g. the Lake of Zurich) a fine, transparent, seti-
gerous worm, of which permanent preparations were made from
specimens obtained in the Lungeno lake, where it was particularly
plentiful, on the 17th March, 1584. I paid no particular attention
to it, because from its abundance and the remarkable facilities
offered by the nature of its body for exact investigation I regarded
it as certainly already described. Zeppelin’s memoir upon Cteno-
drilus monostylos furnished the inducement to examine this Cheto-
pod more carefully. It is a form which can hardly be ranged in
any known genus. It comes near to the genera Ctenodrilus and
Parthenope, of which only marine species are known.

According to Forel, Duplessis, and Grube the following Cheetopoda
occur in the deep-water fauna of lakes :—Tubifex rivulorum,
Lamk.; 7. velutinus, Grube; Cliteliio Lemani, Grube= Bythono-
mus Leman, Gr.=B. profundus, Dupl.=Lumbriculus pellucidus,
Dupl.

Noticeable anatomical peculiarities of the new form are :—

There is no ciliary coat on the surface of the body. The sete
exist only in one series of tufts on each side, directed towards the
ventral surface. The sete are thin, straight nearly to both ends,
where they are slightly bent in opposite directions, and cleft into a
fine fork at the free end. At rather more than one third of the
length we find a slight enlargement of the part immersed in the
body. I have not hitherto found individuals with generative
organs, but, on the contrary, always multiplication by division.
The body externally appears to be composed only of four segments,
each of which bears two tufts of from four to six sete. All the
sete are of similar structure. The nervous system is distinctly
developed. It consists of a cerebral ganglion situated above the
wide, thin-walled, anterior division of the digestive canal; this is of
a broad band-like form with a slight constriction in the middle.

* ‘American Naturalist,’ 1882, p. 598,

ke
Miscellaneous. 233

The ceesophageal commissures are pretty strongly developed. The
ventral cord presents two closely approximated longitudinal com-
missures, with a considerable number of ganglionic dilatations,
which are in part not very sharply marked off, extending as far as
the extremity of the posterior segment of the body. The whole
nervous system lies in the body-cavity, not imbedded in the body-
wall, as is the case in Ctenodrilus and Parthenope.

So much for the preliminary characterization of this interesting
Cheetopod, which measures a few millimetres in length. I name it
Vetrovermis hyalinus, noy. gen. et spec. As a locality of consider-
able elevation I may cite the lake of St. Moritz in the Upper Enga-
dine.—Zoologischer Anzeiger, no. 270, January 23, 1888, p. 48.

On Psorospermium Heeckelii.
By Dr. Orro Zacwarias.

Years ago (1855) Hiickel, during a microscopic examination of
the tissues of the freshwater crayfish, discovered a peculiar parasite,
which does not appear to have been since frequently observed.
Grobben * (1877) again found it in the connective parts of the testis
in Astacus, and recently (1883) Hilgendorf } also observed it, espe-
cially in the vicinity of the thoracic chain of ganglia in the crayfish.
** In order to fix the structure in question by a definite name” the
last-mentioned author has proposed the designation Psorospermium
Heeckelri.

Last summer (1887) I frequently met with the sporozoon in
question during the investigation of Silesian crayfish, and I ascer-
tained its presence also in examples from Galicia (Tarnopol). It
must therefore be a generally distributed parasite, but one which
does no injury to its host. The specimens of Astacus examined by
me were apparently quite healthy.

The organisms under consideration possess an elongated oval
form and are sharply marked off from the tissues of their host by a
firm cuticle. Their longitudinal diameter measures about (180
millim., their greatest breadth only 0:040-0-050 millim. Their
thickness is also very small. They are flat, tongue-shaped structures,
which may be met with in many thousands in a single individual
crayfish. It is not impossible that when they increase to too great
an extent they may cause epidemics among the crayfish. At any
rate it will be advisable to examine (microscopically) from this
point of view the tissues of diseased Astact.

According to my observations Psorospermium Heckelit occurs less
frequently in young than in old crayfish. I have thoroughly ex-
amined all the tissues of individuals two inches long, and found
nothing. When on the point of desisting from the microscopic
examination I remembered that the eyes of the animals had been

* ‘Beitr. zur Kenntn. d. mannl, Geschlechtsorg. der Decapoden,’ &c.,
1878.
} Ber, Geselisch. naturf. Freunde in Berlin, Sitz, am 20 Noy, 1883.

234 Mewieacs.

entirely neglected. These were now examined in their connective
parts, and here numerous Psorospermia were easily recognizable.
This discovery led me to the notion that these parasites possibly
make their way in (in a motile young state) and establish them-
selves first of all in the softer parts of the eye-peduncle in newly
hatched crayfish.

However, I have established with certainty that Psorospermiwm
Heeckelii is able to multiply in the body of its host. This fact was
not previously known. I ascertained it by means of staining with
aceto-carmine. The portions of tissue under examination were
placed in this approved staining-material for an hour, and then
cleared in dilute glycerine. Of the material thus treated I made
numerous torn preparations which gave me an insight not only into
the reproduction of the Psorospermium, but also into its minute
structure.

Externally, as already stated, there is in our parasite a thick
cuticular zone, which marks the boundary from the tissue of the
erayfish. This cuticle does not stain at all with aceto-carmine. On
its inner wall there is a lining which greedily takes up the colour
and which is divided by fine interstices into a number of portions
of different size. This is the “ pattern of large meshes” which
Hilgendorf also saw. From this lining of the wall proceed the
reproductive bodies, large balls (acquiring a dark red colour), which
are always present to the number of eight to ten when the time for
their appearance arrives.

When these bodies are perfectly mature the cuticle bursts in the
sporozoon at one of the two ends, and the issue of the separate balls
takes place into the surrounding tissue. ach reproductive body
forms a spherical structure, which possesses, quite in the interior, a
‘ nucleus,” which remains entirely uncoloured. Externally each
spherule is enclosed by an envelope which stains deep red; and
between this and the pale nucleus we see a rose-coloured interme-
diate zone.

By the secretion of a cuticle (after increase in length has taken
place) these spherules come to resemble the parent organisms from
which they originate. All possible transitions are found between
the youngest and oldest stages, so that the very simple cycle of
development is quite clearly indicated.—Zoolegischer Anzeager,
no. 270, January 23, 1888, p. 49.

Two new Genera of Epicarides (Probopyrus and Palegyge).
By MM. A. Giarp and J. Bonnier.

By the kindness of the Direction of the Royal Museum of Natural
History at Brussels we have been enabled to study the collection of
Bopyrina belonging to that important institution. In it we have
found two interesting forms of Epicarides parasitic upon species of
Palemon inhabiting the fresh waters of the Dutch Malaysia and
probably of the island of Amboyna. It seems to us that these two

Miscellaneous. 235

species must be*regarded as the typesof two new genera, Proho-
pyrus and Palegyye *, from which are derived on the one hand the
Bopyri and on the other the Gyg«, which have been previously
described. We name them Probopyrus ascendens, Semper, and Pale-
gyge Borrei, G. & B.

Probopyrus ascendens (Bopyrus ascendens, Semper) has already
been noticed by Semper as a parasite of the branchial cavity of
Palemon ornatus, Olivier, which, in the Philippine Islands, lives in
the brooks up to 4000 feet above the level of the sea. The genus
Probopyrus is distinguished from Bopyrus by the characters of the
pleon in the two sexes. In the female on the dorsal surface the
segments of the abdomen, although soldered together, are separated
by very distinct lines of demarcation, visible even at the middle of
the body. In the ventral part the pleopoda, instead of being re-
duced to a mere rudimentary plate on each side of the abdomen,
are formed by pairs of appendages homologous with those which we
have indicated by the letters 6 and ¢ in Cepon and the Ionine ¢.
This important character appears to have escaped the notice of Sem-
per, who figures simple abdominal plates (Joc. ezt. fig. 38) like those
of the typical Bopyri. In the male the pleon bears traces of lateral
appendages which are absolutely wanting in the Bopyri. Bopyrus
palemoneticola, Packard (Bopyrus manhattensis, Gissler $), a para-
site of Palemonetes vulgaris, Stimps., on the Atlantic coast of North
America, must also enter our genus Probopyrus, judging from the
figures given by Gissler.

Probopyrus ascendens differs from Probopyrus palemoneticola by
its larger size, the form of the pygidium of the female, that of the
pleal plates, &c. The presence of P. ascendens in the Dutch Kast
Indies considerably extends the habitat of this Crustacean.

The second species that we have studied has received the name
of Paleqyge* Borre:. It is with pleasure that we dedicate it to the
learned curator of the Brussels Museum, M. Preudhomme de Borre,
well known for his fine writings on the Arthropoda. We met with
it in the branchial cavity of Palemon dispar, KE. von Martens ||.
Some ten specimens of this species were mixed with those of P. or-
natus in the Brussels Museum. Only one of them contained a
parasite, or rather a couple of parasites.

The Palegyge stand exactly in the same relation to Gyge as the
Probopyri to Bopyrus. They represent a less degraded ancestral
form, which has retained, in the structure of the pleon, the typical
organization of the Ioninz. In the characters of the foot-jaws, in

* Sic; recte Palegyge.

+ ‘The Natural Conditions of Existence as they affect Animal Life’
(1881), p. 147, fig. 38.

¢{ See Giard and Bonnier, ‘ Contributions 4 l'étude des Bopyriens.—
Monographie du genre Cepon’ (1887), pl. i.

§ Gissler, “ A Singular Parasitic Isopod &c.,” in ‘American Natura-
list,’ vol. xvi. (1882), p. 6, pls. i. and il.

|| Prof. De Man, of Middleburg, has kindly aided us in the determina-
tion of this Palemon,

236 Miscellaneous.

the ventral folds of the last two thoracic segments, and of certain
segments of the abdomen in the female, and by the separation of the
segments of the pleon in the male, Palegyge Borrei closely ap-
proaches the genus Gyge; but it differs therefrom in that the pleal
plates (branchiw of the older authors) instead of being simple are
double (d and c), as is the case only in the young females in Gyge
branchialis. The ventral fringes exist only on the last two seg-
ments of the thorax and on the first segment of the abdomen. In
the male we find traces of pleopoda only on the first three abdo-
minal segments. In the alcohol which contained the infested
Palemons we obtained a male Cryptoniscian which we find it at
present impossible to appropriate to one of the genera examined
rather than to the other.

It is interesting to find that the archaic types of Epicarides, Pro-
bopyrus and Palegyge, occur upon genera of Palemons inhabiting
fresh water. It is true that Palemonetes vulgaris, the host of Pro-
bopyrus palemoneticola, is a littoral species. But most of the Pale-
monetes, and especially the common P. varians, live in fresh or
brackish waters. This is the case also with the section Macrobra-
chium, Sp. Bate, to which Palemon ornatus and P. dispar belong.
The typical Bopyri seem to live exclusively upon the Paleemons of
the section Leander, Desm., as defined by Stimpson. Of this abso-
lutely marine group most of our European species, P. serratus, P.
squilla, P. rectirostris, &c., form part, each of which bears a parasite
of the genus Bopyrus proper.

We know nothing of the embryogeny of the Macrobrachia, but
the arrangement of the lateral spines of the carapace in these Pala-
mons presents a character which is only transitory in Leander,
The development of Palemonetes varians, which has been admirably
elucidated by P. Mayer, shows us that in these Crustaceans the
abdominal feet originate from before backwards, as in the ancestors
of the Carides, and not by an abridged process, as in the Leanders,
Although from this point of view, as with regard to ethology, Pale-
monetes vulgaris forms the passage to the marine Palemons, we
think that it is desirable to attribute to this character a greater
phylogenetic importance than that of the absence of the mandibular
palpus, upon which P. Mayer relies in deriving the Palemonetes
from Paleemon.

We therefore regard the Palaemonetes and the Macrobrachia as
more ancient forms than the Zeandri, forms which have maintained
themselves, thanks to their freshwater habitat. The existence upon
these ancestral types of archaic genera of Epicarides (Probopyrus
and Palegyge) is, we think, a fresh confirmation of the law of paral-
lelism between the phylum of the parasites and that of their hosts.
— Comptes Rendus, January 23, 1888, p. 304.

waeten..

Wey

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SIXTH SERIES. ]

No. 4. APRIL 1888.

“XXIX.—On the Structure of Fistulipora incrustans, Phill.
(F. minor, W‘Coy). By Joun Youne, F.G.S.

THE interest excited by the researches of recent years amongst
the group of organisms forming the Monticuliporide has been
chiefly due to the methods now employed in obtaining a
knowledge of their internal structures, these being seen to
differ very much even in organisms that are externally so
alike as formerly to have been placed in the same genera or
species. Another point of interest in connexion with the
group is the doubt that still exists in the minds of many
paleontologists as to their proper position in the animal king-
dom, one set of observers placing them along with the
Polyzoa or Bryozoa, another with the Actinozoa or Corals.
It is to be hoped that future investigations will help to clear
up this point and settle the question one way or other.
In the ‘ Annals’ for December 1882 I contributed a short
aper ‘On the Identity of Ceramopora (Berenicea) megastoma,
M‘Coy, with Fistulipora minor, M‘Coy,” and at p. 428 I fur-
ther referred to one or two external characters I had observed
in this organism in its several stages of growth that, so far as I
was then aware, had not been noticed by former observers,
These were :—lIst, that the mouths of the cells in the younger
stages are of a trilobed form, this character being due to the

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol... LZ

238 Mr. J. Young on the Structure of

occurrence of two short spines that project, one on each side,
from the raised lower lip of the cell; 2nd, that the cell-mouths
are seen to be closed by a thin calcareous cover (or operculum)
which I then considered to be the commencement of tabule
in the cells; 3rd, that in the spaces (interstitial) between the
cells there are also numerous small polygonal cells that are
arranged in from one to three rows; 4th, that we often find in
the several stages of the organism that these smaller cells are
closed by a thin calcareous outer layer, which leaves only the
larger cell-openings visible. These characters I stated had
been formerly noted by myself in a paper in the Glasg. Geol.
Soc. Trans. vol. vi. p. 213 (1879).

In the ‘ Annals’ for Dec. 1885 there is a paper by Prof.
H. Alleyne Nicholson, M.D., and Arthur H. Foord, F.G.S.,
“On the Genus Sistulipora, M‘Coy,” with figures and
descriptions of several species. In that paper I am glad to find
that my identification of M‘Coy’s Fistulipora in its younger
and older stages was admitted by the authors, and further
that they had been able to show, from an examination of the
type specimen, that Phillips’s earlier described Calamopora
incrustans was identical with fF. mdnor, M‘Coy, Phillips’s
species thus becoming the type of the genus Mstulipora,
M‘Coy.

In their remarks upon /. ¢ncrustans, Phill., as well as on
the other species of the genus which they describe, I observe
that Messrs. Nicholson and Foord fail to notice some of the
external characters seen on the surface of the type species and
which are noted in my paper in the ‘ Annals.’ As I con-
sider a knowledge of these characters to be essential, and of
importance to any one studying the structure of the organism,
also for enabling them to form some opinion as to its zoo-
logical relationships, I again take the liberty of bringing the
subject before the readers of the ‘ Annals,’ pointing out in
more detail the characters I had already noted as well as one
or two other internal structures that I have found in the Car-
boniferous Mistulipora since my paper appeared, all of which
I have been able to verify in well-preserved specimens and
in numerous sections that I have prepared for microscopic
examination.

I may first remark, with regard to the trilobed form of
the cell-mouths in the autopores of Histulipora, that this is
not a character that is exclusively confined to this genus, as
Mr. E. O. Ulrich figures and describes several forms, in
a paper in the Journ. of the Cincin. Soc. of Nat. Hist. for
April 1884, as American genera of Bryozoa that have the
same trilobed form of cell-mouths in their autopores, with an

Fistulipora incrustans, Phill. (F. minor, M‘Coy). 239

internal structure that in some of the forms relates them
closely to Fistulipora. I also find this same trilobed form of
cell-mouth present in two genera of Carboniferous organisms
formerly placed with the Polyzoa; these are Sulcoretepora
parallela, Phill., S. raricosta, M‘Coy, and Goniocladia cellu-
lifera, Eth., Jun. On sectioning these forms I find that
they have a series of vesicular cells in the interspaces
between the autopores, as found in the Cystodictyonide,
Ulrich, and I have now placed them in that family (Edinb.
Geol. Soc. Trans. vol. v. p. 461, 1887). As stated in my
former paper in the ‘ Annals,’ I find also that the trilobed
condition of the cell-mouths is characteristic only of the
younger stages of the organism in Fistulipora. In the older
stages of growth, or where it forms thick crusts in which the
tubes of the autopores become more erect, the cell-mouths
are seen to be more or less circular in form and to have a
slightly raised lip or rim all round the margin of the
openings. As there is thusso much difference and variability
in the form of the mouths of the autopores in the younger
and older stages of the organism, I do not feel inclined to
place any value on this trilobed form of the cell-mouth as a
generic character, as is done by Messrs. Nicholson and Foord,
especially when we find that it oceurs amongst a group of
organisms that do not seem to be generically related to one
another in every case, although the above authors would
place some of Mr. Ulrich’s forms with Jistulipore that
possessed this character.

The closing of the mouths of the autopores in /. ¢nerustans
by a calcareous cover or operculum is a character that I have
jound in specimens from various localities and in several
stages of growth. ‘These opercula are seen to be more or less
convex on their upper surface, and are perforated in their
younger stage by a small transverse opening that becomes
obliterated or filled up by the organism in the older stages.
Mr. Ulrich also notices these perforated calcareous opercula in
his paper above mentioned, and finds them also in one species
of Listulipora, F. clausa, n. sp. He, like myself, is inclined
to regard them as the beginning of the successive tabule
that show themselves in vertical sections of the tubes of the
autopores. ‘Their rarity at the surface in the tubes of most
specimens is easily accounted for by the somewhat sparse and
wide intervals that exist between the tabulz in many cases,
and also often depends on whether the organisms had lived
onwards for a period after the formation of the opercula ;
in that case they would be found deeper in the tubes and

not observable at the surface.
17*

240 Mr. J. Young on the Structure of

In my former paper in the ‘ Annals’ I noted the occurrence
in the earlier stages of F. inerustans of small polygonal cells
that filled in the interspaces between the autopores. In this
earlier stage I had accepted as probably correct Mr. G.
R. Vine’s identification of the organism with Ceramopora,
in which genus he had placed it, rather than with Bere-
nicea and Diastopora, in which its younger forms were for-
merly placed. Messrs. Nicholson and Foord, however, in
their paper take exception to this identification with Ceramo-
pora, and state that this genus is distinct in all its stages
from Histulipora. The presence or absence of the poly-
gonal cells (mesopores) here noted seems to have raised
some doubt in the minds of these authors as to the correct
identification of the younger stage of F. minor, M‘Coy,
with the organism which M‘Coy figures and describes as
Berenicea megastoma, they stating (p. 503 of their paper)
that “it 1s not possible to be absolutely certain of this without
an examination of M‘Coy’s original specimen, especially as
M‘Coy’s figure of Berenicea megastoma does not exhibit
any mesopores, nor does his description of the species contain
any allusion to the presence of interstitial tubes.’ Perhaps
I may be able to somewhat dispel this doubt by stating that
we find in our Scottish limestone-shales examples of the
younger stage of /#. minor that agree exactly with M‘Coy’s
figure and description of Berenicea megastoma. ‘That is, they
are found as adherent ‘spot-like crusts” that sometimes
show the open mesopores on the surface ; in other examples,
like M‘Coy’s specimen, the mesopores are seen to be covered
by a thin calcareous layer of sclerenchyma-deposit that I shall
notice later on. ‘There is thus every reason to believe that
M‘Coy’s specimen had the mesopores closed by a similar cal-
careous layer, and the reason why they were not noticed by
him is probably due to the fact that he only saw one example
of the organism, the one figured. My reason for this belief
is that the organism in the early stage seems to be rare in
Ireland, he giving only one locality for it and mentioning no
other examples. Had he seen other specimens he could
hardly have failed to observe the mesopores on the surface of
some of them. In our Scottish specimens they are seen to
occur on the surface of the organism in all its stages of growth,
but are sometimes closed or partially closed by the calcareous
outer layer that I noted in my former paper (p. 428), which Dr.
Lindstrém terms the ‘ Thecostegites stage.”’ IT also find that
Mr. Ulrich has noticed this closed condition of the mesopores
in several genera of American Bryozoa, and terms the
obscuring layer a secondary deposit of sclerenchyma that

Fistulipora incrustans, Phill. (F. minor, M‘Coy). 241

has grown at the surface over the cells. That this secondary
deposit of sclerenchyma covers the successive growths , of
mesopores in /. ¢ncrustans in thicker and thinner layers is
well seen in transparent sections of its zoarium, where it
presents an entirely different structure from that forming the
true cell-walls. In the latter the calcite is seen to be much
more dense, and transmits less light through its structure
than that of the sclerenchyma-layers. This difference of
appearance in the two layers is very observable in nearly all
my sections and enables them to be readily distinguished by
the greater transparency of the one compared with the other.
I first noticed this closed condition of the mesopores on the
outer surface of specimens, and thought the calcareous layer
was confined to such surface; but sections of the organism
show that it is present throughout the whole thickness of
the zoarium, from its early incrusting condition to its later
stages, ee it is seen to increase in the thickness of its
layers in many specimens as they reach the outer surface.
Vertical and tangential sections show that it is confined chiefly
to the interspaces between the autopores, but it is also seen to
coat the outer surface of the tube-walls of the autopores, and
in their earlier reclined condition, before becoming erect, the
sclerenchyma is seen to rest as a thick layer upon the outer
concave curve of the tubes, where it forms at the surface of
the zoarium the thickened raised lips of the cells that are so
noticeable in the younger stages of the organism. In the
older stage, in which the autopores become more erect and
with circular mouths, the sclerenchyma forms a regular layer
around the walls, as well as often a thin deposit in their
interior. ‘These layers of sclerenchyma, whether resting upon
the mesopores or autopores, are seen to be of very variable
thickness throughout the structure and extent of the same
specimen, and differ much even in examples from the same
locality. In vertical sections some of the layers are not
thicker than the true cell-walls, which are always thin.
Other layers, however, are seen to be from ten to fifty times
this thickness; these are seen in transverse sections to
form zonal bands around the circumference of the zoarium
and mark successive stages in the growth of the mesopores
outwards towards the surface.

Another interesting character shown in vertical sections
and illustrating the contemporaneous growth of the scleren-
chyma-layers with that of those forming the cell-walls, is
where we see that every successive group of mesopore-cells
is completely separated from those below by the sclerenchyma-
layer, the amount of separation in the true walls in each

242 Mr. J. Young on the Structure of

instance being exactly that of the thickness of the intervening
deposit. In tangential sections of the organism taken
below its outer surface we also find that where the sections
happen to pass horizontally through any of the layers of
sclerenchyma there the mesopores disappear, their walls
not extending either upwards or downwards through this
deposit ; but as the obscuring layer passes out of section, as
happens in most instances, owing to the curvature of the
layers around the specimen, the mesopores are always dis-
tinctly visible over those parts where the sclerenchyma is
absent, or, owing to the darker colour of their cell-walls, are
to be seen shining through a thin layer of the sclerenchyma
at its junction with the mesopores.

In connexion with this sclerenchyma-deposit I have also to
note the fact that its whole structure is pervaded by a system
of very minute pores or foramina which are distinctly visible
in all the better-preserved specimens of the organism. This
character in J. cncrustans I first observed on the surface of
some specimens from the limestone-shales of the Lanarkshire
coal-field, and noticed in a paper in the Glasg. Geol. Soc.
‘Trans. vol. vii. p. 246 (1583). I have also, since then, proved
their existence in all the inner layers of sclerenchyma by
numerous sections that I have prepared.

When seen on the surface-layer these pores appear as very
minute slightly raised tubercles, whilst in the transparent
sections they are seen as tubes or foramina, according as
they are viewed in vertical or transverse positions. I am
glad to find that Mr. Ulrich, in the paper to which I have
already referred, both mentions and figures this perforated
structure as being found in one or two forms of American
Bryozoa, one of which is the Pstulipora? clausa, Ulrich. In
writing on this species he says (p. 47), “‘ My tangential sec-
tions do not show positively that this deposit (sclerenchyma)
was perforated ; but judging from the evidence at hand, and
especially that afforded by one or two vertical sections,
and the very minute pits shown in many specimens, I should
say that such was actually the case, and I do not doubt that
I will yet find a section that will show it in an unquestionable
manner.’”’ I may here state that I have found clear evidence
of this perforated structure in the sclerenchyma-layers of all
those specimens in which the calcite has not been too much
altered through crystallization. When such is the case the
foramina are generally obliterated or are, as in some sections,
only faintly visible in parts, where it requires the practised
eye to detect them under the microscope.

In the paper by Messrs. Nicholson and Foord they notice

Fistulipora incrustans, PA7ll. (F. minor, M‘Coy). 243

the peculiarity that exists in the lighter sclerenchyma-layer
(although they do not call it such) ‘that rests on the folds or
raised lips of the autopores in £. tnerustans, and state
(p. 498), “ This lighter portion consists of crystalline calcite
of a similar character to that of the matrix or infilling of the
cells, though very slightly darker, while the remaining portion
of the cell-wall and the walls of the mesopores are composed
of a dense, granular, opaque calcite.”

It seems to be evident from this statement that their sec-
tions did not show any trace of foramina or pores in the calcite
that forms the thickened lips of the cells ; but they are agreed
that the sclerenchyma-layer, which they term a “ crystalline
calcite,” was organically formed, for they further state, “ This
difference in the mineral composition in the two parts of the
cell-wall must certainly have originated in the living tissues
of the organism, because the same phenomenon is met with in
species from such widely separated localities as Canada and
Westphalia.”

I do not think that any evidence can be clearer than that
such was the case, although the further evidence of organic
structure in the form of minute perforations, such as those I
have referred to, seems to have been absent in their specimens.

When the sclerenchyma-layers are examined in vertical
sections under the microscope it is seen that the foramina or
tubes pass upwards through the deposit nearly at right angles
to its growth, the only radiation seen in the structure being
due to the curving of the sclerenchyma over and around the
convex cells of the mesopores. In the thickened layer that is
seen resting on the folds of the depressed autopores in the
younger stages of growth the foramina also pass through
the deposit nearly at right angles to the tubes on which
it rests. he foramina or tubes in the sclerenchyma often
give the layers a fibrous or brush-like structure, which,
when viewed in vertical sections, appears as fine in the tex-
ture as very fine velvet.

In tangential sections the foramina in finely preserved
specimens are seen as very minute pores. Whether any of
these pass through the true cell-w alls, either in the autopores
or mesopores, is a point on which I have not obtained clear
evidence as yet; but I am inclined to think that they do,
and this is also the opinion of Mr, Ulrich, from an examina-
tion of American specimens. In some of my sections I find
a peculiar and minutely broken-up condition of the denser
portion of the cell-wall that presents the appearance of having,
as it were, been perforated by tubes; but as this is not
clearly seen in every section, | am doubtful whether such a

244 Mr. J. Young on the Structure of

structure originally existed or not. Other specimens, how-
ever, may yet prove this point one way or other.

Messrs. Nicholson and Foord state that the true cell-walls
of the autopores do not surround the whole of the tube in its
dense or opaque condition, but blend at the point where the
folds occur into the layer of lighter crystalline calcite that
forms the raised lips of the cells, stating (p. 498) that “ it will
be noticed that the fold is of a lighter colour than the other
part of the cell-wall.” This does not appear to be a cha-
racter of any value, as [ find in my best-preserved sections that
the true cell-wall is often quite persistent in its density and
darker colour around the tubes, even where they are thickened
at the folds by the layer of sclerenchyma. In my sections it;
is sometimes seen that the walls of certain cells do blend and
disappear in some instances where they are covered by the
lighter calcite layer; but these same sections also show in
other instances the walls quite complete around the majority
of the cells, and this complete condition of the walls is seen
to exist in nearly all the sections in which the tubes have
become erect and the mouths of the autopores more circular.
The disappearance of the cell-wall around the folds in those
instances where it is seen to be wanting seems to be due to
some kind of absorption of the denser calcite and its replace-
ment by the sclerenchyma either when the organisms were
living or afterwards by some process or other during fossiliza-
tion. It, however, is seen to be a variable character even in
the same specimen.

Having stated this much regarding the structures I for-
merly found in #. cncrustans I will here further notice shortly
one other interesting structure that I have recently dis-
covered in specimens obtained from Bowfield, Renfrewshire,
near Glasgow. The form of Pstulpora found at this place
may yet prove to be a distinct species from, or variety
of, F. incrustans ; but beyond the difference in the form of
its zoarlum and the structure to be noticed there seems to be
little difference either in the form of the autopores or in the
number and arrangement of the mesopores and macule from
those seen in the older stages of some specimens of J”, ¢nerus-
tuns. ‘The organism is generally found in the form of frag-
ments of branching, subcylindrical, hollow stems, varying in
thickness from one quarter to half an inch in diameter, the
interior of the stems being now filled by a deposit of clay-
ironstone. ‘The new internal structure that I have to note in
this species consists of a group of slender spines that are seen
in the sections to radiate from the inner wall of the autopores
to near the centre of the tubes. These radiating spines have

Fistulipora incrustans, Phill. (F. minor, M*Coy). 245

very much the same character as those seen in the autopores
and mesopores of Heteropora neozelanica, Busk, which are
figured and described by Prof. Nicholson in his ‘ Monticuli-
pora,’ p. 69, fig. 9 (1881). In the Carboniferous form, how-
ever, the spines are only seen in the autopores, and in this
respect it differs from the species of Heteropora above noted,
where they are found in both groups of cells. The spines
appear to be as slender and as numerous as those of HH. neo-
zelanica, there being from ten to twelve in many of the
sections, in which they are seen to be arranged within the
circle of the cells at slightly varying distances from one
another. They also vary in their length within the tubes,
as in Heteropora, and many of them have become thickened
by a secondary deposit of calcite that now renders them more
conspicuous in the sections. I find them most numerous and
best preserved in those portions of the tubes that lie at a little
distance below the outer surface of the zoarium. In the
younger stage of the autopores the spines are seen to be rare
orabsent. ‘The tabule in the tubes are moderately common,
and in those portions where the spines exist the latter are
seen amongst the tabule projecting inwards from the cell-
walls, but apparently in no regular order of arrangement.
The species of Jstu/ipora under notice has the outer surface
of the zoarium often well preserved. On it the mouths of the
autopores are seen to be nearly circular in form, having a
slightly raised lip or rim all round the cell. The interspaces
between the autopores that are occupied by the mesopores
show in most specimens a thick sclerenchyma-layer at the
surface that completely conceals the mesopores. This layer
also covers the mesopores that lie deeper within the branches,
and in certain stages it forms thick zonal layers all round the
stem that separate the mesopores in their layers from each
other by the whole thickness of the sclerenchyma-deposit.
All over the surface of the sclerenchyma-layer, as well as
upon the raised lips of the cells, there exist numerous, small,
slightly raised tubercles, that give this surface a minutely
granulated appearance. Their structure under the microscope
is seen to be identical with the smaller forms of spiniform
tubercles (acanthopores) found in many species of the Monti-
culiporide. In this species of Mistulipora, however, they
seem to be much more numerous than I have yet seen noted
in any other member of the genus. One other interesting
character of this organism, as illustrated by tangential sections
ot the branches when cut below their surface, is the occur-
rence of similar acanthopores in the thicker inferior layers of
sclerenchyma that | formerly mentioned as forming the zonal

246 On Fistulipora incrustans, Phill. (F. minor, J‘ Coy).

bands within the branches. Iam inclined to think, from the
evidence presented, that these thickened layers indicate
periods in the life of the organism in which the mesopores,
from some cause or other, ceased to be developed, or,
when present, were small aad widely scattered. The aie
dence also indicates that when the mesopores ceased to grow
the sclerenchyma-deposit was ieady to take its place, the
latter being seen to form a continuous uninterrupted deposit
upon the tubes of the autopores outwards to their surface,
whereas in the spaces occupied by the mesopores it only
alternates with the latter, but does not form a regular con-
tinuous outward growth.

From the foregoing remarks it will be seen that the British
Carboniferous Listulipora presents several interesting struc-
tures upon which little has been formerly written, and which
only well-preserved specimens have now revealed. I shall
not at present dwell further upon these structures, nor attempt
to discuss any of the points relating to the zoological relation-
ships of the genus, beyond briefly stating that none of the
structures here noticed are peculiar to Fistulipora, they being
found in other organisms, some of which are at present placed
with the Monticuliporide, others with the Polyzoa. The
vesicular interstitial cells (mesopores) found in F%stulipora,
accompanied by a perforated sclerenchyma-structure and a
trilobed form of the cell-mouths in the autopores, are cha-
racters that are present in both Scottish and American forms
of the Cystodictyonide, Ulrich. Spiniform tubercles (acan-
thopores) along with a minutely perforated sclerenchyma-
structure, as in J. ¢ncrustans, are also present and often
beautifully preserved in the Carboniferous Fenestellide and
other Polyzoans—these structures in transparent sections
being often quite comparable in all their characters with
similar structures found in the Monticuliporide. ‘The oceur-
rence also of numerous radial spines in the tubes of the Car-
boniterous Hstulipora is another character that closely relates
it to Heteropora, a genus that is also found to have its cell-
mouths closed in certain stages, according to Prof. Nicholson,
‘ Monticulipora,’ p. 67, with “ 4 calcareous (or more usually
chitinous) surface-pellicle,’ ’ which he further says ‘is a feature
which speaks strongly for Polyzoan affinities,” although he
afterwards states that this closed condition of the cells “ by
a calcareous pellicle” is not unknown amongst certain corals
belonging to the genus Favosites, the species of which he
names. I will, on the other hand, only state in conclusion
that I have also found in several species of undoubted Car-
boniferous Polyzoa the cells closed by a calcareous secondary

Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. rp Yi

deposit that in its earlier stage is seen to be pierced by a very
small pore opposite the cell-mouths, this pore or opening
being afterwards filled up in the later stage in many of the
specimens.

XXX.—Are there Deep-sea Meduse ?
By J. WALTER FEWKEs *.

In a Report on the Medusz collected by the ‘ Albatross’ in
1883-84 t I have already considered the question whether
there are zones of Medusan life in the depths of the sea. I
have not, however, from the nature of that paper written all
that may be said, even in the present condition of our know-
ledge, of the facts bearing upon it. It is hoped that the
present paper will at least point out the great interest attached
to a scientific answer to the question which is taken as the
title of this communication.

A study of the fauna of the deep sea is of comparatively
modern growth. It is barely thirty years ago that naturalists
almost universally believed the abysses of the ocean to be
deserts as far as life is concerned. Deep-sea exploration has,
however, not only revealed the fact that the ocean-bed at
great depths is peopled by a rich and varied fauna, but also
that the animals which constitute that fauna are peculiar and
markedly different from those found in shallow waters.

It would seem a most extraordinary exception if, after the
floor of the ocean at great depths had been found to be inha-
bited, the fathoms on fathoms of water through which the
sounding-weight passes to reach those depths are destitute of
lite. In mid-ocean, where there is a highly varied nomadic
lite upon the surface and where the dredge has brought up
from the ocean-bed a characteristic assemblage of animals, are
we to suppose that between these places there is not a repre-
sentative tauna, or must we conclude that after we sink a tew
fathoms below the surface life ceases, and that it is not until
we come to the floor of the ocean that life again appears? If
between these two limits there is a fauna, is that fauna the

* From the ‘ American Journal of Science,’ February 1888, pp.
166-179.

+ “Report on the Medusze collected by the U.S. Fish Commission
steamer ‘ Albatross’ in the region of the Gulf Stream in 1883-84.”
Annual Report Comm. Fish and Fisheries, 1884, pp. 927-977, pls. i—x.
1886, Many of the ideas there presented are also noticed in this paper,

248 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse.

same as that found at the surface, or is it characteristic ?
Can the animals which compose it be circumscribed in bathy-
metrical zones, out of which they cannot pass with impunity ?
Do we, in short, have in the nomadic oceanic life a change of
fauna as we sink below the surface ?

Naturalists have been led to suppose that since we find
peculiar modifications in animals living upon the sea-bottom
at great depths we should necessarily look for the same
variation among nomadic animals at intermediate depths. It
would then seem probable that there are bathymetrical zones
for free-swimming animals, and that these animals are cha-
racteristic as compared with others which live at the surface.
An investigation of the character of this fauna, if such there
be, has an interest to the evolutionist, for it might be sup-
posed to acquaint him with facts bearing on the general
characters of the ancestors of certain genera of surface-life.

I can imagine few places on the earth’s surface where the
uniformity of physical conditions is greater than in the depths
of the sea. I do not mean, as might be supposed, necessarily
on the floor of the ocean, but at the depth of say 1000 fathoms
separated from the ocean-bed by a wall of water of the same
depth. Here, if anywhere, we may look for uniformity of
conditions, and if environment has anything to do with modi-
fications in the generic forms of animal life, here we may
expect to discover animals which preserve ancestral features.
On the surface of the ocean there are changes of temperature
and of light and climatic variations ; at the floor of the ocean
there may be reactions of the interior of the earth upon its
crust, perhaps lava-flows or geological oscillations * ; but
midway between these two places, equally removed from
both, disturbing causes only rarely penetrate, and conditions
remain more constant year by year. May we not expect to
find here a corresponding uniformity in the fauna as compared
either with the highly organized animals of the surface or
with those of the depths of the ocean? Is that fauna more
uniform than any other in the ocean ?

No group of animals is better suited for a study of the
questions which suggest themselves concerning the bathy-
metrical zones of characteristic animals, free-swimming at
different depths in the ocean, than the Meduse. ‘The group
is a large and very variable one. It is confined, with but
few exceptions, to the ocean. Moreover, it is probable that
its ancestors were oceanic animals. No group of marine

* Such changes might take place even if the oceans have practically
been the same in past geologic times as at present.

Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. 249

animals presents fewer difficulties in studying the questions
which we have stated than this.

It was with the impetus of a new enthusiasm for the study
of these questions that L undertook, by the advice of Prof.
Verrill, the examination of the rich collections of deep-sea
Meduse made in the Gulf-stream by the ‘ Albatross.’ It
seemed to me that the examination revealed much of general
scientific interest.

I shall not consider in this discussion the Hydroida, as the
members of this group are for the most part attached to the
ground, and the problems connected with them are the same
as those which pertain to all deep-sea animals attached to or
partially living on the ocean-bed. We shall also pass by in
silence the Ctenophora, no genus of which has yet been
ascribed to the deep sea. I propose to considera few of those
jelly- fishes which are known as the Acraspeda, and incidentally
the Stphonophora.

The history of the study of the deep-sea Medusz belonging
to these divisions is a very brief one. In many of the mono-
graphs on these groups we have isolated mentions of Medusze
which are ascribed to the deep sea. The jelly-fishes thus
mentioned were commonly washed into shallow water by ocean-
currents, by storms, or unusual events in the ocean, and the
depths at which they were supposed to live could only be
conjectural. ‘lhe specimens themselves were, for the most
part, in a mutilated condition.

The first and only paper on the Siphonophora of the deep
sea is by Prof. Studer *, who describes new species and genera
of these animals which were found twisted on ropes and wires
used in deep-sea dredging and sounding. All of these are
closely related to a genus called Rhizophysa, which is itself
allied to a Medusa called Physalia, or the “ Portuguese
man-of-war,”’ which habitually floats on the surface of the
ocean.

The most important work which we have on the Acraspeda
(the ordinary jelly-fishes found in shallow waters) of the deep
seas is a report | by Prof. E. Heckel on a collection made by
H.M.S. ‘Challenger.’ No one has done more than he to
elucidate the structure of the jelly-fishes, and he stands without
an equal in his contributions to a knowledge of the deep-sea
members of the group. This work of Heckel is, up to the

* ‘Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie,’ vol. xxi.

+ “Report on the Deep-Sea Medusze dredged by H.M.S. ‘ Challenger ’
during the years 1873-76.” Report on the Scientific Results of the
Voyage of H.MLS. ‘Challenger’ during the years 1873-76, vol. iv, no. ii.

250 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse.

present, the greatest contribution of any naturalist to the study
of the Medusan representatives of the deep-sea fauna.

If space permitted one or two other smaller contributions
might be mentioned; but these two works are the most
important additions to our knowledge of the deep-sea Acras-
peda and Siphonophora.

We have no complete account of the deep-sea jelly-fishes
of the Gulf-stream. That great body of water, which sweeps
along our coast from the Straits of Florida northward, bears
a nomadic life, of the wealth of which no one has yet a just
conception. Those who have studied the stream in all lati-
tudes have spoken of this fact, and one needs but to lower a
drag-net in its waters for a few minutes to become convinced
of its truth. The surface of the Gulf-stream has been but
partially explored, the inhabitants of its depths, except on the
very bed, are unknown.

The means which have been used for the collecting of ani-
mals from intermediate depths are not all that could be wished
for. There is a call for greater refinement in this kind of col-
lecting. A common way of obtaining this life is as follows.
The dredge, trawl, or drag-net drawn up from a great depth
is found to bring with it a Medusa. ‘That Medusa is recorded
from the depth of the trawl. What then is the possibility
that it entered the dredge on the passage up through the
water? I think every one will acknowledge that the possi-
bility is very great, and that the Medusa may or may not
have come from the deep sea. A drag-net attached to a
dredge-rope or wire is sometimes lowered to a certain depth
and then drawn up. Here also we may ask, how is it known
that the Medusa found in the net entered it at the recorded
depth? A Siphonophore clinging to a wire-rope used in
sounding or dredging may or may not, as shown by A. Agas-
siz, have become twisted upon it at the depth at which the
animal appears to- be found when brought on deck. “In
most cases,” writes Prof. Verrill, “it is impossible to say
whether the novel forms of Meduse taken in the trawl and
trawl-wings are inhabitants of the bottom waters or the sur-
face, or of intermediate depths. Eventually those that belong
to the surface-fauna will doubtless be taken in the surface-
nets; but this will require much more extensive collecting of
the surface animals than has yet been attempted.”

It will thus be seen that the means of determining the
depth at which the collecting of free oceanic animals takes
place are too imperfect for any accurate knowledge of the
bathymetrical limits of so-called deep-sea Meduse. We are,
in fact, on the very threshold of this kind of research, and

Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. 251

what is now most needed in the study of bathymetrical zones
of marine life are improvements in the method of collecting at
any depth, so that we can tell exactly at what distance below
the surface a nomadic animal is captured. Devices have been
suggested, one of which, the so-called “ gravitating-trap ”’ of
Lieut. Sigsbee, has been described in the ‘ Bulletin’ of the
Museum of Comparative Zoolozy at Cambridge. Iam not
SY 5
aware how extensively this apparatus, or others of similar
kind, has been used by those who are in charge of deep-sea

. ~) .
exploration, or whether it has been sufficiently tried to test

its usefulness *. If Medusze were always as abundant at
great depths as they sometimes are at the surface, a device
might easily be invented for the successful capture of at least
a few specimens. It seems more probable that Medusz are
not common enough to warrant one in supposing them very
numerous, and the difficulty in their capture thus becomes
greater, rendering it necessary that some modification of the
gravitating-trap be invented fT.

In a letter to Mr. C. P. Patterson (Bull. Mus. Comp.
Zool. vol. vi. no. 8) Mr. A. Agassiz calls attention to the
uncertain methods adopted for ascertaining at what depths
free-swimming animals live, and from experiments with the
“ Sigsbee Trap” concludes (p. 153), while he does not deny
that there are certain genera of deep-sea Medusa, that ‘the
above experiments appear to prove conclusively that the
surface-fauna of the sea is really limited to a comparatively
narrow belt in depth, and that there is no intermediate belt,
so to speak, of animal life between those living on the bottom
or close to it and the surface-fauna.”’

This statement from such a high authority in the study of
marine zoology would seem to effectually crush any murmur
ot belief in intermediate zones in the distribution of oceanic
forms of hfe. While I have the highest respect for this view,
I cannot help entertaining an opinion that more observations
are necessary before we can accept the proposition that there

* “ Results of Explorations made by the Steamer ‘ Albatross’ off the
Northern Coast of the United States in 1883,” Annual Report Comm. Fish
and Fisheries, 1883.

+ The small amount of water which enters the Sigsbee gravitating-
trap is one great objection to it. Negative results with this apparatus do
not necessarily show that life does not exist at the depth at which the
door is opened, and the instrument does not collect from a large enough
area for a successful determination of the abundance of life which it is
intended to capture. From what has been published, and statements of
those engaged in deep-sea exploration, | am led to suppose that the
“Sigsbee Gravitating-Trap” has given only negative data in regard to
the problem of the existence of characteristic nomadic life in intermediate
depths of the sea.

252 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse.

are not characteristic belts of pelagic animals at different
depths.

With the question whether the recorded depths at which
the Meduse which we shall consider are found are accurate
or not we cannot deal. Indeed at this stage of this kind of
deep-sea exploration an examination of these methods would
be foreign to the purposes of this paper. We take the dataas
given by the collector and at present leave the improvement
of the collecting-apparatus to others.

Can we not approach this subject from another side? Are
there any characteristics in the Medusze themselves which
show that they are preeminently fitted to live at the depths
or approximate depths from which they are reported? Has
their habitat left any traces in the modification of their
anatomy ? Has the uniformity of conditions in their habitat
led to a corresponding simplicity in their structure, and are
they nearer the ancestral forms than others with a more
varied environment ? An account of the singular structure
of one or two typical genera may help us to answer this
question, or at all events present certain facts which bear
upon it. Let us therefore for illustration consider one or two
representatives of the Acraspeda and Siphonophora disco-
vered by the ‘ Albatross’ in the depths of the Gulf-stream.

Every one familiar with the anatomical structure of the
Siphonophores will recognize how difficult it is to find in
those genera like Rhizophysa anything to point to an adap-
tation to a deep-sea life. The ‘ Albatross’ has discovered
new Physophores closely allied to Rhizophysa, one of which,
Petrophysa, reaches the enormous size of 20 feet in length in
alcohol. The float of this animal is larger than that of any
true Siphonophore except Physalia. The large size of the
float in these Physophores would seem an effective argument
against their adaptation to a life in deep water, especially as
their nearest ally, Physalia, is preeminently a surface form.

It is extremely difficult to gather from the structure of the
known Siphonophora ascribed to the deep sea anything to
indicate an adaptation to such a life. The group can afford
little satisfaction in our answer to the question of whether
there is a nomadic deep-sea life or not.

The nature of the argument for the existence of Medusan
life in bathymetrical zones may be best illustrated by con-
sidering a few examples of the Acraspeda. These are not
the only instances which might be chosen, and possibly are
not the best. They are thought to be as suggestive as any
se the Acraspeda which have been ascribed to great

epths.

Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. 253

One of the most characteristic families of Acraspeda is
called the Collaspide. The family is supposed to belong to
the deep-sea and is represented by two genera, Atolla and
Collaspis, which differ from each other rather obscurely in
the regular or irregular arrangement of the sexual glands.
It is a question whether we have more than specific differ-
ences in the features which have been pointed out by Heckel
as separating the two.

Up to the present the genns Afolla is represented by a
single species collected by the ‘Challenger’ (A. Wyvillid,
Heck.) and two species from the Gulf-stream (4. Bairdit
and A. Verrillii, Fewkes).

The structure of Afol/a is thought to be more primitive
than that of the ordinary inshore genera, Cyanea and Aurelia.
It is so characteristic that I repeat from my paper on the
anatomy of this genus a condensed notice of some peculi-
arities *,

If we compare Atol/la with our common surface Meduse,
such as Aurelia, we notice many marked peculiarities.

In the former we havea coronal furrow, which is not repre-
sented in Aurelia, although found in a well-known surface
Medusa (Periphylla). We have in Atolla a variable number
(generally twenty-two) of sense-bodies or peduncles of the
same. In Aurelia we have always eight sense-bodies. ‘The
eoronal muscle is peculiar to Alodla.

The sense-bodies of Atolla are spoken of by Heckel as
rudimentary, and it is supposed that we have in a deep-sea
Medusa an adaptation for a life in the depths into which the

* The umbrella, when seen from the upperside, is found to be divided
by a deep ring-shaped groove into a central and a peripheral region. The
groove is called the coronal fossa, the central region the discus centralis,
and the periphery the corona. The corona is formed of a number of
wedge-shaped gelatinous blocks, joined together and bearing on their
outer rim alternately tentacies and sense-organs. These gelatinous blocks
are designated by the term socle, taken from architectural nomenclature,
and are of two kinds—those which bear the tentacles, called the tentacular
socles, and those which carry the sense-bodies (if such exist), the socles
of the sense-bodies. The socles of the sense-bodies bear two thin flaps,
called the marginal lappets. On the underside of the disk we have,
below the corona, a large ring-shaped muscle, called the coronal muscle,
which is highly characteristic and larger in this genus than in any other
known Medusa, Axially to this muscle there is a zone formed of eight
kidney-shaped sexual glands and a simple mouth, which opens into a
bag-shaped stomach. In the interior of the body there is a circular
cavity filling the central disk, which opens by four orifices into a ring-
shaped sinus, which lies in the gelatinous body of the corona. From the
outer edye of this ring-shaped sinus simple, unbranched, peripheral tubes
extend through the bell-substance, passing into the cavities of the ten-
tacles and rudimentary marginal sense-bodies.

Ann, & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol, i. 18

254 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse.

light never penetrates. We may have here what we so often
find in deep-sea animals, a reduction in the size and efficiency
of the special organ of sense to fit the Medusa for the condi-
tions under which it must live at great depths. Stated in a
startling way, we might speak of Afto//a as a blind Medusa.
This statement would hardly be justifiable, and we can at
present go no further than to say that the special sense-bodies
of sight * are supposed to be rudimentary. It must, how-
ever, be borne in mind that nowhere among Acraspeda do we
have so many, twenty-two, sense-bodies as here. In some
specimens there are twenty-eight sense-bodies in this genus.

It is extraordinary that one of the known species of Atolla
(A. Wyvilli’, Heck.) comes from the Antarctic Ocean, while
our two species were both from the warm (?) water of the
Gulf-stream. In the southern hemisphere its lowest limit
is about 2000 fathoms, while north of the equator it comes
from the surface or within a few hundred fathoms.

Among the Medusz collected by Lieut. Greely in the icy
waters of Lady Franklin Bay is an interesting jelly-fish allied
to Atolla. This genus (Nauphanta) has been found but once
before, and then by the naturalists of the ‘ Challenger’ in the
neighbourhood of the island of Tristan d’Acunha in the South
Atlantic. In the latter locality it is recorded from about 1500
fathoms, while in Lady Franklin Bay it is found at the sur-
face. rom several differences in these two specimens, those
from the Arctic and those from the South Atlantic, [ have
supposed the boreal form to be new and have called it by the
specific name polaris t. The ‘Challenger’ specimens were
placed under a new genus, called by Heckel Nauphanta f.

Before we consider the relationship between Atolla, Nau-
phanta, and other related Meduse ascribed to the deep sea,

* Whether the “eye ” of the jelly-fish can distinguish form or not has
not been demonstrated. Simple experiments made by passing rays of
light through dishes in which they are confined, or the simple fact that
they almost always congregate on the illuminated side of the same, are
not conclusive to me that they distinguish form. Experiments with sen-
sitive plates to show the depths to which light penetrates the water are
most suggestive in this connexion. It seems pertinent to the whole
inquiry to ask whether looked at from the physical side there are not rays
of light of such a nature that the vertebrate eye is not able to perceive
them, but which may act upon the visual organs of other animals.

+ Nauphanta polaris has a central disk as in Atolla, a coronal fossa,
and a corona, which, however, is formed of sixteen socles, eight of which
bear tentacles, tentacular socles, and eight sense-bodies. The outlines of
these socles is more clearly marked than in Afol/a on the upper surface of
the corona which they form, on account of the deep sculpture which
separates them.

{ The name Nauphanta was preoccupied in 1879, when applied to this
Medusa, having been given to a worm in 1864,
’ & 8

Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Medusee. 255

let me mention another new Medusa collected by the ‘ Alba-
tross’ in the Gulf-stream. The genus Nauphantopsis is of
interesting affinities, since it has the same central disk as
Nauphanta and Atolla, the same coronal fossa and coronal
socles. It is most closely allied to Nauphanta, but has
thirty-two socles instead of sixteen, eight sense-bodies (?), and
twenty-four tentacles *. These tentacles are therefore
arranged in threes, the series of three alternating with the
eight sense-bodies—all with gelatinous socles.

It is easy to interpret the three deep-sea Acraspeda, Atolla,
Nauphanta, and Nauphantopsis. At first sight they closely
resemble gigantic young Aurelie or Cyanee in a stage which
is called the Ephyra. ‘This is especially true of Nauphanta,
which has the same number and arrangement of tentacles
as the young Cyanea or Aurelia in the Ephyra stage. It is
so close in fact that at first sight they seem identical. In
Nauphanta we have mature ovaries, and this would seem to
indicate the adult form. ‘The existence, however, of ova and
a sexual maturity is by no means an indication of the acqui-
sition of the adult form among Meduse, and many instances
might be mentioned of a jelly-fish with mature ova even
betore embryonic appendages have been dropped. ‘There is
nothing then to prove that Nauphanta is not the young of
some other Medusa, and on the other hand there is no proof
that it is not an adult. If it is an adult, it is a mature Me-
dusa with likeness to embryonic conditions of other Meduse.
It would then be nearer the ancestral form of Acraspeda than
any of the more common Medusz like Cyanea and Aurelia.

At first study I was inclined to regard Atolla as a giant
Hphyra of some unknown Medusa. Its affinities are certainly
very close to Nauphanta, and through the latter genus it is
connected with HKphyra, the young of Cyanea. We may
therefore regard both these genera as embryonic in their struc-
ture and as close allies of the young of a higher jelly-fish. It
is a most interesting fact that two genera with such marked
characters are considered deep-sea genera. Hxactly what the

* Nauphantopsis is an interesting genus in its relationship to the surface-
genus Periphylla, which has four sense-bodies and twelve tentacles in
four series of three each. We likewise have in the same genus marked
coronal socles, sixteen in number, while Nauphantopsis has thirty-two.
Nauphantopsis then appears to be a connecting genus between Nauphanta
and Periphylla. I believe we are justified in regarding Nauphanta as an
adult, although when I first studied it I was strongly inclined to consider
it an immature animal. It must be confessed that, with the exception
that it has eight sense-bodies, while Periphylla has but four, there are
strong resemblances between a young Periphylla and the genus Nau-

phanta.
iets

256 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse.

evolutionist would expect from the uniformity of conditions
which exist in deep water we find manifested in the simple
anatomy of two of the more characteristic deep-sea genera of
Acraspeda, a simplicity of structure of embryonic and there-
fore of ancestral nature. It is certainly strange that these
two facts are associated. It is an extraordinary coinci-
dence if the deep water at which the Meduse were found
and the embryonic affinities in their anatomy have not the
relationship of Cause and Effect. The discovery of a Nau-
phanta in the icy waters of the Arctic zone*, while it shows
that the genus may approach the surface when the temperature
of the depth at which it lives becomes a surface-temperature,
would also indicate that the genus is not confined to the great
depth at which it is reported from the South Atlantic. If
Nauphanta cannot rise to the surface in the latitudes of ‘Tris-
tan d’Acunha, it may be that the elevation of temperature
above its habitat keeps it at great depths. At the higher
latitude of North Greenland, however, the cold zone, in which
Nauphanta lives in the South Atlantic, is about the surface-
temperature. Here then, as far as thermal conditions go, the
Medusa can rise to the surface. We here encounter what I
believe will be found to be an influence of more important
character in the modification of Medusan life at great depths
than the depth of water itself. Medusa are sensitive to
changes of temperature in the ocean ; so sensitive, in fact, that
for many genera the lines of demarcation between warm and
cold oceanic currents are often dead lines to these delicate
creatures. It is well known that certain genera can be frozen
without being killed by the change, and that Meduse suffer
less from a diminution in temperature than from an elevation
of the same. ‘This is particularly true of those genera, like
Aurelia, Sarsia, and others, which habitually inhabit cold
water. A temperature of +70° I. is fatal to them, while
many tropical forms will easily live even in higher tempera-
tures. ‘l'emperature in the ocean has drawn invisible lines
in the distribution of Medusz in depth as well as latitude ;
and it is at present very difficult to separate this cause from
that of pressure in the bathymetrical limits of the jelly-fishes.
The poverty of our knowledge of the ranges of temperatures
which jelly-fishes can endure is too great to admit of an

generalizations of value on this question. Still there are no
tacts of more vital importance in the discussion of the ques-
tion of whether there are deep-sea Acraspeda than those

* «Report on the Medusie collected by the Lady Franklin Bay Expe-
dition,’ Lieut. A. W. Greely commanding. Appendix no. xi.

Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Medusee. 257

which bring information of the thermal limits at which the
Medusee can live.

It would be profitable, if space permitted, to consider other
genera of Acraspeda made known by the ‘ Albatross’ in their
bearings on the question which is the title of this paper.
The three genera already considered present us the strongest
arguments which can be found in the modification of external
and internal anatomy, as indicative of a deep-sea habitat.

“Those Meduse,”’ writes Heckel, “‘ may be regarded with
greater probability as permanent and characteristic inhabitants
of the deep-sea, which have either adapted themselves by
special modifications of organization to such a mode of life,
or which give evidence by their primitive structure of a re-
mote phylogenetic origin.” He then enumerates those which
he places in this category, among which are the two remark-
able genera Atolla and Nauphanta. “It is by no means
certain,” writes Hackel, “that all the eighteen Meduse
described below (Report on ‘ Challenger’ Medusee) are con-
stant inhabitants of the deep sea.”” We have discussed the
argument drawn from two of the most characteristic of the
Acraspeda, viz. Atolla and Nauphanta, and can readily sub-
scribe to this statement as far as these are concerned.

The resemblance of Nauphantopsis and Atolla to Ephyra
is believed to have a morphological significance ; Ephyra is
thought to be the ancestral form of the Acraspeda, and these
so-called deep-sea Meduse still preserve the ancestral form
with small modifications, except in size, repetition of organs,
and certain other characters. Of the development of Atolla
or of the Collaspidee we know nothing, and yet a knowledge
of this subject is possibly to reveal the solution of important
questions. If the mode of growth should prove to be a direct
development without a Scyphostoma, it would certainly in-
crease my belief that these Meduse somehow resemble the
ancestral forms. I have already elsewhere shown that among
the Hydromeduse with alternation of generations and those
with a direct development, the latter method is normal, while
the former is a secondary modification. Among Acraspeda
also the direct development of Pelagia is the ancestral
method, while the formation of a Scyphostoma is a secondary
modification. We should expect to find in Afolla a direct
development if it be an ancestral genus. [rom its mode of
life in the high seas we should also expect the same *.

* I believe the Lucernarians are degenerate adult Acraspeda, which
have attached themselves to the bottom much in the same way as Cas-

stopea frondosa, and become modified in consequence. While it may be
said that they are homologous to the Scyphostoma stage, it is not thought

258 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse.

Abandoning for the present as insufficient any evidence
which might be adduced from the structure of the Meduse
themselves, and passing to the recorded facts in relation to
bathymetrical distribution, we find no more satisfaction from
this consideration. It would appear that the strongest argu-
ments for the existence of nomadic deep-sea Medusze of the
Acraspeda are found by Heckel in the following genera *.
The names in brackets are authorities for distribution.

1. Pectanthis.—Surtace (Heckel).

2. Pectyllis—200-600 fath. (Heckel).

3. Pectis.—1260 fath. (Heckel).

4. Cunarcha.— Possibly captured in drawing up the

lead ” (Heckel).

5. Afginura.— 2150 fath. apparently ” (Haeckel).

6. Periphylla.—Surface (Fewkes).

7. Periphema.—1975 fath. (Heeckel).

8. Tesserantha.—2160 fath. (Heckel).

9. Atolla.—2040 fath. (Heckel) ; surface (Fewkes).
10. Nauphanta.—1425 fath. (Heeckel) ; surface (Fewkes).

Of the above genera the ‘ Albatross’ has collected many
specimens of Periphylla and Atolla from the surface of the
ocean. Greely collected a species of Nauphanta from the
icy waters of the surface of Lady Franklin Bay ; Periphema
is so closely allied to Periphylla that we may well hesitate to
accept its limitation to the great depth at which it is recorded
(1975 fath.) ; Pectyllis is recorded from 200 to 600 fath.
In the present use of the word deep-sea this genus can hardly
be regarded as preeminently a deep-sea Medusa. There
remain t Pectis (1260 fath.) and Zesserantha (2160 fath.) as

that they are ancestral. They are in reality secondarily modified, for the
ancestral method of development is direct, without an attached young, in
Acraspeda as in Craspedota.

While the primitive structure and relationship of Atolla, Nauphanta,
and Nauphantopsis would seem to ally them closely to Ephyra, and stamp
them as less modified than such genera as Cyanea, in certain anatomical
details they might be regarded as higher even than the last mentioned.
We cannot consequently draw from their simple relationship to an em-
bryonic form the conclusion that they have retained that likeness on
account of the simpler conditions of deep-water habitat, Nor is the
argument drawn from the supposed abortion of the sense-body conclusive
as far as these Meduse are concerned, although it looks plausible.

* Op, ct. Introduction, p. i.

+ Cunarcha was “ possibly captured in drawing up the lead,’ and AZyi-
nura, 2150 fath., “ apparently.”

Asa bit of positive evidence that Afolla is a deep-sea Medusa, Mr.

Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. 259

the only genera in the above list which can be regarded as
purely deep-sea in their habit. Hach of these is described
from single specimens, and the former is closely allied to well-
known surface-genera, ‘The foundation in observation for a
belief in the existence of nomadic deep-sea Meduse, as far as
recorded depths go, is certainly not all that might be desired.

Possibly a stronger argument for the existence of deep-
sea Acraspeda may be drawn from the structure of the
interesting free genus of Lucernaride (Lucernaria bathyphila,
Heck.). This species is recorded from 540 fath. The fixed
Lucernarie are found in shallow water. The argument
drawn from the structure of the free Lucernarian would be
stronger if the so-called attached species had been brought up
from great depths or if Scyphostoma had been reported from
the ocean bed. It is suggested that those who have in
charge the collecting of deep-sea animals observe with care
the contents of the dredges for attached Scyphostoma and
Lucernarians, and it is particularly desirable, trom a morpho-
logical standpoint, that the development of such genera as
Atolla be known. If it can be shown that this and related
Medusz have an indirect development, with an attached
Strobila living in great depths, they may rightly be called
deep-sea Medusee. A nomadic jelly-fish, limited in bathy-
metrical habitat, could best fulfil its conditions of life by
having a direct development without attached larval con-
ditions.

Why cannot we suppose that deep-sea Meduse can live at
the surface and also at great depths? Why look for bathy-
metrical zones in the ocean for nomadic animals? The main
reason seems to be the exceptional nature of such a wide dis-
tribution in places so widely separated in physical character-
istics. It may be possible for a Medusa to live equally well
at the surface and under a pressure of 2000 fath. of water, and
in the different temperatures of these two regions ;_ but if they
can endure these widely different conditions, they do not
resemble other animals and their own relatives from the
shallow waters. ‘The logical inference from what is known
of the differences between the facies of deep-sea animals on
the ocean-bottom and those from the littoral zone would seem
to be true of animals which are not fixed to the ground nor

Thomas Lee, who has seen the genus when collected, informed me, after
I had shown him a specimen of Afolla, that he remembers it in deep-
water trawls. In new collections made by the ‘ Albatross’ in 1885-86,
Atolla in several instances is recorded from the ‘ surface,” and one of
those described in the collections of 1883-84 is recorded from the surface.

260 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Coleoptera.

dependent upon it, viz. that there are bathymetric limits in
the ocean, even to nomadic animals apparently as helpless as
the Meduse.

In closing my short discussion of the question of deep-sea
nomadic Medusan life it may be said that, as far as the data
thus far gathered go, neither the recorded depths nor the
structure of the genera considered demonstrates that we have
a serial distribution of free Meduse in bathymetrical zones.
While our present information is insufficient to answer the
question, 7t seems to me that the case is much stronger than
the arguments which can be advanced in its support. There
is little doubt that Medusan life has bathymetrical limita-
tions. Our well-known surface Medusz probably cannot live
at great depths, and their places are probably taken there by
others; still, until there are more exact data bearing on this
conclusion, it cannot be demonstrated to be true. What is
now needed is, in the first place, an accurate determination
of the depth at which Medusz of different genera are cap-
tured, and secondly a more accurate study of the peculiarities of
anatomy and development of those which are supposed to be
thus limited in habitat. It is also equally necessary that the
surface-fauna should be better known for comparison. ‘There
are at present a few marine stations in the Mediterranean and
North Atlantic where the study of surface-life is zealously
prosecuted; but it is only when the Miiller’s net has been
used with equal zeal in the South Atlantic, the Indian Ocean,
and Pacific that we can have a basis to work upon. An
exploring vessel on a cruise through these waters is not
enough. It is a reconnaissance. ‘There must be established
permanent marine stations where the study will be carried on
year after year for a long time in one locality.

XXXL—WNew Species of Lucanide, Cetoniide, and Bupres-
tides in the British Museum. By CuHarRLes O. WATER-
HOUSE.

Lucanide.

Hexarthrius Davison?, n. sp.

Color Lucant cervi et eodem sat similis, capite thoraceque magis
rugosis; mandibulis elongatis, nitidis, nigris, apicem versus
inclinatis, intus quadridentatis, dente basali valido. ¢.

Long. 23-26 lin. ; mandib. 113-13 ln.

he.
gn, te

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Coleoptera. 261

Allied to H. Bowringii and of nearly the same form, but
with the elytra sculptured as in Lucanus cervus, except that
the suture is smooth and shining. Head very broad, a little
broader than long, flatter than in H. Bowringit, very closely
and moderately coarsely granular, much wider in front of the
eyes than behind, where there isa slight swelling. Mandibles
very obscurely granulose-punctate, much less deflexed than in
most species of this genus, very straight, curving in at the
apex, somewhat flat on their upper surface, vertical and flat
on the outside. ‘There is a strong tooth close to the base
(obliquely truncate at its apex in the larger example), a small
obtuse tooth at the middle, a larger one near the apex, and a
very small one close to the apex. The clypeus is deflexed,
angularly produced in the middle, with a short, truncate, re-
flexed lobe on each side, which gives the clypeus (when
viewed from above) the appearance of being deeply emargi-
nate. Thorax as in H. Lowringii, but not quite so short,
very slightly narrowed in front, densely granular, the granu-
lation less distinct and the surface more shining on the disk.
Scutellum densely and finely punctured. Prosternal process
narrow and obtusely keeled, not broad and flat, as in H.
Bowringit.

ti Animallai, Koimbatur (W. Davison, Esq.). Brit.
Mus.

Cetoniidz.

Genyodonta Jacksont, n. sp.

General form and colour of G. flavomaculata. Brownish
yellow, the elytra with a yellow patch on each, as in flavo-
maculata, not extending to the apex. Thorax with four
black spots. Scutellum with two black spots. Each elytron
has a distinct black spot at the base close to the scutellum.
There is a black spot on the mesothoracic epimera, another on
the metathoracic epimera, usually four spots on the meta-
sternum, and one on the underside of the posterior femora.

3. Head as in G. flavomaculata, but with the ridge at the
base of the antennz more elevated, more compressed, with its
angle obtusely rounded, not nearly so porrect as in Gt. quad-
ricornis. Length 114 lines.

Hab. Massai, 8.E. Africa. Brit. Mus.

This species may at once be distinguished from its allies
by the black spot at the base of the elytra, which are more-
over much smoother than in G. flavomaculata.

Mr. Jackson met with this species in considerable numbers,
and there is very little variation among the specimens.

262 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Coleoptera.

Macronota ochracetpes, n. sp.

Nigra, supra surda, subtus nitida; capite vittis duabus, thorace
vittis quatuor et punctis duobus basalibus ochraceis; elytris
rubris, sutura, plaga communi quadrata mediana (medio gutta
ochracea notata), vitta obliqua humerali (plaga mediana attin-
gente) maculaque apicali nigris; abdominis lateribus ochraceo-
maculatis, pygidio maculis tribus ochraceis ornato; clypeo, tibiis
tarsisque rufo-ochraceis.

Long. 10 lin.

Very near to M. quadrivittata, but larger and with some-
what different arrangement of colour. ‘The front of the
clypeus is reddish yellow and shining, less closely punctured.
The thorax is rather broader, impressed at the posterior part.
The four stripes are placed nearly as in M/. quadrivittata, but
they do not reach the base of the thorax, and at the base
there are two short oblique spots not quite united to the two
median stripes. The scutellum has a very narrow yellow
border. ‘The oblique black stripe extending from the shoulder
to the square patch on the suture unites with the patch in one
of the examples. There is a very small yellow spot on the
humeral stripe in one specimen. The spots on the pygidium
are large, the middle one elongate. Antenne reddish yellow,
with a black spot on the basal joint. ‘The femora are black,
with the upper surface and apex reddish. ‘The anterior tibiz
have two teeth besides the apical one. ‘There is a round
yellow spot on the outer part of the posterior coxe.

Hab, Animallai Hills, Koimbatur (W. Davison, Hsq.).
Brit. Mus.

Macronota flavosparsa, i. sp.

Nigra, opaca; capite vittis duabus flavis; clypeo vix emarginato,
margine perparum reflexo; thorace vittis quatuor maculisque
baseos obliquis flavis; scutello flavo-limbato; elytris macula
communi mediana, altera apicali, duabus lateralibus flavis ; cor-
pore subtus nigro nitido, ad latera plus minusye flavo.

Elytris vel rubris nigro-vittatis, vel totis nigris.

Long. 7 jin.

Very similar to M/. quadrivittata 8 in general appearance,
but the two middle stripes on the thorax converge posteriorly
and generally unite at a short distance from the base, where
there are two separate oblique spots. The yellow stripes on
the head are rather broad, and there is a rather large spot
above each eye. The thorax is parallel at the sides poste-
riorly, obliquely narrowed anteriorly, impressed at the basal

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Coleoptera. 263

lobe. The punctures on the disk are moderately close
together, confluent and linear at the sides and anterior angles,
yellow. The lateral stripe unites with the discoidal stripe at
the front margin. The elytra are dull red, the suture, a
quadrangular patch (common to both elytra) at the middle, a
stripe from the humeral callosity to the middle patch, and a
sublateral stripe black. ‘There is a yellow spot across the
suture about the middle, a lateral spot on the margin before
the middle, and a second behind the middle, and a yellow
mark at the apex, which, with its companion on the other
elytron, forms an a. ‘There are a few other small yellow
spots scattered irregularly over the surface. The pygidium
is almost entirely yellow, as are all the lateral parts of the
une creide of the insect. Club of the antenne moderately
ong.

Variety 1, 6.—The discoidal stripes on the thorax nar-
rower, the lateral ones not extended to the anterior angles of
the thorax. Elytra black, with the yellow spots as in the
preceding. Pygidium black, with a basal line (emitting a
short line from its middle) pale yellow. Pale yellow at the
sides of the underside of the insect more broken and forming
transverse spots at the sides of the abdomen.

Hab. Animallai Hills, Koimbatur (W. Davison, Esq.).
Brit. Mus.

Variety 2, ? .—Clypeus distinctly but not deeply emargi-
nate, strongly punctured, the margin not reflexed. Discoidal
stripes of the thorax broad, united posteriorly, and forming a
V; lateral stripes not extending to the anterior angles. ‘The
black on the elytra much more extensive and occupying the
greater part of the surface; the lateral spots absent; the
apex yellow, but the yellow does not ascend the suture. The
strie near the suture are yellow. The pygidium with a very
narrow basal line and a very broad central patch yellow.
Underside of the insect with large yellow spots at the sides,
those on the abdomen transverse and divided on the margin.

Hab. French Rocks, Seringapatam (J/rs. Hamilton).

Variety 3, 9 .—Like no. 2, but with the lateral stripe of
the thorax nearly united with the basal spot. The elytra
almost entirely red, with only two short black stripes. ‘The
spots at the sides of the abdomen simple. Club of the an-
tenne a trifle shorter.

Hab. French Rocks.

264 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Opaque Scarlet Spherules

Variety 4, ?.—Similar to no. 3, but with the discoidal
stripes of the thorax uniting before the middle and continued
posteriorly as one broad band to the basal spots with which
it unites; the lateral stripe reduced to two very small spots.
The red colour of the elytra prevails ; the yellow at the apex
inconspicuous. Pygidium with an oblong spot in the middle.
Abdomen with transverse spots at the sides.

Hab. Koimbatur (MM. J. Walhouse, Esq.).

Buprestide.

Chrysochroa alternans, n. sp.

C. fulgidissime affinis et similis, obscurior, creberrime fortius punc-
tata, seneo-viridis, subaurata, thorace elytrisque cupreo-rufo-
vittatis.

Long. 17 lin.

Very similar to C. fulgidissima, but less brilliant, with less
golden tints ; relatively shorter and more strongly punctured
throughout, especially on the disk of the thorax. The elytra.
are distinctly enlarged at the middle, and are consequently
less gradually narrowed to the apex, which is slightly trun-
cate, the sutural angle slightly dentiform. ‘The coste are
strongly marked.

Hab. Loo Choo. Brit. Mus.

XX XII.—On the Nature of the Opaque Scarlet Spherules
found in the Chambers and Canals of many Fossilized
Foraminifera. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &e.

In the number of the ‘Annals’ for last month (p. 172),
while describing two new species belonging to the Loftusiide,,
I had oceasion to lay particular stress on the presence in
them, as well as in Loftusia persica, of “ opaque scarlet
spherules,” which, although for the most part dispersed
through the substance of the fossil, are nevertheless fre-
quently to be seen in the chambers of the foraminiferal tests
that have been taken in by each of these species, from
which it may fairly be assumed that all had this origin ;
and these spherules I have further assumed to be representa-
tive of the reproductive bodies of the Foraminifera from
observations which led to this conclusion (p. 177). Such

found in many Fossilized Foraminifera. 265

observations, however, it was necessary to summarize briefly
on that occasion, as my object then was chiefly to describe
the new species of Loftusiide and not the reproductive process
of the Foraminifera. But now that the former has been
done I propose to return to the latter (so far as the scarlet
spherules are concerned) more particularly, and for this pur-
pose it seems best to describe how I came to regard the scarlet
spherules as reproductive bodies, and thus recognized them in
Loftusia persica.

In limine, then, it should be premised that there is a small
portion of Kocene formation on the western side of India, in
the neighbourhood of the towns of Surat and Broach, in the
province of Guzerat, which is thus described by Medlicott
and Blanford in their ‘ Geology of India,’ pt. i. p. 340 (1879),
viz. :—‘‘ North-west of Surat are thick beds of ferruginous
clay, assuming, where exposed, the characteristic brown crust
and pseudo-scoriaceous character of laterite, from which they
differ in no respect.” ‘These rest on “ the traps,” and “ with
them are interstratified beds of gravel or conglomerate con-
taining agate pebbles (the agates being derived from the traps)
and limestone, sometimes nearly pure, but more frequently
sandy, argillaceous, or ferruginous, and abounding in Num-
mulites and other fossils. ‘The thickness of the whole can
only be roughly estimated as between 500 and 1000 feet.”
From this formation, about midway between Broach and
Surat and the town of Bang, at the village of Wasna or
Wansa, that is about 39 miles west-north-west of Broach, the
late Major Fulljames picked up some fragments, which he
sent to me at the Bombay branch of the Royal Asiatic Society
in the year 1853, and of which an account will be found in
the ‘ Journal’ of that society (vol. v. p. 624 &c.).

Some years afterwards, that is in 1861, I noticed that some
of the fragments contained foraminiferal tests in a brilliantly
coloured and infiltrated state, to examine which more particu-
larly I broke up a piece, and from it extracted several small
specimens of Nummulites and Orbitoides, which, on being
ground down to a smooth surface and thus applied to
a “glass slip’? by means of Canada balsam, presented
under a low power of the microscope sections of unwonted
structural clearness and definition, in which the whole of the
complicated and delicate parts, both shelly and sarcodic,
of the Foraminifera could be seen even better than in the
recent specimen. I urther, they were more or less charged
with the “opaque scarlet spherules ”’ in such situations that
they could not be regarded as anything but fossilized parts
of the recently living animal ; nor could any opinion be formed

266 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Opaque Scarlet Spherules

of their nature than that they were the representatives in a
mineralized state of its reproductive elements.

I therefore did not hesitate to regard them as such, and so,
for confirmation, gave them, in connexion with similar objects
in recent specimens of Operculina, as illustrations of the repro-
ductive process, probably in the Foraminifera generally
(( Annals,’ 1861, vol. viil. pp. 318 and 319, 325, and 451,
and pl. xvii. figs. 12-15 and 1,0). But being then in India
I was not aware that Max Schultze had previously noticed
and delineated similar bodies in the chambers of recent
Rotalie (§Organismus der Polythalamien,’ 1854, p. 27),
nor that he had shortly after, viz. two years, verified this in
a species of Meliola (Miiller’s ‘ Archiv,’ 1856, Nos. 1 and 2,
p- 165, Taf. vi. B).

However, here I left the subject, and here it would have
remained for myself had not accident thrown in my way the
fossil for which I have proposed the name of ‘Stoliczkiella Theo-
baldi,” wherein I was surprised to find, both dispersed through
its substance and in the chambers of the enclosed foraminiferal
tests themselves, red bodies similar in every respect to those
observed in the Wasna specimens, as stated in the communi-
cation to which I have alluded. I then sought for the same
in my mounted slices of Loftusia persica, where they were
equally abundant; and finally found them again equally
plentiful in that species for which I have proposed the name
of “ Millarella cantabrigiensis”’ (1. c.). So that, but for these
coincidences and this chain of evidence, which an experience
of twenty-seven years has thus brought to light, the nature
of the Loftusiide in this respect might have remained unknown
for a considerable time.

It should be noticed here that the only coloured portions in
the infiltrated specimens from Wasna are the sarcoditerous
cavities and the scarlet spherules, while the shelly parts
remain opaque white or transparent, as the case may be;
thus the chambers and the intercameral tubes, together with
the canal-system, are all more or less filled with bright ochre-
yellow substance, while the reproductive bodies vary both in
point of colour and size, as will be stated hereafter, but are
of course most striking by contrast where composed of opaque
scarlet or bright rusty-red substance, which renders their
presence so peculiarly distinct in these instances that they may
be counted under the microscope as easily as peas in the palm
of the hand.

Among the specimens of infiltrated Foraminifera from the
Eocene of the locality mentioned I am enabled, trom the
varied sections which they present, to select a series which

found in many Fossilized Foraminifera. 267

clearly demonstrates the following facts as regards the “scarlet
spherules,” viz. :—

At the earliest stage in which they can be distinguished
they are colourless or slightly opaque, indistinct, and situated
singly in the cells of an areolar structure which fills the
chamber of the Nummulite. Next they present themselves
in a more defined form, of an opaque yellowish-white colour,
but still adherent to each other or clustered. In a third stage
they are more separated, semitransparent, and of a brown
colour, recalling to mind, from their sphericity, when imbedded
in clear calespar, ova in the “ hard roe of a herring.” Lastly,
they present themselves as the “ opaque scarlet spherules ”’
above mentioned.

In size the “scarlet spherules”” vary from 1-600th in.
down to about 1-7000th in. in diameter, which is that of the
interior of the intercameral tubes, in which they may be seen
to be arranged linearly, by reason of the narrowness of the
tubes, while in their larger forms they may also be seen in
the chambers and in the vessels of the canal-system, grouped
in the former, and linearly arranged if in plurality in the
latter, for the same reason. But, wherever they may be,
they are always confined to the sarcodiferous cavities of the
test, by which they cannot be confounded with any cnorganic
mineralization.

In number they are most abundant where developed in the
areolar tissue of the chambers, when they are of medium size,
and each areolar cell appears to be tenanted by only one
body ; when a little larger and in an opaque scarlet state they
are less numerous, but vary much in this respect as well as in
size in the chambers where they may be present, unless one
or more have passed into one of the vessels of the canal-
system, in which case they are from its narrowness, as before
stated, single, or if in plurality linearly disposed; lastly, in
their largest form, that is when 1-G600th in. in diameter, they
are generally single in a chamber where there appears to be
nothing else, when they may be seen to be composed of a
delicate spherical capsule filled with extremely minute opaque
red spherules.

Under such circumstances it is hardly possible to regard
these bodies otherwise than as elements of reproduction,
even if we had not recent specimens (where of course they are
not red, as this is the effect of mineralization) to compare
them with; while they are so abundant in some specimens
of these infiltrated Nummulites as to fill not only the large
marginal chamber but the whole of the shoulder-like processes
of this cavity, which are extended laterally on both sides of

268 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Opaque Scarlet Spherules

the Nummulite up to the summit of the disk, thus according
with the extremely prolific nature of these Rhizopodous
animals, as indicated by the accumulation of their tests in
deposits of bygone ages, as well as those of the present day,
in localities where they prevail.

What relation the large opaque scarlet spherule has to the
smaller ones I am not able to say, nor is it my business here
to inquire. Suffice it to observe that it has not yet been
shown that sexual reproduction exists in the Foraminifera, on
which this difference in size may be thought to bear, however
clear it may be that some of the opaque scarlet bodies in their
living and consequently uncoloured state may become new
individuals.

Another point worth noticing in the infiltrated Foraminifera
of the specimens from the EKocene of Western India to which
I have alluded is that they appear not only to have died in
the midst of their fecundity, as many of the chambers are
literally crammed with these spherules of one colour or
another, but from their wonderful state of preservation gene-
rally to have undergone the metamorphism of fossilization
before their soft parts had passed into dissolution. Some-
times, however, in some parts the red colouring-matter of the
scarlet spherules appears to have become diffused, as if the
material which takes the red colour in mineralization had
previously been in a diffused state.

Although the Foraminifera taken in by Loftusta persica,
Stoliczkiella, aud Millarella do not present the brilliant colora-
tion generally which renders the different structures so clear
and impressive in the Wasna specimens, their forms are ren-
dered recognizable by the presence of the white shelly skele-
ton or test with the ‘ opaque scarlet spherules”’ not only in
their cameral cavities, but scattered through the mineralized
substance of all three fossil species, which, when living, appear
to have fed upon them so abundantly that in some parts the
structure is rendered absolutely red by their presence, at once
evidencing the great fertility of the Foraminifera, as before
stated, and the probable object for which they had been taken
in by the Loftusta. Neither is the colour influenced in this
respect by that of the deposit in which they are found im-
bedded, tor that ot Lojtusva persica is in grey limestone and
that of Millarella cantabrigiensis in chalk.

In the other specimens of Millarella to which I have
alluded (footnote, p. 180 /oc. cit.) the same kind of foraminiferal
detritus is present, but there are no “scarlet spherules,”
from which it must be inferred that the tests were taken in and
fossilized under different circumstances, that is that they were

found in many Fossilized Foraminifera. 269

not in a state of fecundity like those containing the scarlet
spherules, or that the fossilization failed to render these repro-
ductive bodies red. Thus the presence of these bodies in a
red-coloured state is of no specific value.

Moreover, I have observed them scantily here and there in
Nummulites contained in a specimen of highly ferruginized
yellow deposit from Upper Sind, which is almost entirely com-
posed of the larger forms of the Foraminifera, while for the
most part their chambers are charged with the same kind of
bodies in a defined but uncoloured or whitish-yellow state, like
those above mentioned in the Wasna specimens.

Again, when I had discovered them in the Wasna speci-
mens so wonderfully preserved, I was induced to obtain more
if possible, so wrote to a friend at Broach to get me some;
but all that I received in reply was a packet of Nummulites
and Orbitoides, each about the size of a shilling, which cer-
tainly possessed the yellow colour of the deposit, but without
the presence of any of the opaque scarlet spherules or even
any thing beyond the definition of structure observed in
Nummulites generally. Were I to seek for specimens bril-
liantly coloured, similar to those of the village of Wasna, I
should be inclined to search for them in the most laterttized
parts of the deposit, where they have become brick-red by
the profuse diffusion of ferric oxides that characterizes this
formation.

In speculating as to the nature of the animal of the Lof-
tusiide in the paper to which I have alluded (p. 181), I
omitted to notice that at the circumference of the specimen of
Millarella cantabrigiensis the structure indicates that the
whole commenced in a reticulated plastic substance, in which
the “pits or vacuities’”’ brought to view in the horizontal
section represent the interstices, while, as the animal increased
in size, this structure inwardly became more compact and
then developed the “circular divisions” or inspissations
represented in fig. 6 of my illustrations (pl. xiii. 2. c.). To
which I would add that the so-called “ labyrinthic”’ structure
of Loftusia persica may be the fossil representative of a
similarly composed solid plasmic structure, although it now
looks tubular.

How tar these organisms may be allied to typical Fora-
minifera I am not prepared to say; but of this I am certain,
that if such Rhizopodous organisms are to be included among
them, they should have a distinct and appropriate diagnosis.

N.B.—To get a clear impression of the composition of a

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol.i. 19

270 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera.

fossil under the microscope from the surface of a section it
should, when not overlaid permanently by Canada balsam
and a glass cover, be overlaid for the occasion by a little water
and a glass cover; otherwise the roughness of the dry surface
alone, however much it may be polished, will render the
examination most imperfect and unsatisfactory.

XXXIII.—On Longicorn Coleoptera of the Family Lamiide.
By Cuarues J. GAnAN, M.A., Assistant in the Zoological
Department of the British Museum.

[Plate XVI. figs. 1-5.]

AUTHALODES, n. g.

Head of moderate size and strongly concave between its an-
tennal tubercles ; the latter rather short and somewhat distant ;
front convex, subequilateral. Last joint of palpi ovate-cylin-
drical. Antenne scarcely longer than half the body; scape
stout, subcylindrical, slightly curved, somewhat expanded at
the apex, the latter with a small but distinct cicatrice ; fourth
joint equal in length to the second and third united, distinctly
shorter than the scape.

Prothorax acutely spined at the sides and with large
rounded tubercles on the disk.

Elytra oblong, rough, with alternating rows of larger and
smaller granules, rounded at the apex, and each elytron
having at its base a small median projection.

Legs subequal, the posterior a little longer than the ante-
rior or middle; femora linear; middle tibiee emarginate.

Pro- and mesosterna simple. Metasternum moderately
elongate.

This genus is allied to Trachystola, of which it has the
general form, but from which it may be readily distinguished
by the short third joint of its antenne, by the peculiar tuber-
culation of its thorax, and the less prominent median projec-
tion at the base of each elytron.

Lthalodes verrucosus, n. sp. (Pl. XVI. fig. 1.)

Niger, squamositate fusca indutus; antennis concoloribus; pro-
thorace lateribus acute spinoso, dorso quinque tuberculis ; elytris
seriato-granulatis, apicibus rotundatis.

Long. 23-28 mm., lat. 10-11 mm.

Hab. North China.

of the Family Lamiide. 271

Black, covered (excepting the tubercles of the thorax and
the summits of the granules of the elytra) with a dark brown
squamosity. Head impunctate. Prothorax acutely spined
at the sides, with five tubercles on the disk, of which one
(median), much larger than the others, is emarginate behind
and somewhat heart-shaped ; two are placed one on each side
in front of this, while the remaining two, quite small and, at
first sight, scarcely noticeable, lie one on each side of and
close to the large median tubercle, whose free lateral borders
overlap and partly conceal them.

Elytra with four rows of larger and five of smaller granules
on each, and in addition a short row of smaller granules on
the outer margin of each extending about one third of its
length from the base. The sutural row of smaller granules
appears double at the base, owing to the presence of a few
granules of larger size on each side of the scutellum, and
extending in a curve on to the median process of the base.

Epepeotes uncinatus, n. sp. (Pl. XVI. fig. 2.)

Niger, viridi-griseo pubescens; capite et prothorace supra albo tri-
vittatis, vitta media prothoracis angusta, evanida; elytris albo
bivittatis, nigro maculatis, apicibus truncatis.

Long. 14—28 mm., lat. 43-9 mm.

Hab. North India.

Black, with a greyish-green pubescence, which is darker
on the head and prothorax. Head with three white vitte on
the vertex and one behind the lower lobe of each eye. Thorax
with three white vitte above, the middle one narrow and
faint, and in some specimens almost entirely absent ; a white
vitta on each side just above the coxa, continued on to the
sides of the breast. The lateral vittee on the dorsal side of
the thorax are continued on to the elytra through their entire
length as two more or less distinct white bands; in some
specimens these bands appear as nothing more than lighter
portions of the pubescence, passing gradually into the darker
shades on each side.

Elytra with numerous small black spots, apices truncate,
the angles not produced. Abdomen with a single row of
white spots on each side. Legs and first joint of antenne
coloured like the rest of the body ; the remaining joints of the
antenne in the male fuscous, in the female dark grey, with
their apices fuscous. Mesosternum feebly tubercled.

This very distinct species bears, in the British-Museum
collection, the manuscript name which I have adopted.

19*

Zhe Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera

Though an apparently common species, I have been unable
to find any description of it.

Epepeotes albomaculatus, n. sp.

E. punctulato affinis, sed differt maculis elytrorum majoribus et pau-
cioribus, vitta media thoracis brevi, abdomine quatuor seriebus
maculorum.

Long. 25-30 mm,

Hab. North India.

In colour and general appearance this species much re-
sembles L. punctulatus, Westw. ; it is, however, a little larger,
the median vitta of the thorax stops short behind at about
one third of its length; the white spots on the elytra are
much larger and fewer in number; they vary in size, the
largest being at the middle of each elytron. The elytra are
quite smooth behind and without any trace of caring, their
apices are transversely truncate, with all the angles very
slightly produced. Hach of the first four abdominal segments
has two white spots, the fifth one spot, on each side. ‘The
three specimens are apparently all females.

The species (. punctulatus) referred to above is, I believe,
synonymous with H. (Monohammus) guttatus, Guér., which is
placed in the Munich Catalogue in the genus Huoplia. A
specimen of the former in the British-Museum collection is
Dejean’s Monohammus guttatus, and a second specimen of
Chevrolat’s collection is ticketed guttata, Guér. To the genus
Epepeotes must also be added the Monohammus lateralis,
Guér. Lpepeotes meridianus, Pasc., is probably synonymous
with it.

Pelargoderus flavicornis,n. sp. (Pl. XVI. fig. 3.)

d. Niger, griseo pubescens, fusco mixtus ; antennis corpore paulo
longioribus, articulis primo et secundo nigris, ceteris flavis, apici-
bus fusco-ferrugineis ; prothorace lateribus modice tuberculato ;
quoque elytro pone medium macula magna, nigra, nitida; apici-
bus subrotundatis.

Long. 26 mm., lat. 9 mm.

Hab. Nias Island.

Black, with a short greyish pubescence mixed with fuscous.
Antenne in the male a little longer than the body, the scape
and second joint black, the remaining joints rather thick,
flavous at the base and dark ferruginous at the tips. Thorax
with fairly well-marked lateral spines. Elytra with a large

of the Family Lamiide. 273

black shining spot on each behind the middle ; apices slightly
obliquely truncate or almost rounded. Legs greyish pubes-
cent; anterior tibia in the male somewhat twisted, feebly
dentate along their lower border, with a distinct tooth near
their tarsal end. The first two joints of the anterior tarsus in
the same sex somewhat laterally expanded. Mesosternum
with a small conical tubercle.

This species is very distinct, almost generically so, by
reason of the shortness and greater thickness of its antenna.
In no other species of Pelargoderus are the antenne in the
male less than twice the length of the body. The greater
size of the spots on its elytra and the lighter colour of its
antenne are also marks which will easily differentiate it from
other species.

Monohammus rivulosus (Pasc. MS8.), n. sp.

Omnino pubescens, punctis dispersis nonnullis elytrorum exceptis ;
capite, prothorace, cruribus et corpore subtus griseis; elytris
brunneis albo vittatis; antennis griseis, articulis a tertio apicibus

fuscis.
Long. 18-26 mm., lat. 6-9 mm.

Hab. North India (Assam) and Laos.

Head, thorax, the underside of the body, and the legs dark
grey and somewhat glossy. Antenne grey, with the tips of «
the third to the last joint dark brown. ‘The elytra are of a
light brown colour, streaked with dull white; one broad
streak sets out from the shoulders, and, after passing ob-
liquely inwards, runs close to and parallel with the suture for
the rest of its distance; posteriorly a very narrow stripe of
brown divides it into two ; in addition to these there are two
narrow stripes of white posteriorly, all uniting towards the
apex, and a short white streak below the shoulder. The
elytra are minutely punctured and have also some large,
widely scattered, shallow punctures, which give them a some-
what spotted appearance. The apices are rounded.

Monohammus ciliatus, n. sp.

®neo-niger, sparse ochraceo-pubescens, prothorace brevi, lateribus
fortiter spinosis, spinis recurvis; elytris punctulatis, ad basin
minute granulatis, apicibus rotundatis, angulis suturalibus leviter
productis ; antennis fuscis, subtus ciliatis.

Long. 27 mm., lat. 9 mm.

Hab. China.

Black, with an ochraceous pubescence entirely covering

274 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera

the head, legs, and underside of the body, but limited to more
or less confluent spots on the thorax and elytra. The head
deeply and triangularly concave between the antennal tu-
bereles, and longitudinally suleate. Thorax much _ broader
than long, the lateral spines very long and directed somewhat
backwards, very closely and finely punctured on the disk, the
latter with a slight median lobe or swelling near its base just
in front of and faintly projecting over the posterior transverse
groove. Elytra very finely granulate at the base, the granules
replaced behind by very close and somewhat fine punctures,
which extend almost to the apex; the latter rounded, with
the sutural angles very slightly produced. The last two joints
of the antenne are broken off in the two specimens under
observation ; the remaining nine are together about as long as
the body, the scape and second joint are covered with an
ochreous pubescence, the other joints show a trace of pubes-
cence above, and all are fringed with hairs beneath. Both
specimens are, I believe, females.

The ciliate antenne and the rather short prothorax, with
its long and recurved lateral spines, are characters which
make the species doubtfully a Monohammus.

Haplohammus speciosus, n. sp.

Pube olivaceo-aurea velutina tectus ; capitis fronte sparse et minute
punctulata; prothorace haud levi, antice et postice transverse
bisulcato ; elytris minute subseriatim punctulatis, apicibus sub-
rotundatis.

Long. 15-23 mm., lat. 5-8 mm.

Hab. China and Hong Kong.

Completely covered with a dense, golden-olive, velvety
pubescence, with shades varying in different lights. The
pubescence is as bright on the under as on the upper side of
the body, is less bright on the legs, and is rather dull on the
front of the head and on the basal joint of the antenne. A
narrow median impressed line along the face and occiput.
Cicatrice of scape pubescent, its margin not quite complete.
Bases of third to eleventh antennal joints yellowish brown,
clothed with a faint grey pubescence (denser in the female),
the apices fuscous ferruginous. The prothorax appears
slightly uneven on the disk; but this is chiefly due to the
ruffled-looking pubescence; it has four transverse grooves,
two anteriorly, of which one is very close to the anterior bor-
der, and two posteriorly ; a faint median lobe or process abuts
slightly on the anterior of the two latter grooves. A few
punctures on each side of the middle of the disk. Elytra

of the Family Lamiide. 275

smooth, minutely and somewhat seriately punctured, the
punctures visible only on the basal half. Apices somewhat
angular, almost rounded. Anterior femora, especially in the
male, stouter than the posterior pairs.

The only described species with which the present one
might be confused are MW. permutans and M. vicinus of Pascoe,
yet from these it is very distinct. In each of these two
species the legs are varied with brown, the prothorax above
is more punctured, and the transverse grooves are scarcely
distinct, while the elytra are coarsely enough granulate at the
base, with small black granules. hey are, taken altogether,
much coarser-looking species.

Haplohammus socius, n. sp.

H, specioso simillimus, sed differt colore pallidiore, capitis fronte
impunctata, prothorace paulo longiore, leviore.
Long. 19-21 mm., lat. 6-7 mm.

Hab. China.

Very like the last species, but with a paler and somewhat
silvery pubescence. he front of the head impunctate ; the
prothorax somewhat longer than in spectosus, more even on
the disk, with an appearance of a faint longitudinal median
ridge, the transverse grooves less distinct, but still quite
apparent.

Dihammus spinipennis, n. sp.

Griseo-fusco pubescens ; antennis concoloribus, ¢ longissimis, scapo
minute et sparse nigro-maculato; prothorace supra inequali,
minute granuloso, subtus plicato ; elytris ad humeros rectis, api-
cibus truncatis, angulis externis valde spinosis.

Long. 32-34 mm., lat. 11-12 mm.

Hab. New Caledonia.

Brownish grey; the antennal tubercles in front, the scape
of the antenne, the underside of the body, and the legs with
minute scattered black spots, due to punctures, from each of
which springs a short white bristle. Head with its sides and
vertex darker than its front. Prothorax somewhat uneven
on the disk, with numerous very small black granules on
each side and extending on to the lateral spines. Scutellum
pale, with a narrow black line in the middle. Elytra straight
at the shoulders, minutely punctured throughout, apices trun-
cate, with the outer angles strongly spined, the sutural angles
not produced. ‘he anterior tibiz in the male slightly toothed
near their tarsal end. First joint of anterior tarsus in the

276 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera

male long, and produced on its outer side into a spur.
Smaller than longicornis, Thoms., and distinguished, inter
alia, by the long spines to the elytra.

Cyriocrates Waterhouser, n. sp. (Pl. XVI. fig. 4.)

Niger, squamosa pubescentia viridi-cerulea; prothorace supra
eequali, macula longitudinali nigra subdepressa media; elytris ad
basin granulis parvis, nigris, maculorum nigrorum tribus seriebus
transversis; antennis 2 corpore paulo brevioribus, articulis basal-
ibus viridi-ceeruleis, cxteris nigris.

Long. 27 mm., lat. 11 mm.

Hab. Nias Island.

Excepting a longitudinal black spot on the thorax and three
(or four) series of spots on the elytra, the body is entirely
covered with a bluish-green squamous pubescence, somewhat
iridescent on parts. Head, including the labrum and base of
the mandibles, entirely bluish green, with a very faint longi-
tudinal median line on the face and vertex. Antenne in
the female a little shorter than the body; the scape, second
joint, and bases of the third and fourth joints blue, the rest
black.

Prothorax with strong and sharp lateral spines; the disk
smooth.

Elytra with some small black granules at the base, with
three transverse, somewhat anteriorly curved bands, each
made up of eight quadrate black spots. (In a second speci-
men there is a fourth indefinite band, which may have been
due to rubbing.) From each of the minute and scattered
punctures of the elytra there springs ashort black hair; these
hairs, of which there are a few also on the prothorax, are only
visible when looked at sideways.

Legs coloured like the rest of the body; the middle tibize,
fringed, like the posterior, with black hairs on their lower
outer border, are but very faintly emarginate.

In colour and markings resembles Monohammus Bowring?,
White, but is otherwise very distinct.

I have named this fine species after my colleague, Mr. C.
O. Waterhouse, to whose help and guidance I owe much.

Aristobia angustifrons, n. sp.

Pallide griseo-pubescens, nigro maculata et plagiata; oculorum lobis
inferioribus grossissimis, approximatis; antennis nigro-annulatis,
articulis primo, tertio et quarto apice villosis; prothorace supra

of the Family Lamiide. 277

vix insequali, maculis nigris parvis plurimis, lateribus spinis longis,
acutis; elytris nigro plagiatis, apicibus emarginatis.
Long. 37 mm., lat. 13 mm.

Hab. Siam.

Clothed with a pale grey pubescence, having spots and
patches of black. Head with very large eyes, and conse-
quently a narrow front; vertex longitudinally sulcate.
Scape of the antenne faintly grey at the base, the apex black
and with a small tuft of black hairs ; the second and bases of
the following joints pale grey, their apices black ; third joint
at its apex with a tuft of black hairs almost entirely sur-
rounding it, the fourth also slightly villose at its extremity.
Head and thorax above thickly dotted with small black spots.
Elytra granulate at the base; a black patch covering the
shoulders and extending inwards almost as far as the scutel-
lum, the latter dark grey ; four velvety black spots or patches
along the margin of each elytron, the largest at the middle,
and four spots on each along the suture. The body under-
neath grey, each of the first four abdominal segments with a
black nitid spot in the middle and two smaller spots on each
side. The femora ringed with black at the ends, pale grey
in the middle. Tibiz with a small black patch near the tarsal
end; the tarsi black, slightly mixed with grey.

By its very large and approximate eyes this species differs
from most species of the genus; in this, as in some other
respects, it seems to come close to A. Voetit, ‘Thoms.

Celosterna (Lamia) pulchellator, Westwood, which appears
in the Munich Catalogue under Batocera, has been referred
by Ritsema to the genus Psaromada, while it is redescribed
and figured by Aurivillius as Huoplia argenteo-maculata
(‘ Entomologisk Tidskrift,’ 1887). Its true affinity is with
the species C. yavana and C. plagiata.

Monohammus carissimus, Pasc., is a Coelosterna, for which
C. tessellata, White, is a synonym.

Celosterna imitator, White, is a Cyriocrates, and closely
enough allied to C. Horsfieldi, Hope.

Rhaphidopsis (Hutenia) elegans, Waterh., is a Calosterna.

Calosterna trifasciella, White, is the type of the following
genus.

EUTANIOPSIS, n. g.

Head broadly concave between the antennal tubercles ;
front rectangular, broader than long. Inferior lobes of the

278 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera

eyes rather small, reaching not more than halfway to the base
of the mandibles. Antenne in the male a little longer than
the body, in the female somewhat shorter; scape stout,
thickest in the middle, with a broad and completely margined
cicatrice at the apex; third joint longer than the scape, he
fourth and following joints gradually decreasing in length
and thickness.

Prothorax subtransverse, somewhat swollen in the middle,
narrower behind than in front of the lateral median spines.

Elytra rather narrow, oblique at the shoulders, with their
sides parallel and apices rounded.

Legs with the femora rather thick in the middle; the
middle tibize entire ; the claws of the tarsi broadly divergent.

The sternal processes are simple, the mesosternal narrowly
truncate behind and not pointed. The anterior coxal cavities
incompletely closed in behind.

Owing to its distinct and completely margined cicatrice this
genus must be placed in the Monohammus-group, in which it
may come after Caelosterna. From the latter genus it is easily
distinguished by its narrower form, its smaller eyes, and
broader front, its elytra oblique at the shoulders, and its ante-
rior coxal cavities open behind.

Type £. trifasciella, White (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1850, p. 18,
pl. xi. fig. 1).

A somewhat variable species from China, Hong Kong, N.
India, and Penang.

Thomson apparently confounded this species with his
Eutenia Javetii. In his description of Hutenia he gives
Javetii as the type; but subsequently trfasciata, White, is
given as the type, and Javetéi as a synonym. I have no
doubt that tr¢fasctata was written in error for tr¢fasciella, and
I feel almost as certain that Thomson was wrong in his
identification of that species. At any rate his description of
Eutenia is quite inapplicable to trifasciella, White.

HAPLOTHRIX, n. g.

Of the somewhat elongated form and general appearance of
the genus Goes.

Head as in Monohammus; antenne (male) more than half
as long again as the body ; scape rather long and slender,
with a narrow and completely margined cicatrice; the third
joint a little longer than the scape, the fourth to tenth decreas-
ing in length, the eleventh nearly twice as long as the
tenth.

Prothorax rather small, laterally spined.

of the Family Lamiide. 279

Legs of equal length; the femora sublinear ; middle tibia
without the slightest trace of tubercle or notch.

Sternal processes simple and rather narrow ; the anterior
coxal cavities distinctly open behind *.

This last character, in conjunction with the entire median
tibiz and the rather narrow sternal processes, will sufficiently
distinguish the genus amongst the group of the Monoham-
mids; there is only one other genus of the group (Huteniopsis,
described in the present paper) in which the anterior coxal
cavities are open behind; from this genus it is very distinct.

May be placed after Mecynitppus and Goes.

Haplothriz simpler, n. sp. (Pl. XVI. figs. 5 & 5 a.)

Omnino dense brunneo-griseo pubescens; antennis concoloribus,
scapi cicatrice pubescente ; prothorace supra equali, spinis lateral-
ibus ad basin angustis ; elytris elongatis, lateribus subparallelis,
apicibus rotundatis ; segmento abdominis quinto ( ¢) ad apicem
media fovea.

Long. 26 mm., lat. 8 mm.

Hab. Siam.

The whole of the body, the legs, and antenne covered with
a unicolorous, dense, drab-grey pubescence. The head im-
punctate. The prothorax smooth above, the lateral spines
rather narrow at the base; the elytra very minutely punc-
tured, the punctures scarcely visible through the pubescence.
The legs all very similar in size and form. The last seg-
ment of the abdomen in the male is slightly emarginate at
the apex, and has, just in front of this emargination, a deep
and somewhat transverse depression.

Pharsalia alboplagiata, n. sp.

P. vinosa affinis, sed major ; prothorace omnino ochraceo, impunctato,
antice et postice transverse sulcato; elytris lateribus ante medium

* In the treatment of the Lamiide this character of the coxal cavities,
so useful in other families, has been hitherto neglected. Lacordaire,
indeed, in his introductory account of the family, states that the anterior
coxal cavities are constantly closed behind. I have shown that there are
exceptions to this rule in the Monohammus-group. In the Batocera-
group of Lacordaire the character is of greater importance, for by means
of it the genera may conveniently be subdivided into two groups, in one
of which the coxal cavities are open behind, in the other closed. The
former includes Latocera and all the genera which most closely resemble
Batocera in their organization, viz. Apriona, Megacriodes, and Rosen-
bergta.

280 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera.

albo-plagiatis, apicibus rotundatis ; antennis fuscis, tenuiter griseo-
pubescentibus.
Long. 21 mm., lat. 7 mm.

Hab. Borneo.

Head with an ochraceous-grey pubescence and with a faint
longitudinal raised line on the front. Prothorax with a short
transverse depression on the middle of the disk. Elytra
without basal crests, roughly punctured at the base, the punc-
tures becoming smaller as they pass backwards ; the basal
part, especially around the scutellum, and the scutellum itself
with an ochreous pubescence ; a large white, somewhat broken
patch on each side in front of the middle; towards the apex
the pubescence is again ochreous. The whole of the under-
side of the body, except along the middle of the abdomen,
ochraceous. The legs entirely ochraceous grey.

Excepting vicina, Pasc., this is the only described species
of the genus in which the elytra are without basal crests.

Pharsalia pulchra, n. sp.

P. mortali affinis ; prothorace supra flavo-variegato, scutello flaves-
cente; elytris nigro-velutinis, flavo maculatis et fasciatis.
Long. 233 mm., lat. 9 mm.

Hab. Siam.

Closely allied to Pharsalia (Zygocera) mortalis, Thoms.,
with which it agrees very well in its structural details. It
is, however, distinct enough by the colour and pattern of its
markings. At the base of the elytra is a flavous band well
intermingled with black; just in front of the middle is a
tolerably broad transverse flavous band, which is interrupted
and mingled with black near the suture. ‘Towards the apex
there are three or four irregular flavous spots on each elytron,
and some smaller spots in front of them near the suture.
The markings on the head are similar to those of mortalts.

Pharsalia (Zygocera) mortalis, Thoms.

This species occurs twice in the Munich Catalogue, once
under the genus Callipyrga and again as Cereopsius saga
(Dejean’s Cat.). Recently (Notes Leyd. Mus. vol. ix. 1887)
it has been fully described and referred to its true genus by

Van de Poll under the name albomaculata.

Rosenbergia eaigqua, n. sp.

. Parva, nigra, pube grisea tecta; antennis corpore paulo longi-

Mr. A. 8. Woodward on the Dentition of Rhinoptera. 281

oribus, scapo apice leviter ruguloso; elytris griseis ochraceo
mixtis, granulis maculisque parvis, nigris, nitidis, numerosis ;
apicibus truncatis, angulis productis.

Long. 32 mm., lat. 10 mm.

Hab. New Guinea.

Pubescence dull leaden grey on the head and thorax, light
grey on the underside of the body, somewhat darker on the
legs, and a light grey mixed with ochreous on the elytra.
Head somewhat large; eyes large and subapproximate; a
median impressed line on the face and vertex. Superior
lobes of the eyes margined behind on the vertex with minute
black dots. Antenne with the scape rather stout, somewhat
rugose towards the apex, as in species of Aprioua; first to
third joints and base of fourth grey, the rest sooty brown.
Prothorax with two transverse wrinkles in front of the
middle, the lateral spines scarcely directed upwards and not
constricted at the base. Elytra with a very small trans-
versely directed tooth at each shoulder, with numerous small,
black, scarcely raised granules near the base; posteriorly
these granules are replaced by spots which extend almost to
the apex. The latter transversely truncate, with the angles
produced into short spines, the outer spines very slightly
longer than the sutural.

Much smaller and otherwise distinct from any of the species
of the genus hitherto described.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI. Frias. 1-5.

Fig. 1. Atthalodes verrucosus.
Fig. 2. Epepeotes uncinatus.

Fig. 3. Pelargoderus flavicornis.
Fig. 4. Cyriocrates Waterhouset,
Figs. 5 & 5a. Haplothrix simplex.

XXXIV.—WNote on an Abnormal Specimen of the Dentition
of Rhinoptera. By <A. SmirH Woopwarp, F.G.8.,
BZ.

Mr. WILurAM Davies has recently presented to the Zoolo-
gical Department of the British Museum a remarkably
abnormal example of. the dentition of the Selachian genus
Rhinoptera, which seems worthy of a brief notice, from the

282 Mr. A. 8. Woodward on the Dentition of Rhinoptera.

explanation it may some time afford of such a relic possibly
to be met with among the fossil species. Having in this
respect a bearing upon certain paleontological studies, of
which the results will shortly appear, Dr. Giinther has kindly
given me the opportunity of examining the specimen, and its
main peculiarities are shown in the accompanying woodcut.
It is evidently referable to the Brazilian species L. Jussiew2,
and probably represents an adult individual.

The largest series of teeth (Oa) is neither symmetrical
nor centrally placed, one extremity of each tooth being
bevelled at a much more acute angle than the other. Flank-
ing this series there are four rows on one side and no less
than eight on the opposite, there being thus a marked depar-
ture from the usual symmetry observed in the dentition of the
genus. The four rows of lateral teeth are evidently normal,
the innermost (I) exhibiting the ordinary transverse elonga-
tion—slightly more than three times as long as broad—and
the three outer (II, III, 1V) being more or less irregularly
diamond-shaped. On the other side the largest teeth are
those of the fifth row (Ic), which have on an average a
breadth equal to once and a half their length. Outside this
series are three rows of irregularly diamond-shaped teeth
(II, 1, IV) of nearly the same character as those of the
opposite side, though slightly narrower. Between the same
series and the largest mesial teeth are four rows, the compo-
nents of the first (O 6), third (Ia), and fourth (14) being
almost symmetrical and as broad as long, while those of the
second row (Oc) are longer than broad and have the outer
angle much more acute and produced than the inner.

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Theatops. 283

In interpreting the malformation just described, I venture
to follow a suggestion of Dr. Giinther, and regard the bilateral
symmetry of the dentition as merely obscured by a partial
subdivision of two of its elements. The three outer rows of
teeth on each side (II, HI, IV) are normal and approxi-
mately symmetrical. The first lateral row of one side must
thus have become subdivided ; and as the large mesial teeth are
decidedly unsymmetrical and do not quite occupy the middle
part of the dentition, their extremities on the abnormal side
also seem to have been detached. Indeed, it will be noticed
that if the first two of the abnormal lateral rows (O46, Oc)
could be connected with the very broad teeth, the latter would
be precisely median ; .and the manner in which the length of
the teeth of the second of these series varies with the differ-
ences in the length of the broad teeth seems to prove that the
homology denoted by the lettering is correct. The three
rows marked Ia, 16, 1c, taken together are exactly equal
in breadth to the first row of the opposite side, and may thus
be regarded as its equivalent.

No specimen hitherto described appears to exhibit malfor-
mation equal to that of this unique dentition ; but it may be
added that Sir Richard Owen * has already noted the sub-
division into two parts of the first lateral series of teeth in
the East-Indian Rhinoptera javanica.

XXXV.—On he Genus Theatops. By R. I. Pocock,
Assistant, Natural-History Museum.

[Plate XVI, figs. 6-10,]

WHILST reading in the ‘ Entomologia Americana,’ vol. iii.
no. 4, a paper entitled “ The Scolopendride of the United
States,” by Lucien M. Underwood, Ph. D., my attention was
attracted on page 65 by a footnote which suggested to me
the advisability of publishing the present paper. ‘This foot-
note I quote verbatim :—

“ The genus 7’heatops has had a strange history, and after
all its vicissitudes may as well be consigned to oblivion. It
was first described by Say (1521) as Cryptops postica, from
Georgia and Kast Florida. Newport in 1844 established the

* ‘QOdontography,’ p. 46, pl. xxv. fig. 2.

284 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Theatops.

genus Theatops on type specimens sent by Say to Leach and
deposited by him in the British Museum. Newport says
‘it approaches Cryptops, but differs from that genus in the
distinctness of the ocelli and in the possession of labial teeth.’
Gervais, in the fourth volume of ‘ Aptéres,’ 1847, reunites it
to Oryptops, and yet adds: ‘On devra trés-probablement la
réunir aux véritables Scolopendres.’ Wood, in 1862, and
later, in 1865, quotes Newport’s description, stating that he
never saw aspecimen of it. Latzel (1880), in the first part
of his ‘ Myriopoden der Oesterreichisch-Ungarischen Monar-
chie,’ makes it a probable synonym of Scolopendra; while
Kohlrausch (1881) enumerates it as a valid species of Theatops
in his ‘Gattungen und Arten der Scolopendriden.’ It thus
appears that Say and Newport are all who saw specimens,
and their statements are opposed to each other in regard to
the position of the eyes. It will probably never appear
again; at least it is not necessary to include it in future
lists.”

In the above-quoted passage the only inaccuracy with
regard to matter of fact occurs in the statement referring to
the number of specimens sent by Say to Dr. Leach. There
appears to have been but one, for apart from the fact of there
being but one at the present moment preserved in the British
(Natural-History) Museum, Newport says his “ description is
taken from a specimen.”

With this exception Dr. Underwood is correct in all that
he asserts with reference to the past history of Theatops ; but
the object that I have at present in view is to prevent the
fulfilment of his prophecy concerning the future probably in
store for this genus by showing that, so far from being con-
signed to oblivion by exclusion from future lists, the name
Theatops of Dr. Newport must not only be included, but
must, in addition, take in these lists the place that has
hitherto been assigned to the name Opisthemega of Dr. Wood.

With the object, then, of settling once and for all the ques-
tion concerning the systematic position of “‘ Theatops postica,”
about which, as Dr. Underwood clearly shows, so much
diversity of opinion exists, I have reprinted word for word
the two descriptions to which all this diversity of opinion is
traceable, and have described the type specimen of this form
as accurately as is under the circumstances possible.

Say (Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. vol. u. pp. 111, 112,
1821), in the following words, describes the species under
discussion :—

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Theatops. 285

“* Cryprors (Leach).

“ Anterior margin of labium not denticulated; eyes obsolete ;
posterior pair of feet longest, basal joint unarmed.

“Cryptops postica.

“‘ Terminal segment of the body longest ; posterior feet very
short and robust.

“ Tnhabits Georgia and EK. Florida.

“ Body rufous, paler beneath, punctured ; segments with two
impressed longitudinal lines above and a deeply impressed
one beneath ; ultimate segment longer than the two preceding
ones conjunctly, with two obsolete impressed abbreviate lines
at the base and an intermediate more distinct continued one.
Posterior feet remarkably robust, hardly longer than the
ultimate segment; nail remarkably robust, as long as the two
preceding joints conjunctly.

“ A very remarkable species, distinguished at once from all
others by the very thick and short posterior pair of feet, the
nails of which cross each other and are much used by the
animal in its defence.”

Of this species one specimen was, according to Newport,
sent by Say to Dr. Leach, and by him it was placed in the
British Museum.

In 1844, Newport examined this specimen, and published in
the Trans. Linn. Soc. xix. p. 409, the following description
of it :-—

“Genus THEATOPS, Newp.

“ Ocelli distincti. Antenne breves, subulate, 17-articulate. Seg-
mentum cephalicum truncatum subimbricatum ; margine labiali
denticulato. Pedum postremorum articulo magno, obconico,
abbreviato. Pedum paria 21. Appendices anales laterales
obtusze.

““ This genus is perfectly distinct in the form of the head and
the short antennz from the true Sco/opendre, in the structure
of the respiratory organs from the Heterostomine, and in the
number of legs from Scolopendropsis ; while it approaches
Cryptops, but differs also from that genus in the distinctness
ot the ocelli and in the possession of labial teeth.

“1. Theatops postica.

‘“‘ Aurantiaca, ocellis inconspicuis lateralibus, dentibus 8 minutis,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 20

286 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Theatops.

segmento postremo maximo elongato quadrato lateribus rotun-
dato medio profunde sulcato margine posteriore transverso, pedi-
bus postremis brevibus ecrassis rotundatis attenuatis ; articulo
basali brevissimo conico. Long. une. ;5;.

“ Hab. In Georgia Floriddque Orientali (v. in Mus. Brit.).

“The mandibles are short, thick, and have a distinct basal
tooth; the dental plates are elongated and widely separated ;
the teeth eight, minute hut distinct. The basal joint of the
posterior pair of legs much shorter than the second, which is
twice as long as the succeeding joints. The lateral anal
appendages deeply punctured. Preanal scale flat, with a
median longitudinal sulcus and scattered punctures, with the
margin stiaight.”

It will be noticed at once from a perusal of these two
descriptions (1) that the statements of Say and Newport con-
cerning the labial teeth are absolutely contradictory ; (2) that
Newport can scarcely be called consistent in applying to the
same features two words so different in meaning as “distinct ”
and ‘inconspicuous ;”’ and (3) that although the latter author
asserts that Theatops approaches Cryptops, yet, to judge from
his description of it, the former genus is more nearly allied
to other genera of Scolopendride (e. g. Cormocephalus) than
it is to Cryptops.

In our treatment of this genus there are two obvious alter-
natives before us—to conclude (1) that the specimen described
by Say was different from the specimen described by New-
port, or (2) that one of or both these authors gave erroneous
descriptions of the same specimen.

Now, in addition to the discrepancies existing between the
two descriptions, it may be urged in favour of the first alter-
native that the only evidence to show that the specimen in
the British Museum is Say’s type is Newport’s assertion to
that effect, and the presence upon the pin transfixing this
specimen of a ticket upon which is written in Dr. Leach’s
handwriting “ Cryptops posticus, Say, N. America.”

Each naturalist must form his own opinion as to the value
of this evidence, and small blame can be attached to one who
trusting to the accuracy of Say as a describer prefers to
regard the ‘ posticus”’ of that author as a species of the genus
Cryptops. But if this be so the type specimen has disap-
peared, and no American collector has, so far as I know, come
across a form agreeing with the description of it.

Taking, then, these last facts into consideration it will cer-
tainly greatly simplify matters if the second alternative be

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Theatops. 287

adopted. In support of this it can be shown (1) that Say’s
description applies well to Newport’s specimen in almost
every point ; (2) that the only point in which it does not apply
is his statement about the absence of the labial teeth ; (8) that
Newport’s words with regard to the eyes are ambiguous and
misleading, and have been wrongly interpreted by subsequent
authors.

Therefore all that is required for the adoption of this second
alternative (7. e. that Newport redescribed Say’s type) is the
assumption that Say overlooked the labial teeth.

This may well have been so; for it seems quite likely that
he was so accustomed to associate the absence of eyes with the
absence of labial teeth that, noting in this case the absence of
the former, he without examination took for granted the
absence of the latter.

For the sake of convenience therefore I shall assume that
Say and Newport described the same specimen.

Whatever conclusion, however, be arrived at with regard
to this point, the truth of the following statement is beyond
all question :—The genus Theatops (Newp.) was recharac-
terized in 1862 and again in 1865 (Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc.
xi. p. 169) by Dr. Wood and named Opisthemega.

That this is so may be demonstrated by comparing the
description of Opisthemega taken by Dr. Meinert (Proc. Amer.
Phil. Soc. xxiit. p. 207) from Dr. Wood’s own specimens with
the following description, which I have taken from the type
specimen of the genus Theatops, which has been preserved 1n
the British Museum ever since the days of Newport.

Genus THEATOPS, Newport.

1844. Theatops, Newport, Trans, Linn. Soc. xix. p, 410.
1862. Opisthemega, Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. vy. p. 35,

Capitis lamina laminam dorsi primam partim protegente.

Lamina basali partim manifesta.

Oculis nullis vel evanidis.

Antennis ad basim incrassatis, ad apicem attenuatis ; articulis proxi-
mis glabris, reliquis breviter hirsutis.

Pedum maxillarium sterno integro, in laminas denticulatas antice
producto; articulo proximo dente basali instructo.

Tarsis tibiisque plerumque calcare armatis; tarsis plerumque arti-
culo unico constantibus.

Segmento anali segmentis preecedentibus majore,

Pleuris analibus truncatis ; maxima ex parte protectis,

Pedibus analibus maximis, valde incrassatis, articulis quinque con-
stantibus ; ungue magno, arcuato armatis.

Segmento corporis septimo spiraculis haud instrueto.

Spiraculis utrinque novem,

20*

288 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Theatops.

The possession of but one dried specimen has rendered it
impossible for me to give as complete a generic description as
is desirable. The characters presented by the mouth-parts
I have been unable to determine, and owing to damage to
many of the limbs I have been unable in every instance to
note the entirety of their tarsi and their spine-armature.

Yet, in spite of these deficiencies, it must, I think, be ad-
mitted by every one, from a comparison of those characters
that are given, that the descriptions of Theatops and Opisthe-
mega have been founded upon specimens which are generically
identical.

That Dr. Wood suspected the likelihood of this is evident
from his question, “Is it possible that Mr. Newport is mis-
taken as to the possession of eyes?”

Undoubtedly most of the mistakes that have been made
with regard to Theatops are referable to Newport’s unlucky
expressions “ ocelli distincti” and “ ocellis inconspicuis late-
ralibus.” For in addition to the doubt raised by the differ-
ence of meaning between the two adjectives “ distinct” and
“inconspicuous,” it will be noticed that the sentence ‘ ocellis
inconspicuis lateralibus ’’ might mean one of two things, either
‘‘ inconspicuous eyes on each side’”’ or “an inconspicuous eye
on each side.”

From the facts of the case it is only fair to presume that
Newport meant the latter. But most authors seemed to think
that he meant the former; and being familiar with the four
distinct ocelli upon each side of the head in Scolopendra, they
very naturally imagined that Newport was referring to similar
structures when using the word “ ocelli” in connexion with
Theatops.

Now, although it is certain that in Theatops no distinct
ocelli such as are found in Scolopendra are to be observed,
yet there is upon each side of the head of the type specimen
of the former genus a distinct and well-defined area, which
occupies the position corresponding with the position of the
eyes in Scolopendra.

This area appears as a somewhat oval whitish patch, differ-
ing only in colour from the substance composing the rest of
the head-plate. Upon the patch of the left side of the head
immediately behind the joint of the antenna there is to be
noticed a small brown spot, darker than the substance of the
head-plate. No corresponding spot occurs upon the right
side.

No doubt these two whitish patches, which are probably
rudimentary eyes, are the features to which Newport applied
the words ocelli distinct? and ocellis inconspicuts lateralibus.

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus 'Theatops. 289

Assuming this to be the case, his statements become intelli-
gible, for when examined with a lens of low power the head
appears to be furnished upon each side with a single ocellus.

Although Dr. Wood in his descriptions of OUpisthemega
postica and of Op. spinicauda makes no mention of the
presence in these species of any eye-structures resembling
those described above, yet Dr. Meinert, when characterizing
the genus Opisthemega, remarks: ‘ Oculi nulli vel evanidi.”
But since the latter author omits to state in which of the
species described by him the eyes are ‘ evanidi,” it is fair to
presume that he attaches no specific value to the features pre-
sented by these organs.

It is certainly to be regretted that a genus composed of
species in which the eyes are either absent or rudimentary
should be known by a name so inappropriate as Theatops.
Yet the law of priority compels its adoption, and one’s regret
is perhaps to a certain extent lessened by the satisfaction de-
rived from abolishing a name so ill-formed and so ill-sounding
as Opisthemega.

Theatops postica (Say).
1821. Cryptops postica Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. ii. pp. 111,
112.

1844. Theatops postica, Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. xix. p. 411.

1862. Opisthemega postica, Wood, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. v.

1886, Opisthemega crassipes, Meinert, Proc. Amer, Phil. Soc. xxiii.
p- 209.

Dorsal plates ochraceous ; head-plate castaneous ; antenne,
ventral plates, and legs testaceous.

Head, body-segments, and anal legs strongly punctured.

Antenne consisting of 17 segments.

Distal segments of the antenne more or less moniliform
and covered with short hairs, Basal segments bare.

Prosternal plates of the maxillary sternum almost in con-
tact; each armed with three small obtuse teeth. Basal tooth
small, obtuse and simple.

Dorsal plates, except the first and last, bisulcate ; the first
marked in front with a median longitudinal sulcus, which
behind bifurcates and marks off with the posterior margin of
the dorsal plate a triangular area. Dorsal plates, except the
last, with simple margins.

Head-plate without sulci.

Ventral plates marked with a central longitudinal depres-
sion, the last elongated, with converging lateral margins,

290 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Theatops.

rounded posterior angles, and a slightly coneave posterior
margin.

The dorsal plate of the anal segment quadrate, with straight
margins, raised lateral borders, and a conspicuous median
longitudinal sulcus. On each side the dorsal plate descends
so as to form the lateral portion of the segment and so as to
be separated by but a narrow space from the ventral plate.

The pleurz of the anal segment appearing in the narrow
space between the dorsal and ventral plates, extending behind
slightly beyond the margin of the ventral plate, but not
beyond the margin of the dorsal plate ; not armed with spines ;
thickly punctured.

Tibi and tarsi of most of the legs armed below with a
strong spur; claws of legs mostly armed.

Anal legs very thick, punctured, without spies, in con-
tact ; the inner surface of the three proximal segments flat-
tened; the upper inner margin of the proximal segment
raised.

Claw of anal leg unarmed.

Length about 20 millim.

T have had no opportunity of examining the type specimen
either of Op. postica, Wood, or of Op. crassipes, Meinert.
But the descriptions of these two species are so much alike
and are so applicable to Theatops postica, Newport, that I
have without hesitation regarded the three specific names as
being referable to but one form.

Dr. Meinert suggests that Op. spinicauda, Wood, may be
synonymous with Th. postica, Newport; but if the figure
and description of the former species are to be trusted, the
two must still be considered distinct.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI. Figs. 6-10,

Fig. 6. ae portion of the body of. Theatops postica (Say), seen from
above.

Fig. 7. Head of ditto, seen from below.

Fig. 8. Anal segment of ditto, seen from above.

Fig. 9. The same, seen from below.

Fig. 10. The same, seen from the side.

Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide. 291

XXX VI—Descriptions of new Species of Oriental Homoptera
belonging to the Family Cicadide. By W. L. Disranr.

As I am now engaged in identifying such species belonging
to other collections as are kindly submitted to me for the
furtherance of my intended Monograph, it becomes necessary
to publish these descriptions in order to prevent the unsatis-
factory course of distributing MS. names only. The species
will be all subsequently figured.

Huechys suffusa, n. sp.

Head and thorax above black; front of the head and two
large spots on mesonotum red; abdomen red; eyes brownish
ochraceous. Head and thorax beneath black, the face and
abdomen beneath red. ‘Tegmina pale opaque blackish, the
apical area broadly dull opaque greyish, with the margins of the
lower apical area blackish; wings pale dull greyish hyaline,
the venation darker.

Rostrum somewhat mutilated, but apparently reaching the
intermediate coxee; face large and moderately compressed.

Long. excl. tegm. 21 millim., exp. tegm. 52 millim.

Hab. Java. Coll. Dist.

Geana delinenda, n. sp.

Huechys octonotata, Walk. (nec Westw.), List Hom, i, p. 253, n. 10

(1850).

Body above brownish ochraceous. Head with the apex of
front and a transverse fascia in front of eyes, including area
of ocelli, black. Pronotum with a central hourglass-shaped
fascia and two large oblique spots on each side black. Meso-
notum with a central fascia (somewhat similar to that on
pronotum) and a large spot on each lateral margin black ;
basal cruciform elevation blackish, its anterior angles ochra-
ceous. Abdomen with the posterior segmental margins
blackish. Body beneath and legs brownish ochraceous, disk
of face and a spot before eyes blackish. Tegmina pale
brownish ochraceous ; wings brown, with about basal third
red.

Long. excl. tegm. 19 millim., exp. tegm. 47 millim.

Hab. Cochin (coll. Dist.), Silhet (Brit. Mus.).

By a strange oversight Walker placed this species in the
British-Museum collection under the name of Huechys octo-
notata, Westw., and actually redescribed that species under
the name of H. picta (Ins. Saund. Hom. p. 28).

292 Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadidee.

Dundubia erata, n. sp.

Body above resembling D. mannifera, Linn., but much
larger ; beneath with the opercula small, narrow, concavely
sinuated towards the middle, their apices obtusely rounded and
reaching the third abdominal segment (rostrum mutilated).

Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, their apical areas (espe-
cially those of tegmina) suffused with bronzy brown.

Long. excl. tegm. 50 millim., exp. tegm. 120 millim.

Hab. Borneo, Elopura (Pryer). Coll. Dist.

Dundubia tavoyana, 0. sp.

Above resembling in size, general hue, and markings D.
iripurasura, Dist., but differing remarkably from that species
by the size and shape of the opercula, which have their apices
somewhat acutely pointed and reaching the penultimate
abdominal segment, their lateral margins being concave near
base, convex about centre, and somewhat profoundly concave
towards the apices; their colour is also pale olivaceous green. |

Long. excl. tegm. 30 millim., exp. tegm. 80 millim.

Hab. 'Tavoy. Calc. Mus.

Dundubia similis, n. sp.

Above very closely resembling D. radha, Dist., the thoracic
markings similar, but the colour more olivaceous green. It
differs from D. radha, however, by the shape and length of
the opercula, which do not extend beyond the third abdominal
segment, and have their apices somewhat obtusely rounded.

Long. excl. tegm. 50 millim., exp. tegm. 122 millim.

Hab. Sikkim. Coll. Dist.

Cosmopsaltria nigra, 1. sp.

3. Body above and beneath with the legs blackish; eyes
and ocelli dark fuscous brown. Tegmina and wings smoky
hyaline, the venation fuscous, the teemina with the transverse
veins at the bases of the second and third apical areas, and
the apices of the longitudinal veins to apical areas, infuscated.

The rostrum about reaches the apices of the posterior coxee ;
the opercula are concavely sinuated a little before centre,
their apices convexly rounded and almost reaching apex of
fourth abdominal segment.

Long. excl. tegm. 44 millim., exp. tegm. 110 millim.

Hab. Philippine Islands.

Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide. 293

This species was erroneously identified by Walker as Dun-
dubia spinosa, Fabr. (the type of which is contained in the
Banksian collection), and remains under that name in the
National Collection. The habitat is derived from one of
those specimens, my own being without a locality.

Cosmopsaltria umbrata, n. sp.

g. Head and thorax above obscure olivaceous. Head
with the lateral margins to front, the area of the ocelli, and
some irregular spots on each lateral area of the vertex black ;
eyes ochraceous. Pronotum with two irregular central black
fascie, ampliated at base and apex, and two at each lateral
margin, the posterior margin with its edge narrowly black and
a black spot near lateral angles. Mesonotum with two central
blackish obconical spots, between which a narrow black fascia
extends to base, and a black spot in front of each anterior
angle of thebasal cruciform elevation. Abdomen above largely
suffused with dull black shadings. Body beneath olivaceous ;
a central fascia to face, anterior margin between face and
eyes, inner margins and apices of femora, and the tibiz more
or less blackish. Opercula olivaceous, their apices and a spot
near base blackish. Abdomen beneath olivaceous, largely
suffused with black shadings. ‘Tegmina and wings pale
hyaline, the venation fuscous; tegmina with the base and
costal membrane fuscous, the transverse veins at the bases of
the second, third, fifth, and seventh apical areas and the apices
of the longitudinal veins of apical areas infuscated.

The rostrum has the apex pitchy and just passing the pos-
terior coxe; the opercula are somewhat narrowed, con-
cavely sinuated on each side near base, and narrowed towards
apices, which are obtusely angulated and reach the fourth
abdominal segment.

Long. excl. tegm. 46 millim., exp. tegm. 120 millim.

Hab. Sikkim. Goll. Dist.

Cosmopsaltria lauta, n. sp.

fg. Head and thorax above ochraceous, with the following
black markings :—Head with a central fascia to front, vertex
with a central double fascia and asinuated fascia behind each
eye; pronotum with a central double fascia united at base, a
large sublateral spot on each side, and a spot beneath on basal
margin ; mesonotum with a central longitudinal fascia, on each
side of which is a short and somewhat oblique fascia, followed
by a small spot on anterior margin and a broad, sublateral,

294 Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide.

irregular fascia, and a spot in front of each anterior angle of the
basal cruciform elevation. Abdomen purplish red, the pos-
terior segmental margins ochraceous, excepting those near
apex, which are piceous, and with a central discal piceous
spot near base. Head beneath with the anterior margin
black and a central piceous spot near apex of face. Opercula
ochraceous, with apices and inner margins broadly black ;
apex of abdomen beneath black. Tegmina and wings pale
hyaline, the venation more or less fuscous; tegmina with the
costal membrane castaneous, the transverse veins at the bases
of the second and third apical areas infuscated.

The face is convex, with a central longitudinal incision,
which neither reaches base nor apex. The opercula are long
and broad, concavely sinuated on their outer margins near
base, their apices obtusely rounded and about reaching the
apical abdominal segment. Rostrum mutilated.

Long. excl. tegm. 35 millim., exp. tegm. 102 millim.

Hab. Pontianak (West Coast, Borneo). Brussels Mus.

Cosmopsaltria minahase, n. sp.

&- Body above pale obscure olivaceous, more or less
covered with pale ochraceous pile. Head with the front an-
teriorly striated and with two apical, black, central spots;
vertex with some scattered black spots, the ocelli reddish.
Pronotum with a central, longitudinal, ochraceous fascia,
bordered with black and with an irregularly rounded black
linear spot near each lateral margin. Mesonotum with seven
black spots, three central and two near each lateral margin, and
a black spot in front of anterior angles of cruciform elevation.
‘Tympanawith grey pilosity ; abdomen above alsomuch shaded
with greyish pile. Body beneath greyish, with an olivaceous
tinge ; apical portion of the face black ; apices of the femora
and tibie and the tarsi dark fuscous ; apical abdominal seg-
ment infuscated, anal appendage with a central fuscous fascia.
Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, venation brownish, ochra-
ceous at the base of upper ulnar area, and the transverse veins
at the bases of the second and third apical areas broadly infus-
cated.

The opercula are pale olivaceous, somewhat gradually
narrowing towards apices, which are obtusely angulated and
reaching the apex of the fourth abdominal segment; rostrum
reaching the second abdominal segment, its apex fuscous.

Long. excl. tegm. 35 millim., exp. tegm. 100 millim.

Hab. Celebes, Menado (coll. Dist.), Ceram (Brit. Mus.).

A specimen of this species from Ceram was identified by

Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide. 295

Mr. Walker as Dundubia doryca, Boisd., and still remains
under that name in the National Collection.

Cosmopsaltria silhetana, n. sp.

Body above shining brownish olivaceous. Head with two
central black spots on front and with an irregular black fascia
across vertex, widening at area of ocelli, and the poste-
rior margin of the eyes black. Pronotum with two central
black fascie, the oblique incisures black, the basal margin
greenish. Mesonotum with the following black markings :—
a central longitudinal fascia, on each side of which is a slightly
oblique obconical spot; these are each followed by a very
much smaller spot, and again by a short, broad, irregular
spot, all starting from anterior margin; two long discal spots
and a small rounded spot in front of each anterior angle of
basal cruciform elevation. Abdomen above with the disk
much shaded with dark shining fuscous; posterior segmental
margins greenish. Body beneath very pale olivaceous, with
a greyish tinge; face with the apex and a central fascia black ;
apex of rostrum, apices of the tibia, anterior tarsi, and bases
and apices of intermediate and posterior tibie fuscous. ‘Teg-
mina and wings pale hyaline, venation brownish; costal
membrane and base of upper ulnar area ochraceous; trans-
verse veins at bases of second and third apical areas infus-
cated.

The rostrum reaches the apex of the posterior coxe; the
opercula gradually narrow towards apices, which are obtusely
angulated and reach the fourth abdominal segment.

Long. excl. tegm. 28 millim., exp. tegm. 72 millim.

Hab. Silhet. Coll. Dist.

Cosmopsaltria jacoona, X. sp.

Allied to C. oopaga, Dist., and very similar above in colour
and markings. Differs from that species by the size and
shape of the opercula, which are longer—reaching the penul-
timate abdominal segment—narrower, and with their apices
somewhat angularly rounded.

Long. excl. tegm. 37 millim., exp. tegm. 98 millim.
Hab. Johore. Calc. Mus.

Pomponia solitaria, n. sp.

Body above ochraceous. Head with the eyes dark fuscous ;
front with two central black spots on anterior margin and two

296 Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide.

small rounded black spots at base; vertex with the area of
the ocelli—which are red—a curved line before each eye, and
a spot near each anterior lateral angle, black. Pronotum with
two central black lines, united at base, and a black spot on
each lateral margin. Mesonotum with the following black
markings, viz. three central lines, the central one extending
across disk, followed by a shorter line on each side, and
again by an irregular line which reaches nearly across disk,
and a black spot in front of each anterior angle of basal cruci-
form elevation. Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, the first
with the costal membrane and venation ochraceous, the trans-
verse veins at bases of second and third apical areas infus-
cated ; venation of wings generally ochraceous.

The rostrum reaches the apices of the posterior coxe ; the
opercula are small, not reaching the apex of the basal seg-
ment of the abdomen.

Long. excl. tegm. 28 millim., exp. tegm. 75 millim.

Hab, Andaman Islands, Narkondam. Calc. Mus.

Pomponia obnubila, n. sp.

Allied to P. maculaticollis, Motsch., but differing from that
species by the darker and more obscure hue of the body, the
distinctly pale fuscous tegmina and wings, and by the length
of the rostrum, which considerably passes the posterior coxa
and terminates on the overlapping opercula.

The head is also much narrower than in P. maculaticollis,
and the opercula are unicolorous and more convex poste-
riorly.

Long. excl. tegm. 30 millim., exp. tegm. 110 millim.

Hab. Simla. Calc. Mus.

Cryptotympana Limborgi, 0. sp.

Cryptotympana recta, Dist. (nee Walk.), J. A. S, Beng. vol. xlviii.

p. 40, pl. xi. fig. 4 (1879).

3. Body above olivaceous brown. Head with the lateral
striations to front and a transverse fascia between the eyes
black. Pronotum with two central, oblique, discal, black
fasciez ; the posterior margin olivaceous, with its inner border
and the anterior margin narrowly black. Mesonotum with
two central, obconical, black fasciee on anterior margin, be-
tween which is a very narrow and indistinct dark line; on
each side of the obconical spots is a smaller spot and a short
oblique, discal, black fasciate line on each side near base.
Abdominal segmental margins and inner area of tympana

Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide. 297

blackish ; abdomen laterally clothed with greyish pile. Body
beneath olivaceous brown ; anterior tibiz and tarsi, apices of
intermediate and posterior tibiz and the tarsi blackish. Oper-
cula olivaceous, with their inner margins blackish ; abdomen
beneath dark castaneous, the lateral margins broadly covered
with ochraceous pile. ‘Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, their
bases blackish, the venation ochraceous or fuscous; tegmina
with the costal membrane olivaceous, the apical costal margin
blackish ; transverse veins at the bases of second and third
apical areas infuscated.

The opercula are short and suboval, their inner margins
straight at base and then obliquely deflected to apices, which
do not extend beyond the basal abdominal segment; their
outer margins are slightly oblique and convexly deflected at
apices. Rostrum mutilated.

Long. excl. tegm. 32 millim., exp. tegm. 95 millim.

Hab. Tenasserim (Limborg). Calc. Mus.

When describing the Rhynchota collected by Mr. Ossian
Limborg in Upper Tenasserim the typical female Cryptotym-
pana recta, Walk., was alone known to me, and I then opined
that the specimen here described as a new species might prove
to be the male of C. recta. I now possess the male of that
species, and find the Tenasserim specimen to represent a very
distinct and undescribed species.

Cicada elopurina, n. sp.

?. Body above castaneous. Head with a fascia across
front, aspot near base of antenne, the area of the ocelli, and
a spot behind the eyes black. Pronotum with two central
black fasciz, the posterior margin more or less olivaceous.
Mesonotum with two central, incurved, black spots starting
from anterior margin, between which is a black fascia crossing
the whole of disk; beyond the central incurved spots is a
small spot on each side and a sublateral and somewhat indis-
tinct black fascia; a black spot in front of each anterior angle
of the basal cruciform elevation. Abdomen above with the
posterior segmental margins black. Body beneath thickly
clothed with greyish pile; face with a central black fascia.
Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, the venation very dark
olivaceous or brown; tegmina with the costal membrane
olivaceous.

@. Long. excl. tegm. 28 millim., exp. tegm. 82 millim.

Hab. Borneo, Elopura (Pryer). Coll. Dist.

298 Mr. F. A. Bather on Shell-growth

Cicada pontianaka, n. sp.

Head and thorax above dark ochraceous. Head with the
front laterally striated with black; vertex with the area of
the ocelli and the lateral areas black. Pronotum with two
short, central, black fasciee at base, which widen anteriorly to
behind the eyes; the posterior margin olivaceous. Meso-
notum with two central obconical spots, between which is a
central spot widened at base and a curved spot, on each lateral
area, all black. Abdomen above dark castaneous, shaded
with pitchy suffusions and sparingly and palely pilose. Body
beneath ochraceous; femora and tibie tinged with casta-
neous, excluding apices of femora and bases of tibiee ; oper-
cula pale castaneous, the margins palely pilose. Abdomen
beneath dark castaneous, the margins palely pilose. ‘Tegmina
and wings pale hyaline, the venation dark brownish ; tegmina
with the apical area shaded with bronzy reflections ; the costal
membrane castaneous, excepting apical half, which is black ;
base greenish, transverse veins at bases of second and third
apical areas narrowly infuscated.

The face is somewhat flat and deeply transversely striate,
excepting a central, longitudinal, levigate line; the rostrum
is mutilated; the opercula do not extend beyond the basal
abdominal segment, have their lateral margins somewhat
straight, their inner margins very slightly overlapping, and
their apices somewhat broadly rounded.

Long. excl. tegm. 32 millim., exp. tegm. 97 millim.

Hab. Pontianak (West Coast, Borneo). Brussels Mus.

XXX VIT.—Shell-growth in Cephalopoda (Siphonopoda). By
F, A. Baruer, B.A., F.G.S., of the British Museum
(Natural History).

INTRODUCTION.

Up to 1886 the formation of the shell in Cephalopoda was
explained by a hypothesis, either of simple lime-secretion (2)
or of lime-deposition in cellular membranes thrown off from
the mantle of which they were once a constituent (1 and 8) ; in
that year Dr. Riefstahl proposed a hypothesis of growth by
intussusception (8) similar to that previously proposed by
Miiller for Lamellibranchs (7). Riefstahl’s conclusions,
based on Sepia, were extended by him through Belemnites to

in Cephalopoda (Siphonopoda). 299

Ammonites, and so, by analogy, on to Nauti/us ; the induction
was blindly followed in a leader by “ Naturforscher”’ (9).
At the beginning of this year Dr. v. Lendenfeld tried to convict
Riefstahl of similar blindness, and himself falls into the ditch
(12). With the drift, however, of his ‘‘ Bemerkung” I
am glad to agree, since it is a repetition, though incomplete,
of two lines previously written by me. As the note con-
taining those lines (10) gives both abstract and criticisms of
Riefstahl’s results, I beg my kind readers to glance at it
before continuing their present perusal.

In this paper I wish :—I. to make a personal explanation
respecting the parallelism of v. Lendenteld’s work with mine;
II. to criticize his methods of work and argument; III. to
refute Riefstahl’s conclusions; LV. to propound a theory of
shell-growth that shall harmonize with the facts of phylogeny
no less than with those of ontogeny.

J. PERSONAL STATEMENT.

Von Lendenfeld says that Moseley was the first English
biologist to observe Riefstahl’s paper, and that he consulted
Lankester, with whom v. Lendenfeld then was. My introduc-
tion to the subject also came from Prof. Moseley, who allowed
me to study it in his laboratory at Oxford; and there my
work was done in the spring of 1887. Moseley at first in-
clined to Riefstahl’s conclusions; unhappily his sad illness
prevented subsequent discussion. ‘The young Nautilus-shell
examined by v. Lendenfeld was seen by me at the British
Museum for the first time in July 1887 ; it of course confirmed
my previous conclusions. I never knew that anyone intended
to figure it. The editors of the Geol. Mag. had my MS. by
the end of July 1887, about which time I heard that v. Len-
denfeld had been working on this point. The latter had, I
believe, left HKngland when my note appeared, so that he
probably did not see it; and I must apologize to him for
being delayed by ignorance of his address in sending him a
copy.
This explanation was needed to show that, though v. Len-
denfeld and myself received inspiration from the same source,
our work was independent; it will also be seen that our
methods of work were not quite the same.

II. Criticism oF v. LENDENFELD.

In the first place, it appears that v. Lendenfeld only ex-
amined a single young Nautilus-shell; he, however, speaks

300 Mr. F. A. Bather on Shell-growth

of young shells, as though basing an induction with regard
to all on the evidence of this one. The intussusceptionist
might therefore contend that the shell in question was abnor-
mal, and would support his contention by the fact that in shells
of Nautilus and Ammonites a single shallow chamber occa-
sionally intervenes, far back in the shell, between two of
normal size.

Even from a single shell, however, v. Lendenfeld might
have adduced confirmatory evidence had he grasped the full
significance of this specimen. His figure of the young shell
(12, t. ix. fig. 2) shows the last-formed septum partially
destroyed ; the destruction was due to its extreme tenuity 5
the portion left forms a rim round the shell-wall and is much
thinner than the corresponding part of the preceding septa.
This septum was in fact only half formed when the animal
was killed. In other young specimens I had observed rims
of similar nature, but much narrower and thinner, as though
the remnants of septa in the very earliest stage of formation.
Such sutural rims show, whenever they occur, that the new
septum was from the beginning formed at the normal distance
from the penultimate septum. Moreover, in every young
Nautilus-shell examined by me (two in the Oxford Museum,
one in the British Museum, and two in my own collection),
and in the rare young Ammonites * that I found sufficiently
preserved, the interval between the last two septa is greater
than the preceding intervals in a constant proportion. All
these facts seemed to me conclusive; but v. Lendenfeld’s
single argument from a single specimen proves nothing.

Still he does happen to have hit on a typical example ;
and his figure, though rather obscure, illustrates more points
in my paper (10) than in his own. Taking with gratitude
a favourable view of these figures, I may point out that
they are both reduced by one third from the original speci-
mens and that these are exhibited in the shell-gallery of the
Natural- History Museum.

III. REFUTATION OF RYEFSTAHL.

Von Lendenfeld avowedly refrains from criticizing the
main part of Riefstahl’s paper, nor does he question the
intussusception-hypothesis as applied to the sepion. Mere
comparison with Nautilus would not have justified such action,

* In the examination of fossils I received much help from Messrs. E.
T. Newton and H. A. Allen, of the Geological Survey, for which I tender
my hearty thanks.

in Cephalopoda (Siphonopoda). 301

as I will now prove. ‘True that in old age the septa of Nau-
tilus gradually approximate; further, it should seem proven
that the septa are directly formed by the animal (sc. by secre-
tion of some sort), and that there is no subsequent growth of
the intraseptal zone of shell-wall. What, then, does this
approximation of septa mean? Primarily it is caused by
diminution of body-growth ; this renders it less necessary for
the mollusk to move into a wider portion of its shell ; it there-
fore advances more slowly. Nevertheless the formation of
‘septa does not slacken; they are formed at the same intervals
ot time as usual; the intervals of space between such septa
are therefore less than those between septa formed when the
animal was more rapidly growing. None can suppose that
the formation of septa at these shorter distances is intended
to benefit the aged animal, as though, compelled to advance,
it were unable to do so without support; the very closeness
of the septa proves the contrary. ‘Thus, in many fossil
specimens of Ammonoidea and Nautiloidea, the last-formed
septa are very closely pressed together. More forcible is the
evidence of a recent adult Nautilus-shell belonging to Prof.
Moseley; here the last septum is twice as thick as that pre-
ceding ; indeed, a line down the middle shows that it is really
formed of two septa. It must have been a very feeble Naw-
tilus that could not advance a single millimetre without a
wall to lean its back against. We must therefore conclude
that this pathological approximation of septa in the chambered
shell of a senescent, or, more rarely, of a middle-aged Cepha-
lopod is due to the continued activity of the secretory function
atter the relaxation of the other functions.

So far secretion of the shell is probable but not proven ;
further discussion will be found in the sequel. Riefstahl’s
total negation is based chiefly on the compression of the last-
formed membranes in the sepion. We have therefore to
prove that the approximation ot septa in Nautilus is not
homologous with the apparently similar compression of mem-
branes in Sepia. ‘The argument follows two lines—(a) Phy-
logenetic, (8) Ontogenetic.

(a) Granted that abnormal approximation of septa is due to
the persistence of septal formation when the other wheels of life
run down or are thrown for the time out of gear, we shall see
that this feature has for the evolutionist a wider meaning.
The characters of old age, produced as they are by failure of
powers, are often curiously simulated by the symptoms of a
disease that is not “ specific,’ but due to overwork of the
organism. ‘Thus the geratological * character of approaching

Geratology, the science of old age: Hyarr.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. Pail

302 Mr. F. A. Bather on Shell-growth

septa sometimes occurs as a purely pathological episode in
middle age. Further, these normal signs of a period when
powers are weakened outwardly repeat those of a period when
powers have not yet acquired strength. Old age “is second
childishness.”” But there is an old age of the Phylum as well
as of the Individual; it is brought about by an acceleration
of development and by an absorption into the mature form of
senile characters inherited from its ancestors. Hence the
laws that govern the life of the Individual govern that of the
Phylum. Phylogenetic old age repeats the characters of
phylogenetic youth. The gradual coiling of the Ammo-
noidea, followed by a converse uncoiling, is a well-known
instance. Another instance is afforded by the character now
under consideration.

Hyatt (5, p. 328) has pointed out that the most antique
Cephalopoda known to us are certain North-American species
ot Endoceras, Piloceras, and allied genera ; in these forms the
septa are very close to one another throughout. From this
fact, as well as from a consideration of septa in certain other
molluscan shells and the tabule in Coelenterate skeletons, we
may infer that when first the Cephalopod shell became cham-
bered the septa were close together. In the three main lines
of descent from such an ancestor the septa came to he further
apart. In the Nautiloidea, which seem to have been the
last to specialize, the septa are still far apart, but approach in
oldage. ‘The Ammonoidea differed at an earlier stage from the
parent stem ; so early as the Gondatites the septa are tar apart
in prcportion to the diameter of the whorl ; senile characters
gradually appear, and among them this one, the approxima-
tion of the septa; it is gradually absorbed into the mature
forms, and in the retrograde Cretaceous species all of the septa
are again closer together. The straight forms in which the
protoconch is protected by a sheath (Awlacoceras, Belemnites,
&c.) form another genetic series parallel with the Ammo-
noidea, tor which | propose the name Coleoidea*. The
same process takes place here, along two lines, as described
in 1V.; at the end of one of these comes Sepza, and it is clear
that the closely pressed lamella of the “pad” 7 are nothing
else than septa in which this retrogression, started by phylo-
genesis, has been enhanced by natural selection on account
of its adding strength to the now internal shell. It is therefore
the general approximation of all septain Sepa that is homo-

* Kodeds, sheath, eiSos, form. See further (14).
+ ‘Pad’ =German Waist; suggested as shorter and less misleading
than ‘ spongioid tissue.”

in Cephalopoda (Siphonopoda). 303

logous with the approximation of the later septa in the
senescent Nautilus.

(8) The compression of the anterior membranes in Sepra
is different ; its meaning we will now consider. I have pre-
viously (10) pointed out that the septa approach one another
postero-ventrally, so that, in a vertical section of a small
portion of the shell, the last-formed appear closer than those
underlying. Further, I do not deny that in senescent shells
the last-formed septa may be closer than those preceding :
the laws of geratology do not lapse when their action has
been extended. But these two appearances have been con-
fused by Rietstahl with another of very different nature.
Riefstahl states that membranes of chitin * continue from the
middle plate over the last-formed septa; he implies that
sinuous partitions do not exist in these membranes. These
membranes are visible; but, as I pointed out (10), the partitions
pass through them and are seen on the surface (fig. 1, p. 305).
This observation was corroborated by Dr. Appellét, whose
paper, read on Sept. 14, 1887, was received in England just
two months later (11). He describes this structure as a mass
of chitinous membranes, traversed by partitions from the first.
In this the following changes take place :—cracks appear
between the membranes, at right angles to the partitions ;
these cracks widen, so that the membranes above and below
are pressed together, and in them calcification begins; they
finally form the septa; the intermediate membranes are fur-
ther separated by cracks, and form the ‘ free-stretched mem-
branes.” Since the partitions extend completely across the
space these membranes appear fastened to them. On Rief-
stahl’s hypothesis the free-stretched membranes should pass
through the partition-walls ; that they do so I could never
see (fig. 2). My sections, unreconcilable with Riefstahl’s
view, fully confirm that of Appelléf: they bear out the sug-
gestion of the latter that the membranes are pressed together,
not separated, by calcification, so as to form septa; the nacre
lies on either side of these compressed membranes, not be-
tween them. ‘The structure just described bears no resem-
blance to approximated septa, and the changes are to be
explained in a different manner.

The approximation of septa in Nautdlus is therefore proved
to be not homologous with the coherence of the last-formed
membranes in Sepia. Riefstahl’s argument for intussuscep-
tional growth in Nautilus based thereon consequently falls to
the ground.

* “Conchyolin ” is the term he employs; it may be more correct, but

“ chitin ” is simpler and more usual.
7A

304 Mr. F. A. Bather on Shell-growth

We have next to consider how far the intussusception
hypothesis holds good for the sepion. I have already noted
some opposed facts; but, setting aside for a time arguments
derived from a cross-examination of the shell itself, I proceed
to call witnesses of a different character. Riefstahl seems not
to have investigated the epithelium that lines the shell-sac ;
to this I paid special attention—indeed one can hardly
imagine a man dismissing the secretion-hypothesis without
examining the structure which, above all others, was calcu-
lated to yield valid external evidence. This mistake was not
made by Appelléf; he has studied both soft and hard parts
together, and his description, so far as I ean follow it without
figures, seems to agree with my sections and drawings, while
in our explanation of the appearance we substantially agree.
Dr. Appelléf promises a more detailed account of his investi-
gations. For the present purpose a short description will
suffice. ‘The whole shell-sac is lined by a simple columnar
epithelium of variable character. Over those parts of the
shell that have long been formed the epithelial cells are flat-
tened out so as to almost form a pavement-epithelium.
Towards those parts of the shell in course of formation the
cells become more columnar. There is a distinction between
the cells overlying the dorsal plate and those overlying the
inner plate and the last septum. The former line the mantle,
by which all, including Riefstahl, allow that the membranes
of the dorsal plate [=sheath or guard] are deposited. Their
appearance is shown in fig. 8. The cells that line the ante-
rior part of the shell-sac on the ventral side (7. e. over the
visceral hump) are very peculiar. I have been unable to
demonstrate a cell-wall ; the nuclei stain clearly with borax-
carmine, and the chromatin element in each is much convo-
luted, producing the appearance of several nucleoli. Towards
the sutural margin of the anterior septum the nuclei become
elongate, and seem to tail off by their proximal or ventral
ends into the underlying connective tissue (fig. 4). The
appearance is in fact somewhat that of a syncytium formed
by cells migrated from the connective tissue; the nuclei form
a single layer, and have their long axes parallel to one another,
but shehtly imclined to the surface in antero-dorsal direction.
Above, ¢. e. dorsal to, the nuclei is a clear cytoplasm, and
above this again a distinct layer continuous along the surface,
and separated in places from the cytoplasm by a dark line.
Over the region where the septum joins the inner plate the
cells are extraordinarily elongate and their nuclei correspond-
ingly dragged out (fig. 5). ‘The cells show a greater degree
of separation in this part, but the superficial layer is still con-

in Cephalopoda ( Siphonopoda). 305

tinuous ; it shows a corresponding increase in thickness; its
distinction from the upper part of the cell is not, however,

; VENTRAL ,

Fig. 1.—Sinuous partitions (s.p.) appearing near margin of shell through
membranes (m.). M.P. is the edge of the middle plate folded
over. (Seen with l-inch objective, reflected light.)

Fig. 2.—Shows relation of free-stretched membranes (f.m.) to a sinuous
partition (s.p.), which is cut at right angles. Its ventral end is
enlarged and abuts on a lamella or septum (/.) composed of
membranes (m.) and arragonite. (Stained borax-carmine, and
examined by polarized light, seen with Zeiss D objective.)

Fig. 5.—Cells lining mantle, from 3 in fig. 6. (Stained hematoxylin.)

Fig. 4.—Cells from 4 in fig. 6.

Fig. 5.—Cells from 5 in fig. 6.

[Figs. 4 and 5, drawn as stained with borax-carmine, were also studied
with hematoxylin and methyl-green. Figs. 3, 4, 5, as seen by
transmitted light under 3-inch objective of Swift. |

Fig. 6.—Sagittal section of anterior portion of shell enclosed in shell-sac ;
shows relations of figs. 2,5, 4, and 5. The calcified portion is
shaded with diagonal lines, as in fig. 2. (Seen with 1-inch ob-
jective.)

N.B.—The orientation of figs. 3, 4,5, 6 is the same; fig. 2 is reversed.
All the figures are drawn to nature except the shell-part of
fir. 6, which is supplied from very many sections and drawings.

quite so clear. Where the edge of the shell is reached these
remarkable cells suddenly stop. The conclusion that these

306 Mr. F. A. Bather on Shell-growth

cells are connected with secretion is inevitable; in fact the
distal layer seems to be nothing more than chitin in course of
deposition ; as its connexion with the cell is lessened it splits
into membranes. The suggestion of Appelléf that the upper
portions of the [rapidly growing] cells coalesce and are thrown
off as a chitinous membrane seems to explain their peculiar
character, and agrees with what we know of chitin-formation
elsewhere.

Therefore the external evidence of the soft parts corroborates
the internal evidence of the shell. The intussusception-hypo-
thesis does not explain the growth of the shell in Sepza any
more than in Naut¢lus.

IV. Proposep EXPLANATION.

Any theory must of course explain the facts for all the
specialized forms, e. g. Nautilus, Ammonites, Belemnites,
Sema, Spirula, Loligo. But, since ontogeny is parallel to
phylogeny, we shall expect our theory to be borne out by the
facts of paleontology, and possibly to illustrate the methods
by which the evolution of the group was accomplished. The
latter point I deal with more fully elsewhere (14).

In the shells of all Cephalopoda chitinous membranes are
first secreted ; these form a framework in which lime can be
deposited, and on their arrangement depends the structure of
the shell. The membranes of the outer portion must be dis-
tinguished from those of the inner portion; the lime also
differs in physical character according to the portion in which
it is deposited (13). The membranes of the mner portion are
secreted by the visceral hump, and in them is formed the
True Shell (shell of Nauwttlus and Orthoceras ; conch of Ammo-
nites ; phragmocone of Belemnites ; middle plate, inner plate,
and lamelle of Sepia; conch of Spirula; gladius of Loligo,
in part). Riefstahl postulates for Sepia, as F’. Miiller has
done for Lamellibranchs (7), a primal mass of homogeneous
chitin, from which, as it grows by intussusception, these
membranes are repeatedly detached. ‘There is none such ;
but on the surface of the cells that coat the visceral hump a
layer of chitin is, by concrescence of their distal portions,
continually formed, and from it the membranes are, as it
were, exfoliated. Secretion and exfoliation, beginning in the
anterior region of the shell-wall, proceed backwards to the
suture; thence, centripetally over the septum, to the poste-
rior margin of the septal neck ; a membrane of the septum
is therefore one with a membrane of the shell-wall, and each
complete membrane is typically shaped like a funnel. Lime,

tn Cephalopoda (Siphonopoda) . 307

derived from sea-water, is deposited as arragonite upon and
between these membranes soon after their secretion; by this
more purely physical process nacre is produced. ‘The struc-
ture of this nacre is like that of the Lamellibranch shell in all
essential points (6); and if, pace F. Miiller, the present
explanation be extended to the shells of all Mollusca, we shall
merely be returning to the views of Dr. W. B. Carpenter
(1 and 3), with this difference—the membranes are not cel-
lular and do not of themselves retain vitality. The membranes
of the outer portion are secreted by the mantle-lobes, and in
them is formed the Sheath (cap of Orth. truncatum, Barr. ;
guard of Aulacoceras and Belemnites ; mucro and shagreen-
layers of Septa; disc of attachment and ligament in Spirula;
outer portion in pen of Teuthide and gladius of Loligo).
These membranes may be rendered entirely or partially
spathose by the deposition of lime in them as calcite. These
latter facts have been disputed by no recent worker.

The foregoing explanation accounts very simply for ob-
served structures in recent forms if in applying it we remem-
ber two principles :—(i.) that secretion of chitin may persist
after advance of the body in the shell has slackened ; (ii.)
that extent of calcification varies inversely as rate of secretion.
Where secretion of chitin is slow in proportion to the growth
in length the septa are well separated from one another, and
each is calcified soon after the membranes forming it have
been deposited; there is no subsequent growth or movement
of the septum (e. g. Nautilus). When, in accelerated deve-
lopment, the septa have come close together, calcification
cannot keep pace with secretion, and the numerous overlying
membranes prevent further deposition of lime in those sub-
jacent (e. g. Sepia). Remember that calcification is always a
slow process compared with secretion, and cannot, like it, be
hurried. The growth of the sheath being correlated with
that of the shell, we shall expect to find that, in forms where
the anterior extension of the shell takes place slowly, the
sheath-membranes remain calcified (e. g. Belemnites), but
that in forms where the shell-wall is rapidly prolonged the
sheath-membranes cover one another too quickly to permit of
calcification (e. g. Coccoteuthis). Remember that these mem-
branes shrink into a very thin space when not kept apart by
lime (cf. Belemnoteuthis).

Examining extinct forms by the light of these principles, it
is easy to see how the various differentiations arose. Nauti-
loidea and Ammonoidea considered, let us study the Coleoidea.
At the beginning of the Mesozoic Era these split into two
branches. In one branch the anterior extension of the dorsal

308 Mr. F. A. Bather on Shell-growth

region of the shell-wall was rapid; the septal and sheath-
membranes were numerous or only partially calcified, and
their edges appeared as lines of growth on the shell-wall; for
this branch Fischer has kept the name Chondrophora (A),
meaning by yévdpos not cartilage, but chitin; among its
earliest examples are Coccoteuthis and Greoteuthis of the Solen-
hofen slate. In the other branch the shell grew more slowly
and the membranes were still fully calcified ; since it is both
opposite and parallel to Chondrophora, I propose for it the
corresponding name Osteophora*, which is no more mis-
leading and has the merit of being Greek. This branch con-
sists of the Phragmophora and Sepiophora of Fischer ; but
these names merely describe stages in one series, not diver-
gent groups. Not till the Tertiary era did phylogenetic
retrogression influence this branch. Then the septa gradually
became more closely set, and their membranes, as well as
those of the sheath, less calcified. Naturally the extreme
form thus produced, viz. Sepa, simulates the earlier Chondro-
phora; but it is still well calcified, and its genetic history is
different. The evidence of fossils emphasizes the distinction :
in Osteophora the part preserved is the calcified portion of the
sheath (guard and mucro) ; in Chondrophora we only find
the semicalcified chitinous lamine. Sepia is not yet known
in the Solenhofen slate, though the ghost of this ancient
belief still shrieks to be laid. Fit places are found in this
scheme for Spirula and Loligo, as I show elsewhere (14).
Since, however, the sepion has been chosen as_battle-
ground, it is as well to summarize here conclusions respecting
it. Secretion of chitin is rapid in proportion to growth ;
more membranes are deposited than can be calcified; some
of these remain free-stretched, the others are seen in the
septa. At its antero-dorsal margin each membrane is
rapidly covered by a fresh one; the edges, which thus
remain uncalcified, form the middle plate; this was repre-
sented in the Belemnite by an epicuticula of the phrag-
mocone. In the sheath-membranes, deposited by the mantle,
calcification takes place with more or less completeness at
different stages, according to the varying rapidity of secretion.
As it is the youngest portion of the inner shell that most
resembles the Belemnite-phragmocone (14), so is it that part
of the outer plate covering the young portion which most

* Keferstein, in Bronn’s ‘Klassen u. Ordnungen,’ thus distinguished
recent forms, and spoke of Decapoda calciphora (p. 1488) ; but he did not
recognize their true affinities. As my grouping 1s not quite the same as
his, 1 seize the opportunity of rejecting his barbarous epithet.

in Cephalopoda (Siphonopoda). 309

resembles the Belemnite-guard. Here too, then, the sign of
lineage is to be found in the young shell.

CONCLUSION.

The views here put forward—suggested by the macroscopic
and microscopic structure of the Sepia- animal and shell—are
confirmed by comparison with other shells ; explained by the
life of individuals, they illustrate the history of the race. The
views are these :—The whole of the true shell and the whole
of the sheath are formed first in chitinous membranes, secreted
by the visceral hump and by the mantle respectively ; these
become calcified by the deposition in their interstices of arra-
gonite and calcite respectively ; there is no intussusception,
except of lime, and that is probably a physical process. Se-
cretion of chitin continues after growth ceases, and may be
accelerated in phylogeny. ‘The rate at which lime is depo-
sited is independent of the animal; hence extent of calcifica-
tion varies inversely as rapidity of chitin secretion.

In obedience to these principles and to others long since
established the results which we see have been and are being
produced by agencies already known.

PAPERS AND WORKS REFERRED TO.

1, W. B. Carpentrer.—‘ On the Microscopic Structure of Shells,”
14th Rep. Brit. Assoc., York, p. 1 (1844).

2. Epwarps and Woop.— The Eocene Cephalopoda and Univalves,”’
Paleeontogr. Soc. 1848-77.

. S. P. Woopwarp.— Manual of the Mollusca,’ ed. 4, 1880.
. P. FiscoEr.—‘ Manuel de Conchyliologie,’ &c., 1883,

5. Hyarr.‘ Fossil Cephalopoda in the Museum of Comp. Zool. ;” Proc.
Amer. Assoc, xxxil. Minneapolis, p. 323 (1883).

6. v. GémBEL.—‘ Ueber die Beschaffenheit der Mollusken-Schalen,”
Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. xxxvi. p. 886 (1884).

wm Co

7. F. Mtiirer.—‘“ Schalenbildung bei Lamellibranchiaten,” Zool.
Beitriage, Breslau, p. 206 (1885).
8. RimeFsTAHL. —* Die Sepien-Schale u. ihre Beziehungen zu den

Belemniten,” Palzeontographica, Bd. xxxii., 1886.

9. Anon.—* Bemerkungen tiber Cephalopoden-Schalen,” Der Natur-
forscher, Jahrg. xx. “No. 18, p. 158 (April 80, 1887).

10. BarHer.—‘The Growth of Cephalopod Shells,’ Geol. Mag.
dec. iii. vol. iv. p. 446 (October 1887

310 Bibliographical Notices.

11. ApprLiér.—‘Om_ skalets bildning hos Sepia officinalis, L.,”
Kongl. Svenska Vetensk.-Akad. Forhandl. xliv. No. 7, p. 495.
(Communicated Sept. 14, published Oct. or Nov. ? 1887.)

12. v. LENDENFELD.—*< Bemerkung zu Riefstahl’s Wachsthumstheorie
der Cephalopoden-Schalen,” Zool. Jahrb. Abth. fur Syst. Geogr.
u. Biol. &c., ii. Bd. 2 Heft (Jena, 15th Jan., 1858).

13. CornisH AND KENDALL.—“ Mineral Constitution of Calcareous
Organisms,” Geol. Mag. dee. iii. vol. v. p. 66 [Cephalopoda, p. 71],
Feb. 1888.

14. BarHer.—‘ The Evolution of the Cephalopoda.” Read March 2,
1888, at Geol. Assoc. and to be published shortly.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

A Catalogue of the Moths of India. Compiled by E. C. Corrs and
Colonel C. Swinnor. Part I. Sphinges; Part II. Bombyces.
Printed by order of the Trustees of the Indian Museum. Cal-
eutta, 1887.

Tuts Catalogue, of which the first two parts have reached this
country, is a very valuable addition to the literature of the Hetero-
cerous Lepidoptera of India, and will be extremely useful to scien-
tific workers and collectors both at home and in India. Colonel
Swinhoe, during his recent visit to England, spared no pains or
trouble in his endeavours to name his specimens from such of the
types as were available for the purpose. The first part of the
Catalogue is devoted to the Sphingidee, of which 187 species are
recorded from various parts of Indiaand Ceylon. Judging from this,
the collection in the Calcutta Museum must be avery poor one, only
81 species being represented in it; so that no attempt could be
made to investigate the value of the many very closely allied forms
that have been named without any regard to variation or geogra-
phical distribution. Take, for instance, the genera Macroglossa,
Pergesa, and Triptogon. On page 2 under Hemaris hylas is in-
cluded Macroglossa Kingi, McLeay, from Australia, This is, however,
a most distinct species, and one that could not in any case be con-
founded with /7/. hylas.

In Part II. of the Catalogue, which contains the Bombyces, 1436
species are included, of which only 308 are represented in the Cal-
cutta Museum. In this section the arrangement of the various
families is somewhat erratic. For example, the Notodontide
are placed between the Bombycide and the Drepanulide, and
the Saturniide are arranged almost at the end of the Bombyces,
next to the Cosside. Among the Agaristide we note that
Eusemia opheltes from North Burma (P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 518) is
omitted. In the family Chalcosiide the authors have placed a
species in the genus Dioptis; but that genus, so far as we are
aware, is entirely confined to the New World. It was raised to
the rank of a family by the late Mr. Walker under the name

Miscellaneous. By

of Dioptide. Phalena perdica, Cramer, the species called Dioptis
perdica by the authors, belongs to the family Euschemide and
to the genus Bursada, Walker. The genus LHpicopeia, we may
remark, does not belong to the Chaleosiide, but is a Laparid. Nine
species are recorded, but some of them are of very doubtful value.
In the genus Amesia, Amesia hyala, from Darjeeling (P. Z. 8. 1885,
p- 518) is not included. These are some of the minor faults of
the work; but by far the most serious is the omission of any refer-
ence to the authorities for the genera, many of which are brought
under our notice for the first time.

The Catalogue is fairly well got up; but a slight want of care in
correcting the proofs is evident. For instance, on page 211 the
heading is printed “ Alasiocampid” instead of “ Lasiocampide.”’
Not a word of preface is given nor any intimation of the authors’
intention or otherwise to continue the Catalogue; but it is to be
hoped that they will do so, and, as far as possible, make the work
complete.

Catalogue des Crustacés Malacostracés recueillis dans la Baie de

Concarneau. Par Jutes Bonnier. 8vo. Paris: Octave Doin,
1887.

Wer have received from M. Jules Bonnier a copy of his Catalogue of
the Malacostracous Crustacea of Concarneau, published originally
in the ‘ Bulletin Scientifique du Département du Nord,’ but issued
in a separate form under the above title. The work is one which
must interest every student of the Crustacea, and is of special value
to British carcinologists, as it furnishes a copious synonymy of the
numerous species observed by the author, and at the same time
indicates the distribution of the species, especially along the French
coast of the Channel, as far as the station at Wimereux, the chief
scene of the author’s official labours. The list includes 192 species,
of which 73 are Podophthalma.

Besides giving a very full synonymy of all these forms, M. Bon-
nier generally appends to the notice of each species some brief notes
as to its mode of occurrence and comparative rarity in different
places, sometimes enlarged by a few words upon the natural history
of the species, and especially, as might be expected from so earnest
a student of the parasitic Crustacea, a most valuable series of notes
upon the occurrence of the latter. The Catalogue is furnished with
a short introduction and a bibliographical index, which add con-
siderably to its value as a work of reference.

MISCELLANEOUS.
A new Foraminifer. By M. J. Konstier.

Tue organism of which the following is a description comes from
the basin of Arcachon. The enumeration of its characters will

32 Miscellaneous.

show clearly that it is a new form of the most remarkable kind as
regards its characters, its development, and its zoological affinities.

In the normal adult state it appears in the form of isolated, ovoid,
elongated shells, from 1 to 2 millim. in length, monaxial and per-
forated by a mouth at one of their poles. The study of this enve-
lope elucidates the question, hitherto so obscure, of the development
of the test in the Rhizopoda. In the young state it is thin, purely
chitinous, with an alveolar structure, which is often very distinct.
It thickens by the division of its areole into two and then into
several layers ; the two peripheral layers, internal and external,
persist in the chitinous state, while the intermediate areola become
charged with calcareous matter, which thus forms a series of glo-
bules, often arranged in regular rows. The internal layer is the
primary fundamental membrane of authors. The preceding state-
ments demonstrate the falsity of the theory of the growth of the test
of Rhizopoda by apposition, as well as several other hypotheses cha-
racterizing the present state of science ; growth takes place through-
out the thickness of the test, as if the whole envelope were living.
The protoplasmic body contained in the shell, which presents all
sorts of tints, from brownish yellow to bright rose-colour, is sur-
rounded by a delicate membrane of cuticular aspect. It presents
an areolar structure, which is fine in the peripheral region, with
larger meshes in the interior protoplasm. It is far from always
filling the whole shell; often there is only a small dense mass, from
which issue anastomosing bands running towards the mouth, where
an accumulation of clear substances is formed. There are all pas-
sages between these different states and a number of others which
it would take too long to enumerate here.

From the buccal protoplasmic accumulations issue fine trans-
parent pseudopodia of variable number, which serve for the prehen-
sion of the creatures destined to the nourishment of these organisms.
In cases where the pseudopodia are all retracted we may see, at the
buccal pole, a most remarkable arrangement, unique, at present, in
the group of Foraminifera. There is here an excavation of no great
regularity, at the bottom of which is the entrance of a tube analo-
gous in its aspect to the cesophageal tube of many Infusoria.

The number and aspect of the nuclei are very variable. Often
not very abundant, pale and large, they are in other cases small.
refractive, and in larger number. The appearance of these nuclear
corpuscles coincides with the commencement of reproduction.

The reproductive phenomena appear to be produced as follows :—
In the peripheral region, around each nucleus, by a sort of gemma-
tion, the group of dense protoplasm becomes surrounded by a chiti-
nous layer, and in this way are formed a number of small embryos,
which, during growth, divide abundantly, and, after attaining cer-
tain dimensions, issue through the mouth. A free young organism
is provided with a chitinous shell perforated by a pore and containing
a small external nucleus. This embryonic chamber soon produces,
by gemmation, a small elongated chamber, which becomes spirally
twisted around it ; this first chamber produces a second by the same

Miscellaneous. BE

process, and so on. ‘Thus is produced a small rolled-up organism,
analogous to a Miliola. This rolling-up soon becomes irregular,
like a ball, and finally the new chambers erect themselves, become
ramified in various ways, and form a dendritic mass. In the fur-
ther course of the development the different shells constituting these
masses become detached from each other, increase in size, multiply
im various ways which cannot be described here, and, after having
attained certain dimensions, propagate again by embryos which
recommence the same cycles.

A great number of other new facts further characterize this
organism, such as frequent moultings, the formation of multiple
septa at the expense of the inner membrane of the shell, &c.

From what precedes it seems that hitherto the adult form may
have been misunderstood in certain Foraminifera. In fact the
descriptions are only of twisted forms, or at least forms in which
all the chambers are in continuity. Now I have just shown that
this was an embryonic stage in the organism here under considera-
tion. It seems to me very improbable that this alone presents these
phenomena to the exclusion of all other species. The deficiency of
observations upon the mode of reproduction of the latter confirms
my opinion.—Comptes Rendus, March 12, 1888, p. 769.

A new Freshwater Sponge. By Henry Mitts.

Heteromeyenia radiospiculata, n. sp.

Sponge massive; specimen 3 x 23 x 2 inches in thickness; texture
close, compact; surface nodular ; statoblasts or gemmule uniformly
globular ; diameter -02 parts of an inch; crust thick, charged with
two distinct forms of birotulate spicula, the inner ends of both
resting on the chitinous coat of the statoblast.

Foraminal opening small, slightly prolonged, not funnel-shaped.

Skeleton-spicula generally smooth, a tew sparsely microspined ;
curved, moderately sharp-pointed ; length varying from :012 to
‘014 parts of an inch; long birotulates vary in length from -007 to
‘009 parts of an inch. From thirty to sixty of these project irregu-
larly from each statoblast, reaching out beyond the shorter birotu-
lates, one fourth or more the diameter of the statoblast, and termi-
nating in rotule, consisting of numerous, strong, recurved hooks,
some of which are turned inward pointing directly to the shaft.
Shaft more or less spined, slightly curved, larger in the middle;
width of rotule -0012.

Shorter birotulates large, symmetrical, with irregularly dentate
rotule ; rotule boletiform; shafts straight, strongly spined, spines
at right angles to shaft tapering to a point.

Length of short birotulate -003 inch. Width of rotule -001,
Dermal or flesh-spicula numerous throughout, small, hexradiate-
stellate; with rays or arms of various extent proceeding in all
directions from a common centre; centre without form or other

314 Miscellaneous.

character, except that which is incident to the junction of the many
spines which make up the spiculum. Average extent of stellate
spicula measured from the ends of opposite rays ‘001. Rays some-
times of uniform thickness, occasionally enlarged at the ends with
microspines, curved inward.

There are also many small spicula with one or two long arms,
forming an axis from which proceed other rays or arms perpen-
dicular to the axial rays. These are all microspined, sometimes
with blunt terminus and sometimes tapering slightly.

The two kinds of birotulate spicula found in the statoblast of
this sponge, as already described, bring it into the genus Hetero-
meyena, Potts. But for this feature it must be classed at least
as a remarkable form of Meyenia plumosa, Carter. Forty years
ago Mr. Carter, of England, found his specimen of the last-named
sponge in the water-tanks of Bombay, India. This he described in
1849. No other specimen or variety of it was found again till
three or four years ago, when Dr. Palmer found a variety of it on
the banks of the Colorado River. This was described by Mr. Potts,
who named it Meyenia plumosa, variety Palmert. See his deserip-
tion in his monograph of the freshwater sponges.

As the term used to designate the generic character of this
entirely new form is technically expressive of one of its peculia-
rities, 1 have thought it best to use a specific term which is also
expressive of the stelliform spicula, which, among all the freshwater
sponges, so far as I know, are only found in this and the two allies
above named. It will therefore be known as Heteromeyenia radio-
sprculata.

This sponge was found in the Ohio River, twelve miles from Cin-
cinnati, by my friend Mr. George B. Twitchell, in September 1887,
and sent to me in November, same year. I acknowledge my
indebtedness to Mr. Twitchell for several other specimens found also
in the Ohio River. Among them are Carterius tubisperma, Mills,
a fine specimen of Tubella pennsylvania, Potts, and Spongilla lacus-
tris, Auct.— The Microscope, no. 2, February 1888, p. 52 (Detroit).

On Parasitic Castration in the Eucyphotes of the Genera Paleemon
and Hippolyte. By M. A. Grarp.

In 1837 Rathke noticed the curious fact that the Palemons
infested by Bopyri belonged exclusively to the female sex :—
“ Mirabile dictu Bopyri omnia que vidi exempla—vidi autem eorum
plures centurias—solummodo in Palemonibus feminis repereram,
licct im manus meas non pauciores horum animalium mares quam
femine incidissent” *, All subsequent authors down to the most
recent one, P. Fraisse, have only confirmed Rathke’s observation.

Guided by my previous discoveries as to the effects of parasitic
castration in Decapod Crustacea infested by Rhizocephala, I last

* ‘De Bopyro et Nereide,’ p. 18.

Miscellaneous. 315

year put forward the hypothesis that the fact noticed by Rathke
was no doubt correct only in appearance, and that if no male Pale-
mons are found to harbour Sopyri this is because the atrophy of
the testes in the infested males produces as a consequence an arrest
of development of the external sexual characters *. I have since
been able to verify the correctness of this supposition both in our
European prawns infested by Bopyri and in Palemon ornatus of the
Brussels Museum infested by Probopyrus ascendens. The large size
of the last species renders the proof more easy. Besides the posi-
tion of the genital apertures there are, in the Palemons, a certain
number of secondary sexual characters which have been well indi-
cated by Grobben and J. V. Boas, namely :—

1. The males are sinaller than the females.

2. The thoracic chele are generally longer in the males.

3. The inner ramus of the first pair of abdominal feet is much
more developed in the male than in the female and differently
fringed.

4. The second abdominal foot bears on the inside of the inner
ramus, between this and the retinaculum (append interna,
Boas), a styloid copulatory appendage furnished with stiff
sete (appendix masculina, Boas).

5. The branch of the first antenna which bears the olfactory
setee is larger in the male than in the female, and this abso-
lutely and not only relatively to the size of the body; the
olfactory sete are also more numerous.

We may add to the preceding characters a peculiarity indicated
by E. von Martens, and which is of very great practical value,
namely that in the females the free space between the bases of the
fifth thoracic feet is much larger than in the males.

The characters derived from the size and from the form of the
chele are of relative value. If we compare suitably selected series
of individuals it is easy to find males of smaller size and with
shorter chelee than certain females. It is therefore not surprising
to find that these characters disappear completely in the castrated
males. But with the exception of the distinctions derived trom
the position of the genital apertures and the distance of the feet of
the fitth thoracic pair it is easy to ascertain that the other sexual
characters also become attenuated, or even disappear, in the infested
males. The inner ramus of the first abdominal foot is, perhaps, a
little larger than in the female, but at any rate much smaller than
in the normal male. On the second pair the appendiw masculina
is generally wanting. In one word, the general aspect is so pro-
foundly modified that, without careful examination, the infested
male would certainly be determined asa female. Even the amount
of separation of the coxe of the fifth pair of thoracic feet and the

* Bull. Soc. Sci. de la France et de la Belgique, 1887, p. 12 et seqgq. ;
translated in ‘ Annals,’ ser. 5, vol. xix. pp. 325-345,

316 Miscellaneous.

form of the sternal portion of the corresponding segment approach
the arrangements existing in the other sex.

However, it must be remarked that in the case of the Paleemons,
as in the other previously studied cases of parasitic castration, there
is a very singular want of uniformity in the phenomena observed.
Thus a specimen of the male Palemon serratus of the shores of the
Channel, infested by Bopyrus squillarum, has very distinctly re-
tained the attributes of its sex, and even presents only a slight
reduction of the appendiv masculina. Perhaps this diversity in the
extent of the modifications observed is to be ascribed to the more
or less early period of infestation. Moreover, these modifications
are not indelible, so far as I may judge from experiments made at
the Laboratory at Wimereux upon male Paguri castrated by
Phryxus paguri; when subsequently freed from their parasites the
characters of the male sex gradually reappeared at the successive
moults.

The numerous species of Hippolyte which abound in the arctic
seas are often infested by Bopyrians confounded by authors under
the collective names of Gyge hippolytes, Kroyer, and Phry«us abdo-
minalis, Kroyer. Hitherto I have not been able to study a suffi-
cient number of these parasites; but a careful examination of the
synonymy leads me to think that they exert the same action upon
the Hippolyte as the Bopyri upon the Palemon. In fact, among
the numerous species of Hippolyte established by Kroyer and the
zoologists of the early part of the present century, some have since
been recognized as being only the two sexes of the same specific
type. Kingsley, G. O. Sars, &c. have shown that Hippolyte borealis,
Kr., is the male of H. polaris, Sab., and that H. Phippsi, Kr., is
the male of H. turgida, Kr. Now if we run over the lists of the
habitat of Phryxus abdominalis and G'yge hippolytes, we find with
surprise that these parasites have constantly been indicated up¢én
Hippolyte polaris and H. turgida, never on the male forms H.
borealis and H, Phippsii. In a recent and very careful work upon
the Crustacea of the west coast of Greenland, H. J. Hansen, after
having indicated the presence of Phrywus abdominalis upon Pan-
dalus Montagui and four different species of Hippolyte, adds that of
the comparatively large number of individuals of this Bopyrian.
observed by him not one was attached to a male host. Lastly,
there is a curious fact to be noted. Kroyer, whose works are
generally so precise and exact, says, in his monograph of the genus
Hippolyte, that the female genital aperture is situated in these
Carides at the same point as that of the males, that is to say, at the
base of the coxee of the posterior feet. Is it not probable that
Kroyer made this erroneous observation upon infested males which
he took for females? This isa point to which I would call the
attention of the Scandinavian zoologists. There are interesting
investigations to be pursued upon a series of phenomena which are
still very little known.—Comptes Rendus, February 138, 1888,
p. 002,

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SIXTH SERIES. |

No. 5. MAY 1888.

XXXVITI.— On a new Physophore, Pleophysa, and its Re-
lationships to other Siphonophores. By J. WALTER
FEWKES*,

[Plate XVIL]

OnE of the most interesting Siphonophores collected by the
United-States Fish-Commission steamer ‘ Albatross’ in the
Gulf-stream is a new genus, Pleophysa, which has most
interesting morphological affinities with known genera of these
animals. This Medusa, notwithstanding its very interesting
relationships, has never been described. ‘The structure of the
genus is so exceptional and its anatomy throws so much light
on the morphology of other little-known Physophores that a
description of it seems worthy of special publication.

Pleophysa was picked out of a’ bottle of “surface skim-
mings ’”’ obtained by the ‘ Albatross’ during her cruise of
1886 fT. ‘Two fine specimens were found, both of which exhibit
the characteristic features here described and figured.

* Communicated by the Author, by permission of G. Brown Goode,
U.S. Fish Commissioner.

+ The bottle in which Pleophysa was found had not been examined
when my Reports on the Meduse collected by the ‘ Albatross’ were
written.

Ann. d& Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol.i. 22

318 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on a new Physophore.

The most exceptional peculiarity in the genus is the struc-
ture of an organ called the hood, elsewhere unknown among
Physophores in this form, although represented by organs
which have already been described in other little-known
genera. This homology of these structures, however, is here
pointed out for the first time. A diagnosis of the genus
Pleophysa, of which only the single species P. Agassizit is
known, is given in the following pages. The account closes
with a discussion of its affinities and its relationships to
certain other Physophores.

I. Description of Ploeeophysa Agassizil, gen. et sp. nov.

PLGOPHYSA, gen. nov.

Float large, conspicuous, partially covered by a _hood-
shaped body, which is (or appears to be) bound by muscular
bands to a globular enlargement of the polyp-stem.

No nectocalyces, no hydrophyllia. Polyp-stem globular,
bearing numerous, long, flexible tasters, without (?) fila-
ments. Polypites situated below the crown of tasters.
Polygastric. ‘Tentacles with tentacular knobs formed of a
sacculus, two terminal filaments, and a terminal vesicle.
Rudimentary involucrum at the base of the sacculus. Sexual
clusters in botryoidal bunches at the base of the tasters.
Moneecious.

Diameter of the float in a horizontal direction 5 millim.
Whole diameter with contracted tasters (hydrocysts) 12-15
millim. Colowless* in alcohol, with the exception of the
pigment-zone about the apex of the float.

Pleophysa Agassizit, sp. nov. (Pl. XVII.)

Float.— The float (f) is large and hemispherical, with a
pigment-zone at the apex, as in Athorybia. ‘The lower hemi-
sphere of the float is inflated and passes directly into a globu-
lar enlargement of the polyp-stem known as the polyp-sac.
Size 2 millim. in horizontal diameter.

Hood.—On one side of the float there rises a structure
called the hood (4). This organ arches over the float in
alcoholic specimens and appears to be a continuation of the
polyp-sac. Its outer walls are papillose, and the whole struc-
ture appears to be glandular. It is connected with the polyp-

* A universal characteristic of all specimens of Physophores which
have been in alcohol for a length of time.

Mr. J. W. Fewkes on a new Physophore. 319

sac by thin bands (m), which embrace the lower part of the
float. It is not possible for me to say that the arching of the
hood over the float, figured in my drawings, is not due to
contraction *, The hood may thus be more prominent in live
specimens than in alcoholic.

Nectocalyces and Nectostem t.—There are no nectocalyces
in the two specimens studied. It is possible that the hood
(h) may be a homologue of the nectostem and the minute
papillz rudimentary nectocalyces. The structure of Plewro-
physa would seem to indicate this interpretation.

Polyp-sac.—The enlargement below the float is known as
the polyp-sac. It is an inflated or globular structure, and
bears on its sides many highly flexible organs (ts), forming a
mass of filamentous bodies with members projecting at all
angles. Looking at the float from one side it will be see
that on the same side of the float as the hood (left hand) there
is acluster of sexual bodies (s) larger than the others. The
position of these bodies is important morphologically.

Tasters.—The whole side of the polyp-sac below the float
is concealed by the tasters (ts). No filaments were observed
on them; but in one or two instances bodies which may be
the filaments of the tasters were observed coiled at their bases.
It is possible that no filaments exist and that these tasters are
like the nectotasters of Apolemia.

Polypites.—The polypites (pt) are contracted to globular
bodies and lie on the underside (opposite the float) of the polyp-
sac. Ordinarily in contraction in alcohol they bear at their
distal end a small button-shaped structure, formed by the
reflexed lips of the mouth. There are several polypites, while
each of these structures has longitudinal rows of “ liver-cells ”’
on its inner walls.

Tentacles and Tentacular Knobs.—The tentacles (ta) arise
from the bases of the polypites. The tentacular knobs were
easily seen in the alcoholic specimens and consist of a sac-
culus, a rudimentary involucrum, two terminal filaments, and
a terminal vesicle.

The terminal filaments are short, stumpy (in alcohol), and

* The description which Heeckel gives of the aurophore of his Auro-
nectze is so short—his paper is a preliminary one (“System der Siphono-
phoren ”)—that Iam unable to say whether my “ hood” of Plaophysa is
not an aurophore. Pleophysa, however, does not belong to the Auro-
nectze, Heeckel, as no nectocalyces are developed in my genus. There are
other structural differences between Pleophysa and the Auronecte,
Heeckel.

+ The stem on which the nectocalyces are carried may be called the
nectostem; that which bears the polyp is called the polyp-stem. Tasters
which arise from the nectostem as in Apolemia may be called nectotasters.

22%

320 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on a new Physophore.

resemble those of Athorybia* rosacea, Koll. The sacculus
is uncoiled, curved, and armed with powerful nematocysts.
The involucrum is rudimentary.

Gonophores.—Clusters of male and female gonophores are
found at the base of the hydrocysts. Moncecious. An ex-
ceptionally large cluster of female gonophores is found at the
point s.

Summary of Exceptional Features in Ploeophysa.

1. Existence of the hood (A).

2. Portion of the stem (axis) which ordinarily bears
polypites (polyp-stem) is reduced to a globular sac.
The nectostem, or the part of the stem which gene-
rally bears nectocalyces, is moditied into a hood (h).

3. Nectocalyces and hydrophyllia are wanting.

II. Conclusions in regard to the Affinities of Ploeophysa.

1. It is the type of a new family, for which the name
Ploeophyside is suggested.

The affinities of Plaophysa are somewhat difficult to make
out. As in the families to which Physalia, Velella, and Rhizo-
physa respectively belong, nectocalyces and hydrophyllia are
wanting. ‘The tentacular knobs are unlike those of any of
these families. There is, however, a remote likeness of the
tentacular knobs of Plewophysa to those of Rhizophysa gra-
cilis, Fewkes T ; but in this genus the stem is elongated and
not globular, as in Ple@ophysa. While the tentacular knobs
somewhat resemble those of Athorybia rosacea, unlike any of
the Anthophyside the Plceophysidse are destitute of hydro-
phylla or covering-scales.

The absence of nectocalyces separates Plaophysa from the
order Auronecte of Haeckel }, although it is not impossible
that the hood is homologous with the aurophore of the last-
mentioned writer.

With the Angelide, a family which includes Angela and
Angelopsis, Pleophysa has close resemblances, but differs
from it in the character of the hood.

* The Athorybia with two kinds of tentacular knobs described by me
as Athorybia formosa is referred by Heckel to Anthophysu, Mert. I
accept his suggestion that it is not an Athorybia, but find it different
from Anthophysa. It is probably a new genus, Diplorybia, Fewkes.

+ Bull. Mus, Comp. Zool. vol. ix. no, 7, p. 270, pl. vi. fig. 5.

¢~ Of the three genera of this order Stephalia is without tentacular
knobs ; while duraha and Ehodaha, according to Heckel, have knobs like
Forskaha,

Mr. J. W. Fewkes on a new Physophore. mai

III. Homology of the Hood of Plceophysa.

The homologue of the hood is to be found among other
Physophores in the nectostem of which it is an outgrowth.
It assumes in certain genera a variety of shapes. In Rhizo-
physa gracilis, Fewkes, in which, as in all Rhizophyside,
the polyp-stem is very long, the hood appears as a small
transparent hernia-like bud with air-bubbles at the base of
the float, as figured in my paper on the jellyfishes of Tor-
tugas *,. In Pleuwrophysa the nectostem does not bear necto-
calyces; but instead of bells it carries small buds or tubercles
on one side. In this genus the hood has been elongated into
a nectostem, but does not yet bear nectocalyces. In Hali-
phyta we have the same condition as in Pleurophysa as far as
the modified hood is concerned f. It can readily be seen
that in these two genera the hood has assumed the shape of a
nectostem, which, in genera like Agalma, bears nectocalyces t.
It seems, then, that we have in the so-called nectostem of
Pleurophysa and Haliphyta an indication of the homology of
the hood of Plaophysa.

In the Rhizophyside, as before recorded, the nectostem is
ordinarily reduced to nothing or wanting. ‘The hood, how-
ever, may be represented in the structure at the base of the
float of Lt. gracilis. In Pterophysa,a giant genus over twenty
feet in length, a differentiation of the nectostem from the
polyp-stem has begun to take place, and in the allied Bathy-
physa abyssorum (Studer) Heckel, both nectostem and
polyp-stem are well differentiated.

In Pterophysa§ we find at the base of the float, in about
the same position as the bud already mentioned on the float
of Rhizophysa gracilis, a cluster of taster-like bodies homo-
logous with the so-called tasters (ts) of Plewophysa. These
bodies indicate the position of the nectostem and are homo-
logous with similar bodies, called nectotasters, found on the

* Loe. cit.

+ The great difference between these two genera is the absence of
hydrophyllia in Plewrophysa and the character of the polypites.

{ I was at first led to suppose that nectocalyces once existed on the
nectostem of Haliphyta and that the small knobs indicated their former
attachment. That opinion is now abandoned, and I now think they were
never there. I am confident of this so far as Plewrophysa is concerned.

§ My figure of Pterophysa, drawn from a beautiful specimen over
twenty feet long, shows no nectocalyces or hydrophyllia. In none of the
specimens which I have studied are there any signs of nectocalyces or
covering-scales, nor of the attachment of these structures, Moreover, a
long nectostem does not exist. I cannot therefore follow Heckel when
he refers my Pterophysa to the Forskalide.

322 Dr. A. Giinther on the

nectostem of Apolemia uvaria. The filiform bodies (ts) of
Pleophysa are thought to be homologous with nectotasters
in Apolemia and Pterophysa.

Cambridge, Mass., U.S.A.,
February 1888.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII.

Sf. Float.

h. Hood.

m. Connexion of the hood with the polyp-sac.

pt. Polypite (artificially extended; in nature probably even
more extended).

pt'. Polypite as it appears in alcoholic specimens.

s. Gonophores. A large cluster of male and female bells.

ta. Tentacle (artificially extended as in nature; in alcohol all
the tentacles are retracted to the body of the polypite).

ts. Taster or hydrocyst.

[The figures are drawn from an alcoholic specimen. ]

Fig. 1. Pleophysa Agassizii (lateral view).
Fig. 2. The same (viewed from above).

XXXIX.— Contribution to the Knowledge of Snakes of
Tropical Africa. By Dr. A. Gtntuer, F.R.S., Keeper
of the Zoological Department, British Museum.

[Plates XVIII. & XIX.]

I. Descriptive Notes.

RHINOCALAMUS, g. n. (Calamariid).

Body elongate, cylindrical, of uniform thickness through-
out; head small, not distinct from neck, narrow and tapering ;
tail rather short, obtuse; eye very small; cleft of mouth
narrow, with feeble jaws ; scales smooth, in seventeen rows ;
subcaudals paired. Rostral shield wedge-shaped ; two pairs
of frontals, the posterior replacing a loreal and anteocular ;
nasal single, but with a groove below the narrow nostril.
Maxillary armed with a few comparatively strong teeth, the
two hindmost of which are enlarged and grooved.

Rhinocalamus dimidiatus, sp.n. (Pl. XIX. fig. C.)
The scutellation of the head of this singular snake consists

Snakes of Tropical Africa. 323

first of a large and broad rostral shield, which in front is
compressed into a horizontal edge. Then follow two pairs of
frontals, the anterior of which are transversely narrow ; the
posterior large, in contact with the third labial and forming
the front margin of the orbit. Vertical broad, subquadran-
gular, with an obtuse angle in front and an acute one behind ;
occipitals rather narrow and elongate, forming a suture with
the fifth labial. Upper labials six, of which the first two are
small, situated below the nasal; the third and fourth enter the
orbit, the fifth is the largest and succeeded by a sixth very
small one. The supraciliary is very small and the single
postocular minute. One large temporal occupies the hinder
part of the temple. The first pair of lower labials form a
suture together in the median line, and are succeeded by a
single pair of small and narrow chin-shields; the fourth
lower labial exceeds the others considerably in extent. Ven-
tral shields 204; anal divided; subcaudals 26.

The upper parts of this snake are uniform black, the lower
parts and the three outer series of scales white.

The largest of three specimens is 15} inches long, the tail
measuring 14 inch.

Three specimens were obtained at Mpwapwa.

The figure of the head is twice the natural size.

Calamelaps miolepis, sp. 0.

In the pholidosis of the head this species agrees entirely
with Calamelaps unicolor, and, like that species, it is of a
uniform deep black colour; but the scales are arranged in °
twenty-one series instead of seventeen. Ventral scutes 205 ;
subcaudals 18; anal bifid.

One specimen, 16 inches long, was obtained at Cape
Maclear on Lake Nyassa.

Elapomorphus acanthias, Kroy.

This species is not always ornamented with longitudinal
bands. The British Museum possesses two specimens from
Old Calabar, one of which has the body uniform black, with
yellowish abdomen, and the other nearly so, although in
certain lights the bands may be seen. In all the head is of
a lighter colour than the trunk, marbled with brown.

Ventral and subcaudal scutes 210 + 18.

Elapomorphus cecutiens, sp.n. (Pl. XIX. fig. B.)
This species is distinguished from its African congeners by

324 Dr. A. Giinther on the

the remarkably small size of the eye, and especially from
Elapomorphus gabonicus by the elongate first lower labials,
which form a suture in the median line behind the mentale.
Head short, broad and depressed. Upper labials seven, of
which the third and fourth enter the orbit; preeocularone; post-
ocular one, rarely two. Temporals 1+ 1, the anterior in contact
with the postocular. Scales in fifteen rows. Ventral scutes
231; subcaudals 17 or 18; anal bifid. The orbit is but little
larger than the depression of the nasal aperture. Upper and
lateral parts uniform dark slate-coloured, lower parts white.

Two specimens from the Cameroon Mountains (altitude
2000 feet), the larger being 20 inches long.

Uriechis capensis, Smith.

This species is distinguished by the very large mentale,
which separates widely the two anterior labials from each
other. Specimens from Zanzibar agree entirely with Jan’s
figure, the fifth labial being in contact with the occipital ; but
a specimen from Nyassa has the body uniform black, the
nuchal white and black bands being present as in the typical
form. This latter specimen has also a longer tail, with 58
subeaudals (and 151 abdominal scutes). The Zanzibar
specimens vary somewhat in these numbers, viz. 187-153
ventral and 41-46 subcaudal scutes.

Uriechis lunulatus, Ptrs.

Although closely allied to Uriechis capensis, this species
may be readily distinguished by the much smaller and shorter
mentale, which allows the lower labials of the first pair to
meet each other in the median line, but without forming so
long and distinct a suture as in Uriechis concolor. The head
is rather broad and depressed. The anteocular about as deep
as long. Seven upper labials, of which the third and fourth
enter the orbit; the fifth only forms a suture with the occi-
pital; one postocular. Temporals 1+2, the anterior not
meeting the postocular. Scales in fifteen rows.

One specimen, 13 inches long, is light olive-coloured, each
scale with a brown edge; the neck is ornamented by a broad
black cross bar, which at a distance of seven scales is suc-
ceeded by a similar but narrower band; a series of about ten
black cross bars follow, becoming narrower and shorter be-
hind; lower parts whitish. 154 ventral and 59 subcaudal
scutes. —Lake Nyassa.

A second specimen is 15 inches long. The ground-colour

Snakes of Tropical Africa. 325

is the same as in the first, but of the black cross bands only
the two anterior are indistinctly visible; lower parts uniform
whitish. Ventral scutes 155; subeaudals 51.—Lake 'T'an-
ganyika.

Uriechis concolor, Fischer.

A specimen from Lado, sent by Emin Pasha, agrees per-
fectly with the description given by Fischer. Besides the
black coloration, the length of the suture formed by the first
lower labials behind the mentale is characteristic. Ventral
scutes 148; subcaudals 54. Fischer’s specimen came from

the foot of Kilima-ndjaro.

Uriechis Jacksonii, sp.n. (Pl. XIX. fig. E.)

This species also is very closely allied to Uriechis capensis.
Scales in fifteen rows. Ventral scutes 150; subcaudals 39.
Head rather narrow, depressed. Preocular short, two post-
oculars. Temporals 1+2, the anterior in contact with the
postoculars ; seven upper labials, of which the third and
fourth enter the orbit, and none of which are in contact with
the occipitals. Mentale short, the lower labials of the first
pair forming a suture together in the median line. Light
olive-coloured, the upper part of the head and of the neck and
also the labials below the eye black; a pair of white spots
behind the occiput. A narrow black line runs along the
vertebral series of scales. Lower parts uniform whitish.

A single young specimen, 74 inches long, was discovered
by F. J. Jackson, Esq., at the foot of Kilima-ndjaro.

The figure of the head is twice the natural size.

Grayta triangularis, Hall.

A young specimen from the Congo has the whole of the
lower parts uniform black. Another young specimen from
the Gaboon differs still more from the type in its coloration,
the light cross bands being absent, appearing as irregular
whitish longitudinal lines on the side of the body. The
itpper parts are nearly uniform greyish brown, each scale
having a darker centre. Lower parts black.

Ahetulla Emin, sp. n.
Ventral shields without keels, 151; anal bifid; upper

labials nine, the fourth, fifth, and sixth entering the orbit ; one
anteocular, two postoculars ; six of the lower labials are in

326 Dr. A. Giinther on the.

contact with the chin-shields; loreal not twice as long as
broad; temporal shields 1+2. Scales smooth, in 15 rows.
Head of moderate size, not elongate or depressed; body and
tail moderately slender. Uniform green; skin between the
scales black, each scale with a white spot on the basal half of
its outer margin,

One specimen was obtained from Monbuttu by Emin Pasha ;
it is 29 inches long, the head measuring ? inch and the tail
10 inches.

Ahetulla shirana, sp. n.

Ventral shields slightly keeled, 157; anal bifid; upper
Jabials nine, the fourth, fifth, and sixth entering the orbit ;
one anteocular, two postoculars ; six of the lower labials are
in contact with the chin-shields ; loreal not twice as long as
deep; temporal shields 1+2+2. Scales smooth, in 15
series. Head of moderate size, not depressed or elongate ;
body and tail moderately slender. Green; skin between the
scales black ; each scale with a white spot on the basal half
of its outer margin. The back of the anterior half of the
trunk is crossed by narrow, closely set, rather irregular, black
cross bars, which become narrower behind and disappear
altogether in the middle of the length of the trunk.

One specimen was obtained at the Blantyre Mission Station
on the Shire River. Jt is 18 inches long, the head measuring
+5 inch and the tail 6 inches.

Ahetulla Bocagii, sp. n.

Ventral shields keeled, 196 ; anal bifid; upper labials nine,
the fifth and sixth entering the orbit; one anteocular, two
postoculars ; six of the lower labials are in contact with the
chin-shields ; loreal elongate, at least twice as long as deep ;
temporal shields 2+2+2. Scales smooth, in 15 series.
Head rather small, not elongate ; body and tail very slender.
Uniform green; skin between the scales black, each scale
with a whitish spot.

One adult specimen was obtained by Lieut. Cameron in
Angola; it is35 inches long, the head measuring ¢ inch, and
the tail 11 inches.

Ahetulla gracillima, sp. n.

Ventral shields without lateral keels, 180; anal bifid ;
upper labials nine, the fourth, fifth, and sixth entering the

Snakes of Tropical Africa. 327

orbit; one anteocular, two postoculars; six of the lower
labials are in contact with the chin-shields; loreal not twice
as long as deep; temporal shields 1+1. Scales smooth, in
15 series. Head remarkably small, not depressed or elon-
gate; body and tail very slender, especially the neck. Uni-
form green; scales without whitish spot.

One specimen was obtained in a collection from the Lower
Congo; it is 27 inches long, the head being 3 inch long, and
the tail measuring 10 inches.

Rhagerrhis oxyrhynchus.

The synonymy of this species stands as follows :—

Psammophis oxyrhynchus, Reinh, Dansk. Vid. Selsk. Afh, 1848, p. 244,
tab. i. figs. 10-12. (V. se. 169-178. Coast of Guinea.)

Ramphiophis rostratus, Peters, Berl. MB. 1854, p. 624, and Reise n.
Mossamb. Amphib. 1882, p. 124, tab. xix. fig. 1. (V.sc. 160-179.
Mossambique. )

Rhagerrhis unguiculata, Ginth. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1868, i.
p. 422, taf. xix. fig. G. (V. se. 176. Zanzibar.)

Ceelopeltis oryrhynchus, Jan, [conogy. livr. xxxiv. pl. i. fig. 1.

Ceelopeltis porrectus, Jan, Leonogy. livr. xxxiv. pl. ii. fig. 1.

Rhagerrhis rubropunctatus.

Dipsina rubropunctata, Fischer, Afrik. Reptil. &c., Hamb. 1884, p. 7,
taf, 1. fig. 3.

Kilima-ndjaro. V. sc. 250.

Psammophis acutus, sp.n. (Pl. XIX. fig. D.)

This species is distinguished by its singularly short and
convex head, terminating in a sharply conical snout. The
rostral shield has a tetragonal form, the upper side forming a
part of the upper surface of the snout. The occipital shields
are small, shorter than the vertical; the single preeocular
touches the vertical; two postoculars ; loreal square; eight
upper labials, of which the first is very small, the fourth and
fitth entering the orbit; temporals 2+3+4. Scales in 17
rows; ventrals 185; anal divided; subcaudals 59 pairs.
General shape of the body similar to that of Psammophis
sibilans. A brown lateral band forms the boundary between
the ground-colour of the back and that of the lower parts.
The ground-colour of the back is light, with a brownish
tinge; a vertebral line of a darker colour occupies only the
median series of scales, but is more dilated on the neck and
the crown of the head. ‘The lateral band is deep brown, with

328 Dr. A. Giinther on the

a black and white edge, occupying the third and fourth and
the two halves of the adjoining series of scales; it com-
mences in the nasal region, passes through the eye, and is
continued nearly to the end of the tail. The outermost series
of scales and the abdomen are yellowish white.

A single specimen from Pungo Andongo is 36 inches long,
the tail measuring 64 inches.

Simocephalus nyasse, sp. Nn.

Scales in 15 rows, all strongly keeled, and the majority
with shorter secondary keels; dorsal scales large, bicarinate.
Ventral scutes strongly keeled on the sides, 178. One ante-
and one postocular; seven upper labials, the third and fourth
entering the orbit; temporals 1+2+3, the anterior separated
from the anteocular by the occipital and fifth labial, which
are in contact with each other. Snout very broad and much
depressed. Uniform brownish black above, lighter beneath.

A single specimen, 17 inches long, from Lake Nyassa.
The tail measures 4 inches.

Boodon geometricus, Boie.

This name, which frequently occurs in treatises on African
snakes, has been applied to specimens of Boodon with 21,
generally 23, and sometimes 25 series of scales, and with two
yellow lines on each side of the head, of which one may or
may not be continued along the side of the body.

From a revision of the specimens in the British Museum
and a comparison of the descriptions by various authors [
have come to the conclusion that several well-marked species
have been confounded under that name, at any rate by
myself in the ‘Catalogue of Colubrine Snakes ;’ that neither
the specimen in the Paris Museum from Péron’s collection,
which was described by Duméril and Bibron, nor the one
figured by Jan, nor the snake figured by Andrew Smith, are
the species named and figured by Boie and Schlegel *.
Jan’s figure was probably taken from a specimen from the
Seychelle Islands, and Smith’s snake is, as Boulenger has
already stated, in fact, Boodon lineatus.

The type of the species is in the Leyden Museum and
described by Schlegel. His description does not agree with
any of the species distinguished here ; possibly it may apply

* Peters and Bocage seem to have assumed that the type named by
Boie is in, or at least identical with the specimens of, the Paris Museum
(Jorn. Se. Lisb. xliv. 1887, p. 199).

Snakes of Tropical Africa. 329

to my Boodon mentalis; but this has 25, and not 21 or 23
scales, as Schlegel says. In short, the true Boodon geo-
metricus is unknown to me. .

The following table may assist in the discrimination of
these species :—

I. 'Two pairs of chin-shields, the shields of the posterior pair in contact
with each other,

A. Scales in 23 rows.
1. One anteocular,

a. The anteocular reaches to the upper surface of the head ;
abdomen yellowish along the middle, slate-coloured on
EHGISIDO cis, carssaepaedetey ates West Africa (Oid Calabar and

Ashantee): B. ventralis.

b. The anteocular does not reach to the upper surface of
the head ; abdomen uniform dusky brown.
Seychelle Islands: B. seychel-

lensis.

2, Lwo-anteoculars: . 6.52. 2. East Africa (Lake Tanganyika
and Mombas): 2B. bipre-
oculares.

B. Scales in 25 rows; lower parts uniform whitish,
Fernando Po: B. poensis.

II. The chin-shields of the posterior pair are separated from each other
by the anterior pair, and do not meet in the median line; scales in 25
COWS Mrtpr ahi PPS ones osha seis erstabrtays Damara Land: £. mentals.

Boodon ventralis, sp.n. (Pl. XVIII. fig. A.)

Scales in 23 rows. Head moderately depressed; snout
not very broad; eye small. One preeocular, which may or
may not reach the vertical ; two postoculars. Loreal longer
than deep; eight low upper labials, the fourth and fifth
entering the orbit. ‘Temporals 1+2+8. ‘Two pairs of chin-
shields, the posterior pair about two thirds of the anterior.
Ventral scutes 205 or 207. Upper parts of a uniform slate-
colour, which colour extends on the abdomen, covering on
each side about one third of the ventral scutes, the middle
third only of the abdomen being of a yellowish-white colour ;
lower part of the tail ight slate-colour. Head with two nar-
row well-defined yellow lines on each side, the two supra-
orbital lines converging on the rostral shield.

This is a West-African species and readily recognized by
the coloration of the abdomen. I have seen six specimens,
three being from Old Calabar and two from Ashantee. he
largest is 32 inches long, the tail measuring 5 inches. One
specimen had swallowed a rat.

330 Dr. A. Giinther on the

Boodon seychellensis, sp.n. (Pl. XVIII. fig. C.)

Scales in 23 rows. Head short and depressed; snout

broad and truncated; eye small. One preocular, which
does not reach to the upper surface of the head; two post-
oculars. Loreal small, rather longer than deep. Upper
labials eight, but the third is sometimes split into two; the
fourth and fifth and sometimes the third enter the orbit; all
the upper labials are high. Temporals 1+2+3. Two
pairs of chin-shields, the posterior pair about two thirds the
size of the anterior. Ventral scutes 195 to 210. Upper
parts brownish grey, with a more or less indistinct dark line
running along the median line of the back and along the
middle of the side of the body. Head with the two bands on
each side very distinct and edged with black; the lower is
broken up into spots, the upper and lower lips being largely
marbled with dark and light brown. An oblique light band
runs from the eye to the angle of the mouth. Lower parts
brown, each scute with a lighter posterior edge.

I have seen three specimens of this species. They were
brought by Dr. Perceval Wright from the Seychelles. ‘The
largest is 36 inches long, the tail measuring 5}. It had
swallowed a young chicken.

Boodon bipreocularis, sp.n. (Pl. XVIII. fig. B.)

Scales in 23 rows. Head and snout rather broad and de-
pressed; eye small. ‘I'wo pre- and two postoculars; the
upper preocular reaches to or nearly to the vertical. Upper
labials low, eight in number, the fourth and fifth entering the
orbit. Two pairs of chin-shields, the posterior pair about
half the size of the anterior. Loreal not much longer than
deep. Ventral scutes 192. Upper parts uniform brown,
lower whitish. The old example shows indistinct traces of
the light labial band, but the supraocular band has entirely
disappeared. In the young specimen both bands are con-
spicuous, narrow, the upper confluent on the preefrontals.

Of this species | have examined two specimens—one from
Lake Tanganyika, 23 inches long, the tail measuring 6
inches ; the second specimen is young and comes from Rabai

Hills, Mombas.

Boodon poensis, sp. n.
L

Scales in 25 rows. Head scarcely depressed, of moderate
width; eye rather small; one preocular, which extends to

Snakes of Tropical Africa. 331

the upper surface of the head, but does not reach the vertical ;
two postoculars. Loreal not much longer than deep; eight
low upper labials, of which the fourth and fifth enter the
orbit; temporals rather irregular; two pairs of chin-shields,
of which the posterior is only half the size of the anterior.
Ventral scutes 214. Upper parts and sides uniform brown,
lower parts whitish. Of the lateral lines of the head only
the anterior portions of the supraorbital lines are distinct ;
they converge on the anterior frontals.

I have seen only one specimen of this species; it came
from Fernando Po. It is young, 12 inches long, the tail
measuring 14 inch.

Boodon mentalis, sp.n. (Pl. XIX. fig. A.)

Scales in 25 rows. Head much depressed, broad, as is
also the snout ; eye large. One przocular, which is in con-
tact with the vertical; two narrow postoculars. Loreal
longer than deep; eight low upper labials, of which the
third, fourth, and fifth enter the orbit. Temporals 1+2+4.
Two pairs of chin-shields ; the shields of the posterior pair
are very narrow and entirely separated from each other by
the anterior. Ventral scutes 214. Upper parts light olive-
coloured, sides and lower parts white; a very indistinct
yellowish band runs along the side of the anterior part of the
trunk. ‘Two yellow lines on each side of the head, the supra-
orbital converging on the rostral shield; the infraorbital is
rather irregular, straight, and not oblique, and covers the
greater part of the lower labial shields.

I have seen only one specimen of this species; it is young,
13 inches long, the tail measuring 2 inches. It came from
Damara Land.

Causus Jacksonit, sp. n.

Scales in 23 rows, only those of the upper series on the
hinder part of the body are keeled. The rostral shield is
turned upwards, with a slightly swollen upper edge as in
Causus rostratus, in which, however, the shield is still more
prominent. In other respects the scutellation is very much
as in the other two species. The anterior frontals are a
little longer than the posterior, and the area of the vertical
shield considerably surpasses that of the occipital. Nostril
between the two nasals and the anterior frontal. Loreal
square; orbit surrounded by a ring of small and narrow
scutes. Six upper labials ; temporals 2+8, the two anterior
being the largest. Ventral scutes 146.

332 Dr. A. Giinther on the

The coloration of the adult is uniform greenish olive, the
abdomen being whitish. A very young specimen has the
back crossed by numerous narrow curved bands, the con-
vexity being directed backwards. The neck and occiput are
ornamented by the outlines of the arrow-shaped spot which is
observed in the two other species, but which in this species
is lost in the adult.

We possess three specimens of this species; one came
from Lake Tanganyika and the two others were found by
Mr. F. J. Jackson at Lamu on the east coast. The largest
is 18 inches long, the tail measuring 14 inch.

Elapsoidea nigra, sp. n.

Uniform black, lower jaw and anterior ventrals whitish.
Scales in 13 rows. Body moderately stout. Ventrals 153 ;
subcaudals in a double series, in 16 pairs ; two pairs of fron-
tal shields, one pree- and two postoculars ; seven upper labials,
of which the third and fourth enter the orbit. ‘Temporals
14+2+42. Anterior chin-shields in contact with four labials.

A single specimen, 16 inches long, the tail measuring 1}
inch, was obtained at Ushambola.

Atractaspis microlepidota, Gthr.

A specimen of this species was obtained on the shores of
Lake Tanganyika. It has 35 and 37 series of scales and 245
ventral scutes.

II. The Snakes of the Luke-districts of Central Africa and
their Relation to those of other Districts of Tropical Africa.

The difficulties attending the carriage in Central Africa of
natural-history collections, and especially of specimens _pre-
served in spirits, have proved a great obstacle to the progress
of our knowledge of the Central-African fauna. Speke and
Grant had to be satisfied with bringing home one small snake
and the head of another, and some of their successors were
even less fortunate. It is only within the last few years that
small collections containing snakes have reached Kurope.
Especially through the mediation of Sir J. Kirk many speci-
mens collected at mission-stations in the interior have been
sent to the British Museum ; and finally the German traveller
Hy. Bohndorft, Mr. F. J. Jackson, and Emin Pasha added to
the same collection series of specimens, numerically, indeed,
not very large, but all of great interest.

Snakes of Tropical Africa. 333

The spectes enumerated in the following list were obtained
at Lado, at Monbuttu, and Semmio (district of the head-

) waters of the Congo), at the great Central-African lakes
southwards to Lake Nyassa, at the foot of Kilima-ndjaro, in

| the Mpwapwa Mountains, and on the highland of Ugogo.
In separate columns an asterisk (*) indicates the occurrence
ae species in the littoral areas of tropical West and Kast

rica.

List of the Species of Snakes known to inhabit Districts of
Central Africa Tt.

7 =) 5
wes Central Lake-districts. fei). = S
ae | $4
N =
1. Typhlops Schlegelii, Biane..... * Tanganyika. * %
2. Rhinocalamus dimidiatus, Gthy. By Mpwapwa.
3. Calamelaps miolepis, Gthr. .... ok Nyassa.
4, Uriechis lunulatus, Pétrs....... ne Lado, Tanganyika, Nyassa. oe *
5. concolor. Wisco” -. 6. i ae Lado, Kilima-ndjaro.
6. Jackson, Gthr. ........ - Kilima-ndjaro,
7. —— capensis, Smith ......3. 66 Nyassa. * A
8. Ablabes Hildebrandtii, Ptrs.t.. a Kilima-ndjaro. Mombaza
9. Coronella nototenia, Gthr..... 5Y Nyassa. ie *
10. olivaces, Pie. oo... a6 oes | Gaboon | Lado, Kilima-ndjaro. ar *
#1. semiornata, Ptrs......... ots Tanganyika. % x
12. imornata, Fisch. ......+. ay Kilima-ndjaro.
13. Neusterophis atratus, Ptrs. .... *% Monbuttu.
14. Grayia Diardi, Dollo§ ...... x Tanganyika.
15. Scaphiophis —_albopunctatus,
LE eo ee ee aehtalehe * Semmio.

+ A few species which I have not seen and about the determination of
which I entertain doubts are omitted from this list. The principal con-
tributions to our knowledge of this part of the Central-African fauna are
the two following :—

1884. Fiscuer, J.G. “Ueber die von Hrn. Dr. G. A. Fischer im
Massai-Gebiete . . . . gesammelten Reptilien, Amphibien, und
Fische.” JB. Hamb. wiss. Anst, i. pp, 3-32, pls. i, & ii.

1886. Dotxo, L. “ Note sur les Reptiles et Batraciens recueillis par
M. le Capitaine Storms dans la région du Tanganyika.’ Bull. Mus,
Belg. iv. p. 151.

{ This snake shows such a remarkable agreement in many points with

the following that a direct eomparison of the typical specimens would be
very desirable.

§ Not seen by myself.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 23

. Bothrophthalmus melanozostus,

. Rhagerrhis

. Aheetulla Kirkii, Gthr.

. Simocephalus nyasse, ns
. Lycophidium Horstockii, Sehd.
. Boodon lineatus, D. B.

534

—— ee
— ——-

Schi.

ecevreeece se ee ae ee vee

biseriatus, Pérs.

oxyrhynchus,
Rnhrdt.
rubropunctatus, Fisch.

Clee) ele elnetie @),e)e\1e e)leye ene) 8

. Amphiophis angolensis, Boe. ..
. Dasypeltis scabra, L.

Ge Gaur OND

palmarum, Leach........

. Bucephalus capensis, Smith

punctata, Pérs...........
Emini, Gthr.

. Dryophis Kirtlandii, Hadlow. .
. Chameetortus aulicus, Gthr.
. Leptodira rufescens, Gm.

semiannulata, Gthr.
Gthr.

eee ree

WUMTCOLON, BO... . st bts

. —— bipreocularis, Gthr.
. Python seb, Gm.
. Naja nigricollis, Rnhrdt.......
. Boulengerina Stormsi, Dollo

. Causus rostratus, Gthr.
. —— Jacksonii, Gihr. ........
. Dendraspis intermedius, Gthr.

Pee eich CO

. Atractaspis Bibronii, Smith...

44, Agim, (Cideouo san bone
45. —— microlepidota, Gthr.
46. Clotho arietans, Merr.........

West
Africa.

Ke RX!

*
Lagos
*
*

On the Snakes of Tropical Africa.

Central Lake-districts.

Semmio.

Lado, Monbuttu, Kilima-
ndjaro, Nyassa.

Kilima-ndjaro.

Mpwapwa, Tanganyika.

Kilima-ndjaro.

Nyassa.

Monbuttu, Kilima-ndjaro.

Kilima-ndjaro.

Nyanza, Mpwapwa, Tan-
oanyika.

Tanganyika.

Kilima-ndjaro.

Monbuttu.

Kilima-ndjaro, Mpwapwa.

Tanganyika.

Kilima-ndjaro.

Tanganyika.

Nyassa.

Kilima-ndjaro.

Mpwapwa, Kilima-ndjaro.

Semmio.

Tanganyika,

Upper Nile.

Kilima-ndjaro,

Tanganyika,

Ugogo.

Tanganyika,

Kilima-ndjaro,
Tanganyika,

Monbuttu.

Tanganyika,

Kilima-ndjaro, Tanganyika.

Nyanza,

|
|
|

Zanzibar Dis-
trict.

Rabai
Lamu

An analysis of this list shows that out of forty-six species
known from these central parts eleven are generally spread
over Tropical Africa, viz. Typhlops Schlegelit, Coronella oli-
vacea, Psammophis sibilans, Dasypeltis scabra, Bucephalus
capensis, Leptodira rufescens, Leptodira semiannulata, Boodon
lineatus, Python sebe, Naja nigricollis, and Clotho arietans.

Of the remaining thirty-five species only eleven have not
been found in the littoral areas of either West or East Africa,

Mozambique

District.

Mr. R. I. Pocock on Scolopendra valida, Lucas. 335

and must be considered at present to be peculiar to Central
Africa,

Leaving out of consideration the species common to tropical
Africa generally, we know :—

1. From Lado and Lake Nyanza three species, two of
which are also found in the East-African littoral.

2. From Monbuttu and Semmio seven species, of which
not less than six are West-African ; therefore this portion of
the fauna of the upper waters of the Congo is probably con-
tinuous along the course of this river to the west coast.

3. From Kilima-ndjaro eleven species, of which three
occur also on the west and four on the east coast.

4, From Mpwapwa and Ugogo four species, of which one
is known also from the west and two from the east coast.

5. From the shores of Lake Tanganyika eleven species, of
which one only has been found also on the west coast, whilst
eight occur in the eastern littoral. However, it should be
remembered that probably most of these species were collected
on or near the eastern shores of the lake.

6. From Lake Nyassa six species, of which one only is
West- and three others Hast-African.

XL.—Description of Scolopendra valida, Lucas, with Notes
on allied Species. By KR. 1. Pocock, Assistant, Natural-
History Museum.

THIS species of Scolopendra appears to be but little known,
and its history up to the present time may be told in a very
few words.

Between 1836 and 1844 it was first described by Lucas
from the Canary Islands. In 1844 one of the specimens from
which Lucas drew up his description was presented to the
British Museum by M. Barker Webb, and was recharac-
terized by Newport in the Trans. Linn. Soc. for the following
year. Since then no new account of the species has been
printed. In 1881 Dr. Kohlrausch, trusting to the descrip-
tions given by Newport and Lucas and to the figure pub-
lished by the latter author, was led to believe that the nearest
ally to this form must be Sc. morsitans of Linneus. But
even a superficial examination of a specimen shows that it
may at once be distinguished from the above-mentioned
species by the possession of certain characters which exist

conjunctly only, I believe, in some few neotropical forms.
23*

336 Mr. R. I. Pocock on Scolopendra valida, Lucas.

That a species from North Africa possesses characters
which seem to point to relationship between it and some
species from South America is of itself a fact of sufficient
interest to deserve special mention ; but it is perhaps scarcely
of a greater interest than certain others connected with the
range of Sc. valida, so far as is at present known, in its own
distributional area.

As stated above, it was first discovered in the Canary
Islands, and hitherto its existence has not to my knowledge
been reported elsewhere. But in addition to specimens
brought from Gran Canaria by the Rev. A. EK. Katon the
British (Natural History) Museum possesses specimens from
Bushire, on the Persian Gulf, in the same degree of N. latitude
as the Canary Islands, and a long series of forms from
Socotra, an island some 1200 English miles to the south of
Bushire.

It will thus be seen that it occurs in two places situated
near the eastern and western extremities of the Mediterranean
district of the Palearctic Region and in an island in the
north-eastern portion of the Ethiopian Region.

Whether or not it will be found in localities between those
already pointed out, it were premature to surmise. Suffice
it to say that although many species of Scolopendra from
North. Africa are known, nothing resembling Sc. valida,
Lucas, has ever been recorded as taken.

The specimens from which the following description has
been taken have been preserved in spirits of wine.

Scolopendra valida, Lucas.

1836-44. Scolopendra valida, Lucas, in Webb & Berthelot, Hist. nat.
des Iles Canaries, ii. Entomol. p. 49, tab. vii. fig. 14.
1845. Scolopendra valida, Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. xix. p. 402.

Colour.—Varying much with size, smaller specimens (380-
60 millim.) being mostly testaceous, with the hinder portion
of the body slightly darker. ‘lwo specimens (90 millim.)
from Socotra testaceous ; others of the same length from Gran
Canaria and Socotra with olivaceous anterior and ochraceous
posterior tergites. Three specimens from Bushire (85-114
millim.) with head-plate, proximal segments of antenne, and
distal segments of anal legs olivaceous, the rest of the body
testaceous or ochraceous. Two specimens from Socotra

Mr. R. I. Pocock on Scolopendra valida, Lucas. 337

120-130 millim.) with anterior tergites olivaceous, posterior
ochraceous, proximal segments of antenne and distal seg-
ments of anal legs nearly black, legs pale green, head-plate
and first tergite olivaceo-castaneous. One specimen (190
millim.), also from Socotra, exhibits coloration of the two
last, but has the legs nearly black.

Antenne consisting of from 19-27 segments, the number in
some instances being different on the two sides; varying in
length from a little less than one third the length of the body
to a little less than one fifth. ‘Three or four basal segments
bare, the rest clothed thickly with short hair; segments more
moniliform in the smaller specimens.

Head-plate very constant in shape, the width in nearly
every case being equal to the length. In the larger forms
equal to about three fourths the width of the anal tergite, in
the smaller the two plates are approximately equal in width.
Faintly punctured and always marked throughout its length
by two faint anteriorly diverging sulci.

Plates of maxillary prosternite either in contact or slightly
separated; each plate furnished with teeth which exhibit
various grades of concrescence. In the smaller forms these
teeth are mostly four in number, small, distinct, and tolerably
sharp. In the larger forms the external tooth remains sepa-
rate, but the three internal begin to coalesce until, in the
largest specimens examined, each plate appears to be fur-
nished with but two teeth—a larger internal, which is more
or less obscurely divisible into two or three parts, and a

smaller external.
Basal tooth always bidentate, though sometimes in small

specimens obscurely so.

Tergites, except the first and last, always bisulcate, except
the five, six, or seven first marginate. The first tergite
sometimes showing very faint signs of the two sulci, but
always deeply grooved transversely in its anterior half. The
anal tergite never with a central longitudinal sulcus.

Sternites, except the last and the first (? always), bisulcate ;
the last sometimes with a faintly-marked median longitu-
dinal depression ; lateral margins slightly converging poste-
riorly, the angles always rounded, and the posterior margin
straight or very slightly convex.

Anal pleure finely punctured, more or less truncate; in
larger forms furnished with a short process; process usually
armed with three spines, but the number of spines varying
from two to six, and in some cases differing upon the two
sides. A spine always present on the posterior external mar-

338 Mr. R. I. Pocock on Scolopendra valida, Lucas.

gin of each pleura midway between the anal tergite and the
process.

Prowimal tarsal segment of all the legs, except those of the
anal somite, always armed with a spur.

Claws of all the legs always armed with two spurs.

Femora of all the legs, except those of the nineteenth,
twentieth, and twenty-first somites, unarmed. Femora of
legs of the nineteenth somite always armed above at the
apex with one or two spines. Femora of legs of the twentieth
somite always armed above at the apex with two or three
spines, which in larger forms are borne upon a longer process.
An accessory spine may be present upon the middle of the
upper surface of the femur.

Femora of anal somite furnished mostly with about 15 or
18 spines arranged in longitudinal series typically as fol-
lows :—3 . 2 on the upper surface, 8 on the upper inner mar-
gin, 2 on the inner surtace, 2.3.2 on the lower surface; but
since each series is liable to variation either in the number
or position of any or all of its constituent spines, it follows
that so many modifications of this typical arrangement are
possible that it rarely happens that two individuals are
exactly alike, or that one individual presents the same
arrangement of spines upon the femora of the right and left
sides. Femoral process conspicuous, armed with from two to
six spines, but for the most part with five—two larger at the
apex, three smaller nearer the base. Length of anal legs
varying from one fourth to one seventh of the length of the
body. Thickness of the femur or of the patella varying from
one third to one half of its length. The patella not armed
with spines.

Length of largest specimen from Gran Canaria 109 millim.

+ 4 3 Bushire cp awa
» 5 x Socotra 190) °55

To redescribe the forms most nearly allied to Sc. valida,
Lucas, were waste of time and space, since excellent descrip-
tions of them may be found in the papers of Dr. Meinert,
Dr. Kohlrausch, and von Porath, to which references are
given.

Scolopendra prasina, C. Koch.

1863. Scolopendra prasina, C. Koch, Die Myriopoden, ii. p. 28, fig. 146.
1876. Scolopendra nitida, Povath, Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bih. iv.
NO, (,0p-t0:

Mr. R. I. Pocock on Scolopendra valida, Lucas. 339

1881, Scolopendra prasina, Kohlrausch, Arch. f. Naturg. 47, p. 122.
1886, Scolopendra prasina, Meinert, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. xxiii.
p. 192.

I have not seen the type specimen of Se. nitida of von
Porath, yet, owing to the fulness of the description of it, I
cannot doubt but that it is identical with Sc. prasina of
C. Koch.

Scolopendra viridicornis, Newport.

1844, Scolopendra viridicornis, Newport, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. xiii.
p. 97. no. 12.

1844. Scolopendra punctidens, id. ibid. no. 20.

1844. Scolopendra variegata, id. ibid. no. 21.

1844. Scolopendra cristata, id. ibid. p. 98. no. 23.

1876. Scolopendra cristata, Porath, Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bih. iy.
no, 7, p. 6.

1881, Scolopendra cristata, Kohlrausch, Arch. f. Naturg. 47, p. 117.

1886. Scolopendra cristata, Meinert, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. xxiii.
p. 192.

Owing to the inadequacy of Mr. Newport’s descriptions,
upon which Dr. Kohlrausch was wholly dependent, it was not
possible for him to discover the above-given synonymy.
This, from an examination of the type specimens, I have
without difficulty succeeded in doing.

Scolopendra gigas, Leach.

1814. Scolopendra gigas, Leach, Trans. Linn. Soe. xi. p. 883.

1845. Scolopendra gigas, Newport, Trans. Linn. Soc. xix. p. 399.

1845. Scolopendra gigantea, id. ibid. p. 400.

1876. Scolopendra gigantea, Porath, Sy. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bih, iy.

: .O.

1881. Si oui gigas, Kohlrausch, Arch, f. Naturg. 47, p. 119.

1886, Scolopendra gigas, Meinert, Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. xxiii. p. 191.

Not to overburden the text with names I have refrained
from repeating many synonyms, which may be found in the
last three of the above-cited works. I have thought it
desirable merely to confirm by an examination of type
specimens the conclusion arrived at by von Porath, from
descriptions alone, as to the identity existing between Sc. gigas
of Leach and Sc. gigantea of Newport. Whether or not the
former be synonymous with Sc. gigantea of Linneus it is
quite impossible to say, since the description of the latter and
the figure from which it was taken, agree in one particular
alone, namely, that they are generally applicable to all Scolo-
pendree, but particularly applicable to none.

340 M. Weltner on the Survival of Spongille

The following table will serve to show how Se. valida,
Lucas, may be distinguished from the allied South-American
species, which agree with it in possessing spines upon the
femora of the nineteenth and twentieth pairs of legs and a
deep transverse furrow upon the first dorsal plate :—

A. Sternites smooth, not bisuleated; patelle of

anal legs armed with spines.............. prasina, C. Koch.
S. Amer,
B. Sternites bisulcated.
a. Last tergite with a median longitudinal
CLOSE Hass oR Orioiaar CIdGOO ho Oc a0: viridicornis, Newp.
S. Amer,
b. Last tergite without a median longitudinal
crest.
a. Femora of all the legs armed; patella _
of anal leovarmied) <. nv co1t anes gigas, Leach. S.
Amer.
6. Femora of nineteenth and twentieth
pairs of legs armed ; patella of anal
les tunarmied. <xivsc seit eee eset valida, Lucas. N.
Afr.

XLI.—On the Survival of Spongille after the Development
of Swarm-larve. By M. WELTNER*,

THE assertion made by Laurent (1844) that our freshwater
sponges perish after the development of swarm-larve was
disputed by Lieberktthn (1857). Marshall (1884) supposes
that there 1s an alternation of generations in Spongilla lacus-
tris. From the gemmule which live through the winter
there originate in the spring male and female Spongille which
fertilize one another. The males die after the development of
the semen ; the females, after the coming forth of the larve,
become neuters and perish in the autumn with formation of
gemmules. The offspring of the male and female specimens
remain neuters in the first year and likewise break up into
gemmules in the autumn.

Gotte (1886), on the contrary, is of opinion that reproduc-
tion universally causes the death not only of the Spongilla,
but of sponges in general. The parts affected by the repro-

* Translated from a separate copy of the paper in the ‘Sitzungs-
berichte der Gesellschaft naturforschender Freunde zu Berlin,’ February
21, 1888, pp. 18-22, communicated by H. J. Carter, I.R.S.

after the Development of Swarm-larve. 341

duction first perish, so that a successive dying-off is observed.
Hence it happens that we find sponges containing larve or
gemmules the exterior of which may appear quite healthy,
while the inner parts are already in course of breaking down
by the development of the germ-materials, or already quite
destroyed. G6tte further explains those cases in which, in
spring and summer, we find perfectly developed gemmules,
together with ova or semen, by the supposition that in them
the germ-formation taking place in the preceding autumn was
prematurely interrupted, and the sponge hybernated with the
gemmules sticking in its soft parts.

At a former meeting (21st December, 1886) I noticed the
freshwater sponges living in the Spree and in the Tegelsee,
and stated that Ephydatia fluviatilis living in the Tegelsee
never forms gemmules there, but is perennial. This sponge
is therefore a favourable object for deciding the question as to
the duration of the life of this species and testing the correct-
ness of the opinion of Laurent and Gitte of the death of the
Spongille through sexual reproduction.

During the last three winters I have kept large and small
(¢. e. down to 1 centim.) specimens of the above-mentioned
species from October to March, May and June, in aquaria,
some standing in heated, others in unwarmed rooms. A part
of them, and especially all the larger specimens, have always
perished in course of time. In many of the smaller ones,
however, the original size became considerably diminished, as
in the case of the larger specimens ; here also the outer mem-
brane became closely applied to the sponge-body or disap-
peared altogether; here also the points of the bundles of
spicules projected more or less; but the efferent canal only
disappeared in a partof them. The others almost constantly
showed an osculum upon each sponge; the presence of an
external membrane closely applied to it was ascertained under
the microscope, and the current of water flowing through the
Spongilla was demonstrated. These little sponges lived
longest, but they also perished in May and June.

The dying off of the Spongille observed in the aquarium
appears, however, to occur by no means so frequently in
nature. Livery one who has kept freshwater sponges in
aquaria knows how difficult it is to keep even small specimens
alive for a few months. On the other hand this is easily
done (see Lieberkiihn and Gdtte), as I have also observed,
with young Spongille reared from larve. It was only after
many attempts that I succeeded in realizing, at least approxi-
mately, the conditions which are necessary tor the prosperity
of larger specimens. My failures in past years in attempting

342 M. Weltner on the Survival of Spongille.

to keep perennial freshwater sponges from the autumn to the
middle of the summer I ascribe chiefly to want of nourish-
ment. We know almost nothing of the food of the Spongille.

On the 16th October of last year I again obtained six large
specimens of Hphydatia fluviatilis from the Tegelsee. The
smallest of these sponges measured 54 centim. in length, the
largest 10 centim.; the thickness of these crusts was 24
millim. in the smallest and nearly 5 millim. in the largest
specimen. All the six were examined for ova, segmentation-
stages, and larve in the most different parts of their bodies
(at this season there is no longer any semen). Four were
neuters, and will be no further referred to. The two others
were female, and, as I expressly note, completely filled with
segmentation-stages and larve. ‘These two specimens were
placed in large aquaria containing 3-4 litres of water *, into
which I had previously put sand and Hlodew. The glass
vessels were disturbed as little as possible and stood in an
unwarmed room of the Zoological Museum. During the
whole time the water was only once changed, and this quite
at the commencement. From these two sponges larve
swarmed uninterruptedly from the 16th October onwards;
the last free-swimming larve were observed on the 30th
October. One of these Spongille constantly showed three
large excurrent tubes and began in December gradually to
diminish in volume; the derm and oscula first disappeared
and the points of the spicules projected freely. On the 2nd
January the temperature of the water in this vessel, which
stood close to the window, had fallen below 32° F., and when
the vessel was turned for observation the water all at once
became solidified in large leaves down to the sponge, which
was in the middle. Both aquaria were then brought into a
place situated between two warmed chambers. The sponge
just described did not, however, recover; it is now much
reduced, nearly the whole skeleton lies bare, in two places
the derm stands off in the form of large closed bladders, and
in the upper part of the sponge there is only a minute
osculum.

The other of the two larva-bearing Spongille constantly
changed the number and position of its oscular tubes during
the first month of its residence in the aquarium; from the
16th November onwards, when a passing frost occurred, it
showed only a few oscula, and from the 10th December the
number and position of the two excurrent tubes remained

* The water was derived from the local water-supply, which receives
its water from the Tegelsee.

On new Reptiles and Batrachians from New Guinea. 343

constant until the Ist February. On this and the following
day the window of the room was left open at night, the tem-
perature of the water had fallen in the morning nearly to
32° F., and the two oscular tubes had completely disappeared
on the morning of the third day. But within a day, the
window having been again closed, the oscula reappeared at
the same place and again showed the same size. Besides
these the sponge has now a third excurrent orifice. This
Spongilla has also become smaller since it was brought from
Tegel; it measured originally 10 centim. in length and
nearly 5 millim. in the thickness of its crust; its length is
now only 9 centim., with a thickness of 24 millim. At one
place the spicular web, deprived of its soft parts, lies upon the
parenchyma of the sponge; on all the rest of the surface we
can indeed with the lens see the points of the spicules pro-
jecting, but almost everywhere the outer membrane may be
seen closely applied to the sponge. In other respects the
Spongilla presents a perfectly fresh appearance and emits
from all the three oscular apertures a quick current of water.
Upon the alteration of the soft-body of Hphydatia fluviatilis
after the time of reproduction and until its recurrence in the
following year I shall report in another place. Only this
may be stated, that, in opposition to the statements of Lieber-
kiihn and Metschnikoff, neither the dermis nor the excurrent
tubes, nor the flagellate chambers and canals, completely dis-
appear in the perennial sponges of the Tegelsee.

From this experiment in keeping alive a decidedly female
Spongilla for nearly four months after the issue of the last
larva it certainly follows that the notion of Laurent and
Gotte as to the death of the Spongille in consequence of
sexual reproduction is not correct in all cases. On the other
hand, I agree perfectly with Gétte that in Ephydatia fluvia-
tilis ‘there can be no question of a decided seasonal difference,
or of a true alternation of generations,’ such as occurs,
according to Marshall, in Spongilla lacustris. '

XLII.—Descriptions of new Reptiles and Batrachians obtained
by Mr. H. O. Forbes in New Guinea. By G. A.
BOULENGER.

Lygosoma Forbesii.
Section LHomolepida. Body rather elongate, limbs short;

344 Mr. G A. Boulenger on new

the distance between the end of the snout and the fore limb is
contained once and a half in the distance between axilla and
groin. Snout very short, obtusely acuminate. Lower eye-
lid sealy. Nostril pierced in a single nasal; no supranasal ;
prefrontal much broader than long, forming a suture with
the rostral and with the frontal; latter shield as long as the
distinct frontoparietals, not larger than the interparietal ;
parietals forming a median suture posteriorly ; four pairs of
enlarged nuchals ; first upper labial largest, fourth below the
centre of the eye. Har-opening circular, a little smaller than
the eye-opening, without projecting lobules. Twenty-six
smooth scales round the middle of the body, those of the two
vertebral series transversely enlarged. A pair of enlarged
preanals. Limbs widely separated when adpressed; hind
limb as long as the distance between the commissure of the
mouth and the fore limb. Digits very short; fourth toe
longer than third; subdigital lamellee smooth, ten under the
fourth toe. Tail thick. Brown above, closely spotted with
black on the back and lineolated on the sides ; yellowish in-
feriorly, throat with small black spots.

millim
Total length (tail reproduced) ........++ 88
GE IN rea ics aie gino olaocacth A
Width’ ofdhead «je Sa ataaietacyicitetrtoeine 55
Body 25 s.crssitanruinwrtain aorenn ete 52
Hore WM se ae Wein ares Satis BRS eae aae 6
Ebind Wambo ere acnien SodGnaoseoases 9

Camp of Sogere, in interior, 1750 feet above sea. A single
specimen.

Typhlops tnornatus.

Body moderately elongate, of subequal diameter through-
out. Snout depressed, rounded. Nasal completely divided
by a suture, which touches the second labial; a preocular,
larger than the ocular ; Jatter shield not touching any of the
labials ; eye just distinguishable, under the ocular ; rostral
rounded posteriorly, its length, as seen from above, nearly
equal to its width ; three scales on a transverse line between
the oculars. ‘I'wenty scales round the middle of the body.
Tail a little longer than broad at the base, ending in a spine.
Uniform black ; borders of mouth and end of tail yellowish.

Total length 170 millim.; diameter of body 4; length of
tail 5.

Camp of Sogere. A single specimen.

Reptiles and Batrachians from New Guinea. 315

Rana macroscelis.

Allied to Rana Guppyt. Vomerine teeth in two short
oblique series on a level with the hinder edge of the choane,
which are large. Head large, subtriangular; canthus ros-
tralis distinct ; loreal region deeply concave; eye large; inter-
orbital space narrower than the upper eyelid; tympanum
very distinct, circular, two thirds or three fifths the diameter
of the eye. Fingers moderate, the tips dilated into small but
very distinct disks, first extending beyond second ; toes webbed
to the disks, which are small ; subarticular tubercles large,
elliptic ; a single, feebly prominent, elliptic metatarsal
tubercle. The hind limb being stretched forwards along the
body, the tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the tip of the
snout. Upper surfaces minutely warty or granulate, the
granules largest on the sides of the head; a short glandular
fold above the tympanum. Dark olive-brown above, with
some light spots around the upper lip and along the canthi
rostrales ; lower parts whitish, throat largely spotted or
marbled with black.

From snout to vent 140 millim.

Camp of Sogere. Several female specimens.

CALLULOPS, g. n. (Hngystomatidarum).

Pupil erect. Tongue oblong, entire, slightly free behind
and on the sides. Palatine bones forming an acute ridge
across the palate, armed with a series of small teeth. A
cutaneous denticulated ridge across the palate, in front of the
cesophagus. ‘Tympanum distinct. Fingers and toes free,
tips swollen into small disks. Outer metatarsals united.
Distal phalanges simple. No precoracoids ; no omosternum ;
sternum cartilaginous. Diapophyses of sacral vertebra feebly
dilated.

Intermediate between Callula and Xenobatrachus.

Callulops Dorie.

Head rather small, much broader than long, convex on the
frontal and occipital region ; eyes small ; no canthus rostralis ;
interorbital space much broader than the upper eyelid; tym-
panum much larger than the eye. First and second fingers
equal; toes moderately elongate ; inner metatarsal tubercle
indistinct ; tibia two fifths the length of head and body. ‘The
tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the shoulder, Skin smooth,

346 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on the Chelonian

thick and leathery on the back. Brown (coloration badly
preserved) ; groin and sides of hind limb yellowish, with a
wide-meshed blackish network.

From snout to vent 75 millim.

A single female specimen. Milne Gulf.

Named in honour of the Marquis Giacomo Doria, who has
so largely contributed to our knowledge of Papuasian

herpetology.

XLITI.—On the Characters of the Chelonian Families Pelo-
meduside and Chelydide. By G. A. BoULENGER.

THERE is probably not in the whole classification of Reptiles
a more natural division than that of the typical Chelonians
(z. e. excluding the Athecz and Trionychoidea) into Crypto-
dira and Pleurodira. In addition to the two well-known
characters, viz. the lateral bending of the neck and the
anchylosis of the pelvis, the latter group differs in the
following points :—

The mandible articulates with the skull by a condyle
fitting into a concavity of the quadrate; the outer border
of the tympanic cavity is completely encircled by the
quadrate ; the pterygoids are extremely broad throughout and
form wing-like lateral expansions; the cervical vertebre
have strong transverse processes, and their cup-and-ball
articulations are single throughout.

The existing Pleurodira may be divided into three
families:—1. Pelomedusidw (= Pelomeduside + Peltocepha-
lide, Gray); 2. Chelydide (=Chelydide + Hydraspidide,
Gray) ; 3. Carettochelydide *. The latter family, character-
ized by the absence of dermal shields on the shell and the
paddle-shaped limbs, is at present known from external cha-
racters only, but is apparently closely related to the Chelydide.
Considering how widely the first two families differ, it is
surprising that their recognition should have been delayed

* {I have asked Mr. Boulenger, who for some time past has been en-
gaged in the study and arrangement-of Chelonians, to publish this note
in the ‘Annals, in order to preclude any misapprehension as to the
authorship of this division of the Pleurodira, This division has been
adopted in the article “Tortoise” of the ‘ Encyclopzedia Britannica,’
which bears the signature A. C. G. usually affixed by the publishers to
my articles, but which, in fact, is the joint production of Mr. Boulenger

and myself. More especially he supplied me in manuscript with the
systematic synopsis as inserted in the article —A. GUNTHER. |

Families Pelomeduside and Chelydide. 347

so long. Baur*, it is true, has recently expressed the correct
view ; but the characters pointed out by him are by no means
the only ones which separate the two families, as may be seen
from the following diagnoses :—

PELOMEDUSID®.

Plastral bones eleven, mesoplastrals being present. A bony temporal
arch ; quadrato-jugal present ; preefrontals in contact; no nasals; pala-
tines in contact; dentary single. Second cervical vertebra biconvex.
Neck completely retractile within the shell.

Africa, Madagascar, South America.

A. No bony temporal roof; mesoplastra extending right across the
plastron : Sternotherus.

B. No bony temporal roof; mesoplastra small and lateral: Pelo-
medusa.

C. A bony temporal roof, the quadrato-jugal forming a suture with
the parietal ; mesoplastra small and lateral : Podocnemis (=Du-
meridia) and Peltocephalus.

CHELYDIDZ.

Plastral bones nine. No bony temporal arch, the quadrato-jugal
being absent; preefrontals separated throughout ; nasals present, except
in Chelys; palatines separated by the vomer; dentary bones distinct T.
Fifth and eighth cervical vertebree biconvex. Neck bending under the
margin of the carapace, always exposed.

South America, Australia, and Papuasia.

A. Neck longer than the dorsal vertebral column: Chelys, Hydro-
medusa, Chelodina.

B. Neck shorter than the dorsal vertebral column: Hydraspis,
Platemys, Elseya, Chelymys.

It will be observed that, owing to the structure of the Pelo-
meduside, the term Cryptodiran, as opposed to that of
Pleurodiran, no longer expresses a distinguishing character.
The Pelomeduside are in fact ‘‘ Cryptodiran,” and the Chely-
didee “ Phanerodiran.” ‘The term “ Orthodira”’ as opposed
to that of Pleurodira would convey the correct idea. But I
do not suggest such an alteration, for it seems to me the
names of higher groups should, whenever practicable, be
retained in virtue of the law of priority, like those of genera
and species.

* Zool. Anz. 1887, p. 101.
+ The symphysial suture disappears in adult specimens of Elseya and
Chelymys, but is perfectly distinct in younger specimens of these genera.

348 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on the

XLIV.—Some Observations on the Coleopterous Family
Bostrichide. By CHartes O. WATERHOUSE.

Havina recently had occasion to examine some species of
Bostrichide, I have noticed a few points to which I think
it advisable to call attention.

First, I observe that all the authors whom [ have con-
sulted who venture an opinion on the sexes in the genus Apate
have reversed the sexes, not unnaturally supposing that the
examples with fulvous hair on the forehead were males. The
males have very little hair on the head ; the pronotum has a
recurved acute tooth at the anterior angle, and the apical
segment of the abdomen is rounded. The female has much
more hair on the head ; the anterior tooth on the pronotum is
not prominent, and the apical segment. of the abdomen is
broadly truncate, fringed with fulvous hair and with a line of
hair just before the margin.

Apate terebrans, Pallas, is therefore the female of A. muri-
catus, F¥. The reverse has been suggested.

Von Harold suggests (Mitth. d. Miinchn. ent. Ver. i. p. 119)
that Apate Francisca required a new generic name, because
Apate is founded on “ muricatus,” which is also the type of
Stnoxylon. But Apate is founded on muricatus, Fabr., and
not on muricatus, Linné, the latter being the type of Stnoxy-
lon. Itistrue that Duftschmidt in describing Stnoaylon gives
a reference to Fabricius (as well as to Linné) in naming muri-
catus as his type; but he gives three lines as the length of
the species, which proves that he had the Linnean insect
before him.

It is to be regretted that some recent authors have endea-
voured to reestablish Ligniperda, Pallas (1772), which is
founded on wood-boring species generally, belonging to diffe-
rent families. If any species can be said to be the type of
his genus it is capucinus, which is the type of Bostrichus,

Geoff. (1762).

Dinoderus substriatus, Steph. (nec Payk.), 1830.

Stephens, in his characters for the genus Dinoderus, men-
tions only five small joints following the two larger basal
joints of the antenne. He overlooks the joint next to the
club, and on examining his type I am not surprised at his
doing so, for (from the position of the antenne and the

Coleopterous Family Bostrichide. 349

pubescence) it is difficult to see. His type has, however, six
joints to the funiculus.

This species appears to be found allover the world. Speci-
mens are in the British Museum from the following locali-
ties :—St. Helena, Madeira, Sierra Leone, Bangalore,
Ceylon, Penang, Siam, Hong Kong, Java, Celebes, New
Guinea, Dorey, Philippine Islands, Brazil, Santarem.

The specimen from Madeira is the type of Rhézopertha bi-
Joveolata, Wollaston, so named on account of the two approxi-
mate fove at the base of the thorax which are so charac-
teristic of the species. I think there can be no doubt that it
is Apate minuta, Fabr., from New Zealand, but most unfor-
tunately the type is no longer to be found in the Banksian
collection *, From Dr. Horn’s description of D. brevis (Proc.
Amer. Phil. Soc. 1877, xvii. p. 550) it is evident that it is
closely allied to m¢nuta, and may even be the same species.

XYLOPERTHA, Guérin, 1845.

Guérin (Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr. 1845, p. xvii) mentions four
types for this genus:—Apate minuta, F., truncata, De}.,
longicornis, F., and sinuata, F. As minuta, according to the
foregoing note, is Dinoderus, Steph., and longicornis has now
the genus Tetrapriocera, Horn, tor its reception, it would be
best, in my opinion, to retain the name Xylopertha tor truncata
and sinuata &c.,

Apate substriata, Payk.

I propose the generic name Stephanopachys for this species,
which is too well known to require description, being the
Dinoderus of many authors, but not of Stephens.

Rhizopertha rufa, Hope.

I think it very doubtful whether this species should be
separated from £&. pusilla. Typical examples, however, in
the British Museum collection are not in sufficiently good
condition to enable me to say positively.

It may be useful to point out that Bostrichus mutilatus,
Walker, is a Xylopertha and must be transferred from under
Tomicus in Gemminger and Harold’s Catalogue, p. 2691.

* T have just received a letter from M. Fleutiaux of Paris (who sent
me a specimen under the name of minuta, F., to compare with the type),
in which he informs me that it is RAizopertha sicula, Baudi, and Xylo-
pertha fovercollis, Allard.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 24

350 On the Coleopterous Family Bostrichide.

It is a very common species, having a wide range in the
Malay Archipelago. The elytra are a trifle less strongly
punctured than in a species which we have under the name
Apate lifuana, Montr.; but the two insects are scarcely
distinct, and both bear the name “ religiosa, Dej.”

Sinoxylon fumatum, nitidipenne, and pubescens, Murray,

should be placed in Xylopertha.

CANOPHRADA, n. gen.

General characters of Bostrichus. Antenne composed of
ten joints; first joint elongate, the second one third shorter
(but nearly twice as long as broad), the third to eighth joints
becoming wider, compressed ; the third scarcely as long as
broad, the fourth a little longer than broad, narrowed at its
base, the fifth, sixth, and seventh short and broad ; the eighth
joint a little longer than the sixth and seventh together and a
little broader at its apex ; the ninth shorter than the eighth and
narrower, the tenth still narrower, elliptical. The eighth,
ninth, and tenth form an elongate club, which, however, is
not abrupt, owing to the width of the previous joints.

Quite distinct from all the genera of Bostrichide by the
compressed and relatively broad antenne.

Cencphrada anobioides, n. sp.

Elongata, nigra, convexa; thorace subrotundato, antice sat angus-
tato, scabroso, fulvo piloso; elytris parallelis, confertim fortiter
subseriatim punctatis, ad apicem oblique declivis, parte decliva
tuberculis depressis rotundatis confertim dispositis ornata.

Long. 15} millim.

This species has the general appearance of Bostrichus
jesutitus, Fabr. ‘The sculpture of the elytra is very similar,
but not so coarse, the punctures are still more irregular in
form, the interstices more rugulose, narrower, and marked
with fine punctures. ‘The apical declivity is rather less
abrupt, and instead of being punctured is covered with round,
shining, flattened tubercles, which are placed close together.
The thorax a little narrower than the elytra, distinctly nar-
rowed in front, more rounded at the posterior angles. ‘The
sculpture is nearly the same, but not quite so rough in front,
and there are only three prominent teeth visible from above on
each side in front.

Hab. N. India (Col. Buckley). Brit. Mus.

Mr. F. Day on Trachinus draco and T. vipera. 351

XLV.—On Trachinus draco and T. vipera.
By Francis Day, C.I.E., F.L.S., &e.

On referring to a few among the many ichthyologists who
have written upon these two species of British weever-fishes
or Trachinus one cannot help observing some differences of
opinion. Willughby and Ray (‘ Historia Piscium,’ 1686)
recorded the “ viver”’ or ‘‘ weever,” Draco marinus (p. 288,
t. S10. fig. 1),-which showed D. 5 | 29, and the “ otterpike,”’
Draco marinus species altera (p. 289, t. 510. fig. 2), having
D.6 | 19. Although one was termed the “ weever”’ and the
other the ‘ otterpike,” names by which the two British forms
are to this day distinguished by our fishermen, still an error
existed in the figures, as was pointed out by De la Roche in
the ‘Annales du Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle,’ xiii. 1809.
This latter author observed that the first figure in the ‘ His-
toria Piscium’ was doubtless Trachinus draco, but that the
second was J’. léneatus, Bloch-Schneider, 1801, p. 55, tab. 10.
But Cuvier and Valenciennes, in their ‘ Histoire Naturelle
des Poissons,’ observed that De la Roche had also been in
error respecting this second figure, as it neither represented
the “ otterpike” of Britain nor TY. lineatus of Schneider ; in
fact it was an unnamed form, so was termed 7. radiatus,
Cuv. & Val. Thus, although two British forms of this genus
were recognized and described by Willughby and Ray, only
one was figured.

Ray (‘Synopsis Methodica Piscium,’ 1713) gave the
“‘ weever,” page 91, and the “ otterpike,” page 92, which last,
he observed, he had not seen. Pennant (‘ British Zoology,’
1776) correctly figured and described both forms, the “ great
weever,” page 171, plate xxix., showing D. 4 | 29, and the
“common weever,” page 169, plate xxviil., with D. 5 | 23;
but De la Roche erroneously observed they belonged to one
species. In Gmelin’s ‘ Linneus,’ 1788, p. 1157, only one
species of this genus was recognized, and that under the
designation of T’rachinus draco. Donovan (‘ British Fishes ’)
tigured the “ lesser weever,” and his example had D. 5 | 25;
but following Gmelin he termed it D. draco, while Turton
(‘ British Fauna,’ 1807) appears to have compiled his descrip-
tion from Pennant’s ‘‘common weever’’ and Donovan’s
account and figure. Fleming (‘ History of British Animals,’
1828, pp. 213, 214) described two forms, 1’. draco, ‘ common
weaver, D.5 | 25, and 7. major, ‘greater weaver,’ D.5 | 32.
Cuvier and Valenciennes (‘ Histoire Naturelle des Poissons,’
iii. 1829) had 7. draco, D. 6 | 30, A. 1 | 31, and TZ. vipera,

24*

352 Mr. F. Day on Trachinus draco and T. vipera.

D. 6 | 24, A. 25. In the first we are told that on part of the
head and gill-covers are small scales, but none on the pre-
opercular margins ; also that two very striking characters by
which these two species may be readily distinguished are the
number of soft rays in the second dorsal fin, and that the
cheeks of the lesser weever are almost scaleless.

Yarrell (‘ British Fishes,’ ed. i. 1836) gave, vol. i. p. 20,
the “ great weever,” Trachinus draco, with agood figure, and
respecting the fins says D. 6 | 380; and at p. 25, the “ lesser
weever,” 7’. vipera, D. 5-6 | 24, observing “ from an exami-
nation of many specimens it is probable that it very seldom
exceeds 5 inches in length.”’ Jenyns (‘ Manual of British
Vertebrate Animals,’ 1835) added little to the foregoing, but
gave the dorsal rays of the “ great weever”’ at 6 | 31, and of
the ‘lesser weever” at 6 | 23-24. Parnell (‘ Fishes of the
Firth of Forth’) observed that 7. vipera was distinguished
from 7. draco by having no spine before the eyes and by the
second dorsal fin being composed of twenty-four rays, whereas
in the ‘ greater weever” there exists a strong hooked spine
before each eye and thirty rays in the second dorsal fin.
White (‘ List of British Fish in the British Museum,’ 1851)
made no alteration. Giinther (‘Catalogue of Fishes,’ 1860,
vol. ii. p. 233) gave Trachinus draco with D. 6 | 29-31, and
at p. 236 7. vipera with D. 6 | 21-23; while in his ‘ Intro-
duction to the Study of Fishes,’ 1880, p. 464, he remarked
‘“‘ On the British coasts two species occur, 7. draco, the greater
weever, attaining to a length of 12 inches, and 7’. vipera, the
lesser weever, which grows only to half that size.” Couch
(‘ Fishes of the British Islands,’ vol. 11. 1877) observed that
the smaller species was not known to naturalists until the
early part of the present century, for before that time it had
generally been confounded with the greater weever both in its
form and habits; that it rarely exceeds the length of 4 or
3 inches and is proportionally deeper in the body than the
greater weever. M‘Intosh (‘ Marine Fauna of St. Andrews,’
1875, p. 173) stated that 7. draco was frequent on the West
Sands after storms, and 7’. vipera not uncommon in the same
locality, and brought in by the fishermen. In my ‘ British
Fishes,’ 1880-81, I gave the two forms as distinct, and figured
both, remarking that 7. draco had D. 5-6 | 29-31, and 7.
vipera D. 6 | 21-24, while the first had ‘‘ two small spines at
the anterior-superior angle of the orbit,” but that in the latter
there are “no spines above the orbit.” Since then Ogilby
recorded his disbelief of the fact that 7’. draco had been taken
in Ireland, where, however, 7. vipera is not rare.

In the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. May 1886, p. 441, Prof.

Mr. F. Day on Trachinus draco and T. vipera. 353

M‘Intosh considered that “it is possible that the one is
only a young stage of the other and that certain distinctions,
such as the absence of spines above the orbit in the smaller
form and its greater depth in proportion to its length, disap-
pear with age.” At p. 526 of the same volume I made some
remarks, which I now propose supplementing, as Mr. Dunn
has procured for me two specimens of the “ greater weever,”
Trachinus draco, measuring 5°1 and 7-0 inches respectively
in length. In my ‘British and Inish Fishes,’ pl. xxxi., I
figured a specimen life-size of the ‘ lesser weever’’ which
measured 43 inches in length, which I took from a shrimp-
net at Weston- super-Mare, and I have seen others nearly an
inch longer, while Ogilby. has recorded one 6} inches long
from Portrush, i in the vicinity of Antrim, while he likewise
asserted that the ‘ larger weever”’ was absent from the Irish
coasts.

There is no need to refer again to the greater depth of the
smaller species and how it has a lesser number of rays and
no spines near the orbit, except for the purpose of remarking
upon the two specimens of the Zvrachinus draco recently
received. In the first, 7 inches long, the spines at the ante-
rior-superior angle of the orbit were as distinct as in any of
the larger specimens which I have seen, while those in the
example 5 inches in length had them as prominent as in the
ee fish. If, then, Zrachinus vipera has been observed at

4, OF, and 64 inches in length with no spines near the orbit,
ae they are well developed in specimens of 7 "rachinus
draco at 5°1 and 7-0 inches respectively in length, such is a
pretty convincing proof that this armature is not consequent
upon the augmented size or increased age of the fish. As to
fin-rays, both these small examples of 7. draco had D. 6 | 29,
A. 31-82, the first of this latter fin being a spine; but I have
never seen a 7’, vipera with more than twenty-four soft rays
in the dorsal tin or twenty-six in the anal. ‘The form of the
body of these small examples of 7. draco was not nearly so
deep as seen in JZ’. vipera. I think we may safely conclude
that Linneeus was in error when he included the two torms as
one species, and that Fleming, Cuvier and Valenciennes,
Yarrell, Jenyns, Parnell, White, Giinther, Couch, and others
were quite correct in considering that we possess two distinct
species; viz. 7. draco, D. 5-6 | 29-31, and T. vipera,
D26,| 21- 24, the first with orbital spines, the second without
them.

Cheltenham,
April 6, 1858.

354 Mr. A. S. Woodward on

XLVI.—Note on the Early Mesozoic Ganoid, Belonorhynchus,
and on the supposed Liassic Genus Amblyurus. By A.
SmitH Woopwarp, F.G.S., F.Z.S., of the British Mu-
seum (Natural History).

J. BeLonoruyncunus, Bronn.

Tuirty years ago Dr. H. G. Bronn * described a remarkable
fossil fish, presumably “ Ganoid,” from the Upper Trias of
Raibl, Carinthia, assigning to it the generic name of Belono-
rhynchus, in allusion to the length of its Belone-like snont.
Eight years later Prof. Rudolph Kner f had the opportunity
of examining fifty other well-preserved specimens from the
same locality ; and the character of the genus and its type
species, B. striolatus, are thus defined with considerable accu-
racy and completeness. The head has an enormously pro-
duced snout, its total length being nearly equal to that of the
whole of the body behind; it is superficially ornamented with
transverse rug ; the lower jaw is as long as the upper; and
there are large widely-spaced teeth, with smaller ones inter-
vening. Both pairs of fins are present, comparatively small,
and the pelvics are placed far behind; the single dorsal and
anal fins are nearly equal in size, opposite, and very remote ;
and the caudal fin is symmetrical, slightly forked. ‘The body
is slender and destitute of ordinary scales, but ridged both
dorsally and ventrally by a single series of much elongated,
distally pointed, overlapping scutes, which become especially
long and needle-shaped upon the tail, beyond the dorsal and
anal fins; the lateral line is also supported on each side by a
row of broad scutes.

The head of this fish is so similar to that of Belonostomus
that Bronn (oc. cit. p. 12) was originally led to suspect that
the Liassic species B. acutus and B. Anningiw, named by
Agassiz { upon the evidence of the head alone, might truly
belong to Belonorhynchus. Zittel§ has recently remarked
that the first of these certainly does belong to the latter genus,
though without publishing the evidence; and I am now able

* H. G. Bronn, “ Beitrage zur triasischen Fauna und Flora der bitu-
minosen Schiefer yon Raibl,’” Neues Jahrb. 1858, pp. 7-12, pl. i. figs. 1-10.

+ R. Kner, “ Die Fische der bituminésen Schiefer von Raibl in Karn-
then,” SB. Akad. Wiss. Wien, math.-naturw. Cl. lii. pt. 1 (1866),
pp. 189-196, pl. vi.

{ L. Agassiz, Rech. Poiss. Foss. vol. ii. pt. 2, pp. 142, 143, pl. xlvii a.
figs. 3, 4.

-§ K. A. von Zittel, Handb. der Paleont. vol. iii. (1887), p. 222

Me hal hd

Belonorhynchus and Amblyurus. 355

to add that the undescribed B. Anningie must also be placed
here, this being specifically undistinguishable from B. acutus
so far as can yet be determined. ‘The fact is of interest, as
considerably curtailing the known range of the genus Belono-
stomus, of which no satisfactory specimens have hitherto been
discovered below the lithographic stone of Bavaria and
France *,

Conclusive proof of the generic identity of the so-called
Belonostomus Anningie with Belonorhynchus is afforded by
more than one specimen in the British Museum, but only a
single fossil (no. P. 3790) gives much clue to the proportions
of its trunk and the characters of some of the scutes.
Whereas in the typical B. striolatus the head is about equal
to the rest of the body in length, in B. Anningie it is not
more than half as large in proportion ; and the snout of the
latter is destitute of the superficial transverse striations charac-
teristic of the former. The dorsal scutes, however, upon the
middle of the trunk are equally narrow and pointed, and
apparently of corresponding torm and size.

This discovery will eventually lead to a more complete
elucidation of the characters of Belonorhynchus, tor the Liassic
species being considerably larger than the ‘[riassic and its
remains occurring in a more satisfactory matrix it will
doubtless throw considerable light upon the structure of the
skull when exhaustively studied. At present, however, it
must suffice to remark that there appears to be a very close
resemblance between the skull and mandible and dentition of
this genus and the corresponding parts of Belonostomus ; and
one tossil lately described | is very suggestive of a large
mandibular presymphysial bone, exactly similar to that dis-
covered by Otto Reis ¢ in the Solenhofen Belonostomus.

The Liassic specimens and a few additional examples of
B. striolatus trom Raibl also seem to determine definitely

* Agassiz (tom. cit. pt. 2, p. 143) named a species from the Stonesfield
Slate B. leptosteus, and Phillips (Geol. Oxford, 1871, p. 180, diagy. xl.
fig. 4) figured under this name a portion of mandible which might pertain
either to Belonostomus or Belonorhynchus. ‘The evidence is very uncertain,
and some of the supposed fragments of Belonostomus from Stonestield, so
labelled in collections, doubtless belong to a species of Aspedorhynchus, of
which Phillips figured a mandibular ramus under the name of * Pholedo-
phorus minor ?, Agass.” (op. eit, p. 180, diazr, xl. figs. 5,6), and of which
there are satisfactory specimens in the British Museum,

+ Smith Woodward, “ On the Mandible of Belonos‘omus einctus, &e.,”
Quart. Journ. Geol]. Soc. vol. xliv. (1888), p. 147, pl. vil. fig. 14.

Tt O. Reis, ‘* Ueber Belonostomus, Aspidorhynchus, und ibre Beziehun-
gen zum lebenden Lepidosteus,” SB. math.-phys. Cl. bay. Akad. Wiss,
1887, p. 169, pl. i. fig. 4.

356 On Belonorhynchus and Amblyurus.

that in Belonorhynchus the notochord was persistent. Kner *
suspected that there were complete vertebral centra in the
anterior portion of the trunk and small triangular calcifica-
tions in the sheath of the notochord more posteriorly ; but the
small bodies must doubtless be regarded as the expanded
proximal portions of the neural and hemal arches, quite
similar to those of many other early Ganoids. It may be
added, moreover, that Bronn’s description of the fin-rays as
transversely jointed is correct, though subsequently questioned
by Kner, the fossils being often deceptive owing to the cir-
cumstances of preservation.

With regard to the systematic position of the genus, Kner
institutes many comparisons with the living Fistularia, and
Liitken | has suggested that it is probably related to the
Cretaceous Dercetis. The characters of the skull, however,
together with the disposition of the fins and the primitive
nature of the vertebral axis, appear to indicate much more
affinity with Belonostomus and its allies, as originally recog-
nized by Bronn; and the genus may therefore be referred to
a nearly related family, the Belonorhynchide, characterized
as follows:—Body long and slender; snout much elongated
and pointed. Notochord persistent, the bases of the arches
expanded. Paired fins moderately developed; dorsal and
anal fins large, nearly equal and opposite, very remote ;
caudal symmetrical ; fulcra minute or absent. No continuous
squamation, but a median longitudinal series of dorsal and
ventral scutes, and a single lateral series on each side support-
ing the lateral line.

II, AmBLyurus, Agassiz.

While referring to Liassic Ganoids it may be well to place
on record a correction which was made some years ago by
Mr. William Davies in the British Museum, but does not
appear to have been hitherto published. Whatever be the
nature of the head-fragment associated by Agassiz with the
genus Amblyurus, there can be no doubt that the type speci-
mens of the single species, Amblyurus macrostomus }, are
really vertically crushed specimens of Dapedius; and the
name thus falls into the synonymy of this well-known Lower
Liassic fish.

* R. Kner, loc. cit. p. 192, pl. vi. figs. 4, e.

+ C. F. Lutken, “ Professor Kner’s Classification of the Ganoids,”
Geol. Mag. vol. v. (1868), p. 482.

J L. Agassiz, tom. cit. pt. 1, p. 220, pl. xxve.

Mr. A. S, Olliff on Australian Lepidoptera. 357

XLVII.—Short Life-histories of nine Australian Lepidoptera.
By A. Sipney Ouuirr, Assistant Zoologist, Australian
Museum, Sydney.

[Plate XX .]

THE following pages contain notes and descriptions of larve
observed in the immediate neighbourhood of Sydney, drawn
up with the view of supplying some little information about
the early stages of such species as I have succeeded in rearing
during the past year. As few collectors in Australia have
turned their attention to the earlier stages of the Lepidoptera,
any resident entomologist with time and inclination for the
work would have an almost untrodden field in this direction.
Of the ten larvee which I have reared, as far as [ am aware
only one, namely Srunia replana, has previously been ob-
served, although my larva-collecting scarcely extended
beyond the limits of a single garden at Double Bay, one of
the innumerable indentations of Port Jackson.

Papilionide.

Papilio sarpedon, Linn., var. choredon, Feld.
(Blt XXtign 1.)

The larva when very young is of a velvety black colour,
with numerous spines, somewhat resembling those of many
Nymphalide. On the shoulders two much larger spines
fringed with hairs, and two at the anal extremity pure white.
As the larvee increase in size they lose the whole of the
spines with the exception of two on each side of the first
three segments * and the two at the tail, the colour of the
insect now being of a dull sap-green above, merging into a
bluish ashy hue on the sides; on the third segment, between
and connecting the two spines, is a bright yellow band.
These colours, although decreasing in intensity and becoming
finely speckled with white, are continued until the insect is
full-grown. ‘The spines, however, become smaller and the
lateral band of yellowish white in the region of the stigmata
much more distinct. The adult larva is robust anteriorly,
gradually tapering to the tail, in length about 1} inch, and
possesses retractile tentacula.

* In this and the following descriptions the head is considered sepa-
rately and the segments are counted antero-posteriorly from one to twelve.

358 Mr. A. 8. Olliff on Australian Lepidoptera.

The pupa is attached by the tail and a central band, about

y inch in length and throughout of a pale green, finely
speckled with darker. Over the head there is a projection or
process of considerable length, from which emanate four con-
spicuous brown lines, which proceed two on each side until
they meet at the tail.

This species is common in open sunny places, such as
gardens and waste grounds where flowering-plants occur.
Its food is the camphor-laurel, on which the parent insect
deposits the eggs singly.

Owing probably to the copious rains which have fallen
during the past summer and the consequent luxuriant vege-
tation Papilio sarpedon and many other butterflies have been
unusually abundant. One conspicuous species, Delias argen-
thona, never before observed by the Sydney collectors, has
been comparatively common. It will be interesting to see if
the species has permanently established itself; in Queens-
land it is one of the most abundant of the Pierinz, but
hitherto, [ believe, the Clarence River has been the southern-
most limit of its range.

Papilio Macleayanus, Leach.
(Pl. XX. figs. 2-2 ¢.)

The young larva of this species, which I found in April
feeding on the tender shoots of the orange, is whitish in
colour, with the sides velvety brown ; the head, second, third,
eleventh, and twelfth segments black; each segment except
the first and last provided with small, black, bifid bristles ;
the first, second, third, and last segments with large black
tubercles. At the first moult the larva loses the bifid bristles
aud the tubercles assume the appearance of black spines, the
anal one white at the base and bifid; the larva is now of a
delicate green colour, somewhat speckled, with the head yel-
lowish green, the anterior segments pale yellow, and the tail
reddish. After the second moult, which took place in about
a week from the time of hatching, it became perceptibly
larger and more brightly coloured; the head turning
yellowish green and the anterior spines, together with the
space between them, reddish black. It is in this stage I
believe, but on this point I am not quite sure, that the retrac-
tile tentacula are first perceptible; they are long, soft, and
greenish in colour. At the third moult the ground-colour is
much yellower and the green more pronounced, with two
distinct rows of white spots on each side, the spines less con-
spicuous, and the anal horn yellow, tipped with black, and

Mr. A. S. Olliff on Australian Lepidoptera. 359

no longer bifid. Fourth change:—Colour similar but
brighter, the spines on the first and second segments almost
obsolete, and the line connecting the dorsal row of white
spots greatly intensified.

This larvais very sluggish in its habits, but itis extremely
sensitive, shooting out its tentacula at the slightest alarm.

Like the larva the pupa varies much in general colour;
sometimes it is bright emerald-green and sometimes bluish
white.

The butterfly, which is by no means common, made its
appearance in August.

Papilio erectheus, Don.

This larva I found on a young orange-tree. When young
it is marked with alternate patches of glossy brown and
white, the brown predominating, and the body covered with
conspicuous spines. As the larva increases in size its mark-
ings change; when adult it settles into a dull green, with
large irregular patches of brown, strongly edged with white,
generally “three on each side. The spines now appear small,
not having increased in the same proportion as the insect.
The underside of the abdomen is dull white, except the first
four segments, which are brown. ‘The larva, which attains
a length of 34 inches, is furnished with the dorsal tentacula
usually found in the Papilionide, and is very sluggish.

Pupa light green in colour, delicately speckled with black
and occasionally with silver ; a bifid projection at the head.
Length varying from 1? to 2} inches.

This is the commonest Papilio and the largest butterfly
found in Sydney, where it occurs throughout the summer,
occasionally in such numbers as to cause considerable destruc-
tion in orange-orchards. It also feeds on Xanthoxylum.

Acreide.

Acrewa Andromacha, Fabr.

The larva when adult measures 1} inch and is of a yel-
lowish-brown colour throughout ; each segment bears a whorl
of six black tubercles, each emitting a long branched
spine.

Pupa about an inch in length, suspended by the tail; the
thorax and abdomen cream-coloured, the latter with five
longitudinal rows of yellowish spots edged with deep black ;

360 Mr. A. S. Olliff on Australian Lepidoptera.

the wing-cases slightly brown, with black markings, and
somewhat angulated.

Extremely abundant on the hybrid passion-vine (Tacsonia
Mortii) in gardens at Darling Point. My specimens took
wing in March.

Hesperide.

Apaustus agraulia, Hew. (Pl. XX. figs. 3-3 6.)

Larva pale green, darker at the sides, considerably nar-
rowed posteriorly ; the head dark brown, with a white V-
shaped marking in front; the lateral line very indistinct.
Length of adult 11 lines.

Pupa grey, semitransparent.

Fed on couch-grass, at the roots of which it pupated during
March. The butterfly appeared early in April.

Hypside.
Hypsa nesophora, Meyr. (Pl. XX. figs. 4 & 4a.)

Larva dark brown, somewhat shining, clothed with long
bristly grey hairs; two conspicuous white spots on the sides,
one between the fourth and fifth, the other between the ninth
and tenth segments. Legs reddish, feet dark brown. Adult
nearly 2 inches in length.

Pupa dark brownish red.

Fed on native fig, the larva living gregariously under a
loosely made web. ‘Turned to a pupa in April, but the moth
did not emerge until December.

(cophoridz.

Philobota bimaculana, Don.

(Pl. XX. figs. 6-68.)

Larva about 7} lines in length, bluish white, sparingly
clothed with fine grey hairs; the head and a moderately large
spot on each side of the second, third, and last segments dark
brown ; a row of small brown spots on each side of the dorsal
surface extending from the fourth segment to the anal extre-
mity.

Pupa reddish brown, the abdomen bright red.

Fed on Eucalyptus; living within a shelter formed by

Mr. A. 8. Olliff on Australian Lepidoptera. 361

spinning the leaves together. Changed toa pupa in January,
the moth taking wing on the 15th of the following month.

I believe this is the first record of the early stages of this
extensive Australian genus.

Depressariide.

Gonionota pyrobola, Meyr. (Pl. XX. figs. 7 & 7 a.)

Larva about an inch in length, delicate bluish green in
colour, the second segment more robust than the others; the
head dark brown, having on each side an oblong patch of
dull white. It lives at the end of the leaf in a tube, which it
ingeniously constructs by cutting the leaf on each side from
the outer margins to nearly the middle and rolling the upper
portion on itself and securing it firmly with silk threads.
Before entering the pupa state it leaves this habitation and
attaches itself to the back of a leaf or small twig by the tail.

Pupa naked, dark bluish green, finely speckled with red ;
the shoulders prominent and angular; a rounded protuber-
ance on the upper part of the front of the abdomen formed
by the tips of the wings; two pointed processes above the
eyes, projecting forwards, the tail truncated.

A single specimen of this remarkable species reared from a
nearly full-grown larva found on Agiceras fragrans in
September last. The moth, which is nocturnal, emerged in
January.

Hyponomeutide.
Enemia caminea, Meyr. (Pl. XX. figs. 5 & 5a.)

The larva of this species is of the form locally known as
a “saddle-back.” In colour it is white with traces of red,
the sides yellow, with four longitudinal dark reddish-brown
markings, two at the anterior and two at the posterior extre-
mity, and a row of small brown spots parallel to each lateral
margin. Length 7 lines.

Pupa yellow. Attached to the underside of a leaf on its
food-plant.

A female specimen bred in April from larve found on a
low-growing Eucalyptus in a garden at Double Bay.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XX.

Fig. 1. Larva of Papilio sarpedon.
Fig. 2. Larva of Papilio Macleayanus. 2a. Ditto, after third moult,
26. Ditto, with tentacula protruded. 2c. Pupa.

362 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on a new

Fig. 3. Larva of Apaustus agraulia. 3a. Ditto, with covering formed of
leaves. 30, Pupa.

Fig. 4. Larva of Hypsa nesophora. 4a. Pupa.

Fig. 5. Larva of Enemia caminea. 5a. Pupa.

Fig. 6. Larva of Philobota bimaculana. 6a, Ditto, with covering formed
of leaves. 66. Pupa.

Fig. 7, Larva of Gonionota pyrobola. 7a, Pupa.

XLVIL.—On a new Mode of Life among Meduse.
By J. WALTER FEWKEs *.

SEVERAL pamphlets and one or two books have been written
on the influence of parasitism in the modification of animal
structure. Perhaps nowhere do we fina this mode of life
better illustrated than among certain of the Crustacea, where
the anatomical structure is so masked by their parasitic
habits that for a long time in the history of research it was
impossible to recognize their zoological affinities, and it was
only when the immature stages in the growth were studied
and larval conditions, unaffected by parasitism, had been
investigated, that the true relationships of the group could be
discovered.

What we find in the so-called Lernean worms exists
wherever parasitism is found among animals. It may, in
fact, be concluded that ordinarily in parasites there is a
degradation in structure, or at all events such a modification
as to lead to important changes in anatomy and external
form.

It would seem that among the lowest animals we ought to
find a larger number of parasitic genera than among the
higher. While there is little doubt that there is more variety
in lower animals, I am not so confident that this mode of
life has led to as great modifications in structure here as
might be expected. While we cannot ascribe to parasitism
the many variations in animal structure which occur, and it is
impossible to give this mode of life a primary importance in
theories of origin of species as has been attempted, it is no
doubt true that many variations in structure have been
derived either directly or by heredity from parasitic an-
cestors.

Nowhere among lower animals is there more likelihood

* From the ‘Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History,’
vol. xxiii, Communicated by the Author,

Mode of Life among Meduse. 363

that we should find parasitic conditions than among the Me-
duse. Reflect for a moment that the young of a majority of
these animals live attached to submarine objects, and it seems
easy to see how, by changing its habitat, a parasitic attach-
ment to another animal might easily take place. Considering
the probabilities, however, although the number of genera
which might be mentioned as living upon other animals is
large, the number of recorded instances of those which have
suffered a modification in structure by their attachment is
very small.

Every one who has taken a hand in the most fascinating
part of the study of marine zoology, viz. dredging in the
ocean, knows how often ascidians, brachiopods, large mol-
lusks, and other animals are brought up with attached
hydroids growing upon them. These hydroids, in one sense,
are not parasitic, as they draw no nourishment from their
hosts, nor are they at all modified by their mode of life. For
instance, Hydractinia from a Natica-shell inhabited by a
hermit-crab is not unlike Hydractinia from the underside of
a floating bell-buoy. Odelia from the stalk of Boltenia is
specifically the same as Odelia on a submerged log. In
these and similar instances, for they are numerous and varied
in nature, there is no resultant modification either of host or
parasite, as the attachment is in no way vital or intimate.

There are, however, among the Meduse certain recorded
cases of parasitism where there is a vital connexion, so to
speak, where there is a parasitism or even commensalism of
such an intimate character that not only the structure of the
parasite but also even that of the host itself is modified. It
is a study of these cases which has a most interesting morpho-
logical importance, for it affords in some instances at least a
means of estimating the modifications of structure which may
result in Medusz from parasitic habits. They introduce into
the discussion of the theory of evolution a series of facts
which may well be carefully considered by those who regard
selection as an all-important factor in the modification of
animal structure.

It is not my purpose, however, to enter into a discussion
of this subject, upon which so much has already been said by
abler naturalists than myself. I have simply introduced it
in preparation for the consideration of new observations
bearing upon the question among the jellyfishes. Let me, as
an introduction, mention a few instances of modification of
Medusan genera by the mode of lite called parasitism.

One of the best known imstances of parasitism among
Meduse is that of Cunina, which lives parasitic in the stomach

364 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on a new

of another Medusa, Geryonta. We undoubtedly have in this
case a modification of the parasite by its peculiar mode of
life in the host, although a reciprocal effect on the host is not
recognizable.

Less known than Cunina, although quite as interesting, is
the case of Mnestra parasita, a Hydromedusa which lives
parasitic on the pelagic mollusk Phyllirhoé. We find here a
modification in the structure of Mnestra by the attachment,
although we know but little of the nature of that modification,
while of the growth of the Medusa we know nothing.

A most interesting instance of parasitism and consequent
modification among Meduse is found in the problematical
organism Polypodium. This undoubted hydroid is found
parasitic in the ova of the sturgeon while in the body of the
tish, We have in Polypodium, as described by Ussow, a
hydroid-like animal, which develops and drops buds which
can be directly compared with Meduse. These are not the
only instances of parasitic Meduse thus far recorded, but
they are typical and useful for comparisons. None of them
are as valuable as they might be in estimating the amount of
change in anatomy which has resulted, since we are either
ignorant of their whole life-history or of that of related adults
with simple development.

It is with the greatest pleasure that [ am able to add to the
above-mentioned instances of parasitism among Medusze
another of most extraordinary character. ‘This instance is
peculiarly adapted for the study of the effect of parasitism in
modifying the Medusan structure, as its close allies are well
known and comparisons with them can be easily made.
This instance is, I believe, unique and the first recorded
example of a Hydroid living attached to the outside of a
fish and modified im structure by its life. It may thus
properly be called a new mode of life among Meduse.

In the pelagic fishing which has been carried on for the
last ten years at the Newport Marine Laboratory we have
taken several specimens of the well-known fish Svriola zonata,
Cuv. This fish is a close ally of the ordinary “ pilot-fish,”
and is often seen in calm weather swimming near the surface
of the sea. ‘Three of these fishes were found in company
last summer, and upon the side, near the anal fin, of one of
these, curious appendages were noticed which had never been
observed before. On capturing the fish and making a super-
ficial examination of the attachment I was reminded of an
attached fungus growth. Every one is familiar with the
growth on fishes of the fungus Saprolegnia, and the resem-
blance seemed so great, except in colour, between the supposed

Mode of Life among Meduse. 365

fungus of Sertola and Saprolegnia, that at first I regarded
the former as a fungoid growth. The colour of the supposed
fungus of Sertola was, however, reddish and yellow; and,
although I have since learned that superficial fungoid
growths of this colour sometimes exist on fishes, at the time
when Seriola was captured I was ignorant of this fact; the red
colour led me to doubt its fungoid affinities. A glance at the
supposed fungus through a small lens easily dispelled my
error and showed me that I had a new and unique case of a
parasitic Hydroid. It is to the peculiarities in structure of
this animal and the Medusa which was raised from it that I
wish to call attention in the present paper.

As the genus of Hydroids which shows this curious mode
of life is new, it will be necessary to assign it a name, and I
suggest that of Hydrichthys mirus, as expressing one phase
at least of the curious life which it leads *.

The majority of genera of Hydromeduse have ordinarily
two stages of growth, one of which is called the Hydroid and
the other the Medusa-stage. The latter is a Medusiform
zooid of the former. Let us consider each of these stages in
Hydrichthys.

Hydroid.—The Uydroid of Hydrichthys consists of sexual
and asexual individuals, both of which arise from a flat plate
of branching tubes which is fastened to the sides of the body
of the fish. The sexual individuals may be called the gono-
somes, the asexual the filiform bodies.

The gonosomes consist of a simple contractile, highly
sensitive axis, upon the sides of which are borne lateral
branches with terminal clusters resembling minute grape-
like bodies. These grape-like bodies are Medusz in all stages
of growth. The filiform individuals are simple flask-shaped
bodies, without tentacles and with terminal mouths f.

No circle of tentacles about a mouth-opening was detected
either in the gonosomes or the filiform bodies, This is a sig-
nificant want, since, with the exception of Protohydra, Micro-
hydra, and the secondary zooids of certain Alcyonians, ten-
tacles of some kind are tound near a mouth or in relation to
the oral opening of most of the fixed Hydroids or polyps.

Medusa.—The gonophore of Hydrichthys has a Sarsia-like
bell and manubrium, tour radial tubes, four tentacles without
appendages, as already elsewhere described by me f.

In the light of what we know of the affinities of the Medusa

* An accurate diagnosis with figures will be found in my paper “On

certain Meduse from New England,” Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. xii. no. 7.
+ Somewhat like the spiral zooids in Periyonimus except this particular.
{ Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. xiii. no. 7.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 25

366 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on a new

of Hydrichthys it is interesting for us to consider those of the
attached Hydroid. If our problem was to determine the
relationship of Hydrichthys from a study of the Medusa alone,
we could easily conclude that it is a near relative of Sarsta.
Such a conclusion is, I believe, one which can be easily de-
fended. When, however, we come to compare the Hydroid
of Sarsia and the Hydroid of Hydrichthys we find the greatest
differences between the two. ‘These differences are so im-
portant that they have affected the whole structure; fora
comparison of the two reveals the effect of the peculiar mode
of lite in Hydrichthys. The typical structure, or schema, of
the Tubularian Hydroid, as Coryne, is a slender axis which
may be naked or encased in a chitinous tube, an enlargement
at the free end, and a terminal mouth-opening. This mouth-
opening or the walls of the enlargement bear tentacles in rows,
irregular or otherwise. Somewhere among these tentacles,
or elsewhere on the stem, arise buds which may or may not
develop into Meduse. The widest variations from such a
schematic type may be noticed among Hydroids. Our pur-
pose here is to compare Hydrichthys with the so-called schema.

In the case of the gonosome of Hydrichthys I suppose that
the stem of the schema remains, that the terminal mouth-
opening is present, but that the enlargement of the axis has
disappeared. From the sides of the axis arise lateral branches,
as in some Hydroids, and the Medusa-buds have been crowded
to the distal ends of these branches. ‘Tentacles have disap-
peared on account of the parasitic nature of the life of the
Hydroid. It is from this fact that we find in Hydrichthys
the schema of the ordinary Tubularian Hydroid reduced to a
simple sexual body or gonosome.

In the homology of the “ filiform bodies” of Hydrichthys
the reduction, as compared with the schema of a Hydroid,
has gone still further, on account of the parasitic life, and
nothing remains but a simple axis, without appendages of
any kind.

If Lam right in this homology of the two kinds of indi-
viduals in the Hydrichthys-colony, it would seem as if there
ought to be a meaning for their simple structure as compared
with the typical Hydroid. The relation of the Medusa to
that of Sarsia-like genera would imply degeneration, not phy-
logenetic simplicity. Cannot we find in parasitism a cause
for such a degradation ?

Is the conclusion legitimate that these great differences be-
tween LHydrichthys and the fixed Hydroid closely related to it
are the result of its peculiar mode of life? I believe itis. I
believe that the modification in the Hydroid Hydrichthys, the

Mode of Life among Meduse. 367

loss of tentacles, the polymorphism, and the increase in _pro-
minence of the sexual bodies, are exactly what we should
expect to find & priori if a degradation had taken place in its
structure.

There is one other point to which I wish to call atten-
tion before closing my communication. The existence of a
polymorphism, such as we find in Hydrichthys, is exceptional
among fixed Hydroids of the Tubularian group. Something
similar exists in Hydractinia and Perigonimus and one or
two other genera; but this kind of polymorphism is not com-
mon among fixed Hydromeduse. <A similar polymorphism
exists, however, in Velella, a floating Hydroid well known
to all naturalists. In Velella we have the basal plate with
anastomosing tubes of Hydrichthys modified into a compli-
eated float. The gonosomes are the same in both genera,
the filiform bodies of Hydrichthys are represented by the
single central polyp, so-called, in Velella. The Medusze of
the two closely resemble each other. ‘There are only two
kinds of individuals in both genera.

Strangely enough, after I had reasoned out this likeness
between Velella and Hydrichthys on morphological grounds,
my memory went back to a strange story I had once heard
from an Italian fisherman of the origin of Velella from the
common mackerel. This story or a similar one long ago
found its way into the books.

According to Marcel de Serres, the Mediterranean fisher-
men suppose that Velella originates as a bud from the head
of the mackerel; and Pagenstecher goes on to explain this
error, after quoting its source, from the fact that young
Velelle are often found in the nets with the fishes, and it is
easy to suppose, as their colour is similar, that one budded
from the other. While we accept without question this ex-
planation and the want of foundation of the fishermen’s yarns,
it is a strange coincidence that a possible relative of Veledla
should be found attached to the body of a fish. It is well
for us to inquire, in the light of phylogeny, whether Veled/a,
if it has not itself originated from Hydroids on the fish by
budding, has not been directly derived from one which is so
intimately related to Hydrichthys, which is attached to the
body of a fish, that an unskilled observer might be easily
deceived.

Hydrichthys is, in point of fact, the nearest known ally of
Velella among fixed Hydroids, and their morphological like-
nesses have already been pointed out. It would be prema-
ture to suppose, however, that Veled/a has derived its peculiar
anatomy from its descent from a form like ate parasitic

568 Prof. F. J. Bell on a

Hydrichthys, vather than that Hydrichthys is a_ parasitic
descendant of Velella; while the acceptance of the last-men-
tioned theory would lead us to regard fixed Hydroids like
Coryne as likewise descendants of parasitic forms with which
they have few resemblances. Indeed, we know next to
nothing of the egg and early growth of either Hydrichthys or
Velella. We have at all events found in Hydrichthys a near
ally of Velella as far as the Hydroid is concerned, whatever
may be the story told by the early history of both.

There is also another point long since known to those
familiar with the literature of the Hydromeduse, which is
beautifully illustrated by Hydrichthys. Several naturalists
have mentioned or called attention to the resemblance of the
Meduse of Hydroids of very different form. We may have
Medusee so nearly related as to be placed in the same genus,
but their Hydroids would otherwise be placed in different
genera. In Hydrichthys we have an illustration of this prin-
ciple. The Medusa is similar to Sarséa, but there is only a
remote likeness between the attached Hydroid Hydrichthys
and Coryne the Hydroid of Sarsta. If a special student of
the Hydroids was called upon to identify the parasitic Hydroid,
he would consider its zoological distance from Coryne very
considerable; but a study of the Medusa would lead him to
a very different opinion of its zoological position.

Do these facts of a difference in the form of the Hydroids
of allied Medusiform gonophores, or vice versd, as sometimes
happens, the diversity of Meduse derived from similar Hy-
droids, mean anything morphologically ? ‘The question is an
interesting one, and admits of several interpretations, which,
however, it is not my purpose to consider at present.
There is one thing which has a bearing on the subject, which
J wish in closing to say in this connexion, viz.: the true affint-
ties of the majority of genera of Campanularian or Tubularian
Hydroids, or of Leptomeduse and Anthomeduse derived from
the same, cannot be definitely made out until both Hydroid and
Medusa are studied together.

XLIX.—Notice of a remarkable Ophiurid from Brazil.
By F. Jerrrey Bey, M.A.

AmonG the specimens recently collected at Itamaraca, a few
miles from Pernambuco, by Mr. Ramage, and forwarded to

remarkable Ophiurid from Brazil. 369

the British Museum, are three examples of a remarkable
Ophiurid, to which I should like to direct the attention of
naturalists who may be collecting in Brazilian or West-Indian
waters. The form is, in the first place, remarkable for the
extraordinary length of the arms in proportion to the dia-
meter of the disk, for while the latter measures about 4 millim.,
the arms are no less than 150 millim. long.; the proportion
of arm to disk is therefore as 1: 37:5, or more than twice
that of Ophiothrix longipeda, which Mr. Lyman gives as
LSLS:

It is, unfortunately, impossible to be certain of the genus
to which this very long-armed form is to be referred, for from
all three examples the covering of the disk has been lost, and
this loss has, in a very curious way, affected also the dorsal
surfaces of the most proximal arm-joints. The loss of this
upper surface would, if it were natural (and the close simi-
larity between the specimens leads one to imagine that it is
so), be more or less fatal to the animal in inverse proportion
to the quantity of carbonate of lime which, in the form of
covering-plates, ordinarily protects the disk. On the assump-
tion that that quantity is small, or that the greater part of the
disk is naked, the species now under consideration appears to
be allied to the genera Ophionema and Ophionephthys of
Dr. Liitken. In these genera the arms are likewise long,
though by no means so extraordinarily long as in the Bra-
zilian form, and they are both represented in the West-
Indian seas. Naturalists who have the opportunity of
observing this long-armed form in life should direct particular
attention to this loss of the disk, with a view to answering
such questions as whether the loss is in any way associated
with the act of reproduction, whether the disk becomes
restored, and, if so, whether the restoration is effected rapidly.

As it is convenient to have a name for our object, the species
may be provisionally placed in the genus Ophionephthys *
and be called O. sesquipedalis. The following description
will probably serve the collector as a means of identifying
it :—

Disk very small; arms narrow, exceedingly long, and pro-
bably, when complete, as much as forty times the diameter of
the disk ; three short arm-spines, one tentacle-scale. Upper
arm-plates very regularly oblong, the proximal and distal
edges quite straight, about three times as wide as long.

* Tf it should be found that this is its proper place it will be necessary
to so far amend the diagnosis of that genus as to diminish to two the
number of the mouth-papille and to three the number of the arm-spines.

370 Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide.

Arm-spines subequal. Under arm-plates very regular, rather
wider than long.

The upper arm-plates are of a dark colour with a lighter
proximal margin; the spines and the lower plates are much
paler.

Hab. Itamaraca, Brazil.

L.— Descriptions of new Species of Oriental Cicadide.
By W. L. Distant.

Leptopsaltria picturata, n. sp.

$. Body above brownish ochraceous; head, excluding
base, much suffused with piceous, the ocelli red, the eyes cas-
taneous. Pronotum with a central, longitudinal, fuscous
fascia, the margins of which are black, ampliated ante-
riorly and notched and narrowed posteriorly ; and an oblique
piceous fascia near each lateral margin. Mesonotum with a
central, longitudinal, linear fascia, on each side of which
is a cnrved, linear, discal fascia extending to anterior mar-
gin; a broad fascia on each lateral area, and a spot at each
anterior angle of the cruciform basal elevation, piceous. Ab-
domen sparingly greyly pilose, with a double discal series
and a more continuous series of piceous spots on each lateral
margin; base of anal segment also piceous. Body beneath
ochraceous; bases of anterior femora, bases and apices of the
tibie, apices of the tarsi, abdominal tubercles, and anal seg-
ment of the abdomen piceous ; anal appendage luteous. Teg-
mina and wings pale hyaline, the venation fuscous; the
tegmina with a small costal ochraceous and fuscous spot at
base of the upper ulnar area, and the transverse veins at the
bases of the first, second, and third apical areas infuscated.

The rostrum has the apex piceous and just passing the pos-
terior coxee, and the face is depressed and somewhat flattened.

Long. excl. tegm. 15 millim., exp. tegm. 44 millim.

Hab. Nilgiri Hills, northern slopes, 5000 feet (Hampson).
Coll. Dist.

Leptopsaltria andamanensts, n. sp.

3. Body above reddish ochraceous, ocelli reddish. Pro-
notum with the centre of the anterior margin and the whole
of the posterior margin (widest at centre) blackish. Meso-

Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide. 371

notum with two linear, blackish, obconical spots at anterior
margin and a greenish fascia near each lateral margin. Ab-
domen with the segmental margins darker. Body beneath
ochraceous, the abdominal tubercles blackish. Legs muéz-
lated.

Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, the venation fuscous.
Tegmina with the costal membrane brownish ochraceous, a
small costal fuscous and ochraceous spot at base of upper
ulnar area, the transverse veins at the bases of second, third,
and fifth apical areas infuscated, and a series of small fuscous
marginal spots situated on the apices of the longitudinal veins
of apical areas.

The rostrum has the apex piceous and just passing the
posterior coxe.

Long. excl. tegm. 21 millim., exp. tegm. 58 millim.

Hab. Andaman Islands (J. Wood-Mason). Calc. Mus.

Cosmopsaltria Pigafette, n. sp.

g. Body above brownish ochraceous; head with the whole
frontal margin and a transverse fascia between the eyes
black. Pronotum with two central, longitudinal, linear fascia,
on each side of which are two or three oblique, short, linear
spots, and a broader fascia on each lateral margin black.
Mesonotum with five linear fascize; the central crossing disk,
on each side of this a shorter and curved fascia, and a broken
fascia on each lateral area, black. Abdomen pilose, with some
black spots at base. Body beneath brownish ochraceous ;
face with a central black fascia, not reaching anterior mar-
gin, and a transverse series of black linear spots on each
lateral margin; some scattered spots on head, apex of the
rostrum, some femoral streaks, the tarsi, and a transverse
fascia at base of abdomen black. Wings pale hyaline, the
venation greenish or fuscous, the first with a small ochraceous
costal spot at base of upper ulnar area, the transverse veins at
bases of second, third, fifth, and seventh apical areas infus-
cated, and a marginal series of small fuscous spots, situate on
the apices of the longitudinal veins to apical areas.

The rostrum reaches the posterior coxe; the opercula are
ovate and extend to the third abdominal segment.

Long. excl. tegm. 26 millim., exp. tegm. 84 millim.

Hab. Ternate (coll. Dist.), Bouro (Brussels Mus.),

This species is allied to C. impar, Walk.

Pomponia collina, n. sp.
3. Body above ochraceous brown; head with the margin

372 Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide.

of the front and the vertex much suffused with blackish.
Pronotum with two central longitudinal fasciee, which are
most widely separated at anterior margin; on each side of
disk is a curved linear spot, and a large, oblique, semioval,
linear spot on each lateral area, black. Mesonotum with five
black fascize; the central crossing disk and widened ante-
riorly and posteriorly, one on each side of this short and
curved, and one on each lateral area crossing the whole of
disk, and a spot in front of the anterior angles of basal cruci-
form elevation black. Abdomen with the segmental margins
somewhat broadly black. Body beneath ochraceous ; head,
excluding face, blackish ; bases of tibie, the tarsi, and basal
segment “of abdomen fuscous 5 apical segment of abdomen
somewhat infuscated.
‘Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, the venation fuscous or
ochraceous; the first with the costal membrane ochraceous.
The face is moderately tumid and not centrally and longi-
tudinally sulecated ; the rostrum reaches the posterior coxee ;
the opercula are small, wide apart, and somewhat angulated.
Long. excl. tegm. 16-17 millim., exp. tegm. 47-54 millim.
Hab. N. Khasia Hills. Calc. Mus.

Pomponia Ransonneti, n. sp.

3. Head and thorax above ochraceous; head with two con-
verging black lines in front, and the anterior area of vertex
(enclosing ocelli) , the hinder margin of eyes, anda small spot at
same region black. Pronotum with a broad, central, double,
longitudinal fascia, on each side of which are two curved linear
spots and a large oblique, semioval, linear spot on each lateral
area black. Mesonotum with a central longitudinal fascia
broadening at base into a large crescentic spot in front of basal
cruciform elevation, on each side of this fascia, starting from
anterior margin, 1s ashort curved fascia followed by a spot and
again by a long, broad, and slightly curved fascia and a
small oblique spot on each lateral margin black. Anterior
angles of basal cruciform elevation black. Abdomen above
brownish ochraceous, pilose, the segmental margins narrowly
piceous. Head beneath, sternum, and legs ochraceous; an
oval fascia on face, a transverse spot on each side, posterior
margin of head, a transverse spot on mesosternum, apices of
the femora, and bases of the tibie black. Abdomen beneath
brownish ochraceous, its base and apex piceous.

Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, with a pale creamy
bluish reflexion, venation castaneous or fuscous ; tegmina
with a small ochraceous costal spot at base of upper “ulnar

Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide. ate

area, transverse veins at bases of second, third, fifth, and
seventh apical areas infuscated, and a marginal series of fus-
cous spots situated on the longitudinal veins of apical areas.
The rostrum reaches the posterior coxe ; the opercula are
small and widely separated.
Long. excl. tegm. 22 millim., exp. tegm. 59 millim.

Hab. Ceylon, Colombo. Calc. Mus.

Tibicen amussitatus, n. sp.

?. Head and thorax above dull ochraceous; head with
two central oblique spots on front and a spot at base of each
antenna black; vertex with a large oblique spot before each
eye and with two central longitudinal lines, enclosing the
ocelli and continued across and to posterior margin of pro-
notum, black ; two black curved lines on each lateral area of
pronotum. Mesonotum with a central longitudinal line, on
each side of which at anterior margin is a short, somewhat
oblique line, a linear fascia across each lateral area and a
spot in front of each anterior angle of basal cruciform eleva-
tion, all black. Abdomen above castaneous, with a central
black spot at base, and a series of marginal black spots
widening to apex. Body beneath and legs ochraceous; the
abdomen darker, with some apical black spots.

‘Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, their bases narrowly ochra-
ceous, the venation ochraceous. ‘Tegmina with some faint
fuscous submarginal spots situate on the longitudinal veins
of the apical areas.

The pronotum is large and subquadrate ; the face is mode-
rately globose, with a wide, central, longitudinal sulcation and
strong transverse lateral striations : ‘the rostrum about or
almost reaches the posterior cox.

Long. excl. tegm., 2 12 millim., exp. tegm. 35 millim.

Hab, Darjilng. Stockholm Mus.

Tibicen Acbert, n. sp.

3. Head black, the ocelli red, eyes brownish ochraceous.
Pronotum black, with a central longitudinal fascia and the
hind margin yellow, and two large discal reddish spots.
Mesonotum black, with two faint yellowish central fascie
extending a short distance from anterior margin. Abdomen
black, the lateral areas and apex more or less reddish. Face,
sternum, and femora yellow; central longitudinal fascia to
face, head beneath (excluding face), apices of femora, the tibiee
and tarsi black. Abdomen beneath dull reddish.

374 Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadidee.

Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, the venation blackish or
olivaceous ; costal membrane to tegmina olivaceous.

The face is moderately broad and strongly striated
laterally ; the rostrum has the apex pitchy and about reaching
the intermediate coxe. The opercula are yellowish, short,
and broad, obliquely rounded, and not meeting at centre.

Long. excl. tegm., ¢ 25 millim., exp. tegm. 72 millim.

Hab. Cashmere Valley, 6300 feet (Leech). Coll. Dist.

Tibicen reticulatus, n. sp.

9. Head black ; apex of front, anterior lateral margins of
vertex, and a narrow, central, longitudinal line dull reddish ;
eyes brownish ochraceous. Pronotum black, the margins
and two large contiguous spots on each side of disk dull
reddish. Mesonotum black, the margins, the basal cruciform
elevation, and two irregular subobconical spots on anterior
margin dull reddish. Abdomen black. Body beneath and
legs black, somewhat greyishly pilose ; margins of the face,
under surfaces and apices of femora, tibie and tarsi, excluding
bases and extreme apices, spots and markings on sternum and
abdominal segmental margins dull reddish.

Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, the venation blackish,
their bases narrowly reddish, outwardly shaded with black ;
costal membrane to tegmina dull reddish.

The face is laterally much compressed and moderately
striated; the rostrum about reaches the intermediate coxe ;
the legs are robust, and the anterior femora have a strong
spine both at base and apex. The tegmina in the specimen
described have a small additional cell at base of second apical
area, caused by the presence of a short abnormal transverse
vein.

Long. excl. tegm., ? 29 millim., exp. tegm. 70 millim.

Hab. Gilgit. Calc. Mus.

Tibicen casyape, n. sp.

@. Head black, margins of front, ocelli, and a small cen-
tral basal spot dull reddish; eyes ochraceous. Pronotum
dull reddish, the margins and two central longitudinal lines
black. Mesonotum black; two central ‘“ antler”’-shaped
fasciee, the lateral margins, and the basal cruciform elevation
dull reddish, the anterior angles of the last black. Abdomen
above black. Body beneath black, somewhat greyishly
pilose; face red, its central longitudinal sulcation black ;
rostrum black ; legs reddish, the femora streaked with black
beneath.

Mr. W. L. Distant on new Cicadide. 305

Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, their bases dull reddish,
the venation blackish; the costal membrane of tegmina
ochraceous.

The face is large, but laterally compressed and strongly
striated, with a profound central longitudinal suleation. The
rostrum about reaches the intermediate coxe ; the legs are
robust and the anterior femora have a strong spine beneath
at apex and a similar spine near base.

Long. excl. tegm., 2 35 millim., exp. tegm. 90 millim.

Hab. Cashmere Valley, 6300 feet (Leech). Coll. Dist.

Cicadetia continuata, n. sp.

@. Head and thorax above dull blackish, sparingly
covered with short grey pilosity. Head with the anterior
margin, the ocelli, and a central, linear, longitudinal fascia
continued across the pronotum, where it is widened, dull
ochraceous, the pronotal margins of the same colour. Meso-
notum with two longitudinal discal fascie, the lateral margins
and basal cruciform elevation dull ochraceous, the last with
its centre blackish. Abdomen above pale castaneous, grey-
ishly pilose, the posterior segmental margins paler in hue and
with an obscure, central, narrow, longitudinal, blackish fascia.
Body beneath and legs dull reddish ochraceous ; head beneath
and the discal area of face blackish.

Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, their bases narrowly
reddish ochraceous, the venation more or less olivaceous. The
rostrum about reaches the intermediate coxe, and the face is
very broad and tumid.

Long. excl. tegm., @ 15-18 millim., exp. tegm. 38-45
millim.

Hab. Quetta. Calc. Mus.

Cicadetta literata, n. sp.

9. Head and pronotum dull blackish, somewhat palely
pilose, both crossed by a narrow, obscure, longitudinal, ochra-
ceous line; ocelli red, eyes black and shining. Pronotum
shining black, with the lateral margins and a large, discal,
“ letter H”’-shaped spot ochraceous. Abdomen above dull
blackish, the posterior segmental margins narrowly and ob-
scurely dull reddish. Body beneath ochraceous, the sternum
much shaded with dull blackish. Abdomen with a central
longitudinal row of blackish spots; legs ochraceous, femora
and tibie streaked with blackish.

376 Prof. J. F. Blake on

Teemina and wings pale hyaline, the venation olivaceous
or fuscous.

The rostrum does not extend beyond the intermediate coxee
and the face is laterally coarsely striated.

Long. excl. tegm., ? 12 millim., exp. tegm. 37 millim.

Hab, Cashmere Valley, 6300 feet (Leech). Coll. Dist.

LI.—Remarks on Shell-growth in Cephalopoda.
By Prot. J. F. BuaKe, M.A., 1.G:S:

THE structure of the “shell” of a Sepia is so unlike that of
the Nautilus that any serious attempt to work out their homo-
logies must be heartily weleomed by all who are interested in
Cephalopoda. The Sepia is much the harder of the two to
understand, and well deserves the study that has recently
been bestowed upon it by Riefstahl* and Bather +. Unfor-
tunately these descriptions of the soft parts within it do not
agree, though the difference is not on a point of very great
lm portance.

It does not appear, however, that these studies throw much
light on the question from a geological point of view. ‘That
is to say, we get no nearer understanding how a Nautilus- or
Ammonite- or Belemnite-shell is actually formed. When I
was writing the Introduction to my ‘ British Fossil Cephalo-
poda,’ some six years ago, I examined the structure of the
Sepia with a view to obtaining light from it, and got as far
as the above-named writers have in the knowledge of the
hard parts, yet found no means of homologizing them with
those of a Nautilus or Belemnite with any approach to con-
viction. Nor do I find that these writers have anything
definite to add, but help themselves along by theory, even
without testing it by available facts. I wish to deprecate
this method in the interests both of the subject and the
workers. In the first place, it 1s not ¢nductive science; and
in the second the author of a supposed genealogy will find it
very awkward when further knowledge—and that not hard
to acquire—shows the facts to be dead against him. But
most of all it is to be deprecated for the damage it does to the
credibility of what are meant to be stated as facts by such
writers, as we never can tell whether what they say is from
autopsy or from mental conception.

* Paleeontographica, Bd. xxxii. 1886.

+ ‘Annals,’ April 1888, p. 298, See also Geol. Mag. 1887, p. 446.

Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. 377

Whether the successive layers of the spongioid-tissue or
“»yad” of the Sepion is formed by intussusception, as
Riefstahl says, or by successive formation of chitinous mem-
branes by the epithelium of the shell-sac, as Bather says, is,
after all, only a matter of argument, in which the latter seems
to me to have the best of it. If we are to get any further,
we must have some evidence of the homology between these
layers and the parts of any other Cephalopod. It is assumed
that these layers correspond to the septa of a Nautilus or of
the phragmocone of a Belemnite. But do they ? They have
no siphuncle, and they are not even perforated. Yet a si-
phuncleand neck are present in Nautilus, Ammonite, Belemnite,
and Spirula, and, what is more remarkable, though the
Nautilus commences with a cap and the other three have a
well-marked nucleus, nothing of this sort has yet been dis-
covered in Sepia. I specially looked for it, but could find no
representative of such a structure. On the other hand, if
Mr. Bather had availed himself of my observations of the
shell of Nautilus, of which he seems to be ignorant, or had
made observations for himself, he could not have written as
he does, nor could M. Riefstahl have supposed for a moment
that the Nautilus-shell grows by intussusception between the
septa. On page 17 ef seg. of my work I give a very
detailed description of the structure of this shell.

I there show that the shell proper is composed of three
layers: the’ outer, a porcellaneous one, is formed of large
radiating crystalline particles set in a dark ground-mass,
which, if they show any orientation, are perpendicular to the
surface; and this layer is not at all divisible into lamine.
It shows lines of growth on the surface, and these pass
marginally, and not superficially, into any fractures that may
have taken place in the growing edge of the shell. These
characters leave little doubt that this layer is formed by
secretion at its bounding edge. Very different is the middle
layer. It has, as Hyatt pointed out, an imbricated structure,
a structure which might very well suggest the pad of the Sepion
as its homologue. ‘This imbrication is in truth excessively
fine, as about a thousand fine lamin may be counted in its
thickness; the outcropping edges of these, being about
20,000 to the inch, diffract the light and give rise to the
nacreous lustre, when the innermost layer is absent or worn
away. ‘The direction of these laminz is outwards in the
direction of the aperture of the shell. Their obliquity is very
slight, so that in tracing them from their commencement inside
to their termination against the outer layer of the shell, they
pass more than one septum, and must therefore have been

378 Prof. J. F. Blake on

formed previously to the septa they pass. They are sprinkled
more or less closely by minute dark spots, with irregular
radiations, like the lacune of a bone, which may have a forma-
tive function. Again, some of these lamine start from the inside
of the body-chamber remote from the last septum, as indeed
it is obvious they must do, as the nacreous surface formed by
them is not confined to the camerated portion of the shell.
We may conclude from this that they are formed by the
surface of the front part of the body-covering or mantle, and
would be formed whether there were any septa or not. They
are also formed successively, and as they are not devoid of
animal substance, we may perhaps say they are at first
“ chitinous ”’ membranes subsequently calcified, and that they
do not grow by intussusception. The third layer is a thin
amorphous substance covering the whole of the interior of the
shell. It is excessively thin, and though quite invisible, if
present, in the earliest chambers, is well marked in the later
portion of the shell, especially where the septa abut on the
shell-wall. It is here seen between the septum and the shell,
completely separating the two structures. It is thus seen
that the statement by Mr. Bather (‘ Annals,’ p. 306)—that
“secretion and exfoliation, beginning in the anterior region
of the shell-wall, proceed backwards to the suture; thence,
centripetally over the septum, to the posterior margin of the
septal neck ; a membrane of the septum is therefore one with
a membrane of the shell-wall, and each complete membrane
is typically shaped like a funnel,”’—either is entirely
imaginary, or my observation, which I have just verified
again, 1s erroneous.

The structure of the septum is different from that of the
shell, though it is on the same type asthe nacreous layer. It
is composed of a large number of equally fine lamine, also
speckled with lacune ; but the lamine do not crop out on the
surface, but are parallel to it; there is therefore no diffraction
of light, but a peculiar pearly lustre, due to the minute
floating specks, just as in a pearl, or at least as in an artificial
pearl whose lustre is similar to that of a natural one. It thus
differs from the nacreous layer, just as pearls do from mother-
of-pearl. I judge this to have been formed in the same way,
by secretion from the surface of the body-covering in contact
with it.

These observations do not lend much countenance to the
idea that the lamine in the pad of the Sepia are homologous
with the septa of a Nautilus, nor, therefore, with those of the
phragmocone of the Belemnite. If one might venture a
guess, in the absence of more precise proof, it would appear

Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. 379

rather that the imbricating lamin of the pad of the Sepia
may be homologous with the imbricating laminzof the nacreous
or middle layer of the Nautilus, but far more loosely aggre-
gated, and thus that the Sepia, instead of being a closed tube,
like the Nantilus or Belemnite, is an open or boat-like struc-
ture; and this would account for the absence of any cap or
nucleus in the former—those structures being essentially rela-
ted to the formation of a closed tube—and their homologues
would be sought in the open spoon-like commencement of the
Sepia, which is clothed round by the mucro. In this view
the outer layer of the Nautilus-shell would be represented by
the middle layer of the Sepia, a correlation less difficult on
account of its excessive thinness in Ammonites and Belem-
nites; and hence the guard of a Belemnite and the shagreen-
layer of Sepia are adventitious superadded structures, unrepre-
sented in Spirula and probably in Loligo.

If there is any truth in this, then the approximation or
otherwise of the septa of the Nautilus will have little to do
with the question; moreover, if it has, the observations of
Mr. Bather are too partial to be of value, either in relation to
the living Nautilus or its extinct congeners. One would sup-
pose from his statement that ina Nautilus the earlier septa are
approximate, the middle ones far apart, and the later ones
approximate again, and he derives a confirmation from this of
the theory, which is doubtless often true, that the characters
of senility resemble those of youth. As to this I may quote
the following passage from p. 30 of my work :— Starting
from the first septum, we do not find them at distances con-
stantly proportional to the diameter. If they were, there
would always be the same number in each whorl. In an
example, however, of Nautilus pompilius the first whorl has
eight chambers, the next sixteen, and the last half whorl
seven. ‘lhe same want of regularity is found in other Nauti-
loids. As arule the earlier septa are more remote, and the
middle ones only retain for some distance their proportionality.
The last two or three septa of the adult very commonly differ
in distance from the rest. In some rare cases they are more
remote, but they are usually closer, and the commonest case
is that in which the last one is at half the usual distance.”

Again, as to the history of any genus. I should like Mr.
Bather to look at the septa of Goniatites sagittarius of the
Devonian, so crowded one can scarcely count them—yet it is
not the earliest Gondatites by far, nor yet the last—and then
see if he can maintain the statement that “so early as the
Goniatites the septa are far apart in proportion to the diameter
of the whorl.” In fact the distance of the septa seems to be

380 Bibliographical Notice.

an adaptive character, related to the breadth of the whorl,
almost all coiled Cephalopods which have wide whorls having
approximate septa and vice versa.

Although therefore a new student of the Cephalopoda is to
be welcomed, as there is plenty of work to do, it would be
better that such a one should take up the story where others
have left it than go over the old ground with preconceived
theories and less careful observations. Nothing, in fact, in the
present communication is new; though it may be little known,
it was all in print six years ago.

I am not at all sure, however, that the suggestion to divide
the Cephalopods into three primary groups, Ammonoidea,
Nautiloidea, and Coleoidea, instead of into two, the Tetra-
branchiata and the Dibranchiata, is not a good one. We
really do not know that the Ammonites were tetrabranchiate,
and by the old subdivision we assume they were. But
is Coleoidea a good name? No doubt Sepia and Belemnites
have a “sheath,” but has Spirula, or Loligo, or Octopus ?
How would Belemnoidea do? The zoologists might not like
it; but then it is more natural to name children after their
parents than vice versd. And from its relation to terms
already in use and its congruity with the other two every one
would know what was meant.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

Transactions of the Cumberland and Westmorland Association for
the Advancement of Literature and Science. No, xii. 1886-87.
8vo. Carlisle: G. and T. Coward, 1887.

In this part of the ‘ Transactions ’ of the local societies of Cumber-
land and Westmorland the contributions of purely literary and
antiquarian interest and those dealing with scientific subjects are
exactly in equal numbers. Of the former, although they are of con-
siderable general interest, we need say nothing here ; of the latter,
one is the “* Zoological Record for Cumberland, 1886,” by the Rey.
H. A. Macpherson and W. Duckworth, and the other bears the title
of «Our Summer Visitors,” by Mr. Tom Duckworth, and is in con-
tinuation of previous communications by the same writer. The
former is a record of the occurrence and breeding of certain species
of birds in the district, to which are added notes on the habits of
several of the species and on some of the Mammalia of Cumberland.
In the latter we have a series of notes upon several of the birds
which visit the district in the summer—the Ring Ouzel, the Wheat-
ear, the Nightjar, the Landrail, and the Common Sandpiper.

Geological Society. 381

The most important article in the book is the concluding one, by
the Editor, Mr. J. G. Goodchild, and is on ‘ Ice-work in Edenside
and some of the adjoining parts of North-western England,” in
which the author brings together the results of his investigations
upon the glacial phenomena of the region in question. Some of
these results have already been indicated by Mr. Goodchild in papers
published in the * Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society’ and
elsewhere ; but he has done good service by summarizing his obser-
vations upon such an interesting district in this convenient form.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

February 8, 1888.—Prof. J. W. Judd, F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “On some Remains of Squatina Cranei, sp. nov., and the
Mandible of Belonostomus cinctus, from the Chalk of Sussex, pre-
served in the Collection of Henry Willett, Esq., F.G.S., Brighton
Museum.” By A. Smith Woodward, Esq., F.G.S.

The remains referable to Squatina consist of a crushed skull, with
the mandibular and hyoid arches, and an associated fragment of the
pectoral fin with dermal tubercles. The fish was probably about 30
inches long. There are some difficulties in the way of interpretation,
but the form and relative proportions of the cranium, &c., appear to
be similar to those of the living representative of the genus. The
dentition is not completely preserved ; the teeth near the symphysis
of the mandible are relatively high and slender, while the opposing
teeth are small, The great relative size of the spinous dermal
tubercles serves to distinguish it from species of Squatina already
known. The anterior lower teeth are also more slender than in
the existing S. angelus.

No specimen of Belonostomus has hitherto revealed the precise
characters of the dentition or the relations of the bones. This
deficiency is now supplied. The two rami occupy only one half
the entire length of the jaw, the anterior half being formed by the
elongated presymphysial bone, which is provided with a powerful
prehensile dentition. The character of the teeth was described by
the Author: the large median teeth end abruptly at the posterior
extremity of the presymphysial element, but the small lateral teeth
are continued backwards upon the rami of the jaw, increasing in size
and becoming relatively shorter. Further details were given, and

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 26

382 Geological Society.

the evidence shows that the original specimens described by Agassiz,
as portions of the mandibular rami of Belonostomus cinctus, are really
fragments of the presymphysial hone of this species. Some of the
relations of Belonostomus and Aspidorhynchus were pointed out.

2. “On the History and Characters of the Genus Septastrea,
D’Orbigny (1849), and the Identity of its Type Species with that of
Glyphastrea, Duncan (1887).” By George Jennings Hinde, Ph.D.,
F.G.S.

D’Orbigny founded the genus Septastrea on the characters of a
coral from the Miocene strata of Virginia, which was named S. sub-
ramosa, but no specific description was given. In the same year
(1849), Edwards & Haime accepted the genus as valid, but placed
S. subramosa as a synonym of Astrea ramosa, Defrance—an appa-
rently recent species of coral which had previously only been informally
described by Defrance. They also included in the genus S. Forbesz,
the original specimen of which was from the Miocene of Maryland,
and at that time in the collection of the Geological Survey in
London. Later on, in 1852, D’Orbigny claimed that S. Forbesi
was but a synonym of his S. subramosa. There is good reason for
regarding this as correct, but owing to the fact that D’Orbigny’s
name subramosa was merely nominal and without description, the
later name of S. Forbesi, Edwards & Haime, must be allowed to
stand for the type of the genus Septastrea.

In 1861 de Fromentel, and in 1867 Prof. Duncan included in
Septastrea several species of Jurassic and Liassic corals, which, how-
ever, have no generic relationship to the type form of the genus from
the Miocene Tertiary.

In 1887, Prof. Duncan read a paper before the Geological Society
in which he adopted Septastrwa Forbesi, EK. & H., as the type of a
new genus Glyphastrea, thus leaving in Septastreea those Liassic
and Jurassic species placed therein by himself and de Fromentel.
As this proceeding is contrary to recognized rules of nomenclature,
the genus Glyphastrea will have to be abolished.

In the type form of Septastrwa, now in the British Natural-His-
tory Museum, the walls of the corallites, though closely apposed,
are quite distinct ; the theca is formed by the extension of the septal
lamine ; the walls and septa in the lower portion of the corallites
are very thin, but the upper portion of the corallites are so infilled
with compact stereoplasm that the calices are extremely shallow
when mature. ‘There is no true columella, only a pseudo-columella,
formed by the union and partial involution of the inner septal
margins. The increase is exclusively by marginal gemmation ;
fission does not occur. In some cases linear perforations between
the septa are shown ; these appear to be for the insertion of the
mesenterial muscles.

The septa in Septastrea consist of a central layer, dark in micro-

ee: pe

Geological Society. 383

scopic sections, the primary layer of vy. Koch, or centre of calcifica-
tion of Bourne and Fowler, enclosed on both sides by layers of
compact suberystalline stereoplasm. In longitudinal fractures the
septa frequently split in the centre of the dark or primary layer,
and thus siow that each half of the septum consists of a dark and
light portion, and the median face of each septal lamina exhibits
transverse growth-lines, not unlike those of an epitheca, beneath
which are delicate longitudinal ridges and grooves. The thecal wall
has a similar structure to that of the septal lamine, of which it is
an extension.

There is a close correspondence in the septal and thecal structure
of Septastrea and that of the recent and fossil genus Flabellum, and
in this genus also the septa occasionally split longitudinally and
show the same growth-lines on their median faces.

Only two species are included in Septastrwa, as now defined,
viz. S. Forbesi, E. & H., and S. (Columnaria?) sexradiata, Lons-
dale, sp.

February 29, 1888.—W. T. Blanford, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

“ Appendix to Mr. A. T. Metcalfe’s paper ‘On Further Disco-
veries of Vertebrate Remains in the Triassic Strata of the South
Coast of Devoushire, between Budleigh Salterton and Sidmouth.’ ”
By H. J. Carter, Esq., F.R.S.

A microscopic examination of certain calcareous pellet-like bodies,
containing plates possessing a bony structure, and referred to in
Mr. Metcalfe’s paper in the Society’s Journal for May 1884, revealed
the fact that the plates resembled the scales of the Bony Pike, and
also the scales contained in certain Liassic coprolites which were
identical in appearance with the Triassic pellets. The Author con-
cluded that the latter were the coprolites of Triassic amphibians
which fed upon the same kind of Ganoid fishes as the Ichthyosaurs
of the Lias.

The Author had also examined microscopically the so-called
“spine,” No. 1, fig. 2, and the jawbone, No. 2, of Mr. Metcalfe’s paper,
and observed that there appeared to be no difference between the
structure of the latter and that of reptilian bones, whilst its structure
is different from that of the Lepidostean scale ; with regard to the
former, he stated that it was totally different from the spines of
two species of Hybodus examined, and considered that there were
no grounds for considering it a spine.

384 Miscellaneous.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Note on the Nomenclature of three Genera of Fossil Mammalia.
By R. Lypexxer, B.A., F.G.S., &e.

In the ‘Catalogue of Fossil Mammalia in the British Museum’ I
have adopted the name ¥lurogale (Ailurogale), Filhol, for an
extinct genus of Felide, and Stylodon, Owen, for one of the Meso-
zoic Polyprotodont Marsupials. The name lurogale is, however,
preoccupied by Fitzinger (Sitzb. Ak. Wiss. Wien, 1869, p. 77), who
applied it to Felis planiceps; and Dr. Trouessart (Bull. Soc. Angers,
xy. 1885, Cat. of Mamm. p. 92) has proposed in substitution the
name Aflurictis (Ailurictis), which must be adopted, unless it prove,
as I have suggested in part v. of the ‘ Catalogue,’ that Cope’s Num-
ravus is not generically separable. The name Stylodon, I am
informed by Dr. G. Baur, is preoccupied by H. Beck in 1838 for a
genus of Gastropoda in the work entitled ‘ Index Molluscorum pre-
sentis evi, Mus. Christiani Frederici,’ fasc.i., Hafnize. Since, how-
ever, Prof. Marsh’s genus Stylacodon is probably not distinct from
Owen’s Stylodon, I think that this name may be at least pro-
visionally adopted for the English genus, and in any case the name
of the family may be changed from Stylodontide to Stylacodontide.

Finally, I gather from Dr. Rojer’s recently published ‘ List of
Fossil Mammalia’ that Dr. M. Schlosser proposes to substitute the
name Haplogale for my genus d?luropsis (which I have placed in
the Felide). This substitution appears to rest on the existence of
the name Alurops (Ailurops); but since the names /luropsis
and Alurops are founded upon totally different Greek words, I con-
sider that 1t is unnecessary.

On the Collection of Starfishes formed by the Cape-Horn Scientific
Commussion. By M. HE, Perrier.

The collection of starfishes brought back by the scientific com-
mission which remained in the region of Cape Horn during the
years 1882 and 1883 includes no fewer than 553 specimens belonging
to 38 species, of which 23 are new and 382 were wanting’in the
collections of the museum. This brings up to 57 the number of
species of starfishes referred to the southern point of America. The
examination of the numerous specimens which I have been able to
observe in the collection of the museum shows great variability in
each species in relation to the extreme diversity of conditions of
existence presented to nearly sedentary animals by these coasts,
which are so much broken up. It seems probable that of the
species described a certain number will have to descend to the rank
of simple varieties. Some among the 56 specimens of Asterias sul-
cifera which have been sent to me appear to approach A. Brandti,

Miscellaneous. 385

A. obtusissima, and A. neglecta of Jeffrey Bell. A. antarctica,
Liitk., A. rugispina, 8. Simpson, A. spirabilis, Bell, Anasterias
minuta, Perrier, Asteroderma papillosa, Perr., may also be only terms
of one and the same series; but even assuming that these reductions
may become definitive, the number of forms too different to receive
the same name is still remarkably large.

The correspondence between the arctic and antarctic faunas indi-
cated by various authors is striking in the starfishes, as is shown by
the two following lists, in which the corresponding species of each
region bear the same number :—

Norruern Species.—1. Brisinga coronata, O. Sars; 2. Pedicel-
laster typicus, Sars; 3. Stichaster roseus, O. F. Mill. ; 4. Cribrella
oculata, Linck ; 5. Lophaster furcifer, Dib. & Kor. ; 6. Crossaster
papposus, Fab.; 7. Pentagonaster granularis, O. F. Miull.; 8. Hip-
pasteria plana, Linck; 9. Porania pulvillus, O. F. Miill.; 10.
Goniopecten Christi, Dub. & Kor.; 11. Ctenodiscus corniculatus,
Linck; 12. Pteraster militaris, Mull. & Troschel.

Sourwern Species :—1. Labidiaster radiosus, Lovén; 2. P. scaber,
Smith; 3. S. auriantiacus, Meyer; 4. C. Pagenstecheri, Studer, C.
Hyadesi, KB. Perrier, and C. Studeri, EK. P.; 5. L. Levinseni, EK. P.;
6. C. australis, KE. P.; 7. P. austro-granularis, EK. P.; 8. H. magel-
lanica, K. P.; 9. P. antarctica, Smith; 10. G. Pleuriaisi, E. P.;
11. C. australis, Liitk.; 12. P. Ingousit, E. P., and P. inermis,
HP.

The naturalists of the ‘ Challenger’ have noted the frequency of
incubatory animal forms in the southern regions. I have ascer-
tained this remarkable habit in Diplasterias Liitkeni, BE. P., D. Stein-
ent, Studer, and Asterias spirabilis, Bell. In these species the
young are attached to the buccal membrane and to the stomachal
membrane turned back by the mother by an interradial ventral
peduncle, which corresponds to the preoral lobe of the larva (brachi-
olar arms of Asterias and Cribrella, larval organ of Asterina), a lobe
at the expense of which, according to Barrois, the median dorsal
peduncle of the Crinoids is also developed. I have made known the
organization of the young of Asterias spirabilis in a preceding note,
all the statements in which I maintain, notwithstanding the con-
trary assertions of M. Cuénot, which have been advanced without
any examination of the type spoken of by me.

Labidiaster radiosus has presented a phenomenon hitherto abso-
lutely unknown in the Echinodermata—the normal formation of new
arms adding themselves to the old ones after the completion of the
larval period. These new arms bud forth upon the margin of the
disk, behind the dentary pieces of the arms, between which they are
intercalated in such a way that their ambulacral groove does not
reach the buccal membrane; they are distinguished by other very
precise characters from broken arms in course of regeneration. Six
of the fourteen specimens of ZL. radiosus that I have examined
presented from one to six arms in course of development ; the num-
ber of completely formed arms varied in these individuals from

386 Miscellaneous.

twenty-three to thirty-one; among the individuals (all of large
size) in which the phenomenon was not observed the number of
arms varied from thirty-nine to forty-two. The great number of
arms in old individuals thus seems to be connected with this forma-
tion of intercalary arms. I have recognized some indications of an
analogous formation in Heliaster. In connexion with this I will
remark that, in Brisinga mediterranea, the nine arms are entirely
formed before the close of the larval period; young examples of
Solaster and Acanthaster did not present any arms in course of for-
mation.

In order to classify the starfishes of the sea around Cape Horn I
have had to form the new genera Diplastinas, Astcroderma, Porani-
opsis, Cribraster, Lebrunaster, and Asterodon. In the genus Diplas-
tinas I range Asterias-forms which have at least two rows of adam-
bulacral spines ; Asteroderma includes Asterie without any apparent
spines or pedicellaris, and in which the dorsal skeleton is almost
deficient. The genus Poraniopsis presents characters exactly inter-
mediate between those of Echinaster and Porania; the animals of
this genus have the ventral surface differentiated from the dorsal
surface and thick integuments, like the Poranic, while the very
short arms are rounded and covered with spines. The Cribrasteres
are Cribrelle having paxilli upon the ventral surface ; in Lebrun-
aster marginal plates begin to be differentiated. These animals
form the passage towards the Ganeri@, which themselves lead to
the Cycethre. The species of Asterodon, previously classed with
the Goniasteride, are in reality Archasteride. ‘They are charac-
terized by their dentary plates, each having a hyaline spine laid
down upon them with its point directed outwards; these two spines
may unite and form only a single hyaline interradial spine, resem-
bling the dentary plume of the sea-urchins. Asterodon has also
at the angle of the arms an unpaired marginal plate, and the ven-
tral spines often group themselves into multifid pedicellarie, as in
Pectinaster, E. P. To this genus must be referred Astrogonium
singulare, Mull. & Tr., A. meridionalis, Smith, Pentagonaster Bell,
Studer, Culliderma Grayi, Bell, and two new species, Asterodon
pedicellaris and granulosus.—Comptes Rendus, March 12, 1888,
p-. 763.

On Nephromyces, a new Genus of Fungi parasitic in the Kidney of
the Molgulide. By M. A. Grarp.

In a fine memoir on Cyclostoma elegans, M. Garnault* has
recently noticed the existence in this mollusk of a closed organ
( glande @ concrétions of Claparcde) which contains at the same time
uric products and symbiotic bacilli, Several years ago I observed
phenomena of symbiosis of the same kind in the completely closed

* ‘Recherches anatomiques et histologiques sur le Cyclostoma elegans,’
pp. 49-60 (1887).

7 ~ ph
Pe gee

Miscellaneous. 387

renal organ of Ascidians of the family Molgulide. But in the latter
animals the symbiotic Fungi belong to a group much higher than
the Schizomycetes. The older writers have described and imper-
fectly figured foreign bodies in the kidney of the Molgulide, calling
them .confervoid filaments, gregariniform bodies, &¢., and supposing
them to belong to diverse creatures*. In reality these productions
must be referred to Fungi of the tribe Siphomycetes (Sorokine) and
of the family Chytridineze. The parasites of the various species of
Molgulid belong to different species, but in the same species of
Ascidia we generally find only one species of parasite in very various
stages of evolution. I give these Fungi the generic name of Nephro-
myces. The most nearly allied genus seems to me to be Catenaria,
Sorokine, the type species of which, Catenaria anguillule, is para-
sitic upon Nematoda. However, in Nephromyces the sporangia are
always terminal.

I have particularly studied two species of Nephromyces having as
their hosts two Molgulidz which are very common at Wimereux :—
1. Nephromyces Molgularum, parasitic upon Molgula socialis,
Alder; and 2. Nephromyces Sorokini, a parasite of Lithonephrya
eugyranda, Lac.-Duth.

Nephromyces Molgularum forms around the isolated concretions
which fill the kidney of Molgula socialis a unicellular mycelium
with very delicate filaments strongly felted together, the free extre-
mities of which are terminated by spheroidal dilatations ; notwith-
standing their appearance, I have never seen these terminal swellings
detach themselves from their support and behave like conidial spores.

This delicate, transparent mycelium produces a great number of
much thicker tubes of irregularly cylindrical form, more or less
contorted upon themselves, and filled with a finely granular opaque
protoplasm which is strongly stained by picrocarmine. Side by
side with these protoplasmic masses originate, in enormous quan-
tity, zoosporangia of very varied forms, often bifurcated at their free
extremity, and in these are developed a multitude of very active
zoospores of excessively small size. The formation of the zoospores
is preceded by a spumous appearance of the protoplasm, such as
has been indicated in various Chytridinez, and by the formation of
thicker septa separating the sporangium from the rest of the myce-
lum. For a long time I had only a very imperfect notion of these
zoospores, and I have been able to make anything of their study
only by the aid of Zeiss’s excellent apochromatic objectives. The
zoospores are perfectly spherical, and furnished with a pretty long
but very slender flagellum; they contain a strongly refractive
granule towards thie origin of the flagellum. It is probable that
these active bodies introduce themselves into the branchiz of the
young Molgulew, and penetrate by diapedesis into the renal organ,
since neither by injections nor by sections has any opening been
found into that organ.

* Lacaze-Duthicrs, Arch, de Zool, expér, et ¢éi. tome iii. pl. xi. (1874).

388 Miscellaneous.

Towards the end of the summer the empty zoosporangia separated
from the mycelium often encumber preparations; generally they
present, at various parts of their wall, especially at the extremities,
swellings formed by a layer of undifferentiated refractive proto-
plasm.

During the autumn months, in the Molgule produced in the spring,
the mycelium presents a great quantity of zygospores. These
reproductive bodies, which are much larger than the zoospores,
originate isolatedly, but at very closely approximated points, where
several (usually four or five) filaments of the mycelium conjugate.
The zygospores have a finely granulated envelope, perhaps even
slightly echinulate. During the winter, at the beginning of Feb-
ruary, these zygospores germinate by emitting two equal filaments,
terminating in points and slightly divergent, which give the spore
in course of evolution the form of a pair of compasses. The two
branches of these compasses open more and more, and the compass-
stage gradually becomes converted into a fusiform stage, in which
the spore is no longer visible except as a median swelling, which
soon disappears completely.

Side by side with these various forms we find all the year round
pretty long tubes, wider than the mycelium from which they sepa-
rate readily, and rounded at the two extremities. Upon their walls
these tubes present a fine plasmatic deposit arranged in two inter-
crossing spirals, or perhaps disseminated around vacuoles placed
end to end throughout the length of the tube. The meaning of
these parts completely escapes me.

Anureila roscovitana, Lac.-Duth., contains a Nephromyces (N.
roscovitanus) nearly allied to V. Molqularum, but nevertheless quite
distinct.

The species parasitic upon Lithonephrya eugyranda, and which I
name Nephromyces Sorokini, is very distinctly characterized by the
form of its regularly pyriform zoosporangia with two refractive
masses, one at the apex, the other at the base, at the point where
the sporangium is inserted upon the mycelium. In the Lithonephrye
the kidney is almost entirely filled by a single very voluminous con-
cretion. A very limited space is left, therefore, for the symbiotic
fungus, and hence the latter is much less abundant than its con-
geners parasitic upon the Molgule.

The arrangements of the laboratory at Wimereux have not per-
mitted me hitherto to make experiments upon the culture of the
Fungi of the genus Nephromyces in artificial media containing
guanine or uric acid. I think, however, that such cultures may be
possible, and that these Fungi are useful to the Tunicates which
they infest by freeing them of the excreted products, which, with-
out them, would rapidly choke up the kidney, which is destitute of
any evacuatory duct.— Comptes Rendus, April 16, 1888, p. 1180.

;)

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SIXTH SERIES. ]

No. 6. JUNE 1888.

LIi.—On the Reproductive Organs of Phreoryctes. By
Frank E. Bepparp, M.A., Prosector to the Zoological
Society of London.

[Plate XXIII. ]

AMONG a number of earthworms which I have recently
received from New Zealand was a single example of a small
slender worm, which I refer, with some doubt, to the genus
Phreoryctes. The specimen was in a very fair state of pre-
servation, and I have therefore been able to investigate
its structure by means of sections. The anterior region
of the body, comprising the first twenty segments, was cut
into a series of longitudinal sections ; the posterior region was
studied by means of transverse sections. Mr. W. Smith, of
Ashburton, New Zealand, to whose kindness I am indebted
for the worm, states that it was found in marshy soil coiled
up with a number of others into a ball; its colour during life
was a bright red. It is about 2 inches in length and very
slender ; its general proportions in fact agree very closely with
Vejdovsky’s figure of Stylodrilus (‘System und Morphologie
der Oligochaeten,’ Taf. xi. fig. 9 a); 11s form is not nearly so
elongated as that of either of the two species of Phreoryctes at
present known.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 27

390 Mr. F. E. Beddard on the

With regard to external characters the genus Phreoryctes is
distinguished by two peculiarities. Both Leydig (“ Ueber
Phreoryctes Menkeanus,” Aych. fiir mikr. Anat. 1865) and
Timm (‘Beobachtungen tiber Phreoryctes &e.,” Arb. a. d.
Zool.-Zoot. Inst. Wiirzburg, Bd. vi. 1883) describe the sete
of P. Menkeanus as disposed in four rows of a single seta
each. Vejdovsky (‘ System,’ &c., p. 49) states of the second
species, P. filiformis, “ Die Borsten stehen in vier Reihen und
je einzeln in jedem Borsten-follikel ; doch in nicht seltenen
Fallen erscheint auch neben der alten Borste eine fast vollig
erwachsene Ersatzborste, so das es den Anschein hat, als ob
das betreffende Borstenbiindel aus zwei Borsten zusammen-
gesetzt wiirde.” It is therefore important to note that in
my species the sete are invariably paired ; their shape more-
over (Pl. XXIII. fig. 10) appears to be rather different from
Fa. the seta figured by Vejdovsky (‘ System,’ &e. pl. xii.

o. e

“The second peculiarity of Phreoryctes is the incomplete
division of the prostomium into two rings by a transverse
furrow; I have found this to be the case in my species
(Pl. XXIII. fig. 2), and this is one of the chief reasons which
leads me to place my specimen in the genus Phreoryctes, with
which, moreover, it has apparently other points in common to
be referred to later.

The arrangement of the pairs of setee with respect to
each other can be understood from an inspection of Pl. X XIII.
fig. 7, which represents a transverse section through one of
the posterior segments; the two dorsal pairs are much nearer
to each other than are the two ventral pairs or the dorsal and
ventral pairs of one side.

There is a marked difference in size between the dorsal and
ventral sete, as is the case in P. filiformis, the dorsal being
far stouter. ‘This is, however, not the case in the anterior
segments of the body.

The facts in the internal structure of the worm, to which I
wish to direct attention in the present paper, concern the
reproductive organs and their ducts (Pl. XXIII. fig. 3).

Our knowledge of these is at present extremely limited.
Vejdovsky was unable to find any trace of the reproductive
organs in P. filiformis. Leydig and 'Timm have, however,
given some details with respect to P. Menkeanus. There
are said to be four pairs of testes lying in segments ten, eleven,
twelve, and thirteen (the ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth
setigerous segments) ; Vejdovsky suggests that these glands
are probably ovaries and testes, and I am in a position to
prove his supposition to be right, supposing of course that I

Reproductive Organs of Phreoryctes. 391

am right in referring the present worm to the genus Phreo-
ryctes.

Testes—There are two pairs of these organs, situated in
segments ten and eleven; they are attached to the anterior
septa of their segment to the outside of the ventral pair of
sete. The testes are large bodies and occupy a very con-
siderable portion of their segment; so far as their shape can
be made out by sections they appear to be irregularly conical
in form, the apex forming the point of attachment. In the
possession of two pairs of testes and in the position of these
organs Phreoryctes agrees with the majority of earthworms ;
the only ally of the Lumbriculide which has an identical
arrangement is Ocnerodrilus (Kisen, Acta reg. Soe. Upsala,
1878), and Vejdovsky has already indicated some of the
points of resemblance which this latter genus bears to the
terricolous forms.

Vasa deferentia.—No sexual ducts have hitherto been
recorded in Phreoryctes, neither vasa deferentia nor oviducts.
Leydig and Timm suggest that the nephridia, which occupy
the segments where they should be found, perform the func-
tions of reproductive ducts. The occurrence, however, of
nephridia in the generative segments is now known through
the researches of Vejdovsky. Nephridia are present in these
segments before the sexual ducts make their appearance; it is
probably, as Vejdovsky suggests, this fact which misled
Leydig and Timm into regarding the nephridia of the genital
segments as fulfilling the office of vasa deferentia and oviducts.
It would obviously be of the greatest possible interest if the
suggestion of Leydig and Timm should prove to be correct ;
it cannot, however, be correct if my species is a Phreoryctes,
for I have succeeded in finding both vasa deferentia and
oviduct.

The vasa deferentia correspond in number to the testes,
that is to say there are two pairs of them. ‘The funnels are
flattened disks (Pl. X XIII. fig. 6) closely applied to the sep-
tum ; they are perfectly simple in form, not plicated; and
as their epithelium is composed of rather small columnar
ciliated cells they were not readily found. The funnels lie
in segments ten and eleven just opposite to the attached end
of the testes. Fyrom the inner corner of each funnel arises
the vas deferens, which is a ciliated tube composed of asingle
layer of columnar cells. The vas deferens passes through
the septum and opens on to the exterior a little to the outside
of the ventral pair of setee ; the important fact to be noticed
bout the vasa deferentia of this worm is that all the four

vasa deferentia open independently, and there are no atria.
2a

392 Mr. F. E. Beddard on the

At the aperture of the vas deferens the cuticle of the epidermis
was continued for a short distance up the tube.

There are thus four male pores situated a little to the outside
of the ventral sete and disposed in pairs, one pair to each of
seements eleven and twelve. The structure and position of
the male reproductive ducts is, so far as is known at present,
unique among the Oligocheta. Acanthodrilus and Monili-
gaster are not really comparable in these particulars, as might
be inferred from Vejdovsky’s work upon the Oligocheta. In
Acanthodrilus the vasa deferentia of each side unite and open
upon the eighteenth segment independently of the two pairs
of atria, which open on to the seventeenth and nineteenth seg-
ments respectively. In Moniligaster the supposed anterior
pair of male reproductive pores are in all probability sperma-
theces (Beddard, “On the Reproductive Organs of Monili-
gaster,’ Zool. Anz. Bd. x.). At the same time the sim-
plicity of the efferent ducts in Phreoryctes suggests that they
are in a primitive condition.

Ovaries.—There are two pairs of ovaries, a pair to each
of segments twelve and thirteen. In position and general
shape they are precisely like the testes. The number of
ripe ova in each ovary is small, as in most of the lower Oligo-
cheta. The presence of two pairs of ovaries is extremely
unusual, and there is of course the possibility to be considered
that it is abnormal in the present case. ‘There are, however,
as I shall point out further on, two pairs of oviducts ; and
this fact (coupled with the observations of Leydig and Timm)
is confirmatory of the view that two patrs of ovaries are cha-
racteristic of the genus Phreoryctes.

Vejdovsky particularly states that the Oligocheeta possess
only one pair of ovaries, and believes that the supposed three
pairs of ovaries of Huclipidrilus (Kisen, loc. cit.) are testes
and seminal vesicles. Lankester (‘The Sexual Form of Ch.
limnei,” Q. J. M. 8S. 1869) notes that in Cheetogaster limnet
there are occasionally two pairs of ovaries, but Vejdovsky finds
himself unable to confirm this observation. In any case it is
certain that a second pair of ovaries is occasionally met with
in Lumbricus (Bergh, ‘‘Geschlechtsorgane der Regenwiirmer,”
Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. 1886) and in Pertonyx (Beddard, “ Va-
riations in Pertonyex,” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886). The fact of
there being two pairs of oviducts in Lumbriculus (Vejdovsky,
‘System und Morph.’ &c. p. 150, note) suggests that in that
Annelid a second pair of ovaries may exist.

Oviducts.—Phreoryctes differs from all Oligocheta except
Lumbriculus in the fact that there are two pairs of oviducts
opening on a line with the ventral patr of sete between segments

Reproductive Organs of Phreoryctes. 393

twelve and thirteen, and thirteen and fourteen. Ihave myselt
recorded the occasional presence of two pairs of oviducts in
Perionyx (loc. cit.), where, however, it is a very rare occur-
rence. It is I think a fair assumption that the one specimen
of Phreoryctes at my disposal exhibits the normal charac-
teristics of the genus.

The oviducal funnels resemble in every particular, except
that they are a little smailer, the funnels of the vasa defe-
rentia, and they occupy a corresponding position in segments
twelve and thirteen. Hach funnel is connected with a tube
whose structure is identical with that of the vas deferens ;
this tube is, comparatively speaking, of some length, and
passes closely adherent to the opposite side of the septum to
that which bears the funnel to its point of opening, which is
upon the intersegmental furrow.

The position of the oviducal pores, behind the male pores,
agrees with that of Lumbriculide, as does also their position
upon the intersegmental furrow.

The close agreement between the ducts as well as the glands
of the male and female reproductive systems in Phreoryctes 1s
more apparent than in any other Oligocheta; it is probably
to be looked upon as an indication that the reproductive
system of this Annelid is in an archaic condition. The ovaries
and testes correspond ix number as well as in thei other
particulars which Phreoryctes shares with the remaining
genera of Oligocheta. ‘lhe oviducts and vasa deferentia
approximate more closely than in any other genus; they only
just show indications of differentiation.

Spermathece.—There are two pairs of these organs; the
anterior pair lie in segment seven, the second pair in segment
eight; each spermatheca is a somewhat pyriform pouch lined
with a columnar epithelium having a glandular appearance ;
the apertures of the spermathece are on the anterior border of
their segment between the dorsal and ventral pairs of sete.
The spermathece are not furnished with diverticula of any
kind. Leydig and Timm describe three pairs of spermathecee
in P. Menkeanus situated in segments seven, eight, and nine ;
these are said to be distinguished by their extraordinarily
thick and muscular walls. ‘They are certainly not so in my
species.

It will be clear from the foregoing description that the
worm belongs to a distinct species, for which I propose the
name of Phreoryctes Smithii*, and it may ultimately prove to
be a distinct generic type. In favour of this view is the

* Named after Mr, W. Smith, of Ashburton, New Zealand.

394 On the Reproductive Organs of Phreoryctes.

paired character of the sete. There is, however, evidently a
close agreement, if not identity, between the reproductive
organs of this species and of P. Menkeanus, and in most other
points of structure they agree ; so that I am not disposed to
create a new genus, at least for the present.

The facts which I have been able to record in this paper
confirm the justice of separating Phreoryctes as the type of a
distinct family, as has been done by Claus and Vejdovsky.

Vejdovsky’s definitions may be thus amended :—

Fam. Phreoryctide, Claus.

Long slender worms, the body made up of numerous seg-
ments; prostomium divided into two by a furrow; sete in
four rows, a single seta or a pair of sete to each row, |-shaped,
not bifid. Nephridia persistent in the segments behind those
containing the reproductive organs, opening on to the exte-
rior behind, or in front of, the ventral sete. Testes in segments
ten and eleven; ovaries in segments twelve and thirteen ;
four vasa deferentia opening on to segments eleven and twelve
between dorsal and ventral sete; four oviducts opening
between segments twelve and thirteen, and thirteen and
fourteen. Spermathecee, two to three pairs in front of testes,
in segments seven, eight (nine).

Genus Pureorycres, Hoffmeister.
With the characters of the family.

Species :—
(1) Phreoryctes Menkeanus, Leydig.

Excessively slender, reaching to the length of 1 foot.
Setee in four rows of a single seta each; ventral sete stouter
than dorsal. Three pairs of spermathece in segments seven,
eight, and nine. Nephridia opening in front of sete.

(2) Phreoryctes filiformis, Vejdovsky.

Slender, but smaller than P. Menkeanus. Sete in four
rows of a single seta each, the dorsal sete longer than the
ventral. Nephridia open behind sete.

(3) Phreoryctes Smithii, n. sp.
Much shorter than either P. Menkeanus or P. jfiliformis.

On the Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 395

Sete: in four rows of pairs; dorsal sete (in posterior region
of body) much longer than ventral. Nephridiopores in front
of ventral sete. ‘l'wo pairs of spermathecex in segments seven
and eight.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIII.

Fig. 1. Phreoryctes Smithit, nat. size.

Fig. 2. Anterior segments from yentral aspect, magnified. sp, sperma-
thecal pores, g openings of vasa deferentia, Q openings of
oviducts.

3. Genital segments. ¢, testes; 0, ovaries; v.d, vasa deferentia ;
o.d, oviducts; sp, spermathece ; s, setae; 2, nerve-cord.
4, Fragment of testis, highly magnified.

fg. 5, Fragment of ovary, highly magnified.

. 6, Section through funnel of vas deferens. st, septum; f, funnel ;
v.d, vas deferens.

Fig. 7, Section through one of posterior segments. s, sete; n, nerve-
cord; al, intestine; d.v, dorsal vessel; v.v, ventral vessel ; np,
nephridium.

Fig. 8. Surface view of the nephridiopore (zp) and sete (s).

Fig. 9. Spermatheca, transverse sections. a, near to external orifice; 0,
near distal end.

Fig. 10. Seta.

LIII.—Notes on the Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca.—
No. XXV. On some Silurian Ostracoda from Cothland*.
By Prof. T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S8., F.G.S.

[Plates XXI. & XXII. +]

Pror. Gustav Lrypstrom, of the State Museum, Stockholm,
having confided to me in 1886 a fine series of Ostracoda from
the Silurian rocks of Gothland for examination, I had much
pleasure in 1887 in comparing them with such as are known
from other countries and in determining what seemed to me to
be their generic and specific alliances. Late researches
among the British species, especially those collected by
Messrs. J. Smith and G. R. Vine in Shropshire ft, enabled me
to arrive at conclusions more confidently than I could other-
wise have done; and the results were given by me in the

* For No. XXIV. see Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for June 1887.

+ These Plates have been drawn with the aid of a grant from the
Royal Society for illustrating the fossil Entomostraca.

¢ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for April 1886, May 1886, March 1887, and

June 1887.

396 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

privately-printed ‘Notes on some Silurian Ostracoda from
Gothland,’ 8vo, Stockholm, 1887.

These Scandinavian specimens have now been carefully
figured in the accompanying Plates, and some figures and
descriptions of other specimens from Gothland have been
added, as well as further remarks on the alliances of the
already known species.

Mr. C. D. Sherborn, F.G.8., has helped me in sketching
and collating the specimens sent from Stockholm. Several
exquisite drawings executed by Hr. C. Hedelin and forwarded
by Dr. Lindstrém in 1886 have supplied the basis for some
of my determinations of species.

I. Macrocypris, G. S. Brady, 1867.
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xix. 1887, p. 178.)

1. Macrocypris Vinet, Jones.
(PL XXGT aigsitie 1 bie 32:)
Macrocypris Viner, Jones, op. cit. p. 179, pl. iv. figs. 1-3, and woodcut,
p- 179; Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 6.

Careful drawings sent to me from Stockholm represent
Macrocypris Vinei, Jones. The Swedish form, however (see
figs. La, 6, c), is slightly longer, has a slightly less orbicular
end-view, and is more gracefully curved on the postero-dorsal
slope; otherwise fig. 2 of pl. iv. referred to above very
closely matches the drawing sent from Stockholm.

One specimen (Pl. XXII. fig. 2) among those sent to me
in 1886 also comes within the limits of form characteristic of
Macrocypris Vinet.

This species occurs rather copiously in the shale at Frojel *
(of the Wenlock series).

Note.— Cytheropsis siliqua, Jones (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
April 1858, p. 249, pl. x. fig. 6), is possibly figured in a re-
versed position, that is, with its dorsal edge downwards, and
may really be a Macrocypris squeezed and broken. If so, being
about 2 millim. in length, it would not be very different from
the Scandinavian specimen (Pl. XXII. figs. la, 8, c),
which is 2 millim. long; fig. 2 shows an individual 1} mil-
lim. long. Of the English specimens (op. cit. March 1887,
pl. iv.) fig. 2 is 14 millim. and fig. 3 is 12 millim. in length.

* For the localities mentioned in this paper, as regards the Silurian
Ostracoda of Gothland, see the geological map appended to Prof, Lind-
strém’s paper on the Silurian strata of that island, in the Neues Jahrb.
fur Mineral. &c. 1888, vol. 1. pp. 147 &e. pl. v.

Palaeozoic Bivalved Entomostraea. 397

A group of Silurian Macrocyprides, such as M. Vinet,
might at first sight be thought to be comparable with such a
group of the Carboniferous Badrdia subelongata as described
and figured in the Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxxv. 1879,
p- 573, pl. xxx. figs. 1-11 and 16 (especially figs. 1 and 7) ;
but however near an approach they may seem to make, the
Macrocyprides have not the characteristic Bairdian outline of
the postero-dorsal border. They also have the right valve
larger than the left.

II. Ponrocypris, G. O. Sars, 1865.
(Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xix. 1887, p, 182.)

1. Pontocypris Mawii, Jones.
(Pl. XXII. figs. 3a, 36, 3c.)

Pontocypris Mawvi, Jones, loc. cit. pl. iv. figs. 4-6.

A few examples with Bythocypris Hollit came from the
Fréjel shale. ‘The specimen here figured differs slightly from
the type in the convexity of the posterior third. ‘The hinder
border in fig. 3 a is not specially depressed, but being somewhat
translucent shows the inner lamina.

III. Byruocypris, G. 8. Brady, 1880.
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xix. 1887, p. 184.)

1. Lythocypris symmetrica, Jones.

Six specimens sent in 1886, showing slight modifications
of outline, agree sufficiently well with Bythocypris sym-
metrica, Jones (op. cit. p. 186, pl. vil. figs. 3 and 4), for them
to be referred to that species (Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887,
p- 6). From Fréjel.

2. Bythocypris concinna, Jones.

Bythocypris concinna, Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xix.
p- 186, pl. v. fig. 6; Silw. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 6.

Judging from the drawings sent from Stockholm, this
species is represented in the Stockholm Collection. This is
one of the most widely spread species, found in the uppermost
strata of Gistergarn, Linde klint, and Hoburg; and in the
shale of Stora Carlsé.

398 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

3. Bythocypris Hollii, Jones.

Bythocypris Hollii, Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xix.
p. 184, pl. v. figs. 1 and 2, and pl. vi. figs. 3 and 4; Sil. Ostrac.
Gothland, 1887, p. 6.

This fine species is represented in the drawings sent to me
by Prof. Lindstrém ; and several examples were among the
specimens obtained from the shale or marl of the brickyard
at Fréjel and sent to me from Stockholm in 1886.

Note.— Cytheropsts concinna, Jones (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
ser. 3, vol. i. 1858, pp. 249 and 254, pl. x. figs. 3 and 4),
was referred, I now think erroneously, to the smooth Pri-
mitie, as P. muta (op. cit. vol. xvi. 1865, p. 425, and ser. 4,
vol. iii, 1869, p. 222). It was probably figured in a reversed
position; and if looked at in the other position it may be
taken for a Bythocypris, approaching B. testacella (Ann. &
Mag. Nat. Hist. March 1887, p. 186, pl. v. fig. 5) in shape,
though rather larger, being 13 millim. long, instead of a very
little more than 1 millim. ‘“C. concinna,” figured and described
by Dr. Kolmodin (Sverg. Silur. Ostrac. 1869, p. 21, pl. O.
fig. 15), which is 13 millim. long, may also be included in
the same category, as a possible Bythocypris, if the convex
border be regarded as dorsal instead of ventral.

IV. Kua@penta, Jones & Holl, 1886.
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvii. pp. 347 and 362.)

1. Kledenia apiculata, sp. nov. (Pl. XXI. figs. 1-5.)

This Scandinavian Kledenia, from the uppermost strata of
Slite, in Gothland, is not far removed as to its general shape
and features from K. Wilckensiana*. In some individuals
of the new species the valves are much more oblong (figs. 3
and 4) and the dorsal angles are generally more acute. The
front and hind lobes rise much higher, reaching beyond the
dorsal border; and this formation suggests the name apicu-
lata. ‘The middle lobe, on the contrary, does not rise so high

* This also belongs to the Silurian rocks of Scandinavia, being found
as well in place as in the drifted blocks of limestone in North Germany ;
Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. xvi. pp. 82 and 89, pl. v. figs. 17-19 ;
figs. 20, 21, represent K. plicata, described at p. 90 as a variety, but
sufficiently different as compared with the two other forms to be regarded
as specifically distinct. See A. Krause, in Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Ges.
1877, p. 35, pl. i. figs. 18a, 6 (186, K. plicata), and G. Reuter, op. cit.
1885, p. 647, pl. xxvi. fig. 28, on the distribution of these Kledenie.

Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 399

towards the back edge, but huddles itself low down within
the curve of the anterior lobe. The semilunar furrow,
forming a narrow ridge or fold in the posterior region of K.
Wilckensiana, is absent in K. apiculata. In an old indi-
vidual of the latter (fig. 5) there is an uncertain appearance
of a slight furrow within the anterior border, but it probably
resulted from an accident. Figs. 1-5 show the gradations of
form between the youngest (smallest) and the oldest indivi-
duals that have come to hand; and although no two are
exactly alike, they all possess the same essential characters.
Figs. 4a, b,c, represent a valve having the antero-ventral
region hypertrophied, as is usual among some species of Bey-
richie and in K. Wilckensiana*. 'The specimens of K.
apiculata, white and well preserved, are not rare in the upper-
most Silurian strata at Shite, Gothland.

V. BeyricuiA, M‘Coy, 1846.
(Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvii. 1886, p. 346.)

1. Beyrichia clavata, Kolmodin.

(Pl. XXI. figs. 6-9.)

Beyrichia clavata, Kolmodin, Bidrag till Kannedomen om Sverges
Siluriska Ostracoder, Akad. Afhandl. &c., 1869, p. 18, pl. O. fig. 10 ;
Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 2.

This Beyrichia seems to be the same as Haidenhain’s
fig. 12, pl. 1. (Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesell. vol. xxi. 1869,
p- 171), which he describes as 6. Kleden?; also fig. 11 in
Angelin’s unpublished “ tab. A.”

It differs trom the ordinary B. Aledeni in the relative
position and size of its lobes. The gigot-lobe is broad and
triangular and often compressed above and almost apiculate ;
the front lobe is very narrow and curved, and the middle lobe
lies down close in the concavity of the latter. The surface
has a minute and variable granulation. ‘The marginal area is
broad and hollow, and its ventral portion has a series of
small, impressed, radiating marks, slighter in some specimens
than in others, and the outer rim is strong.

This is an abundant species, and among about one hundred
specimens sent to me from Stockholm the arrangement and
relative size of the lobes are remarkably persistent among
individuals trom 1 to 24 millim. in length. It is plentiful
in the shales of Kksta and Fréjel.

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvi. pp. 340-342.

400 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

Some individuals have the hypertrophied lobe (fig. 9) fre-
quently seen in some species of Beyrichia (see Ann. & Mag.
Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvii. pp. 339-343). There are about
twelve of these accompanying the others.

Several years ago I received specimens of Silurian Bey-
richie found at Fréjel and Cistergarn, in Gothland, from Dr.
Lindstrém, and amongst them B. clavata occurs, sometimes
with the hypertrophied antero-ventral lobe.

Note.—The figure given of Beyrichia Kladeni, M‘Coy, in
the Brit. Pal. Foss. Cambr. Mus. 1851, pl. 1 E. fig. 2, has a
considerable resemblance to B. clavata, Kolm. ; so also has
Haswell’s figure of B. Kledeni (Silur. Formation Pentland
Hills, 1865, pl. iti. fig. 12). In each case, however, I believe
this resemblance is due to the inferior portraiture of the
specimen. Having been favoured with an opportunity of
studying M‘Coy’s type specimen, I find that it is a fairly
good internal cast of an ordinary adult B. Kladent, with
three lobes really having proportions and distances different
from those in B. clavata.

2. Beyrichia Kladeni, M‘Coy, var. granulata, Jones.

Beyrichia Klaedeni, M‘Coy, var. granulata, Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat.

Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvii. 1886, p. 850, pl. xii. fig. 2; Silur. Ostrac. Goth-
land, 1887, p. 2.

Of this form, which is a good type of B. Kledenz, except
that it has a rough instead of a smooth surface, there was
only one in the set sent in 1886, and I had one which Prof.
Lindstrém gave me some years ago. Both have the hyper-
trophied lobe.

Except in the roughness of the surface and the want of
tubercles on the margin these specimens closely match fig. 12
of Angelin’s unpublished “ tab. A.”

Found at Cistergarn and Frojel.

3. Beyrichia Kledeni, M‘Coy, var. verruculosa, nov.

‘Three specimens among those from Eksta and Fréjel are
referable to B. Kledent, but are rather longer (3 millim. in
length) than usual, and have a coarse granulation of some-
what scattered tubercles over the surface and on the thick free
margins. ‘The lobes are well formed and distinct, the middle
lobe shghtly united below with the other two. ‘The fig. 13 in
Angelin’s unpublished “ tab. A ”’ is of the same kind, but its
features are rather masked by the hypertrophy of its antero-

Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 401

ventral lobe. Fig. 21 of the same plate is possibly a larger
(older) individual of the same variety.

Boll’s B. spinigera (Archiv Ver. Fr. Naturges. Mecklen-
burg, 1862, p. 133, pl. 1. fig. 7) is much like the variety under
notice, but the middle lobe is quite distinct from the other
two, and the margin has a different ornamentation. . nodu-
losa, Boll (Jl. c. fig. 6), also belongs to the same category, but
the lobes have different proportions and position. B. pro-
tuberans, Boll (l. c. fig. 6), is a weaker variety, tuberculate
only on the hinder lobe, and deformed in front by the usual
hypertrophied lobe.

4. Beyrichia Kledent, M‘Coy, var. antiquata, Jones.
Beyrichia Kledeni, M‘Coy, var. antiquata, Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist. ser. 2, vol. xvi. 1855, p. 167, pl. vi. fig. 8; Palseoz. Biv. Kntom.,
Geol. Assoc. 1869, p. 12, pl. xiv. fig. 7 (in both instances the sinistral
valve is figured and is erroneously termed the dextral); Geol. Mag.
1881, p. 345, pl. x. fig. 11; Silur, Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 2.
Some years ago I received this specimen from Prof. Lind-
strém. It occurred in the shale of Gistergarn, Gothland.
Fig. 14in Angelin’s unpublished “tab. A” is evidently
B. Kledeni, var. antiquata.

5. Beyrichia Kledent, M‘Coy, var. tuberculata, Salter.

(Geol. Mag. 1881, p. 345, pl. x. fig. 15; Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5,
Be ai 1886, p. 354, pl. xii. figs. 8,9; Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887,
p. 3.

This variety is shown by one of the drawings sent from
Stockholm. A few specimens were found in the uppermost
limestone of Linde klint. From the shale at Fréjel I have
one specimen, sent some years ago.

B. Kledent, var. tuberculata, was first described and
figured by Mr. J. W. Salter in 1848 (Mem. Geol. Survey,
vol. u. part 1, p. 852, pl. viil. figs. 14, 15) as “B. tuberculata,
Kléden.” Figs. 14 and 14a represent the outside of the
valve, from the Wenlock Limestone at Lindells, Woolhope ;
figs. 15 and 15a@ show an internal cast from the Wenlock
Shale, at Tynewydd, south of Llandovery.

In this variety the width of the ventral margin and the
amount of tuberculation vary very much with individuals.

In Angelin’s unpublished “tab. A,” fig. 18 evidently
represents this variety.

6. Beyrichia Bolliana-umbonata, Reuter.

(Pl. XXL. figs. 10 & 11.)

Some specimens under notice are probably identical with

402 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

Reuter’s above-mentioned variety of his B. Bolliana (Zeitschr.
deutsch. geol. Ges. vol. xxxvii. 1885, p. 646, pl. xxvi. fig. 21),
although it has a finely granulated surface. I do not agree
with Hr. Reuter’s synonymy for this form (Silur. Ostrac.
Gothland, 1887, p. 3).

The ventral margin differs in development with individuals.
Two were sent to me by Prof. Lindstrém in 1886 from Fréjel.

7. Beyrichia tuberculata (Kléden) and varr.
(Pl. XXI. figs. 12-17.)

For B. tuberculata (Kléden) see Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
ser. 5, vol. xvil. p. 347, pl. v. figs. 4-9 (figs. 1U-L1, var.
nuda, is the same as B. Kochii, Boll). See also op. cit.
April 1886, pp. 847-349, for synonyms, correcting as above.

7*. Beyrichia tuberculata, vera (senex).

(Pl. XXI. fig. 12.)

In Pl. XXI. fig. 12 we have what I believe to be an old
individual well developed, but unfortunately broken at its
antero-dorsal region, where the middle lobe and the dorsal
portion of the front lobe have been displaced inwards by
pressure. Kléden’s fig. 22 comes nearest among published
figures to this specimen ; but the lobes are more divided and
the hinder lobe more distinctly sulcate in that figure, and our
specimen is denticulate on the front margin and has a few
prickles behind. Boll’s fig. la of B. tuberculata has the
lobes still more distinct; the hinder lobe exhibits its three
characteristic segments; the front lobe is distorted by hyper-
trophy ; and the margin is broad and somewhat tuberculate
in front. The Nova-Scotian specimen (Geol. Mag. 1881,
pl. x. fig. 10) is another of these full-grown and coarse-
featured individuals, retaining the essential characters, how-
ever much modified they may be by age.

7**, Beyrichia tuberculata, var. spicata, nov.

(Pl. XXI. figs. 13, 14.)

Differing, it may be, by advanced growth only, fig. 13
shows isolated spikes or prickles on its lobes and sharp teeth
both along the front border and on what remains of the hind
margin. ‘The lobes are distinct; the anterior lobe is modi-
fied by an enlargement of its lower moiety; the posterior
lobe is broken, but shows some signs of its normal sulcation,
and has a projection on its dorsal edge as in fig. 12.

Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 403

In fig. 14 (a right valve) the prickles of the surface are
more numerous; the hinder lobe shows no sulcation, as in the
var. antiquata (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. August 1855, p. 87,
pl. v. fig. 12), and the upper moiety of the front valve is
reduced to a narrow, curved, rugose ridge; the hind and
front margins are denticulate.

7***, Beyrichia tuberculata, var. foliosa, nov.
>] }

(PI. XXI. figs. 15-17.)

In figs. 15 and 16 the superficial isolated prickles are
exaggerated into somewhat concentric rows of large and
small spines, directed backwards on the posterior and for-
wards on the anterior part of the valve, and less regularly
arranged tubercles occupy the inner slope of the hinder or
gigot-lobe. The middle lobe is distinct, as in all the other
specimens of these Beyrichiw ; but the hinder lobe is no
longer rounded and divided crosswise, and the front lobe is
also obsolete or shapeless and overgrown with tubercles.

Fig. 17 has a still more extreme variation in its concentric
overlapping growths of leaf-like, coarsely denticulated expan-
sions over the hinder lobe, which retains the dorsal projec-
tion, seen also in figs. 12-15. The middle lobe is distinct
and smooth; the front lobe is smooth and low above, but
prominent and partially tuberculate in its lower moiety.

The originals of figs. 12-17 are well-preserved white speci-
mens from the Uppermost Silurian strata of Slite, Gothland.

VI. LeperpiiiA, Rouault, 1851.

(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. xvii. 1856, p. 84, and ser. 5
vol. vill. 1881, p. 333 &c.; Proc. Geol. Assoc. vol. ix. 1886, p. 503.)

1. Leperditia grandis, Schrenck.
(BLOOM. tes. a, fd.)

(Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 3.)

This Leperditia is evidently a small individual of Z. gran-
dis, as described and figured by Fr. Schmidt in the Mém.
Acad. Imp. Sci. St.-Pétersb. sér. 7, vol. xxi. 1873, p. 10,
figs. 1-Ga. According to him it is the same as FI’. Rémer’s
L. gigantea.

This right valve, figured in the drawings sent from Stock-
holm, shows distinctly at its ventral margin the two minute

404 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

pits, which Fr. Schmidt describes as perforating the valve ;
here, however, they appear to be only shallow pits.
From the lowest limestone beds of C&stergarn.

VII. Tuipsura, Jones & Holl, 1869.
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iii. p. 213.)

1. Thlipsura v-scripta, J. & H., var. discreta, Jones.
(Pl. XX4aT. figs. 9a, 95, 9c, 10.)
Thlipsura v-scripta, J. & F., var. discreta, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Goth-
land, 1887, p. 6.

This species was described and its British variety figured
in 1869 by Jones & Holl (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,
vol. ii. p. 214, pl. xv. fig. 3). See also op. cit. ser. 5,
vol. xix. p. 403.

In the Swedish variety, of which about fifty specimens
form part of the series sent to me in 1886, the front sulcus is
oblique, being not quite perpendicular, and those on the
hinder half of the valve keep slightly apart, not closing
together to form the letter V completely. There is also aslight,
curved, convex ridge within and parallel to the posterior
margin; but it is not always well developed. Dr. Krause
has figured this variety as Primitia minuta (Zeitschr. deutsch.
geol. Ges. vol. xxix. p. 38, pl. i. fig. 19). Abundant in the
shale of Frojel.

VIII. Primiria, Jones & Holl, 1865.
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvi. p. 415.)

1. Primitia levis, Jones. (Pl. XXII. figs. 12 a, 120.)
Primitia levis (parte), Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 4.

This is a smooth, subtriangular, somewhat Leperditioid
form, straight on the back, rounded at the ends, but one of
them much higher (broader) than the other. It appears to
be new. The only group to which I can refer it is that of
the smooth Primitie, such as P. matutina, semicircularis,
obsoleta, ovata, and oblonga, in pl. xiii. Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist. ser. 3, vol. xvi. p. 423 &c. It is convex mainly in the
postero-ventral region. Its contact-edges are bevelled in-
wards, except along the straight edge, which seems to be the
back and hinge-line. It would more closely resemble P. obso-
leta, J. & H., if it were shorter and less compressed anteriorly.
Edge-view (fig. 12 6) narrow-ovate.

Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 405

This may be provisionally known as P. levis. Though
the smooth Primitie pass by gradation into the suleate forms,
possibly a subgeneric term might be usefully applied to them.

So far as its outline is concerned P, devis much resembles
Leperditia tyraica, Fr. Schmidt; but its internal edges are
not those of Leperditia, nor has it the special surface-charac-
ters of that genus.

Only two specimens (from the shale of Fréjel) were among
those sent in 1886.

2. Primitia stricta, sp. nov.

(Pl. XXII. figs. 13 a, 13 6.)
Primitia levis (parte), Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 4.

More compressed than fig. 12, and with less height at the
posterior third, this unique specimen is more oblong in outline,
with parallel sides. Hdge view (fig. 136) narrow oblong,
but acute in front and rounded behind. From Fréjel, in 1886.

In shape this approximates to Primitia variolata, J. & H.
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. xvi. p. 418, pl. xiii.
fig. 6) ; but it is not so evenly rounded at the ends and has
neither the sulcus nor the punctation. It is smooth, like the
little P. matutina, J. & H. (loc. cit. fig. 7), but differs from it

in shape.

3. Primitia valida, J. & H.
Primitia valida, J. & ., Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvii. 1886,

. 409, pl. xiv. fig. 7, and vol. xix. p. 198, pl. vi. fig. 7; Silur. Ostrac.
Gothland, 1887, p. 4.

In the Swedish specimens (of which twenty-four were sent
in 1886) the reticulation of the surface is much more definite
than in the British examples. ‘There is also a distinct row
of minute denticles along the ventral edge of each valve in
many of the Swedish specimens.

From Fréjel.

4. Primitia grandis, Jones.

(Pl. XXIL figs. 14a, 148, 14¢.)
Primitia grandis, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 4.

One of the drawings sent from Stockholm shows a beauti-
ful, large, suboblong, reticulate Primitia without a sulcus. It
is near P. valida, J. & H., and, indeed, in one of the varieties
of that species the sulcus is obsolete, namely var. breviata (op.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol... 28

406 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

cit. pl. xiv. fig. 8). The ventral margin of P. grandis has a

delicate punctation, due apparently to the meshes of the

ornamental network coming against the raised marginal rim.
From Fréjel.

5. Primitia reticristata, Jones.

(Pl. XXII. figs. 15 a, 156, 15 ¢.)
Primitia reticristata, Jones, Silur, Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 5.

This is closely allied to P. cristata, J. & H. (Ann. & Mag.
Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. xvi. 1865, p. 420, pl. xiii. fig. 1). It
differs, however, somewhat in outline, being more semicircular
in its contour, and especially in having a beautifully reticulate
surface.

About twelve specimens were among those sent in 1886.

From Frojel.

6. Primitia seminulum, Jones.

(PIXE: figs. 1i-a,217 b.)
Primitia seminulum, Jones, Silur, Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 5.

This is a variety of P. seminulum, J. (Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvii. p. 413 for references, pl. xiv. fig. 14).
It is slightly modified, being rather longer than the British
specimens. ‘Three or four among the specimens sent in 1886.

From Fréjel.

IX. Primitiopsis, Jones, 1887.
Primitiopsis, Jones, Silur, Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 5.

This is like Primitia externally, except that the anterior
end has a specially smooth area, corresponding with an
internal portion, which is partitioned off from the rest of the
cavity by a cross wall.

1. Primitiopsis planifrons, Jones.

(Pl. XXII. figs. 18a, 183, 18c, 18d.)
Primitiopsis planifrons, Jones, op. cit. p. 5, woodcuts.

Suboblong, with rounded ends; bearing a faint sulcus, to-
gether with the subcentral pit, which is normal in Primitia ;
also another slight furrow is observable in the anterior dorsal
region. The convexity is greatest along the ventral region,
as is usually the case with Primitie of the group to which

Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 407

P. umbilicata, P. valida, and their allies belong; and the
ventral convexity, overhanging the margin, hides the con-
tinuous row of denticles which borders each valve. The sur-
face is reticulate except at the anterior end. The interior of
each valve has a thin cross wall in the anterior region,
dividing off about an eighth of the length of the valve from
the rest of the interior. This constitutes the generic distinc-
tion. The narrow crescentic area of surface, corresponding
to the separated portion of the interior, being destitute of
ornament and therefore smooth, gives the specific name.
There are eight or nine individuals (from the soft shale-
beds of Fréjel) among the specimens sent from Stockholm in

It is correct to take the smooth end of Primitiopsis for the
anterior, because that end has its analogue in the structure of
the recent Chlamydotheca, Saussure, although in this living
form the partition of the anterior portion is not always so com-
plete, and its outside not so distinctly differentiated from the
rest of the surface, as in our Paleeozoic specimens.

1*. Primitiopsis planifrons, var. ventrosa, Jones.

(Pl. XXII. figs. 19 a, 196, 19 c.)

Promitiopsis planifrons, var. ventrosa, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland,
1887, p. 6.

This is closely allied to the last described, but is remark-
able for the relative convexity of its ventral region, its less
height, and increased dorsal hollow, making it narrow-oblong
and subcylindrical in shape.

Only one specimen occurred among those sent in 1886,
from Frdjel.

X. Entomis, Jones, 1861.
(Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xi, 1873, p. 413.)

1. Entomis Lindstremi, Jones.

(Pl. XXIL. figs. 16 a, 16 3.)
Entomis Lindstremi, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 3.

An Entomis closely related to others already known, but
distinct from them all.

It is ovate-oblong ; rounded at the ends unequally, ellipti-
cally curved below, and nearly straight above. The sulcus
is straight and strong, a little in advance of the middle of the

valve. The hinder moiety of the valve is fully convex, steep
28*

408 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

behind, and sloping forward into the suleus; the front part is
not so much swollen and slopes down to the anterior margin.

This form is near to EL. dimidiata, Barrande (Syst. Sil.
Boh. vol. i. Suppl. p. 513, pl. xxiv. figs. 7, 8, 9), but it is
longer, more oblong, and not so convex. L, pelagica, Barr.
(ibid. figs. 1-6), is a near ally, but it is too convex and has
a tubercle. Among other allies are EH. tubervsa, Jones, and
E. depressa, Salter (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xiv.
pp. 891 and 394, pl. xv. figs. 1, 5, 6, 7, and figs. 2-3), but
the relative convexities, conditions of sulcus, and other fea-
tures distinguish them. . reniformis (Kolmodin) and HE.
Angelini, Jones (op. cit.), are far too round and globose, and
the sulcus differs also.

I may here remark that Hntomis Marstoniana (op. cit.
fig. 8) is possibly the same as Kolmodin’s /. rendformis (City.
K. Vet.-Akad. Férhandl. vol. xxxvi. 1880, p. 135, pl. xix.
fig. 2).

” Some six or eight specimens of H. Lindstrami were found
in the uppermost limestone of Linde klint (cliff or hill) and
Sandarfve kulle (top or hillock). Length nearly 4 millim.

2. Entomis inequalis, Jones.

(Pl. XXII. figs. 20 a, 20 6, 20c.)
Prinutia inequalis, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 5.

This is a peculiar and relatively large valve, having a Pri-
mitian character in its reticulate ornament and being Ento-
midian in its sulcation. This last feature is very strongly
marked, and indeed, | think, exaggerated by pressure, making
the two moieties of the valve very unequal in both size and
convexity. One is much more swollen than the other and
overhangs the ventral and part of the antero-ventral margin ;
this larger moiety extending forwards below, and thus lessen-
ing the area of the front moiety.

The sulcus reaches the ventral margin, as in Entomidella
-and Bolbozoe*, but its extent and peculiar sigmoidal curve
are most probably partly due to pressure. The hinge-line of
the valve is straight within (that is, below the dorsal exten-
sions of the two moieties of the valve) ; the front margin has
a strong dorsal angle, is boldly curved below it, and edged
with a raised rim and minute denticles. The postero-dorsal
angle has been broken away.

The specimen is unique, among those sent from Stockholm
in 1886, and, like most of these, was from Fréjel.

* See Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. December 1884, pp. 400 and 401.

Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 409

XI. AdcuminaA, Jones & Holl, 1869.
(Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iii. p. 217.)

1. Aehmina bovina, Jones. (Pl. XXII. fig. 8.)

Achmina bovina, Jones, Aun, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xix. p. 412,
pl. xii. fig. 6.

Some drawings sent from Stockholm, and of one of which
fig. 8 is a copy, show a form identical with the British species
from the Wenlock Shale, but more delicately toothed along
the free margin. It is common in the shale of Fréjel, Goth-
land, also belonging to the Wenlock series.

XII. BursuLevua *, Jones, 1887.
(Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 7.)

This is a small, bivalved, probably Ostracodal form, with
more or less triangular valves, which have one or two horn-
like projections on the ventral edge ot each valve.

1. Bursulella triangularis, Jones. (Pl. XXII. figs. 5, 6.)

Bursulella triangularis, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 7,
woodcuts.

The upper and lower edges of the valves are straight, but
the ventral edge is much shorter than the other, and a delicate
spike projects from each of its angles. The corners of each
valve are somewhat rounded and on the lower edge are
marked inside with a series of shallow pits, making a slightly
crenate contact-line. In outline this curious bivalve, which
is probably an Ostracod, looks like a little subtriangular purse
(hence the generic name), widest at the top, and ornamented
below with two neat little projections.

It occurs in the Cephalopodan Limestone of Samsugn, in
Othem, and the uppermost beds of Slite, some twenty speci-
mens having been found.

2. Bursulella semiluna, Jones.

(Pl. XXII. figs. 4a, 46, 4c.)
Bursulella semiluna, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 7.
Here the valves have a nearly semicircular ventral outline

* Bursa, a purse ; bursula, a little purse; bursulella, a very little purse.

410 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

and a straight dorsal edge, with blunt angles. On each valve
two short spikes project from the ventral edge. This is cre-
nated within with small regular pits, making a neatly serrated
junction ; the pairs of spikes, opposite one to the other, close
against each other when the valves are shut.

Seen sideways this fossil looks like a little halfmoon-shaped
equal-ended boat, standing on its convex edge, with two
pointed feet instead of a keel.

From the Rhizophyllum-beds of Lau, where it seems to be
rare.

3. Bursulella unicornis, Jones. (Pl. XXII. fig. 7.)
Bursulella unicornis, Jones, Silur. Ostrae, Gothland, 1887, p. 7.

Valve triangular, with its dorsal corners rounded and its
ventral border narrowing into a long subcylindrical spike. A
few specimens have been found in the shale of Fréjel and
the Cephalopodan Limestone of Samsugn and Slite.

Note-—My friend Professor Lindstrém has sent me for
examination several small Entomostraca which he obtained
lately from a red clay at Wisby, Gothland, belonging to the
red marl-shales at the base of Stricklandinia-marls (equiva-
lent to the Upper Llandovery) in Gothland. Among them
there is a Beyrichia Kledeni (with hypertrophied front lobe),
Polycope, sp., Leperditia, small sp., Batrdia(?), Pontocypris
Mawitt, P. Smithit, Bythocypris, spp., Cythere subquadrata (?),
and some probably undescribed species. ‘These specimens
are from the basement of the lowest known Silurian strata of

Gothland.

Jote.— Whilst this paper was in the press I received from
Herr J. Kiesow, of Dantzic, a paper on some Beyrichie
from Gothland, published in the Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Ges.
Jahrg. 1888.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
PuaTE XXI,
[ All the figures are magnified 15 diameters. ]

Fig. 1. Klaedenia apiculata, nov. a, right valve; 6, edge view; c, end
view.

Fig. 2. The same. Left valve.

Fig. 3. The same. Left valve.

Fig. 4. The same. a, left valve, with the antero-ventral lobe hyper-
trophied ; b, edge view ; ¢, end view.

Fig.
Fig.
Fug.
Fig.
Fug.
Fug.
Fig.

Fig.

Fig.
Fug.
Eg.
Fxg.

Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 411

5. The same. Right valve, somewhat damaged.

6. Beyrichia clavata, Kolmodin. Left valve.

7. The same, Right valve.

8. The same. Right valve.

9. The same. Left valve; antero-ventral lobe hypertrophied ; pos-
tero-dorsal angle broken.

10. Beyrichia Bollhiana, var. umbonata, Reuter. Left valve.

11. The same. Right valve.

12. Beyrichia tuberculata (Kléden). Old individual, damaged, the
antero-dorsal portion having been crushed.

13. Beyrichia tuberculata, var. spicata, noy., or possibly a very old
individual of B. tuberculata (Kloden), Left valve, broken.

14. Beyrichia tuberculata, var. spicata, nov. Right valve.

15. Beyrichia tuberculata, vay. foliosa, nov. Left valve.

16. The same. Right valve.

17. The same, Extreme variation; right valve.

PLATE XXII.

[All the figures are magnified 15 diameters, excepting those
marked otherwise. |

. 1. Macrocypris Vinei, J. & H. a, carapace, showing the left valve ;

b, edge view ; ¢, end view.

Fig. 2. The same. Right valve, shorter specimen.

Fig. 3. Pontocypris Mawii, J. & H. a, right valve; 6, edge view of a
valve ; c, end view of carapace.

Fig. 4. Bursulella semiluna, J. a, side view of carapace; 6, ventral edge ;
e, end view. Magnified 30 diam.

Fig. 5. Bursulella triangularis, J. Side view. Magnified 30 diam.

Fig. 6. The same. Interior of valve. Magnified 50 diam.

Fig. 7. Bursulella unicornis, J. Side view. Magnified 30 diam.

Fig. 8. Atchmina bovina, J. Side view. Magnitied 30 diam.

Fig. 9. Thlipsura v-scripta, J. & H., var. discreta, J. a, side view of
carapace, showing right valve; >, edge view.

Fig. 10. The same. Left valve.

Fig. 11. Leperditia grandis, Schrenck. a, right valve, small, nat. size ;
b, one of the marginal pits, magnified.

Fig. 12. Primitia levis, J. a, left valve of carapace; b, edge view of
carapace,

Fig. 13. Primitia stricta, J, a and b as above.

Fig. 14. Primitia grandis, J. a, carapace, showing left valve; 6, ventral
view; c, end view. Magnified 30 diam.

Fig, 15. Primitia reticristata, J, a, carapace, showing right valve; b, dor-
sal view; c, end view.

Fig. 16. Entonus Lindstremi, J. a, left valve; 6, dorsal edge. Mag-
nified 5 diam.

Fig. 17. Primitia seminulum, J. a, right valve; 6, dorsal view.

Fig. 18. Primitiopsis planifrons, J. a, left valve ; b, dorsal view ; c, edge

view of carapace; d, interior of left valve.

. 19. Primitiopsis planifrons, var. ventrosa, J. a, right valve; 6, dor-

sal edge ; c, end view of carapace.

. 20. Entomis inequalis, J. a, right valve, probably somewhat short-

ened by pressure ; 0, dorsal edge; c, front end.

412 Mr. R. Kidston on the Fructification and

LIV.—On the Fructification and Affinities of Archeopteris
hibernica, Forbes, sp. By Rozpert Kipston, F.R.S.E.,
EGS.”

Unper the name of Cyclopteris hibernica, Archeopteris
hibernica was described by Forbes in 1852+} from the Yellow
Sandstones of the south of Ireland, where, at Kiltorkan and
a few other localities, this fern is one of the most character-
istic fossils.

In 1858 t¢ Mr. W. H. Baily, in describing the fructification
of Archeopteris hibernica, Forbes, sp., said that “one of the
fertile pinnules of a specimen showed the spores were aggre-
gated into clusters or sori, and that the indusium or protecting
cover had been but little broken up. A fertile pinnule from
another specimen, however, appeared to be in a more ad-
vanced stage, losing in a great measure the aggregated
character of the sori, and showing the proteeting cases (which
were granulated) to be much disturbed.

“(ther specimens in the collection were alluded to, one of
which, with a length of 16 inches, had twelve pinnules on
each side of the rachis in full fructification without any
appearance of leaflets, the spore-cases being scattered in all
directions; another of the same length had about twenty
pinnules on each side, the lower ones being in full fructifica-
tion, which decreased gradually towards the upper portion of
the frond, the leaflets taking its place.”

At the same time Mr. Baily exhibited a diagram illus-
trating ‘ what was considered to be the base of the stem or
rhizoma, having a rounded expansion, apparently separating
into scales which continued upwards, tragments of leaflets
being attached to the stem at different intervals.”

Schimper, in 1869§, figured and described Cyclopteris
hibernica, Forbes, under the name of Palwopteris hibernica.
In describing the fruiting pinnules he says: “ These
have undergone a complete metamorphosis and are trans-
formed into groups in which all foliar expansion has entirely
disappeared, and which show a principal rachis not at all
represented in the sterile pimnules which are destitute of a
medial nerve.” He also describes the sporangia as clavate,

* Communicated by the Author, having been read before the Royal
Physical Society of Edinburgh, April 18, 1888.

+ Brit. Assoc. Report, 1852, p. 43.

{ Ibid. 1858, p. 79.

§ Traité d. paléont. végét. vol. 1. p. 475, pl. xxxvi.

Affinities of Archeopteris hibernica, Forbes. 413

costate ( soris (sporangiis?) costulatis”). He gives an
enlarged drawing of the sporangia at pl. xxxvi. fig. 4.

More recently Mr. Carruthers redescribed the fruit of
this fern *. Among other things he says :—“‘ In some
specimens in the British Museum all the lower pinne are
entirely tertile. I am satisfied that the ovate-oblong sori are
generally single, and not clustered, and are two-lipped, the
slit passing one third of the way down the sorus. ‘I'he vein
is continued as a free receptacle in the centre of the cup or
cyst, as in existing Hymenophyllee, in which it is included,
not reaching beyond the entire portion. In some specimens
the receptacle is broad or thick, indicating the presence of
something besides itself in the cup, and giving the appear-
ance that would be produced if it were covered with spo-
rangia; I cannot, however, detect any indication on the outer
surtace which might have been expected trom the individual
sporangia. ‘The compression of the specimens in the rock,
which has made the free receptacle appear like a vein on the
wall of the cup, together with the highly altered condition of
the rock in which the fossils are contained, account for the
imperfect preservation of the minute structures.

“The interpretation which I have here given of the fructi-
fication of this interesting fossil exhibits so close a resem-
blance to what we find in the living genus Hymenophyllum
that, were it not for the vegetative portions, | would without
hesitation place it in that genus.”

Crépin t, in 1874, figured and described some specimens of
Archeopteris (Paleopteris) hibernica, var. minor, from

vieux, Belgium, of which he also figures the fruit, but does
not describe it in detail.

As the generic name Paleopteris, adopted by Schimper for
this and some allied ferns, had been previously employed by
Geinitz{ for a fossil which he supposed to be a fern-stem
(but which has been discovered to be the stem of Cordattes),
Dawson §, in 1852, proposed the name Archeopteris for the
plants placed in Paleopteris, Schimper (not Geinitz). Daw-
son’s genus Archwopterts must therefore be employed for
Cyclopteris hibernica and its generic associates, as Paleopteris,

* Geol. Mag. vol. ix. no. 2, Feb. 1872.

+ “Description de quelques plantes fossiles de l’étage des psammites
du Condroz (Devonien supérieur),” Bull. Acad. roy. d. Belgique, 2° sér.
vol. xxxvili. no. 8, Aug. 1874.

t Vers. d. Steinkf. in Sachsen, p. 32; see also Grand’Eury, ‘ Flore car-
bon. du Départ. de la Loire,’ pp. 241 and 243, -

§ Foss. Plants of the Hrian (Devonian) and Upper Silurian Formations
of Canada, part ii. p. 98 (1882).

414 On Archeopteris hibernica, Forbes.

Schimper, is inadmissible, having been previously used by
Geinitz for a different group of plants.

Among the Canadian species described by Dawson the
point of chief interest to us is the figure and description of the
fruit of Archeopteris gaspiensis, a very closely allied species,
if really distinct from Archewopteris hibernica, Forbes, sp.
His description of the fruit is as follows :—“ Fertile pinne
with about twelve pinnules, each having a long midrib with
about seven pairs of crowded oblong spore-cases about 3
millim. in length, pointed or somewhat obtuse at top, straight
at the sides, and apparently dehiscent at the apex. ‘The
midrib projects some distance beyond the spore-cases.” It is
further mentioned that Archwopiterts gaspiensis ‘ differs from
A, hibernica in the arrangement and form of the spore-cases
and in its shorter pinne, with fewer and less obtuse pinnules’’*.

Since examining the specimens of Archwopteris hibernica
in the British Museum I have doubted the accuracy of the
description of the fruit of this fern as given by Schimper
and Carruthers, but refrained from expressing any opinion
till I had an opportunity of examining the specimens of
this plant in the collections of the Science and Art Museum,
Dublin, and of the Geological Survey of Ireland. I have
now examined these specimens, and feel convinced that the
description of the fruit as given by Schimper and Carruthers
is inaccurate. I have entirely failed to observe the presence
of a keel on the sporangia, as figured by Schimper, or the
occurrence of a “ slit passing one third of the way down the
sorus,’ or any of the other Hymenophyllaceous characters
mentioned by Mr. Carruthers. The sporangia (so far as my
observations have gone, and I have examined minutely the
specimens in the British Museum, as well as those in the
two collections in Dublin, the finest of which are in the col-
lection of the Geological Survey of Ireland) are narrow-oval,
sessile, or very shortly stalked, as a rule pointed at both
extremities, though occasionally blunt; they are usually
developed singly, though occasionally in pairs, and are appa-
rently produced on the upperside of the rachis-like vein of
the very much metamorphosed pinnules, which in this case
almost assume the structure of pinne, though their being
only modified pinnules is proved by their position and by
the occasional occurrence of a few sporangia on the margin of
some of the foliage-pinnules, which, in the few such cases
observed, had undergone but little reduction in the limb of
the pinnule. A similar production of sporangia on the

* Dawson, J. c. p. 99.

Mr. G. A. Bouleng ~~» “'atrachians from Brazil. 415

incompletely modified foliage-pinnules is not uncommon in
Osmunda regalis. The fruiting-pinnules end in several
simple or divided thread-like filaments. The fruit appears
to consist of exannulate Marattiaceous sporangia.

Another interesting point was observed on some of the
specimens in the collection of the Geological Survey of
Ireland. This had evidently been noticed by Mr. Baily,
though its importance was not fully appreciated, and is referred
to by him as a rounded expansion of the base of the stem, which
apparently separated into scales. Mr. Carruthers, evidently
reterring to the same structure, says ‘‘ The stipes were
thick, of considerable length, and clothed with large scales,
which formed a dense covering at the enlarged base” *.

The structures here alluded to are two large stipules, one
on each side of the base of the rachis, and on some of the
specimens in the collection of the Geological Survey of
Ireland they are admirably shown. What has given rise to
the statement that the base of the stipe was “ clothed with
large scales ” is evidently the remains of large pinnules which
are situated on the main rachis between the pinne, and are
continued to almost the extreme basal termination of the
rachis. Such pinnules, obliquely imbedded in the matrix
and broken over, have been mistaken for scales. So far as
my observations have gone, the rachis is entirely destitute of
membranous scales.

The preseuce of the stipules at the base of the rachis of
Archeopteris hibernica, altogether independently of the evi-
dence afforded by the fruit, points strongly to its affinities
being with the Marattiaceze ; and when to this is added the
Marattiaceous structure of the fruit itself, there does not
remain the slightest doubt in my mind that the true position
ot Archeopteris hibernica is in the Marattiacee.

In conclusion, I have to express my thanks to Dr. A.
Geikie and Prof. Ball for all the facilities they kindly gave
me for examining the specimens in the respective collections
of the Geological Survey of Ireland and in the Science and
Art Museum, Dublin.

LV.—A List of Batrachians from the Province Santa
Catharina, Brazil. By G. A. BOULENGER.

Two rather extensive collections of Frogs, formed in the
Sierra do Catharina by Hr. Michaélis, which I have recently

* Carruthers, /. c.

416 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on Batrachians from Brazil.

examined, afford information as to the little-known Batra-
chian fauna of the Province Santa Catharina. The principal
interest resides in the comparison with the fauna of the con-
tiguous province of Rio Grande do Sul, now fairly known,
thanks to the exertions of Hensel, von Ihering, and Bischoff.
It will be seen from the following list that the range of
several forms recently discovered in the latter province ex-
tends to Santa Catharina.

1. Engystoma ovale, var. bicolor, Val.

2. Engystoma leucostictum, sp. n.

Snout obtuse, feebly projecting, not twice as long as the
diameter of the eye. Fore limb much longer than its dis-
tance from the end of the snout. The tibio-tarsal articulation
reaches the shoulder, the tarso-metatarsal the eye. ‘Toes
obtuse, with a rudiment of web; a single, very small,
roundish, metatarsal tubercle. Dark brown above, with
scattered, minute, white dots ; limbs marbled with pink above ;
a fine interrupted white line along the hinder side of the
thighs ; lower surfaces white, spotted and marbled with dark
brown.

From snout to vent 25 millim.

A single female specimen.

3. Pseudis mantidactyla, Cope.
4. Hlosia nasus, Licht.
5. Hylodes Gollmeri, Ptrs. (Guenthert, Stdr.).
6. Ceratophrys Botei, Wied.
7. Paludicola Olfersti, Mart.
8. Paludicola biligonigera, Cope.
9. Leptodactylus Gaudichaudii, D. & B.
10. Eupemphiz nana, Blgr.
11. Bufo arenarum, Hens.
12. Hyla faber, Wied.
13. Hyla marginata, Bley.
14, Hyla pulchella, D. & B.

Mr. A. G. Butler on Butterflies from Khandesh, 417
15. Hyla Bischoffit, Blgr.
16. Hyla bivittata, Blgr.
17. Hyla nasica, Cope.
18. Hyla senicula, Burm.
19. Hyla catharine, sp. n.

Tongue circular, very slightly nicked and free behind.
Vomerine teeth in two transverse groups close together be-
tween the rather large choane. Head much depressed, as
long as broad; snout rounded, as long as the diameter of the
orbit; canthus rostralis rather indistinct, curved; loreal
region concave ; interorbital space as broad as the upper eye-
lid ; tympanum very distinct, half the diameter of the eye.
An indistinct rudiment of web between the outer fingers; no
projecting rudiment of pollex ; toes two thirds webbed; disks
smaller than the tympanum; subarticular tubercles mode-
rate; no tarsal fold. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches
between the eye and the tip of the snout. Upper surfaces
slightly warty; belly and lower surface of thighs granulate ;
no fold across the chest. Greyish or brown above, with
symmetrical darker bands and marblings; a large, triangular,
dark spot between the eyes, light-edged anteriorly; a A -
shaped band on the sacral region; limbs with dark cross
bands ; groin white (in spirit), with black marblings; con-
cealed surfaces of hind limbs barred black and white ; lower
surfaces whitish, with small blackish spots.

From snout to vent 42 millim.

T'wo female specimens.

20. Hyla aurantiaca, Daud.
21. Phyllomedusa Iheringii, Blev.

LVI.—On Butterflies of the Genus Teracolus obtained by
Mr. H. G. Palliser at Khandesh in the Winter of 1886-7.
By ArtHur G. Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

Amonest the butterflies collected by Mr. Palliser in the
Khandesh district of Bombay, the species of Yeracolus are
the most interesting ; and as this gentleman has very gene-
rously presented such as we required, including a unique

418 Mr. A. G. Butler on Butterflies from Khandesh.

pair of a new species, to the National Collection, I think I
cannot do less than say a few words about them.

A series of 7. dynamene included one or two examples of
the form 7. carntfer, which approaches 7’. calais of Arabia
and Africa.

A series of 7’. ochreipennis (= T. rorus) were in the collec-
tion; they had been identified, I believe by my old friend
M. De Nicéville, as 7. puellaris.

T. fulvia of Wallace and a beautiful new species were both
named 7. fausta! I herewith append a description of the
latter :—

Teracolus Pallisert, sp. n.

6. About the size of 7. fausta: primaries above with the
pattern and coloration of 7. solaris of Deesa; secondaries
with the marginal spots even smaller than in T. fausta;
head, collar, and tegule of an unusual rosy colour: under
surface of a pale buffy ochreous tint; the apical area of pri-
maries and the whole of secondaries (but especially the outer
borders of the wings) washed with rose-colour ; the ordinary
markings arranged much as in 7’. fulvia, but the discocellular
ocelloid spots narrower and smaller and the discal series
smaller and redder than in that species. LExpanse ef wings
45 millim.

?. Interno-median area of primaries and basal two thirds
of secondaries milk-white, remainder of these wings suffused
with pale salmon-colour ; the black apical area of the pri-
maries nearly as in the female of 7. /austa or the male of
T. fulvia, but the discocellular spot smaller even than in its
own male; base of the wings sprinkled with grey scales as
far as the middle of the cell; secondaries with the marginal
spots rather smaller than in 7’, fausta 9; head, collar, and
tegule pink: under surface cream-coloured, the external bor-
ders dull pale pink; the discocellular spots small and oval;
the discal spots as in the male of 7. fulvia, but of a pinky
brown or soft chocolate tint. Expanse of wings 43 millim.

West of Dhulia, Khandesh ; December 1886.

The female of J. fulvia, which is a larger and more
coarsely coloured species, is pure white, with very heavy
black borders, as in the allied TZ. tripunctatus ; it was in Mr.
Palliser’s collection, but only represented by one damaged
example; the Museum does not at present possess it; but I
hope this may not long be the case.

The Museum series of the 7. fausta group is especially
rich, and therefore it is the more satisfactory to be able to add
two species, 7. fulvia and T’, Palliser? to our collection.

My. E. A. Smith on Haliotis. 419

Of 7. fausta (typical) we possess six examples from the
Turco-Persian frontier, three from Kandahar, and one of
doubtful locality; the ‘ Zeller” collection added seven
examples, in all of which the discocellular spot of primaries
is replaced by a minute pale-centred ring, and the pattern of
the underside is extremely pale; these specimens were
received from Beirfit and Bagdad, and may either represent
a distinct local type or a seasonal form. Of J’. faustina,
owing to the generosity of Major Yerbury, we possess six
examples ; of 7’. orientalis the male type only; of Z. vit
eight specimens sent to us by Major Yerbury from Aden; of
T. solaris four males, for three of which we were indebted to
Col. Swinhoe; of ZY. fulvia, previously unrepresented in our
series, we now have the male; of 7. trinotatus we have three
males and a female; and, lastly, we now have a pair of 7.
Palliser’. Every species of this group hitherto described is
therefore represented.

Of the carmine-tipped group Mr. Palliser obtained two
species, which he tells me are indiscriminately called 7.
danae in Bombay: one of these, which was represented only
by a single male, is apparently a dwarfed example of that
species; the other, of which there was a good series, is 7. san-
guinalis, and only differs from the Ceylonese types in being
slightly larger.

Of the 7’. etrida group there were examples of JT. bimbura
and 7. pernotatus, the latter less heavily bordered than usual;
_and of the 7. evanthe group, T. pseudevanthe and T. titea.

LVII.—Notice of an Abnormal Growth in a Species of
Haliotis. By Epaar A. SMITH.

Tue British Museum has recently acquired a specimen of
Haliotis which is remarkable for having two rows of perfora-
tions in the shell instead of one. So far as I can ascertain
this is the only instance recorded of such an abnormality.
The shell in question is an example of the large Japanese
species H. gigantea, and measures 54 inches in length and
nearly 44 in width. It is well known that the perforations
in the shells of Haliotis are caused by a slit in the mantle of
the animal at the particular part immediately beneath them.
Instead of perfecting the contour of the shell, in the course of
growth an interruption or sinus in the margin is produced,

420 Mr. E. A. Smith on Haliotis.

which subsequently is formed into a complete raised per-
foration. The number of perforations which remain open
indicates the extent of the mantle-slit, but no¢ the number of
the tentacular filaments along the margins.

In this example four of the holes of the outer or normal
series are open, whilst of the inner series, which runs
parallel with the other at a distance at the widest part of a
little more than an inch, all are closed or filled up. From
this I conjecture that the edge of the mantle at this particular
point was accidentally notched in early life (or perhaps it may
have been a peculiarity from birth) and that the notch was
not deep.

The perforations in the shells of this genus are supposed to
be for conveying water to the branchiz and also, to some
extent, for the extrusion of fxcal matter. This theory in all
probability is correct, as the gills and anal opening are situated
immediately beneath, and one fails to see what other purpose
they can serve. There being neither gills nor anal opening
under the abnormal series of holes, they had no special func-
tion to perform, and consequently the animal appears to have
filled them up with nacre from within as soon as possible, so
that not even the last-completed one is left unclosed.

The supposed abnormal slit or peculiarity in the mantle
must have been present when the creature was very young,
for the series of holes is noticeable to within an inch of the
apex, where the shell is so eroded that traces of both this and
the outer series become obliterated. The growth of this
abnormal series seems to have been more slowly effected than
that of the outer row, since, in the same period, which can be
judged of by the lines of growth, twelve were produced in the
latter to eight in the former.

In the figures of the European Haliotis tuberculata which
appear in the works of Cuvier * and Fischer ¢ it will be
observed that a tentacle is protruded through each of the last
six or seven perforations. Cuvier, however, only describes
‘trois ou quatre filets”’ on the edges of the mantle-slit, and
therefore it is all the more remarkable that in the figure
referred to seven are represented. In another figure on the
same plate (figure 11) three only are shown (the actual
number which exists), and these are drawn in the relative
positions which they seem invariably to occupy.

I have carefully examined three specimens of H. tubercu-
lata and examples of five other species from various parts of

* Anat. Mollusques, pl. i. fig. 9.
+ Man. Conchy)l. fig. 596 (from an unpublished cut by Deshayes).

On Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. 421

the world, and find in every instance only three tentacles
present, and always similarly located. One is at the poste-
rior end of the slit at the junction of the two margins just
over the anus, and I believe would be protruded from the last
open perforation, or, in other words, that most remote from
the lip of the shell. The second is situated well forward on
the left margin of the slit, and doubtless would, when the
animal was living, occupy the last-completed opening. ‘The
third is on the right margin somewhat further back, and,
judging by the distance which separates it from the preceding
tentacle, probably would be extruded through the second
perforation.

Philippi, in his ‘ Handbuch der Conchyliologie’ (p. 215),
states that the animal thrusts through the holes the tentacular
prolongations of the left side of the foot. This, however, is
an impossibility, as the examination of any species at once
shows, and possibly was merely a conclusion derived from
the appearance of Cuvier’s or some other figure.

LVIII.—Professor Blake and Shell-growth in Cephalopoda.
By F. A. Barner, B.A.

In the ‘ Annals’ for April (p. 298) a paper on shell-growth
in Cephalopoda was published, in which I described certain
facts that appeared inconsistent with the views of Dr. Riefstahl
and others. From facts first published by Drs. Riefstahl
and Appelléf, but verified and extended by my own observa-
tions, I ventured to draw a few conclusions and to suggest an
explanation which was avowedly theoretical. Prof. Blake
(‘ Annals,’ May, p. 376) has been good enough to criticize
my paper without delay. Unfortunately misconception on all
sides necessitates a reply. His remarks dealing with ques-
tions of priority and trustworthiness must be kept distinct
from those dealing with facts and the conclusions based
thereon. I first reply to the former ; for if a man is proved
ignorant of previously published results and guilty of substi-
tuting fancy for fact, his credit as a scientific worker is

destroyed.

There is no doubt that readers of Prof. Blake’s article
understood him to mean that, so far as facts were concerned, I
had said nothing new. ‘This they inferred from such sentences
as ‘Nor do I find that these writers have anything definite to

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 29

422 Mr. F. A. Bather on Prof. Blake and

add,” and from the last paragraph but one:—“ Although
therefore a new student of the Cephalopoda is to be weleomed
. . . it would be better that such a one should take up the
story where others have left it than go over the old ground
with preconceived theories and less careful observations.
Nothing, in fact, in the present communication is new; though
it may be little known, it was all in print six years ago.

“T am not at all sure, however, that the suggestion &c.”

In consequence of these sentences I wrote to Prof. Blake and
asked for references to any papers in which the facts brought
forward by Riefstahl and myself had been described. He
replied with promptness, and kindly permits me to make use of
his letter. He writes, “ Nor do I say that what you have said
was all in print six years ago, but what J said.” We must
therefore presume that Prof. Blake admits the originality of
my observations, despite the contrary impression produced by
his paper.

What Prof. Blake does say is that the description of the
structure of the Nautilus-shell contained in his Monograph is
opposed to some of my conclusions, of which description, he
adds, I ‘seem to be ignorant.” Those who know his admi-
rable work will understand the damaging nature of this
innuendo. Reply is of course impossible; but, as I gather
from Prof. Blake’s letter that he infers my ignorance of his
work from the fact that I do not refer to it in what he is
pleased to call my “ Bibliography,” I may point out that a
list of ‘ Papers and Works referred to” in the course of an
article need not be a bibliography. Clearly mine was not: I
mentioned neither the great work of Barrande, nor the articles
in ‘ Science Gossip’ by Mr. H. E. Quilter, nor Prof. Seeley’s
suggestive paper in Quart. Journ. Sci. (1864, p. 760), nor—
but I might fill pages with references to papers on this sub-
ject, with which Prof. Blake must be better acquainted than
I am, but to which he has nowhere alluded.

Ignorance of Prof. Blake’s writings, though it might
handicap, could not disqualify my work. More serious is
his constant uncertainty as to whether what I say is “ from
autopsy or mental conception.” Much as I regret this, I can
but state that when I refer to definite specimens, or when I
give “figures drawn to nature,” I hope for some credence ;
when, on the contrary, I propose an explanation and invariably
speak of it as “a theory” or “a view,” I do not mean to
assert it as a fact.

I pass with relief to Prof. Blake’s discussion of facts and
arguments ; and here I am glad to find so much agreement.

Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. 423

So far as Sepia is concerned, Prof. Blake tacitly admits not
only the originality but the correctness of the observations
made by Riefstahl and myself. Where I differ from Rief-
stahl as to the facts, and in the inferences based on those
facts with regard to Sepia, he also gives me his support.
This support is valuable, for Prof. Blake knew all that we
have discovered about the hard parts six years ago. All
-students will regret that his observations were never pub-
lished. Prof. Blake apparently accepts the view that successive
chitinous membranes are given off by the body-surface and
subsequently calcified (a view which I claimed to defend rather
than originate), and he joins me in ascribing to this process
the formation of nacreous layer and septum. ‘This view
differs from that advocated in Blake’s Brit. Foss. Ceph.
p- 19, lines 23-27; it gives me pleasure to suppose that
Prof. Blake’s change of opinion is partly due to my new
facts and arguments.

Prof. Blake denies “ thatin a Nautilus the earlier septa are
approximate, the middle ones far apart, and the later ones
approximate again.” It is hard to see how this meaning can be
extracted from my sentence, viz. ‘ In the Nautiloidea the septa
are still [7. e. at the present day] far apart, but approach in
old age”’; and I have repeatedly verified the remarks on
p- 80 of his Monograph. Although he there says nothing as
to the relations of the septa in the young uncompleted shell,
he need not suppose that I thought his observations “ too
partial to be of value”; there was simply no occasion to
allude to them.

I proceeded to say that the Ammonoidea soon differed from
the forms with approximate septa which Hyatt, Foord, and
others regard as archaic :—‘‘ So early as the Goniatites the
septa are far apart in proportion to the diameter of the whorl.”
Prof. Blake (who seems to place all Goniatites in one genus)
reminds me that G. sagittarius of the Devonian has very
close-set septa, and asks if I can then maintain my state-
ment. Certainly! I did not say “in al/ Goniatites” or even
“in most Goniatites.”’ ‘The septa in one species may be ever
so crowded ; this does not affect the septation in other species,
in other genera, in other subfamilies. Prof. Blake cannot be
guilty of so obvious a fallacy in logic; he merely misunder-
stood the statement.

Finally, Prof. Blake approves the suggestion to divide the
Cephalopoda into three orders, dropping the old terms 'Tetra-
branchiata and Dibranchiata.

These orders are:—(i.) NAUTILOIDEA, Cephalopodain which
the protoconch is not preserved, although coiling takes place:

29*

424 Mr. F. A. Bather on Prof. Blake and

(ii.) AMMONOIDEA, Cephalopoda in which the protoconch is
preserved by shell-coiling and comes to be affected thereby :
(iii.) CoLrompEA, Cephalopoda in which the protoconch is
typically preserved by an external sheath deposited by the
mantle; the shell comes to be enveloped by the mantle, and
may partly, even wholly, disappear. ‘The name Coleoidea
(koAeds, sheath) is congruous with the other two already
in use.

The main points, then, have the very welcome support of
Prof. Blake ; there are, however, two which he has severely
criticized :—(i.) the suggestion that the membranes of the
septa are typically continuous with those of the shell-wall ;
(ii.) the theoretical assumption that the lamellee of Sepia are
homologous with the septa of a Belemnite-phragmocone.

(i.) A supposition on which no argument is based may well
be described as “ imaginary.” But Prof. Blake’s manner of
controverting the hypothesis is open to much objection. He
writes (‘ Annals,’ p. 377), “if Mr. Bather had availed himself
of my observations of the shell of Nautilus... . he could
not have written as he does.” Then follow two paragraphs
which distinctly profess to be an abstract of p. 17 et seq. of
Prof. Blake’s Monograph. Whether the statements of Prof.
Blake in the ‘ Annals’ are in accordance with fact I do not
for the moment inquire ; it is enough to show that they do
not harmonize with the statements of Prof. Blake in the
Monograph. Prof. Blake (‘Annals’) states that the out-
cropping edges of the fine laminz are 20,000 to the inch:
this statement is not in the Monograph; on the contrary,
from pl. i. fig. 8 of that work it appears that Prof. Blake’s
“ outcropping edges” are 4000 to the inch, 2800 in fig. 7,
while in the earlier chambers they can be ‘ seen under a low
power,” and are drawn in pl. ii. fig. 5 at about 450 to the inch.
The slight curvature of the shell cannot explain the discre-
pancy. .Next, Prof. Blake (‘Annals’) states that the obliquity
of these lamine ‘is very slight, so that in tracing them from
their commencement inside to their termination against the
outer layer of the shell, they pass more than one septum”:
this statement is not in the Monograph, nor can it be inferred
from the figures; on the contrary, in pl. 1. fig. 1 oblique lines
are seen to pass from the inside to the outside within the space
between two septa. Lastly, Prof. Blake (‘ Annals’) states
that the shell is composed of three layers, and that “ the third
layer is a thin amorphous substance covering the whole of the
interior of the shell... In the later portion of the shell...
it is seen between the septum and the shell, completely sepa-

Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. 425

rating the two structures”: this statement is not in the
Monograph ; on the contrary, there will be found on p. 19
this description :—‘ Besides these two layers there is a third,
lining the interior of the shell. This is of very small thick-
ness, and consists of similar laminz to the nacreous layer,
&e.” The word “amorphous” is usually taken to mean
“ without structure.”

Prof. Blake’s descriptions are clearly inconsistent with one
another. He did not suppose that I had made observations
for myself. J have done so. And I am bound to add that
both of his descriptions are inconsistent with the facts. We
must suppose that his statements of this year are intended to
supersede those of 1882: let us consider them. He says,
“The outcropping edges of” the fine lamin are “ about
20,000 to the inch.” He says of these lamina, “ their
obliquity is very slight, so that . . . they pass more than
one septum.” It is seen by measuring the distance from
suture to suture in a Nautilus-shell that, to fulfil the latter
condition, each lamina must be from 1 to 3 inches long. It
is therefore obvious that, to fulfil the former condition, there
must be from 20,000 to 60,000 such laminee in the thickness
of the nacreous layer. And yet, as Prof. Blake correctly says,
“ about 1000 fine laminz may be counted in its thickness.”

Prof. Blake’s statement, on which he rests much of his
subsequent argument, that iridescence is here caused by dif-
fraction of light due to outcropping edges of laminz (7. e.
diffraction by a reflexion-grating), 1s based presumably on
the theory of Brewster ; reference to the original paper (Phil.
Trans. 1814, p. 397) will show that this, though the ordinary
reading of it, 1s both incorrect and incomplete. In his Mono-
graph Prof. Blake brushes aside the contrary conclusions of
Dr. W. B. Carpenter without a reference to the elaborate
arguments of that most accurate observer (see Brit. Assoc.
Rep. 1844, p. 11). I do not here commit myself to any view,
but examination of sections and shell-surfaces has con-
vinced me that the cause to which Prof. Blake ascribes the
observed phenomena is absolutely insufficient. For example,
in the most iridescent part of the shell the lines of outcrop are
furthest apart, and iridescent surfaces are seen between them.
To maintain his assertion Prof. Blake is compelled to say
that the septa are not iridescent. Nautilus-shells are not
rare; but 1 have never yet seen one that confirms this last
statement,

Let us now consider “the third layer.” This was not
described as amorphous by Hyatt (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool.
ili, p. 105, 1872) or by Blake (Brit. Foss. Ceph. p. 19, 1882).

426 On Shell-growth in Cephalopoda.

The latter, it is true, said: ‘In the acute angles made by the
junction of the septa with the circumference of the shell is
another deposit, less transparent than the nacreous layer, but
showing very little structure.” It seems as though Prof.
Blake were now confusing this with the “ third layer.” But
his Monograph distinctly leads one to understand that this .
deposit does not pass between the septum and the shell. He
mentions also “a loose amorphous deposit” lining each sep-
tum on either side, apparently continuous with that filling the
angles. The fact is that all these deposits are of the same
essential structure as the nacreous layer and septa. The
constituent membranes are less compressed in the angles, but
they become compressed and pass between the septum and
the previously formed portion of shell-wall. They are, how-
ever, united with the septal and shell membranes on either
side by transverse chitinous connexions; these appear to be
the walls of what Prof. Blake calls “ lacune”; they pass
right into the nacreous layer and into the septum. There is
therefore organic connexion between the septum and shell-
wall in Nautilus, just as Riefstahl first described in Sepia. I
confess that in my explanation (‘ Annals,’ p.306) I expressed
myself too definitely ; the credit of pointing this out is due
to Prof. Blake, but it will be understood that there was
nothing in his previous description to conflict with my idea,
and that his present statements are too incorrect to influence
the same. ‘The following alteration of my previous paper
(cb. p. 806) is based on my own observations; the altered
words are in italics :—“ On the surface of the cells that
coat the visceral hump a layer of chitin * is, by concrescence
of their distal portions, continually formed, and from it
the membranes are, as it were, exfoliated. Secretion begins
in the anterior region of the shell-wall, and proceeds back-
wards to the suture, thence centripetally over the septum
to the posterior margin of the septal neck. The chitin of
the septum is essentially one with the chitin of the shell-
wall. Probably before, but possibly in consequence of, cal-
eification t this chitin splits into membranes (vide supra).
Lime is deposited as arragonite upon and between these mem-
branes soon after their secretion ; nacre is produced by this
more purely physical process, not by direct secretion.” I hope
that this theoretical explanation will satisfy Prof. Blake, and
I must thank him for affording me an opportunity of making
the correction.

* Chitin, more correctly conchiolin (see footnote, p. 303).
T See Osborn, Stud. Biol. Lab. Johns Hopkins Univ. ii. p. 427 (1883),

Mr. G. E. Dobson on two new Indian Soricide, 427

(1.) Some of my arguments depend, as Prof. Blake points
out, on the homology of the lamelle in the pad of Sepia with
the septa in the Belemnite-phragmocone. ‘This homology is

‘doubted by Prof. Blake, who now suggests that the lamelle
of the pad are homologous with the calcified membranes of
the nacreous layer in the shell-wall of Nautilus. His argu-
ments are three. He claims first that his observations on
shell-structure do not countenance my view: my readers will
decide whether Prof. Blake’s description is valid evidence one
way or the other. He states secondly that the lamelle of
Sepia ‘ have no siphuncle, and they are not even perforated :”
now each later-formed lamella is like anelliptical figure with the
posterior part cut away by another broader ellipse; the earlier
lamellee are of more circular outline, but are similarly incised ;
if this incision represents the siphuncular space, then from this
form to the form of the septa in Belosepia is a mere step; even
in the Belemnite the siphuncle is so external as hardly to be
surrounded by the septum. Lastly, he states that there is no
trace of a “cap” or of a protoconch in Sepia: the explana-
tion of this was given by Prof. Lankester in his ‘ Observa-
tions on the Development of Cephalopoda” (Q. J. M.S. xv.
p- 87) in 1875, and to the arguments of that authority no
opposition has hitherto been offered.

Lhe view taken by me as to the homologies of the Sepion
was first put forward by Voltz (Mém. Soc. Hist. Nat. de
Strassbourg, i. p. 1) in 1830; I am not aware that his argu-
ments have ever been refuted ; the view is adopted by Prof.
Gegenbaur in his well-known text-book; it has been con-
firmed by recent observations, and, though I arrived at it
independently from a study of the facts, I had no wish to
retell an old tale.

I accept with gratitude the support and welcome of Prof.
Blake, and only regret that his article should necessitate a reply
so full of controversy. For this L apologize to the readers of
the ‘ Annals,’ but would remind them of the Rabbinical
proverb, “ By the contention of students science is advanced.”

LIX.—Descriptions of two new Species of Indian Soricidee.
By G. E. Doxnson, M.A., F.R.S.

As Mr. W. T. Blanford is about to print his work on the
mammals of British India, and is anxious to include every
known species from that region, he has requested me

428 Mr. G. E. Dobson on two new Indian Soricide.

to publish diagnoses of the following species, of which full
descriptions are to be found in the manuscript of the still
unpublished part iii. of my ‘ Monograph of the Insectivora.’

The following two species of Crocidura belong to the so-
called subgenus Pachyura, having the dental formula

ne. 3—3, pm. 8—3, m. 83—3 __
ae =30 teeth.

Crocidura leucogenys, sp. 1.

Somewhat larger than C. aranea. The ears are short and
clothed with a few short whitish hairs only ; the tail is thick
and fusiform, and clothed as in C. murina, numerous long,
fine grey hairs arising out of the shorter fur; the feet com-
pared with the size of the body are small and slender, thinly
clothed with short greyish-brown hairs; a very large lateral
gland, like that in C. murina, is found in the usual position.

The fur is short throughout ; above light cinnamon-brown
with a reddish tinge intermixed with grey, the basal half of
the hairs bluish ; the sides of the head between the angles of
the mouth and the ears, the chin, and part of the chest are
dirty white, the remainder of the ventral surface greyish; the
upper surface and sides of the tail are brown, the lower sur-
face grey.

The skull and teeth closely resemble those of C. murina on
a much reduced scale ; they also resemble those of C. Stolicz-
kana, Anderson; but skulls of quite immature specimens of
the latter species, although much smaller, have longer upper
tooth-rows.

Length (of an adult male preserved in alcohol) : head and
body 75 millim., tail 47, ear 8, elbow to end of middle digit
(without claw) 17, manus 7, pes 12; skull, occipital crest to
front edge of premaxillary bone 19, greatest width of skull
9, length of upper tooth-row 7, length of lower tooth-row 8,
length of mandible from condyle to tip of anterior tooth 124.

Hab. India (Ajmir).

Type an adult male collected by Sir O. B. St. John.

Crocidura Dayt, sp. un.

Smaller than C. rubicunda, but with a longer tail and
nearly as large a foot. Fur and integument dark brown
throughout, the ventral surface slightly paler, the basal three
fourths of the fur on both surfaces dark bluish grey Tail
long and clothed with very short hairs; m the single speci-

On the Fishes of the Yangtsze- Kiang. 429

men there are scarcely any long fine hairs to be seen; feet
slender and similarly thinly clothed. No trace of a lateral
gland.

The skull differs conspicuously from that of C. rubicunda
in its smaller size. ‘The teeth differ in the shape of the first
upper incisor as well as in the large size of the penultimate
premolar. The first upper incisor has a large basal process
provided with an internal basal cusp, the anterior principal
cusp of this tooth is short and does not equal that of the
second incisor in vertical extent ; the third incisor is smaller
and shorter than the anterior maxillary tooth; the small
penultimate premolar is much larger than usual in the genus,
being about three fourths the size of the third incisor in cross
section at the base, and its cusp slightly exceeds in vertical
extent the anterior basal cusp of the last premolar; the ante-
rior mandibular tooth has two notches.

Length (of a skin): head and body 74 millim., tail 60,
pes 154; skull, occipital crest to front edge of premaxillary
bone 174, greatest width of skull 9, length of upper tooth-
row 9, length of lower tooth-row 83, length of mandible from
condyle to tip of anterior tooth 12.

Hab. Madras Presidency, India (exact locality unknown).

Collected and presented to the British Museum (Natural
History) by Dep. Surgeon-General I’. Day, C.L.E.

LX.— Contribution to our Knowledge of the Fishes of the
Yangtsze-Kiang. By Dr. A. GUNTHER, Keeper of the
Zoological Department, British Museum.

Since I had the pleasure of reporting on a collection of
Reptiles* made by Mr. A. E. Pratt at Kiu-Kiang, on the Yang-
tsze River, he has proceeded further inland, to Ichang, a distance
of 1000 miles from the mouth of the river. He was fortunate
enough to obtain there a specimen of the porpoise, the exist-
ence of which had been mentioned by several travellers
(Blakiston, A. J. Little), and of which I especially desired

* See anté, p. 165. I regret not to be able to make use of the notes on
Chinese fishes in ‘ La Pisciculture et la Péche en Chine par P. Dabry de
Thiersant,’ as the figures as well as the accompanying notes are the work
of persons not conversant with the rudiments of descriptive ichthyology,
and as likely to lead to misconceptions as to assist in the determination
of the species.

430 Dr. A. Giinther on the

him to procure a specimen. This porpoise is not what, from
the great distance from the sea, I expected it to be, but proves
to be identical with, or closely allied to, Delphinus (Neomeris)
melas of Schlegel. I still consider it probable that a species
of Platanista may yet be found to inhabit the Yangtsze-Kiang,
a river which would seem to be well adapted for the existence
of this type of freshwater Cetacean.

The fishes sent by Mr. Pratt in the same consignment
belong to the following species :—

CHONDROSTEI: Aczpenser, sp. (two very young examples
differing from the species hitherto known) ; Psephurus gla-
dius, Martens (young).

ACANTHOPTERYGII: Eleotris wantht, sp. n.; Ophiocephalus
argus, Cant. ; Polyacanthus opercularis, L.

SILURIDE: Stlurus asotus, L.; Macrones longirostris*,
Gthr.; Macrones crassilabris, Gthr.; Macrones teniatus,
Gthr. ; Macrones Vachellit, Rich. (A. 27) ; Macrones macro-
pterus, Blkr.

CYPRINIDE: Carassius auratus, L.; (Crossochilus montt-
cola, sp. n.); Pseudogobio sinensis, Kner; Pseudogobio pro-
ductus, Ptrs.; Pseudogobio maculatus, sp. n.; Rhinogobio
cylindricus, sp. n.; Pseudorasbora parva, Schleg.; Xeno-
cypris argentea, Gthr.; Ctenopharyngodon idellus, C. V.
(specimens 2 feet long) ; Rhodeus sinensis, Gthr. ; Ochetobius
elongatus, Kner; Squaliobarbus curriculus, Rich. ; Hypoph-
thalmichthys molitrix, C. V.3; Chanodichthys pekinensis,
Basil.; Culter clisheformis, Blkr.; Hemiculter leucisculus,
Kner; Luciobrama typus, Blkr.; Homaloptera jfimbriata,
gp. n.

CopitipIna: Misgurnus anguillicaudatus, Cant.; Misgurnus
mizolepis, sp. n.; Nemachilus xanthi, sp. n.

I subjoin some notes, chiefly descriptive of the new species.

Eleotris xantht.
D6 pA di, gas lat 3:

Preoperculum without spine. ‘Twelve series of scales
between the origin of the second dorsal fin and the anal.
The scales on the neck, cheek, and opercles are small and
do not extend on to the interorbital space. Scales finely
ciliated. The height of the body is one fourth of the total
length (without caudal), the length of the head two sevenths.

* This is not a Japanese species, as I was incorrectly informed when I
described it.

Fishes of the Yangtsze-Kiangq. 431

Kye rather small, shorter than the snout, one fifth of the
length of the head, and exceeding the width of the interorbital
space. Head rather compressed and high behind, with broad
snout, and with the lower jaw prominent. The maxillary
extends to the vertical from the front margin of the orbit.
Gill-membranes attached to the median line of the isthmus.
Vertical fins lower than the body ; caudal fin rounded, equal
in length to the pectorals, which are three fifths of the length
of the head. Light-coloured, with broad, indistinct, darker
cross bands on the sides. Dorsal and caudal fins indistinctly
spotted with brown; no spot at the base of the pectoral fin.

This species, of which there is only one specimen in the
collection, 24 inches long, is allied to Eleotris potamophila,
but readily distinguished from it by its narrow, scaleless,
interorbital space. I do not know of any other species of
this genus extending equally high up in fresh water.

Crossochilus monticola.
Dit. Als. Thy lat; 42... vs transyv.-0/7:

Lips not fringed, the lower with a firm, sharp, horny cover ;
four barbels, of which the lower are nearly as long as the
eye and the upper minute. The height of the body is two
sevenths and the length of the head two ninths of the total
length (without caudal). Hye of moderate size, two ninths
of the length of the head, two thirds of that of the snout,
and rather more than half the width of the interorbital
space, which is convex. Snout obtuse in front, with pits in
which probably horny tubercles are secreted during the
breeding-season. Mouth transverse, inferior. The origin of
the dorsal fin occupies nearly the middle between the end of
the snout and the root of the caudal; root of the ventral fin
opposite to the fourth, fifth, and sixth dorsal rays; pectoral
fin a little shorter than the head, reaching nearly to the origin
of the dorsal fin. Four longitudinal series of scales between
the lateral line and the root of the ventral fin. Caudal fin
deeply cleft, as long as the head. Coloration uniform.

A single’ specimen, 7 inches long, was obtained by A.
Henry, Esq. ., Ina mountain-stream flowing into the Ichang
gorge of the Yangtsze River.

Pseudogobio productus.

Pseudogobio productus, Peters, MB, Berl. Akad. 1880, p. 1035, fig. 6
(head).

Det) VALS V. 8. I lat250) Tay transv. 6/6:
The height of the body is one seventh of the total length

432 Dr. A. Giinther on the

(without caudal), the length of the head more than one fourth.
Snout long and produced, with the upper profile concave,
much longer than the diameter of the eye, which is one fourth
of the length of the head. Mouth inferior, subsemicircular,
of moderate width ; jaws with broad lips, the inferior fringed
in the middle; upper lip not fringed; barbel as long as the
eye, compressed and rather stiff. Preeorbital elongate, rhom-
boidal. The origin of the dorsal fin is midway between the
end of the snout and the first anal ray ; ventrals inserted
below the hinder half of the dorsal. Caudal fin deeply
forked. Pectoral fin inserted horizontally, as long as the
head, but not extending to the ventral. Transparent greenish
above, a narrow bluish band along the lateral line; abdomen
silvery ; fins not spotted.

Two specimens, of which the larger is 7 inches long, are
in the collection.

Pseudogobio maculatus.
D.10, A.-8." 1. lat. 40. Wi transve4 75:

Barbels none. Body rather compressed, its greatest depth
being equal to the length of the head and one fourth of the
total (without caudal) ; snout rather compressed, of moderate
length, a little longer than the eye, the diameter of which is
nearly one fourth of the length of the head. Interorbital
space convex, as wide as the orbit. Mouth very small, sub-
anterior ; lower lip interrupted in the middle. ‘The origin of
the dorsal fin is nearer to the end of the snout than to the root
of the caudal; ventrals inserted below the middle of the dor-
sal; caudal fin moderately forked ; pectoral not quite so long
as the head, extending to the origin of the dorsal fin, but not
to the root of the ventral. Silvery, with large, irregular,
deep black spots, each occupying one or more scales ; ante-
rior part of the dorsal fin and a band along each caudal lobe
black.

Two specimens, the larger of which is 3 inches long, are
in the collection.

This species would belong, on account of the absence of
barbels, to Bleeker’s genus Sarcochilichthys.

Ehinogobio cylindricus.
Dil. A..8. V8... U. lat.485, Li transys6/ 7
Body low, subcylindrical, its greatest depth being con-

Fishes of the Yangtsze-Kiang. 433

tained five and a half times in the total length (without
caudal), the length of the head four times and a fourth.
Head low, with the snout much elongate and pointed, the
eye being rather nearer to the gill-opening than to the end of
the snout ; the projecting part of the snout is swollen, conical,
the mouth being entirely at the lower side of the snout. Hye
one fifth of the length of the head, less wide than the flat
interorbital space. Upper lip swollen; lower very short,
broadly interrupted in the middle; barbel very short, lying
in a groove which extends forward to near the extremity ot
the snout. Gill-membrane attached to the side of the isthmus.
The origin of the dorsal fin is considerably nearer to the end
of the snout than to the root of the caudal; ventrals inserted
below the posterior half of the dorsal. Caudal deeply forked.
The pectorals are much shorter than the head, and scarcely
extend to the origin of the dorsal fin. The lower parts of
the head and of the thoracic region entirely scaleless. Color-
ation transparent, without any spots.

One specimen, 4 inches long.

This species differs from Lhinogobio typus in having a much
smaller eye and in having the lower parts of the thorax
scaleless.

Hemiculter leucisculus, Kner.

This species is subject to variations with regard to the
width of the third suborbital bone and the position of the
ventral fins. In specimens from [chang the third suborbital
is broad enough to be in contact with the preopercular limb,
whilst in specimens obtained in the lower parts of the river
there is a more or less broad strip of soft skin intervening
between suborbital and preoperculum. In the specimens
from Ichang the root of the ventral is opposed to the first
dorsal spine, whilst in the majority of our other specimens
the whole of the ventral is in advance of the dorsal.

Homaloptera fimbriata.
Delis tA) Bal9e Nis ll:

This species differs from the typical species of Homaloptera
in the shape of its snout and in the arrangement of the
barbels. ‘The snout is flat and spatulate, considerably nar-
rowed in front and nearly as long as broad; the mouth is
surrounded with fringes, from which the barbels differ only
by their greater size; the barbels and fringes of the upper

434 On the Fishes of the Yangtsze-Kiang.

jaw arranged in two concentric series, two pairs of barbels
standing in the outer series ; behind each angle of the mouth
there is a third pair of barbels.

Scales minute and smooth, but there are a few larger ones
along the median line of the back and along the lateral line.
Origin of the anal fin rather nearer to the root of the caudal
than to the occiput. Eyes very small, much nearer to the
gill-opening than to the end of the snout; ventral fins oppo-
site to the anterior half of the dorsal. Pectoral fins not
extending to the ventrals. Body with broad, indistinct,
dark cross bands; pectoral, ventral, and caudal fins with
greyish spots.

One specimen, 44 inches long.

Misgurnus mizolepis.
D..7 or &:,, A..Scor 9: Vi. 6 or 7.

This species has larger scales than any other of the genus
known to me; they are arranged in thirteen longitudinal
rows between the dorsal fin and the lateral line and in ten
between the lateral line and the ventral fin. JBarbels ten,
four belonging to the mandible; the inner pair of the man-
dibulary barbels are about half the length of the outer ones.
Head and body compressed. The height of the body is
nearly equal to the length of the head, which is contained six
and a half times in the total (without caudal). Snout at
least twice as long as the diameter of the eye, which is one
sixth of the length of the head. Origin of the dorsal fin
nearer to the root of the caudal than to the occiput, conspicu-
ously in advance of the root of the ventral fin. Pectoral fin
a little shorter than the head ; caudal fin rounded, continued
by a series of rudimentary rays to the anal fin, and a similar
distance forward on the dorsal edge of the tail; these rudi-
mentary rays render the free portion of the tail particularly
deep. Greyish green, with a greyish line along each series
of scales; lower parts whitish, finely mottled with brown.

Three specimens, of which the larger is 6} inches long,
were sent by Mr. Styan from Kiu-Kiang.

Nemachilus xanthi.
D225 PAS Te. ae:

Scales minute, but conspicuous. Caudal fin deeply emar-
ginate ; the origin of the dorsal fin is midway between the
end of the snout and the root of the caudal. The height of

On the so-called Eyes of Tridacna. 435

the body is considerably less than the length of the head,
which is one fourth of the total (without caudal). Snout of
moderate length, pointed, as long as the postorbital portion of
the head; eye of moderate size. A skinny adipose lobe
occupies the place of the enlarged axillary scales of the pec-
toral and ventral fins. Back crossed by fourteen narrow
brownish bands; a small deep black spot at the end of the
lateral line; each caudal lobe with four oblique blackish
bands; each dorsal ray with one or two blackish specks.
One specimen, 44 inches long.

LXI.—On the so-called Eyes of Tridacna and the Occur-
rence of Pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles in the Vascular System
of the Lamellibranchiata. By J. Brock *.,

SINCE the investigations of L. Vaillant Tridacna has usually
been reckoned among the eye-bearing bivalve Mollusca. As
the clam-shells, or at least their smaller species, are among
the commonest inhabitants of the Indian coral-reefs, I had
sufficient inducement, during my residence in the Indian
Archipelago in the year 1886, to undertake a careful investi-
gation of these supposed eyes. But owing to the abundance
of the tasks which presented themselves on the spot I suc-
ceeded finally only in bringing with me to Hurope some
well-preserved material which has furnished the sole foun-
dation of the following description.

As is well known, the margins of the mantle of the living
species of Zridacna are splendidly coloured. The observa-
tion of the living animals in their natural position is one of
the most charming spectacles which the coral-reefs, rich as
they are in beautiful forms and brilliant colours, can present,
and the enthusiastic descriptions of travellers (Quoy and
Gaimard +, Cuming f, Vaillant §) are in this particular not in
the least exaggerated, as I can affirm from my own expe-
rience.

The so-called eyes have no small share in producing this

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.8., from the ‘ Zeitschrift fiir wissen-
schaftliche Zoologie,’ Band xlvi. pp. 270-287. The original memoir is
illustrated with a plate (pl. xxii.).

+ ‘ Voyage de l’Astrolabe,’ Zoologie, par Quoy et Gaimard, tome iii.
(1835), p. 488.

{ Reeve, ‘Conchologia Iconica,’ part xiv., Monograph of T’ridacna.

§ Ann. des Sc. Nat. sér. 3, tome iv. p. 73 (1865).

436 M. J. Brock on the

beauty. They stand out from the margin of the mantle,
which is sometimes ultramarine blue, sometimes emerald-
green *, as an irregular row of differently coloured points,
sometimes black, sometimes brown f, so that an impression
is produced as if Nature, in order to heighten the brillant
spectacle, had set differently coloured gems in the splendid
material of which she forms the margins of the mantle.
Even upon a superficial examination we easily see that these
differently coloured spots adorn the summits of low, obtusely
conical elevations, which Vaillant directly characterizes as
“ eve-tentacles’ (“tentacules oculiformes,”’ Jd. ¢. p. 83).
How far this is correct a closer examination of their structure
will show.

The considerable size which, as is well known, these animals
attain, and the labour necessary for obtaining them (they
have to be chiselled out of the blocks of madrepore {), at once
placed a limit upon the amount of material brought away.
My investigations have therefore been made exclusively upon
three specimens; but as these furnished me with several
hundred “eyes” for examination, the want of very young
and of full-grown examples can alone be regarded as inju-
rious to the completeness of the description. My largest spe-
cimen, which measured 18 centim. along the margin of the
mantle, was killed in very dilute chromic acid (0°25 per cent.),
then treated with gradually stronger alcohol; in the case of
a second specimen of the same size the margin of the mantle
was separated from the living animal and hardened succes-
sively in dilute osmic solution and then in alcohol; with a
third small example J contented myself with hardening in
alcohol. As will be seen hereafter these different methods of

* In Tridacna crocea, Lam., according to Quoy and Gaimard, ultra-
marine blue, in 7. elongata, Lam., green, in 7. sguamosa, Lam., which
was observed by me, most frequently also green, but with all shades
towards blue very frequent, until the animals were pure blue. Moreover
the metallic lustre of the colours is so strong that, as Vaillant correctly
remarks (/. c. p. 78) only comparison with jewels can give even a tolerably
good notion of them. The pigment, according to Vaillant (/. c. p. 86) is
exclusively seated in the epithelium of the mantle. At any rate the
coloration disappears immediately in alcohol without leaving any traces ;
it must also be remarked that nothing is to be found of a “ spangle-
layer,” such as is so generally diffused in fishes with metallic lustre.

+ Black in T. elongata, observed by Vaillant (which is confirmed by
Mobius, ‘ Beitrage zur Meeresfauna d. Insel Mauritius u. d. Seychellen,
Berlin, 1880, p. 822), yellowish green in 7. crocea according to Quoy and
Gaimard, as also from my personal recollections in T. sguamosa, Unfor-
tunately I cannot now make any definite statement upon this point, as I
omitted making a coloured drawing.

} The mode of life of 7. sqwamosa appears therefore to agree perfectly
with that of 7. ervcea, as described by Quoy and Gaimard (J. ¢. p. 488).

so-called Eyes of Tridacna. 437

preservation have supplemented each other very advanta-
geously for the investigation.

_ Now, therefore, we may pass to the consideration of the

eye- tentacles.” At the very first glance at the margin of
ae mantle of a Tridacna we observe a series of irregular ly
formed but generally obtusely conical tubercles or “warts,
which, at variable distances from the margin, upon the inner
or branchial surface of the mantle, form a row nearly parallel
with the margin of the mantle, and in my largest example,
in which the mantle-margin is about 18 centim. long, I count
on each side about fifty of these structures. Their distance
from each other and from the margin of the mantle is no less
irregular than their size and form. While the distance from
the margin usually varies between 2 and 5 millim., we find
individual warts much further inwards, even as far as 15
millim. The distance of the warts from each other is equally
variable. While we sometimes find groups of six or eight
together in a close series, a more irregular arrangement in
small groups of two or three placed ‘at variable distances
apart is by far the most frequent condition.

The form of the larger elevations is generally that of a
low hill, which, however, appears seated upon the surface of
the mantle not straight, but obliquely, in such a manner that
the apex looks towards the margin of the mantle. In the
largest structures of this kind the long diameter (by which I
mean that perpendicular to the mantle-margin) is usually
somewhat greater than the transverse diameter (parallel to the
margin), which it may exceed by about one third; in middle-
sized tubercles the two diameters are nearly equal, and in
small ones the proportion may be in favour of the transverse
diameter. In the largest warts observed by me the diameters
in question attained the lengths of 3 and 2 millim. As
regards the form of all the warts, of whatever size, it is
characteristic that their dorsal surface melts very gently and
gradually into that of the inner surface of the mantle, while
the ventral surface (that turned towards the mantle-margin)
descends abruptly, and, indeed, below the level of the surtace
of the mantle, each sooth being surrounded on its ventral side
by asemicircular furrow, which stands in the same relation
to it as the fosse of a fortress to the bastion. ‘This fosse is
very seldom faintly marked or quite effaced. __,

Between the series of large warts and the margin of the
mantle there is a series of smaller structures of a peculiar
kind, which are only just visible with the naked eye. Some-
times, but not frequently, the structures now to be described
occur also between the larger warts or even beyond them ;

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 30

438 M. J. Brock on the

but the great majority of them form a continuous series
between the larger warts and the mantle-margin, and show
exactly the same irregularity of arrangement as the larger
warts themselves. At the first glance the two kinds of struc-
tures seem to have little to do with each other; frequently
the smaller ones appear as mere scar-like shrinkings-in of the
surface of the mantle without any perceptible elevation above
the surface. But more advanced structures, in which these
scar-like shrinkings already surround a slightly convex
eminence, show us the transition towards typically con-
structed warts. ‘These smaller structures are warts in course
of development; the only thing remarkable in the process
of development is the circumstance that the semicircular
furrow which girdles the wart ventrally first sinks into the
surface of the mantle, and only then the wart rises up above
the inner mantle-surface from the dorsal declivity of this
“fosse.”” ‘This idea is also fully confirmed by the examina-
tion of series of transverse sections.

In general the smaller structures just described are so little
remarkable in the vicinity of the mantle-margin, even in
chromic-acid preparations, that during life the slight differ-
ences of relief caused by them will hardly appear at all. On
the other hand, it would appear from Vaillant’s description
that during life these structures also are the seat of an intense
pigmentation, and therefore must catch the eye very readily.
With regard to them our author says (/. c. p. 83) :—“ In the
periphery of the free margin of the mantle the green colora-
tion forms an uninterrupted border, which is adorned with a
series of very regularly arranged black spots; near them, but
further inwards, there are large projecting tubercles also
marked with a black spot; they are more numerous in the
vicinity of the branchial aperture, and represent the eye-
tentacles.”

While there can be no doubt as to the identity of these
latter structures (which, moreover, are described more in de-
tail in another place, /.c. p. 135) with the larger warts described
by me, the agreement of the younger structures with Vail-
lant’s series of pigment-spots along the mantle-margin is a
good deal more uncertain. In favour of this view we may
cite the similarity of situation and arrangement, although so
regular a position as Vaillant describes and figures (J. c. pl. viii.
fig. 1) does not agree with my objects, and, further, the cir-
cumstance that the larger warts are most certainly pigmented.
On this point, unfortunately, my personal recollections leave
me completely in the lurch.

In order to ascertain the intimate structure of all these

so-called Eyes of Tridacna. 439

formations of the margin of the mantle, suitably selected por-
tions of the margin were stained with alum-carmine and then
divided in different directions into series of cross sections
from 0°0125 to 0-01 millim. in thickness. The result was
very surprising. From the scanty statements of Vaillant it
might have been anticipated that the histological investiga-
tion would reveal a highly organized eye. ‘ Notwithstanding
the volume of these organs,” says Vaillant (/.¢c. p. 135),
“ which in large individuals measure not less than 2-3 millim.
at their base, I was unable, on account of the thickness and
opacity of the tissues, which render dissections very difficult,
in definitely finding in them the constituents which have
been described in some other Mollusca, and especially in the
species of Pecten. Near the apex of the tubercle there is a
spot of dark pigment, which may be regarded as a choroid ;
and, further, in successful preparations, when such a wart
is examined from the side, we see a convex transparent cap-
sule, which might perhaps be assimilated to a cornea.”
These exceedingly cautious assertions, however, agree so
little with the actual conditions that it is difficult to say what
Vaillant really saw. For his excuse it may be indicated that
his method of investigation must necessarily have exposed
him to the most serious illusions.

Let us first of all examine the larger wart-like elevations
which stand at a distance from the margin of the mantle. In
these the first section in any direction teaches us the important
fact that the warts themselves are not eyes or other special
organs of any kind, inasmuch as their structure perfectly
agrees with that of the mantle. But in the warts themselves
there are in small numbers some very peculiarly constructed
organs of microscopic minuteness, which perhaps might be
eyes and which must here be somewhat closely examined in
the first place.

The organs in question have the general form of a shallow
flask with a broad belly and a short wide neck. They lie
immediately beneath the epithelium and are so oriented that
the belly is turned inwards and the neck outwards, so that
their long axis is perpendicular to the epithelial surface.
Even on the largest warts we do not find more than ten or
twelve such organs; on smaller ones fewer in proportion to
their size. With rare exceptions, in which we find individual
organs on the extreme periphery of a wart, they throughout
prefer the median regions ; their favourite place is the surface
of the wart turned towards the mantle-margin, which descends
abruptly towards the crescentiform furrow. Here we find
about 75 per cent. of their whole number, the) remainder

440 M. J. Brock on the

being pretty uniformly distributed over the most elevated
part of the wart. Exceptionally a flask-shaped organ occurs
on the outer declivity of the crescentiform furrow, therefore
really outside the domain of the wart itself. The “ flask-
shaped organs,” as we will name them for the present,
usually stand in groups of two or three close together, but
not unfrequently singly. Their size varies little. I found
the greatest long diameter of a well-developed organ to be 02
millim., while the greatest transverse diameter amounted to
0°15 millim. This would be sufficient to enable them to be
recognized under the lens even in a fresh torn preparation,
that is to say, supposing them to be sufficiently differentiated
from the surrounding tissue, which I greatly doubt.

The minute structure of a flask-shaped organ is compara-
tively simple. The whole is surrounded by a thin membrane,
visible in sections as a strong contour, and which here and
there contains imbedded fusiform nuclei. The chief contents
consist of large cells, which in life are probably nearly round,
but in my preparations irregularly polygonal, in consequence
of the shrivelling, which cannot quite be avoided. These
cells also possess a distinct membrane, recognizable as a thick
contour ; their protoplasm is quite free from granular inclu-
sions, and in life probably perfectly transparent and strongly
refractive. In my chromic-acid and osmium preparations it
had acquired a finely reticular character, no doubt a pheno-
menon of coagulation ; while in the alcoholic preparations a
dully-lustrous fat-like substance had separated in large drops.
The remarkably small, perfectly spherical nucleus is placed
quite excentrically on a part of the membrane. The greatest
diameter of these “ transparent cells” is 15-25 mw, that of
their nuclei 3-5 pw.

These transparent cells are surrounded, like a nut by its
shell, by a somewhat differently constituted layer, which
extends directly inwards from the external limiting mem-
brane. This ‘external layer” is most perfectly developed
at the bottom of the bellied part of the flask-shaped organ
(which lies away from the surface of the mantle), and thence
advances forwards, but without ever attaining the fore-
most part, that is to say, to keep up the comparison, the
mouth of the flask. On the whole, this cell-layer is charac-
terized by great irregularity. Not only do the individual
cell-elements composing it often project irregularly into the
cavity of the flask, but their arrangement is also sometimes
interrupted; there occur in it larger and smaller gaps, into
which the transparent cells penetrate and thus come into direct
contact with the limitimg membrane. In contrast to the

so-called Eyes of Tridacna. 441

transparent cells those of the outer layer appear very opaque,
owing to their coarsely granular protoplasm; they are some-
what smaller (10-15 4) than the transparent cells, show no
recognizable membrane, and are polygonally pressed against
one another. Their round nucleus, averaging 3-5 mw in
diameter, is not placed excentrically, but more in the centre.

It is exceedingly remarkable and ought to be particularly
noted that I have never seen a nerve passing to a flask-shaped
organ.

With the anterior neck-like portion the organs frequently
reach immediately under the epithelium, but just as often the
thin layer of connective tissue, which forms the boundary
between the tissue of the mantle and the epithelium, inter-
venes between them. The epithelium is the moderately
thick, one-layered, vibratile cylinder-epithelium, with basal
nuclei and thin, strongly refractive cuticle, which is suft-
ciently well known in the mantle of the Lamellibranchs. On
the outer surface of the mantle (the shell-side) a great num-
ber of elongate, flask-shaped, unicellular mucus-glands open
among the epithelium; these, when stained with alum-
carmine, show very distinctly the framework-substance
recently described by List * and myself in these elements.

The flask-shaped organs often project outwards more or less
strongly, so as to push out the epithelium covering them ina
conical form. ‘This peculiarity is generally much better deve-
loped in those organs which we find upon the smaller (and
probably younger) warts than in those which belong to older
structures. With regard to their epithelial coat also a dis-
tinction may be set up. Throughout this is somewhat
thinned over the flask-shaped organs, but in the younger much
more than in the older ones. While in the latter the differ-
ence from the normal epithelium is but small and often scarcely
perceptible, the epithelial covering over the younger struc-
tures is often reduced to a pavement-epithelium scarcely
visible in profile.

We have just spoken of older and younger warts, and this
gives the opportunity of going somewhat more into detail
upon the relations of the two structures, which in description
we have in the first place treated separately. If we examine
the minute structure of one of the undeveloped structures
near the margin of the mantle, which appear to the naked
eye rather as scar-like indrawn depressions, it 1s soon seen
that no principal differences from the larger warts exist in

* J. H. List, “ Zur Kenntniss der Driisen im Fusse von Tethys jfim-
briata, L.,” Zeitschy. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xly. p. 281; and J. Brock, cid.
xliy. p. 883.

442 M. J. Brock on the

them. Here also we find flask-shaped organs in the typical
position at the inner wall of the “ fosse,” or more rarely upon
the still very low dome of the wart which is just swelling up.
But their number is small, varying only from one to three;
and moreover, as already stated, they project more strongly
above the surface, and push out the much thinned epithelium
of the mantle into a bump at this spot.

With respect to size and the details of the minute structure
there is, however, absolutely no difference between them and
the flask-shaped organs of the larger warts. If we examine
more exactly the external relief of these younger structures it
is not difficult to find evident incipient stages, in which only
a deep narrow inversion of the epithelium of the mantle
represents the first trace of the future “ fosse,” while within
this the future tubercle is either not indicated at all or only
by a broad, low, scarcely perceptible elevation. From these
incipient stages up to typically developed warts all possible
intermediate forms may be found, and hence there seems to
us to be no doubt that the smaller structures near the margin
of the mantle are developmental stages of the typical large
warts. If this conclusion be correct, this development has
certainly the remarkable peculiarity of showing that first of all
the ‘‘fosse”’ surrounding the wart on the side towards the
mantle-margin sinks in, and the wart only then begins to
swell up above the surface of the mantle. If we add to this
that our younger specimen of 7’ridacna, in which the mantle-
margin measures only 13 centim, in length, shows only such
younger organs towards the margin, and, indeed, in rather small
numbers (in all about fifty were counted upon each mantle-
margin), and, on the other hand, not a single distinctly pro-
jecting wart, we are not unjustified in coming to the conclu-
sion that during the whole life of the animal new-formation
of warts goes on continually, starting from the margin of the
mantle *.

With regard to the formation of the flask-shaped organs
we have unfortunately no direct observation. But from the
circumstance that they occur typically developed in the
youngest warts, it at least follows with some certainty that
their formation precedes that of the warts. Therefore as the
place where a new flask-shaped organ originates is not marked
externally by change in relief of the surface of any kind, it
is clear that only some very fortunate chance could throw any
light upon the production of a flask-shaped organ in the adult

* The development of the warts sometimes attains such an extreme
degree that they begin to be constricted off from the parent-surface and
give origin to short-stalked clavate or mushroom-like structures.

so-called Eyes of Tridacna. 443

animal. It may, however, be admitted that for a long time
a new-formation of such organs must take place in the larger
warts, for a comparison of the number of flask-shaped organs
of the larger warts with the very much smaller number
in younger structures leaves only the alternative between
this supposition and the much more improbable one of a sub-
sequent fusion of several smaller warts into one large one;
but even here it is remarkable that I have never been able
to observe a flask-shaped organ tn statu nascendi. How-
ever, I will readily admit that I have not devoted much time
to seeking for it, as in connexion with the chief interest which
attaches to these mysterious organs, namely their function,
no light is to be expected from developmental history.

Throughout, in all attempts to attribute any definite func-
tion to these organs, we find ourselves in a peculiarly unfa-
vourable position. In the first place, because there are no
available observations as to the behaviour of the living
animal, as to undoubted sensorial perceptions, or the like,
which might be brought into connexion with the flask-shaped
organs. Further, because we know nothing definite as to
the pigment, which, as we have seen, is undoubtedly present
during life, and its arrangement relatively to the organs, a
point which would have to be considered in the first line in
every attempt at interpretation. And, finally, because we
know even the histological elements which compose the
flask-shaped organs only in the preserved state. We do not
know whether the transparent cells are as strongly refractive
during life as we suppose them to be from our preparations ;
we know nothing as to the constitution of the cells of the
“external layer” during life. ‘Thus any serious attempt at
interpretation must for the present remain in suspense.
Nevertheless we believe we shall not go wrong in decidedly
rejecting any interpretation of our organs as eyes. ‘The only
things that might be adduced in favour of this interpretation
is the resemblance of the “ transparent cells” to the lenses of
many Invertebrates, and above all the exceedingly favourable
position of the organs for visual perception; but how many
and important are the reasons against it! Above all, at any
rate, the want of any large nerve-trunk running to the organ
and of a perceptive layer, for we cannot expect even the
boldest imagination to regard the ‘external layer” as a
retina *.

* We know very well that precisely among the Mollusca “eyes” have
frequently been described to which no large nerve-trunks could be proved
to run; but in all these cases the interpretation, although assailable, is to
a certain extent justified, if only because the organs in question agreed

444 M. J. Brock on the Occurrence of

A much more probable interpretation is that the flask-shaped
organs are luminous organs. If the cells of the “ external
layer’ have the faculty of shining, the “ transparent cells ”
might perhaps act as prisms. ‘This depends, however, very
much on whether the distribution of the pigment, which we
do not know, supports such an interpretation. Whether any
luminosity really occurs during life is not known *, and,
indeed, not at all probable, as from the abundance of the Zrz-
dacne in the whole Indo-Pacific region so remarkable a phe-
nomenon could hardly have remained unobserved until now.

Perhaps my respected friend Dr. Sluiter, when these lines
come under his notice, may be induced to make some obser-
vations upon the point in question. With the exception of
some superficial and illusory resemblances there is no relation
to the luminous organs of the Scopelide. The only organs

closely in structure with undoubted eyes (Patella, see P. Fraisse, Zeitschr. f.
wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxv. p. 468; moreover, as I now find, Hilger has recently
demonstrated the nerve of the eye of Patella, see Morph. Jahrb, Bd. x.
p- 358, 1884), or at least because physiological experiments proved the
animal to be extraordinarily sensitive to light (as especially in the cases
recently described by Sharp and Patten; see B. Sharp, “ On the Visual
Organs in Lamellibranchiata,” Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Bd. v. p. 447,
and W. Patten, “ Eyes of Molluscs and Arthropods,” eed. Bd. vi. p. 542).
But no special sensitiveness to light can be absolutely proved in Tredacna ;
indeed, Vvidaena is so little sensitive that usually it is only upon direct
contact that it retracts the margins of the mantle and closes its shell.

* I certainly thought that I was on the track of a conclusive observa-
tion when I read as follows in the treatise on the Invertebrata, edited by
O. Schmidt, in Brehm’s ‘Thierleben’ (ed. 2, Bd. x. p. 887) :—* Besides
many singular things, as, for example, that the Giant Clams (7ridacna)
when they open at night diffuse a bright light or a lustre noticeable from
a distance . . . besides these things our Dutchman (Rumph) cites some
examples of the size and strength of Zridacna gigas,’ &c. But a com-
parison with the original showed that O. Schmidt had either read the
passage in question hastily or misunderstood it. At p. 152 of his ‘ Am-
boinsche Rariteitkamer’ (first Amsterdam edition of 1705) Rumphius
says :—“ They relate many singular things of a large Bia garu ( Dridacna
gigas) which is to be seen ina lagoon of the island ‘Timor Laut, which on
opening at night is said to emit a bright light or lustre, which may even
be perceived from afar.” Thus it is only a pleasant tale of the natives.
It may be remarked ex passant that Rumphius is well known to have
been a German, born in Hanau, as, indeed, is to be read upon the title-
page of his ‘ Rariteitkamer ’ and also under his portrait behind it, although
“Totus Belga fide et calamo,” as is added with an elegant compliment
to his adopted country in the distichs in his honour placed under the
latter. As, in my eyes, Rumph, although a dilettante, was a naturalist of
the first rank, who far exceeded most of his contemporary professional
naturalists not only in accuracy of observation, but also in critical acute-
ness, [ would not let pass this opportunity of correcting an error which
may easily receive the widest diffusion through so popular a work as
Brehm’s ‘ Thierleben.’

Pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles in 'Tridacna. 445

which show in their structure a decided resemblance to the
flask-shaped organs, the so-called “ eyes” on the tentacles of
Cardium (see Patten’s figure, lc. Taf. xxxi. fig. 112), are
unfortunately very doubtful as regards their function,
although the opinion that they are luminous organs is by no
means to be regarded as disproved *.

It is well known that the symbiosis of unicellular Algz
with Evertebrata of the most different classes discovered by
Geza Entz and K. Brandt has never ceased to be a matter
of the most lively interest. I believe, therefore, that I shall
earn the thanks of many by adding to the known cases of this
symbiosis a new one which may claim the greater interest as
only one instance of the kind among the Mollusca is to be
found in literature. The very first incision which I made
through the mantle-margin of a T’ridacna showed me, to my
astonishment, all the available interstices of the tissue densely
packed with ‘6 green cells”? (pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles) ,
and, as I found in the course of my investigation, this con-
dition prevailed in all my specimens and in all parts of the
mantle. It is true that the interest which would otherwise
attach to this discovery was considerably weakened by the
circumstance that it was made only on preserved animals.
As the strict scientific proof that the colouring-matter of these
green cells is chlorophyll can no longer be produced, readers
of too critical a disposition may be inclined in regard to the new
discovery to pass to the order of the day. In opposition to
this I would point out that my only purpose here is to com-
municate briefly the observations made, which I am justified
in doing, and, to a certain extent, obliged to do. When once
attention is directed to these things the investigation of the
questionable chlorophyll in fresh material will probably not
have to be very long waited for.

The ‘ chlorophyll-corpuscles”’ in question are certainly
true cells, as, without exception, they possess an approxi-
mately central small nucleus with a distinct nuclear frame-
work, which becomes very deeply coloured in the staining
reagents employed (Grenacher’s alum-carmine). In general
the nucleus is spherical, but sometimes oblong or reniform,

* Carriére (‘ Die Sehorgane der Thiere,’ Munich, 1885, p. 97) certainly
observed no spontaneous luminosity when the outer light was excluded ;

but a function dependent upon nerve-influence, such as luminosity cer-
tainly is, need not occur at all times.

446 M. J. Brock on the Occurrence of

and not unfrequently, especially in alcoholic preparations,
strikingly stelliform, to which Prof. Graf Solms called my
attention. The increase by transverse division, which is
frequently to be observed, may also be cited among the cri-
teria of cell-nature. Further, they are spherical bodies of 6-
8 w in diameter (nucleus 2 ~), the contour of which appears
so sharply and definitely that the assumption of a special
(cellulose ?) envelope* seems to be justified. From the
numerous vacuoles which permeate it the protoplasm has a
frothy character; usually a ring of larger vacuoles surrounds
the nucleus, and between this and the membrane there are
numerous smaller ones. But the most multifarious other
arrangements also occur. ‘The green colouring-matter, which
is fixed by chromic acid but extracted by alcohol, is not gene-
rally diffused through the protoplasm, but localized in small
round corpuscles (chlorophyll-bearers), which are distributed
through the cell in variable numbers difficult to determine.
However, their quantity suffices to cause the whole cell to
appear of a lively green colour under low powers. Whether
the green granules are situated in the vacuoles or in the pro-
toplasm is difficult to decide from sections; but I regard the
latter as far more probable.

Other points in the structure of the pseudochlorophyll-cor-
puscles I have been unable to make out clearly. In spirit-
preparations, in which, as already stated, the green colouring-
matter has been entirely extracted, the granules of the proto-
plasm, which bore the colouring-matter, have also become
very indistinct, as their refractive power too nearly approaches
that of the rest of the protoplasm. It is only where (in the
microscopic image) they lie over a large vacuole that they are
very distinctly visible. ‘The vacuoles, however, in their form
and distribution are, on the contrary, particularly clearly seen
in spirit-preparations from which the colouring-matter has
disappeared. ‘The very tine, strongly refractive, almost dust-
like granules which I sometimes found scattered through the
protoplasm have remained quite inexplicable to me as regards
their nature and significance; but [ must mention that on
treating sections of Zridacna hardened in osmium with
iodized solution of iodide of potassium for a very different
purpose (see p. 450), fine, dust-like, violet-blue granules made
their appearance in many of the green cells, while in spirit-
preparations chloride of zinc and iodine coloured the whole of
the cell-contents deep blue-black. How these two results
are to be reconciled, and whether the blue granules are iden-

* The test with chloride of zine and iodine was not unequivocally
successful.

Pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles in Tridacna. 447

tical with the above-mentioned granulations, I do not know;
but at any rate it may be regarded as certain that the cell-
contents contain starch.

The seat of the green cells is not determinable at the first
glance. It is indeed quite clear that they never occur intra-
cellularly, like the yellow cells of the Actiniz for example.
For this indeed the tissues of the Mollusca are much too small-
celled. But whether they are in the interstices of the tissue or in
the blood-passages is more difficult to decide without injections.
Fortunately the numerous blood-corpuscles intermixed with
them help us into the right road; we have to do only with
blood-sinuses, as, moreover, the form and distribution of the
spaces filled with the green cells would almost alone render
certain. ‘The injection effected by them is frequently so
perfect as to give us a distinct picture of the lacunar system in
the mantle; and of the subepithelial layer of the mantle-
tissue we sometimes obtain representations which to some
extent resemble those recently given by P. Schiemenz*. In
this way we are taught that the flask-shaped organs must be
surrounded by large blood-sinuses, as an enormous accumula-
tion of green cells regularly occurs around them. On the
other hand, in the larger vessels with distinct walls which
are distributed im the mantle I have never met with green
cells.

The only observation of the occurrence of pseudochloro-
phyll-corpuscles in Mollusca that literature has to show is
due to K. Brandt and relates to Hlysta viridis t. In this
species they le in the ‘system of contractile tubes in the
mantle ;””? what Brandt means by this is somewhat obscure,
but we may not be much mistaken in assuming that the vas-
cular system is referred to. ‘his would agree with Tridacna ;
but in other respects there is considerable difference in the
green cells of Elysta according to Brandt’s description and
figures (loc. cit. figs. 90-93). They are much smaller and of
much more irregular form than those of Zir¢dacna, and the
emerald-green colouring-matter is not localized in separate
granules, but uniformly permeates the protoplasm.

As is well known Schmitz ¢ has recently adduced evidence

* Paulus Schiemenz, ‘‘ Ueber die Wasseraufnahme bei Lamellibranch-
iaten und Gastropoden,” I., Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Bd. vii. Heft 3,
Taf. xvi. figs. 8, 9.

+ K. Brandt, “‘ Ueber die morphologische und physiologische Bedeu-
tung des Chlorophylls bei Thieren,” in Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Bd. iy.

. 245,
: { F. Schmitz, “ Die Chromatophoren der Algen,” in Verh, naturh.
Ver. preuss. Rheinl. und Westt., Jahrg. xl. (1883) p. 1.

448 M. J. Brock on the

that the old supposition that the chlorophyll is uniformly
diffused in the protoplasm in the unicellular Alge is erro-
neous; on the contrary, according to him all true Alge have
formed chlorophyll- bearers. We cannot abstain from men-
tioning this memoir at any rate in passing, as our own obser-
vations agree so well with it; moreover it is known that in
the majority of the green corpuscles found in animals the
chlorophyll is localized in special chlorophyll-bearers. The
question whether the green cells of Zrédacna are true uni-
cellular Alge or only developmental stages of them must be
very superfluous when even tle vegetable nature of these
structures cannot be established with perfect certainty. Upon
this point it may be noted here en passant that the latter
opinion, put forward by Geza Entz, on account of which
Brandt gave up his generic name Zoochlorella, has recently
been disputed by Klebs * in the most decided manner, And
it cannot be denied that of the diagnosis which Klebs (@oc.
cit. p. 332) gives for the genus Plewrococcus much is applic-
able to the green cells of Titdacna; but we need hardly say
expressly that we will not therefore announce the latter as a
new species of Pleurococcus +.

The place in which we find the green cells in Tridacna is
unusual. The ordinary locality of the vegetable symbionts
is in the tissue, @. e. the cells of the host ; hitherto they have
only rarely been found floating freely in the cavities of its
body. It we interpret Brandt’s expression correctly (see

.447) Elysia viridis is also in the same case ; in the Kphyre
ot Cotylorhiza, Claus found chlorophylloid Alge freely floating
in the gastrovascular space |; Chun refers to yellow cells in
the vessels of Veledla§; and Silliman saw Algee deposited in
the intercellular spaces of the body-parenchyma in a North-
American freshwater Turbellarian, Mesostoma viviparum,

* G.Klebs, “ Ueber die Organisation einiger Flagellatengruppen und
ihre Beziehungen zu Algen und Infusorien,” in Unters. botan. Inst.
Tubingen, Bd. i. p. 258.

+ At any rate, as Prof. Graf Solms has likewise had the goodness to
point out to me, the green cells of 7ridacna are quite different from those
of other classes of animals if only by the great number and spherical form
of their chlorophyll-bearers. ‘lhe green cells of Hydra have a single
hood-like chlorophyll-hearer, and increase by tetrad-formation (see, for
example, the figures given by Hamann, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxvii.
Taf. xxvi. figs. 4-7), as also those of the Infusoria.

t C. Claus, “ Die Ephyren von Cotylordiza und Rhizostoma und ihre
Entwicklung zu achtarmigen Medusen,” in Arb. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien,
Bd. v.

§ C. Chun, “ Ueber die geographische Verbreitung der pelagisch-
lebenden Seethiere,” in Zool. Anz, 1886, no. 215, p. 72.

Blood-corpuscles of Tridacna. 449

Sill.* I am not acquainted with other cases of the same
kind. But, at any rate, the Algal vegetation in the system
of blood-lacunz in the mantle of Trédacna proves that there
can be no question of any “ current” of blood in them worth
mentioning. However, it cannot be denied that Alga
(always supposing them to be such) must yield a very valu-
able enrichment of any animal blood, as the oxygen which
they develop under direct exposure to light must be immedi-
ately absorbed by the blood-plasma, and so benefit the animal
to a great extent. That there can be no question of evena
temporary or partial nourishment by the vegetable symbionts
in the case of an animal so large and requiring so much
nutriment as a Zr¢dacna is a matter of course, even if this
theory, set up by G. Entz and Brandt, were not to be re-
garded as already seriously shaken.

Some minor observations made in the course of the above
investigation, but which have no other connexion therewith,
may here find a place in conclusion. One of my observations
relates to the blood-corpuscles. In my preparations I found
these always fixed in a peculiar manner. The protoplasm
had distinctly separated into two different constituents—a
perfectly hyaline part in which the nucleus was always
situated excentrically, and a “ protoplasmatic” part, which
showed a very marked fibrous coagulation. It was remark-
able that in all three of my Zridacne, which had been treated
with quite different reagents, namely chromic acid, alcohol,
and osmium, the blood-corpuscles appeared altered in this
manner, and, indeed, in each preparation the whole of them
without exception, not only those of the deeper layers of
tissue, but also those belonging to the subepithelial layers,
which one would have supposed must have been killed and
fixed almost instantaneously by the reagent employed. I am
at present quite unable to offer any explanation of this peculiar
phenomenon.

‘rhe following peculiarity of the blood of Tridacna may
have more interest. I believe that the only known formed
constituents are the ordinary amceboid blood-cells. But in
Tridacna 1 succeeded in detecting, although very sparingly,
a second very characteristic cell-element of the blood. ‘These
were rounded or oval, lobate, or otherwise irregularly formed

* Silliman, “ Beobachtungen iiber die Siisswasserturbellarien Nord-
amerikas,” in Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xli. p. 62.

450 M. J. Brock on the

cells, the perfectly hyaline protoplasm of which is throughout
so completely stuffed with strongly refractive granules of a
fatty lustre that I could not even find a cell-nucleus. The
granules of the contents, averaging 0°5-1 mw in diameter, are
regularly polygonal rather than rounded ; in osmium they
become brown rather more strongly than the protoplasm, and
also acquire a deep colour in borax-carmine.

We find these “ granule-cells,” which usually attain twice
or three times the size of the ordinary blood-cells, intermixed
with these and the Alge in the blood-lacune, where they
generally lie close to the walls, often in recess-like depres-
sions. If such a depression is seen from the side in a section
peculiar images are produced, as though the cell lay free in
the interlacunar tissue; and misled by this, I thought for a
long time that I had to do with true wandering cells, but I
gave up this notion on finding that the explanation above
given is quite sufficient.

The frequency of the “ granule-cells”” is very variable.
They are wanting in none of my three individuals of T’ri-
dacna; but while in the specimen treated with chromic acid
and alcohol they always occur singly and so sparingly that I
often had to examine several sections in order to find one,
they occurred in the osmium-specimen in such abundance
that every section showed at least half a dozen of them. The
causes of this phenomenon are quite unknown to me.

In order to understand these peculiar cells it is most neces-
sary to make out the chemical nature of their contained cor-
puscles. For reasons which are not far to seek I at first
thought of glycogen; but I did not succeed in obtaining the
characteristic glycogen-reaction with a solution of iodine and
iodide of potassium prepared in accordance with Barfurth’s
prescription *. Whether this failure is to be ascribed to the
hardening with osmium or to the processes of imbedding in
paraffin may be decided by better chemists than myself—at
any rate from the rarity of the “ granule-cells” in my other
two Tridacne I was limited to the osmium-specimen for this
microchemical test.

The resemblance of the “ granule-cells ” to certain cells of
the interstitial connective substance of the Pulmonata, which
were discovered by Semper and reinvestigated and further
described by me some years ago |, is very remarkable. The

* D. Barfurth, “ Vergleichend-histochemische Untersuchungen iiber
das Glycogen,” in Arch. fiir mikr. Anat. Bd. xxv. p. 260.

+ J. Brock, “ Untersuchungen tiber die interstitiellen Bindesubstanzen
der Mollusken,” in Zeitschr. f. wiss, Zool. Bd. xxxix. p. 40 (1883),

Blood-corpuscles of Tridacna. 451

reaction of the contained granules with osmic acid and basic
colouring-matters agreed exactly in the two kinds of cells.
In the Pulmonata also no evidence of glycogen was adduced,
but that we have to do with glycogen or a similar body is
at least probable since we know from Barfurth * that in the
Pulmonata glycogen is at times accumulated in great quantity
in the plasma-cells or Leydigian cells of the interstitial
connective substance.

The much-discussed question of the intercellular spaces of
the epithelium of the Mollusca has now, we believe, found
its definitive solution in the recently published memoir by
Schiemenz ft. The intercellular spaces are not artificially
produced, although their supposed stomata may be; they do
not reach the surface of the epithelium, but terminate czecally
in sharp points between the epithelial cells. Although the
existence of intercellular spaces has been placed beyond a
doubt by means of injections (Schiemenz, Nalepa) and by the
observation of fresh objects (Leydig &c.), the question
deserved consideration how far intercellular spaces may be
artificially produced by reagents causing hardening and
shrivelling. Schiemenz has already raised this question when
he brought forward this very objection to my observations of
intercellular spaces in the epithelium of the pedal glands of
the Pulmonata f. In this particular case Schiemenz’s scruples
were unfounded, for no one will doubt that intercellular spaces
which regularly function as the efferent ducts of glands, and
are often found filled with the secretion of the glands, are
formed during life§. But as to the matter itself he is un-
doubtedly in the right. Of my three Tridacne the osmium
and chromic-acid specimens showed a densely closed palis-
sade-epithelium without the smallest interstices between the
individual cells, while the spirit-specimen has the whole
epithelium traversed by numerous large typical intercellular
spaces. Only one of the two can represent the natural con-

* Barfurth, loc. cit. pp. 825 et seqq.

+ Paulus Schiemenz, ‘‘ Ueber die Wasseraufnahme bei Lamellibran-
eens und Gastropoden,” Il, in Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Bd. vii.
Heft 3.

t Schiemenz, loc. cit. p. 428.

§ Although I have in the same place adduced the intercellular spaces
of the epithelium of the pedal glands as evidence for the existence of such
formations in general, this can no longer apply now that we know the

true nature of the permanently closed typical intercellular passages, The
two are quite different things, which must be kept apart.

452 On the Presence of Ossa transversa in a Chelonian.

dition, and from the prevalent opinions as to the value of the
three reagents employed we must unanimously declare against
the spirit-specimen and the intercellular spaces. Others also
appear to have made similar observations. In a recent
French memoir upon the histology of the Lamellibranchs *
we find the epithelium everywhere represented as closed, only
one figure shows, exactly like my spirit-specimen of Trédacna,
the epithelium traversed by numerous “ intercellular spaces.”

LXII.—On the Presence of Ossa transversa in a Chelonian.
By G. A. BOULENGER.

THE object of this note is to record the presence of transverse
bones in the skull of Hydraspis Hilairii, Schw. ‘The absence
of that element had hitherto been regarded as characteristic
of the order Chelonia.

Lower view of anterior part of skull.

As may be seen from the above figure, the bone (ér.) is
intercalated between the pterygoid, the palatine, the maxillary,
and the jugal; it is suturally united with the latter only
anteriorly and posteriorly, its outer border being free.

* L, Roule, “ Recherches histologiques sur les Mollusques lamelli-

branches,” in Journ. Anat. et Physiol. tome xxiii, (1887), p. 31. The
figure referred to is pl. y. fig. 8,

Bibliographical Notices. 453

This discovery again shortens the gap between the Chelo-
nians and the typical Reptilia. The group to which Hy-
draspis belongs is characterized by distinct nasals, separate
dentary bones, and strong transverse processes to the cervical
vertebrae, and is in those respects altogether of a more gene-
ralized type than the other Testudinata ; however, as regards
the shell and pelvis it stands apparently a step in advance,
and the Pleurodira have for that reason been regarded, per-
haps erroneously, as the most specialized type. Geologically,
so far as the record goes and if Dr. Baur’s recent views on
certain Triassic Chelonians be correct, they are the oldest.
The Wealden Peltochelys Duchastelit, the type specimen of
which I was permitted to examine by my friend M. Dollo, is
unquestionably closely related to Hydraspis and Chelodina.
I have a suspicion that it will prove to be the young of
Plesiochelys.

It is undeniable that all the discoveries that have been
made of late give support to the view first expressed by Cope,
nearly twenty years ago, on the affinities of those two groups,
the Cheloniaand the Rhynchocephalia, the systematic position
of which has given rise to so much controversy.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

A Textbook of Biology. By J. R. Atyswortu Davis.
London: Charles Griffin & Co., 1888.

Mr. Davis has designed this textbook in order to meet the require-
ments of the Intermediate Science and Preliminary Scientific Exami-
nations of the London University. Such a work can never be one
of a high class, for it must be limited by the conditions of the
syllabus of a given body; in this case the body is not a teaching,
but only an examining one.

Mr. Davyis’s book must therefore be tested solely by the syllabus
to which it professes to afford an aid. The exposition of the simple
facts of anatomy and physiology is generally accurate, but we do not
think it is better done than in a number of other works, such as
those of Huxley and Martin, or Marshall and Hurst. So far as the
work is, as it claims to be, an introduction to theoretical biology,
it is clear from the conditions imposed that it must be more or lesg
unsatisfactory in correspondence with the powers and characteristics
of the writer. For us the whole has too much the air of a cram-
book to justify us in recommending it from this point of view; we
believe that the following explanation is the worst in the book, but
the mental calibre of the writer may perhaps be judged from it.
We find in the glossary, “ Apodeme (amddnyos, absent from home),
in the Crayfish.—One of the elements of the endophragmal system,”
Mr. Davis not only should have learnt that in Greek there is ¢ and n,
but he should have learnt too that explanations should explain
before he set to work on a glossary. The figures are partly original

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i, 31

454 Miscellaneous.

and partly borrowed: the latter vary in quality; the former are,
without exception, the worst we have seen for a long time.

Proceedings of the Bristol Naturalists’ Society, n. 8. vol. v. (1886-87),
pt. ii. pp. 95-206 : Engineering Section, pp. 1-94. Bristol, 1887.

Tus part of the Bristol Naturalists’ Society’s Proceedings opens
with a paper on “ Bristol Building Stones ” by Prof. Lloyd Morgan ;
the various local rocks available for the purpose are described, the
principal buildings constructed of them being mentioned, and par-
ticulars of their resistance given. In a second paper, ‘“‘On the
Origin of Mountain-Ranges,” Prof. Morgan criticizes Mr. Mellard
Reade’s views, and offers some general suggestions on this difficult
subject. Further geological information appears in the Engineering
Section, Mr. Charles Richardson giving a valuable paper on the
Severn Tunnel, Several interesting and useful sections are given as
illustrations to the thirty pages of text; and the whole forms, with
some notes by Prof. Morgan, an important contribution to local and
applied geology.

In the Botanical Section Mr. J. W. White contributes some sup-
plemental notes to the “Flora of the Bristol Coal-field,” and Mr.
C. Bucknall continues his valuable papers on the Fungi of the
Bristol district, illustrating this portion of his work with four plates.
Some interesting notes apropos of the tercentenary of the potato are
contributed by Mr. G. F. Burder.

Local Zoology is taken in charge by Mr. H. J. Charbonnier, who
catalogues the Reptilia, Amphibia, and Pisces observed by him in
the district.

The local Meteorology is chronicled by Messrs. G. F. Burder and
H. B. Jupp.

Many short papers and abstracts of papers also appear in this
part il., amongst which we may mention :—E. W. Phibbs, “ Note
on a Sacred War Trophy from Ecuador, consisting of a Human Scalp
and Face;” W. P. Mendham, ‘“‘ The Deposition of Smoke and Dust
by means of Electricity ;” Prof. W. Ramsay, “On Colour Blind-
ness;”’ Thomas Morgan, “ Chilled Iron;” J. W. I. Harvey, ‘“ On
the Method adopted to Compound a Pair of Ordinary Oscillating
Paddle-wheel Engines ;” and G. W. Sutcliffe, “ Notes on Stationary
Engines.”

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the “Nursing ”-habits of Dendrobates, as observed by A. Kappler.
By G. A. BovLencer.
A sHort time ago Messrs. Cope and H. 8S. Smith * announced the
startling discovery that a South-American frog, Dendrobates brac-
catus, Cope, carries its tadpoles on its back; these tadpoles differ in
no respect from the normal type, and simply adhere (by the mouth ?)
to the back of the parent. Mr. Smith observes that the tadpoles
‘“‘ were moist and glistening, as if they had just been taken from
water, though the sun was shining hotly over them.” It isa great
* Amer. Nat. 1887, p. 307.

Miscellaneous. 455

pity that Mr. Cope, who describes the specimen on which the larvae
were found, should not have taken the trouble of ascertaining its
sex, instead of contenting himself with the statement “The free
tadpole is carried on the parent.”

The explanation of this extraordinary mode of “nursing” is to
be found in a contribution by Hr. Aug. Kappler * to the life-history
of Reptiles and Batrachians in Dutch Guiana. We have here to do
with a quite new mode of parental provision for the safe rearing of
the brood, and I append a translation of Hr. Kappler’s remarks :—

“Dendrobates trivittatus, Spix.

“During the rainy season the female oviposits in small puddles,
where the eggs are hatched, after which the frog removes the young
tadpoles to other (larger) puddles. This is accomplished, as I have
myself several times witnessed, by the frog entering the water, when
all the tadpoles gather round and suck on to the parent, which
leaves on its journey with an investment of from twelve to eighteen
young tadpoles, 6 or 7 millim. long. Whether it is the male or the
female that undertakes the carriage is unknown to me.”

It is to be hoped that Messrs. Smith and Kappler’s interesting
observations may be before long supplemented by fuller accounts.
Naturalists in the tropics do not seem to be fully aware of the rich
mine of investigation which the breeding-habits of Batrachians
afford them. The more our knowledge advances the more we realize
the immense amount of secondary modifications in the development
of Batrachians, quite irrespective of their relationships. What is
more remarkable than the similarity of the eggs and the nursing-
habits of such widely remote forms as Alytes, Ichthyophis, Desmo-
gnathus, and Amphiuma ?

It is, however, held by Mr. Ryder + that this similarity between
Ichithyophis and Amphiuma is “a confirmation of Prof. Cope’s con-
clusions as to the taxonomic relations of these two types, and a very
interesting instance of the way in which embryological data may
become available.”

On the Formation of the Antherozoids of the Hepatice.
By M. Lecrerc pu Santon.

The antheridia of the Hepaticze are formed by an aggregation of
rounded or oval cells. The cells of the superficial layers remain
sterile and form the envelope ; the interior cells play a more impor-
tant part—each of them forms a motile antherozoid, capable of
fecundating the oosphere and converting it into an ovum.

How does a cell, formed of a nucleus surrounded by protoplasm
and a membrane, become converted into a spiral filament endowed
with motion? The authors who have studied the formation of the
antherozoids have answered this question in very different ways.
According to some the nucleus disappears, and it is the protoplasm
that furnishes the spiral filament ; according to others the protoplasm
does not perform any essential part, and it is the nucleus that, by
elongating and coiling itself, directly forms the antherozoid. At
the close of my researches upon the Hepatice I shall propose a third

* Das Ausland, 1885, p. 858. + Amer, Nat. 1888, p. 182.

456 Miscellaneous.

solution, which appears to me to be more in accordance with the
facts than the preceding.

Asa first example I shall take Metzgeria furcata. The antheridia
occur in involucra which are almost entirely closed and are situated
themselves on the lower surface of the frond. When the mother-
cells of the antherozoids have ceased dividing, the middle part of the
membrane surrounding them soon dissolves; each cell is then com-
pletely free, only surrounded by a very delicate membrane, which
will afterwards disappear. The nucleus, which was at first central,
approaches the surface of the cell without changing in form or
dimensions. At the same time all round the cell, following a great
circle which touches the now excentric nucleus, a delicate thread of
protoplasm is differentiated, becomes homogeneous and brilliant,
and is coloured only with great difficulty by the ordinary reagents of
the protoplasm and nucleus. This is the first indication of the forma-
tion of the antherozoid. It is to be observed that, at this period,
the nucleus has not notably changed in form. We cannot there-
fore say that the nucleus alone forms the antherozoid by becoming
elongate and slender. It is true that the nucleus has a point of
contact with the filament ; but by treatment with hematoxylin the
colourless filament may be traced over the surface of the nucleus,
now strongly stained violet.

This first phase of the formation of the antherozoid is of short
duration, and appears to me to have hitherto escaped the notice of
observers. Ina rather more advanced state the different parts of
the mother-cell retain the same relative positions; but the filament
is thicker and more intimately united with the nucleus, the nucleus
itself is smaller, and the protoplasm less dense. The filament
therefore grows at the expense of the nucleus and protoplasm.

Still later the nucleus seems to have completely disappeared ; its
substance has been entirely employed in enlarging the antherozoid.
The protoplasm also has almost completely disappeared ; we see
only a colourless space in the midst of the ring formed by the
antherozoid. The direct observation of this stage of development
led some authors to suppose that the nucleus disappeared and that
the protoplasm then became condensed at the periphery of the cell
to form the antherozoid. Soon afterwards the ring breaks, the
filament elongates itself and becomes more slender, and gradually
acquires the form of the adult antherozoid. It is only at this
period that the two cilia appear at one of its extremities.

The antherozoids of the other Hepatic that I have studied
(Radula complanata, Frullania dilatata, and Alicularia scalaris) are
formed exactly in the same way as those of Metzgeria furcata. As
these different species belong to groups pretty distinct from each
other there is reason to suppose that the mode of formation of the
antherozoids is very uniform in the family Hepatice. I hope,
however, to extend my observations to a greater number of species
and to publish figures which are necessary for the completion of such
descriptions as those which I have just given.

The technical processes which I have employed in my observa-
tions are those which are ordinarily adopted in the investigation of
the nucleus. ‘To obtain good results, however, I have been obliged

Miscellaneous. 457

not to make use of materials hardened in alcohol; under such con-
ditions, in fact, it becomes diffieult to distinguish the protoplasm
from the nucleus. In certain cases, at any rate, I think I may
ascribe the mistakes of some authors to the use of materials
hardened in alcohol. Treatment with hypochlorite of soda in very
dilute solution has furnished good results.

To sum up: the antherozoids of the Hepatice are formed at the
same time by the nucleus and the protoplasm of the mother-cell.
The body of the antherozoid, therefore, not corresponding solely to
the nucleus of the mother-cell, but to the nucleus and protoplasm
together, there is not only a change of form of the elements of the
cell, but there is at the same time a change of properties and of
structure. The body of the antherozoid, which is more refractive
and more homogeneous than the protoplasm or the nucleus, is also
more difficult to stain with reagents, especially at the commence-
ment of its formation. A complete transformation of the elements
of the cell has taken place; we may therefore say that in becoming
converted into an antherozoid the mother-cell has undergone a total
renoyation.— Comptes Rendus, March 19, 1888, p. 876.

On the Gemmules of some Marine Siliceous Sponges.
By M. E. Topsenr.

As in the Spongille, multiplication by means of gemmules is
observed in adddition to sexual reproduction in many siliceous
sponges common on the shores of the Channel and belonging to
different families, such as Chalina oculata, C. gracilenta, Cliona
vastifica, and Suberites ficus.

The asexual germs which originate in the deeper parts of these
various sponges consist essentially (1) of rather large elements,
darkened by a great accumulation in their protoplasm of large shining
granules, which conceal the cell-nucleus; and (2) of a keratode
envelope. In none of the marine species here in question do the
gemmules attain the same degree of complication as those of the
Spongille ; their envelope is not pierced by a foramen, and the
spicules with which it is often armed are not special ones.

The gemmules of Chalina oculata are, however, still rather com-
plex. They are developed in small numbers (not more than thirty)
in the lower region of the hard and apparently lifeless peduncle of
this branching sponge. Attached to the yellowish fibres of the
skeleton they appear as ovoid bodies of a milk-white colour, three
or four times the size of the gemmules of Spongilla fluviatilis for
example. Their keratodic envelope is supported throughout its
whole extent by acerate spicules arranged parallel to each other ;
further, some horny fibrils, also containing spicules, intercross in
the middle of the internal cellular mass.

Bowerbank, without knowing it, had discovered these gemmules
in a very short piece of peduncle which he took for a new sponge
(Shetland Islands) and named Diplodemia vesicula. From the
description of this species and its ovaries, O. Schmidt in 1870
thought he recognized a fragment or a young form of a Chalinean,
Now it seems no longer doubtful that the unique Diplodemia is the
broken foot of a Chalina oculata.

458 Miscellaneous.

Chalina gracilenta spreads over stones and shells, and its gem-
mules, always in considerable number, become organized directly
against its support; they are rounded, whitish, and generally
measure hardly more than 0-25 millim. in diameter; they are found
disseminated or pressed against each other, and in the latter case
the envelope of each of them remains independent of that of its
neighbours ; here again the capsule is armed with spicules, but no
skeletal production traverses the cavity of the corpuscle, its small
dimensions rendering quite unnecessary the formation of an internal
framework.

It is also in contact with the support, that is to say adherent to
the walls of the perforated galleries, that the gemmules of Cliona
vastifica are developed. They vary much in form and dimensions,
but they are distinguished at the first glance by the bright red
colour of their cells. They have only an incomplete envelope to
separate them from the mass of the sponge ; the calcareous substance,
riddled with little pits, upon which they are moulded, protects them
on the other side. ‘he capsule contains no spicules in its substance,
but in general it is lined with a layer of these organites arranged
tangentially to the mass and parallel to each other ; generally also
a few spicules are found scattered in the interior cellular mass.
The three kinds of spicules of the sponge may be combined in these
various positions, or one of them may occur to the exclusion of the
others. More rarely the gemmules are absolutely devoid of spicules.

Lastly, what Carter called ‘‘ the ovigerous layer of Suberites do-
muncula” is by the last evidence a layer of true gemmules. We
know the part contributed by the English author to the knowledge of
the gemmules of the Spongille, and yet in his note (Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist. 1883, xii. p. 80) he has not made the least allusion to these
asexual germs.

The gemmules of Suberites domuncula (of the Mediterranean) and
those of its near relative, S. ficus (of the Channel), have the same
structure and occupy the same position. ‘They are reduced to the
essential elements, a capsule and cells. Always in juxtaposition,
they cover with a continuous layer the shell or stone to which the
sponge is attached.

Carter very well describes these reproductive bodies ; but having
observed that their capsule became thinner in contact with the sup-
port, he regarded them as ova incapable of development until such
time as, this support being destroyed, it becomes possible for the
embryo to make a passage through the thin portion of the envelope.
It is true that from what he says he had observed our Suberites ficus
only on 6th January, 1870, and 4th September, 1877, at periods
when the gemmules in repose appeared to him like ova all in the
same stage of development ; now these germs are formed at the end
of summer and emit their contents in the spring by rupture of their
capsule ; and if Carter had had the opportunity of examining Sub-
erites in May and June, he would have seen the capsules in position,
but empty, and ruptured on their convex side.

At present Cliona vastifica is the only known sponge of which
the gemmules do not all arrive at maturity in the spring; they may
be found all the year round in its lobes, even at the time when sexual
reproduction takes place.—Comptes Rendus, April 30, 1888, p. 1298.

459

INDEX tro VOL I.

AcRm@mA, new species of, 210.

— Andromacha, life-history of,
359,

Asthalodes, characters of the new
genus, 270.

Aheetulla, new species of, 325.

Amblyurus, on the genus, 356,

Anarthropora, new species of, 76.

Antherozoids of the Hepaticze, on the
formation of the, 455.

Anthops, characters of the new
genus, 156.

Apate, note on the sexes in the ge-
nus, 348.

Apaustus agraulia, life-history of,
360.

Apus, new species of, 164.

Archezopteris hibernica, on the fruc-
tification and affinities of, 412.

Aristobia, new species of, 276.

Artemia, new species of, 164.

Astacus, on a parasite of, 233,

Atella, new species of, 97.

Barentsia, new species of, 226.

Bather, F. A., on shell-growth in
Cephalopoda, 298, 376, 421,

Batrachia, new, 101, 187, 343; from
Santa Catharina, list of, 415.

Beddard, F. E., on the reproductive
organs of Phreoryctes, 389.

Bell, Prof. F. J., on a remarkable
Ophiurid from Brazil, 368.

Belonorhynchus, on the
354.

genus,

Belonostomus Anningiw, on the ge-
neric identity of, with Belono-
rhynchus, 354,

cinctus, on a mandible of,

381.
Beyrichia, new varieties of species of,
400.

Bipora, characters of the new ge-
nus, 15,

Blake, Prof. J. F., on shell-growth in
Cephalopoda, 376.

Blochmann, Dr. F., on the reproduc-
tion of Euglypha alveolata, 27.

Bonnier, J., on two new genera of
Epicarides, 234,

Boodon, new species of, 329.

Books, new:—Giard et Bonnier’s
‘Contributions 4 l’étude des Bo-
pyriens,’ 51; Potts’s ‘ Freshwater
Sponges, 53; Nicholson’s ‘ Man-
ual of Zoology,’ 55; Holder's
‘Living Lights,’ 57; Trimen’s
‘South-African Butterflies,’ 228 ;
‘Bergens Museum Aarsberetning,’
228; Cotes and Swinhoe’s ‘ Cata-
logue of the Moths of India,’ 310;
Bonnier’s ‘Catalogue des Crusta-
cés Malacostracés recueillis dans la
Baie de Concarneau,’ 311; ‘ Trans-
actions of the Cumberland and
Westmorland Association for the
Advancement of Literature and
Science,’ 380; Davis’s ‘ Textbook
of Biology,’ 453; ‘ Proceedings of

460

the Bristol Naturalists’ Society,’
454.

Bostrichids, remarks on the, 348.

Bot-larve in the Terrapin, on, 231.

Boulenger, G. A., on two new Cha-
meeleons from Madagascar, 22; on
Molge meridionalis, 24; on new
Reptiles and Batrachians from
Madagascar, 101; on the affinity
of the North-American lizard-
fauna, 107; on new Brazilian Ba-
trachia, 187; on new Reptiles and
Batrachians from New Guinea,
343; on the characters of the
Pelomedusidee and Chelydida,
346; list of Batrachians from
Santa Catharina, 415; on the
presence of ossa transversa in a
Chelonian, 452; on the “nursing ”-
habits of Dendrobates, 454.

Brock, J., on the so-called eyes of
Tridacna and the occurrence of
pseudochlorophyll - corpuscles in
the vascular system of the Lamel-
libranchiata, 455.

Butler, A. G., on three new Chalco-
siide, 47; on Lepidoptera from
North-west India, 132, 196; ona
new species of Teracolus, 417.

Cae-Gwyn cave, notes on the, 58.

Ceenophrada, characters of the new
genus, 350.

Calamelaps, new species of, 323.

Callulops, characters of the new ge-
nus, 345.

Carter, H. J., on two new genera
allied to Loftusia, 172; on the
opaque scarlet spherules found in
the chambers and canals of many
fossilized Foraminifera, 264.

Causus, new species of, 331.

Cephalopoda, on shell-growth in, 298,
376, 421.

Cetonia, new species of, 194.

Chameleon, new species of, 22, 103.

Charaxes, new species of, 210.

Chelonian, on ossa transversa in a,
452.

Chelydidz, on the characters of the,
346,

Chrysochroa, new species of, 264.

Cicada, new species of, 297.

Cicadetta, new species of, 375.

Cicadidee, new, 291, 370.

Clionz, on the supposed peripheral
processes of the, 68.

INDEX.

Cours, new, 190, 194, 260, 270,

350.

Coronella, new species of, 103.

Corynoporella, characters of the new
genus, 215.

eoeapenins new species of, 292,
371,

Cribrilina radiata, new variety of,
75.

Crocidura, new species of, 428.

Crossochilus, new species of, 431.

Crustacea, on the podophthalmous,
of the Bay of Marseilles, 66; on
two new Branchiopod, 164.

Cryptops postica, note on, 283.

Cryptotympana, new species of, 296,

Cynthia, new species of, 95.

Cyriocrates, new species of, 276.

Danais, new species of, 90, 210.

Day, F., on the Bib and Poor-Cod,
151; on Trachinus draco and T.
vipera, 351.

Dendrobates, on the “nursing ”-
habits of, 454.

Diadema, new species of, 98.

Dianeura, characters of the new
genus, 49,

Didelphys, new species of, 158.

Dihammus, new species of, 275.

Dinoderus substriatus, note on, 348.

Dinosauria, on the classification of
the, 61.

Diplcecium, characters of the new
genus, 73.

Distant, W. L., on new Cicadide,
291, 370.

Dobson, G. E., on two new Indian
Soricide, 427.

Doleschallia, new species of, 98.

Doratopteryx, new species of, 48.

Dromicus, new species of, 104.

Duncan, Prof. P. M., on the anatomy
of the Temnopleuride, 109; on
Glyphastreea sexradiata, 160,

Dundubia, new species of, 292.

Elapomorphus, new species of, 323.

Elapsoidea, new species of, 332.

Elotris, new species of, 430,

Eneemia caminza, life-history of,
561, :

Engystoma, new species of, 416.

Entomostraca, notes on the Palzo-
zoic bivalved, 395.

Epepeotes, new species of, 271.

Hpicarides, on two new genera of,
»)«

INDEX.

Escharoides, new species of, 82.

Euglypha alveolata, on the repro-
duction of, 27.

Kupemphix, new species of, 187.

Euplcea, new species of, 90.

Eutzeniopsis, characters of the new
genus, 277.

Kyes, on the so-called, of Tridacna,

. 435.

Fewkes, J. W., on the existence of
deep-sea Medusee, 247 ; on a new
Physophore, 317; on a new mode
of life among Medusze, 362.

Fishes, on the, of the Yangtsze-
Kiang, 429,

Fistulipora incrustans, on the struc-
ture of, 237.

Foraminifer, on a new, 311.

Foraminifera, on the opaque scarlet
spherules found in the chambers
and canals of many fossilized, 264.

Frog-tadpole, on the infection of a,
by Saprolegnia ferax, 162.

Fungi, on a new genus of, parasitic
in the kidney of the Molgulide,
386.

Gadus luscus and G. minutus, on,
151.

Gahan, C. J., on new Lamiide, 190 ;
on new Longicorn Coleoptera
270.

Ganoid, note on an early Mesozoic,
354,

Genyodonta, new species of, 261.

Geological Society, proceedings of
the, 58, 230, 381.

Giard, Prof. A., on two new genera
of Epicarides, 254; on parasitic
castration in the genera Paleemon
and Hippolyte, 314; on Nephro-
myces, a new genus of fungi para-
sitic in the kidney of the Molgu-
lide, 386.

Glyphastreea sexradiata, note on,
160; on the identity of the type
species of, with that of Septastreea,
D’Orbigny, 382.

Godman, F. D., on new Lepidoptera
from the Solomon Islands, 90,
209.

Goeana, new species of, 291.

poe pyrobola, life-history of,
361.

Gourret, P., on the podophthalmous
Crustacea of the Bay of Mar-
seilles, 66.

461

Ginther, Dr. A., on reptiles from
China, 165; onnew African snakes,
322; on the fishes of the Yangtsze-
Kiang, 429.

Haliotis, on an abnormal growth in
a species of, 419.

Halys, new species of, 171.

Hamadryas, new species of, 95.

Haplohammus, new species of, 274.

Haplothrix, characters of the new
genus, 278.

Hatschek, Dr. B., on the significance
of sexual reproduction, 163.

Heilprin, Prof. A., on the North-
American Lizard-fauna, 24.

Hepaticze, on the formation of the
antherozoids of the, 455.

Heteroclytomorpha, new species of,
192.

Heteromeyenia,
313.

Hexarthrius, new species of, 260.

Hincks, Rey. T., on the Polyzoa of
the St. Lawrence, 214.

Hinde, Dr. G. J., on the genus Sep-
tastreea, D’Orbigny, and the iden-
tity of its type species with that of
Glyphastrza, Duncan, 382.

Hippolyte, on parasitic castration in,
514.

new species of,

Homaloptera, new species of, 435.

Homoptera, on new oriental, 291.

Hornera, new species of, 85.

Huechys, new species of, 291.

Hughes, Prof. T. M‘K., on the Cae-
Gwyn cave, 58.

Hydraspis Hilairii, on the presence
of transverse bones in the skull of,
452,

Hyla, new species of, 188, 417.

Hypsa nesophora, life-history of,
360. }

Idmonea, new species of, 83.

Tguanodon, new species of, 58.

Imhof, Dr. O. E., on a new Cheto-
pod, 232.

Janson, O. E., on new Cetoniide,
194,

Jones, Prof. T. R., on the Paleozoic
bivalved Entomostraca, 395.

Keller, Dr. C., on the formation of
vegetable mould by the action of
certain animals, 68.

Kidston, R., on the fructification and
affinities of Archeopteris hiber-
nica, 412.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 32

462

Kirkpatrick, R., on the Polyzoa of
Mauritius, 72.

Kloedenia, new species of, 398.

Kunstler, J., on a new Foraminifer,
311.

Lake-fauna, on the pelagic, of Au-
verene, 63.

Lamellibranchiata, on the occurrence
of pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles in
the vascular system of the, 455.

Langaha, new species of, 105.

Leidy, Prof., on bot-larvee in the
terrapin, 251.

Lepas, on the first changes in the
fecundated ovum of, 160,

Lepidoptera from North-west India,
on, 182, 196; life-histories of nine
Australian, 357 ; new, 47, 90, 207,
209, 417.

Lepralia, new species of, 78.

Leptodactylus, new species of, 187.

Leptopsaltria, new species of, 370.

Leuronotus, characters of the new
genus, 190.

Libythea, new species of, 211.

Lizard-fauna, on the affinity of the
North-American, 24, 107.

Loftusia, on the affinities of the
genus, 11; on two new genera
allied to, 172.

Lophopus, note on the genus, 61,

Lendenfeldi, note on, 159.

Lydekker, R., on a new Iguanodont
and other Dinosaurs, 58; on the
nomenclature of three genera of
fossil Mammalia, 584.

Lygosoma, new species of, 343.

Macronota, new species of, 262.

Mammalia, new, 155, 158, 427; on
the nomenclature of three genera
of fossil, 584.

Mantella, new species of, 106.

Mason, G, E., on a new earth-snake,
184.

Medusze, on the existence of deep-
sea, 247; on a new mode of life
among, 362.

Megalania, on the extinct Reptilian
genus, 85.

Meiolania, on the extinct Reptilian
genus, 85.

Membranipora, new species of, 74.

Membraniporella, new species of, 216.

Messaras, new species of, 97.

Metzeria furcata, on the antherozoids
of, 456.

INDEX.

Micoureus, new species of, 158.

Microcyphus zigzag, on the ambu-
lacra of, 113.

Millarella, characters of the new
genus, 178.

Mills, H., on a new freshwater

_ sponge, 313.

Misgurnus, new species of, 434.

Molge meridionalis, notes on, 24.

Molgulidee, on a new genus of fungi

parasitic in the kidney of the,

386.

Monohammus, new species of, 273.

Mould, on the formation of vegetable,

by certain animals, 68.

Mucronella, new species of, 81.

Mus, new species of, 157.

Myliobatis, on the fossil teeth of,
with revision of the English
Kocene species, 36; new species
of, 45.

Mynes, new species of, 99, 211.

Nemachilus, new species of, 434,

Neopercis, new species of, 62.

Nephromyces, characters of the new
genus, 386.

Neptis, new species of, 98.

Nicholson, Dr. H. A., on the struc-
ture and affinities of the genus
Parkeria, 1.

Nussbaum, Prof. M., on the first
changes in the fecundated ovum of
Lepas, 160.

Olliff, A.S., on the life-histories of
nine Australian Lepidoptera, 357.

Ophionephthys, new species of, 368:

Ophiurid, on a remarkable, from
Brazil, 568.

Orsidis, new species of, 191,

Ostracoda, on some Silurian, 395,

eae on parasitic castration in,
314,

Palegyge, characters of the new
genus, 254.

Papilio, life-history of three species
of, 357 ; new species of, 99, 211.
Parkeria, on the structure and affini-

ties of the genus, 1, 182.

Pelagic fauna of some lakes in Au-
vergne, 63.

Pelargoderus, new species of, 272.

Pelomedusidz, on the characters of
the, 346.

Peramys, new species of, 158.

Perrier, E., on starfishes from Cape
Horn, 384.

INDEX.

Pharsalia, new species of, 279.

Philobota bimaculana, life-history
of, 360.

Phreoryctes, on the reproductive
organs of, 389; new species of,
394,

Phylactella, new species of, 79.

Physophore, on a new, 317.

Platypelis, new species of, 106.

Pleeophysa, characters of the new
genus, 318,

Pocock, R. I., on the genus Theatops,
283; on Scolopendra valida and
allied species, 335.

Polyzoa, on Australian, 13; of Mau-
ritius, 72; of the St. Lawrence,
214.

Pomponia, new species of, 295, 371.

Porella, new species of, 221, 225.

Primitia, new species of, 405.

Probopyrus, characters of the new
genus, 254,

Psammophis, new species of, 327.

Pseudogobio, new species of, 432.

Psorospermium Heeckelii, notes on,
233.

Pteralopex, characters of the new
genus, 155,

Pteropus, new species of, 156,

Pyrgus, new species of, 207.

Rana, new species of, 345.

Reproduction, on the significance of
sexual, 163.

Reptiles, new, 22, 101, 184, 322,
343; on a collection of, from
China, 165.

Retepora, new species of, 82.

Rhacophorus, new species of, 105.

Rhinocalamus, characters of the
new genus, 322,

Rhinogobio, new species of, 432.

Rhinoptera, on an abnormal speci-
men of the dentition of, 281.

Richard, J., on the pelagic fauna of
some lakes in Auvergne, 63.

Ridley, S. O., on Lophopus Len-
denfeldi, 159.

Rosenbergia, new species of, 280.

Sablon, L. d., on the formation of
the antherozoids of the Hepatice,
455.

Salvin, O., on new Lepidoptera, 90,
209.

Saprolegnia ferax, on the infection
of a frog-tadpole by, 162.

Scelotes, new species of, 102.

463

Schizoporella, new species of, 76.

Schnetzler, Prof. J. B., on the infec-
tion of a frog-tadpole by Sapro-
legnia ferax, 162,

Scolopendra valida, description of,
325,

Scrupocellaria, new species of, 75.

Seeley, Prof. H. G., on Thecospon-
dylus Daviesi, and on the classiti-
cation of the Dinosauria, 61.

Septastreea, on the genus, and on the
identity of its type species with
that of Glyphastreea, 382.

Shell-growth in Cephalopoda, re-
marks on, 298, 576, 421.

Silybura, new species of, 184.

Simocephalus, new species of, 528.

Simotes, new species of, 169.

Siphonops, new species of, 189.

Smith, E, A., onan abnormal growth
in a species of Haliotis, 419.

Smittia, new species of, 79.

Snakes, new, 322.

Soricidee, on two new Indian, 427.

Sormida, substitution of the generic
name, for Heteroclytomorpha, 193.

Sponge, on a new freshwater, 315.

Sponges, on the gemmules of some
marine siliceous, 457.

Spongille, on the survival of, after
the development of swarm-laryze,
340,

Spongodes, new species of, 69.

Squatina, new species of, 381.

Starfishes, on a collection of, from
the region of Cape Horn, 584.

Stephanopora, characters of the new
genus, 75.

Stoliczkiella, characters of the new
genus, 173,

Studer, Dr. Th., on new species of
Spongodes, 69,

Syringosphera, note on the genus,
Ae

Tachydromus, on the species of, 166.

Temnopleuridz, on the anatomy ot
the, 109.

Teracolus, new species of, 417.

Terrapin, on bot-larvee in the, 231.

Theatops, on the genus, 283.

Thecospondylus Daviesi, notes on,

Thomas, O., on new mammals from
the Solomon Islands, 155; on four
new species of Didelphys, 158.

Tibicen, new species of, 575.

464

Topsent, E., on the supposed peri-
pheral processes of the Clione,
68; on the gemmules of some
marine siliceous sponges, 457.

Trachinus draco and T. vipera, note
on, 35].

Tridacna, on the so-called eyes of,
and the occurrence of pseudochlo-
rophyll-corpuscles in the vascular
system of, 455.

Trigonoptera, new species of, 193.

Trilobites, on, from the Penrhyn
Quarry, 60.

Typhlops, new species of, 344.

Uriechis, new species of, 325.

Uroplates, new species of, 101.

Vaillant, L., on a new species of
Neopercis, 62.

Vetrovermis, characters of the new
genus, 232.

Walter, Dr. A., on two new Bran-
chiopod Crustacea, 164.

Waterhouse, C. O., on new Coleo-
ptera, 260; observations on the
Bostrichidee, 348.

INDEX.

Weltner, M.,on the survival of Spon-
gille after the development of
swarm-larvee, 340,

Whitelegge, T., on Australian Poly-
zoa, 13; on the genus Lophopus,
62.

Woodward, A.S8., on the fossil teeth
of Myliobatis, with revision of the
English Eocene species, 36; on
the extinct Reptilian genera Me-
galania and Meiolania, 85; on an
abnormal specimen of the denti-
tion of Rhinoptera, 281; note on
the genera Belonorhynchus and
Amblyurus, 354; on Squatina
Cranei and a mandible of Belono-
stomus cinctus, 381.

Woodward, Dr. H., on_ trilobites
from the Penrhyn Quarry, 60.

Young, J., on the structure of Fistu-
lipora incrustans, 237.

Zacharias, Dr. O., on Psorospermium
Heeckelii, 285.

END OF THE FIRST VOLUME.

PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS,

RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

Vol IPL

y. Nat. Hist. $6

Ani.& Me

|
|
i

Ane

3
8
&
§
z
2

Mintern Bros. del et lith.

DENTITION OF EOCENE SPECIES OF MYLIOBATIS

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. 5.6. Vol. 1. Pll.

3. CHAMALEO?

Tit

BOETTGERI.

Mintern Bros. del.et lith

1,2. CHAMA LEON

Anin.é Mag Nat ists. 6 Vel Lt Pais

snc OAS?
o) TT

ie
7
RARER

ig ® as"

rex

H.A.Nicholson. del

ih ree
Lis nes ‘

Mintern Bros . lith,

Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. $.6.Vol.1. PU.V.

Mintern Bros. del.el lith.
Bye 1 eet pee
I . Uroplates fantasticus. 2. Chameeleon gastrolenia. 3. Coronella torquati.

4.0. mucrops. 5. Dromicus baron. 6. Langaha intermedia,

4
N
& ‘
re
' 2
F]
a
=

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. §.6 Vol. 1 al. VI.

del. et lith.

Bros

Mintern

Healt latypelis poll

I, Rhacophorus alblabris.

warts.

. Mantella baron -

I)
“

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. S. 6. Vol.f. PU. VIL.

Mintern Bros. del.et hth.

Aniv.& Mag. Nat. Mist. S. 6. Vol. 1. PU. VIL.

Mintern Bros. del.et lith.

st.S. 6. Vob.1. Pu. IX.

Ann.& Mag. Nat. lh

Mintern Bros. del et. lith

Ann.& Mag. Nat. fist. §. 6. Vol. 1. PLX.

Mintern Bros, del.et lith.

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. 5.6. Vol. 1. Pu. XI.

9% @ te oe
| ye 4 }

i
}

{

or
y

Mintern Bros. imp.

A.S.Foord del. et lith

‘,

. cof +
.
i
a
fs # = > i
é &
5 ri Peel gc ioe \
J : - { z
ra ‘ z
7 ars é é
‘ ~~ * Aye
a i
ree 4 3
= .
: '

R.Mintern del. et hth

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. $. 6. Vol.I. Pl. XI.

Mintern Bros. imp.

Halys acutus.

5 , “ ’
" t
J G
Pew
1 Wen te “
“i
Pee, Sa

Ann & Mag. Nat. Most. $8.6. VoalT PUXM

Mintern Bros se,

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. §. 6. Vol. I. PU. XIV.

Wake rcice aed Mintern Bros. lth.
. u 5 s

. Vol. I. PL. XV

7. Nat.Hist. 8.
OMe

& Mac

Ann

a aE ENT

Mintern Bros. lth.

T.Hincks del.

Annv& Mag. Nat. Hist.S.6. Vol 1. PUXVI.

Mintern Bros. lth.

Ann& Mag. Nat. Hist. 8. 6. Vol. 1. PUXVIL.

i PS ee

J.W.F del.

Mintern Bros. lith.

Anin.& Mag. Nat Hist. 5. 6. Vol. I. PL. XVII.

Mintern Bros. Jith

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist, 8.6. Volt. PU. XIX.

Mintern Bros, ith.

Anan.& Mag. Nab, Hist.S.6.Vob.1.PLXL.

(
6b

Mintern Bros. lith.

C.W. & A.S.0.del.

Ann &Mog.Not.HistS6.Vol.LPUXXI

EC.Knight hth West, Newman &Co.imp.

Seandinavian Ostracoda.

Ann&Mag.Nat Hist S.6.Vol.1. PU. XXII.

7 15e

West, Newman&Co.imp

OW Knight hth

cilia
Pate Ark. bl,
ce Fic uh

Ann.& Mag. Not. Hist.S.6. Vol. PL XXL

ae Ay etrca

Mintern Br

= a eee

~ NVINOSHLINS S3!1YVYUdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITU)

w , = w = ; w

20 \ = Ps) iS 7

> Ye SN Ee > = >

ps) NS “SX ra Bs) = +59

= SOs a re i

m ‘ SS z= m z m

(a2) —_ (4p) = ; n
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31Yyy

(2) Zi «® n <= n %

= < = , < =

= = =

x 5 =< ~ & =

g = g ‘2 g

z = 2; = Zz

> —_— ,) eds

Zz = S a a P|

—NVINOSHLINS eld BRARIES _INSTITUI IC

é ul é é

=t we 4 ae -

fie [acd =.

oO “SS ae Oo mar Oo

=z ey) za =) Zz
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVUE

S ~ S —- 5 |

= = Ss a

=n > = r =

= 0 = = S

a - a =

z : O “2 yi Zz

| NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUEIT LIBRARIES

i 22) = : ” =

= = ass = <

z = aes Sj =

oO Se O : ae Qs

7) ny a ” ”

po ed O ¥ ae oO =

= = E z =

Ss > = > =

w” Zz 10 = ae ”

> SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS

7p) S ef S ve a

= ae = pf QL =

<5 : < : WE <

Pe 8 a

m = co = YQ co

= fe: (@) one fe) i = ;

acl z= ee = e o— !

| NVINOSHLINS S3JIYVHYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTI

eS z s A eo

Los) oo = co — hy, w

Fe) we Ss 0 = Gy 2

2 a = x = OF AGO?

=" we : eae

(ap) can z w S Ww

> SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVuRs

<2) Be ” z n

& Zit z ty < = ;

= & = Vyds Jy. =. =

z a 3 : fo Tz = =

ARIES SMITHSONIAN

NVINOSHLIWS

2 ee) ey eer,
eat z
NVINOSHLIWS S3IYVYgII
= Ss =
oy a eS
Pe) WY =
m0 Na E
tis < \
3 m WY 2
i ” =
F ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
ft =z = ‘
= 4
: 9
z ie
aS. > S
| “ 2 77) Paes
INLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS S3I1uYVvVYaIt
} > *, 4
af zs
= nice
S or
rs) at
z es
ie
w
Fo)
>
7
m
a)

INSTITUTION

SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS

Ss ay eet ie

NVINOSHLINS

NOILALILSNI

INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI

INSTITUTION

S31YVYUdIT LIBR

INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI

SMITHSONIAN

mars, 2 ~*~ KN Oo
Re fe) »~ Es
z ie ee
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN ID
ul. , eet
oO / aa
= 50
=)
= 1 > |
5. :
z o
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHIINS |S
| z a
z =
jE Oo aE
an) nw
ee oO
4 = zy
: = =
7) Z
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ If
Z
n
Spe
Actions |
e
a
(e)
=

INSTITUTION

SMITHSONIAN

ARIES

NVINOSHLINS S31YVYaIT LIBRARIES

SMITHSONIAN

NVINOSHLIWS S$

n S ” = ie nY

: a; B @ Ge 2»

Z = a 4 gN& z

< a <x a Wo

z 5 co Sc! G

a fe) 3 fe) Ot) Ce

z aa Zz ae

Li LILSNITNVINOSHLINS | S31¥VUd (TL BRAR LES SMES ON ite

aes > oO — (e) ey Toad

es = ‘Wy w

5D \ E 0 z Gy 2

= Se : 2 OL

= W's 2 Ek 2

ue 2 Z i

RAR | ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S$
x a

ITHSONIAN

NOSHLIWS

ITHSONIAN
INOSHLINS

RARIES

LIB

Lhe irae eee ay
eerie aye

TS a OF mami ae
WW penptiespaias cnet

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "The Annals and magazine of natural history; zoology, botany, and geology"

See other formats